An elementary grammar of the Greek language, containing a series of Greek and English exercises for translation, with the requisite vocabularies, and an appendix on the Homeric verse and dialect...

om)
ay Pe +, Pet

a pte ah ue
D ooh =

SROs tt :
‘ se 7 aig aivleae * toh 5M ia) ce ite an *
dH ha t 1Eu NY, shes ey NATAL ES A} 4% “Me eal 4)
SARTO NEY UO ee ’ re aha es
hay ATI tay ; ‘ MAG vet +e ‘ :) 34 al mats

Vs

SUK POe W EE HIE t 4 bY NG Arc) rts :
Vyt WOOSTER ee a Mee 4 it A eR i SRE

wi ak BRAN :

4 ‘
Mirkanionte
Ler huk lot

+t
An | ni ian
Pah ROEM

> ?
rh neh . oe + oe tthe
, ’

Saran

i
va th ils vie
“0 nite “ain

: J J
yea teh PT Bint HS

\ " Baga ts) meet yrs ere Yd Roh alas yout Vat

OCT

ay Whee deem a rN) Sey Miata
> f Mig igo Mais, otal
Cite otal Venstas pues
eH teae MM ALSTEED AS
ivs

ayy ae

ro : " 4 a4 -
BAP) et Oty Mt ty yeh 4y

AUBURN UNIVERSITY
LIBRARIES

Ne

, ow. =e

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2010 with funding from
Lyrasis Members and Sloan Foundation

https://archive.org/details/elementarygrammaOOkuhn

AN

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR

OF

THE GREEK LANGUAGE,

CONTAINING A SERIES OF

<>)

GREEK AND ENGLISH EXERCISES

»

FOR TRANSLATION,

WITH THE REQUISITE VOCABULARIES,

AND AN

APPENDIX

ON THE HOMERIC VERSE AND DIALECT.

e
BY

DR. RAPHAEL KUHNER,

CONRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOVER:
FROM THE GERMAN BY

SAMUEL H. TAYLOR,

PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER, MASS

THIRTEENTH EDITION.

NEW YORK:
IVi3ON & PHINNEY, 321 BROADWAY.
CHICAGO: S. OC. GRIGGS & CO., 111 LAKE ST.

BUFFALO . PHINNEY & CO. CINCINNATI: MOORE, WILSTAOH, KEYS & CO.
PHILADELPHIA ; SOWER & BARNES. NEWBURG: T.S. QUACKENBUSH.
SCHENECTADY : G. Y. VAN DEBOGERT, W. F. LOLLES.

AUBURN : SEYMOUR & ALWARD.

1857.

Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by
ALLEN, MORRILL AND WARDWELL,
in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of Massachusetés.

Me ro PREFACE.

RAPHAEL KUHNER, the author of the following Grammar, was
born at Gotha, in 1802. Among his early classical teachers were
Doring, Rost, and Wistemann. At the University of Gottingen,
he enjoyed the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen, and Oitfried
Miiller, men of great distinction in classical philology. For more
than twenty years, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum at Hano-
ver, one of the principal German gymnasia, and has consequently
had the most favorable opportunities, as a practical teacher, to un-
derstand the wants of students and to be able to meet them.

In addition to several other important works, Dr. Kihner has
published three Greek Grammars :

1. A Copious Greek Grammar, containing 1150 octavo pages,
which has been translated by W. E. Jelf, M. A., of the
University of Oxford.

2. A School Greek Grammar, which has been translated and
published in this country.

3. An Elementary Greek Grammar, the original of the present
work, from the second edition of which a very faithful trans-
lation was made by John H. Millard, St. John’s College,
Cambridge, the Greek and English exercises and the accom-
panying Vocabularies, however, having been omitted.

The grammatical principles of the present work, so far as they
extend, are the same as those contained in the Larger Grammar
already published in this country, the latter being designed to carry
forward the student in the same course which he had commenced in
the former. The work enjoys the highest reputation among classi-
cal scholars both in Europe and America. It is based on a thor-

iv PREFACE.
i
ough acquaintance with the laws and usages of the language. ‘The

author has evidently studied the genius of the Greek, and has thus
prepared himself to exhibit its forms and changes, and general phe-
nomena, in an easy and natural manner. His rules and statements
are comprehensive, embracing under one general principle a variety
of details. The analysis of the forms can hardly be improved. The
prefixes and suffixes, the strengthening and euphonic letters, are
readily distinguished from the root of the word. ‘The explanation
of the Verb in particular, is so clear and satisfactory, that, after a
little practice, the student can take the root of any verb, and put it
into any given form, or take any given form and resolve it into its
elements. The rules of Syntax, too, are illustrated by so full a col-
lection of examples, that the attentive student cannot fail to under-
stand their application.

The work is designed to be sufficiently simple for beginners, and —
also to embrace all the more general principles of the language.
The plan is admirably adapted to carry the student forward under-
standingly, step by step, in the acquisition of grammatical knowl-
edge. As soon as the letters and a few introductory principles, to-
gether with one or two forms of the verb, have been learned (the
sections marked with a [{] being omitted), the student begins to
translate the simple Greek sentences into English, and the English
into Greek. As he advances to new forms or grammatical princi-
ples, he finds exercises appropriate to them, so that whatever he
commits, whether forms or rules, is put in immediate practice. The
advantage of this mode of study is evident. The practical applica-
tion of what is learned is at once understood; the knowledge ac-
quired is made definite; the forms and rules are permanently fixed
in the mind, and there is a facility in the use of them whenever
they may be needed. The student, who attempts to commit any
considerable portion of the Grammar without illustrative examples,
finds it difficult to retain in his memory what he has learned. There
is a confusion and indistinctness about it. One form often runs into
another, and one rule is confounded with another. But if each suc-
cessive principle is carefully studied, and then immediately put in

PREFACE. Vv

practice, in translating the Greek and English exercises, and is af-
terwards frequently reviewed, there will, in the end, be an immense
saving of time, the student will be prepared to advance with plea-
sure from the less to the more difficult principles, and in the subse-
quent part of his course, he will experience no difficulty in regard
to grammatical forms and rules. One of the most serious hin-
drances to the rapid and profitable advancement in the Greek and
Latin Languages, is a want of an intimate acquaintance with their
elementary principles.

The plan of the author proposes that the vocabularies accompa-
nying the exercises, be committed to memory. In doing this, the
student should be made to understand the value of the ear, as well
as of the eye, the advantage to be derived from the former being
altogether too much neglected in the acquisition of a foreign lan-
guage. When the student first sees a new word, let him fix the
form distinctly in his mind, and associate with it its meaning, so
that the meaning may afterwards readily recall the word, or the
word the meaning. ‘Then, too, let him pronounce the word, and
associate its meaning with its sound, so that when the word is again
heard, the meaning may at once suggest itself. The child acquires
its knowledge of language almost wholly by the ear; and if the
student in his efforts to learn a new language, would imitate the
child in this respect, his progress would undoubtedly be much more
rapid. ‘This method would require that the words be often pro-
nounced, their definitions being at the same time carefully associa-
ted with them. This will in no way be so successfully accomplished
as by requiring the vocabularies to be committed to memory. If
the student knows that, when the Greek words are pronounced by
his teacher, he must give the definition, or that, when the definition
is given him, the corresponding Greek will be required, his atten
tion will be more carefully and perseveringly directed to the forms
and sounds of the words in his exercises; he will soon have at his
command an extensive vocabulary of the words in more common
use, and will save much time, which is so often lost in turning

again and again to the same word in the lexicon. Such a process,
A*

vi PREFACE.

too, will be of great service in cultivating the habit of fixed and
close attention. In addition to the exercises contained in the
book, it will awaken new interest in the class, if the teacher give
exercises of his own, either in Greek or English, and require these
‘to be translated at once by the members of the class. It will be
profitable, also, for any one of the class to propose exercises for the
others to translate. On this subject generally, however, the expe-
rienced teacher will be able to point out the best course to his pupils.

In preparing the present work, it has been the aim of the trans-
lator to adapt it to the wants of students in this country. He has
occasionally, therefore, made slight changes in the original, where it
seemed desirable. Occasionally, too, he has given explanations of
his own in the body of the book, where he supposed the wants of
the younger pupils might require them. But all the principles of
the Grammar and nearly all the arrangement are retained as they
were given by the author. The translator has endeavored to make
such a book as the author himself would have done, under similar
circumstances.

The English exercises in the Etymological Part of the Grammar,
were taken from the Greek Delectus of the late Dr. Alexander Al-
len, London, as they had been translated by him from the Elemen-
tary Grammar of Kihner. The exercises in the Syntax were trans-
lated by Mr. John N. Putnam, of the Theological Seminary, An-
dover. 3
In conclusion, the translator would acknowledge his special obli-
gations to Mr. R. D. C. Robbins, Librarian, Theological Seminary,
Andover, and to Mr. A. J. Phipps, Instructor in Phillips Academy,
for the highly valuable assistance they have rendered in correcting
the proofs.

ANDOVER, May 1, 1846.

. Alphabet . ; :
. Pronunciation of particular Let-

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

ETYMOLOGY.

CHAP. I—Tue LETTERS AND THEIR SOUNDS.

ters 2

- Division of dis: awoke gh

thongs . , : 2

. Division of the Consonants s

Page 1|§ 5. Breathings

Page 4

6. Marks of Crasisand Elision 5

7.

8.

Movable Consonants at the end
of a word . 2 f 5
Change of Consonants in Inflec-
tion and Derivation * 6

CHAP. IIl.— Sy.iaewes.

. Quantity of Syllables : 9| 18. Atonics or Proclitics 12
10. Accentuation . 9| 14. Enclitics o 28S
11. Change and Removal of the Ac-| 15. Inclination of the pee 13

cent by Inflection and Con-| 16. Enclitics accented 14

traction : - 10] 17. Division of Syllables 14
12, Change and Becgoxa of the Ac-| 18. Punctuation-marks 15

cent in connected Discourse 12

CHAP. Il.—19. Some Genera VIEWS OF THE VERB, Page 15.
CHAP. IV.—SuBstTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE.

20. Nature and Division of the Sub-| 28. Second Declension 25

stantive 17| 29. Contraction of the second De-
21. Gender of Substantives 17 clension 28
22. Number, Case and Declension 18| 30. Attic second Declension 30
23. Nature and Gender of the Adjec-| 31. Third Declension <tanee

tive 19| 32. Remarks on the Case-endings of
24. General View of the Preposi- the third Declension 32

tions 19| 33. Gender, Quantity and Accentua-
25. First ates 20 tion of the third Declension 33

. Endings of the first Rigalanik 20
. Feminine Nouns of the first De-

clension 20

. Masculine Nouns of as first De-

clension 24

A. WorDS WHICH IN THE GENITIVE
HAVE A CONSONANT BEFORE THE
ENDING -0¢, i. e. WORDS WHOSE
STEM ENDS IN A CONSONANT.

viit TABLE OF CONTENTS.
§34. IL. The Nominative exhibits the |§ 42. Il. Words in -n¢, -e¢ 45
pure Stem 84| 43. Words in -we (Gen. -woc¢), and in
35. II. The Nominative lengthens the -wc and -w (Gen. -o0c) A6
short final vowel of the Stem 35| 44. Words in -a¢ (Gen. -aoc), and in
36. Syncopated nouns, e. g. TaT%7p, -o¢ (Gen. -e0¢) ee 4
etc. E 37| 45. ILL. Words in -¢, -v¢ - 49
37. The Nominative appends o to| 46. Words in -ic, -Z, -v¢, -v 49
the Stem 38| 47. Irregular Nouns of the third De-
38. The Stem ends in a Tau-mute 39 clension ; «(con
39. Neuters ending in randxr 40) 48. Irregular Adjectives 52
40. The Stem ends in v or vT 42| 49. Comparison of Adjectives 54
B. Worps wHIcH IN THE Genitive| 5- A. First form of Comparison 54
HAVE A VOWEL BEFORE THE END-| 51: B. Second form of Comparison 58
ING -0¢ ; 43| 52. Anomalous forms of Compari-
41. I. Substantives in -evc, -aic, son 53
-0v¢ 43
CHAP. V.—ADVERB.
53. Nature, Division and Formation| 54. Comparison of Adverbs 61
of the Adverb 60
CHAP. VI—Pronown.
55. Nature and Division of Pro-| 60. Demonstrative Pronouns . 66
nouns 62| 61. Relative Pronouns 66
56. Personal Pronouns 62} 62. Indefinite and Interrogative Pro-
57. Reflexive Pronouns . 63 nouns 67
58. Reciprocal Pronoun 64, 63. Correlative Pronouns | 68
59. Possessive Pronouns 65| 64 69

. Lengthening of Pronouns

&
~

CHAP.. VIIL—NuMERALS.

. Declension of the first four Nu-

65. Nature and Division of the Nu-| 68

merals 69 merals : 72
66. Numeral Signs 70| 69. Numeral Adverbs - 0
67. Summary of the Cardinals and

Ordinals 70

CHAP. VIIl—Tue Vers.

70. Nature of the Verb 73| 76. Conjugation of the Verb 75
71. Classes of Verbs 73| 77. Stem, Augment and Reduplica-
72. Tenses 74 tion—Verb-characteristic 75
73. Modes ‘ 74| 78. Inflection-endings 76
74, Participials—Infinitive and Par-| 79. (a) Tense-characteristic and

ticiple 75 Tense-endings “ge
75. Numbers and Persons of the| 79. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-

Verb 75 vowels 77

§ 80.
81

82
83.

84.
85.

85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
i

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98

=

100.

101.

102.

103.

104.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Remarks on the Personal-endings
and Mode-vowels 77
Conjugation of the regular Verb
in -0 79
Remarks on the Bisadigin 84

Remarks on the Formation of the

Attic Future 84
Accentuation of the Vash 85
More particular view of the Aug-

ment and Reduplication 91
Syllabic Augment 91
Temporal Augment 92
Remarks on the Augment 92
Reduplication 93
Attic Reduplication 94

Augment and Reduplication in
Compound Words 95
Remarks on gees and Redu-
plication 96
Division of Verbs in -w ee
to the Characteristic, together
with Remarks on the Forma-
tion of the Tenses 96
Formation of the Tenses of Pure
Verbs . “ i vee 7 |
Verbs which retain the short
Characteristic Vowel in Form-
ing the Tenses
Formation of the Aor. and Fut.
Pass. and Perf. and Plup. Mid.
or Pass. with o oe. eae
Contract Pure Verbs 100
Remarks on the Conjugation of
Contract Verbs 104

Contract Verbs which retain the
short Characteristic-vowel in
Forming the Tenses 110

Paradigms of the above 110

Impure Verbs 114

Strengthening of the Stern: 114

Change or Variation of the
Stem-vowel 7 - 1
Remarks on the Secondary
Tenses 116
A. Mute VERBS
Introduction to Mute Verbs 117

98 |

§ 105.

106.

ix

Remarks on the Characteristic
117

Formation of the Tenses of
Mute Verbs 118

PARADIGMS OF MutTE VERBS.

107.

107.
108.

109.

110.

TE:
112.
113.

113.
114.
115.
116.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

121.

. Verbs whose

Verbs whose Characteristic is a
Pi-mute 119
Pure Characteristic 2, z,¢@ 119
Impure Characteristic, 77 in
Pres. and Impf. 120
Verbs whose Characteristic is a
Kappa-mute 121
Verbs whose Characteristic is a

Tau-mute 121
B. Liquip VERBS.
Formation of the Tenses 124

Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 126
Shorter Paradigms arranged ac-
cording to the Stem-vowel of

the Future . 128
With ain the Future . 128
With ¢ in the Future 129

With candid in the Future 129
Special Peculiarities in the For-
mation of Single Verbs, both
Pure and Impure 132
Syncope and Metathesis 134
Verbs in -w with the Stem of
the Pres. strengthened 134
Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting v before the
ending - . 134
Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting ve before
the ending 135
Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting dy, more
rarely atv, before the end-
ing 137
(a) Gy or ay is seed iba
any change 137
(b) a is inserted before the
Tense-ending dnd v is inser-

ted before the Characteristic-
consonant of the Pure Stem

137

$122. Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and

Impf. by annexing the two
Consonants ox or the syllable

lok : - ° - 139

123. Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and

Impf. by prefixing the Redu-
plication . a TA

124. Verbs to whose ire Stem ¢ is
added in the Pres. and Impf.

142

125. Verbs whose Stem is Pure in
the Pres. and Impf., but which

in other Tenses assume a Stem

with the Characteristic e 143

§131. First Class of Verbs in -s

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

FORMATION OF THE TENSES.

151
132. Second Class of Verbs in -t 153
133. Paradigms of Verbs in -ue 153
134. Remarks on the Paradigms 156

SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/l.

135. Verbs in -ws which annex the
Personal-endings to the Stem-

vowel . : " . 7863
135. Verbs in-a . : . 163
186. Verbsin-e . - 166
137. Hiui, to be, and eiut,togo 166

. Verbs in -yze which annex the
syllable vvd or vi to the Stem-
vowel and append to this the
Personal-endings . 169

. Verbs whose Stem ends in a
Vowel and assumes 170 +170

. Verbs whose Stem ends in a

126. Verbs whose Tenses are formed
from different Roots, and Consonant and assumes v0 171
which are classed together only | 141. Inflection of Keiwar and qua: 172
in respect to signification 146 142. Verbs in -w which follow the
analogy of Verbs in -m, in
‘VERBS IN -/. forming the second Aor. Act.
127. Conjugation of Verbs in -w 148 and Mid. . : 173
128. Division of Verbs in -j 148} 143. Oida, I know 175
129. Mode-vowels 149| 144. Deponents, and Active Verbs
130. Personal-endings 149 whose Fut. has a Mid.form 176

SYNTAX.
CHAP. I.—ELEMENTS OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE.

145. Nature of a Sentence—Subject.| 150. Remarks on the Classes of
—Predicate ‘ 179 Verbs . : ° - 193
146. Agreement . : - 180} 151. Tenses and Modes . 198
147. Exceptions to the General Rules| 152. More Particular View of the

of Agreement . - 182
147b. Agreement when there are seve-

ral Subjects ° . 184
148. The Article . ; - 185
149. Classes of Verbs 193

Tenses 198
153. More Particular View of the
Modes : ¢-*203
153. Remarks on the Modal Adverb
av é : : 205

CHAP. Il—154. ArtrisurTives, Page 207.

CHAP. II.—155. Ture Oxnsective Construction, Page 209.

TABLE OF CONTENTS. xi

CASES.
§ 156. Genitive ? ‘ ... 209
157. Local Relation. — Genitive of
Separation . 209
158. Causal Relation of the Genitive
210
158. Active Genitive : «ZAG
158. Genitive as the expression of
Cause 215
158. Genitive denoting certain Mu-
tual Relations 217
159. Accusative 220
159. Accusative of Effect 220
159. Accusative of the Object on
which the action is perform-
ed : 5 5 Sele 7!
160. Double Accusative 224
161. Dative 226
162. Prepositions 230

A. PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE.
163. Prepositions with the Gen. only,
avti, mpd, a6, éx, Evexa 231
164. Prepositions with the Dat. only,
év, civ 233
165. Prevositions with the Acc. only,
ava, eic, ac

§ 166.

235 |

Prepositions with the Gen. and
Acc., 14, kata, imép 235
Prepositions with the Gen., Dat.
and Acc., dudi, wept, éri, pe-
Td, Tapa, mpo¢, UO 237
Remarks on the Construction of
Verbal Adjectives in -réoe,
-Téa, -Téov, and on the Con-
struction of the Comparative

167.

168.

243

169. Remarks on the Use of Pro-
nouns 244

170. The Infinitive 248

ae
172.

Infinitive without the Article 249
Nom., Gen., Dat. and Acc. with
the Infinitive p - 249
Infinitive with the Article 251
The Participle i ah agp
The Participle as the Comple-
ment of the Verb 253
The Participle used to express
Adverbial Relations and Sub-
ordinate Explanatory Circum-
stances : : =. Dae
The Adverb 259

ws
173.
174.
175.

176.

177.

Syntax or Compounp SENTENCES.

CHAP. I—178. Coodrpination, Page 263.

CHAP. Il.—SusBorpInaTION.

179. Principal and Subordinate
Clause : 265
180. Substantive-Sentences 266

181. Final Substantive-Sentences in-

troduced by «ec, iva, ete. 268
Adjective-Sentences 270
Adverbial Sentences 275
Adyerbial Sentences of Place

and Time 275

182,
183.
183.

184. Causal Adverbial Sentences 278
185. Conditional Adverbial Senten-

ces 278
186. Adeatee Sicnlenees denoting

Consequence or Effect 281
187. Interrogative Sentences 283
188. Oblique or Indirect Discourse 285

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

APPENDIX.
Homeric Diarecr.
. Remarks on the Hexameter 287 THE VERB.
- Quantity - + + 289) § 905. Augment.—Reduplication 298
- Hiatus . - 290] 906. Personal-endings and Mode-
. The Homeric Dialect . 290 vowels : . . 29a
. Digamma . - 291] 907, Contraction and Resolution in
. Contraction. ‘Dina —Cra- Verbs . 300
sis——Synizesis.—Apocope 291 | 908, Formation of the oe 301
. Change of Consonants - 292| 909, Conjugation in -u . . 802
DECLENSIONS. 210. Hii, to be : : - 802
. Suffix di(v) , . 293] 211. Eiut, to go : ; - 803
. First Declension . . 293| VERBS IN -@ WHICH IN THE SECOND
. Second Declension . 294} Aor. Act. AnD Mip., In THE PERF.
. Third Declension . . 294} anp Priup. Act., AND PRES. AND
. Anomalous Words . 296| Impr., FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF
. Adjectives WES - 297| VERBS IN -jUt.
. Comparison . ; . 297] 212. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 303
. Pronouns ; . 297| 218. Perf. and Plup. Act. . 804

. Numerals : Z - 298] 214. Pres. and Impf. ; . 804

/

ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAMMAR.

ETYMOLOGY.

CHAPTER I.

2

THE LETTERS AND THEIR SOUNDS.
§1. Alphabet.

Tae Greek language has twenty-four letters, viz.

Form. SounD.
A a a
eB B b
L 7 g
A ) d
_£E é e short
Z C Z
AI Y e long
2) oe th
L t i
K % k
A d ]
M yb m
N v n
a é x
O fF) o short
IT be Pp
P Q r
= * oS 8
T t t
is v u
@ Q- ph
X % ch
me wp ps
2 © o long

NAME.

Alga
Bite
Poppe
Aédra
"E wikor
Zita
"Hera
Ore
Lara

Alpha
Béta
Gamma
Delta
Epsilon
Zéta
Eta
Théta
Jota
Kappa
Lambda
Mu
*Nu
Xi
Omicron
Pi
Rho
Sigma
Tau
Upsilon
Phi
Chi
Psi
Oméga.

2 PRONUNCIATION.—DIVISION OF VOWELS. [S§ 2, 3,

Remarx. Sigma (c) takes the form ¢ at the end of a word; e. g. cevopoc.
This small ¢ may be used also in the middle of compound words, when the
first part of the compound ends with Sigma; e. g. mpoggépa, Ougyevigg.

§2. Pronunciation* of particular Letters.

a has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same
syllable, e. g. yaA-xd¢; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single
consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is ¢ or 4, e. g. dva-
ordoewc, oTpaTtoT7n¢; also when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a syllable
not final, e. g.dy-a-0é, ka-T&; it has the sound of a in father, when it is followed
by a single p, if in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word, except when
the word is a monosyllable, in which case it has the sound of a in fate, e.g.
Bap-Ga-poc, yap, ayada, Ta.

y before y, x, y and & has the sound of ng in angle, e. g. GyyeAoc, ang-gelos,
*Ayxionc, Anchises, cvyx6rn, syncope, Aapuy§, larynx ; y before vowels always has
the hard sound, like g in get.

e has the sound of short e in me, when it is followed by a consonant in the
same syllable, e. g. wéy-ac, wet-&; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a
word, or a syllable followed by another vowel, or when it forms a syllable by it-
self, e. g. ye, 0é-w, mpoc-é-O KE.

n has the sound of e in me, e. g. uev7.

t has the sound of z in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, e. g. éAmi-o1, 671 ;
the sound of 7 in pin, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable,
e.g. mpiv, Kiv-dvvoc.

§ in the middle of a word has the sound of z, e.g. mpagi¢; at the beginning
of a word, the sound of ¢, e. g. gévoc. .

o has the sound of short o in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the
same syllable, e. g. Ady-o¢, xi-po¢; the sound of long o in go, when it ends a
word, or a syllable followed by another vowel, e. g. 76, 76, Go-6c.

o has the sharp sound of s in son; except it stands before , in the middle of
a word, or at the end of a word after 7 or w, where it has the sound of ¢ e. g.
OKNVH, VOULoUA, YI¢c, KaAac.

T followed by ¢ never has the sound of sh, as in Latin, e. ¢. TaAatia= Galatia,
not Galashia. .

'v has the sound of u in tulip, e. g. rix7.
x has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. Tayi.
_@ has the sound of long o in note, e. g. dyo.

§3. Division of the Vowels.—Diphthongs.

é and o are always short vowels; 7 and o always long; a, s and
v either long or short.

The short vowels are indicated by (~), the long by (7 * e. g.
a, @ ‘The mark (“) shows that the vowel may be either long or
short, e. g. a.

~~ * For rules on the division of syllables, see § 17.

§ 4.) DIPHTHONGS.~-DIVISION OF CONSONANTS. 8

The diphthongs are :
ot pronounced like az in aisle, e. g. aig

& “ “ ef © sleight, “ Sewwéc

ou “ “ of © ol, “ xoWwog

us “és “ whi “ whine, © vidg

av sé “ au “laud, © vere

sv and yu * “ eu “ feudal, “ snk EVO, vSov
~~ ovandav * “« ou ~ sound,* “ ovoauvos, wvtos;

also @, 4 and @, i.e. &, 4 and o with an Iota subscript. These
three diphthongs, which are called improper diphthongs, we pro-
nounce like «, 7 and w without an Lota subscript.

Rem. 1. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded these

diphthongs, and how they are represented in English; a is expressed by the
diphthong ae, ec by 7 and @, v by y, oz by oe, ov by u,e

@aidpoc, Phaedrus, Evpoc, Eurus, ES Thraces,
TAaixoc, Glaucus, Botwria, Boeotia, Opijcoa, Thressa,
NetAoc, Nilus, Moica, Musa, Tpaywdde, tragoedus.
Av«etov, Lycéum, EiAetSura, Tithyia,

Rem. 2. With the capital letters, the Iota subscript of ¢, y and » is placed in
a line with the vowel; e.g. Ac—a, Hi=y, Qu—o.

Rem. 3. When two vowels, which regularly form a diphthong, are to be pro-
nounced separately, it is indicated by two points called diaeresis, placed over the
second vowel (4, v); e.g. él, ol, av.

§4. Division of the Consonants.

1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the organs by
which they are formed, into :

Palatals, y x x
Linguals, 6 z FD vies
Labials, 6 z @ p.

Exercise for Reading. ye. yn. net. xt. yet—de. Sau. On. ta. Te.
tO. TH. TH. TOV. TaV. TH. Bt. Bet. ho. yaha. vv. vEKs VEL. VY. OW.
Oc. Ol. OEY. G&. COV. Gevw.— Pov. Bovy. Byta. Baddow. mt. mov.
720). MV. Pl. PEG. MEV. Huy. fv. py. [A0l.

2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater or less
influence of the organs of speech in their formation, into:

(a) Semi-vowels, viz. 4 y 9, which are called Liquids, and the

sibilant o;
(b) Mutes, viz. B yd ax x px. These nine mutes are divided:

* By some, however, pronounced like ou in group.

4 BREATHINGS. [§ 5

(a) According to the organ of speech, into three Palatals, three
Linguals and three Labials ;

(b) According to their names, into three Kappa-mutes, three Tau-
mutes, and three Pi-mutes ;

(c) According to the stress of articulation, into three smooth Mutes,
three medial Mutes, and three rough Mutes.

SMOOTH. MEDIAL. ROUGH.

Palatals Kappa-mutes
Linguals Tau-mutes

Labials Pi-mutes.

3. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the sibilant o, three
double consonants originate,—

w from zo Bo go
& from xo yo yo
¢ from do.

Exercise for Reading. haupda. houPoro. wv. pedog. para. vv.
PUUTES. VVOOW. OEVOIS. OINTH. ClYUK. GEV). HUAN. KKH. KOWOY.
yao. youv. yFuv.—tor. THY. TOW. TEenrw. ToavME. Sedta. SEworys.
tea. Fyta. FKva. PUVUKCLA.— TaVTA. MQWTH. MOLW. MavoueEr.
byra. Pawo, Baldo. Phamzousr. gevyo. poveva. qedouet. — We.
wave. walho. wadeno. weyy. &. Sevoc. EarSos. Eawo. Cyra.
Cyrnots.

§5. Breathings.

1. Every vowel is pronounced with a Breathing; this is either a
smooth or rough Breathing. The smooth is indicated by the mark
(’), the rough by (°). One of these marks is placed over every
vowel which begins a word; e. g. ov, iozogua. The rough breath-
ing corresponds to the English and Latin h. The smooth breathing
is connected with every vowel, which has not the rough.

2. In diphthongs, the mark of the breathing is placed over the
second vowel; e. g. vioc, evdve, avtixa.. But when the improper
diphthongs @, 4, @, are capital letters, the breathing is placed over
the first vowel; e. g. 4idy¢, pronounced like ¢édy¢, Hades.

3. The liquid @ is pronounced with the rough breathing, and
hence has the mark of the breathing at the beginning of the word;
e. g. ga@Pdos. When two o’s occur in the middle of a word, the first

§§ 6,7.] CRASIS AND ELISION.—MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 5

is pronounced with the smooth breathing, the last with the rough.
The first has the mark of the smooth, the last that of the rough
e. g. [Tvggos.

Exercise for Reading. ada. .avgarw. aidyo. vipa. snov. éxo.
EIT. EMA. EVOEL. EVELOXW. OALyOY. OlvOVv. OloY. oioy. Ta. AVEO.
quov. (ora. iva. immo. v0. vio. boxy. gba. 2067.

§6. Mark of Crasis and Elision (Corénis—
Apostrophe.)

1. The mark of Crasis and Elision is the same as the smooth
breathing.

2. When two words come together, the one ending, and the other
beginning, with a vowel, these two vowels frequently coalesce and
form one long syllable. This coalescence is called Crasis, and the
mark by which it is indicated, Corénis. ‘The Coronis is placed
over the syllable formed by Crasis, and when this syllable is a diph-
thong, over the second vowel. But the Coronis is omitted, when a
word begins with a vowel or diphthong formed by crasis; e. g. 70
OvoUa = TOVYOME, TO Et0g = TOUTIOS, Ta ayUTk = TayA9E, O oivog
= 505. ;

Rem. In Crasis the Iota subscript (§ 3) is written only when the ¢ belongs to
the last of the coalescing vowels; e. g. xal eita—=xdta; but Kal éwetra=Karerra.

3. Elision is to be distinguished from Crasis. It consists in the
omission of a vowel before a word beginning with a vowel. The
mark by which Elision is indicated, is called Apostrophe ; e. g. am0
oixov = «an oixov. The Apostrophe is omitted in compound words ;
€. g. amépeooy from asto-eqpegor.

T§7. Movable Consonants at the end ofaword.

1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels in
two successive words, is by appending a» (called » épeluvortixor,
supfixed ) to certain final syllables, viz.

(a) to the Dat. Pl. in ou, to the two adverbs, zgovot, the last year,
mavramact, universally, and all adverbs of place in ot; e. g.
maow thesa; 4 TTharacaow nyenovic ;

(8) to the third Pers. Sing. and Pl. in ot; e.g. cvazovow éué,
zidnow éy ty toamety; so also to éozt;

(y) to the third Pers. Sing. in 8; e. g. écumzev eug;

(5) to the numeral éizoct, although even before vowels the » is

often omitted ; e. g. sixoow a&vdgec and sixocr &vdges ;
1*

6 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [$ 8.

Rea. In Attic prose, v 2¢eAxvorexdv regularly stands at the end of complete
sections, and sometimes before the longer punctuation-marks, where no vowel
follows.

2. The word ovzae (thus) always retains its full form before a
vowel, but drops its final o before another consonant; e. g. ovT¢
énoinser, but ovz@ mow. So also &ygus and pears.

3. In like manner the Prep. é§ (ex) retains its full form before
vowels and at the end of a sentence, but before consonants takes the
form éx; e. g. é& eionvys, elonvys é&, but éx z7g eionryng; so also in
composition; e. g. &elavveiw, but exzedeiv.

4. So the negative ovx (not) becomes ov before a consonant; e.g.
ovx% aiczo0s, but ov xadog ; and before a rough breathing it becomes
ody; e. g. ovy 700¢; yet not before the aspirate @; e. g. ov Giza.

T§8. Change of Consonants in Inflection and
Derivation.
1. A Tau-mute (z 6 &) before another Tau-mute is changed

into 0; e. g.
éxei3-Snv from meitSa becomes scorn
TELO-TEOG weit > TELOTEOE
npeto-Onv “ épeidw “e Apsiod nv.
2. A Pi-mute (z 6 ¢) before pu is changed into p,
a Kappa-mute (x y 7) “ gp = ae

a Tau-mute (cd) “© u a 65 Bae

(a) Pi-mute: Aéderr-pat from Aziro becomes Aéheuupat
TETPLO-WaL as TplBo TET pyupeat

yéypad-wat Me aga s /EYPApLpLat

(8) Kappa-mute : MePAEE nae “2 ier és As ves
NédEy-pat « Aéyo vemains AéAeyuat

BéBpex-pat ee Bpeé éxa becomes PéSpeyyat
(y) Tau-mute: 7vvt-pae = GviTo “ NVVOUAL
7) pELO-Lat “ épeiow = NPELOMAL

RY nemero—wat 8" < aetGa- - TETELOUAL

Kekoulo-yat “ Kouilo *« KEKOMLOUaL.

A

~ 3. A Pi-mute (z £ ¢) with o is changed into w,
a Kappa-mute (* 7 x) with o is changed into &,
a Tau-mute (z 6 @) disappears before o; e. g.

(a) Pi-mute: Acixnow from Asizw becomes Agiipo
TpiBow ue Tpivw Tpipa
ypadou 3 /paow ef apo

{8) Kappa-mute: tAéxow = eo = se
Réyou ce Aye ae Aéf0
Bpéxoo = — Bp exw “< «BpéEo

(y) Tau-mute: dvitow “ dvito “ dvisa
épeidow «= “$s Ep cidw - épeiow
reiSou “ reito <- TEeice

éAridow = ** bArriva 6 éAriow.

§ 8.] 3 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. 7

REMARK 1. The Prep. ex before o is an exception; e. g. xcalw, not ¢afw.
4. before a Pi-mute (z 6 w) is changed into p,

N before a Kappa-mute (x 7 x §) is changed into y,
N before a Tau-mute (zc 6 &) is not changed; e. g.

éy-reipia becomes éurecpia cvv-Kahéw becomes cvyxaréw
év-BaAdwo =“ éuparAw ovv-ytyvocko =“ ovyyltyvackw
év-$pwv ef Euppwv ovv-ypovog a ovyxpovog
év-piyxoc Re EupoXoC ovv-féu és ovyséw ;

but ovyTeiva, cvvdéw, ovvFév.

Rem. 2. The enclitics form an exception; e. g. dvep, Tovye, not dumep, Toyye

5. WV before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid; e. g.

ovy-Aoyife becomes cvAdoyivw ovy-petpia becomes ovppetpia
EV-MEVO ge EUMEVOD OUV-plnTH ss ouppinTo.

Rem. 3. The preposition év before p is an exception; e. g. évpizrw, not é-
bint.

6. WN is dropped before o and ¢€; the preceding vowel, short by
nature, remains short after the omission of » before o; e. g.

ovr-(uyia becomes ovlvyia, daipuov-o1 becomes daipoor.

Rem. 4. Exceptions: "Ev, e.g. évoreipo, évfebyvups; tTadrcv, e.g. wadriv-
oxtocg ; some forms of inflection and derivation in -caz and -ovc ; e. g. Tépavoat
from ¢aivw, and some few substantives in -<v¢ and -vve. The v of ody in com-
position, is changed into o before another o followed by a vowel; e. g. cvocdlu,

instead of cvvoalw ; but when o is followed by a consonant, v is dropped; e.g.
oby-oTnua becomes cvoTypa.

7. But when y is joined with a Tau-mute, both letters disappear
before o, and, as a compensation, the short vowel is lengthened be-
fore o, namely, ¢ into &, o into ov, &, i, v into &, 14,03 e.g.

tugvévt-ot becomes TudVeiar Agovt-ot becomes Aégovor
orévd-ow <6 oneiow EAptvo-cl a Edict
TAVT-OL “ TaCL OelKVvOVT-CL ae Oetkvior
Topavt-cr Topo HEvopovt-or HeEvogaot.

8. A Pi-mute (zB @) or a Kappa-mute (x y 7) before a Tau-
mute, must be of the same order as the Tau-mute, i. e. smooth, mid-
dle or rough. Hence only a smooth Mute (z x) can stand before
the smooth Mute z; only a medial (6 y) before the medial 6; only
an aspirate (g x) before the aspirate &; consequently, zz and xz;
$6 and 70; gd and yf; e. g.

2 before t becomes 7 as: from TpiGw TétpiB-Tal = TéTpLTTAL
Cah edhe er “ ypadw = yéypad-Tae «= yéypanTat

Me seas ie. 5 uke “ éyo Aédey-Tat = AédexTar

1 piglet relia “* “ Boéyo BéCpex-Tac = BéGpexrac

| te eat SE “ “ KbmTo Kod7-da = Kipda

@ “ 6 “& BY & ypagda ypag-dny = ypapdnv

ee Oe es “ @héxw = WAEK-OnY = wAéydyv

8 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [ss

x vefore 6 becomes y as: from fpéyo — Bpéx-dyv = Bpéysnv

qr ES a= “ éuro énéur-Onv = éréugdry
OF, hates tore g “ “ rpiBo éerpiB-Tyv = étpiotnv
cA GO > ne “ ahéxwo =e éx-Sgv = =_ eA ex Onv
a BES ae ay mitt “ Réyo énéy-Onv = éhéy dnp.

Rem. 5. The preposition é« does not undergo this change; e. g. éxdotvat, éx-
Veivat, etc., not éydoiva, éyveivat.

9. The smooth mutes (a x z) before a rough breathing, are chan-
ged into the cognate aspirates (gy x #), not only in inflection and
derivation, but also in two separate words. The medials (@ 7 6),
however, are thus changed only in the inflection of the verb; in
other cases they remain unchanged ; hence:

am’ ob = G¢’ 0b, éxjuepoc (from éri, quépa) = eorjpepoc

éxvoaive (from éxi, doaivo) = épudaivo, TétT-d = TéTVGA

obk dciwe = oby doiwe, dexjuepoc (from déxa, Tyuépa) = deynpepoc :
dvr’ ov = av Gy (from arti), dv7éAxo (from av7i, AK) = avdéAKo
elAoy-& =eiAoya, but Aéy érépay, not Aéy’ ETépav

rérpib-& = Tétpida, but tpi?’ otTwe, not Tpid’ obTaC.

Rem. 6. This change also takes place in Crasis; e. g. darepa from Ta érepa
(§ 6. 2). When two smooth mutes precede an aspirate, they must both be chan-
ged into aspirates (No. 8); e. g. é¢Ujuepoc, instead of éxtjuepoc (from éxré,
nuépa), vox? 6Anv, instead of vx’ GAnv.

10. If, in the reduplication of verbs, whose stem begins with an
aspirate, this aspirate is to be repeated, then the first aspirate is
changed into the corresponding smooth Mute; thus,

de-diAnka from ¢1Aéw is changed into TegiAnna

VE-YUKA dues 58) = KEXVKA
Sée-Sica “ io TESUKA
Si-Syue stem OE ts TiO HUE.

The two verbs, Sveu, to sacrifice, and rv8 even (stem OE), to place,
also follow this rule, in the passive endings which begin with @ ; e. g.
éTb-Onv, Tv-Ijcoua, éTé-Onv, Te-Ojoouat, instead of &0v-Cyv, Ehé-Tyv.

11. In words whose stem begins with 7 and ends with an aspirate,*
the aspiration is transferred to the smooth z, when the aspirate be-
fore the final syllables beginning with o, z and mw, must be changed
into an unaspirated consonant (according to No. 3. 8. 2.) ; by this
transfer, z is changed into the aspirate 0. Thus:

Tpé¢-@ is changed into (Spéx-ow) Vp&pw, Spex-rip, (Cpéxpwa) Spéupa
Tay, TA®-w into Gao, Jan-to, (TéVar-pal) TEeVaupat
tpvgoc, TPY®-w into Gpiwo, Cpit-tw (TéIpur-par) TES pvupat

* Some other Grammarians regard the words to which this principle applies,
as having two aspirates in the root; but as it is not euphonic for two successive
syllables to begin with an aspirated letter, the first must be smooth, as long as
the second remains, and when the second disappears, the first becomes rough
again ; hence éyw (properly éyo), but Fut. o.—TRr.

§§ 9, 10. QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.—ACCENTUATION. 9
>)

TpEx-w into (Ipéx-cowat) IpéLouar ;—rTpix-6¢ into Upit, Fprsiv.
taxv¢ has vacowv in the Comparative. (But reiSw from tebya, tpiéw
from Tpvyo, remain unchanged).
Rem. 7. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, tpé¢w, Gar7u (stem
TA®), Jpiirw (stem TPY®), begin with 7, the aspiration of the two final con-
sonants $0, changes 7, the initial consonant of the stem, into 0; e. g.

Ed péd-Onv, Sped-Sivat, Sped-Spocatat
évad-Snv, Sad-Veic, Sad-Syooua, Tedag-Ga.

Rem. 8. In the imperative-ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both syllables
would begin with 7%, viz. -7%, not the first, but the last aspirate is changed into
the corresponding smooth mute, thus: -J771; e. g. TId0qTL, not TIPE] Vt.

12. P is doubled,—(a) when the augment is prefixed; e. g. &-
6e0v; (b) in composition, when gis preceded by a short vowel; e.g.
autos, Ba9%G600¢ ; but ev-ewazog (from ev and parrvpt).

CHAPTER II.
SYLLABLES.
§9. Quantity of Syllables.

1. A syllable is short by nature, when its vowel is short, viz. ¢,
0, @, %, v, and when a vowel or single consonant follows a short vow-
el; e. g. Evipiod, Ex 9EtO0.

2. A syllable is long by nature, when the vowel is a simple, long
vowel, viz. 7, @, &, , ¥, oradiphthong; e. g. “Zoe, xoire, yéquon,
isyvoovs, maidevys; hence contracted syllables are always long;
e. g. anor (from a&éxwvr), Botovg (from Bozevas).

3. A syllable with a short vowel is made long by position, when
two or more consonants or a double consonant (¢ § w) follow the
short vowel; e. g. “Exozédlw, tyWartes, xOOaE (xOQax0S), ToamEeCa.

REMARK. But when a short vowel stands before a mute and liquid, it regu-
larly remains short; e. g. dréxvoc, dwErhoc, ’dxuh, Bitpvc, didpdxpoc. In two
cases, however, a short vowel before a mute and liquid is made long,—(a) in

composition; e. g. ’éxvéuw; (b) when one of the medials (3 y 6) stands before
one of the three liquids, A uv; e. g. BiBAoc, eviduoc, wévAEyuat.

§10. Accentuation.

1. The accentuation of a word of two or more syllables, consists
in pronouncing one syllable with a stronger* or clearer tone than

* Tn our pronunciation of the Greek, however, we do not observe the written
accent; but the Greeks undoubtedly distinguished the syllable on which tha
written accent stands, by a greater stress of voice —TR.

10 CHANGE OF ACCENT BY INFLECTION, ETC. [§ 11.

ihe other; e. g. destriuctible, immértal. A monosyllabic word also,
must be accented, so as to form, in connected discourse, an indepen:
dent sound. The Greek language has the following marks of ae-
centuation :
(a) The acute (’), to denote the sharp tone; e. g. Adyos 3
(b) The circumflex ("), to denote the protracted tone; e. g.
COLE. 3
(c) The grave (* ), to denote a softened acute on the final sylla-
bles of words in connected discourse ($ 12, 1.). The grave
is also used instead of the acute to distinguish certain words ;
e. g. Tic, any one, and zis, who ? :
Rem. 1. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs; and, at the
beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand after
the breathing, but the circumflex over it; e. g. imag, aidetoc, dv etane, evpoc, aia.
But with capital letters, the accent is placed after the breathing, over the first vowel
of the diphthongs @, 7, »; e.g. "Acdyc. With the diaeresis (} 3. Rem. 3.), the
acute stands between, and the circumflex over, the points; e. g. aidy¢, KAnive.
2. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether
this is long or short; e.g. xalos, avOeuzov, zoAsu0g; yet upon the
antepenult, only when the last is short, and is not long by position ;
e€. g. av PQwmos, but avSowrov.
do. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two syllables,
but that syllable must always be long by nature; e.g. tov, compa;
it stands upon the penult, however, only when the ultimate is short,
or long by position only; e. g. ze7yos, yojua, moaéic, aviak (Gen.
-G%0$), xalaveow, xatyliw, Anuoves.
Rem. 2. According to the accentuation of the last syllable, words have the
following names:
(a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute; e. g. reTuddc¢, Kaxdc, 37;
(b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute; e. g. Tiz7T0;
(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute; e. g. dvOpwror, Tv-
TTOmEVvol, Gv pwrol, TUTTOMEVOL ;
(d) Perispoména, when the ultimate has the circumflex; e. g. caxdg ;
(e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex; e. g. mpdyya, ¢1-
Aotca ;
(f) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented; e. g. tpdyyara, mpaype.

7 §11. Ohange and Removal of the Accent by In-

flection and Contraction.

1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quantity
of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, then, according

§ 11.] CHANGE OF THE ACCENT BY INFLECTION, ETC. 11

to the preceding rules, there is generally also a change or removal
of the accent. .
(a) By lengthening the finai syllable,
(«) A Proparoxytone, as 0Aenos, becomes a Paroxytone;
e. g. MOAELOv 5
(8) A Properispomenon, as zeiyos, a Paroxytone; e.g. zei-
0US ;
(y) An Oxytone, as doc, a Perispomenon; e.g. deov. Yet
this change is limited to particular instances. See § 26,

5, (a).
(b) By shortening the final syllable,
2 (a) A dissyllabic Paroxytone with long penult, as gevya,
becomes a Properispomenon; e. g. gevye, but zézzo,
TUTTE 5

(8) A polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long
or short, becomes a Proparoxytone; e. g. Bovieva, Bov-
heve.

(c) By the accession of a syllable or syllables at the beginning of
a word, the accent is commonly removed towards the beginning of
the word; e. g. mevya, pevyov. By the accession of syllables at
the end of a word, on the contrary, the accent is removed towards
the end of the word; e. g. cdzzw, tuntousda, trupdyoopuede..

Rem. 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and the
exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below under the accen-
tuation of the several parts of speech.

2. In respect to contraction, the following principles apply :

(1) When neither of two syllables to be contracted is accented,
the contracted syllable also is unaccented, and the syllable which,
previous to contraction, had the accent, retains it also after the con-
traction; e. g. giles = ihe, but qidder = qidel, yevet = yevel, ye-
VECO = YEVOY.

(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is accent-
ed, the contracted syllable also is accented :

(#) The contracted syllable when composed of the antepenult and

penult, takes the accent which the general rules require; e.g.

ayardopal = ayanGua dlAsiuevog = orAobpevog
éoTadTog = éoTOToO¢ opSéover = dpvovor
tAjecca = vAjooa TLULAOVTWY = TLULOVTOD 5

fb) The contracted syllable, when it is the ultimate, takes :
(a) The acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted
has the acute; e. g. éoracs = 07009 ;

12 CHANGE OF ACCENT.—ATONICS. [§§ 12, 18.

(8) The circumflex, when the first of the syllables to be con:
tracted, is accented; e. g. ’7y0i = nyo

Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below under the
contracted declensions and conjugations.

7§12. Change and Removal of the Accentin
connected Discourse.

1. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of the grave, i. e.
by the close connection of the words with each other, the sharp tone is weaken-
ed or depressed; e. g. Ei uu) untpury mepixardne "HepiBora 7v. But the acute
must stand before every punctuation-mark, by which an actual division is made
in the thought; e. g.‘O wav Kipoc éxépace tov rorapdy, of 6&8 moAguor aré-
pvyov. ;

Exceptions. The interrogatives tic, ti, quis? qud? always remain oxytoned.

2. In Crasis (§ 6. 2), the accent of the first ord is omitted, and the word formed
from the two, has the accent of the second word; e. g. Ta dyada = tayada, Tot ~
otpavod = Totpavod, TH Nuépa = Viwépa, TS Svoua = Tovvoua; yet, according
to the general rule (§ 10. 3), the long vowel formed by Crasis takes the circum-
flex instead of the acute, when the second word was a dissyllabic paroxytone,
with a short final syllable; e. g. 7d éxo¢ = Totmoc, Ta dAAa = TaAAa, 76 Epyov
= Totpyov, Ta brrAa = Gorda.

3. In Elision (§ 6, 3), the accent of the elided vowel goes back as an acute upon
the preceding syllable; yet, when the word, from which a vowel has been elided,
is a preposition or one of the particles, cAAd, oidé, undé, or one of the enclitics,
rivaé and zroré, the accent of the elided vowel wholly disappears, and also when ©
the agcented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided; e. g.

TOAAG Exatov = TOAW éxatov Tapa éu0v = map’ éuov
dea éowtgs = deiv’ tpwrae¢ avo éavtod = ad’ égavTov
‘2 La L459, 219. if ? Ne) 7 bl > 2 22
onl éy@ = onu éya Ada éyO == dA tyo
aicypa tdetac = aicys’ éEXetac obdé éy@ = = 000 EVO
inva joay = = Ex?’ Fear Tlva Eheye = TW’ édeye.

T§13. Atonics or Proclitics.

Some small words are termed Atonics or Proclitics, which, in
connected discourse, are so closely united to the following word,
that they, as it were, coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They
are:

. (a) the forms of the article, 6, 7, ol, a;

(b) the prepositions, éy, in, sig (29), into, éx (8), ex, wg, ad;

(c) the conjunctions, ws, as, that, so that, when, si, if;

(d) ov (ovx, ody), not; but at the end of a sentence and with the

meaning JVo, it has the accent; e. g. ov (ox).

§§ 14,15.] ENCLITICS.—INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 13

: {§14. Enclitics.

'Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in certain cases, to the
preceding word, that they either lose their tone, or throw it back
upon the preceding word; e. g. pikog zig, modeuosg tig. They are:

(a) The verbs eiui, to be, and nui, to say, in the Pres. Indic., except the

second Pers. Sing. «, thou art, and $7¢, thou sayest ;
(b) The following forms of the three personal pronouns:

I. P.S. wot | IL. P.S. cod | I. P.S. od Dual. cdviv Pl. odior(v)
jot oot ot S
pe oé é

(c) The indefinite pronoun, 7%¢, T?, through all the cases and numbers, to-
gether with the abridged forms vod and T@, and the indefinite adverbs ac,
TO, TH, TOV, TOHL, wodév, Tol, woTé; the corresponding interrogative words,
on the contrary, are always accented; e. g. Tic, Ti, THc, ete.;

(d) The particles, 7é, toi, yé, viv, wép, Snv, and the inseparable particle, dé,
both when it expresses the direction whither; e. g.*EpeBocde, to Hrebus, and also
when it serves to strengthen a word; e. g. Toodcde.

7 §15. Inclination of the Accent.

1, An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the ac-
cent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence (§ 12. 1),
_ again becomes acute; e. g.

Onp tie for VA Tie Kadoc gory = for KaAde éoTiv
Kat Tiveg “ Kal TLVvEéC moTau“oc ye ‘* moTapog yé
Kadoc Te “ Kadodc Té moTapor Tiveg “* moTamol TLVEC.

2. A Perispomenon unites with the following enclitic without

further change of the accent; e. g.
ga¢7e for d&¢ 7? giret tig ~—s for ptAet Tic
gc éoTiy “ ac éaTiv kadod tTivoc “ Kadov TLvéc.

REMARK. Long syllables in enclitics are considered in respect to the accen-
tuation as shor.; hence olvtivorv, dvTivwy are viewed as sepurate or compound
words, like caddy tivor.

3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic enclitic
without further change of the accent; but there is no inclination
when the enclitic is a dissyllable; e. g.

giroc pov for diroc pod, but ¢idoc éoriv, didor daciy,
GAhoc Tac Gdhog mag, “ dddog woTé, GAdwY Tivdr.

4, A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the fol-

lowing enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last syllable.

avperi¢ tic for évSpwroe Tic oGua te = for oGza tt
avtpurot tivec “ dvSpuror ~ivé¢ oGua éotiy “ oGpa éoTiv.

2 :

14° ENCLITICS ACCENTED.—DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. | §§ 16, 17.

Remark. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back its accent
on the preceding; e. g. et wép Tic o& pol dyol Tore.

4§16. Hnclitics Accented.

1. The enclitics at the beginning of a’sentence, retain their accent; e. g. &7
wb éyd todto.—Twé¢ Aéyovoww.—Eiol Seot.—But instead of éori(v) at the be
ginning of a sentence, the form éoTt(v) is used; also, if it stands in connection
with an Inf. for éeo71(v), and after the aaieles GAA, ei, ODK, UI, OC, Kal, MED,
571, x00, also after the pronoun Tod7’; e. g.*Eore Bede.—Hore cogode avgp.—
"Rory ob twc.—Eorw ideiv, idetv gor, licet videre—Ei éorey, odK oti, TOOT’
éoruv.

2. Syui and the other persons of the Ind., retain the accent, if they are sepa-
rated from the preceding word by’ a punctuation meals e. g. “Hoty avip aya-
Toc, ont. . x

3. The enclitic personal pronouns, o0%, ool, oé, ol, ogiot(v), retain their ac-
cent:

(a) When an accented Prep. precedes; e. g. tapa cod, peta oé, mpd cot. In

this case, instead of the enclitic fein of-the Pron. of the first Pers., the
longer, regularly accented forms are chosen ; e. g.

tap’ éuod not Tapa pov, mpog éuot not ™po¢ [10l,
kar’ éué =“ ~KaTa Me, mepl éuod “ Tept mov.

Remark. The unaccented prepositions are united to the enclitic forms ; e. g.
Ek mov, &v pol, é¢ oe, EG pe, EK GOV, EV COL.

(b) After copulative or disjunctive conjunctions; e. g. gué Kal o€, éué 7 o8,

as generally, when the pronouns are emphatic, e. g. in antitheses.
(c) The forms o%, o/, é, are accented only when they are used as reflexive
pronouns.

4. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the en-
clitic rests, disappears by Elision; e. g. xaddc 0’ éotiv, but Kaddce dé éottv—=
aoAAot 0 eiciv, but roAAol é eicwy.

{§17. Division of Syllables.

PRELIMINARY Remare. The division of syllables, according to our mode of
pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent.*

The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in
polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult
is called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there
is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word.

1. In dissyllables, a single consonant following a or ¢ in the penult, is joined
to the final syllable; e. g. d-yw, ma-pa, ua-Aa, i-va, i-ré¢, t-ywp.

2. In dissyllables, a single consonant following ¢ or 0, is joined to the first
syllable; e. g. Ady-o¢, TéA-o¢.

* The term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference

to oe pronunciation cf the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek
wor

§§ 18, 19.] PUNCTUATION-MARKS.—VIEWS OF THE VERB. 15

3. The double consonants £ and 7p are joined to the vowel preceding them;
e. g. TaE-w, Oinp-oc, Tpa-1c, avTiTas-Gpevog. But ¢ is joined to the vowel fol-
lowing it, except when it stands after e or 0, or after an accented vowel in the an-
tepenult——in which case it is joined with these’ vowels; e. g. voui-Gw, voul-Ce,
dpra-lw; but tpamel-a, 6¢-o¢, vouil-ouev, dpral-opev.

4. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and
t having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after ¢ and o having
the accent, is joined to these vowels; e. g. dy-aléc, mot-audc, Ba-o12-éa, b-701-
aBav, 6-76T-Epoc, TiS-opev.

Exception. A single consonant after an accented syllable, and followed by two
vowels, the first of which is ¢ or 4, is joined to the vowel after it; e. g. OTpa-Tld,
GVaOTG-CEWC, OTPA-TLOTNC.

5. A single consonant after a long vowel or v is joined to the vowel follow-
ing; e.g. d0-v7, XpH-ua, H-Kw, bul-Aoc, dxa-déc¢; dpyi-poc, pi-piac, di-ia,
gv-yovTec, dv-yopev.

Exception. A single consonant following long @ or ¢ in the antepenult, and
having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding; e. g. dwoxpiv-aro, é07 -
pdv-ayev.

6. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, are sepa
rated; e. g. 70A-24, ic-rava, TéeS-vyKa, Vap-paréwe, KAvTOTEX-VIVC.

Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes | Joined to the following vowel,
@. g. ETL-TpwoKov.

7. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last
two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel, if not, the last only;
e. g. dv-Tpuroc, av-dpia, but érépd-07.

_ §. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part
ends with a consonant; but if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a
thort syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word; e.g. éx-Gaive, cv
‘K-gavyjolc, Tpod-eore, dvaB-acrc, but bre-d7T NC, not bx0d-47TN¢ ; so Tapa-Baiva

7§ 18. Punctuation-marks.

The colon and semicolon are indicated by a period at the top of the line;
e. g. ev EheLac: martes yap poddynoav. The interrogation-point is like cur
vemicolon; e. g. Ti¢ Tavita éxoinoev; 'The period, comma and exclamation-
point are like ours.

CHAPTER III.

§19. Some general views of the Verd.

1. The verb expresses action; e. g. to bloom, to strike. In
Greek there are three classes of verbs, viz. active, passive and mid-
dle. ‘The middle has a reflexive signification, i. e. it expresses an
action which proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, i. e.
an action which the subject performs on itself; e. g. cvwroyat, I

[§ 19.

strike myself, Bovdevowc, I advise myself, cuvvopet, I defend myself.
In most of the tenses, the middle and passive forms are the same ;
e. g. tunromat, I strike myself and I am struck.

2. At present only those forms of the verb are given which are
necessary for translating the exercises that occur before the entire
verb is presented.

16 SOME GENERAL VIEWS OF THE VERB.

Num-

Remarx. On the v édeAnvorixdv in Bovaciovary, see § 7, 1.

Mode. and Present Active. ber and Present Middle or Passive.
Person. Person.
Inpica-| §. 1. | Bovded-o, I advise. S. 1. | BovAed-oua, I advise my-
TIVE. self, or am advised.
2. | BovAedt-erc, thou ad- 2. | BovAed-n, thou advisest thy- }
visest. self, or art advised.
8. | BovAcd-e, he, she, or 3. | BovAet-erau,he advises him-
it advises. self, or is advised.
P. 1. | BovaAct-ouev, we ad- | P. 1. | BovAev-oweSa, we advise}
vise. ourselves, or are advised. |
2. | PovAcv-eTe, ye advise. 2. | BovAed-eote,ye advise your-
selves, er are advised.
8. | Bovaet-ovor(v), they 8. | BovAed-ovra, they advise
advise. themselves, or are advised.
Imprera-| S. 2. | BovAev-e, advise thou.| S. 2. | Bovdet-ov, advise thyself,
TIVE. * or be advised.
P. 2. | Bovdaéd-ere, advise oF P. 2. | GovAet-eoSe, advise your-
selves, or be advised.
INFINIT. BovAed-ety, to advise. BovAeb-eoSat, to advise one-
self, or be advised.

(b).

3. Also the following forms of the irregular verb sii, to be, may

be learned :

éoti(v), he, she, or it is

eici(v), they are

io&i, be, €oTw, let him, her, or it be

nv, he, she, or it was

joav, they were

éoTe, be ye.

I. Vocabulary* and Exercises for Translation.

’Aci, always.

aAnSeiw, to speak the
truth. [ly.

cvopetwc, manfully, brave-

aptoteva, to be the best,
excel.

BLoredw, to live.

Biakebw, to be lazy.

ypaou, to write, enact.

6LOkw, to pursue, strive af-
ter.

ei, if. .

érouat, w. dat. to follow,
accompany.

éodiw, w. gen. and acc. to
eat, corrode.

éxet, it has itself, it is.

70éw¢, pleasantly, cheer-
fully, with pleasure.

Savuatw, to wonder, ad-
mire.

peTpiwc, moderately.

kai, and, even.

kak@c, badly, cowardly.

Kakéc, well.

koAakedy, to flatter.

Laxouat, w. dat. to fight,
contend.

4, not, always placed be-
Jore the Imperative and
Subjunctive.

édvpowat, to mourn, la-
ment.

* All the vocabularies are designed te be committed to memory before travis

lating the exercises.

§§ 20, 21.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE.—GENDER. 17

ob (ovx, ody), not. [eate. meorevouat, tobe believed. yaipw, w.dat., to rejoice, to
madeva, to bring up,edu- oetdw, to hasten, exert _rejoice at, or over, de-
maifw,to play, joke,play at. oneself. light in.
nivw(i), w.gen.and acc.,to gebyw, to flee, flee from, éyw, to blame.

drial | shun.

Rue or Syntax. The verb agrees with its subject-nominative,
in number and person. In Greek, as in Latin, the subject of the
first and second person of the verb, need not be expressed except
for emphasis, it being sufliciently indicated by the ending of the verb.

‘Med GinSeve. Xaipe. “Exov. My ddtpece. ‘Hdéwe Bioretw. Kaddc
matdevouat. Karég ypiderc. Ei xaxac ypadere, péyn. Ei xodaxedet, obk aAn-
Sever. Ei kohakevet, ob mioteveTar. Pevyouev. Ei gebvyopev, diwxdpueSa.
Kakéc¢ gevyeve. Ei BAaxevete, péyecbe. Ei avdpeing paxecde, Savpdvecde.
Ei xotakevovowy, ovk ahnSetovow. Ov Kxahig Eyer gebyew. Kardc éyer av-
dpeiwg paxeoOa. Ei diaxy, uy dedvye. "Avdpeiwg payov. Ei BAaxetovar, wé-
yovrat. Ei dAnSeberc, miotein. ’Aet aptotetete. Mertpiwg éodie kal zive
Kal 7waile.

I speak the truth. If I speak the truth, Iam believed. Rejoice (pl.). Mourn
thou not. Thou livest pleasantly. He writes well. It is (has itself) well, +o
speak the truth. Always speak (p/.) the truth. Follow (pl.). He is well brought
up. Flatter thou not.*-If thou flatterest, thou art not believed. To be believed,
is (has itself) well. If we are lazy, we are blamed. If ye speak the truth, ye
are believed. If they fight bravely, they are admired. If they flee, they are
pursued. Be thou always the best.

CHAPTER IV.
5 THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE.

a

“$20. Nature and division of the Substantive.

A substantive is used to express a thing or object. There are
two classes of substantives: (a) the names of persons, as man,
woman ; (b) the names of things, as earth, garden.

§ 21. Gender of Substantives.

The gender of substantives, which is three-fold, as in Latin, is
determined partly by their signification, and partly by their ending.
The last mode of determining the gender will be treated under the
several declensions. With respect to the signification, the follow-
ing general rules apply:

Q*

18 NUMBER, CASE AND DECLENSION. [§ 22,

1. Names of males, of nations, winds, months, mountains, and
most rivers, are masculine.

2. Names of females, of countries, islands, most cities, most trees,
and plants, are eviiine.

3. The names of the letters and fruits, infinitives, diminutives in
-ov, except the proper names of females, e. g. 4 Asovzior, all indecli-
nable words, and finally, every word used as the mere symbol of a
sound, e. g. 70 wyz7e, the word mother, are neuter.

4. The names of persons, which have only one form for the
Mase. and Fem., are of common gender; e. Bs 0 7 S80s, god and
goddess.

§ 22. Number, Case and Declension.

1. The Greek has three numbers, the Singular, the Plural,
and the Dual, which denotes two.

2. It has five Cases, namely:

(1) Nominative, the case of the subject;

(2) Genitive, the whence-case ;*

(8) Dative, the where-case ;

(4) Accusative, the whither-case ;

(5) Vocative, the case of direct address. |

Rem. 1. The Nom. and Voe. are called direct cases, the others, oblique cases.
Substantives and adjectives of the Neuter gender have the same form in the
Nom., Acc. and Voce. of the three numbers. The Dual has only two forms for
cases, one for the Nom., Acc. and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat.

3. There are in Greek three different ways of inflecting sub-
stantives and adjectives, distinguished as the First, Second and
Third Declensions.

Rem. 2. In parsing a substantive, the beginner may accustom himself to an-
swer the following questions: what case? what number? what declension? what
gender? from what nominative, e. g. is dvbparore 2

QUESTIONS: ANSWERS:
case ? Dative case ;
y number ? Plural number ;
What declension 2 Second declension ;
What gender ? Masculine gender ;
From what nominative ? From the Nom. évSpwroe ;

e. g. sauaroe is the Gen. Sing. of the third declension, neuter gender, from the
nominative oda, body.

* See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, §/156 seq—Tr.

§§ 23, 24.] ADJECTIVE.—PREPOSITIONS. 19

§ 23. Nature and Gender of the Adjective.

1. The adjective expresses a quality, which is considered either
as already belonging to an object, e. g. the red rose, or one which
is merely attribut an object, e. g. the rose is red. In both in-
stances, in Greek, n Latin, the adjective agrees with its sub-
stantive in Gender, Number and Case; e.g.0 dyad0¢ av9oumos,
bonus homo, 0 érSeumos ay a9 0¢ éotw, homo bonus est; 4 xad7
Movoa, pulchra Musa, 4 Movca xaiy éocw, Musa pulchra est;
70 xa10 4 éag, pulehrum ver, 70 ag xaLOv éorw, ver pulehrum
est.

2. Hence the adjective, like the substantive, has three genders.
Yet all adjectives do not have separate forms for the three genders ;
many have but two separate endings, viz. one for the masculine and
feminine gender, the other for the neuter; e. g. 0 yauvyos aro, a
quiet MAN, 1 TOVYOS yuvy, a Quiet woman, TO HOVYOY TExVOP, a
quiet child ; several, indeed, have only one ending, which commonly
_ indicates only the masculine and feminine genders, seldom the neuter
gender; e.g.0 muyas avyo, an exiled man,y puyas yer, an
exiled woman.

38. The declension of adjectives, with few exceptions, is like that
of substantives.

§ 24. General view of the Prepositions.

PRELIMINARY Remark. Before proceeding to the declensions, a general
view of the prepositions will be given, as a knowledge of these is ss ig pags
in translating. ©

I. Prepositions with one case. obv, cum, with, and the adverb
(a) With the Genitive: Gua, together with.
, arti, ante, before, for, instead of, (c) With the Accusative:
mp6, pro, before, for, ava, on, upon, up, through,
_tiré, ab, from, by, > eic, Lat. in with Acc., into, io,

e/

éx (é§ before a vowel), ex, out of; from, ce, to, ad. KS,

vera, for the sake of, on account of.
Here belong several adverbs which, Il. Prepositions with Obritive ana

like prepositions, govern the Gen., viz. Accusative.

rpoote_erv and éurpooter, before, 61d, through, by; with Acc. often, on ac

oriotev, behind, . , count of,

dvev and xwpic, without, < ¥ kara, de, down, with Acc. often, through,

TAnv, except. _ brép, super, over, above ; with Gen. often,
(b) With the Dative: Ses Or:

éy, Lat. in with Abl.. in, upon,

~

20 FIRST DECLENSION.—FEMININE Nouns. [§§ 25, 26.

IL. Prepositions with Gen., Dat.and — xapé, by, near; with Gen. from (pra-

Accusative. perly from being near some one)-
dud and repi, around, about ; with Gen. with Acc. to (properly into the pres-
otten, jor, ence of some one),
éxi, upon, at; with Acc. often, towards, mpoc, before ; , often, to,
against, i706, sub, und

usta, with ; with Acc. often, after,

§ 25. First Declension.

The first declension has four endings, &, 7 (or &), & and 7¢3 @
and y are feminine, é¢ and y¢ masculine gender.

ENDINGS.

Singular. | Plural. | Dual.

§26. 1. Feminine Nouns.

1. (a) The Nom. ends in -& or -@, and the a remains in all the
cases, if it is preceded by g, ¢ or t (a pure); e. g. ywou, land, idéa,
form, copia, wisdom, yosia, utility, evvovw, good-will. These make
the Gen. in -¢¢, Dat. in -¢. Here belong also some substantives
in -@; e g. alade, and some proper names; e. g. Avbqousdé,
Ansa, Piiouyjia, Gen. “a6, Dat. -d.

(b) The Nom. ends in -«, which remains only in the Ace. and
Voc.; in the Gen. and Dat., the -a is changed into -y, if it is pre-
ceded by 2, 41, 6, oo (zz), GE w, »

(c) In other instances, the Nom. ends in -7, which remains through
all the cases of the Sing.

2. When -a is preceded bye or a, in some words -¢« is con-
tracted into -7, and -a« into-@ Then the final syllable remains
circumflexed in all the cases.

§ 26.] FIRST DECLENSION.—FEMININE NOUNS. 21

PARADIGMS.
a. 7 through all the cases.

Justice. Honor. Opinion. Fig-tree.
Oik-7 Tiun yvoun ovx-(éa)q
OiK-n¢ TLUAG YVOUNGS OVK-7¢
Oik-n TUULH yvouy OUK-Fj
Oik-nVv TLV yvounv OVK-77V
OiK-n TLULN yvoun OUK-7

Oik-aL TLyat yveua OvK-at
OLK-GV TLV YVopov OvK-Gv
Oik-ale TyLaig yvouay ovK-ai¢
OiK-d¢ TLUGG yvauds ovK-G¢
Oik-al Tyat yvouat ovK-ai

Oik-a THU yvopua OUK-G
Oik-aLy Tyaiv yvopaw ovk-alv.

b. @ through all the cases. ce. & G. n¢.

(b) short a.
Shadow. Country. Mina. Hammer. Muse. Lioness.
2 OKi-G = yopa_~—ev-(Ga)d | oddpe Moitcd Aéawe
THC OKl-dg yopdg yv-a¢ | odtpdg Motone Acairvync
i OKl-G SS xOpG = - ogtpe Motoyn Asaivy
OKl-dy =yopav uv-av odipadv Motody Aéawwdv
OKL-G xOpa——pv-a odtpa Motcé déawa

OKl-al = Y@pat , _pev-at odvpat Motvoac Aé€éatvat
OKL-OV = xXwpOV LV-OV odupov Movody Acar.
Gkl-aig¢ §=xapaig =p-aic ogipat¢ Motcae Acaivaic
OKl-d¢ yopdg pr-a¢ odvpdc Motadce Aeaivar
OKi-ai = y@pat = uv -at odtpat Motcae Aéarvat

<> Um

rw
PUA

S)
a

Ta OKL-a XOpd = —_prv-a . | odtpa Motcd Acaiva
Taiv oKkl-aivy yopay pv-aiv ogtpary Motcaw Aeaivary.

Remark. The feminine of all adjectives of three endings, is like the declen-
sion of the above paradigms; e.g. 7 Ka2% tun, the glorious honor; 4 xpvon
(contracted from ypvoéd, as covey from ovKéa) oroAq, the golden robe, Tie x pv-
ic oToAnC; 7 OLKata yveun, the just opinion, tig GuKaiag yrounc; 7}
éxt pa xopa, the hostile land, ti¢ éxS pGeo yOpac.

3. The quantity of the endings is given in § 25. The feminine ending -a, is
always long in adjectives; e. g. éAcivepoc EXevGépa EedVepor, free.

4, With regard to the accentuation, it is to be observed that:

(a) The plural ending -a¢, is considered short in respect to the accent; hence
Aéatvat (not Aeaivar), Modcat (not Motcar) ;

(b) The accent remains on the accented syllable of the Nom., as long as the
laws of accentuation permit.

Exceptions. (a) The vocative déo7o07ra from deonérne, lord;

(8) In adjectives in -oc, -7 (-d), -ov, the feminine is accented on the same syl-
lable as the masculine, through all the cases, where the nature of the final sylla-
ble permits. Hence the nominative plural feminine of BéGazog, éAe%:°epoc, dv-

22 FIRST DECLENSION.—FEMININE NOUNS. [§ 26.

¥ > s ‘
Spartvoc, 1s accented on the antepenult, viz. B&Bator, BEBarat, EAevFe_eoor,

éAebVepat, dvSporwo, dv poxev at, although the feminine Sing., on ac- .
count of the long ending -7 and -4, is a paroxytone, viz. BeSaid, tAevdépa, av-
Spworivy ;

(y) In the Gen. Pl. of the first Dec., the final syllable -ov is circumflexed ; e. g.
Acawvov from Aéawva, veavidr from veaviac. But to this there are the following
exceptions: (1) Feminine adjectives and participles in -oc, -7 (-d), -ov, are ac-
cented like the Gen. of masculines; e. g. Tév Ka2AicTwv Movody, from KaAA10-
Toc, KaAAiaTn, KaAALCTOY ; but other feminine adjectives and participles, are cir-
cumflexed in the Gen. Pl.; e.g. Baptc, Bapeia, Bapt, Gen. Pl. Bapéwr, Bapetarv;
—(2) The substantives yp7or7¢, usurer, ddbn, anchovy, étnoiaL, monsoons, and yAo0b-
vnc, wild-boar, which in the Gen. Pl. remain Paroxytones, thus yp7oTor, agvov. -

5. The accent of the Nom. is changed according to the quantity of the final
syllable, as follows: :

(a) Oxytones become Perispomena, in the Gen. and Dat. of all three numbers
e. &. TULIC, -7, -Gv, -aic, -aiv; this is true also of the second declension. —

(b) Paroxytones with a short penult, remain paroxytones through all the
eases, except the Gen. Pl., which is always circumflexed on the final syllable ;
on ihe contrary, paroxytones with a long penult, become properispomena, when
the ultimate is short, which is the case in the Nom. Pl.; e. g. yyouy, yvouat, but
yrauav; ’Atpeidnc, ’Atpeidat, but ’AtpecdGv; on the contrary, diky, dixat, but
OLKGY ;

(c) Properispomena become paroxytones, if the ultimate becomes long; e. g.
Moicd, Movone ;

(d) Proparoxytones become paroxytones, if the ultimate becomes long; e. g.
Aéatva, Aeaivne. ; =

II. Vocabulary.

*Adixia, Gen. -ac, 7, injus- érayyéAAouat,to promise. wevia, -a¢, 7}, poverty.

tice. érayw, to bring on. wAeovecia, -ac, 7, avarice.
ddoAecxia, -ac, 7, loqua- 700v7, -7¢, 7, pleasure. ToAAGKtc, often. .
ciousness, prating. ~ Separevo, to esteem, hon- cvvy7Fera, -ac, 7, inter-
GAndivg, -7¢, vera, true. or, worship. course, society.
améyoual, w. gen., to ab- Kakia, -ac, 7, vice. Teipw, tero, to wear out,
stain from, keep oneself xapdia, -ac, 7, the heart. weaken, tire, plague.
from. katadvyn, -7¢,7, arefuge. TixTo, to beget.
MpEeTH, -7¢, 7, virtue. Abun, -n¢, 7, disgrace. Tpvon, -H¢, 7, excess, luxu-
Bia, -ac, 7, violence. Airn, -7¢, 7, SOrrOW. rious indulgence, effem-
Gontera, -ac, 7, help. Ripa, -ac, 7, a lyre. inacy.
wyvouat, to become, arise, Avw, to loose, free, dispel, $iAéa, -ac, 7, friendship.
be. violate (2 treaty), abol- yader7, -Fc, molesta, bur-
GtaBoan, -7¢, 7, calumny. ish. densome, troublesome,
dixn, -n¢, 7, justice, uépiuva, -n¢, 7, care. oppressive.
right, a judicial sen- povca, -n¢, 7, a muse. xpela, -ac, 7, need, inter-
tence. 6, 7, 76, the. course.

elka, w. dat., to give way meitouat, w. dat. to be- wc, as.
to, to yield to. lieve, trust, obey.

$36)

FIRST DECLENSION.~—FEMININE NOUNS.

23

“| Ruxes or Syntax. 1. Transitive verbs govern the AccifRative.
2. Verbs and adjectives expressing the relation of to or for in
English, govern the Dative.

Elke tH Big.

émayyéAneTar Katagvyny Kat Bontevav.
Osparevere Tag Modtcac.
TloAAaKig yarerq revia® reipopeda.

kapdiav éoier.

TOAAGKLG TH GOLKiA. ElKEL.
'H kakia Abryy éxéyet.
Dedye tiv Tpvdiy O¢ Avpny.

xlav debyere.

yiyvera.

Abstain ye from violence.
Trust ye not to calumny.
Virtue begets true friendship.

Flee thou from pleasures.

Do not give way (pl.) to pleasure.
is corroded by eares (dat.).

Aya, to lead, bring, con-
duct.
aman, -7¢, simple.

apyvpéea, apyvpa, -Gc, argen-

tea, silver (adj.).
dorparh, -7¢, 4, lightning.
atipia, -ac, 7, dishonor.
BaoiAea, -ac, 7, a queen.
Baotneta, -ac, 7, king-
dom.

. BAGBn, -n¢, 7, injury.
BpovTn, -7¢, 7, thunder.
yiOTTA, -n¢, 7, the tongue,

a language. life.
dia.ta, -7¢, 7, a mode of

TH kakia® méoa aTipia
a ‘

mpac doTparhe yiyveTa.
oKohae.
19v yAOTTAaY.
Toyat ebKddug TinTOVOLY.

"Aréxeote KaheTOv pweplvov.

EOTL Topdupa.

Flee from cares.

‘H Adpa tac pepipvac Aber.

Vice begets dishonor.

Flee thou from vice.

’Anéyou TH¢ KaKiac.*
’"Améyou TOV 7O0vdv.
M7 weiSov dtaBodAcic.?

‘'H gtAia
‘H pépipva tiv
‘H dixy
Tyv ddohec-

Tpvo7y ddixiay Kat mwheovetiav Tike.
Av apetig Kal ovvySeiac Kal ypeiag GAqSiwA gidia

Cares corrode the heart.
The Muses are honored.
The heart

Sorrow is brought on by vice.

Iii. Vocabulary.

60a, -¢, 7, report, ae
reputation.

éovAn, -7¢, good, noble,
splendid.

evtivo, to make straight,
rectify.

evxodAwe, quickly.

edvouia, -ac¢, 7, good ad-
ministration.

éx@,to have, hold, contain.

xatéyw, to hold back, re-
strain. [liant.

AapTpa,-Ge, splendid, bril-

peyadn, -n¢, magna, great.

peTtaBorn, -i¢, 7, change.

eTeTal.

@éne Tac Tvyac.

‘Pading dépe THY Teviar.
‘H dperh écdAjy dbkay ever.
Aixn dixnv tikter kal BAaBn BAGB»r.
‘H riyn moAAde petaPordg éyee.

‘AndAjy diatav Gye.

Ileviav gépere.
i ‘H dperyH otK eixet Tai¢c Téyate.
‘Ti CaotiAee et Nie Pactrciav Exe. “H orodq
Xpvoue kal apyvpac otoAdg éxyouev.

TUGG, -7¢, every, all.

- qinTo, to fall .

ToAAn, -h¢, Tauch, many.

Topoupéd, Topdupad, -de,
purple (adj.).

padiwe, easily.

oKodld, -d¢, crooked, per-
verted.

OTOAN, -7¢, 7, a robe.

Tixn, -n¢, , fortune, pl.
(generally) misfortunes.

dépo, fero, to bear, bring.

Xpvoéed, YPVvo7H, -He, aurea
golden.

Bpovt? ék Aap-
Edvouia evtiver dixac
| Kareye
Ai aopapee

~ Good reputation follows virtue.

The perverted sentence is rectified by good administration. The lightning is

brilliant.

Good reputation arises from virtue.

splendid fortunes often arise splendid cares.

1 § 157.

2 § 161, 2. (a), (d)

Yield not to misfortunes.

From

[$27

FIRST DECLENSION.—MASCULINE NOUNS.

§ 27. Il. Masculine Nouns.

The Go: of masculine nouns ends in -ov; those in -ag retain the
« in the Dat. Acc. and Voc., and those in -yg¢ retain the y in
the Acc. and Dat. Sing. The Voce. of nouns in -7g¢ ends in a,
(1) all in -zyo; e. g. cokdzys, Voc. toSora, zoopyrys, Voc. meopyte 5
(2) all substantives in -yg composed of a substantive and a verb;
e. g. yecouezons, Voc. yewpetod, urveoradns, a salve-seller, Voc. wv-
gomwid ; (3) national names in -7¢; e. g. Hégons, a Persian, Voc.
TI¢ooc.—All other nouns in -7g have the Voe. in -7; e. g. Hggons,
Perses, Voc. Ilégoy.—The plural of masculine nouns does not ase
from that of feminine.

Rem. 1. Several masculine nouns in -d¢ have the Doric Gen. in a, namely,
maTparoiac, untpadoiac, patricide, matricide, dpvido8jpac, fowler; also several
proper names; e. g. ’AvviGac, -a, LbAAac, -d; finally, contracts in -a@¢; e. g
Boppac, from Popéac.

PARADIGMS.

Youth.
vyeavidc
VEaVLOV
VEQvia
veaviav
veavia

Boreas.
Boppac
Poppa
Poppa
Boppav
Boppa.

Fowler.
dpvi0obnpac
dpvidobnpa
dpvidodnpa
dpvisoSypay
dpvidodnpa

Citizen.
ToAiTtAC
TOALTOU
ToAiTy
moAitny
TOATE

Mercury.
"Epye(éac ic
‘Epon
‘Epea
Eppiy
‘“Epun
‘Epyat
‘Hou@y
‘Epyaic¢
‘Epyas
‘Eppat

“Epa
‘Epuaiv

veavial
VEQVLOV
VEAVLALC
veaviac
VEQAVIAL

TOAITAaL
TOALTOV
TOALT ALC
TOALTaC
TORITAL

rd
=

dpvidoSipat
dpvidodnpav
dpvidodypatc
opvidoSyaac
dpvitobtHpat

oe ek

veavla
veavialv

TOAITa
TOAIT AL

opvidednpa
opvitodnpay

Rem. 2. Adjectives of one ending in -7¢ and -ac, are declined in the same
manner; e.g. éFehAovtH¢ woditne, a willing citizen, 20 ehovtTod modirov,
édeAovtal xodita; poviac veaviac, a lonely youth, uoviov veaviov, jo-
via veavia.

IV. Vocabulary.

ness; with dyev, to be
quiet.

"A doAETYNG, -OV, 0, a pra-
ter.

6péyopat, w. gen., to strive
after.

aKoba, to hear.

akpoaric, -ov, 6, an audi-
tor.

BAGTTO, w. acc., to injure.

deorérne, -ov, 6, 2 master.

ebkoopia, -ac, 7, good or-
der, decorum.

HOCXLA, -a¢, 77, Quiet, still-

Vararra, -nc, 7, the sea.

SeaTiHe, -od, 6, a spectator.

pavdive, to learn, study.

pé2el, w. dat. of the person
and gen. of the thing, it
concerns.

vavTne, -ov, 0, nauta, a
sailor.

mpétet, w. dat. it is be
coming, it becomes.
Tpoonkel, w. dat., it is be-
coming, it becomes.
oodia, -ac, 7, wisdom.
TEXVN, -NS, 7], art. i
TpvonTic,-ov, 6, luxurious,
riotous, voluptuous.

§ 28 | SECOND DECLENSION. 25

Rue or Syntax. One substantive governs another in the Geni-
_ tive, when the latter signifies a different thing from the former.
The substantive in the Gen. defines or explains more particularly
the one by which it is governed.

Mav$ave, 6 veavia, tiv cogiay. Tlodiry npéret ebxoouia. MNeaviov cogiav
Vavyala.. Pedye, 6 rodira, rH ddixiav. Ti opviSodipa téyynv Gavpacouev.
"Axpoatai¢ Kat Gearaig xpochxer qovyiay dye. Pevyete, © vairat, Poppar.
Boppde¢ vaitag roddixue BAaares. ’OpéyeoSe, © roditrat, rie dperiic! SvBae

“pirat Tpvgntal joav. Nabrate pérer ric Saharryc.? ede, b Ilépon. Xap.
TidTae weyadany dav éyovow. Sebya veaviay Tpugytay. *Adohecxav dxéyov.
“Axove, © OéoT0TG.

Learn, O youths, wisdom! Good order becomes citizens. We admire the
wisdom of youths. Shun, O citizens, injustice! To the Spartans there wag
great fame (7. e. they had great fame). Keep yourself from voluptuous youths
Flee from praters. Keep yourself from a prater. It becomes an auditor and 3
spectator to observe (dye) stillness. Flee from a voluptuous youth. —

V. Vocabulary.

Atkatoovyn, -7¢, 7, justice. KAERTHC, -0v, 6, a thief. OTpaTloTyc, -ov, 6, a sol

Exipéhouae, w. gen., to care Kpithe, -od, 6, a judge. ier, a warrior.
for, take care of, take vavayia, -ac, 7, shipwreck. Texvityc, -ov, 6, an ar.
care. olkéTNC, -ov, 6, a servant. fist.
épacTie, -o0, 6, a lover, a mioTebw, w. dat., to trust, Tpédw, to nourish, support,
_ friend. rely upon. keep, bring up.
Savpaorh, -Fe, admiranda, rioTetouat, to be trusted, wetoryc, -ov, 6, a liar,
wonderful. be believed.

‘HH rév Zrapriarayv dpery Savpacrh eorww. Seiye, © TWépca. Kperaic Tpé=
met Oikatootvy. “Eott tév otpatiwriv nept TOv TodiTOV payerSat. Petye
etotas. “Eote deorérov éripétecSart tov olxerov. Mj wioteve Wetorn.
Texvirny tpéger 9 téyvn. Ex pevorov yeyvovrae KAéxrat. Xrapriarar d6én¢
tal Tiyuipe épactal qoav. "Ex Bopha TOAAGKIG yiyvEeTat vavayia. Oavupdlopev
THY ‘Epuod réxvny.

The Persians flee. Justice becomes the judge. It is the duty of a soldier to
fight for the citizens. Flee from a liar. Trust not liars. Art supports artists,
We admire Hermes. Soldiers fight. Liars are not believed. .

) § 28. Second Declension.

| The second declension has two endings, -o¢ and -ov; nouns in -0¢
€ mostly masculine, but often feminine; nouns in -ov are neuter.
eminine diminutive proper names in -oy are an exception; e. g.
Dvxegrov. \ ;

*§158,3.(b). 2§ 158, 6.1. (b)._? Zor with the Gem, it is the daty of any
€, see § 158, 2. *§ 158, 6. L. (b). &

26

SECOND DECLENSION.

ENDINGS.

[§ 28.

PARADIGMS.

Word. Island. God. Messenger. 3
S.N.| 6 Ady-o¢ 7 vigcoe 6 Veog Oayyehog Td GiKOV
G. | rod Ady-ov The vacov Tod Veod -ayyédov Tov cdKOV
D.| 76 Ay-o TH Mow TH VEO ayyéro 7) ODKW
A. | tov Aédy-ov THY vicov Tov Vedv dyyeAov Td ovKOV
V.| 6 = doy-e vgoe © Cede Gyyene © ovdKov
P.N. | of Ady-oc ai vigoot of Set dyyedot Ta ovKa
G. | Tév Ady-wy = TOY vjowY TeV Seav ayyéiov TdYv odbKOP
D. | Tote Ady-or¢ Taic vhoowe Toi¢c teoic ayyédowe = TOIg:- GUKOLC
A. | rode Ady-ovg Tag vyoovg Todic¢ Veoi¢ ayyédovg Ta odKa
V.| 6 Ady-cc G vijoot GG Veoi dyyehot © odxa
D. TO 2Oy-o@ Ta VOW TO VEO ayyédo TO ovKO
toiv Aéy-o1v taivevgjoo toiv Veoivy ayyédow Tolv obdKow.

Rem. 1. The Voce. of words in -o¢ commonly ends in ¢, though eften in -0¢3
e. g. © gide and & gidoc; always © ede.

Rem. 2. On the accentuation, the following observations are to be noted: The

~ aecent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quantity of the
final syllable permits; the Voc. édeAde from dde/déc, brother, is an exception.
—-The plural ending -ov, like -a: in the first declension [§ 26, 4. (a)], with re-
spect to the accent, is considered short. The change of the accent is the same
as in the first declension (§ 26, 5.), except in the Gen. Pl., where the accent re-
tains the place, which it has in the Nominative. See the paradigms.

Rem. 3. Adjectives in -o¢, -7 (a), -ov, in the masculine and neuter, and those
of two endings in -o¢ (Mase. and Fem.), -ov (Neut.), are declined like the pre-
ceding paradigms; e.g. dyatéc, ayad7, dyatov, good, 6 dyadic Aédyoc,
a good speech,to ayatov réxvov, a good child, raykarosg, rayKaAOD,
very bemitiful,6 mayKahog Abdyoc, a very beautiful speech, mayKaXoc pop-
on, a very beautiful form, 76 TayKahov Téxvov, a very beautiful child. Adjec-
tives of two endings in -oc, -ov are almost all compounds. Adjectives of three
endings in -o¢ preceded by e, ¢ or p, and those in -oo¢ preceded by p, like nouns
of the firsigdeclension, in -a pure and -pa, have the Nom. Fem. in -a; e. g. xpio-
£0C, Xpvo-Ea, ypvo-eov, éySpdc, -4, -Gv, dtxpdoc, -64, -dov.

Rem. 4. It will be seen by the following paradigms, that, in adjectives i in ~0o¢,
-n (-a), -ov, the masculine and neuter are declined like the second declension,
and the feminine like the first.

\

§ 28. | SECOND DECLENSION. 27

~*~

_, PARAapreus/or ADJECTIVES.

S.N. | dyad-6¢ dyad-n dyad-6v, good | giri-o¢ gidi-d —_gidu-ov, lovely
G. | dyad-00 dyad-j¢ dyad-oo plAt-ov bihi-dg gidi-ov
D. | dyad-@ ayad-7 ayad-o giri-y giri-a gtAi-w
A. | dyad-6v ayad-ny ayad-dv giht-ov gihi-dv gidt-ov
V. | dyaS-& dyat-7 ayad-ov gidi-e gtAi-d = pidt-ov ws
P.N. | dyad-ot dyat-ai dyat-a pihi-oc = diAt-ae_—s bi du-a
G. | dya8-Gv ayad-v ayat-dv diri-ov gthi-wv gtdi-wv
D. | dyad-oi¢ ayad-aic ayad-oic¢ giri-org § gtai-atg gtAt-o1g
A. | ayat-ot¢ ayad-a¢ ayad-a oiri-ovg gthi-dg gidi-a
V. | dyat-ot dyat-ai dyad-a pidi-o. = gidt-at diht-a
Dual. | dyaS-0 ayad-d ayad-o gini-w = @tdi-a_— ti-w
ayad-oiv ayad-aiv ayad-oiv. oLAi-ow, ptAi-aw gtni-oww.

VI. Vocabulary.
Ayavdov, -od, 76, a good éytpoc, -ot, 6, an enemy. oivoc, -ov, 6, wine.
thing, an advantage. edc, -ot, 6, God,a god. mapéyw, to grant, afford,
ayyehoc, -ov, 6, & mes- KdKOc,-7,-6v, bad, wicked. __ offer.

senger. KQKOV, -ov, TO, an evil. moToc, -7, -ov, faithful,
dvSporoe, -ov, 6, a man. KdA6c, -7, -dv, beautiful, _ trustworthy.
diddoKdhog, -ov, 06, a tea- good; Td Kanov, good- modo, -ai, -d, many.

cher. ness,beauty,or the beau- ¢iAoc, -ov, 0, a friend, ¢i-
dodAoc, -ov, 6,a slave. _itiful. hoe, -7, -ov, dear.
épyov, -ov, T6, an action, Kivddvocy-ov; 6, danger. ¢povrilw, w. gen., to care

a work, a business. Adyo¢, -ov, 6, a word, a for, trouble oneself a-
éod2oc, -7, -6v, good, no- _ report, reason. bout; w. acc., to reflect

ble, splendid. petéxo, w. g&i, to take on, think about.
éTaipoc, -0v, 0, acompan- _— part in. xaipw, to rejoice.

ion, a friend. [tune. picya, musced, w. dat., to

edTvyia, -ac, 7, good for- mix.

RuLeE oF Syntax. A subject in the neuter plural usually takes
a singular verb.

Aioke xahd épya. TetSov roi¢ rot didackaAov Adéyore.1 Tap’ éoSAdv to dha
pavdavetc. Ilsordg étraipog tév adyatév kal Tév KakGv peréver.2 Oi Deol rév
aviparav opovtifevow.? Oi dvbpwrot Tove Veode Geparetovorv. ToAdoic ép-
yote éxetar Kivddvoc. Mioyerart éo9Ad Kaxoic. ‘O Kakdc¢ Toic Seoic Kat Toi¢
aviporoe éxySpoc éotiv. Oi dv¥pwrot Toic éoSAoic yaipovow.® Tldpeye, O
Sede, Tole didow ebtvyiav., Pépe, & dodAe, Tov olvoyv TH veavia. ‘O oivog Avex
Tac pepiuvac. Xahet Epyw Odea érerac.

_ Follow the words of your (the) teachers. God cares for men. Men worship
God. Dangers accompany many actions. Grant, O God, happiness to my (the)
friend! Keep yourself from the bad man. I rejoice over the noble youth.
Trust not the word of a liar, my (O) dear young man.

———_—_—

1 § 161, 2. (a), (6). 2 § 158, 3. (b). $§158 6. I. (b).
# § 161, 2. (a), (a). 5 § 161, 2. (c).

28 CONTRACTION OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. [§ 29.

VIL. Vocabulary.

A£woc, -id, -Lov, w. gen. Savarog, -ov, 6, death. véoe, -d, -ov, young, 6 véoc,

worthy, worth. Veliov, -ov, T6, the Deity. _-ov,the youth, the young
dro-2bw, w. acc. of the per- Siudc, -ot, 6 the mind, man.

son and gen. of the thing, courage. v6a0¢, -0v, 7, a disease, an

to free from, release. VUpd, -ac, 77, a door. illness.
apyvpoc, -ov, 0, silver. KAeiw, to shut, fasten. ovy (before an aspirate in-
ioc, -ov, 6, life, a liveli- uady7He, -0d, 6,a pupil, a stead of ov«), not.

hood. learner. Tévoc, -ov, 6, trouble, toil,
Bova, -7¢, 7, counsel, ad- pétpov,-ov,70,a measure, hardship.

vice. [rel. | moderation. olyh, -7¢, 7, silence.
diyoordoia, -ac, 7, a quar- poxAdc, -0d, 6, a bolt, a ypovoc, -ov, 6, time.
evgpaiva, to rejoice, glad- _lever. [ble ypdodc, -ov, 6, gold.

den, cheer. Lopioc,-id, -iov, innumera-

Td Kaddov gore pétpov Tod Piov, oby 6 xpdvoc. ‘O Bavaro trode avbporoug
Greater kévov! Kal KaxGv. ‘O oivog ebdpaiver toi Tév dvbparav Sypodc.
Ldv prpiow révorg Ta KAaAG yiyvera. Td Céiov Tods KaKode ayet MpdG THY Oi-
Knv. Ilvorde¢ didoc ypvood Kal dpybpov a&s6c¢? éoTw év yaherH Otyootacia. TloA-
Aat vocot év avbporoig eioiv. Bovdy sic ayatov dye. Ltyh véw Tiyuny géper.
‘H Sipa poxAoic’ KAcierar. ‘H réyvy trove dvbparove tpéger. "Q Se padty-
Tal, TIC cogiac Kal THC apeTng Opéyerte.A

By death (dat.) men are freed from troubles and evils, By (ind, w. gen.) the
Deity the bad man is brought to justice. The bolt fastens the door. Art stip-
ports the man. My (O) dear pupil, strive after wisdom and virtue. Diseases
weaken men. My friends, follow the words of the judges.

§ 29. Contraction of the Second Declension.

1. A small number of substantiyes, where o or é pears the
case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect.

PARADIGMS.

Navigation. Cir cumnavigation.
6260¢ TAovc Tepid 00¢ mepindove
Th6ov = TAD TepiTA0ov tepimAov
TAOW = TAO TEpLTAOwW - -TEpiTTA®
m2O0v TAovv Tepitioov mepimAovy
Thoe = TA 08 mepitioe mepizaAov

p
SPORA

td

TA60L 8 TAhol mepitAoo. mepinaAot
ThOwY TAGY TepiTAowy TrepinAwy
mA60lte = mAoic TEepinAooig = TeEpiAore
zAGove TAovc TepimAoove mepinAove
ThOoL TAO TepitAoot mepimAor

N.
G.
D.
A.
a.

{

io)
rs]
e

TOW = TWA TEPLTAGW ~—- TEPiTAW boTém = G0TO
THOOLY TAoiv TEepiT@Aoolv TepirAoly doTéov daToiv.

1 § 157. 2 § 158, 7. (7). 3§ 161, 3. 4 § 158, 3, (b).

lea

CONTRACTION OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.

§ 29.] 29

Remark. Here belong, (a) Multiplicative adjectives in -60¢ (-ot¢), -6y (-7),
-00v (-0bv); e. g. drhoic, -7, -ovv, simple ;—(b) Adjectives of two endings in
-0 0¢ (-ov¢) Mase. and Fem., and -o ov (-ovy) Neut.; e.g. 6 4 ebvove, rd ebvovy,
well disposed, which differ from the declension of substantives, only in not con-
tracting the neuter plural in -oc; e. g. Td-edvoad téxva;—(c) Adjectives in
-€0¢ (-0v¢), -éd (-7), -eov (-otv), which denote a material; e. g. xpiceoe
Xpvoove, Ypvoéa ypvot, Xpbceov ypvoodv, golden. When a vowel or p precedes
the feminine ending -éd, -éd@ is not contracted into -7, but into -d, (4 26, 1);
e. g. ‘

épé-eoc épeoic, Epe-éa éEped, épé-cov épeody, woollen.
apyvp-e0¢ apyupotc, Gpyv p- éava p yvpa, dpyip-eov apyupoiy, silver.
~

?
4 f
ia. fo

\
Z peg
: ’

beatae

Sree

‘PARADIGMS.

Simple.
4S. N. | ypice-oc xpvoe-ov ami6-0¢ anAo-n dm26-ov
: ypvoovc xpvo7n xvpvoovv arhoig aman an7ovv
G. | xpvao0v xXpvone xpvoow arhov anhijg anaov
D. | ypvod xXpvon xXpve@ ATA aTAR ETO
A. | ypucovv ypvonv xXpvoovy anhovy anagv dro
V. | xpvooic xXpvon xYpvcovv anhotc¢ 8 anay arhoovv
P. N. | ypvoot xpvoat Xpvoa amor amhai dad
G. | xpvoadv xpvoGv Xpvoav aT AGY arAGyv drrov
D. | xpvcoic¢ ypvoaic ypvooic¢ anhoic anhaic a7Aoic
A. | xpvootic xypvodc Xpvoa aniove andde andra
V. | xpvooi xpvoat xXpvoa amor aGrhat = ara
Dual. | ypvce Xpvoa xpuce aTAO anArdg aTao

ypvooiv xpvoaivy = xpvooiv. arhoiy anhaiv drroiv.

Accentuation. ‘The following are to be noticed as exceptions to the rules in
§ 11,2: (a) TA0w = TAO, d0Téw = 00746, instead of 726, 607@; (b) compounds
and polysyllabic proper names, which retain the accent on the penult, even
when as a circumflex, it should be removed upon the contracted syllable; e. g.
TepiTAdov = TepizAov, instead of wepizA0d ; ebvédw = edvw, instead of evv@ ; (c)
TO Kaveov = Kavody, instead of Kkavovy, basket, and also adjectives in -coc, -éd,
-£0V;e.9.%pdaceo¢c—Ypvosode, ypvotd = ypvoj, ypboeov=ypve
instead of yptcoug, ypicovr ; finally, substantives in -co¢ = -ot¢; e. g. ade,
ded¢ = ddeAd.dovc, instead of adeAd.dotc, nephew.

fe
‘ 4%
VII. Vocabulary.
"Adnioc, -ov, uncertain, éx-kaAizTw, to disclose.
unknown. éml-Kougivw, to alleviate.
én Sea, -ac, 7, truth. épifta, w. dat., to contend

kai—xai, both—and.
kKaveov = -otv,-é0v = -od,
76, a basket. [ror.

avoog = -0v¢,-00ov = -9vv, with.
imprudent, irrational.

upyipeoc = -ouc, -éd =-,
-c0v = ovr, silver, 7. e.
made of silver.

dptoc, -ov, 6, bread.

EVVYOOG = -0UC,-00Y =-ov?,
well-wishing, well-dis-
posed, kind.

Separatva,-ne, 7, 2 female
servant.

3*

K&TOTTPOY, -ov, 76, & mir-

kbreAdov,-ov, T6, a goblet.

Aéye, to say, call or name.

voo¢ = votc, -dov = -od,
6, the understanding,
the mind.

30 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. © Ae $30.

ddiyot, -at, -a, few. dxAoc, -ov, 6, plebs, the xaAtvoc, -od, 6, a bridle. ”
Opy?, -¢, 7, anger. common people. [to. 7~@AKeog = OUG SS s
’Opéorne, -ov, 6, Orestes. Tpoc-épw,to bearorbring = -e0v = -ovv, brazen.

boréov = -odv, -Eov = od, irvoc, -ov, 6, sleep, slum- Wiy7, -7e, #, the soul.

TO, a bone. ber.

RULE oF Syntax. One substantive following another to explain
it, and referring to the same person or thing, is put in the same
ease. This construction is called Appesition. 7

'O Royo éoTt 76 TOU Vow KaTONTpOV. Tov voiv Exovoly of Gvbparot didao-
kahov. Tov evvovy didov Depameve. ’OAiyur cleriv vosy éyovolv. ‘O zAoiv¢
éoTly GdnAoc. dv vO Tov Biov aye. ‘O yAoc obx Eyer vodv. My épile Toi¢
avowc.' Oi ayadot toi¢g ayatoic evvoi? eicty. ’Opéyou dihor etvav. Ta Tod
’Opéotov dora év Teyég nv. Ai Veparawa év Kavoic tov aprov rpocdépover.
Oi Geot Kai Kahov Kat Kakov TAoby Toic vabTatc3 mapéyovow. Y¥vyje yadwde
av8paro.c? 6 voi¢ éotw. TloAAaxic dpy7 dv8pirrwv voiv éxxadbarelt. ‘Amhove
éotly 6 Tig GAneiag Adyoc. Adyoc evvouc éextxovdiler Airyv. TO KbmedrAdv
got apyvpoiy. ‘O davatog déyerat yadAKotc irvos.

The understanding is a teacher to men. The well-disposed friend is honored.
Keep yourself from the irrational. Strive after a well-disposed friend. Bring
bread in a basket. Honor, O young man, a simple mind! Flee from impru-
dent youths. ‘Trust, O friend, well-disposed men! Young men are often im-
prudent. The goblet is golden.

§ 30. The Attie Second Declenstous

Several words (substantives and adjectives) haye the endings -ag,
(Mase. and Fem.) and -w» (Neut.), instead of -o¢ and -or, and re-
tain the -o through all the cases instead of the common vowels and
diphthongs of the second Deé¢., and place under the -w an Iota sub-
script, where the regular form has -@ or -o1; thus, -ov and -a be-
come -c ; -0¢, -ov and -nvg become -we, -av and -we; -ol, -o1e and
-ow become -@, -@¢ and -@y ;—-o, -~ and -w» remain unchanged.
The Voe. is the same as the Nominative.

PARADIGMS.

People. Cable. Hare. Hall.

6 Ae-O¢ 6 KaA-we 6 Aay-6¢ TO GVOYE-WU
Ae-O KGA-@ Aay-6 GVvOYE-W
Ae-O KGA-w Aay-6 avoye-w
he-Ov Kah-wy Aay-ov avoye-ov
he-O¢ KGA-@¢ Aay-O¢ avaye-wy

Ae-S KG2.-0 Aay-S avoye-@
Ae-Ov KGA-wv hay-Gv avaye-OVv
A€-O¢ KGA-we Aay-G¢ avoye-wC
Ae-OC KGA-w¢ Aay-¢ dvoye-w
Ae-65 KaA-w Aay-¢ avoye-o
Ae-O KaA-w ~ Aay-@ avoye-w
As-Ov KGA-wv Aay-Ov avarye-1v

$161, 2. (a), (7). 2 § 161, 5. (a). 3 § 161, 5.

ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. $1

Plural.
of ai thew, Ta thew
ptav ihewv
Tol¢ Tai¢g Tog idEewe
Tove Tac thewe, Ta tAew
thew, thew

Dual.
TO TA TO thew
Tolv Taiv Toiv thew
Totv Taiv Toiv iAewy
~ xs » 89
TO TA TO thew
idew.

Singular.
6 4 thews, TO thewv

Tov THE TOD thew
TO TH TO thew
TOV THY TO tAEwy
iAewe, thewv

Rem. 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fem. gender reject the v in the Acc.
Sing., namely, 6 Aayos, the hare, Tov Aayév and Aay, and commonly % éwe, the
dawn, } dios, a threshing -floc 9 Kéwe, 7 Ké¢, 6 “AGuc, 7 Téwc, and the adjec-
tives dyjpus, not old, éxinxireMc, full, ixépypewc, guilty. .

Rem. 2. Accentuation. Proparoxytones retain the acute on the antepenult in
all the cases of all numbers, the two syllables -ewe and -ewy, etc. being considered,
as it were, but one; yet those with a long penult, as dy7pwc, are paroxytones
in the Dat. Sing. and Pl., and also in the Gen. and Dat. Dual; e. g. dyfpw, ayi-
pac, dyjpev. Oxytones in -¢, retain this accent even in the Gen.; e. g. Aed
instead of Asé. be

TX. Vocabulary.

’Ayfipoc, -wv, not getting évedpetu, w. dat., to lie in AauBava, to take, receive
old, unfading. wait for. gain.

’deTO¢, -0v, 0, an eagle. re GLVOC, -Ov, O, praise. vEeas, -@, 6, a temple.

aixpahwroc,-ov, captured. evyouat, to pray, beg. wAelorToc, -7, -ov, most

- avopetoc, -d, -ov, manly, typevTic, -od, 6, a hunts- fddzoc, -id, -cov, easy.

brave. man, @ sportsman. céGouat, to honor, rever

— aveyewr, -, 76, a hall, a @ypebw, to hunt, catch. ence.

-Toom. ihewc, -wv, merciful. Td0¢, -O, 6, a peacock.
anayo, to lead away. kGAwe, -@, 6, a rope. vide, -0d, 6, a son.
Baivo, to walk, go, pro- xritw, to found, build. GOTEp, as, just as.

ceed. Aaya, -6, 6, a hare. :

Toic Geoicl ved xrigovTa. Od bddedv éorty éxt Kahwv Baiver. Ardxopev
tod¢ Aayac. *Avdpbyews Tv 6 Tob Mivw vidc. Oi Aay@ Snpetovta bxd Tav
nosvtav. Ebyou r6 thew Sed. | Ol deol rolc hayoe évedpebovow. LéBeoSe
Tove tAewe Seotc. Oi avdpetor aynpwv éxavov AauBavovory. Etyou tov Sedv
idew éveltv. Ot Geol toic dyadoic? ited eiowv. Ai Rdoval dmayover Tov TAEioToVv
Aeov Gcrep aixyuahwtov. Oi Lamsot TH “Hp! Karode Tade Tpédovaty.

We build beautiful temples to the gods. To walk on a rope is not €asy.
The huntsmen hunt hares. God is merciful. Worship the merciful God. By
the Samians beautiful peacocks are kept in honor of Hera (say, to Hera), Keep
yourselves, O citizens, from the irrational multitude! Get out of the way of
(eikw, w gen.) the irrational multitude. The huntsman strives after (pursues)
hares.

X. Vocabulary.

’"Ardyopebu, to call.

épéckw, w. dat., to please.

1 § 161, 5.

apeTn, “16, Ts bravery, vir-
tue.

Baotieta, -wr, Ta, a royal
palace.

el

2 § 161, 5. (a).

32 THIRD DECLENSION.—CASE-ENDINGS. , 32.

yapetn, -F¢, 7, & wife. Ewc, -o, 7, the dawn. TounThc, od, 6, a poet.

decAéc,-7,-6v,timid, worth- Sypiov, -ov, 76, a wild fododaxrvAoc, -ov, rosy-
less, bad. beast, an animal. fingered.

£x-dépo, to bring forth, ‘lepdc, -d, -Ov, w. gen.,sa- oTHAn, -7¢, 7, a pillar.
produce. . Jous. cred to.

trixivddvoc, -ov, danger-

Oi rad Tie “Hpac iepod foav. Oavuilouev Mevédewy éxt tH GpeTG. Ot Trown-
rat THv “Ew fododéxrvAov dxayopetovety.. ‘H dAgdera woddakic obk apéoxet
TO Ae. ‘EXévyn jv 7 Mevédew yauern. ‘H BaGvdwvia éxdéper woddove raac.
‘Evy toic Tév Gedy vede ToAAal oT7Aa joav. Oi Aayd detAd Enpia eioiv. ‘O
wept Tov "AY TAoi¢ Hv éenixivddvos. Ta Bacihea kaha avayew Exel.

Menelaus is admired for his bravery. In the royal paiace are splendid rooms.
Huntsmen catch peacocks. Peacocks are beautiful. Trust not the speech of
the people, O citizens! The huntsman lies in wait for peacocks. Good citi-
zens flee from the irrational multitude. Youths lie in wait for hares. The pil-
lars of the temples are beautiful.

§ 31. Third Deelension.
The third declension has the following Case-endings :

Singular.

o¢
f Dat. t ot(v) ow
§ Acc. vy and @ Neut.— | de; —adie
i Voc. | mostly as the Nom.; Neut.— | «ec; —d.| e.

These endings are appended to the unchanged stem of the word; e. g. 6 Sip
an animal, Gen. 7p-6¢.

§32. Remarks on the Case-endings.

1. The pure stem is frequently changed in the Nom. of masculines andfemi-
nines. But this is found again by omitting the genitive ending -o¢; e. g. 6 Ké-
pag, a raven, Gen. KOp aK -o¢.

2. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nominative. Yet the euphony of the
Greek language does not permit a word to end with 7. Hence, in this case, t
is either wholly rejected or is changed into its cognate o; e. g.

ans bt Pale :
, { memept _ {7 wéxept _ { mexépt-oc or 2-0¢
a oehac 5 TO céhac S (cé2.ac-oc¢) oéia-o¢
aR | Copar tz | TO (cGuar) copa © | c@uar-o¢

Tepar #6 (Tépar) Tépac TEpaT-o¢

_ 3. The Accusative singular has the form in v with masculines and feminines
im -/¢, -v¢, -av¢ and -ovc¢, whose stem ends in -1, -v, -av and -ov; e. g.
tem vod Nom. wéArc Ace. xéAtv Stem Borpv Nom. Bérpve Ace. Bérpuv.
vav vac vaov Bov Bodg Bovy.
But the Acc. has the form in -a, when the stem ends in a consonant; e. g. o2e2,
bree, dAé8a— nopax, KApak, kopak-a— Aaurad, Aauzac, AGpréd-a.

§ 33.] THIRD DEC.—GENDER, QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. 33

Yet barytoned substantives in -c¢ and -ve, of two ‘or more syllables, whose
stems end with a ‘Tau-mute, C prose, have only the form in -v; e. g.

Stem ép.5 Nom. épi¢ Ace. tpi
opvud opVvig opyi
Koput KOpUC KOpuy
xapit xapic xapww.

4. The Voc. is either like the Nom. or the stem. See the Paradigms.
5. Oh v égeAgvorixéy, see § 7, 1, (a).
A

§ 33. Ponder. Pianist Bie Accentuation py
Third Declension.

I. Gender. ‘The gender of the third declension will be best learned by obser-
yution. The following rules, however, may be observed:

(a) Masculine; (a) Substantives in -av, -vv, -a¢ (Gen. -avoc, -avToc), -evg, -nV,
etp (except 7 xetp, hand), -vp (except 7d ip, fire), -ovg (except 7d ov¢, ear) ;—
(8) those in -wv, -np, -wp, -y¢ (Gen. -yTo¢), -w¢ (Gen. -wroc), -, with several
exceptions.

(b) Feminine; (a) Substantives in -a¢ (Gen. -ddoc), -ave, -cv¢, -vve, -@ and
-¢ (Gen. -ob¢) ; “67n¢, -bTH¢; -et¢ (except 6 KTEic, comb) ;—(f) those in -c¢, -cv,
-u¢, -av (Gen. -ovoc), with several exceptions. ‘Those in -£ vary between the
Mase. and Fem. gender.

(c) Neuter; All substantives in -a, -7, -op, -wp, -0¢, -t, -ap, (except 6 pap, a
starling), -a¢ (Gen. -aTo¢, -aoc, except 6 Adc, a stone), and contracts in -yp.

II. Quantity. Words whose Nom. ends in -aé, -vS, -v§, -aw, -up, -vi), -i¢ and
-u¢, have the penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according
as the vowel of the above endings is short or long by nature; e. g. 6 Gapdé,
coat of mail, -aKoc, 7 pip, reed, pide, 7 axTic, ray, -ivoc, but 7 PAGE, clod, -éKoe,
4 éAric, hope, -idoc. :

Ill. Accentuation. (a) The accent remains, through the several Cases, on the
accented syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws of accentuation permit; e. g.
76 Tpdyud, deed, rpiypatoc, but mpaypatwr, Td dvoua, name, dvouaToc, but t vo-
uaTaV, 0 7 xeALOav, swallow, yedtddvoc, ZevodGyv, -GvTo¢, -GvTec, -OvTwv. The
particular exceptions will be noticed in the paradigms. (b) Words of one syl- —
lable are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, on the final syllable,
the short syllables -oc, -c and -ov, taking the aeute, and the long syllables -wv
and ovv, the circumflex; e. g. 6 uAv, unvoc, unvl, unvoiv, unvev pgoi(v).

Exceptions. ‘The fllpaine monosyllabic substantives are Paes in the
Gen. Pl. and in the Gen. and Dat. Dual: 7 Od¢, torch, 6 duce, slave, 6 7 Sac,
jackal, 76 ot¢, Gen. O76¢, ear, 6 4 raic, child, 6 ofc, moth, 6 4 Tpd&c, Trojan, 7
ogc, Gen. $00, a burning, Td d6¢, Gen. durée, light; e. g. dfduv, dddowv, Foor,
Tar, OTolv, Taidwr, Taidoly, céwv, Tpdwv, gSdwyr, ddTwv. Moreover, notice
should also be taken of 7d, all, every, Gen. navtéc¢, Dat. ravi, but tavTor,
naot(v), 6 Hav, Gen. Iavéc, but rot¢ Waor(v).

34 THIRD DEC.—STEMS ENDING IN A CONSONANT. _— [§ 34,

A. WorpDSs WHICH IN THE GENITIVE HAVE A CONSONANT BE-
FORE THE ENDING -0¢, i. €«. WORDS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A.
CONSONANT.

§34.1. The Nominative exhibits the pure stem.

The case endings are appended to the unchanged Nominative.
Stems which end in -vz (Fevogarr) a and -9z (7 Sdpegr), must drop
the z according to § 82,2; hence Zervéqar, Gen. -covt-os, Sanco,
Gen. -a@z-os.

6, Paean. 6, Age. 6, Xenophon. 6, Month. 70, Nectar.
Talay aia evooav iy véxTap
TALaVv-o¢ aidv-oc¢ FevogGvt-o¢ pnv-0¢ VEKTAP-06
TALEV=-L ai@v-t FEvog@vT-t unv-t VEKTaP-b
TAldv-a aidv-a Hevogavt-a Lv-a véxTap
Talay aiav Revogov pay VEKTAP

nav.
G.
D.
A.
¥.

vw
SPOOZ

TALGV-EC ai@v-e¢ RevooOvtT-e¢ PHV-EC VEKTaP-a
TALEV-WV aiOv-ov REVO~OVT-OV Lenv-Ov VEKTAP-OV
mald-ou(v)* aiG-oul(v)* Zevode-ou(v)* py-ci(v)* véxrap-or(v)
TALGV-ac aidy-ac EevobavT-a¢ Lnv-a¢ vEKTaN-@
TALGV-EC aidv-e¢ HevogGvr-e¢ LAV-EC vEKTap-a

S)
=|
=

TaLdv-e aidv-e Fevogoovt-€ Lijv-€ VEKTaP-E
maldv-ov = akv-oly = Bevogdw@vt-orv =—gunv-otv VEKTGP-OlV.

Rem.1. The three words in -wyv, Gen. -wvoc, viz. ’AmwéAAwy, Tlocedév, F
dhwy, threshing-floor, can be contracted in the Acc. Sing. after dropping », thus,
"Av6AAw, Tloce:dG, GAw. The three substantives, ’Awé6AAwy, Tocesdév and ou-
THp, preserver, contrary to the rule [§ 33, III. (a)], have in the Voc. & *“AroAAo»,
Tlécetdov, cdrep.

Rem. 2. The neuters belonging to this class all end in -p (-ap, Of; -OP, -v0);
To wip (Gen. rip-6¢), fire, has v long, contrary to § 32, 2

XI. Vocabulary.

Adu, to sing, celebrate in 34/2, to bloom, be ver- zip, zipéc, 76, fire.

song. dant. omovoaioc,-aid,-aiov, zeal
dva-ylyvooka, to read. O7p, Onpoc, 6,a wild beast. ous, diligent, earnest,
aid, -Gvoc, 6, aevum, an Kidapd, -ac, }, a lyre. serious.

age, a space of time, xpdar7p, -jpoc, 6,a mixing 7ép7e, to delight.

time, lifetime. bowl, goblet. Téprropuat, w.dat.,to delight
BiB2iov, -ov, T6, a book. Aeiuav -Gvoc,6,ameadow. in, or be delighted at.
ytyvooke, to know, think, virrw, to wash. xveip, velpoc, 7, the hand.

judge, try, perceive. . malay, -Gvoc, 6, a war- yopdc, -ov, 6, a dance.
Varia, -ac, 7, a feast. song, a song of victory. wWiv, Wyvec, 6, a baad

CAA CY

Peiye todce Vjpac. Xelp yeipa vinrer. ’Anéyouv rod dnvoc. Oi Rewiver
Pahdovaw... Oi orparidrar ddover ravéva. ’Ev rupl ypvodv kat dpyvpov yty-

—_—_-

* Instead of raraévot, aidvor, Zevoddvror, unvoi, § 8, 6 and 7.

§35.] THIRD DEC.—STEMS LENGTHENED IN THE NOM. a)

vookouev. IloAAot mapa xpargpe yiyvovtas dior éraipo. Ol dvdpurros rép-
movra KeSape Kai Sadia Kai yopoig Kai maaow. Ol “EAAnvec tiv ’AréAAw
kat Tov IlocetdG aéBovrat. Ol orovdaior patnral Ta Tob Revogavroc Bipria
H0éws dvayltyvockovow. fT « ok
Flee from the wild beast. Wash your (the) hahds. Keep yourself from ©
wasps. The meadow is verdant. Soldiers delight in war-songs. War-songs
are sung by (i760, w. gen.) the soldiers. We delight in beautiful meadows.
Flee from vile (kaxéc¢) wasps., Many are friends of the bow]. Poets pray to
Poseidon. ;

§ 35. Il. The Nominative lengthens the short final
vowelofthe stem, eorotnto x oro.

According to § 32, 2. stems in yz must drop z in the Nom.; e. g.
Agov, instead of Agcy.

6, Shepherd. 6, A Divinity. 6, Lion. 6, Air. 6, Orator.
TOULAY Oaipwv Aéwv aidnp patwp
TOLMLEV-O6 Oaiwov-o¢ Aéovt-o¢ aivdép-o¢ pjtop-o¢
TOLMLEV-L daiwov-t AéovT-t aivép-t pytop-t
TOLLEV-@ Oalpov-a AéovT-a aidép-a pjtop-a
TOLMAY Oaipov Aéov aidinp pyTop

TOLMEV-ES Oaipov-e¢ Aéovt-eg — aidép-e¢ pntop-e¢
TOLMLEV-WV datov-wv Aeovt-wy = ai BEp-wv /nTop-wv

a

te
APU) <b OaA

Tolwé-ol(v)* daiso-ou(v)* Aéovor(v)* aidép-or(v) parop-cu(r)
TOLMLEV-AC Oalpwov-a¢ AéovT-ac aidép-ac pjtop-a¢
TOLpev-eC Oaipov-ec Aéovt-ec aivép-e¢ pntop-e¢

o
P=|
ca

TOLMEV-E Oaipov-e AéovT-e aitép-e patop-e
TFOLLEV-OLV OaLuov-olv Acovt-orv = ai BEp-owv pntop-olv.

Rem. 1. Oxytoned substantives of this class retain in the Voc. the long vowel
(7, ©); thus, & zorunv. The Voc. ddep from danp, brother-in-law, is an excep-
tion; its accent also differs from the fundamental rule [§ 33, III. (a)]. This
difference occurs also in the Voce. of ’Apdiwr, -iovoc, "Ayauéuvar, -ovog, viz.
“Audtov, ’Ayaueuvov. Comp. § 34, Rem. 1.

Rem. 2. ‘H veip, hand, Gen. yvetp-d¢, etc. has in the Dat. Pl. and Dual yep-
oi(v) and yepoir.

Rem. 3. The following in -wv, Gen. -ovoc, reject the v in particular Cases,
and suffer contraction: 7 eixav, image, Gen, eixdvoc and eixovc, Dat. eixove, Acc.
eixévafand eik®, Acc. Pl. eixévac and eixotc,—the irregular accentuation of eixa
and eixot¢ should be noted; 7 addr, nightingale, Gen. dnddvog and andodve, Dat.
anoot; 7 xeEALdav, swallow, Gen. yedsdévog, Dat. veAcdot.

Rem. 4. Here belong: (a) the two adjectives 6 7 dxatwp, To ararop, father-
less, and ayjrwp, duntop, motherless, Gen. -opo¢ ;—(b) the adjective 6 7 appnr,
7d appev, male, Gen. appevoc;—(c) adjectives in -ov (Masc. and Fem.), -ov
(Neut.); e. g. 6 7 eitdaipwr, rd evdatuor, fortunate, and comparatives in -wy, -ov,
or -fav, -iov. These comparatives, after dropping v admit contraction in the

a § YG, 2. (e}: * Instead of rouuévor, daiwovot, AedvTot, see § 8, 6 and 7.

36

Ace. Sing. and in the Nom., Acc. and Voc. Pl. In the Voc. the accent differs
from the rule [§ 33, III. (a)]. But compounds in -¢owy follow the rule; e.g.
KpaTepogpwy, Voc. kpatepogpov.

THIRD DEC.—STEMS LENGTHENED IN THE NOM. [§ 35.

More hostile.
éySiov éxBiov

Greater.
peilov

Fortunate.
eldaiwwr evdalpor

pellav

evdaimovog
evdaiuove
evdaiuova

evdaluov

eddaiwovec evdaipova

> -
evdal“ovav

evdaipuoot(v)
evdaiuovag evdaimova

like the Nominative.

? 7
evdaipsove

evdatLovoly.

*Ayav, too much, too.

ayéAn,-n¢,7,a herd, a flock.

aoikoc, -ov, wojust.

aiShp, -Epoc, 0, 7, cether,
the heavens.

yépwv, -ovToc, 6, an old
man. [nity.

éaiwwv, -ovoc, 6, 7, a divi-

Ofuoc, -ov, 6, the people,
the mob.

ed, well, ed 7paTTw, w.acc.,
to do well to.

evdatpov

éyiovoc
exViove
éyViova and»
éySio
éySiov
éySioves
éy Siovc éyVio
ex BL6vev
éxVioor(v)
éySiovacg
éyBioug éxViw
ex Siove
éySibvouv.

XI. “Vocabulary.
HYELOV, -Ovoc, 6, a leader.
KoAaoTh¢, -o0, 0, a pun-

isher.

Aiuny, -evoc, 6, a harbour.

vaiw, to dwell.

606¢, -ov, 7, a Way; with
eLka, to retire from the
way.

628106, -id, -tov, and 6A-

GLo¢, -ov, happy.
molunv, -Evoc, 0, a herds-

man, a shepherd.

éyBiov

éySiova | wellovec

éySiova | peilovac

like the Nominative.

peetlovoc
pelCove
and :
peilov -

petlova
peilo
petCov
peilova
peiCoveg psifo
plover
peiCoor(v)
petfova
petCoug - pela
like the Nominative.
peeiCove
peecCovoty.

TpatTa, to do, act; w. adv.,
to fare.

cogpwr, -ov, sound-mind-
ed, wise, sensible.

itépopwr, -ov, high-mind-
ed, haughty.

dp7r, -Evoc, 7, pl. dpévec,
the understanding, the
mind or spirit.

¢uAatto, to guard, look
after, defend.

Tov yépovTa ed xpatre. ZéBov trode daiuovac.
Aatrovoly. Tov Kaxov dgeiye, O¢ Kaxdv Améva.
obk GABLo¢ éoTiv. ‘O Vese év aiSépr vaiet.
Tov avoporurv dpévac.
t7¢ 6000.

Ol rowéves Tag dyéAac ov-
*Avev dainovog 6 dvbpuroc
"Act yaderal wépiyuvat Teipover Tac
"Exov ayatvoic pyenoow. ike, 6 veavia, toi¢ yépover
TloAAGkic Ojpoc iyyeuova éxet ddixov vorv. ‘O Bede KoAaorhe éore
T&v Gyav drEepgpovav. “Exe votv odgpova. *Q daiuov, wapexe toi¢ yépovar
" peyaAnv eitoyiav. Ot Onpevral toic Aéovow évedpetovory.

Do well (pl.) to old men. Reverence (pl.) the Deity. The flocks are guard-
ed by the shepherd. Follow a good leader. Go, youth, out of the old man’s
way. ‘The mob often follows bad leaders. The spirit (pl.) of man is worn out
by (dat.) oppressive cares. Keep yourself from the bad man, as from a bad
harbour. The flocks follow the shepherds. Ye (O) gods, guard the good old
men.

§ 36. | THIRD DEC.—STEMS LENGTHENED IN THE NOM. 37

§ 36. The following substantives in -yjo belong to the preceding
paradigms, viz. 6 zacyo, father, y untne, mother, 4 @vyarno, daugh-
ter, 4 yaoryo, belly, 41 Anpyzne, Demeter (Ceres) and 6 dvi, man,
which differ from those of the above paradigms only in rejecting ¢
in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in the Dat. PL, and in inserting an
é in the Dat. Pl. before the ending -o1, so as to soften the pronun-
ciation. The word ajo (stem cvep), rejects e in all Cases and
Numbers, except the Voc. Sing., but inserts a 6, to soften the pro-
nunciation.

i D.N.A. V.| warép-e LNTEpE Svuyarépe av-0-pe
| G. and D. | zarép-ov byt EpoLv vuyarépowv av-0-poiv.

Remark. Also the word 6 dor, -époc, a star, which has no syncopated
form, belongs to this class on account of the form of the Dat. Pl. dorpaov. The
word 7 Anuyjtnp has a varying accent, vis. A7untpoc. Agunt pt, Voc. A7-
Hntep, but Ace. Anuntépa.

6, Father. 7, Mother. 7, Daughter. 6, Man.
Sing. N. | zar7p paTnp _ esvyarnp cvap
G. | watp-6¢ LNT POC Svyatpo¢g av-0-po¢
D. | xartp-i pentpt Svyatpi dv-0-pt
A. | warép-a pntépa Svyatépa dv-0-pa
V. | zarep MagTEp Svyatep avep
Plur. N. | warép-e¢ Lentépec Suyarépec av-d-pec
G. | warép-ov LnTépov Svyarépwv dv-0-pGv
D. | warp-d-ot(v) pntpdot(v) Suyatpior(v) av-0-p-a-ou(v)
A. | warép-ac Lnrépag Svyarépac dv-d-pa¢
V. | warép-e¢ pntépes Suyarépec av-0-pE¢

het
w IA
2 >
O<

XII. Vocabulary.

"AUAop, -ov, T0,a prize,a _ slave to, serve, work orépyw, to love, to be con
?

reward. fer. tented with.
yastnp, -Tpdc, 7, the belly. éySaipw, to hate. xapifouat, w. dat., to com-
dovAeia, w. dat., to be a codec, -7, -dv, wise. ply with, oblige, gratify

Lrépyete Tov Tatépa Kal THy pntépa. Mi dobAeve yaorpi.' Xaipe, & dire
veavia, TO Gyad@ rarpi® Kat rz dyadH pntpi. M7 KaxO odv &vdpt Bovdaetov
Tq Anuntpe® xoAdot Kat Kadot ved joav. ‘H ayady Suyarnp pdéwe reieTar
TH diAy pytpi.t Oi dyads? dvdpec Savudlovta. TloAAdkic && dyaSod rarpo¢
yiyvetat kaxoe vidc. "ExySaipw tov xaxdv dvdpa. Tote dyadoic avdpict meya-
An 00fa éretat. ‘H rig Aquntpoc Svyaryp jv Tlepcedévyn. *Q didn Siyarep,
orépye THY pntépa. ‘H dperh xaddv GdAdv ori avdpl® cogG.- Oi aya¥ol viol
Tag untépac otépyovowv. Ol “*EAAnvec Anunrépa céBovtar. Tle7Seode, & dior
veavial, Toi¢ TaTpaor Kal Talc untpaoiv. Kapilov, & rarep, TH Svyarpe.

1§ 161, 2. (a), (4). 2 § 161, 2. (c). 3§ 161, 2. (d).
4 § 161, 2. (a), (d). 5 § 161, 5.

4

38 THIRD DEC.—NOM. APPENDS 6 TO THE STEM. [§ 37.

Love, O youths, your (the) fathers and mothers! Consult not with bad
men. Good’ daughters cheerfully follow their (the) mothers. We admire a
good man. Obey, my dear youth, your (the) father and mother. Gratify, dear
father, thy (the) good son. Pray to Demeter. Strive, O son, after the reputa-
tion of thy (the) father. The prize of wise men is virtue.

§ 37. The Nominative appends oc to the stem.

(a) The stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute—f, 2, @3 7, 7/7 % J-
On the coalescence of these with o so as to form w and §, see § 8, 3.

_ 9, Storm. 6, Raven. 6, Throat.
Sing. N. | ®© AaiAay /Q, Kopas Aapoyé
TG. Aatdarr-o¢ Lee, KOPGK-06 Aapvyy-o¢
‘S Aaiddn-e few: KOpGK-L Aapvyy-t
vw Aaidar-a y KOpaK-a Aapvyy-a
» Rairaw @ Kopag Aapvyé

2x Jaihan-e¢ @< Kopax-e¢ Aapvyy-e¢
Y Radin-ov {ox KopuK-ov Aapbyy-wv
Pad AatAape(v) oy Kopage(v) Aapvy§&e(v)
Aaidar-ac KOpaK-ac Aapvyy-ac
Aaidar-e¢ Oo KOpaK-E¢ Aapvyy-e¢

Aainar-e KOpaK-e Aapuyy-€
Aahin-oww KOpGK-oLv Aapvyy-olv.

Remark. Here belong adjectives in -§ (Gen. -yo¢, -xoc, -yoc) and - (Gen.
-roc); @. g. 6 dpriis, Gen. -dyoc, rapax, 6 7 74%, Gen. -ikoc, aequalis, 6 %
avid, Gen. -tyoc, one-horned ; 6 7 aiyidinb, Gen. -iroc, high.

XIV. Vocabulary.

Ayan, -Gvog, 6, a contest. Kdpag, -dxoc, 6, a crow, a aprvé, -aYoe, 6, a quail.

at, -yéc, 6, 7, a goat. raven. dpxnSu6c, -od, 6, a dance. —
GAEKTpvarv, -dvoc, 6, 7, a KpOlw, to croak. 6, d76¢, #4the voice.

cock. paoreé, -iyoc, 7, a scourge, moAvmovoc, -ov, laborious.
down, -76, 1s a song: a whip. obpryé, -lyyoe, 1, a flute.
dé, but. pév—oé, truly —but; on térrvé, -iyoc, 6, a grass-
é2abive, to drive. the one hand——on the _ hopper. - [tor
immoc, -ov, 6, a horse. other: used in antithe- ¢évaé, -dxoc, 6, an impos-
kai—kai, both—and, as __ ses; év, seldom to be ¢dpuryé, -yyoc, 7, a harp.

well as. translated. Gp, orc, %, the counte-
KoAa&, -dkoc, 6, a flatterer. pipun’, -nKoe, 0, an ant. nance.

Oi képaxec xpalovewv. Tode xodakag detye. ’Aréyou tod dévdxoc.1 Of dy
Spwror téprovtat poputyyl? Kat opynbud Kat Qd7. Oi inor paoriéw éAadvor-
tat. Ail ddputyyec Tod TGv avSporav Suuod;> Téprovely. Térreé piv térriye
giroc éoti, wbpunke 68 wdppng. Ol rowuévec rpd¢ Tag cipryyac ddovory. Tlaod
toi¢ ’ASnvaiote kat dptiyav Kat dAextpvévwr Gydvec Hoav. Ol mwotuévec Tae

1 § 157. - §161, 2. (c).

§ 38. | THIRD DEC.- NOM, APPENDS 6 TO THE STEM. 39

tov alyov ayéhag sic Tod Aewdvag thaivovoty. Muppixov kai dpriryuy Bios
modorovog got. IloAdot dyadiyipév Ora, kaxjy dé bra Exoval.

The raven croaks. Flee from the flatterer. Keep yourselves from impos
tors. Men are delighted by the harp. The horse is driven with the whip. The
shepherd sings to the flute. The life of the ant and of the quail is laborious.
The shepherd guards the 2 ee Flutes delight shepherds.

“$38. (b) The stem skits in a Tau-mute—6, z, xz, 0,78. On
the Ace. Sing. in -a and -», see § 32, 3.

7, Torch. 7, Helmet. 6, 7, Bird. 6, King. 7, Tape-worm.
Aapmac* KOopuc” y avag* EAutve*
Aaurad-o¢ Kopu8-o¢ dpvid-o¢ GVAKT-0¢ EA uv 8-06
Aapra-t Kopu0-t opvid-t GVaKT-t Edm F-t
Laprad-a KOpuv opviv GVaKT-G Eu 3-4
Aapnac KOpUG ** Opvic avag EAuve

R

hy
SP baZ|sP Soa

Aapmad-e¢ Kopud-e¢ épvid-e¢ GVaKT-EC EX uty d-E¢
Aaunad-wr Koprd-wv — dpvird-wv avaxt-ov —s- Edi d-ov
Aapra-ou(v)* Kopv-ol(v)* Opvi-or(v)* dvagi(v)* eApi-or(v)*
Aaurad-a¢ Kopv0-a¢ épvtd-ac Gvakt-ac Edu b-ag
Aap a-e¢ Kopud-e¢ OpviS-e¢ GVaKT-E¢ Edu S-e¢

Aaurao-e Kopu0-e opvid-e GVQKT-E Edu S-e
Aaurad-oly Kopvd-orv dpvid-oww dvaxt-ow éhpivd-ouv.

\~)
S
=

Rem. 1.. The word 6 7 7ai¢, child, Gen. wat06c,*has rai in the- Vocative.

Rem. 2. Here belong adjectives in *¢ and -t, Gen. -iduc, -it0¢; e. g7 6 qeet-
yapic, Td evyapt, Gen. -LTOoC, pleasing ; those in ae Gen. -adoc; e@. 2.77 dvyae,
Gen. -G@doc, exiled; those in -47c¢, Gen. -7T0¢; e. ng 0 7 apyinc, Gap. -770¢, white ;
those in -6c, Gen. -6T0¢; e.g. 6 7 ayvec, Gen. a unknown; those in -tc,
Gen. -1do¢; e. g. 6 7 GvaAnic, Gen. -1do¢, weak, 7) Tarpte, Gen. -idoc¢, native land ;
those in -t¢, Gen. -idoc; e. g. 6 7 vénduc, Gen. -vdoc, lately come.

—

XV. Vocabulary.

AraaAatta, w. gen. of the Kata-KptaTw, to conceal. mévie, -nTO¢, ¢ 64.7, POOL, - -

thing, to set free from. KoAdGw,:to punish. TAovGLo¢, -ta, -Lov, rich.
amaoa, -n¢, every. Kovgoc, -7, -ov, light, vain. mAodroc, 6, riches, wealth.

yéAwe -wtoc, 6, laughter. waxapilw,toesteemhappy. ¢povric, -idoc, 7, care, con-
éyeipw, to awaken, excite. vedty¢, -yToc, 7, youth. cern.
EDutve, -vFoc, 7, a worm. vos, vuKtoc, h, night, vuk- g¢iAoypnuootvy,-ne, 7, ava-

éXni¢, -idoc, 7, hope. T6c, by_night, in the rice.

pwc, -iSoc, 7, contention, night. ~ : xaptc, -itoc, 7, favor, kind-
strife. éuotétnc, -nTOC, 7, like- ness,gratitude,elegance.

épwc, -wToc, 6, love. ness. Xenouocbv”, -n¢, 7), need-

KOKOTNS, -NTOC, 7, Wicked- maic, adéc, 6,7, a child, imess, poverty.
ness, Vice. a boy.

* Instead of Aaundadc, xopuSe, dpviSc, Gvakre, EAuivS¢; Dat. Pl. Aaurador,
ete., see § 8, 3.

ag

40 THIRD DECLENSION.—NEUTERS. [§ 39

Gi dpriSec ddovow. Xapie yap rixrer, pre epwv. Makap*lowev THv ved-
tnta. Xpyopocivy tixrer épidac. IAovoros ToAAaKic THY KaKéTyTA TAOITY
Katakpontovawy. "Q Kari rai, eb mpatte TovE dv8porove. ‘H grAoypnuocivy
unrnp Kakorntog araone éotiv. Ok névyTec moAAaKue eioly eddaipovec. ‘H oo-
dia év Toic Tov avSpbrur Supoic Savpactode TOY KaAGY EpwTac éveyeiper. ‘O
Sévaroc trode dvOparove gpovTidwy dxaAAarre. ‘H giAia dv duordrytog yiy-
yetrat. Olvog éyeipet yédwta. Ev vuxti Bovay toi¢ cogoic yiyverat. Oi oo-
got Kordlover tiv KaxétyTa. Ol dvOpwror ToAAAKLC Kobgate EAmiot TEPTOVTAL.

The bird sings. From favor arises favor; from contention, contention. By
(dat.) wisdom a wonderful love (pl.) of the beautiful is awakened in the minds
of men. By (dat.) the song of birds we are delighted. Wine dispels the cares
of men. Flee, my (O) boy, from vice. From (dat.) likeness arises friendship.
We delight in birds (dat.).

§ 39. The stems of neuters belonging to this class, end in ¢ and
xt. But as the laws of euphony admit neither z nor xz at the end
of a word, z and also zz, are either omitted, or z is changed into o.
Comp. § 33, 2. In the words, zd yovv, knee, and zo d0gv, spear,
from the stems yovaz and dogaz, @, the final vowel of the stem, is
changed into v, in the Nominative.

TO, Body. TO, Knee. 70, Milk. 70, Wonder. 70, Ear.
S. N. | cpa yovd yana Tépac ovct
G. | cauat-o¢ yovat-o¢ yadaxt-o¢ TEpaT-0¢ OT-0¢
D. | copar-t yovat-t yanaxt-t TEpart-t OT-t
A. | cua yovu yana Tépag ov
P. N. | o@piat-a yovat-a yadakt-a Tépat-a OTA
G. | cwpat-ov yovat-wv YQAGKT-wy — TEPAT-wY OT-Ov
D. | cépa-ou(v)* yéva-oi(v)* yaAagi(v)* rtépa-ou(v)* @-ci(v)*
A. | o@yuat-a yovat-a yadaKt-a Tépat-a OT-a
Dual. | copar-e yovat-e yahakt-e€ TEpaT-E OT-€
CWLaT-OLv yovat-ov yanaxt-olwv = TEPAT-oLv OT-OLV.

XVI. Vocabulary.

‘Auaprnud, -dtoc, 76, an dépv, dépatoc, 76, a spear. mpdyya, -Gtoc, TO, an ac-

error, an offence. édifw, to accustom. tion, a business, a thing,
arroual, w. gen., to attach Vepdreia, -ac, 7, care, ser- an exploit.

oneself to, touch. vice. bia, -atoc, 76, a word.
3a07Gfw, to carry. idp&¢, -GToc¢, 0, sweat. orévdw, to pour libations,
Bo7Snua, -dtoc, TO, help. ixérnc¢, -ov, 6, a suppliant. pour out.
yaa, -axtoc, TO, milk. pikpoc, -d, -ov, small. TavToAoyia, -ac, #, tau-
yevouat, w. gen. to taste, itor, -ov, 6,a speech,a tology, a repetition of

enjoy. word, an account. what has been said be-
yuurvata, to exercise. TOLKiAO¢, -N, -ov, Various, fore.
4tauciBouat, to exchange. _—- variegated. gaddoc, -7, -ov, bad.

—_—_—_

* Instead cduarot, yovatot, yahaxrot, etc., see § 8, 3. Tt Instead of de.

§ 89.] THIRD DECLENSION.—NEUTERS. 41
Ypiiua, -Gtoc, 76, a thing; xpnoroc, -7, -dv, useful, yuptopoc, -ov, 6, separa-
pl. property, money, good, brave. tion.

treasures.

"Ev yareroic mpdypaowv dAtyot éraipot miotoi eiow, Tie dpetig mAodTOov of
SiaperBoueda Toic xphyacwv. Ol ixérat tév yovatwv' drrovta. ‘O Bavatic
‘éoTe Ywplopos THe Wuxhe kal TOD cdyatoc. ‘O wAodTO¢G mapéxet ToIg avSpororc?
motkiAa Bondjuata. My reidov kaxdv dvdporuv fpyyacw.* Mi dobieve,
wal, TH TOD cOpatoc Separcia. Ol “EAAnvec raic Noudacc? xpatipacg yadaxrog
onévoovow. "Edule cai yipvate rd cbua ody révore Kai idpGtt. Oi ddoAécyxat
Telpovar Ta Ta Talc TavToAoyiate.4 Yuynv eile, 6 wai, mpd¢ TA YpyoTa mpay-
uata. OL daprot pidor Tov tov oby Gxtrovta. Toig dolv* dxobouev. M7
éySaipe didov piKpod duaptjuato¢g Evexa. Tetov, & mai, rob yadaxtoc’ Ol
oTparl@rat ddpata Bactacovely.

In a difficult business there are few faithful friends. Exercise, O youths,
your (the) body with labor and sweat! Strive, O boy, after noble actions.
Many men delight in money. From a noble action arises reputation. We ad-
mire noble actions. Boys taste milk with pleasure. Soldiers fight with spears.

Remarx. The word 7d répa¢ usually admits contraction in the plural, after
T is dropped; e. g. Tépd, Tepv; 7d yépac, reward of honor, T6 ynpac, old age, 76
kpéac, flesh, and Td Képac, horn, reject the 7 in all numbers, and then suffer con
traction in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and PL, except
the Dat. Pl.; besides these forms, however, xépa¢ has also the regular forms

with T.

‘Avdpia, -a¢ 7, bravery.

yépac, 76, a reward, a gift
of honor.

yiipac, TO, old age.

dtatpoo7, -7¢, 7, Dourish-
ment.

Sickohog, -ov,
troublesome.

EXado¢, -ov, 6, 7, a stag.

difficult,

1 § 158, 3. (b).

2 § 161, 5.

Sing. N. | 7d xépac TO Kpéacg
G. Képat-o¢ and (Képa-oc) Képwe (xpéa-o¢) Kpéwe
D. Képat-t and (xépa-i) «Képa (xpéa-i) Kpég
A. Képag Kpéac
Plur. N. Képat-a@ and (képa-a) Képa (xpéa-a) Kpéa
G. Kepat-ov and (xepa-wyv) Kepav (kped-wv) Kpedv
D. Képa-ol(v) Kpéa-ou(v)
A. | xképat-a and (xépa-a) xépa (xpéa-a) Kpéa
D.N. A. V. | Képat-e and (képa-e) Képa (xpéa-e) Kpéa
G. and D. Kepat-olv and (Kepd-olv) Kep@v (Kped-olv) Kpedv.

XVII. Vocabulary.

evegia, good condition.

Seuédtov, -ov, TO, a foun-
dation.

Képac, TO, a horn.

Kpéac, -éaog = -éwe, TO,
flesh, meat..

mwéur, to send.

mpOBarov, -ov, 76, a sheep.

3 § 161, 2. (a), (0).
4*®

4§161 3.

mpo-tTpéro, to turn to, im-
pel. [pet.

oaAryé, -tyyoc, #, a trum-

onpaive, to give a sign,
or signal.

érapyo, to be at hand, or
to be had, be.

pappakor,-ov,70,a remedy.

5 § 158, 5, (a)

42 THIRD DECLENSION.—STEMS IN ¥ OR #7. [§ 40.

OL Seot roicg dvSpdroie tépa réurovow. Tév ev yppg kaxGv dapyaxoy 6
Sivaréc dot. Ta yépa Tode otparidrac ei¢ avdpeiay mpotpémet. “ES aiywv
Kat xpoBarov yada Kat Kpéa mpde Satpodiyy bnadpyet. Képaot' nat odAmvysiv
of orpariérar onuatvovotv. TlorkiAwy Kpe@v® yevdueSa. Karod ygpuc Bepé-
‘ov év maoly ori 9 Tod cHuatos evetia. Al édados Képa Exovorv. AdcKodoc

tor 6 év ynpa Bios.

By (izé, w. gen.) the gods, prodigies are sent to men. Death abolishes the
evils of old age. By (dat.) rewards, soldiers are impelled to bravery. Rejoice,
O youth, at the reward. We admire the beautiful horns of the stag. Many
evils accompany old age. Bear the troubles of old age.

§ 40. (c) The stem ends in » or #7.

7, Nose. 6, Dolphin. 6, Giant. 6, Tooth.
Sing. N. | pic* deAdic* yiyac* odotc*
G. | piv-d¢ deAdiv-o¢ yiyavt-o¢ Od06vT-0¢
D. | plv-t OeAdiv-t yiyavt-t O06vT-t
A. | plv-a dehdiv-a yiyavt-a é00vT-a
V. | piv deAdic(tv) yiyav 6dot¢
Plur. N. | piv-ec¢ OeAdiv-e¢ yiyavt-e¢ O06vT-E¢
G. | piv-dv dc Agiv-wv ytyavT-ov d06vT-wv
D. | pi-oi(v)* deAdi-ou(v)* yiya-ou(v)* 6dov-o1(v)*
A. | piv-ac deAdiv-ag yiyavt-ac é06vT-a¢
V. | piv-ec deAdiv-e¢ yiyavt-e¢ O06vT-EC¢
1 D.N.A. V.| fiv-e deAdiv-e yiyavt- 606vT-€
G. and D. | piv-oiv OeAdiv-ow ylyGvT-olw 6d6vT-oLv.

Rem. 1. Here belong: (a) the two adjectives in -ac, -avva, -av, viz. wédac,
-aiva, -av, black, and TaAac, -atva, -av, wretched ;—(b) tac, r&ca,
7G&v, all, every, and its compounds; e. g. dmdc, dmdoa, dmav ;—(c) Ex»,
-00 64, -6», willing, -6vto¢, -ovo7¢, -6vToc, and GKwy, dxovoa, dxov, unwilling ;—
(d) adjectives in -ee¢, -€ oa, -ev, which are peculiar, inasmuch as the Dat.
Pl., masculine and neuter, ends in -eo instead of -etor; e.g.

Black.
Sing. N. | “éAac pédatva
G. | wéAdvog sedating
D. | wéAave = pueAaivg
A. | pédava = péhatvav
V. | wéAav péhava
Plur. N. | wéAaveg pédatvat
G. | pweAdvov pedavev
D. | wéAace = preAaivaic
A. | péAavac pedaivac
V. | wédavec = peédavar
D.N.A.V.} wédave = peedciva
G.and D. | weAdvowy pedaivary
1§ 161, 3. 2 § 158, 5. (a).

péAav
péAcvog
péhave
peedav
pédav

pédava
pehavav
LéAaot
péhava
pédava

péhave

peAavouv.

TaC
TavToc
TAavTt
TaVvTa
Tae

TAVTEC
TAVTWOV
Tal

TaVTAC
TAVTEC

TavTEe
TAavrolw

All.
Taoa
TACHC
Taon
Taoav
Taoa

TaoaL
TacOv
TACale
maoas
TAAL

Tac"a
Tacalw

TAVTA
TAVTOV
TAL
WOVTA
TavTa

TAVTE
TOVTOLDV.

* Instead of five, deAgive, yiyavte, d06vrTe, pivot, etc., see § 8, 6 and 7.

§41.] THIRD DECLENSION.—STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL. 43

Singular. _ Graceful. Plural.
xapiewc* yapieooa xaptev N. | xapievrec xapiecoat xapievra
xepievtoc yxapsécone xapievtoc | G. | yaplévTwv yaprecoav xaplévTov
xaypievre Kaprécon xaplevre D. xapiect(v) Kaplécoare xapiect(v)
Xapievra xapiecoav xapiev A. | xapiev7 ayy xapiicoag xaplevta
yaplev yapiecoa yapiev V. | yapievtec yapieccat yapievta

<pouaz

Dual N. A. V. |] yapievte yaptécod yapievte
G.and D. | yaprévToww yapléccaw yaptévTouy.

Rem. 2. Adjectives compounded with ddotc, are declined like ddot¢; e. g. 6
7 povédovc, TO jovddor, one-toothed, Gen. ovddovtoc; adjectives in -ac, Gen

-avToe, like yiya¢; e. g. 6 7 dkadpuac, untiring, Gen. -avTos.

XVI. Vocabulary.

*Axric, -ivoc, 7, a beam, a ékr, -otoa, -dv, willing. ddov¢, -dvroc, 6, a tooth.

ray. éiébdc, -avtoc, 6, an ele- dcdpaivomat, to smell.
"ixwv -ovoa, -ov, unwill- _phant, ivory. nic, Taca, Tay, every, all.
ing. EVTOPOC,-ov,w.gen.,abound- so7Té, once, sometimes.
dmdc, -doa, -dv, all to- ing in. pic, pivoc, 7, the nostril,
gether, every. HA1L0¢, -ov, 4, the sun. the nose.
avroc, -7, -0, ipse, 6 abtoc, KwTthoc,-y,-0v,loquacious. Td/Adc,-alva,-dv, wretched.
the same. Acaivo, to make smooth, ¢:AdvSpwro¢, -ov, man-
GpGpa, -Gro¢,76, food, vic- _— grind. loving, philanthropic.
tuals. LaXN, -NC, 7, & battle. yapiele -Eoca, -ev, grace-

yiyde, -avtoc, 6,a giant. péAdc, -atva, -dr, black, ful.
deAgic, -ivoc, 6,a dolphin. dark.

Ov xaowv avSparote 6 abto¢ voic éottv. Tote ddotou Ta Bpdpara Aeaivopev
Oi deAdivec Gidavdpwrot eiowv. “Eottv avdpic? dyadot mavTa Kaka gépewv.
TloAAat AvBing yGpat evrropot eioty éAédavtoc. Tlavtec¢ kwridov dvbpurov éy-
Saipovew. Toi¢ yiydoi? wore jv payn mpd¢ Tode Geotc. Taig Tod HAiov axzi-
o1 yalpouev. ‘Pivdv épyov éoriv dodpaivecvat.

The teeth grind the food. We smell with the nose (dat.). The gods once
had a battle with the giants (To the gods there was once a battle against the
giants). We admire the beautifulivory. Trust not all men. The business of

the teeth is, to grind the food. It is proper for (it is, w. gen.) every man to wor-
ship the Deity.

B. WorDS WHICH IN THE GENITIVE HAVE A VOWEL BEFORE
THE ENDING -0¢.

§ 41. I. Substantives in -evg, -avs, -ove.
The stem of substantives in -evg, -ave, -ovg ends inv. The v
remains at the end of a word and befure consonants, but is omitted

* The dropping the v before o lengthens ¢ into <v.
1 § 161, 3. 2§158 2. 3 § 161, 2. (d). 4§ 161, 2. (c)

44 THIRD DECLENSION.—STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL. [§ 41.

in the middle between vowels. Those in -sv¢ have -¢@ in the Acc.
Sing. and -¢é¢ in the Acc. Pl.; in the Gen. Sing., they take the
Attic Gen. -gc¢ instead of -gog, and in the Dat. Sing. and Nom,
PL, admit contraction, which is not usual in the Acc. Plural. Those
in -«ve and -ove admit contraction only in the Acc. Plural.

6, King. 6, A measure. 6, 7, Ox. 7, An old woman.

S.N. | Baowreve yoeve Bowc, bos for boys ypave¢

G. | Paotré-o¢ yo(éw)G¢ Bo-6¢ ypa-0¢

D. | Baorrei yoet Bo-t ypa-t

A. | Baowré a xyo(éa)a Boov ypavv

V. | Bacthed yoev Bow ypao
P.N. | Baotreic yoeic Bo-e¢ ypa-e¢

G. | Bactré-ov x0(éw) av Bo-Gv ypd-Gv

D. | BactrAetor(v) yoevou(v) Bovoi(v) ypavoi(v)

A. | Baotré-dc¢ yo(éa) ac (80-ac) Bois (ypd-ac) ypave¢

V. | Baoireic yoeic Bo-e¢ ypa-e¢
Dual. | Baorré-e yoée Bo-e ypa-e

Bactnré-ov yoeoLv Bo-oiv ypda-oiv.

Remark. Among the older Attic writers, the Nom. and Voce. Pl. of those in
-ev¢, end also in -7¢; e. g. BaorAte, instead of Bacrieic.

XIX. Vocabulary.

*Apyo, w. gen., to begin, to eixalo, w. dat., to liken, o¢Sadpoc, -ov, 6, an eye.

command, rule. compare. ToAvAoyoc,-ov, loquacious.
PJ - 7 > 4 et F
aripatw, not to honor, de- éviéAeva, -ac, 7, care. mp0, w. gen., before.

spise. Vio, to sacrifice. 7ré—xai,both—and, as well
axaptoroc, -ov, unthank- ‘epetc, -éwc, 0, a priest. as.

ful, ungrateful. 25}p0¢, -ov, 6, loquacity. ¢ovedw, to murder, kill.

*Ayt2Aebc, Achilles. [ing. voyetc, -éwc, 6, pastor, a yoevc, yoc, 6, a Measure
PotAouat, to wish, be will- herdsman, a shepherd. for liquids, a pouring-
yovets, -Ewc, 6, a parent, vou7n, -7¢, 7, pasture. vessel.

pl. parents.

Oi Baoireic ériéderav Eyovor. Tov TodTOY. ‘H dyéAn TO vowet Exera.
‘O "Extwp br6 Tob ’AyiAAéwe doveteTat. Oi iepei¢ toic Veoic? Boic Siovow.
Kipog raic iv ayadav yovéwv. Oi dyapiotor trode yovéag ariatovorv. Tlei-
Tov, @ Tai, Toi¢ yovetotv.! THAéuayoc nv ’Odvocéuc vide. BodtAov rove yovéag
Tpo TavTo¢ év Tiuaic Exetv. Ol TOY ypady Ajpor Ta GTa Telpovoty. Karac
' Epyewc, © Baoided. Ai ypiec woAvddyor eloiv. Oi vouete tv Body ayéAnv sic
vounvy ayovow. "“Ounpog tod¢ ti¢ “Hpac b¢3aduode toig tév Body eixaler
Tarpoxioc gidoc hv ’AyiAAEwe. Kipov, tov tov TepoGv Baovtéa, eri te ti
apeTa Kal TH codia Bavualouer.

The king cares for the citizens. The herds follow the herdsman. Oxen are
sacrificed by (t76, w. gen.) the priests to the gods. The old women by (their)

1 § 161, 2. (a), (4). 2 § 161, 5. eS

?

§ 42.] THIRD DECLENSION.—WORDS IN -7¢ AND -e¢. 45

prating (dat.) plague our (the) ears. Ye rule well, O kings! O priests, sacri-
fice an ox to the god! It is proper for (it is, w. gen.) a good herdsman to take
+ ot the oxen. Children love their (the) parents.

5 42. Il. Words in -ys, -e¢; -ag (Gen. -wog) and -we and -w ( Gen.
-00S) ; -ag (Gen. -aog), -og (Gen. -20¢).

1. The stem of words of this class ends ino. In respect to the
remaining or omission of o, the same rule is observed, as in regard
to v in the preceding class of substantives, viz. the o remains at the
end of a word and before consonants, but is omitted in the middle
between vowels. In the Dat. Pl. a o is omitted; e. g. 0 Fas,
jackal, coig Fos-ci(r).

(1) Words in -7¢ and -ec.

2. The endings -7¢, -e¢, belong only to adjectives (the ending -x¢
being masculine and feminine, and -e¢ neuter), and to proper names
in -parns, -wérns, -yévyg, -xparys, -uidye, -netOns, -cFévyg and
(-xens) -xdq¢, having the termination of adjectives. The neuter
exhibits the pure stem.

8. The words of this class suffer contraction, after the omission
of o, in all Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. Sing. and the Dat. PL. ;
and those in -xAéyg, which are already contracted in the Nom. Sing.
into -zA7s, suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Singular.

Singular. Plural.
N. | cadfe, clear. cagéc (cadé-ec) cageig (cadgé-a) cady
G. | (cadé-o¢) cadoic (cadé-ov) oagav
D. | (cadé-i) cadet oadé-ou(v)
A. | (ca@é-a) cady cagég (cadé-ac) cagei¢ (cadé-a) cadh
V. | cagégs cagéc (cadgé-ec) cagei¢ = (cadé-a) ocagn

Dual N. A. V. } cadé-¢ oagn
G. and D. | cadé-owv oadoiv.
Singular. Plural. Dual

7 Tpinpnc, trireme. (Tpt#pe-ec) Tpiypere (TpLApe-e) Tplapy
(tpiqpe-oc) Tpenpove tpinpé-ov and Tpijpwv (Tpinpé-olv) Tpenpoiv
(Tprjpe-t) Tprnper Tptnpe-ou(v)

(Tpujpe-a tpiypn (Tpunpe-ac) —_ rpehpere
TpinpeEc (Tpe7jpe-ec) Tpinpet¢
Singular.
N. | Loxparne (Ilepuxrénc) Ilepexaje
G. | Zoxparove (Ilepexaée-oc) Tepexaéove
D. | Zoxparer (Tepierée-i) ( Tlepexaéec) Tepixarci
A. | Zoxpaty — (Iepexdée-a) Tlepixréa
V. | 2expatec — (Ilepicreec) TlepixAerc.

<b U2

Item. 1. The contraction in the Dual, viz. tpijpee =: tpippn is worthy of no-
tice, since here -ee is contracted into -7, and not as elsewhere, into -ez.
Rem. 2. In adjectives in -7¢, -ec, preceded by a vowel, -ea is commonly not

46 THIRD DECLENSION.—WORDS IN -@s. [§ 43,

contracted into -7 (as in cadéa = cad), but into -@ (as in IepuxAée-a = -2éa)
e g. dkAene, without fame, Mase. and Fem. Acc. Sing., and Neut. Nom. Acc. and
Voe. Pl. dkreéa = anhed, bythe, healthy, byréa = byea.

Rem. 3. Proper names with the above endings, and also “Ap7e¢, form the Ace.
Sing. both according to the first and third declensions, and are therefore called
Heteroclites ; e. g Loxpatea = Loxpatyn, and Lwxparyyv according to the first
declension. Yet with those in -xA#¢ the Acc. in -xA7v is not usual in good At-
tic prose.

Rem. 4. The Voc. of paroxytones differs, m its accentuation, from the rule
in §33, III. (a). In the contracted Gen. Pl., rprypyc, adtapKne, contented, and.
compounds of 7So¢, are paroxytones, contrary to the rule [§ 11, 2. (2) (b) ()],

XX. Vocabulary.

Aioxpéc,-é,-6v,disgraceful. dovdeia, -ac, 7, slavery. woTdudc, -ov, 6, a river.

axpa7ine, -éc, immoderate, éAsaipw, to pity- coglaT7c, -0v, 6, a teacher
incontinent, intemper- éAod7¢, -ec, marshy. of eloquence, a sophist.
ate, wanting in self- "IvdvK7, 7, India. cwTnpia, -ac, %, safety,
command. KGAGUoe, -ov, 6, a reed. welfare.

aandnc, -éc, true. Aéyo, to say. TOTOC, -OV, 0, a place.

itvyne, -éc, unfortunate. Mavdavy, Mandane. Tp&ywdia, -ac, 7, a trag-

’"Aorvayne, Astyages. Gutaia, -ac, 7, w. dat, — edy.

agavnc, -€¢, unknown, ob- intercourse (with any
scure. one).

Ai rod Yodox2éove Tpaywdiat Kadai ciow. Tov Ilepixréad txt tH codia Vav-
pavouev. TS Loxparer! woAdAol padytal joav. ‘H "Ivdixy rapa te Tove wora-
pode Kal Tode EAGdELg TOmOVE HépeL KaAdpove oAAcic. — Aéye det TA GAHdh.
‘Avagayépac, 6 codioTthc, diddoKahocg jv Tod IlepixAgove. "Q ‘“Hpakdecc, toic
atuxéot cuTnpiav mipexe. "Enapewvovdac ratpic? nv ddavotc. "EAéaipe Tr
aruyn avSpwrov. Mavdavyn nv Svyatnp ’Aotrvayovc, Tod Mydwv PBacrréac.
'OpéyeoSe, © veavial, dAndadv Adywv. Oi axpareic aicypav dovdeiav® doviebou-
civ. M7 dudriav éye axpatet dvSporw.4

Pericles had great wisdom (to Pericles there was great wisdom). Pity un-
fortunate men. Many young men were pupils of Socrates. The intemperate
(man) serves a disgraceful slavery. We admire Sophocles for his (the) splen-
did tragedies. ‘True words are believed. We pity the life of unfortunate men,
Do not have intercourse with intemperate men.

§ 43. (2) Words in -w¢ (Gen. -wog), and in -w¢g and -w (Gen. -008).

(a)-o¢, Gen. -woc.

—

S. N. | 6, 7 oc, Jackal. Pl. 36-e¢ S. 6 7pwc, Hero. Pl. 7pw-e¢

-G. Vu-6¢ GO-Wv ipw-o¢ 7pO-av
12 Su-i Sa-ci(v) ipo -L npw-ou(v)
ze GO-a G-ac 7po-a and 7p how- -ac and 7pw¢
SH¢ UO-E¢ Hpac 7pW-EC

D. N V. 36 e, G. and D. ne D. 7pw-e, 79-01.
1 § 161, 2. (a). 2 § 158, 1. 3 § 159. 2 4 § 161, 2. (a) (a).

§44.] THIRD DECLENSION.—WORDS IN -w¢, -@ AND -6. 47

: (b) -w¢ and -o, Gen. -o0¢=-ovc,

Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The ending
-o¢ is retained in the common language only in the substantive «j-
dag. The Dual and Pl. are formed like substantives in -0g of the
second declension, thus, aidoé, nyol, etc.

7 ye

| Sing. N. | 7 aiddéc (stem aidoc), Shame.

17% (stem 7x9¢), Echo.
G. (aidé-o¢) aidoic¢ (776-0¢) hxoi¢g
\ Dp. (aid6-i) aidoi (7x6-i) nxot
A. (aid6-a) aida (7x6-a) XO
we (aid6-Z) aidoi. i not

XXI. Vocabulary.
"Ayadoc, -7, -6v, good. Adrnpbc, -d, -dv, sad, trou- m™poo-BAéTw, to look at.

aidac, 7, shame, modesty, blesome. mpoo-erut, adsum, to be
__reverence. Avoiac, Lysias. present, be joined to.
duac, Suwoc, 6, a slave. Aipixéc, -7, -dv, lyric. oéBac, 76, (only in Nom.
ebeoTo, -60¢ = -oiic, 4}, Orble, -ewc, #, the counte- and Acc.) respect, es-
well-being, prosperity. nance, the visage. teem.
loropioypadoc, -ov, 6, an TaTpwe, -Wo¢, 6, an uncle weddw, to belie, deceive ;
historian. (by the father’s side). Mad. to lie.
k7T0C, -ov, 6, a garden. TELOO, -60¢ = -obc, 7, per-
suasiveness.

“Ounpoc Edet roAAodc jpwac. Tv rev 9pOwvr aperiv SavudGouev. Of Oudec
Biov Aurnpov ayoveww. ‘O Tod TETPWOS Kimo Kadbc éoTLY. ’Opéyou, & rai,
aldote. Aiddc¢ dyaVoic avdpaow éxerat. Todv Avotay ém TH Tevdol Kal yapire
Vavpyacouev. TH aidot mpoceott 76 oéCac. Mi TpocBAere tiv Topyoic ower,
‘Q°Hyol, peidere roAAGKuc rode avSporove. Tévrec opéyovtat ebecroiic. TI pé-
wet veavia aidd éyew. KAewd cal "Epat® Moicai eiow. Try Bev Krew Sepa-
revovatv of latoproypador, Tv de "Epate of Avpixol rownrat.

Homer celebrates the hero Achilles in song. The bravery of the hero is
wonderful. Slaves lead (to slaves there is) a troublesome life. The uncle has
(to the uncle there is) a beautiful garden. All delight in prosperity. Admire,
O young man, with reverence, the actions of good men! We admire the per
suasiveness and elegance of Lysias. We are often deceived by Echo.

\

§ 44. (3) Words tn -a¢ (Gen. -aoe), and in -o¢ (Gen. -gog).
(a) -ac, Gen. -aoc. ‘

Only the neuters 26 czae, light, and co déaag, goblet, belong to
this class.

Sing. N. | 73 céhac, light. Pl. céAa-a and céAa Dual. céAa-e
G. oéha-oc o&eia-wv oeAa-ouy.
D. oéAa-i and céia oéAa-o(v)

A. oéhac oéda-a and oéAa

THIRD DECLENSION.—WORDS IN -0¢.

[s 44,

(b) -o¢, Gen. -e0¢=-ove.

Substantives of this class are likewise neuter.

In the Nom.,

e, the stem-vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o.

Sing. N. | 70 yévoc for yévec, genus. TdKAéoc for KAéeg, glory.
G. (yéve-oc) ——- yévoug (KAée-oc) xAéovg
D. (yéve-i) yévet (xAée-i) Khéet
A. yévog KAE0G
Plur. N. | = (yéve-c) yévn (xAée-a) KAéa
G. yevé-wy and yevav (xAcé-wv) — KAeGY
D. yéve-ol(v) khée-ol{v)
aN (yéve-a) yévn (xA€ée-a) KAEG
Dual. | (yéve-e) yévn (xAée-e) KA EN
(yevé-orv) —_yevoiv (xAeé-olv) _KAeoiv.

Remark«. On the contraction in the Dual of -ee into -7 instead of -e1, see § 42,
Rem. 1; -e2 in the plural preceded by a vowel, is contracted into -a, not into -7 ;

e. g. KAéea = KAEG.

"AAAG, sed, but.

“vepoc, -ov, 6, the wind.

avSoc, -£0¢ = -0uc, TO, a
flower. [safe.

acoaane, -éc, firm, secure,

yévoc,-£0¢ = -0UE, TO, race,
descent.

Yits YS, 7 the earth.

Jethoc, -7, -dv, cowardly, -
worthless.

2 1piv6c, -4, -Ov, spring, 7. e.
belonging to the spring,
(€ap) vernal.

‘A yy avSeow éapwvoic SaAXec.
aréyov wiyouc Kat VaArove.
Ovx dodahéc tote wav thoc dv BuynTo yévet.
pav Kepddv. Képdn movnpa Cyuiav det dépet.}
Oi avipworot KAéove dpéyovTat.

olvoc 0& vov.
2 ~ ~ > 7
dvopeiot KAeGv OpéyovTat.

Abstain from dishonest gain. We delight in spring flowers.
yourself, O youth, from cold (pl.) and heat! (pl.).
Punishment follows the lie.

(the) famous actions.
for (gen.) fame.

1 See rule of Syntax, p. 27.

XX. Vocabulary.

eidoc, -e0¢ = -ove, 76, the
figure, the form.

émoc, -€0¢ = -ove, TO, a
word.

Cnuia, -ac, 7, injury, pun-
ishment, loss.

VaAroc, -E0¢ = -ovc, TO,
heat.

Svytéoc, -f, -6v, mortal.

4 iv a

Képd0¢, -E0¢ = -0vC, TO,
gain.

4 ca By v4

KAéoc, -éeoc = -éove, TO,

fame, pl.famous actions.

Tov xaxdv dead éxn dépovoly avepol.
Td Kaddv od pHket Ypovov Kpivouev, GAAG apeTi.
My weddn Aéye.
Katonrpov eldove yadxoc éortv,
Oi avdpec KhéEt Yaipovety.

Comp. Ilepxaéa (§ 42, Rem. 2).

Kpive, cerno, to separate,
judge, discern, choose.

pijKoc, -€0¢ = -ovg, TO,
length. '

TOVNPOC, -d, -Ov, dishonest,
wicked.

cédac, -aoc, TO, splendor.

bwoc,-e0¢= -ove,T0, height,
elevation.

yva2xoc, -ov, 6, brass.

wetdoc, -€0¢ = -oU¢E, TO,
a lie. [cold.

wiyoc, -E0¢ = -ove, 76,

M7?
"Améyou Tovn-

Oi

Savpavouey TA TOV dvdpGv KAéa.

Keep not

Flee from dishonest gains.
We admire the Hellenes for (é7/, w. dat.) their
Soldiers are impelled to noble actions by (dat.) the love
The famous actions of soldiers are admired.

$§ 45, 46.] THIRD DECILENSION.—WORDS IN -tg, -v¢, -t, -v. 49

§ 45. II. Words in ~U0, VQ, “ty -U.

, (1) Words in -i¢, -ic.

6 kKi¢, corn-worm. 6

7 od¢, a boar, a sow. 6 iyP6c, fish.

wh
5
ag

QA

d ki-6¢ ov-6¢ iySi-oc
D. Ki-t ov-t indi-i
A. Kip odv iySiv
V. Kt od indi
Plur. N. Ki-ec ot-ec ixdSi-ec
G. Ki-Gv ov-Gyv ivdi-ov
D. ki-ci(v)} ov-oi(v) ixSt-ou(v)
A. Ki-a¢ ot-ac and cir ixSi-ac, rarer ivSic
jb Ki-e¢ Gv-ec iySi-ec
eae Ve Ki-€ ov-e iy Si-e
d D. Ki-oiv ov-oiv indo-ov.

XXUT. Vocabulary.

"AyxlLOTpOV,-0U, 70, ahook. Parpaxoc, -ov, 6,a frog. véKic, -toc, 6, a Corpse, &

a) pevo, to catch. Potpic, -toc, 6, a cluster dead body.
aurehoc, -ov, 7, a vine. of grapes. mayic, -idog, 4, a trap, a
dva-kvTTw, to peep up or coc, -7, -ov, like, equal. - snare.

out, emerge. Lic, -b6c, 6, mils, miris, a oTaxic, -toc, 6, an ear
Bacihetw, w. gen., to be mouse. of corn.

king, rule.

Oi ixSbeg éx Tod xoTayuod dvaxintovew. Ol Onpevtai tag chag dypetovery.
ilavre¢ loot véxveg- wuydv 62 Sede Baordetber ‘H dumenog géper Bétpuc. H
7 dépet orayvac Kal Bétpvac. Of pbec nayiow dypetovta. Oi ZLipot céBov-
Tat Tove ixdi¢ H¢ Geove. Toic pval® paxn wor’ hy mpde Tode Barpayoug. ’Ay-

xlotpote évedpebouev Toic ixSbouv.

We catch fishes with hooks. ‘The huntsman lies in wait for the boars. The
elusters (of grapes) and ears (of corn) are beautiful. The vine’ is abounding
(evmopoc, w. gen.) in clusters of grapes. The frogs once had a battle with the
mice (‘lo the frogs was once a battle against the mice).

§ 46. (2) Words in -ig, i, vo, v.

The stem-vowels ¢ and v remain only in the Acc. and Voc. Sing. ;
in the other Cases they are changed into «. In the Gen. Sing. and
‘Pl, masculine or feminine substantives end in -g and -wv,—in

which case w has no influence on the place of the accent. Comp.
§ 30, Rem. 2.

*§ 158, 7. (a). 2 § 161, 2. (a).

50 THIRD DECLENSION.—WOERDS IN -is, -l -vg, -v. [§ 46.

TOAtC, city. 6 mHyxVvE, cubit. 7d civazt, mustard. Td dor, city.

!
iy

‘OR
a

G. TOAE-WE TIX E-WE olvare-0c G@OTe-0¢

D woAEL mHyet olvaret GOTEL

A. TOALY THUY civate aorv

wit TOM THYV oivart Gotu
Plur. N. moAELe THES olvarn aoTn

G. TOAE-WY THIYE-OV OLvarré-Wv éoré-wv

1. mOAE-ol(v) mHpxEe-oL\v) oware-ou(v) aote-ou(v)

A. ToAELg TAYE owarn Gorn

Vv. TOAELC THYELC olvarn GoTn
Dual. TOAE-E TAYE-E OLVaTE-E aore-e

qToAé-olv TN XE-OLV olvaré-Olv Goré-olv.

Rem. 1. Here belong adjectives in te, -eZa, -v, the declension of which does
not differ from that of substantives, except that the Gen. of the masculine sin- -
gular has the common form -éo¢ (not -ew¢), and that the neuter plural is always
uncontracted. ‘Thus:

Singular. Sweet. Plural.
yAunig yAvkeia = yAvkb N.| yAvecic yAvxeiat yAvxéa
yAvné-o¢ yAvneidg ydveé-o¢ | G.| yAveéwy ydAveetGv ydAvKéwy
yavket = =yAvKeia~—syAvket D. | yAveéou(v) yAveeiatce yAvkéor(v)
yAvkiv §=yAvkeiav yAvKi A.| yAvneig =yAvkeide §=—-yAvkéa
yAvko yAvkeia = yAukd V.| yavecig = yAuketae = yAvkéa

Dual N. A. V. | yAveée =yAveciad ~—syAukée
G.and D. | yAveéoww yAveeiaty yAvxéowv.

N.
G.
D.
A.
¥-

Here also belong adjectives in -ic, -t, Gen. -zo¢, which are declined like
yAvkdc, -d, except that the neuter plural in -ea is contracted into -7 (as do77);
e. g. 6 7 dimnyve, Td dinnyv, two cubits long, Ta dumnyxN.

Rem. 2. Some substantives in -ic, and also adjectives in -t¢, -t, e. g. topic,
idpt, skilled in, have a regular inflection; so also the word 7 éyyeAve, eel, in the
singular.

e e

6, 7 wOpTee, calf. 7 éyxedve, eel.
TOpTL-0¢ eyxéAv-0¢
TOPTl-b mopti = yy xéAv-i
TOpTLV éyxvedvv
TOpTL éyxehv

ep
B

ee
A

SPOR:

mopti-e¢ woptic éyxéders
TopTi-wy éyxéle-wv
TopTt-ou(v) éyxéhe-ol(v)
mopti-ag moptic éyyéderc
mopti-e¢ mwoptic éyyxédece

iN
G.
D.
A.
V.

TOpTl-€ éyxéhe-e
TopTi-oLv éyxeré-owv

XXIV. Vocabulary.

‘Apxn, -i¢, 7, a beginning, trates, authorities, of- doéAyeva, -a¢, 7, excess.
command, pl. magis- _fices of command. BéBatoc,-d,-ov,firm,secure.

§ 47.]

3por6¢, -74, -dv, mortal.
Bpdotg, -ews, 7, eating.
Ocagopoc, -ov, different.
dapov, -ov, TO, a gift.
évdeta, -a¢, 7, want.
ériUupia, -ac, 7, desire.
Kap7o¢, -ov, 6, fruit.
KOopoc, -ov, 6, an oma-
ment, order, the world.
KTHpa, -GTOC, TO, a pos-
session. [session.
KTHOLC, -EWC, 7, gain, pos-

"AcéAyera TikTer UBprv.
orovdaiw mpaypate ddiyot.

Yoer. “Exou TH dtoe.?

Kal wayac Tapéyovaty.

xeove, © ToAiTaAL, oTacEewr.}

Tav Bpotéy dicecc.
Ovyow ovK éyet.
Oi Kaprot yAvKeic¢ eiowv.
Teiyn Exel.

Riches free from neediness and want.

guardians of the laws.

session of virtue is alone secure.
fight for the safety of cities.

IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.

L6voc, -n, -ov, alone.

vopoc, -ov, 6, a law.

OVIOLG, -EWs, 7, advantage.

TIHXVG, -Ews, 0, the elbow,
a cubit.

TOAELOG, -Ov, 0, War.

TOALC, -E0C, 7, a town, a
state, a city.

mOpTtc, -Lo¢, 0, 7, a heifer.

mOotg, -ewc, 4, drinking,
drink.

mpagsic¢, -€W¢, 7, an action.

5)

TUPYOC, -ov, 6, a tower.

oT avic, -ews, 7, neediness,
want.

oracle, -ewc, 7, a faction,
sedition.

ovvEctG, -Ew¢, 7, under-
standing.

bBprc, -ewc, 7, insolence,
haughtiness.

pvAaé, -xoc, 6, a guard, 4
guardian.

giolc, -ews, 7, nature.

"Ev wécet kat Bodoer toAAol eiow éetaipor, év dé
>

'O rhottocg oravews! Kal évdciag Tove dvb paroue

Ai ar6 Tod capatog éexvOvpiar ToAE“WOvE Kai Graces

"Ev taic méAeolv ai apyal vouwr ddAaké¢ ciow.
’OpéyeoSe Kahov mpagenv.®
"EE bGpews TOAAG Kaka yiyveTat.
Adga Kat mAobTo¢ Gvev ovvécewe ovK GoduAR KTHUaTE EicLY.
’ApeTng BéBarai ciow ai KTHoELg povat.
Oi Tov doTEeo¢ Tipyot KaAoi eiowv. Oi Tipyot TS GoTEL4 KécpOE Eiciv.

"AréE-
Atadopoi eiow al
Kakod avdpi¢ dépa

TloAAd Gorn

In the state the magistrates are the
Strive, O young man, after a noble action!
Good laws bring order to states.
Flee, O citizens, from factions!

The pos-
Soldiers

§ 47. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension.
1. Avyo, see § 36; yala, yoru, ddgv, ovs, § 89; xeio, § 35, Rem. 2
2. Fvvi, (7, woman), Gen. yvvaix-oc, Dat. yuvoux-i, Acc. yu-

. vaiz-a, Vor. yuvat; Pl. yuvaines, yuvaimor, yvvasi(v), yurainas.

38. Zeve, Gen. As, Dat. Ai, Ace. Dia, Voc. Zed.

4. Oot& (7, hair), Gen. zery-6¢, Dat. Pl. SerSi(v), see § 8, 11.

5. Kheic (y, key), Gen. xded-og, Dat. xded-i, Ace. xieid-c
and (commonly) xdsiy; Pl. Nom. and Acc. xdgig, also xdsidec,

x1El0 ac.

6. Kvwy (0, 7, dog), Gen. xvr-0¢, Dat. xvvi, Acc. xvva, Voc.
xvov; Pl. xvvec, nuveay, uvoi(v), xvvac.

7. 4a (0, stone), Gen. Aé0¢, Dat. Aa, Ace. A&P, = ae ;
Pl. dees, aon, hieoou(?).

8. Maorve (0, 7, witness), Gen. wagtugos, Dat. weorvet, Acc.
paéorvec, more seldom waotuy; Dat. Pl. ucozior(r).

a

1 § 157.

2 § 161, 2. (a) (0).

3 § 158,

9. Nave (q, navis), Gen. vews, Dat. vi, Acc. vavy; Dual:

3. (b).

4 § 16], 5.

52 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. [§ 48.

Gen. and Dat. veotv (Nom. and Ace. are not in use); Pl. »yee,
vewr, vavoi(v), vavc. Comp. yous, § 41.
10. “Y 5 wo (zo, water), Gen. vdatos, ete.

XXV. Vocabulary.

Avnvaioc, -ov, 6, an Athe- sive, to set right, guide. Laprupia, “a6, #, testimony.
nian. loréc, -od, 6, a loom. oikia, -ac, 1, a house.
"Adyc, -ov, 6, Hades, the Kedaan, -7¢, 7, the head. o/koc, -ov, 6, a house.
god of the lower world xiorTn,-n¢, 7, a chest, a mepidpoyoc, -oy, running

(Pluto). coffer. round, gad- about.
dm.oroc, -ov, unfaithful, xolAaive, to hollow out. TET, -A, q, & rock.
meredible. [treaty. xowilw, to bring. oTuyev, -6voc, 7, a drop,

Oénole, -EWC, 7, an en- «KTeéic, -Evdc, 6, a comb.
déxouat, to receive. KTevic@, to comb.
ékkAnoia, -ac, 7, an as- KUPoc, -ov, 6, a die.

sembly. KUBEpVNTNC,-0v,0, a steers-
Opis, Tprx6c, 7, the hair. man, a pilot.

or dropping.
cate, to save, preserve.
COTHP, -jpoc, 0, a Saver,

a preserver.
Ogéheva,-a¢, 7, advantage.
Oi "EAAnvec céBovtat Aia. Tate yuvarsiv
‘O KuBepvatng THY vay -

"Extaipw yvvaixa Te-
Tuvarkde! éoSijc éoTl o0-

Ai yuvaixec TO KOouw@ xaipovorr.
7 aidac mpévet. Oi Kivec tov oixov dvAatrovoly.
iSivet. Ai oraydvec Tov iaTog TéTPAV KoLAaivovELY.
pidpowov. THe yuvatkdoc! éore Tv oikov gvAatTetv.
Cewv oikiav. *Aelt ed mintovowy of Atd¢e KiBor. Oi Kbvec Toic dvb parog agée-
Aevav Kal ndovyv mapéyovow. Ai THv papTipwy papTupiat ToAAGKIC GmLOTOL
eiowv. ‘Iorol yuvaikdv Epya, kat obk éxxAnoiat. Koptle, & nai, THY THE Kio-
tHe KAeiv. *Q Zed, déyou tHv tod arvyovc dénow. Kéotwp kat IodAvdetxne
Tév vedv owrTnpec Hoav. Tvvaiki® racy kionov 7 otyn pépet. Ot yépovTec
oAiyac Tpixac év TH KEgaAH éyovowy. *Q yiva, odle THY oixiav. TO KTevi? tac
Tpixac KTeviCouev. ‘O Aiaxdc Tac Tov “Adov KAEic guAGTTEL. —

The woman delights in ornament. It is the duty (it is, w. gen.) of women to
look after the house. Bring, O boy, the key of the house! Women delight in
beautiful hair. The Athenians had (To the Athenians were) many ships.
Trust not all witnesses. It is the business (it is, w. gen.) of dogs to guard the

house. Zeus had (To Zeus were) many temples. The fishes peep up from the
water. The steersmen guide the ships. Modesty becomes 2 woman.

§ 48. Irregular Adjectives.

Tpaoe
™paov
Tpaw
Tpaov
mpaoc, Tpae
4 TPaor

TPAaEwv

. N.
G.
DD.
A.
¥.
N.
G.
D.

A.
‘V. | zpdot andawpaecic mTpaeiat TpPaéa
-A. V.| paw Tpaeia Taw
d D. Tpaelarv Tpaolv.
1§ 158, 2 2 § 161, 5. 3 § 161, 3.

and mpaelc¢

mpaowe and Tpaécr(v)
mpaovg and mpacic¢

Tpacia
Tpaciae
Tpacia
Tpaeltav
Tpacia

Tpaeltal
TPAELav
Tpaetiare
mpaetiag

mpaov, mild.
Tpaov

TPL

Tpaov
Tpaov

Tpaéa
TPatwv
mTpaéot(y)
Tpata

§ 48.] IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 55

rohi¢g roAdg rob, much. | péyag peyadn pé 7 4, great.
G. | ToAA0b )§=roAARE TOAdOD peyanov peyahng be yaa ov
D. | m0AAG =TOAAG TOAAG peyahy peyahg peyane
A. | ToAbiv TordAny TOAD péyav peyaagy peya
Vij rorb Toaan road pbéya peyadAn péya
Plur. N. | woAdaot = roadai rorad peyahot péyada peyaha
G. | woAAGy = rodAGy TOAAGY Leyahwv peyahov peya2wv

e474

etc. ’ etc. regular.

etc. regular.

“ Declersion of Participles.

S. N. | ordc oTuiGa oTiv Aimav Aimotca =imov
G. | oravTog ‘braonc oTavTog Aimovtog Atxovong AtirévToc
D. | orav7t = ao Tan OTaVTL Aimévte Atrovon hirovee
A. |oTavTa = oTdoav oray hixovta dAtnovoav Aimov
V. | orac oTdoa ori Aivav Aimotca §=Airév
P.N. | oravtec = otdoat OTaVTa AinévTec Atrovcat ArwovTa
G. | oravtwy oTracéy = oravTwV hrovTav -Airovodyv Air6vToOV
D. | ordoi(v) ocracatg = ordou(v) Atrovou(v) Arrobcatg Arrobat(v)
A. \oravrac o7Tdodc oTavTa AimovTac Atrovcdc AirévTa
V. | ocravtec | oTdéoat OTaVTa AinévTe¢ = Aimwovoat AimwovTa
Dual. | oravte = o rao OTaVvTE Ainévte dAtrotod dinovTe
|oravtow ordcav ortavtow. | AimévTo Auroboay AuxévToww.
S. N. | Aepdeic -cioa—-éV ayyEAav -odca = -odv
G. | AewpSévtog -ciong = -Ev Tog ayyendovvtog -ovong -otvTo¢
D, | Aci@bévte = -eiog SEV TL dyyehotvTe -ovon = -od vt
A. | Aegtévta -eioav = -év ayyedotvTa =-ovcav = -odv
V. | AerdBeic -eloa = - EV ayyedov -ovoa = -ovv
PN: = -eloat -évTa ayyehotvteg -otcat -ovvTa
G. | AewpSévtwv = -eloGv = -€vTWY ayyehobvtTwy -ovoGy -ovvTwY
D. | AccoSetou(v) -eicare -eiot(v) ayyerovot -ovoatg -ovcL
A. | Aewdévtag- -eiodg = -év Ta dyyehovvtag -ovod¢g -ovvTa
‘V. | Aevdbévteg -eioat = -év Ta ayyehotvtes -ovoat -ovrvTa
Dual. | 2eg0évTe = -eioak_— ss - EVIE ayyehotvte -ovcd -otvTe
Aergtévrtowy -eioaty -évTow. ayyehobvToty -ovcay -ovvToLy.

Remar«K. All participles in -a¢ are declined like ordc, and all present, second
Aor. and first Fut. participles in -wy, like A:7ov, and first and second Aor. pas-
' give participles, like Aez@Veic, and all second Fut. Act. participles, like dyyeAév.

XXVI. Vocabulary.

AlyvmToc, -ov, 7), Egypt. Kak@v "lAlac, a multi- waGoc, -sor = -ove, Te,
Ghyoc, -e0¢ = -ovc, TO, tude of evils. suffering, a passion.

pain. Mexedav, -6voc,-6, Mace- odbc, toAAg, TOA, much,
a&gSovia, -ac, 7, absence _ donian. many, great.

of envy, abundance. péya, greatly. mpaoc, Tpaeia, Tpaor, soft,
ESoc, -e0¢ = -ove, TO, cus- dAcyoc,-7,-0v, little,small. mild.

tom, manner. 69éA2@, to nourish, in- poo-ayopetw, to call,
TA1ac, -adocg, 7, the Iliad, _ crease. ‘name

5*

o4 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [§§ 49, 50

m™poa-000¢, -0v, 7, an ap- olro¢, -ov, 6, corn. be connected or attend
proach, an income, rev- ¢6Goc, -ov, 6, fear; ¢6Bov ed with fear.
enue, reditus. éyev, to have fear, to

TloAdy olvov aivey xaxdv éotiv. Oi Bactheic peyada¢g mpocddove éEyovory.
"Ep Alyirrp roAdy citov agSovia hv. ‘H Yadarra weyady éotiv. Méya we
Soe mpocayopevopev Iida KaxGv. Kpoiow' iv moAdve mAovTos. TloAAdkig 2&
dAriyne HOovng péya yiyvetar GdAyog. Tlpaéoe (mptouc) Adyorg WOéwe elkouev.
Ta peyaha ddpa tie tiyne exer P0Bov. ToAAdyv avbporov én éori Tpaéa.
Ilévoc dpetnv péya ogéAAe. Oi maideg Tod¢e mpael¢ (mpuove) TaTépac Kai Ta¢
mpaeiac pntépac otépyovav. ‘Opsriav exe Toig xpaéowy (mpaorc) dvbparoic.?
Ai yuvaixec mpaetat eicty. ’AdEEavdpov, Tov TGv Makedéver Baoidéa, wéyav
aTayopevovolv. e

Abstain from much wine. Kings have (to kings are) great revenues. Egypt
has (in Egypt is) great abundance of corn. Croesus has (to Croesus are)
great riches. Strive after mild manners. Women have (to women is) a mild
nature (¢vcvc). Alexander, king of the Macedonians, is called the Great.

§ 49. Comparison of Adjectives.

The Greek language has two forms to indicate the two degrees
of comparison (Comparative and Superlative); much the most
common form is -z7e90¢, -té0 a, -teQ07, for the Comparative,
and -taztos, -taty, -taror, for the Superlative; a much
more rare form is -i ov, -i0¥v, or -wv, -o¥, for the Compara-
tive, and -taoto¢g, -iory, -toto», for the Superlative.

Rem. 1. The Superlative expresses a quality in the highest degree, or only
in a very high degree.

Rem. 2. Instead of the simple forms of the Comparative and Superlative, the

Greek, like the Latin, can prefix wdAAov (magis) and paArota (maxime) to the
Positive.

“> §50. A. First Form of Comparison. *

Comparative, -ze90¢, -7é0G, -TEQOY.
Superlative, -caztosc, -taTYy, -TAaTOY.

The following adjectives annex these forms in the following man-
"ers

I. Adjectives in -0¢, -7 (- @), - 0».

(a) Most adjectives of this class, after dropping o, annex th
above endings to the pure stem, and retain the 0, when a syllabl-
long by nature or by position, § 9, 8, precedes, (a mute and liquid
always make the syllable long here); but, in order to prevent the

ee

1 § 161, 2. (d 2 § 161, 2. (a), (a).

§ 50.] ADJECTIVES.—FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 55

concurrence of toomany short syllables, o is lengthened into w, when
a short syllable precedes; e. g.

Kod$-06, light, Com. Kkoud-6-Tepo¢ Sup. Koug-6-TaT OC, -1], -Ov,
ioxip-6¢, strong, “ ioyip-6-TEepoc, iovip-6-Taroc,
Aerz-6¢, thin, “< Zent-6-TEpOC, “© Aenr-6-TaTOC
agodp-6c, vehement, “ ododp-6-TEpos, “ ogodp-6-TaTos,

TUK p-O¢, bitter, “< qLKp-6-TEpOs, ‘6 @lKp-0-TaTOC,
cog-6¢, wise, “© G06-@-TEpOS, “ G0$-0-TATOE,
éyip-6c, firm, “ éyvip-d-TEpoe, “ éyip-G-TaToCF,
agi-oc, worthy, “ aéi-O-TEpoe, “ @gi--TaTOE.

-(b) Contracts in -eo¢ — -ovg and -00¢ = -ovg, suffer contraction
in the Comparative and Superlative also, since ¢ of the former is ab-
sorbed by , but the latter, after dropping o¢, insert the syllable ec,
which is contracted with the preceding 0; e. g.

Tophip-e0¢ = Topgup-0t¢ amA-60¢ = drh-00¢
mopoup-EeOT Epo == Topgup--TEpOC émho-éo-Tepog = arA-ov¢-TEpog
Topgup-e@Tatoc = Topgup-@-TaTo¢ = Gt A0-éo-TaTog = drA-ova-TaTOG

Here belong also contracts of two endings in -ov¢e and -ovv; e.g. evy-o0¢
= eiv-ouc, Neut. civ-oov = etv-ovy, Com. eivo-éo-Tepoc = ebv-obo-tTepoc, Sup.
ebyo-éo-TaToc = etv-otvG-TaTOoC.

(c) The following adjectives in -asog, viz. yseatds, old, 2a-
Autos, ancient, m&0at0¢, on the other side, cyoLaios, at le-
sure, drop -og and append -tego¢ and -razog to the root; e. g.

yepat-6c, Com. yepai-tepoc, Sup. yepai-raroe,
Tanal-6e, “< gahai-repoe, “ qwadai-TarToe.

(d) The following adjectives in -0¢, viz. e% Seog, calm, 4 6v-
406, quiet, idt0¢, own, icos, equal, uécos, middle, 60 Fotos,
early, 6108, late, and woos, in the morning, after dropping
-0¢, insert the syllable a, so that the Comparative and Superlative
of these adjectives are like the preceding in -atog; e. g.

péo-oc, Com. peo-ai-tepoc, Sup. peo-ai-rartoe,
idt-0¢ ee idt-ai-T epoc, ‘¢ idt-ai-rarToc.

Rem. 1. @iroc, beloved, dear, has three different forms: ¢tATepo¢, dA0-
Tatoc; diAtepoc, diATaTog; ptdAaitepoc, oLAairaroe.

(e) Two adjectives in -o¢, viz. €66apévosg, strong, and
&x0&T0S, unmixed, after dropping -o¢, insert the syllable e¢; e. g.
EG Gapev-£0-TEQ0G, EGSWPEY-E5-TATOS, HXOUT-EO-TEQOS, AKOUT-EO-TATOS.
So also aidotoc, modest, has aidovgorarog in the Superlative.

(f) The following adjectives in -o¢, viz. Aa10¢, talkative,
wovogayos, eating alone, bwopeayos, dainty, and zr7m406S,
poor, after dropping og, insert the syllable 1; e. g. Acd-o¢, Com.
ad-ic-reoos, Sup. Aai-ic-raros.

56 ADJECTIVES.—FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. ~ [§ 90

II. Adjectives in -7¢, Gen. -ov, and wevdye, -¢, false, Gen.
-oc, shorten the ending -y¢ into -1¢3 e. g. xAenr-yg, Gen. -ov, thiev-
ish, Com. xhenz-io-csoos, Sup. xAent-to-razos ; wevdiszEQos, Wev-
dicratos.

XXVII. Vocabulary.
’Ayé2Aw, to adorn; Mid. &voc, -eo¢ = -ove, 76, a TTHxXOC, -f, -6v, begging,

w. dat., to pride oneself nation, a people. _ Very poor.
in, be proud of, delight Aaxedaiydvioc, -ov, 6, a OlWT7, -7¢, 7, Silence.
in. Lacedaemonian. tiutoc, -a, -ov, honored,
alpetoc, -7, -dv, choice, voit, to think, deem. esteemed, valuable.
eligible; Comparative, ovdeic, obdeyia, no one; xedsdav, -6voc, 7, a swal-
preferable to. obdév, nothing. low.
Biatog, -d, -ov, violent. matpic, -idoc, 7, native xpyoluoc, -n, -ov, useful,
dikatoc, -d, -ov, Attic ci- country. advantageous.

Kalog, -ov, just.

Roe or Syntax. The expression denoting comparison, which
in English is subjoined to the Comparative by than, is subjoined
in Greek, by 7, than (quam), or, what is more usual, by the Gen.
without 7, when that expression must have stood in the Nom. or
Ace. after 7 if expressed. Hence the rule: The Comparative gov
erns the Gen. when n ts omitted. ;

*AptoTelone MTWYOTATOC 7Y, GAAG Stxarétatoc. Oi KixAwmec Braroraro: joav.
KadAiac rAovordraroc Av ’AGnvainv. Oddiv ciwnne ote ypnoetepov. Lyn
mor goTlv alperwrépa Adyov. Oix &ore codiac TiyuidTepov. Logia mAobrov
KTiwa Tyuatepoy got. ‘H Aaxedaipoviwy dia:ta iv dmAoveraryn. Ol yepat-
Tepot Talc TOV véwy Tia! dyaAAovTat. Odbdév rarpidog Toig dvOparotc? bid-
tepov. Of "Ivdol radairatov éSvoc? vopifovrat. *Q veaviat, ore Hovyaitarot.
Of Srapriarctol veaviat éhfwpevéotepot qoav TGv ’ASyvaiwv. TloAAol tov xe-
Asévuv eict Aakiorepor. Of dodAce roAAaKic pevdiorator Kal KAETTicTaTOL
eioly.

The father is wiser than the son. The most valuable possession is that of
virtue. The life of Socrates was very simple. No one of the Athenians was
more just than Aristides. The eldest are not always the wisest. Men are
quicter than boys. The Lacedaemonians were very strong. Old women are
often very loquacious. ‘The raven is very thievish.

If. Adjectives of the third Declension:

Those in -v¢, -eia, -¥,—-79, -E¢ (Gen.-20¢),—-&S, -@»,
and the word wax «ae, happy, append -vegos¢ and -¢azog im-
mediately to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter form; e.¢.

yAukic, Neut. -6 — yAvKb-repoc yAvkd-raro¢g
adanSinc, Neut. -é¢ — dAnGéo-repog aAnSéo-Taro¢g

1§161, 2. (c). 2§ 161, 5. (a). 3 § 146, 2.

§ 50.] ADJECTIVES.—FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 57
mévnc, Neut.-e¢ — mevéo-Tepoc Tevés-TATOC
pénac, Neut. -av — peddv-repoc pedav-Tarog
taAac, Neut. -av — taddv-Tepo¢g Tahav-TaTo¢
peaxap, Neut. -ap — paxap-Tepog pakap-Tatoc.

Rem. 2. The adjectives 70ic, rayt¢ and woAte are compared in -iuy
and -wr. See § 51, I. and § 52, 9.

IV. -regog¢ and -razog¢ are appended to the pure stem, after
the insertion of a single letter or of a whole syllable :
(a) Compounds of ya @ug¢ insert w; e. g.
ériyaptc, -t, Gen. éniyapit-oc, pleasant,
Com. ériyapit-o-Tepoc, Sup. ériyapit-O-Taroc.
(b) Adjectives in -1 v, -ov (Gen. -ovoc), insert e¢; e. g. :
evdaipzwv, Neut. evdaiyov, happy,
Com. eidaimov-to-Te00¢, evdatuov-éo-T arose.
(c) Adjectives in -§ sometimes insert e¢, sometimes 1¢; e. g.
ao7naig, Gen.
Com.
Sup.
VY. Adjectives in -e1¢, -ev, insert o, the v of the stem being
dropped, § 8, 6; e. g.

xapierc, Nent. yapiev, pleasant,
Com. yapté-oTepoc, Sup. yaplé-oraroc.

XXVITI. Vocabulary.
yipac, -aoc, 76, old age.
éykpatnc, -é¢, continent,

abstinent, moderate. ovdé, and not, neither, not
evoebnc, -é6, pious. even.

adbnack-oc, growing old,
aonAtK-Eo-TEPOC,
adyAtKk-Eo-TaTOoC,

aprag, Gen. dpray-oc, rapax,
Com. dpray-io-repoc,
Sup. dpray-ic-rartoc.

AiSiow, -o70c, 6, an A-
thiopian.

Airvn, -n¢, 7, 7Bitna.

' ainba, quickly.

6pun, -7¢, 7, impulse, zeal,
desire, rushing.

dprag, -ayoc, rapacious,
rapax. [ weak.

aotevnc, -é¢, powerless,

aTvyxia, -ac, 7, misfortune.

Badic, -eia, -b, deep, pro-
found. :

Bapioc, -eia, -v, heavy, bur-
densome.

= e va va tr > gy & et x 2 2 s
Aiba, oc vénua, wapépyerat ovd’ ixtwr 6 LyveTat @KUTEpA.
> i bf ? 7] Y
‘O Savatoc TO BaduTaTo ixrvy! raparAgotoc éa
Oi véot Toig THY TpEecBuTépwv éExaivorc? yaipovowr.

pac Baptrepov éoriy Aizvne.

TLY.
«2 7 7
éotly aogaheorarn.

Gevéotepol eiot TOV véwr.

keg wehavratot elo.
povéotarol eioty.

tiacg nv aprayiotartoc.

1 § 161, 2. (b).

evyaple, -tTo¢, attractive. wapamAjotoc, -d, -ov, and

78 -n¢, 7, youth.
peooTNG, -TNTOC, 7, mMe-
diocrity, moderation.
vonud,-aroc,76, a thought,

a conception.
opdoc, -7, -dv, straight,
correct, upright.

‘H pecotne év madow aodakecrépa éotiv.
Bovage opdhe obdév éotiy dodaréorepov.
‘H ’Agpodirn qv ebyapitwrarn.
Loxpatng éyxpatéotaroc Hv Kai cwdpovéotaroc.
aruxia moAAaKic of Gvbpurot cwdpovéotepor elowv, 7 év Taic ebrvxiaie.
‘H ’Adgpodirn nv yapieorarn racéy Sedv.

maparAgotoc, -ov, like.
Tapépxoual, to pass by.
mpéoGuc, -sia, -v, and
TpéaBve, -voc, and -ewe
old.

okie, -ela, -0, quick.
To y7

@iAiac Otkaiac KTHoic
Oi yépovTe¢ ao-
Oi Kdpa-
Oi etosBéctarot evdat-
"Ep taic

Ke

2 § 161, 2. (c).

8

58 ADJECTIVES.—SECOND FORM OF COMPARISON. [§ 51

Age is very burdensome. Nothing is quicker than thought. Moderation is
the safest. No bird is (there is not a bird) blacker than the raven. The
AMthiopians are very dark. Nothing is more attractive than youth. No one ot
the Athenians was more moderate or more sensible than Socrates. No one was
more rapacious than Critias. Nothing is more graceful than a beautiful flower.

§51. B. Second Form of Comparison.
Comparative, -i o», Neut. -t 0», or -w », Neut. -o».
Superlative, -10 706, -ioTY, LO TOY.

Rem. 1. On the declension of the Comparative, see § 35, Rem. 4.

This form of comparison includes,

I. Some adjectives in -v $, which drop -v¢ and append -lov, ete. ;
this usually applies only to 75% ¢, sweet, nae ayve, swift. Ta.
yv¢ has in the Comparative ddoowy (Att. Farcwr, § 8, 11), Neut.
Saccov (Factor). Thus:
n0-v¢c, Com. 70-iwv, Neut.70-iov, Sup. 70-coTo¢, -7, -ov:
tay-tc, “ Vaoowrv, Att. BarTwv, Neut. Vacoor, Att. Vaérrov, Sup. Tayoroc.

Rem. 2. The others in -ic¢, as Gatic, deep, Baptc, heavy, Bpadive, slow,
Bpaxtdc, short, yAvkic, sweet, dactc, thick, eipvs¢, wide, 0F%¢, sharp,
mpécBue, old, Oxve, swift, have the form in -ttepoc, -braToc, § 50, IIL.

II. The following adjectives in -g0¢, viz. aiayxo0s, base, éy-
9006, hostile, xv5e6¢, honorable, and oi%70 06, wretched (but
always in the Comparative, oixzgotegos), the ending -go¢ here also
being dropped; e. g. aiczeds, Com. aicy-iwr, Neut. aicy-tov, Sup.
iG Y-LGTOS.

XXIX. Vocabulary.
"A22o¢, -7, -0, alius,-a, ud, kaipoc, -0d, 6, the right oixrtpo¢, -G, -dv, pitiable,
another, Ta GdAAa = _ time, an opportunity; miserable.

TdAAa, the rest, every- time (in general). ooun, ~7¢, 7, & smell.

thing else. [imical. Aourdc, -7,-0v, remaining ddze, -ewe, 6, -7, a snake.
ext poe, -d, -6v, hostile, in- peTa-dépw, to remove, mapéxouat, to afford, bring
(Gov, -ov, TO, a living be- _ change. forth.

ing, an animal.

‘O Ba&biratog irvog Hdtotég éotiv. TloAAG dv dy Hdiorny dopury mapéxeTat.
Oidév Garrov éote THe 7Bn¢. Try aicyiorny dovaciar! of dxpareic dovAebovow.
Ilavtwy ndrotov éotiy 7 gidia. Oddév aicyiiv ori, 7 GAAa pev év vd éxew,
GAda 0& Aéyetv. Oi Odete Toi¢ Aotrolc Cdolc? Ey StoTOL eiotv. ‘O THY TAOVCEIiaY
Biog moAAaKi¢ oiKTpOTEpos EoTLY, jd TOY TEevATav. Tayora? 6 Kalpdc¢ peTadgépet
Ta Tpaypara.

Nothing is more pleasant than a very deep sleep. Nothing is more disgrace-
ful than slavery. The horses are very quick. There is nothing more inimical
than bad advice. The old man has for (dat.) the old man the most pleasant

1 § 159, 2. 7 § 161, 5. (a). 3 Adverbially.

-

§52.] ADJECTIVES.—ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON.

speech, the boy for the boy.

Nothing is more miserable than poverty.

59

The poor have always a very miserable life.

§52. Anomalous Forms of Comparison.

Positive.
. ayaoc, good,

bend

Comparative.

dyeivov, Neut. dyervoy

BeArioy
Kpeioowy, Att. Kpeitrav
Adwy

2. Kaxdc, bad,

KaKlov

xElpov
joowy, Att. itrwv (inferior)

38. Karéc, beauteful, KaAAiov

4. dAyetvoc, painful, adyeworepos
ahyiov

5. paxpéc, long, paKxporepoc

6. tKpdc, small, petKpoOTepoc

édaoowy, Att. éAatrwv

7. dAtyoc, few, pelov

&. uéyac, great, pelCov

9. oAvc, much, tTAEiov or TAéwy
10. bridz0c, easy, pov
11. TETOY, ripe, reTalTEpog
12. ziwv, fat, TLOTEPOC

*"Avaykcioc, -d, -ov, and dv-
ayKatoc, -ov, necessary.

avaykn, -n¢, 7, necessity,
compulsion.

avapyia, -ac, 7, want of
government, anarchy.

P2GBn, -n¢, 7, injury.

yeltwv, -ovoc, 6, 7, @
neighbor.

yveun, opinion, view.

éhetSepoc, -d, -ov, and
éhetSepoc, -ov, free-
born, free.

RULE OF SYNTAX.

Ovx 6 paxpétatog Bloc épiotéc éoTiv, GAAL 6 oxovdatéraroc.
Tyuat tév yepaitépwv dpeivove eiciv.

"H Aéye otyi¢g Kpeittova, 7 oryRy exe.
BKOnTElc, @ AGote.
Ovx éore Adrne yeipov dvopéhrw! Kaxév.

TaOLY UpLoTOV.

BeAtiov ypévov.
TO dogahéctaror.
eloLy.
Kax@v yeiploréov éorw.

XXX. Vocabulary.

EugdToc, -ov, implanted.
éviore, sometimes.
ériBupia, -ac, 7, desire.
evTvy7c, -é¢, fortunate.
i, OY; %—7, either—or,
aut—aut.
"IGnpia, -ac, 7, Spain.
icxto, to be strong or
able, have power, avail.
KeAebo, to order, bid.
kodakeia, -a¢, 7, flattery.
KpOKO0ELAOE, -ov, 6, & Croc-
odile.

Superlative.
aploroc
BéAt.oTog
KpaTloTog
Agotog
KGKLOTOG
xelptoro¢g

KGARLOTOG

cAyewborarog

ahyto To¢

paxporaro¢ and paKkierog
ptKpoTarog

eAaxlorog

oniylorog

péytotog

mAEtoTog

paorog
TET aiTatoc
TOTATOC.

panakéc, -7, -6v, soft.

TOAEuOC, -0v, 6, war.

cKorrw, to joke, jest (Eng.
scoff ).

oTépye, to love, to be sat-
isfied, contented with.

ciuBovdog, -ov, 6, an ad
viser.-

cwdpoovvn, -n¢, 7, sound-
mindedness, modesty,
wisdom, chastity.

‘2g with the Superlative strengthens it, as
quam in Lat.; e. g. wg carota, quam celerrime, as quick as possible.

Mérpov éxt
LbuBovioc oddeic éore
’Ael Kpatiotév éote

"EodAGv Kaxiove évidre ebruyéorepot
Kodakeia tév GAAwv aravrer
"Avijp wahande Thy Wuyxqv® gore Kai? ypnudtov ATTevA

SS eS eS Ee

1 § 161, 5.
‘ is a slave to money.

? The Acc. means, in regard to, see § 159, 7.

3 also.

60 ADVERB.—NATURE, DIVISION AND FORMATION. [$ 53.

Taic yuvardty’ 7 cwdpocbvn Kaddiorn dpeth goriv. Odx gor. KThua KaAALOD
gidov. ‘H dovieia 7H sdevdépy ddryiotn éoriv. “H 600¢ pyKiorn éoriv. ‘O
Kpoxddetaog && éAayiotov yiyverar péysotoc. “H yf éAatrov éotl Tod jAiov.
Lrépye kal? rd pelo. ’OAiycoTor GvOpwror eddainovéc eiow. Ovdele vopoc ic-
xber peilov The dvayKnc. Muxpd népdy moAAaKic peiCovac BAGBac Pépet. *Avap-
yiac petlov odk gott Kaxdv. ‘O mOAEuog TAeloTa Kaka gépe. “Euduroc éore
roic Gvbparoc } Tod wAEiovog éncbupia. Tuva éodAn mheiora dyada TO oiKe
déper. Td dvayxaia Tod Biov® dépe ac PGota. Td keAevery Pdov tore TOD TpaT
rewv. Oi kaprot revatratoi eiotv. "Ev TH Tod TaTpO¢ KAT] ol POTpLEC TETAE
repot eiowv, 7 év TO TOD yeitovoc. "IGnpia tpéder mLOTaTa TpOBaTa.

There is nothing better than a very diligent life. ‘The opinion of the old is
the best. ‘The best adviser is time. Nothing is better than that which is most
safe (than the safest). ‘The worst (persons) are often very fortunate. Sadness
is the worst evil to man. Nothing is worse than flattery. ‘The immoderate
man is a slave to pleasures. In women nothing is better than modesty. Toa
free man nothing is more painful than slavery. ‘The crocodile is very long.
The son is smaller than the father. The good often have more property than
the bad. ‘The poor are often in greater honor than the rich. Avarice is a very
great evil. Nothing brings more evils than war. To order is very easy. It is
easier to bear poverty than sadness. We taste the ripest fruits with great plea-
sure. The sheep of the father are fatter than those of the neighbor.

CHAPTER V.
THE ADVERB.

§53. Nature, Division and Formation of the
Adverd.

1. Adverbs are indeclinable words, denoting a relation of place,
time or manner ; e. g. éxst, there, vuvy, now, xaloc, beautifully, in a
beautiful manner. |

2. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives by assuming the
ending -wg. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the
adjective ; and since the stem of adjectives of the third declension
appears in the genitive, and adjectives in the Gen. Pl. are accented
like adverbs, the following rule may be given for the formation of
adverbs from adjectives: viz. - a» the ending of the adjective in
the Gen. Pl., is changed into -w¢; e. g.

gid-oc, lovely, Gen. Pl. $iA-wv Adv. $iA-w¢
Kar-6c, Sarr, “ KaA-dv Kaa-¢
kaipt-oc, timely, < Katpi-ov Katpl-wl

7§161,5. also. %§158,8. 4 Neuter plural of the superlative of 7#dv¢.

§ 54.] COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 61
GA (6-o¢)ov¢, simple, Gen. Pl. drA(é-av)év — Ady. dA (6-we)d¢
ebv(0-o¢)ovg, benevolent, “ (ebv6-av) ebvor (evvd-we) ebvag
wdc, all, ravToc, ‘¢ «qavT-ov” * TAVT-WC
cappwv, prudent, “ — cwdpov-ov oudpov-wo¢
xapietc, pleasant, “ yaplévT-wv XaplevT-wG
Taxis, swift, “ Taxé-wv Taxé-WC
uéyac, great, “< peyad-wr peyah-wg
arndne, true, “ dAnd(é-wv) dv add (é-w¢)G¢
ovv79n¢, accustomed, “ (ouvySé-ov) ovvnSov (cvvyté-wc) ovviSwe.

Rem. 1. On the accentuation of compounds in -73w¢ and of the compound
aiTapkac, comp. § 42, Rem. 4; also on the accentuation of ebvwc, instead of ed-
voc, § 29, p. 29.

Rem. 2. By appending the three endings -Vev, -3. and -de (-ce), to substan-
tives, pronouns and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the three relations of
place, whence (-Sev), where (-91) and whither (-de or -ce); e. g. obpavd-Gev, from
Heaven, oipavé-31, in Heaven, oipaviv-de, into or to Heaven.

Rem. 3. The ending -de is commonly appended to the Acc. of substantives
only. To pronouns and primitive adverbs, -ce is appended instead of -de; e. g.
éxei-oe, thither, GA0-ce, to another place. In plural substantives in -ac, -ode be-
comes -Ce; e. g. "Adqvace, to Athens.

3. Besides adverbs with the ending -w¢, there are many which
evidently have a case-inflection; e. g. eanivyg, suddenly, avzov,
there, ete. The Acc. Sing. and Pl. of adjectives is very frequently
used adverbially ; e. g. weya ulate, to weep much.

§54. Comparison of Adverbs.

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, have commonly no indepen-
dent adverbial ending for the different forms of comparison, but, in
the Comparative, use the neuter singular, and in the Superlative,
the neuter plural of the corresponding adjective; e. g.

o0bG¢ from cogé¢ Com. codatepov Sup. codérata
capac “ oagdng oagéoTepov cagéotaTa
yapiévtwg =~ yapiete Xapréor epov yapléctata
eddaiuovag “ ebdaipwr evOaluovéaTepov evdalmoveotata
aicxpo¢ “ aioxpo¢ aicxiov aicxlioTa
HOEWC “ 70b¢ HOtov 7OLOTa

TAXEWS “ raxode Sdooov, -TTOv TaXLOTA.

2. All primitive adverbs in -w, e. g. &vw, uate, %£, goo, etc.,
retain this ending regularly in the Comparative, and for the mos‘
part in the Superlative ; e. g.

avo, above Com. dvwrépw Sup. dvwrato

KaTw, below, KaTwTépw KaTWTATO.

In like manner, most other primitive adverbs have the ending -a in
the Comparative and Superlative; e. g.
. 6

62 THE PRONOUNS éy0), ov, Ov. [§ 55, 56.
dyxod, near, Com. dyxoTépa Sup.. ato
tépd, beyond, TEpalTépe up. wanting
tn Aov, far TnAOTEPw Fn hoTaTw
éxac, far, EKaOTEPO éxaoTaTo
éyyv¢, near, éyyvtTépw éyyvra7o and
eyy0TEpov éyytrara

CHAPTER VI.
THE PRONOUN.

§55. Nature and Division of Pronouns.

Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea of an object,
but only the relation of an object to the speaker, since they show
whether the object is the speaker himself (the first person), or the
person or thing addressed (the second person), or the person or
thing spoken of (the third person) ; e. g. J (the teacher) give to¥ou
(the scholar) 2¢ (the book). Pronouns are divided into five ppifici-
pal classes, viz. personal, demonstrative, relative, indefinite and
interrogative pronouns.

§ 56. Il Personal Pronouns.

A. Substantive personal pronouns.
(a) The simple sy, ego, ov, tu, ov, sui.

Singular.
Nom. | 4/6, I av, thou
Gen. | 0d (uov), nod, of me | cod (cov), of thee | ob (0d), of himself, etc.
Dat. | ot (wor), E40, to me | oot (cot), to thee g (0), to himself, ete.
Ace. | Hé (ue), éué, me o€ (ce), thee E (é), himself, ete.

Dual.

N. A. | v0, we both, us both obo, you both

G.D. | vv, of us both, to us | obGv, of you both, | cdwiv (cdwiv), of them

both to you both both, to them both

Plural.

Nom. | 7uc%¢, we ipetc, ye (0) odetc, Neut. odéa, they

Gen. | 7uGv, of us byov, of you (v0) obev, of them

Dat. | 7piv, to us ipiy, to you (0) ogiot(v) (odtor), to them

Acc. | 7G¢, us dude, you (0) odac, Neut. odéa (odea), them.

Hem. 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, with-
out any mark of accentuation. Comp. § 14, (b). On the signification and use
of the third person of the pronoun, see § 169, Rem. 2.

es
oa Se
his Ae

es
§57.] THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS éuautov, ceavrod, éuvtov. 68

XXXII. Vocabulary.
B2ére, to look at, see. dia-dépw, w. gen, to be oovdaiue, zealously, dili-

yap, for. different from, differ gently.

ypaupa, -atoc, TO, that from. ovyxaipw, w. dat. to re-
which is written, an al- dca-¢0-<eipw, todestroy,lay _joice with.
phabetical letter, pl. let- waste. xaplévtwc, gracefully.

ters, literature.

"Ey® piv ypadw, od 0&8 mailerc. LéCopuat oe, © wéya Zed. °Q rai, dxové!
uov. ‘O rarhp pot diAtaréc éotiv. ‘O Bede dei ce Bréver. El pe BAarretc,
otk éySpdv® dvadépetc. "Eyo éppwpevéorepoc eipi cov. ‘Hoéuc TeiSopuat cot,3
© watep. ‘Hyeic buy ovyyaipouevs ‘H Abpa tude ebdpaiver. ‘O Bede jyiv
moAAd ayada mapéxyer. ‘O matyp tbudc orépyet. | "Avdpeing paxeote, © oTpa-
TiOTar: nuavt yap gore THY TEAL ouAGTTeELy* et yap tueic debyere, nica h 76-
Aig dcagSeiperar. ‘Hudr4 éoriv, © maidec, TA ypappyata onovdding paySavery.
‘H patnp vo orépyet. Nov qv Kany vooog. Xdo ExeTE gidov mLoTOTaTOP.
Loadv 6 watHp yapiletar: of yap onovdaing Ta ypaypata pavbavere.

RvuLeE or Syntax. The Nom. of personal pronouns is expressed,
only when they are emphatic, particularly, therefore, in antitheses.

Rem. 2. In the following examples, the italicized pronouns must be express
ed in Greek.

We write, but you play. We both are writing, but you both are playing. I
reverence you, O gods! O boy, hearus! God sees you always. If you injure
us, you do not differ from enemies. We are stronger than you. You rejoice
with us. | I obey you cheerfully, O parents. Our (the) father loves me and
thee. | Our (the) mother loves us both.) | It is my duty (it is of me) to guard the
house ; for I am the guardian of the fiotase: | It is thy duty, O boy, to learn dili-
gently; for thou arta pupil. The lyre affords (to) me and thee pleasure. Both
of you had (to you both was) a very bad illness. Both of you have (to you
both is) a very faithful friend. Our (the) father gratifies both of us (us both)
cheerfully ; for both of us study literature diligently.

§ 57. (b) The reflexive pronouns guavrov, ceavtov, éavtov.

1, The reflexive pronouns of the first and second person decline
separately, in the plural, both pronouns of which they are composed ;
e. g. jueav avtay; that of the third person is either simply éauvza»,
aUTOY, etc., Or GPHY avTHy, etc.

1 § 158, 5. (b). 2 § 157, 3 § 161, 2. (a), (0). 4 § 158, 2

64 THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. | § 58.

Singular.

G. | guavtod, -7¢, of | ceavTov, -7¢, or | €avrod, -7¢, or [self
myself cavtod, -7¢, of thysdf | abtov, “Ii, of himself, of her-
| D.| guavto, -2, to CEQUT®, ~f, OF éav7@, ~Th OF to ztself |

m. yself oavT@, -7, to thyself aiTO, -7), to himself, to herself,

A. | éuavrov, -qr, ‘oeauTonr, “HY; or éauTor, “IY, 26, or lttsel f

myself cavTov, -7v, thyself abrov, -nv, -6, himsdy, herself,
Plural.

opav' aitav, of themselves

éavroi¢ -aic, or abtoic -atc,or

ogiow abroic -aic,to themselves

Eavtobe, -Gc, -@, or above,
-a¢, -4, or

oa¢ abtotc, -ac, o¢éa ad-
Ta, themselves.

ourselves selves
D. | quiv adtoic, -aic, | tuiv avtoic, -aic, to
to ourselves yourselves
A. | nde abrodc, -a¢, | buag abrove, -G¢, your-
ourselves selves

1G. | quav abtév, of | tyGv abtdv, of your- éauTov or avTov, or

§ 58. (ec) The reciprocal pronoun.

The reciprocal pronoun expresses a mutual action of several
persons to each other.

Plur. G. | dAAqAwv, of one another, Dual. dAApAorv, -av, -oww
D. | GAAnAotc, -at¢, -o1¢ adAndotv, -alv, -olv
A. | GAAnove, -a¢, -a GAAnAw, -d, -o.

XXXII. Vocabulary.

"AdSovoc, -ov, not grudg- “aAAov, (= paAtov com- ovora, -ac, 7, being; pro

ing, unenvious. parative of waia) more, _ perty, possession.
BAraBepéc,-4,-6v,injurious.. rather, sooner. mepl-dépw, to carry about.
Kakovpyoc, -ov, injurious, “6vov,adv., only, alone. mAeovéxtye, -ov, avari-

wicked. [doer. Oipavidat, -wr, oi, the in- _ cious. [rich. _
Kakotpyoc, -ov, 6, anevil- habitants of Ouranos, 7Aovri¢w, to enrich, make
Karé, w.acc., according to. the gods. ObéAtpoc, -ov, useful.

'O Bioc roAAG AuTpa ev EavT (abTG) déper. Tiyvwoxe ceavrov (cavtor).
BotAov apéokery aot, uy cavTS wdvov. ‘O ocodd¢ év éauT wepidéper TH ov-
ciay. Pidwv éExaivov paddov 7} cavtod Aéye. “Apetn xa éautgnv gore Kady.
Oi rAcoventat Eavtode wiv TAOVTICovELY, GAAove dé BAGTTOVOWWN, Ody of aKpa-
Tei¢ Toic piv aAdowc BAaBEpoi, EavToic (odiowv abtoic) dé OPEALpol eicty, dAAA
KaKxovpyol Mev TOV GAAwY, EavTOv (odGv avTov) d& TOAD Kakovpyébtepot. ‘Hyueic
nuiv' abtoic jovota yapifoueda. “AdSovor Odpavidar Kat év GAAHAoIG ecaiv.
Oi kako GAAHAovEe BAGTTOVELY.

The wise carry about their (the) possessions with them. The avaricious man
makes himself rich, but he injures others. Ye please yourselves. ‘The immode
rate man is not injurious to others and useful to himself, but he is an evil-doer
to others and much more injurious to himself. Good children love one another.

‘4 161, 2. (c).

§ 59. | ADJECTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 65

§ 59. B. Adjective personal pronouns, or possessive pronouns.

Possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of substantive

personal pronouns :

eucc, -f, -0V, meus, -a, -um, from éuod; ipérepoc, -Téod, -TEpov, noster, -tra,
-trum, from 760 ;

o6c, -f, -6v, tuus, -a, -um, from ood; tyérepoc, -répd, -Tepor, vester, -tra, -trum,
from iuav ;

5¢, 7, Gv, suus, from ov, instead of which, however, the Attic writers use the
Gen. éavrod, -i¢, -Gv, in the reflexive signification, and airod, -7¢, -dv,
in the signification of the personal pronoun of the third person; e. g. timer
Tov éavTod vidv or Tov vidy Tov éavTod, he strikes HIS OWN son, TINTEL aiTOD
TOV vidv or TOV vidV aviTod, he strikes HIS son, (i.e. the son of him, ejus). The
position of the Greek article should be observed.

XXXII. Vocabulary. |
Medijuar, -ov, negligent, weTtayerpiCouat, to uphold, caua, -atoc, 76, the body.
dilatory. lead. TEKVOY, -0v, TO, a Child.

RULE oF SynTAx. The possessive pronouns are expressed in
Greek, only when they are particularly emphatic, especially, there-
fore, in antitheses. When not emphatic, they are omitted, and their
place is supplied by the article, which stands before the substantive ;
e. g. 77 pyTHO otéoyet tv Ovyatéoa, the mother loves HER daughter.
Instead of the adjective personal pronouns éu0¢, a0, etc., the Greek
uses, with the same signification, the Gen. of substantive personal
pronouns, both the simple forms (in the singular the enclitics pov,
cov) and the reflexives (guavzov). The position of the article may
be learned from the following examples.

'O éudc mathip ayadog éotty or 6 TaTHpP pov or pod 6 naTIHp dyaSog éoTW ;
or 6 éuavTo’ maTHp or 6 Tati 4 epavtoo ayatos éotiv. , Ot es maideg
orovdaing Ta ypdupata pavdavovolv. / Oi raidec iuev kanoi etowv. § » 'Yuayv of
maidec oxovdaio: eicoiwv.4 Ta judv ces TEKVE OY TA TEKVA TA HUGY adTdY Wé-
youev. ‘O ceavtod didog or 6 didog 6 ceavtod TLaTOE éoTLV, 6 epemrea, gihog or
6 didog 6 éuavTod Gmiotég éotiv. ‘O od¢ voi¢ TO ody CGma weTaxerpiteTat. ‘O
pév éuoc Taig srovdaide éotiv, 6 O& ade peSjuwr.

Thy father is good. Jfy slave is bad. Our children learn diligently. Many
(persons) love the children of others, but not their own. He admires his own
actions, but not ‘hose of the others.

6*

66 DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. [§§ 60, 61.

§ 60. I. Demonstrative Pronouns.

Singular. ‘
this. emia self, or he, she, it.
téde |ovTo¢ atty tovTo | abTog aitH avTo
Tovde | ToUTOV Tav’THC, TOVTOV | abTod aiTig avTOD
Tode |TOVTW Tad’Ty TO’T® |at’To aiTR abTo
Tode |TovToy TavtAve TotTo | aiToy aityy avTo
Plural. ~~

Pur

rade |ovro: aitat taita | aitot avrait airTa
TGvde | TODTWY TOVTWY TOdTwY | adTOY avTOY aAiTOY
toicde | TovTOLC TabTaLe TovToLc | avToie av’Tai¢c abToic
Ta0e | robrove Tavtag Taita | aiTobcadtac atta
Dual.

7 7 7 ~ 9 la > 7 > 7
tTode | TotTa Tatta Tottw |aito atTa aiTa
Toivoe | TOTOLY TabTaLy TobTOLY | avToiv abratiy aitoiv.

bar

QA
oP

Like oiroc are declined tosottoc, trocaity, TocotTo(v), tantus, -a, -um, TOLOUTOE, |
To.avTy, ToLodT0(v), talts, -e, THALKODTOC, THALKAUTH, THALKODTO(Y), So great, so
old; it is to be noted, (a) that the Neuter Sing., besides the form in 0, has
also the common form in ov; (b) that in all forms of ovroc, which begin
with 7, the 7 is dropped.

Like airé¢ are declined éxetvoc,
alius, alia, aliud. The article 6,
ted.

Keivy, éxetvo, he, she, it, dAAoc, GAAn, GAA0o,
, 76 is declined like dde, the ce being omit-

Oy

3.

Singular. Plural..
TooovTeg + ToCa’TH TooovTO(v) | TocotTOL ToCa’TaAL TocaiTa .
TOCOUTOY TOCa’TYE ToOCOOvTOV TOOOUTWY TOOOUTWY TOOOUTMD '
TOCOUTW + TOCA’TH TOCOUTY ‘TOCOUTOLE TOCa’TAaL¢ ToOoOLTOLC
TosovTOy § Tooa’THY TocodTO(v) | ToCovTOVE TOGa’TECS ToOCAdTA
Dual.

N. A. | tocottw Tooatta TOCOUTH
G. D. | Tocotro.vy rocatraty Tooobvro.y.

Remark. The pronoun air é¢, -#, -6, signifies either self, tpse, ipsa, ipsum,
or is used for the oblique Cases of the personal pronoun of the third person, he,
she, it; is, ea, id. With the article, viz. 6 avtTéc¢, 7 aiTH, Td adTs, it sig-
nifies the same (idem, eadem, idem). The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 6,
2) with airoc and forms one word, viz. atirdé¢, instead of 6 adbtéc, abitH, Tadd,
usually tabrov, rabrod, Tat7O, TavTH, etc.

§ 61. IIL. Relative Pronoun.

Singular.
6c, qui 7, quae 4, quod

ob ¢

@

by

§ 62.] INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 67

§ 62. IV. Indefinite

and Interrogative Pronouns.

The indefinite and interrogative pronouns have the same form,

but are distinguished b
ing enclitic [§ 14, (c)

the interrogative, is aécented and p
Rem. 1. When thé interrogativfllip

place before their stem the rela

accent and position, the indefinite be-
placedgafter some word or words, whilst
d before.

nouns stand in an indirect question, they
» which, however, (except in the case of

dc¢Tic¢) is not inflected; e. g. dol0¢, dx6c0¢, 6767 EpoC, ete.

Declension of ric, ric and éc¢Ttc.

Sing. N. | tic, some one
G. | TLVvOE OF TOD
D. | revi or TO
A. | TLva 6
Plors N.. | -revéc a
G. | revéy
D. | TLoi(v)
A. | Tiviig
Dual. N. A. | TLVE
G. and D. | revoiv
N. | 6crt¢, whoever nTIc
G. | odtivoc or 6Tov Ferivoc
D.| Graveor ote = Arie
A. | évTiva qvTiva

N. t2, some thing The ; quis ?
Tlvag OY TOU
tive or 7)

N. ti < Tiva Ti
N. tiva and at7a tivec Tiva
TLVOV
tiou(v)
N. rivé and étra Tivac Tiva
Tive
TiVOLY.

6 TL | olTivec ~ aitiwec ative or GrTa
Gvtivoy (rarer 67wv) [reor(v)
oictiot(v) (rarer 6totct) aictiot(v) oic-

6TL | ob¢Tivac acrivac ativa or at7Ta

Dual. N. A. Otive, drive, G. D. oivtivow, aivrivory.

.Rem. 2. The negative compounds of Tic, viz. odt1¢, ciTL, ATIC, UTTL, no one,
nothing, are infiected like the simple tic; e. g. oitLve¢, oiTevec, ete.

XXXIV. Vocabulary.

Baoiretds, -euc, 6, king. 7épa, -a¢, 7, a day. THALKODTOC, -AUTH, -0vTO,

éxaoToe, -7, -ov, each. oio¢, -d, -ov, qualis. so large, so old.

éxeivoc, -7, -0, that. Gouc, -7, -0v, quantus. TolO¢, -d, -ov, talis.

éviol, -al, -a, some. GoTl¢, #TLC, 6 TL, Whoever, Téc0¢, -7, -ov, tantus.

éeTalw, to examine. whatever. — TpOro¢, -ov, 6, & Way, Or

éricToA7, -7¢6, 7, epistola, fddov, -ov, Td, a rose. manner, the mode of
a letter. oTpatny6c,-ov,6,ageneral. life, the character.

‘O avipp ob70¢ or obto¢ 6 avnp ayaSoc éotiv. “H yvoun atry or airy F yvé-

pn oikaia éoriv. ‘H yuvy 7de
éxeivoc 6 dvip Pactkets¢ éoriy.

‘or 70e 7 yuvy Kady gory. ‘O dvip éxeivog or
‘O Baothede aizéc or aitoc 6 BactAede oTpat7-

yoc éotiv. épe, © wai, aiTa THy KAeiv. "Evioe wept Tov aitGv THE abTi¢

nuépac ov TabTa yryvOckovely.

TO Aéyewv Kat 76 mpatrey ob TavTov éoTiv.

Tatra ra fida, & Sadhe év TO KATH, KaAG éoTLv. Loddy Tt XpHya 6 avSpardey

éoriv. Ei diAiav tov (rivdc)

dtdketc, abtod Tov Tpdmov ékérale. Tic ypader

Thy éxiotoAgyv; “Qv' Eyerc, ToUTwv? GAAowg mapéyov. “OAGLo¢c, 6 maideg Giro.

_ } By attraction for d, see Syntax, § 182, 6. 2 § 158, 8. (b).

68 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. [§ 63

eloiv. ’Exervoc 623caTatoc, btw (OTtvL) pndtv xaxév éortv. Ti dpovriterc ;
Od Aéyo, 6 Tt dpovritw. Olov 76 ioc éxtorov, Toiog 6 Bioc. Aéye pot, HTL
bariv éxeivn 7 yvv7.

These men are good. These opinions are just,
are beautiful. ‘That rose is beautiful. The fa
His (ejus) son is good. Her (¢us) ghter is bed
ful rose; bring it tome. The children of t
rose which blooms in the garden is bea
What are you thinking about? I am”
What is more beautiful than virtue ?

he children of these women
imself is writing the letter.
1. I admire the beauti-
e parents often differ. That
Virtue isgomething beautiful.
inking what ( fem.) friendship is.

§ 63. Correlative Pronouns.

Under correlative pronouns are included all those which express a mutua:
relation (correlation) to each other, and represent this relation by a correspond-
ing form. ca

(a) Adjective Correlatives.

: : re oMe Relat. and De-
Interrogative. Indefinite. | Demonstrative. pend. Interrog,

moc0c, -N, -ov; | Toodc, -7, -6v, | TOGOC, -7, -OV, so great; so do0¢, -7, -ov and

how great? how | of acertain size,| much, tantus 67000¢, -7, .-Ov,
much 2 quan-| or number, ali- rocécde, TOOHOE, TOG6VOE | as great,as much,
tus % quantus TOGOUTOS, -avTy, -odTo(v) | quantus
moloc, -d, -ov; | moldc, -G, -6v,| Totoc, -d, -0v, of such a | oioc, -d, -ov and
of what kind? | ofacertainkind| kind, talis 6moioc, -d, -0v,
qualis ? ro.ocde, ToLdde, ToLdvee, | of what kind,

ToLovToc, -aviTn, -ovTo(v) | qualis

THALKOC, -N5 -OV; TnAixoc, -ov, so great, so old | 7AtKoc,-7,-ov and
how great? how | wanting THALKOCOE, -76€, -OVOE OnNAikoE, -7, -OV,
old 2 | lrnAuKkodroc,-aiTn,-odTo(v)| as great, as old

(b) Adverbial Correlatives.

Interrogative. | Indefinite. | Demonstrative. Relative. | a> sal
xov; where?| mot, somewhere, | wanting (hic,| 0d, where, | dov,where,
ubi 4 alicubi ibi) nbi ubi
nédev ; whence? | rodév, from some | wanting (hine, | 60ev,whence, | oroFev,
unde ? . | place, alicunde inde) | unde whence,unde
noi; whither ?| moi, to some place,| wanting (eo) | 0, whither, | 67ot, whi-
quo? aliquo | quo ther, quo
cate; when?|xoré, some time,| Tote, then,tum| bre, when, | ordre,
quando # aliquando quum when,
quando
ianyvika; quo wanting tnvi- hoe | #vixa, when, | ornvixa,
temporis pun- | KOOE | peo quo ipso| when, quo
cto ? quota ho- Thvi- { tem- | tempore ipso tem-
ra? xadta } pore ‘pore
moc; how? Tac, some how otTw(c) Ode, so} Oc, how érrwc, how

« ; whither?| 7, to some place, |Ti0e § hither | 7%, where, | 67, where,
how ? thither, in some way | Tatty \ orhere| whither whither

§§ 64, 65.] LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUNS.—NUMERALS. 69

Remarx; The forms which are wanting in the Common language to denote
here, there (hic, 1bi), are expressed by évratita, and those to denote hence (hine,
inde), by évdévde, évtedbev.

§ 64. Lengthening of the Pronouns.

1. The enclitic yé is join
person, in order to make th
back its accent in the Nom. a

personal pronouns of the first and second
mphatic. The pronoun éy® then draws
;& gg. Eyorye, sovye, Eporye, suéye;
-avye. Moreover yé can be join ith any other word, and also with any other
pronoun, but does not form one%word with it; e. g. odTd¢ ye.

2. The particles 6 7, most common Wor and ov v, are appended to rela-
- tives compounded of interrogatives%r indefinites, as well as to écoc, in order to
make the relative relation general, i. e. to extend it to everything embraced in
the object denoted by the pron wir; e. g. OcTicdn, ocTicdnmoTe, OcTLCOtY, TLCODY,
6TLovv, quicunque (Gen. in, a OTovody, HeTLvocoby, Dat. drivioiv or
6TMODY, ete.) -—AT000C07, OTOGOCCUY, doocdyToTE, quantuscunque ;—d77ALKOCODY,
however great, how old soever.

3. The suffix de is appended to some demonstratives for the purpose of
strengthening their demonstrative relation; e.g. dde, j0e, Téde; ToLdcgde; To-
cocde ; THAtKOcde, from Toioc, Toco¢, THALKOG, Which change their accent after
J ¢ is appended

4. The enclitic «ép is appended to all relatives, in order to make the rela-
tive relation still more emphatic; hence it denotes, even who, which; e. g. 6crep,
nrep, Orep (Gen. ovrep, ete.); Goocmep, oldgmep (Gen. dcovrep, oiovrep, etc.) ;
Obiren, OSevrep.

5. The inseparable demonstrative 7, is appended to demonstrative pronouns
and some demonstrative adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative
sense. It takes the acute accent and absorbs every short vowel immediately
preceding it, and also shoréens the long vowels and diphthongs:

vitoot, this here (hicce, celui-ci), aitijt, tovti,

Gen. TovTovl, TavTyat, Dat. rovTsi, ravT7qi, Pl. obroii, abraii, ravti;

60t, 701, Todt from 6de; Odi from Ode ; otTeot from oiTa¢ ;

évtevbevt from évreidev ; évPadi from évbade; vuvi from viv; devpi from

dcipo.

CHAPTER VII.
THE NUMERALS.

§ 65. Nature and Division of the Numerals.
The numerals express the relation of number and quantity.
They are divided into the following classes, according to their sig-
nification :

70 NUMERAL SIGNS.—NUMERALS. [§ 66, 67.

é ioe

(a) Cardinals, which answer the question, “How many?” The first four nu- ©

merals and the round numbers from 200 (dcaxéovor) to 10,000 (wipcor), as well
as the compounds of pipzot, are declined; all the others are indeclinable. The
thousands are expressed by adverbial numerals; e. g. TpucxiAcoe, 3000.

(b) Ordinals, which answer the question, “Which one in the series?” They all
have the three endings of adjectives -o¢, ~7, xcept devtepoc, which has -o¢,
-d, -OVv.

(c) Multiplicatives, which answer the
all compounded of wAov¢, and are adjec
For the declension of these, see § 29. Nu
question, “How many times ?” e

(d) Proportionals, which answer the question, “How many times more?” ‘They
are all compounds of -7Atiotoc, -id, -tov; e. g. dumAdatoc, two-fold, double.

ow many fold?” ‘They are
of three endings, -ov¢, -7, -ovv.
adjectives in -dxcc, answer the

(e) Substantive-numerals, which express the abstract idea of the number; e. g.

7 Ovac, -adoc, duality. -s -

§ 66. Numeral Signs.

1. The numeral signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to
which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e«, Bad or the digamma F or
Eri, ¢, as the sign for 6;—Kér7a, 5, as the sign for 90 ;—Zauzi, My, as the
sign for 900.

2. The first eight letters, i.e. from a to 3 with the Bad or =r, denote the
units ; the following eight, i. e. from ¢ to 7 with the Kozma, the tens; the last
eight, i. e. from p to » with the Zau7i, the hundreds.

3. Up to 999, the letters, as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral signs,
only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but the let-
ters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, a’= 1, ¢ = 1000, “=
10, 4 = 10,000, ,¢ p vp B’= 5742, aw pu B’= 1842, p= 100, p = 100,000.

§ 67. Summary of the Cardinals and Ordinals.

Cardinals. Ordinals. :
1 a@ eic, wia, év, one TpOTOC, -7, -Ov, primus, -a, -um
2 8 dto or dva, two devTEpoc, -d, -ov, secundus, -a, -um
3 y Tpeic, Tpla, three Tpitoc, -n, -ov, tertius, -a, -um
4 0 rérTapec, -a, or Técoapes TéTAapPTOS, -7, -Ov
5 e wqwévTe TEULMTOC, -N, -Ov
6c & EKTOC, -7], -Ov
70 énra EBdopoc, -n, -ov
8 7 OKTO dydo0¢, -7, -ov
9 ¥ évrvéa Evaroc, -7, -ov
10’ déka O&KATOG, =7, -Ov
1l wa’ évdexa EVOEKATOC, -7, -OV
12 18’ dddexa dwdéxarTog, -7, -ov
13 4/ TpicKkaidexa TPlLCKALOEKATOC, -7N, -6v
14 id’ rerrapecnaidena or Tecoapeckaidexa TeTrapaKkatdéxarog, -y, -or

§ 67.] NUMERALS. 71

15 ve mevTekaideka TEVTEKALOEKGTOG, -N, -0v
16 ws’ éxkaidexa EKKQLOEKATOS, -7, -OV
17 uf éxraxaidexa EMTAKALOEKATOC, -7, -OV
18 in’ oKkTwKaidexa OKTWKALOEKATOE, -7, -
19 uw évveaxaideka 2vvEeaKaLoéKarToc, -7, -OVv

elkooToc, -7], -Ov
ElKOOTOS, 7), -OV, TPATOG, =n, -O¥
TplaKooTos, -7, -

20 x’ etkoor(v)
21 xa’ elixoory, eic, pia,
30 1 apiacovra ois

40 uw’ TeTTapGKovta or fapakovta TETTApaKoOTOc, -7, -6v
50 v’ mevTHKovTa v TEVTNKOOTOG, ~f, -6V
60 & é&HKovTa é=nKoarc, -H, -
70 0° éGdouqnKovTa éBdounkoorée, -7, -6v
80 « dydoqKovTa bydonkoorTés, -7, -
90 5 évevyxovta évevnKooroc, -7, -dv
100 p’ éxarov ExaTOGTO¢, -7, -dv
200 o dtdkécu0L, -at, -a didkooLooTos, -7, -6v
800 7’ TpldKdctot, -at, -a TPLaKOOLOOTOS, -7, -
400 v’ TETpAK6oLOL, -al, -a i TETPAKOOLOOTOS, -7, -
500 9 wevTakdéotol, -aL, -a TEVTAKOOLOOTOE, -7, -Ov
600 7 égakdocr0L, -at, -a éEakoolooroc, -7, -Ov
700 w’ émraKéoro!, -at, -a EmTAKOCLooToOe, -7, -dv
800 @ OkTaK6oLOL, -al, -a ékTakoclooTéc, -7, -dv
900 Ty évvaxécuor, -at, -a EvVAKOGLOOTOS, -7), -
1000 @ yidtot, -at, -a xLALooTOS, -7, -6v
2000 (6 ducyiisor, -at, -c dcxytALocréoc, -7, -dv
3000 y TpleyiAlot, -at, -a TPLEYLALOOTOS, -7, -
4000 6 TetpaxicyidLol, -at, -a TETPAKLCYtALOOTOC, -7, -6v
5000 (¢ mevrakicyidcot, -al, -a TEVTAKICYLALOOTOC, -7, -Ov
6000 _¢ éaxicyidrol, -a, -a éSaxicylAooréc, -7, -6v
7000 ¢ éxraxicytAcot, -al, -a ENTAKLGYLALOOTOC, -7, -Ov
8000 7 OxTakicyirzoL, -at, -a oxTakic¢ytAooréc, -7, -
9000 3 évvaxicyiArot, -at, -a EvVAKICXLALOOTOS, -7, -
10,000 4 vploz, -az, -a uplooros, -7, -dv
20,000 x dicwipiol, -at, -a diguvptoores, -7, -
100,000 .p . dexaxicwipzot, -at -a, Jekakiguoptooros, -4, -6v.

Remark. In compound numerals, the smaller number with xaé is usually

placed before the larger, often also the iarger without xai is. p'aced first, some
times with kai; e. g.

25: révte Kal elkoot, or eixoct wévTe,
345. wévte Kai TeTTapaKovTa Kal TPLAKOOLOL, OF TPLAK. TET . TWEVTE.

The same holds of the ordinals; e. g.

2 2
TFUTTOC Kal E:KOOTOC, OY EikooTOG méuTTOE.

72

NUMERALS.

fs 68.

§ 68. Declension of the first four Numerals.

om
Eve
évt
Eva

pia
flag
peed
fltav
Tpei¢
TplLav
TpLol(v)
Tpele

Neut. tpia

Neut. Tpia

oto and dvw

dvoiv, Attic also dveiv
dvoiv, more rarely duci(v)

vo

TETTEPOYV
_ TéTTapol(Y)
TéTTApaC

TéTTapEC OY TECTAPES

Neut. rétTapa

Neut. 7ér7apa.

Rem. 1. The Gen. and Dat. of pia, viz. uidc, yd, have the accentuation of

monosyllabic substantives of the third declension.

See § 33,

IIL. (b). Like sic

are also declined oiéeic and pydeic, no one, which have the same irregular ac-

centuation, thus:

ondeic, obdepia, oddév, Gen. oddevdc, oddeutac, Dat. oddevi, oddeuia, ete., but
in Pl. obdéveg (undévec) -évwr, -éot, -évac.

Rem. 2. Avo is often used indeclinably for all the Cases.
both, like dvo, has -oiv in the Gen. and Dat. (

Like dvo, it is also sometimes used indeclinably.

"Audi, about.

Gva-BaCle, -EWC, 7], A ZO-
ing up, an expedition
{from the sea iniand).

cprduoc, -ot, 6, number,
extent, length.

apa, -aToc, TO, a chariot.

“ovvEeTog, senseless,
stupid.

8ap8apoc,-ov, 6, barbarian,

{every one not 2 Greek).

Bid, -aTo¢, 76, a step, a
pace. .,

SpeTavygspoc, -ov, scythe-

-OV;

Eigparne motaposg éote 76 ebpoc TeTTEPwv oTadiwr.
~e Kal eixoot kal Exatov Phuata H TévTE Kal elkoot Kal éEaxocicve wédac.

XXXV. Vocabulary.
bearing, furnished with
scythes.

évlavToc, -0v, 6, a year.

evpoc, -€0¢ = -0U¢, TO,
breadth.

KaTG-BaOlE, -EWC, 7], & LO-
ing down (from inland
to the sea), retreat.

On7iTNC, -0v, 0, a heavy-
armed man.

miépert, ta be present.

TEAT ACTH C,-00,0
man.

sp ee Pe te
, 2 Shiercs-

ee ai a3 Be rice VEC TPLAKOVTG TEVTE.

0d 76 evpoc 7
eee a

v tpia wAES pa.

Bl eee TO evipoc éotiy eixoor wévTE TODOV.

The numeral duds,

(audotv); the Acc. is like the Nom.

TAHEOC, -E0¢ = -ovC, TO,
a multitude, extent.
motc, moddc, 6, a font,
pes, pedis.
oTait;L0¢, -0d, 6, a station, 2
day’s journey, a march.
OTpUuTEvua, -aTOC, TO, an
army, an armament.
avyypadw, conscribo, to en -
list, to describe.
ovuutdc, -doa, -dv, all to-
gether, in a body, whole.
suveTéc, -7, -6v, sensible,
intelligent.
Td 08 ctadiov ever wév-
Kipo

Tot Zaper KtAtkiag rora-
Té 6& aAéSpov éyet TétTAapacg Kat ExaTov TOda¢.
ToTauoe etpoc éott Ovo (dveiv) AES pur.

Tod Marardpov
‘O xapactyyne, Tlepotkor

néztpov, &yel TpLaKoVTa OTd0La 7 TevTHKOVTA Kal Extakociouc Kal OxTaKicytAiors

Kal uvpiove 760ac.

’Apid dc ovpuraonc Tie 000d Te dvaBacews Kal KataBacews,

a NN et ~ 7 3 7 7 7 7 ua
7 dnd RevodGvtog ovyypadetat, oTaluolt dvakdotor Oé&xa mévTe, Mapacayyast Yi-

Atot éxatov

7 4 4 id se 4 7
TEVTHKOVTA TEVTE, OTUOLA TpLcuUpLa TETpaKICxiALa ELaKOoLa TEVTH-

KOVTa. xpdvov TARTo¢ THe avaBacews Kal KataBacewe éEviavTd¢ Kat TpEIC pHvEC.

§§ 69—71.] NUMERAL ADVERBS.—THE VERB. 73

‘Evde gidia ovvetoi Kpeitrwy toriv dovvétov dravtav. Tot Ktpov orparet-
uatog hv apidmog tTOv pév ‘EAAjvev bmdirat pipiot Kal teTpakbotol TeATaGral
6& digxidvos kai mevTaKdctol, THY dé weTa Kipov BapBapav déxa pupiidec Kai
appara Operavydopa adi Ta eikoory.

It is better to have one sensible friend, than all senseless ones. Seventy
years afford about 25,555 days. The extent (number) of the way from the bat-
tle at (év) Babylon to (ei¢) Cotyora on the retreat (gen.) which is described by
Xenophon, amounts to (is) 122 days’ journeys, 620 parasangs, 18,600 stadia:
the length (multitude) of the time eight months. The number of the armament
is 12,639,850. The generals of the armament are four, each of 300,000 (gen.).
In the battle were present 96,650 soldiers and 150 scythe-bearing chariots.

§ 69. Numeral Adverbs.

1 arak, once 18 dkTw@KacdeKGKee
2 dic, twice 19 évveaxadekakig
3 Tpi¢ 20 eixooaKic

4 TETPAKG 80 tTplakovTaxic

5 wevrakic 40 TeTTapakovTakic or TECcap.
6 éFaKic : 50 wevTnkovTaKic
7 énraKic 60 é&yxovTaxi¢c

8 bKTaKlc 70 éBdounKovTaKee
9 évvedxic, EvviKig - 80 dydoqKevTéKic
10 dexakic 90 évevnxovTéiKic
Il évdexaxic 100 éxaTovTaki¢c

12 dwdexéxic 200 dreKeoiaKic

13 TpickatdeKaKic 300 zpraKxoolakic
14 TerrapecKatdekaKic or TEcoap 1000 yeAcaKicg

15 wevrexardexGKic 2000 dicyeAraxic

16 éxxadexanic 10,000 pupidxic

17 éxraxaidexikic , 20,000 dicuupiexic

CHAPTER VIII.
THE VERB.

‘ §70. Nature of the Verd.
The verb expresses something which is affirmed of a subject; e. g,
the father writes, the rose blooms, the boy sleeps, God is loved.

§71. Classes of Verbs.
Verbs are divided, in relation to their meaning and form, into the

following classes :
@

74 CLASSES OF VERBS. —THE TENSES AND MODES. [§§72, 73 ~

1. Active verbs, i. e. such as express an action, that the subject
itself performs or manifests; e. g. yeaga, I write, Gadio, I bloom ;

2. Middle or Reflexive verbs, i.e. such as express an action,
that proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, 1. e. an ac-
tion which the subject performs on itself; e. g. Bovdevowou, I ad-
vise myself, I deliberate ;

3. Passive verbs, i. e. such as express an action that the subject
receives from another subject; e. g. c¥mzouat vo twos, I am smit-
ten by some one.

§ 72. The Tenses.

1. The Greek language has the following Tenses:
I. (1) Present, Bovdeva, I advise,
(2) Perfect, BeBovdevxe, I have advised ;
11. (83) Imperfect, ¢Bovdevor, I was advising,
(4) Pluperfect, éBeBovdevuew, I had advised,
(5) Aorist, Bova EUG Ue I advised, (indefinite) ;
III. (6) Future, Bovieiow, I shall or will advise,
(7) Future Perfect (only in the Middle form), BeBovdedoouen,
I shall have advised myself, or I shall have been advised.
2. All the Tenses may be divided inio,
a. Principal tenses, viz. Present, Perfect and Future;
b. Historical tenses, viz. Imperfect, Piuperfect and Aorist.
RemMARK. The Greek language has two forms for the Perf: and Pluperf. Act.,
two for the simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass, and Mid. Aor.;
these two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses.
Still, few verbs have both forms; most verbs construct the above tenses with
one or the other form. No verb has all the tenses. Pure verbs form, with very
few exceptions, only the primary tenses. Mute and liquid verbs may form both

the primary and secondary tenses. ‘The Fut. Perf. which is found in but few
verbs, is almost entirely wanting in liquid verbs.

§73. The Modes.

The Greek has the following Modes:

J. The Indicative, which expresses what is actual or real; e.g.
the rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom.

II. The Subjunctive, which denotes merely a representation or
conception of the mind. ‘The Subjunctive of the historical tenses,
is called the Optative; comp. yeaqouu, with seriberem.

Remark. How the Aor. can have both forms of the Subjunctive (i. e. Subj.
and Opt.), and the Future an Optative, will be seen in the Syntax (§ 152).

§§ 74—77.] VERBS.—PARTICIPIALS, ETC. 75

IiJ. The Imperative, which denotes a direct expression of one’s
will; e.g Bovdeve, advise.

§74. Participials.—Infinitive and Participle.
_ Jn addition to the modes, the verb has two forms, which, from
their partaking both of the nature of the verb, and also of that of
the substantive and adjective, are called Participials, namely,

(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive-participial; e. g.
étéia Bovieverr, I wish to advise, and co Bovidevery, the
advising.

(b) The Participle, which is the adjective-participial; e. g. Bo v-
Levov avyo, an advising man, i. e. a counsellor.

Remark. These two participials may be called verbum infinitum; the re-
maining forms of the verb, verbum finitum.

§75. Numbers and Persons of the Verb.

The personal-endings of the verb show whether the subject of
the vez fhe speaker himself (J, first person); or a person or
thing ssed (thou, second person) ; or a person or thing spoken
of (he, she, %t, third person). They also show the relation of num-

ber, viz. Singular, Dual and Plural; e. g. Bovdeve, Z the speaker,
advise ; Bovievets, thou, the person addressed, advisest ; Bovdever, he,
she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; Bovidevezor, ye two,
the persons addressed, advise ; Bovdevover, they, the persons spoken
of, advise.

_ Remarx. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual in the active

voice, and in the Pass. Aorists ; hence it is expressed by the form of the first Pers.
Plural.

sk §76. The Conjugation of the Verb.

The Greek has two forms for conjugation, that in 0, which in-
cludes much the larger number of verbs, e. g. Bovdev-w, to advise,
and the older conjugation in -mu, e. g. tozy-w, to station.

§77. Stem, Augment and Reduplication.—Verb-
characteristic.

1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the ground-
form of the verb, and into the syllable of formation, by which the
relations of the action expressed by the verb, are denoted. See
§§71—75. The stem is found in most verbs in -s by cutting of
the ending of the first Pers. Ind. Pres.; e. g. Boviev-w, A¢y-«, ZQip-a.

76 VERBS.—INFLECTION-ENDINGS.—TENSE-ENDINGS. [§§ 78, 79.

2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings to
the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. Bovdev-@, Bou
ev-ow, Bovdev-couot; or are prefixed to the stem, and are then
called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. &-Bovdevor, I was advis-
ing, Be-Govdevnxe, [ have advised.

3. The Augment, which belongs to the Indicative of all the his-
torical tenses, i. e. the Imperfect, the Aorist and the Piuperfect, is
s prefixed to the stem of verbs which begin with a consonant; e. g.
é-fovievon, I advised; but in verbs, which begin with a vowel, it
consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel, a and ¢ being changed
into 7 (and in some cases ¢ into et), ¢ and v into ¢ and v, and 0 into @.

4, Reduplication, which belongs to the Perfect, Pluperfect and
Future Perfect, consists in repeating the first stem-consonant to-
gether with ¢, in those verbs whose stem begins with a consonant;
but in verbs whose stem begins with a vowel, it is the same as the
Auoment; e. g. Be-Bovdevxa, [ have advised, ‘t xécevna, I have sup-
plicated, from ‘ixezev-a. For a more full definition of the Aug-
ment and Reduplication, see § 89. e

5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -« i off, is
called the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic, because
according to this, verbs in -« are divided into different classes; .ac-
cording, as the ais aeonued is a vowel, or a mute, or a liquid, verbs*
are divided into pure, mute and liquid verbs; e. g. Bovdev-w, to a
vise, TyLa-w, to honor, zoiB-c, to rub, patr- co, to show.

§ 78. Inflection-endings. %

In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation of
tense, mode and person, there are three different elements, namely,
the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel,,and the personal-ending ;
e. g. Bovdev-c-o-wat. According to the three classes of verbs, they
are divided into the Active, Middle and Eoeye endings.

§79. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings.

1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands next
after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark of the
tense. In pure verbs, x is the tepee-characteristic of the Perf. and
Plup. Ind. Act.; e. ¢

Be-Bob/ev-K-a E-DE-OUVAEV-K-ELY 5

that of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. and the Leen Perf. is
OF. c.f

§§ 79, 80.] VERBS.—PERSONAL‘ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 77

BovAeb-o-w Bovieb-o-opat Pe-BovAeb-c-ouat
é-Bovdev-o-a é-PovAev-c-Guny ;
that of the first Aor. Pass. is 0; in addition to the tense-character
istic o, the first Fut. Pass. has the ending -&y of the first Aor.
Pass, thus, ,
é-Govie0-3-nv Boviev-Syjo-ona.
The primary tenses only, see § 72, Rem., have a tense-character-
istic. i
2. The tense-characteristic, together with the ending following,
is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form Bovdevoa, g is
the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable ow, the tense-
ending of the Future. The stem of the verb, together with the
_ tense-characteristic afd the augment or reduplication, is called the
tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in owe a, £Bovdevo is the tense-stem of
the first Aor. Active. '

§79 (b) Personal-endings and Mode-vowels.
Tigger l-ending takes a different form according to the dif-
ferftt Bersons and numbers; and the mode-vowel takes a different
form according to the different modes; e. g.
© -@1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. GovAet-o-uar Subj. Sov2et-o-par

& 3 “ Fut. “ Bovdev-c-e-rat Opt. Bovdet-c-o1-ro
1 * PL “* Pres. “ Bovdev-d-ueba Subj. Bovacv-d-peta
re : Se. sy POOMED-E~OUE “ Boviet-n-oe_

1 “ Sing. “© A.T “ éBovdev-c-G-unv “ Bovaedb-c-w-par

a. z « “© é8ovrAed-c-a-To Opt. BovdAeb-o-al-To.

Remanrx. In the above forms, PoviAev is the verb-stem, and Govdev, Bovreva
el Bure are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Fut. and first Aor. Mid.;
the endings -yai, -7a1, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels 9, «, «, be
7, a, at, are the mode-vowels.

§ 80. Remarks on the Personal-endings and Mode-
vowels.

1. The personal-endings are appended directly to the mode-vowel,
and are often so closely united with it, that the two do not appear
as separate parts, but are united in one; e. g. Bovdsvo-n¢, instead of
Bovievo-y-1¢, Boviev-7, instead of Bovdev-e-ct,—the ¢ and « coalescing
and forming y, and z being subscribed.

2. The difference between the principal and historical tenses is
here important. ‘The principal tenses, viz. Pres., Perf. and Fut.,
form the second and third person Duai with the same ending, -ov;
e. g. Boviev-e-zov Bovdev-e-cov, Bovdev-8-cOor Bovdev-s-cGov; but

*

78

VERBS.—PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS.

['$ 80.

the historical tenses form the second person Dual with the ending -o»,
the third with the ending -y 7; e. g.

&Govdet-e-7 ov &Bovdev-é-T

nV,

éBovacd-e-c Sov é&Bovdev-é-o BU 7 v.

8. The principal tenses form the third person plural active with
the ending -o« (7) [arising from -yz t, -» 61], the third person plu

ral middle with -yz «aut, the historical active with -»,

dle with.-»7z0; e. g.

BovAet-o-vot =
BovAev-o-vTat

GovAev-ovet(v)

éBovAev-o-v

the mid

é-BovAeb-0-vTo.

4, The principal tenses in the singular middle end in -pau, -oo,

zat; the historical, in -uyyv, -oo,

Bovded-o-u at

Boviet-e-c at = Bovded-y

BovAct-e-T at

-T03 e. g.

2Goviev-6- u Dad

éBoviev-e-0 0 = &Bovded-ov

&BovAev-e-T 0.

5. The personal endings of the subjunctive of the principal tenses,
are the same as those of the indicative of the same tenses; and the
endings of the optative are the same as those of the indicative of
the historical tenses; e. g. ,

« @
2 and 3 Du. Ind. Pr. Bovdaeie-r ov

Subj. BovAein-t or
Bovaebe-0 Sov

BovdAein-o 8 ov

3Pl “ “ Bovdevov-cr (vy) “ Bovdetw-ot (v) ee?
BovAevo-v Tat «“ BovrAsiw-v Tat

1S. * © Bovdevo-nat « Bovaciw-uat a

gq* « € Bovded-y “ BovAed-n

3% “ & Bovdede-T at © Povdety-T at

2and3 Du. “ Impf. {8o0vdAetve-r ov, -é-tyv Opt. BovAedor-r ov, -oi-r nv

éBoviete-c Vov,-é-o8nv “ Bovdeiol-oF ov, -oi-c Fv

3Pl “ “ é&BobvdAcvo-v “< BovAevol-ev «
éBovdevo- vTO “ Bovdedol-v T 0 @ &

1S oe 2Bov2. Levd-e 7] V “ BovaAevoi-u nv

Qe “ € (éBovAede-c 0) {Bovded-0v “ (GovdAetot-c 6) BovdAebor-o

2 RR li 2Bovrebe-t 0 «¢ BovdAetar-r o.

Remareg. On v édeAnvorixor, see § 7, 1. (b).

6. The mode-vowel of the subjunctive of the principal tenses dif-
fers from that of the indicative, merely in being lengthened, Viz. 0
into w, é and @ into 7, and e& into 4; e. g

“nd. BovAet-o-uev Subj. PovAct-w-pvev; Ind. ov? ev-E-00E Subj. Govrev-n-ote.
nd. BovAed-er¢ Subj. Bovred-ne.

7. The mode-vowel of the optative is s in connection with the
preceding mode-vowel of the first person singular indicative. (The
pluperfect is an exception, the optative of this taking the mode-
vowel of the present). Thus:

1. Sing. Ind. Imperf. Act.o Opt. ov éGotAev-o-v

Bovaeb-o1-ue
* Play, dort, Ack @ “ at éGovdevo-a-pev

BovdAevo-at-uev

§ 81.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -o. 79

§ 81. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in py ex
hibitedinthe Pure Verb (§77, 5) Bovhedto.

PRELIMINARY ReMaRKS. As pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses
(§ 72, Rem.), these tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs
and a liquid verb (7piB-w, Aeiz-w, stem AITII, daiv-w, stem PAN), so as to ex-
hibit a full conjugation.

In learning the table of conjugation, it is to be noted:

(1) That the meaning in English is opposite the Greek forms. All the par-
ticular shades of meaning, however, which belong to the different Modes and
Tenses in connected discourse, cannot be given in the table.

(2) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into their constituent
parts, viz. (a) Personal-ending, (b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d)
Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f) Augment or Reduplication.

(3) The spaced forms, e. g. BovAei-etov, Bovdsd-y7 Tov, 3d Pers. Du. Ind.
and Subj. Pres., may call the attention of the learner to the difference between
the historical tenses in the Ind. and Opt. and the principal tenses.

(4) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are dis-
tinguished by a star (*). The learner should search these out and compare
them together; e. g. GovActow, 1. S. Ind. Fut. Act. or 1. 8. Subj. Aor. I. Act.;
Pobievoat, 2. S. Imp. Aor. I. Mid., Bovaeica:, 8. 8. Opt. Aor. I. Act., Govaed-
cat, Inf. Aor. I. Act.

(5) The accentuation should be learned with the form. The following gene-
ral rule will suffice for beginners: The accent of the verbis as far from the end as
the final syllable will permit. ‘Those forms, whose accentuation deviates from this
rule, are indicated by a cross (7).

(6) Wher the following paradigm has been thoroughly learned in this way, ;
the pupil may first resolve the verbs occurring in the Greek exercises into their
elements, i. e. into the personal ending, mode-vowel, etc., observing the follow-
ing order, viz. BovAetow, is (1) of the first Pers., (2) Sing., (3) Ind., (4) Fut,
(5) Act., (6) from the verb PovAeto, to advise; then he may so translate into
Greek the verbs inthe English exercises, as to exhibit the elements of which
the form of the Greek verb must be composed; these elements may be arranged
in the following” order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment or Reduplication, (3)
Tense-characteristic, (4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with
Mode-vowel, (7) Personal-ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Perso-
nal-ending. E.g. What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised
himself, using the Aor. of the Pres., Sovet-w, to advise? Answer: The verb-
stem is Boviev-, augment é, thus 2GovAev; the tense-characteristic of the first
Aor. Mid. is o, thus tense-stem is é-BovAev-c ; the mode-vowel of the first Aor.
Ind. Mid. is-a, thus é-GovAev-c-«; the personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing.
of an historical tense of the Mid. is ro, thus é-GovAeb-o-a-To.

(7) In order that the memory of the pupil may not be tasked by too many
forms at once, it is best to commit the verb in parts, and in the order in which
the exercises in § 84 follow each other. He may at the same time translate the
exercises from Greek into English, and from English into Greek. After all the
forms have been thoroughly committed in this way, he may turn back to the
tables and repeat all the forms together.

80 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -00. [§ 81.
ACT

ms THE
238
| Tenses. | £5 % 1 Subjunctive
Az ml Indicative. of the Principal tenses.
| S.1. | Bovdet-w,* FT advise, Govred-w,* I may advise,
i 2. | GovAed-exc, thou advisest, Bovded-ne, thou mayest advise,
| 3, | Bovded-e1, he, she, tt advises, \GovdAev-7,* he, she, it may adv. i.
| D. 2. § GovAci-eror, ye two advise, Boviet-n Tov, ye two may ad.
3, | Govasd-eT ov, they two advise, Boviev-n 7 Ov, they two may a.
| P. 1. | Govred-ouer, we advise, ~ |Govdet-wusv, we thay advise,
i «=. 2. | GovAed-eTe,* you advise, Bovret-nre, you may advise,
| 3.4 Govded-ovcr(v), they advise, |Bovded-wor(v), they may adv.

. | é-GovAev-ov,* I was advising,
| iBobhev- -e¢, thou wast advising,
. | &-GotAev-e(v), he, she, x was ad.
~té- -Bovreb- sTov, ye two were adv.
. | é-Govdev-é 7 77 v, they two were a.
_ é-Boviev- -opev, we were advising,
a pn Ee you were ine
| &-Botiev-ov)*they were advising

. | Be-Bobdev-x-a, T have aelbisoa [SeBookenbo, I may have ad.
. | Be-GobAev-x-ac, thou hast adv'd, Be-Bovied-x-nc, thou mayest
. | Ge-BobAcv-x-e(v),*he,shezthasa| have advised, etc., declined
. | Ge-Govdet-x-atov, yeiwo havea.| like the Subj. Pres.
. | Be-GovAcd-x-aT ov, they two

| have advised,

. | Ge-Bovdeb-x-auev, we have adv.

. | Be-BovaAed-x-ate, you have adv.

. | Be-Bovded-x-d ot (v),they havea

- 1 é-Be-BovAcdt-x-ewv, I had adv'd,
. | 2-Be-BovAet-x-erc, thou hadst a.
. | é-Ge-Bovdet-x-et,he,shest had ad.
“| 2Ge -BovAcd-k-etTov, ye two had
| advised,
£Be-Boviev-k-e it 7 v, they two
had advised,
é-Be-Boviet-x-eruev, we had ad.
: é- Be e-Sovded-K-eite, you had ad.
é-Be-Bovdred-x-e o @ v,they had a.
mé-onv-a,} L appear, wé-97v-0, I may appear,
é-Te -phv- ev,” I appeared,

a SS See | Se TS Fe a ne ea NE ee ee

| 8.1.4 2BobAev-c-a, advised, (indef. )| Bowker ae L may advise,
Aor. L | 2 | e-Bobtev-o-ae, thou advisedst, \GovAeb-o-ne, thou mayest ad-
Tense") > 2-Gobzev- o-é(v), he, she, zt adv, vise, etc., declined like the
| D. 2. | 2-BovAcb-c-arov, ye two adv'd, Subj. Pres.
stem: § is
So ta pe -Zovrev-o-4 7 7 V, they two ad.|—
(Bova By P. L é- po \ev-o-auev, we advised,
2. | é-GovAet-o-ate, you advised,
' ; 3. | éBotAev-c- g-av, they advised,
ars Wbegy Zz S.1.| &Ain-ov, Lleft, |Aim-w, ete. declined like the
i ; 2.4 é-Aim-ec, etc. declined like| Subj. Pres.
&-Air-
OG 8 ics ; Impf. Ind.
bears Future. | S. 1, | Bovded-o-o,* I shall advise,
Bovdev-c- declined like the Indic. Pres.

1 The declension of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is like that of the Ist Perf.

§ 81.]
IVE.
Moves.

Optative
i. e. Subj. of Historical tenses.

Bovrev-orut, I might advise,
Bovded-orc, thou mightest advise,
Bovied-ot, he, she, it might adv.
Bovied-orrov, ye two might ad.
Povdev-0t t 7 v, they two mig. a.
Bov2Aev-oluev, we might advise,
Boviet-orre, you might advise,
Bovded-o t ev, they might advise,

Be-Bovdedv-x-o1pt, I mig. have a.

Ge-BovAed-x-o1c, thou mightest
have advised, etc., declined
like the Opt. Impf.

——— ee

BovAet-o-ar*f or -ete(v)
BovAeb-c-attov
Boviev-c-ait ny
Bovdeb-c-atmev
BoviAeb-o-aiTe
Boviet-c-atev or -ELav

Airx-ovut, etc., declined like the] Aiz-e, etc., declined { Acz-

Opt. Impf.

oviAev-o-o1ut, I weuld advise,
declined like,the Opt. Impf.

2 The declension of the 2d Pluperf. is like that of the Ist Pluperf., both in the Ind. and Opt.

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -o,

81

Participials.

Imperative. } Infin. Particip.
Bovieb-wy
Bovieb-ovea
Bovieb-ovt
G. Boviet-ovtog
Bovaev-obone,

advising,

Bobdev-e, advise thou, badies

Bovdev-éru, la hima., ev,

Bovrei-erov, yetwoa. to

Bovdev-étur, la them | advise,
both advise,

Bovact-ere,* do ye ad.

BovAs-érwoav,usuallyBoviev-6vTwr*, la them a.

Be-BovAev-K-Oct

[Be-BodAcv-k-e,*] etc| Be-Bov-|Be-BovAev-x-viat

declined Gikéthe} Aev- |Be-Bovdev-x-dct

Imp. Prés.; yet}«-évai,t| G. -x-6To¢, -x-

only a few Per-}iohave| viac, having

fects, and such as jadvised,| advised,

have the meaning

of the Pres., form

an Imperative.

ré-Onv-e, appear thou, | me-bn- | Te-onv-Oct
vé-val,t
|BovAed-o-d¢

Bobdev-o-ov, advise, | Bov- \Bovdeb-c-aca
BovAev-c-aTw Acts (Bovret-o-cvt
PBovAeb-o-aTov. oat,*t |G.GovAci-o-avtos
BovAev-c-aTwy, to BovAev-c-aone,

: advise,| having advised,
Govdet-c-arTe »
BovAev-c-atwoar, usually -cavtwr™
Aix-Ov, odoa, Ovt

like the Imp. Pres.} eZv,t |G. dvrToc, odane,

Bovdaed-| Boviet-c-wr,
o-evv, jetc., like Pr. Pt.

82

‘Tenses.

Present.

Tense-stem :
Boviev-

Imperfect.

Tense-stem :

&-BoviAev-

Perfect.

Tense-stem:

Be-Bovaev-

Pluperfect.

Tense-stem:

é-Be-Bovdev-

Aorist J.

‘Tense-stem:
é-3oudev-o-

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -@. ©

Numbers
and

ac) ws) 7
WH Wh reo toe

|

Ye

9
G9 ND r+ Go NO E+ G9 BO

td

|

wa

ON deter aisle aca seal 2h ay

rd

e

Fe Ne ee ee ee

td

ws) TN
ON eo

rd
eye

. | Bovaev-oueSa

Be-BovAcv-u at, I have delibe-

é-Govdev-o-a un v, I delibera-

[$ 81.
MID
THE

Subjunctive

Indicative. of the Principal tenses.

| I I EES
.| BovAet-o wat, I deliberate, or | BovAev-w wat, I may
. | BovAed-7*

[am advised, | Bovdet-y* — |deliberate,
Bovded-n Tat
Bovdev-OueGov
Bovaed-notov
Bovrei-n o Sov
Bovdev-OueCa
Bovded-note_
Bovdet-wv Tat

BovaAet-eT at
Boviev-ouedSor .
Bovied-eoSov
Bovdet-ecdSov

Bovaeb-ecSe*

Boviet-ovTat

é-BovAev-6 un v, I was delibe-

é-BovAed-o v
é-BovAet-e T 0
é-Boviev-6uetod
é-BovAsi-eodov
é-BovAev-eod nv
é-BovAev-6ueSa —
é-BovAed-eate
é-BovAet-ov To

|rating,

Be-BovAev-pévoc O, I
Be-Boddev-o at may have deliberated,
Be-BovdAcv-T at

Be-BovrAcd-ueSov

Ge-BobAev-cSov

Ge-BovAcv-c F ov

[rated,

. | Be-Bov2et-peta

Be-BovAev-oSe*

Be-BodAev-v Tat

é-Be-BovAci-unv, I had de-
é-Be-BobAev-co | liberated.
&-Be-BotAev-T 0
é-Be-BovAct-yeSov
é-Ce-BodAev-oSov
&-Bs-Boviet-o 0 nv
é-Be-Govict-neCa
é-Ge-BotAev-ce

é-Ge-GodAev-y T Oo

Bovdet-o-w wat, I may

Bovaed-o-y* (deliberate,
ete., declined like
Pres. Subj.

é-BovAet-o-w [ted,(indefinite)
é-Bovhed-c-aT 0
é-Bovdev-o-ausCov
é-Bovdet-c-acSov
é-Boviev-c-a o F nv
é-Bovdev-c-aueta
&-Bovicb-c-acte
é-Govdeb-G-av T 0

. | é-Aiz-dunv, I remained, decli-
ned like Ind. Imperf.

8.1. | BovAe2b-c-ouar, I shall delibe-

rate, declined like Pres. Ind.

S. 1. | Be-BovdAeb-c-ouar, I shall delib-

erate, declined like Pres. Ind.

Ain-wpat, I may remain,
declined like Pres.Subj.

§81.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -o. 83
DLE.

MopEs. Participials.
Optative : re
i.e.Subj. =i Hist. tenses. Imperative. | Infin. | Particip.
ba Boviei- |\Govdev-pevog
Bovaed-ov, deliberate thou, | eadat, |Bovdev-omévy
Bovaev-éod-w to delibe- |BovAev-duevov,
rate, deliberating,
Bovaei-eoSov
BovAev-écSuv™
BovAci-ecd-e*
Bovirev-éoSwoar, usually BovAev-icduv*
BovAev-o tun v, I might
Bovdeb-o10 [deliberate,
BovAcb-0 tT Oo
Bovdev-oipetov
BovdAcd-oroSov
Bovasv-oto& qv
Govaev-oiveSa
Bovreb-o1oSe uly
BovAst-otvTo
| e-BovAet-|3eBovdevpévoct
Ge-Bobrev-co,deliberate thou} ofat,{ to |BeBovdev-uévg
Be-Bovaci-cbu have de-|BeGoviev-pé-
liberated,| vov,+ having
Be BobAcv-cSov deliberated,
Be-BovdAeb-cSuv*
Be-GovAeb-oe*

! LFS eee
Be-Bovaet-cSwoav, usually Be-Bovaei-cSarv™

Be-Boviev-pévoc einv, I

might have deliberated,
Povaev-o-ai nny, t mig't Govded- 5 v
Bovdeb-o-c+0 [delibe- |odAev-c-cx* deliberate thou,| o-ac-Faz, Boviev-o-guévn
Bovret-c-atto [rate, |BovAev-c-aoSw to deliber- BovAevo-apevo
BovAev-o-aipneS ov ate, :
Bovded-c-aroSov Bovrsct-c-acSov
Bovaev-o-atoav BovAev-c-acSwr™
Boviev-c-aipeta
Bovieb-o-atoSe_ Bovact-c-acSs
BovdAct-c-alvTo Boviev-c-ac8acarv, usually BovAev-c-doParv™

Air-oiunv,l migt remain, Rix-00,t -EoSw, declined fArw-éoact|Arw-duevoc, -o-

like Opt. Impf. like Pres. Imp. Lévy, -Oevov
BoviAev-c-oiunv Im. have Bovaed- | BovAscv-o-due-
deliberated JikeOpt.Impf. g-eotat | v0¢, -7, -ov
Be-BovAev-o-oiugv,f sh'd Be-Bovasd-| Be-Bovdev-c-6-
| deliberate like Opt. Impf.| _ o-co8at | “evoc, -7, -0r-

x

84 REMARKS ON THE PARADIGM.—ATTIC FUTURE. [§§ 82, 83. .

PAS

THE

Tenses. : : ; Subjunctive
Indicative. of the Principal tenses.

S. 1. | 2-Govdet-8-nv, I was advised, | Povdev-3-6, I might have
, 2. | 2-Bovret-8-n¢ Bovaev-8-7¢ [been advised,
3. | é-BovAct-8-7 PovAev-3-7
Tense- D. 2. | é-Govdeb-8-nTov Boviev-G-7rov
aa ; 8. | 2-GovAev-9-74 7 7 v pore ee TOV
5 P. 1. | 2-GovAct-3-nuev ovAev-S-Gyuev
Bovdev-04 "9, ae oe BovAev-8-AT
3.4 é-Bovdet-S-7 oav Bovdev-G-6 ot (v)

1. | Bovdev-87-0-ouat,I shall be adv.
Future l. 2. | GovAev-87-0-n, etc., declined
like the Ind. Pres. Mid.

S. 1. | é-70f8-qv, L was rubbed, Tplp-O, I may have been rub’d,
T. 2. | é7piG-n¢, etc., declined like the | tpeG-7¢,etc.,declined like the
first Aor. Ind. Pass. first Aor. Supj. Pass.
1. | tpuC-7-c-ouat, I shall be rubbed,
Fut. £1. 2.1 tpt8-7-0-7, ete. declined like

the first Fut. Ind. Pass.
Verbal Adjectives: GovdAev-roc, -7, -v, advised,

§82. Remarks on the Paradigm.

1. In the first person Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use besides the form in
-elv, a form in -7; e. g. é8eBovAed«-7y, instead of -x-evv. The mode-vowel ce
in the third Pers. Pl. is commonly shortened into ¢; éGeGovAci-x-e-oav, instead
of é8eBovAed-x-et-cav. :

2. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Fut. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers
besides the form in -7, use another in -ev; e. g. Bovdet-n and Bovded-e1, Bov-
Aeio-y and -el, BeGovaAebo-y and -et, Bovdevdjo-y and -e1, TpiGHo-y and -et.
This last form in -e is exclusively used in the following forms of the three
verbs, viz.

BovdAona, I wish, Bote, thou wishest (but Subj. BodAy)
oiouat, I think, of et, thou thinkest (but Subj. oz7) :
Gpouat, £ shall see, 6 t, thou wilt see.

8. The abbreviated forms of the third Pers. Pl. Imp. Act. have in all tenses
except the Perf., the same form as the Gen. Pl. of participles of the respective
tenses. The pupil should seek out these forms.

§83. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic Future.

1. When in the Fut. Act. and Mid. of verbs in -ow, ~cop.at, from stems of two
or more syllables, the short vowels d, «, i, precede o, certain verbs, instead of
the regular form, have another, which, after dropping o, takes the circumflexed
ending -@, -otua, and because it was frequently used by the Attic writers, it is
called the Attic Future ;<e. g. éAdw (usually éAatva), to drive, éAd-c-w, Fut. Att.
* 420, -Ge, -G, -GTov, -Guev, -Gte, -Got(v); TEdéw, to finish, TEAg-o-w, Fut. Att.

§ 84. ] _ ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB. #S y

SIVE.
MonpeEs. ae _Parttcipials.
Optative , i
i iiedsis cf tito. Bist. tousex Imperative. Infin. Participle.
BoviAev-8-cinv, I might be Boviev-| ZovAev-b-eict
Bovaev-3-sinc [advised, |Bov2dev-3-nr1, be thou ad- | 8-7vat, |Bovdev-5-cicat
SovAev-3-ein Bovrev-3-jTw — [ vised, | to be ad-| Bov2Aev-F-évt
BovAev-3-eintov ’ BovAeb-5-n Tov vised, Genitive:
Bovaev-S-etqn Tavs Bovdev-3-AT wv Boviev-b-évTog
Boviev-9-cinuev amd -e1 ev Boviev-G-eizne,
Bovdev-S-cinre and -cite |Bovdeb-3-nre* having been
Boviev-3-ei ev Bovirev-b-nTwacav advised,

. |Bovaev-bn-o-oiunv, I should Sovdev-| Bovdev-Fj-a-6-
be advised, ete., declined On-ce-| evoc, -7, -ov
like the Impf. Opt. Mid. oGat

TpLp- -einv, I might be rubbed, TptB- | rps3-eic,t ete.,

Tpl3-eine, etc., declined like tpib-nS1,-47Tw,etc.,decl’d} qvat | declined like I.
the first Aor. Opt. Pass. | like first Aor. Imp. Pass, Aor.Part.Pass.

tp. B-n-o-oiunv, I should be TpLOH- |TpLb-n-o-duevoc
rubbed, etc.,.declined like ceaval| =n, -ov
the first Fut. Opt. Pass.

BovAev-Téog, -Téa, -Téov, to be advised.

TEAG, -€16, -El, -ELTOV, -od/LEV, -EiTE, -odOL(V); TEAé-c-owat (TEA~ouat), TeAoduaL,
-ei, -eiTat, etc.; Kouilw, to carry, Fut. xopiow, Fut. Att. cowed, -veic, -cel, -veirov,
-Lovuev, -lelTe, -LOvEL(V) ; KouLoduat, -Lel, -LeiTaL, -Lovpeor, ete.

2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the-Ind., Inf. and Part., never in the
Opt., thus TeAG, Tedeiv, TeA@v; but TeAécouuz. The verbs which have this
form are the following: (a) 2A ao (éAatva), to drive, T&A é w, to finish, karéw,
to call, and, though seldom, @4é0, to grind ;—(b) all polysyllables in -if@ ;—
(c) a few verbs in -é¢a, very generally B:8afw ;—(d) of verbs in -w, all in
-avvipe and dugdrévvipl, to clothe (dudtéow, GudiG, -Leic, etc.). Exeep-
tions to this form of the Fut. are found but seldom in the Attic dialect.

§ 384. Accentuation of the Verb.

1. Primary Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word towards
the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits; e. g. BodAeve, Bov-
Aeboual, Tave, TiTTe, PovdEevooy, Tavcov, Tioy, but BovdAeierc, BovdAcierv.

Rem. 1. The diphthong -a at the end of a word, is considered short in re-
spect to accent; e. g. GovAetouat. The Opt. ending -az, however, is considered
long; e. g. Daattcheabh third Pers. Sing. Opt. i Aor. Active. The Opt. end-
ing -ov is also long; e. g. éxAeizot.

2. The same law holds good in composition, yet with this limitation, that the
accent cannot go back beyond that syllable of the word prefixed, which before composi-
tion had the accent; nor beyond the first two words forming the compound, neither be-
yond an existing augment; e. g.

péps TpocHepe Acie amdAeTre dGuev évdauev
gevve éExdevye ida obvotda Heat kadnuat ;

8

86 ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB. [§ 84.

but mpoceZyov like elyov, mapécyor like éoyov, éSjyov like nyov, xpochKov like
jxov, arelpyov like elpyov (not mpécetyov, mapecyov, etc.), but Imp. ameipye.

Exceptions to the Primary Law.

3. The accent is dn the ultimate in the following forms:

(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut.
Sing of the Part. of the same tense as acute; e. g. Aumeiv, Arcay, -6v, and in .
the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, eimé, EASE, evpé,
AaGBé and idé (but in composition, drerte, aw6AaBe, avedde, elcloe).

(b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex; e. g. AaBov, 90d, from
TiOn ut.

Rem. 2. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor. Act.
draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law; e. & éxBare,
&EeAGe, Exdoc, Exdote, Aw600¢, anddoTe, weTadoc, peTadore (but not dodog, pé-
Tadoc, see No. 2), but éxPareiv, éxPador, éxdrteiv, &eASov, ete. But in the
Imp. Sing. second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -a, the circumflex remains on the ulti-
mate in compounds also; e. g. éxBadod, agxod, éxdirod, éxthadod, agedod,
éveveyxod ; so in verbs in -#t, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla-
bie preposition; e. g. tpoded, évPod, ddod; yet the accent is drawn back, when
the verb is compounded with a dissyilabic preposition; e. g. dxddov, xaravov,
éx6Gov; but in the Dual and Pl. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all
cases drawn back; e. g. éxBaAcode, droAaBecSe, rpddooSe, évSeobe, aperbe,
kaTavecte.

(c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -¢ (Gen. -ro¢), con-
sequently in all active participles of verbs in -yz, as well as in those of the first
and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass. of all verbs; e. g. SeGov-
Aevadc, Gen. -dtoc, redqvdc, Gen. -6ro¢, BovAevOeic, Gen. -évroc, Tumeic, Gen.
-évtoc, iorac, Gen. -évtoc, TiS eic, Gen. -évtoc, didote, Gen. -dvTo¢, decxvic, Gen.
-bvtoc, dLactic, exSeic, mpodotc, Gen. dLactavtog, éxSévtoc, mpodovTos.

Rem. 8. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep-
tion ; e. g. mardetodc, Gen. maidevoarTog.

(d) In the Sing. of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass. as circumflex; e. g.
Bovrevdo, TeLBo. .

4, The accent is on the penult in the following forms:

(a) In the Inf. Perf. Mid. or Pass., first Aor. Act. and second Aor. Mid.; also
in all infinitives in -vaz, hence in all active infinitives of verbs in -y, as well as
in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass. and of the Perf. Act. of all verbs; e. g.
reTvgba, BeBovrciobal, tetiuzjobar, repiAjoat, pemoddoSat ;—dovAagat,
Bovreioat, Tiujoat, dAjoat, mwioSGoat ;—AiréioSa, éexdéoar, diaddoSat ;—ic-
raval, TIVévat, OL0dval, Oetkvivat, oT7val, éxothvat, Setvat, éexetvat, dodvat,
petadobvat ;—Bovdevdjvat, Tpibjvat ;—PBeBovrevnéval, AeAourévat.

(b) In all Optatives in -o¢ and -az, see Rem. 1.

Rem. 4. The three similar forms, viz. the Inf. first Aor. Act., sisi first Aor.
Mid. and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist of thres
or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished from one
another by the accent, in the following manuer:

§ 84.]

Inf. first Aor. Act. Bovicicat,

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB.

TOLNGAL
Opt. first Aor. Act. BovAeioar

TONAL.

87

Imp. first Aor. Mid. BotAevea,

Toingat

But when the penult is short by nature or long only by pesition, the Inf. first
Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act.; e. g. dv-
Aaagat; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. ¢vAagaz.

(c} In the Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass.; e. g. GeBovievpévoc, -uévn, -wévorv, -Te-

Tyinmévoc, TEplLAnmévoc.

XXXVI. Vocabulary.

(a) Present and Imperfect Active

*Ayopeva, to say.

Gmetpoc, -ov, (adv. arei-
pas), w. gen. unac-
quainted with, unskill-
ed in.

aro-Tpérw, to turn away,
avert.

aro-devyw, to flee away.

dportpor, -ov, Td, a plough.

yevvaioc, nobly, bravely.

deLvic, -7, -6v, fearful, ter-
rible, dangerous; 70

detvov, the danger.

Ato ddot mpocg THY TOALY GyeToV.

Ee.
TOYTOD.
The TOV TékVWY TaLdEiac.

édeyev.

éAha ayopedur.

Erepoc, -d, -ov, alter, the
other (of two), opposite,
different.

éva, in order that.

KGAAoc, -E0¢ = -ove, TO,
beauty.

xevSo, to conceal.

povotky (Téyvn understood)
-7¢, }, every art under
the patronage of the
Muses,especially music.

étav, w. subj., when, when-
ever.

Boe TO apotpov ayetov.
‘Qe 760 KaAXOC, 6Tav Exn votv oogpora.
‘Eraipoc éraipov gpovtiléTo.

éte, when.

otTac, (bef. cons. odTw,) so,
thus.

Tatdela, -ac, 7, education,
instruction.

mAynoLate, to approach.

mpovota, -ac, 7, foresight,
precaution.

mpoc-rinte, (in third pers.
sing.), it falls out, it oc-
curs, it presents itself.

oTaclafw, to live at va
riance with.

Xeipouev, © rai

Oi wodirat tod¢ vouovs gudat-
Tlaryp te kal patnp mpovotav éyéTwv
‘O ypapmarwrv aretpoc ob BAémet BAETav.
minmTovoag Tiya¢ yevvaius dépe_.
maic¢ TQ twatpl podov édepev, iva yaipot.

Td¢ mpoc-

‘'O raicg TH rarpl podov dépet, iva yaipn. ‘O
LoKparye acrep Eylyvuckev, ovTw¢
"Ore of "EAAnvec éxdAnoialov, ot BapGapor axédevyoyv.
kat ’Apioretdng mote éotaovacéTyy.
’"Arotpéroite, @ Deol, TO detvdv ad’ Tudv.

OzsuoroKAge

Aakedatmoviot povorxne areipw¢ eixor.
My érepov KevSolce kapdie voir,

Two horses drawing (driving) the chariot, hasten. Two women sing. Let

us flee from vice.
rejoice.
rejoice.

Lei friends care for friends.

The boys study literature diligently, that their parents may
The boys studied literature very diligently, that their parents might
Let the citizen defend the laws.

Two

horses, drawing the chariot, hastened. Two women sang. ‘Those who are un-
acquainted with literature do not see, when they see.. Bear nobly the danger
which presents itself (part.),O citizens! You speak (so) as you think. We
were unacquainted with music. May the gods avert the danger from us!

838 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. [§ 84.

XXXVII. Vocabulary.
(b) First Perfect and Pluperfect Active.

Tuvarkeioc, -d, -ov, be- KaTa-Avw, to loosen, de- about to do, delay; rd
longing to women, wo- __ stroy, dissolve. péd ov, the future.
manly. Kupleva, w. gen., to be or moAéucoc, -d, -ov, hostile, 6

éy-ddw, to gointo, put on. become master of,con- modéucoc, the enemy.

émi-dlOkw, to pursue. quer, obtain. Tpodntevw, to prophesy.

Kata-dvw, to dip, go down, pGavTic, -ewc, 6, a seer, a dv, to bring forth. Perf.
set, conceal oneself. prophet. to have become, be.

péddw, to intend or be

Oi modéutor ExaTov TodiTag TedovedKdowy. Pepexidne Edeye, undevt Seq Te-
Suxévat. Néog mepuxdo noAAd ypnoTa pavGave. ‘O warvtic Ta pédAovTa Ka-
Ade wexpogytevxev. Ta réxva eb meraidevxac. Mydera 7a Téxva redovevvia
éyaipev. Oi Aakedaimorvior TlAataid¢ Katededixecav. Zapdavarddoc ctoAqv
yovatkeiav évededduet. “Ore hAtoc KatededdKet, of moAémtor ExAnoiavov. *AAé-
Eavdpoc éridtokav Aapetov, Tov TOv Ilepo@v Baothéa, TOAAGY ypnuaTur éxEeKr-
plevkKet.

The sun has gone down (is set). The Lacedaemonians have destroyed Pla-
taea. We admired the woman, who had put on (having put on) a purple robe
Diodorus (Acddwpoc) says that Alexander (acc. w. inf.), pursuing Darius, ob-
tained many treasures. The enemies had killed 400 soldiers. Thy friend
had brought up his (the) children well.

XXXVI. Vocabulary.

(c) First Future and Aorist Active.
*ABAGBera, -ac, 7, inno- éxyovoc, -ov, descendant, Kivdvvedw, to incur dan-
cence. descended from. ger, run a risk.
aud, both, ambo. éAmifw, to hope, expect. peta, w.gen., with; w.acc.,
avtw, to complete, finish. éxayyéAAw, to announce. after.
daxpiov, -ov, T6,a tear. énl-Bovdeidw, w. dat. to pyviw, w.dat., to be angry

dta-Adw, to dissolve, sepa- _ plot against. with.
rate. éoxatoc, -7, -ov (superl. of 672, that, because.
duxalw, to judge. é), outermost, utmost, mplv av, w. subj., before,
dixacTHc, -0v, 6, a judge, last. ere, until.
a magistrate. ixetevo, to ask, suppli- ¢vTedw, to plant.
elite, w. opt., O that. cate, entreat.

Oi orpatiGTar THY TOALY Gxd TGY TOELiny aroddcovelv. ‘O ypnoToc ty-
Spuroc Kal! roic éxyovoe guTevoet. "EAriCouev xavta eb avicew. ‘O dyye-
hog éxhyyedae Toig ToAitalc, OTL of ToAEULOL TH oTpaTedpatt éExtBovdAedootev.
‘AvtAdede ’Ayauéuvovi gunvicev. Oi “EAAnvec avdpeia rodAd icyvoar. ‘O Sw:
koatng oby ikétevoe Todg dOiKaoTadc weTa TOAAGY daxciwr, GAAA TLOTEhoac TH
éautod GAaBeia éxivdtvevce Tov EcxaTov Kivduvov. Tac Trav davawr orpnSetar

ee

§ 84. ] CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 89

dAiyoe xpovog OtéAvoev. Tpiv dv dudoiv podov axotoye,' yj Cixase. Ol Aake-
Saruovior TlAatade xatédvoav. Tic dv mioretoa (mioteboese) etary; Eide

, ~ > 4 ’ 7 , 4 4 1 p 4 4 € ¥ , f
mavra KaAde avicayn. ’AKovoats (aKotcetac) pov,' & dite. ‘O dyyehog ixny-
yednev, bre of woAéutoe TH oTpaTig émtBovdedcarey (émLGovAciaerav). “AKov-
cov pov, © gide. ‘Eraipoc éraipw miorevoadtw. Ty modi Aéyovar uéyav Kiv-
dvvov Kivdvvetcal.

Ruiz or Syntax. The particle gy denotes a condition either
expressed or to be supplied.

You will free the town from the enemies. Good men will plant also for
their descendants. He said, that the town would incur great danger. Achil-
les and Agamemnon were angry with (dual) one another. We entreated the
magistrates with many tears. Achilles killed Hector ("Extwp, -opoc). Judge
not (pl.) before you have heard the account of both. Thou canst not trust (opt.
w. dv) a liar. May we complete (merely the opt.) everything well. O that you
would hear me, O friends! May the soldiers free us from the enemies. Hear
me, O friends! Friends should trust (imp.) friends. To command (aor.) is
easier than to do. Medea rejoiced in having murdered (aor. part.) her children.

XXXIX. Vocabulary.
(d) Present and Imperfect Middle or Passive.

’AdeAd6c, -00, 6,a brother. épyafouat, to work. Tévoual, to be poor.

aro-déyoual, to receive, épyouat, to go, come. TpaTTw, to do, to act; w.
admit, approve of. jovxoc, quiet, quietly. adv., to fare.

avAdoc, -ov, 6, a flute. Aaviive, w. acc. to be orpareiw, to make an ex-

éav = 77, or Gv, if, w.subj. concealed from, escape _pedition; Mid. to make
éyyoptoc, -ov, and éyy@- thenoticeof;lateo, Mid. war, march (in a hos

plo¢, -a, -ov, native, of to forget. [dle. tile manner).
the country. éo0c, middle, in the mid- pevdouat, to lie.

Ato dvdpe paxeoSov. Tevvaing paxoueia? rept ti¢ matpidoc. ’Avayxaiov
gore TOV vidv TeiVecSat TH maTpi. TloAAot dyatot révovtat. Noépoig toig éy-
xwptore ExeoGar addy éottv. My arodéxyou Tév dihwy tode mpd¢ Ta GavAG Got
xapilouévove. “Exaotog jovyog péonv tiv dddv épyéoSw. Of moditar teig
vouotg TeLbEcSuv. TO GdeAigo por ExeoGov. Hi PotAet cade aparrev,
goyalov. "Eav BobAn nahGe mpattey, épyafov. Yevddpevog ovdeic Aavba-
vet ToAdy ypovov. Oi Ackedatporior pet’ abAGy éorparevovTo. Hive wavreg
Gvev opync BovAcbowwto. Ato rade inzw cig tTHv TOA nhavvicSnv. "Eadv
mévy, Ohiyot pidot.

The magistrate should consult without anger. He who goes (pari.) the mid-
dle path, goes safest. Two beautiful horses are driven to the town. If (écv)
warriors fight courageously, they are admired. We will not lie, but always
speak the truth. Sons should obey their fathers. With God and fate (aica)
it is terrible to contend. Two men contended. The soldiers fought courage-
ously. O that every one would consult without anger! O that thou wouldst
always worship the Deity!

1 § 158, 5. (b). 2 § 153, (a), (1).

$0 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. [§ 84.

XL. Vocabulary.
(e) Perfect and Pluperfect Middle or Passive.

Axpa, -ac, 7, @ summit, éuduTetw, to implant. 2éyouat, dicor, to be ssid
a castle. idptw, to build, found. AnotTHs, -0d, 6, a robber.
itevouia,-ac, 7, freedom, Kat a-KAeiw, to shut, lock ovvt7Ky, -7¢, 7, a treaty

independentlegislation. up.

Oi Ancora? repdvevvTar. Avo dde26O b7d Tod abtot dideokahov wemaidev-
cSov. ‘H Bactaeia bxd Tod Ojpov AéAvtat. Tole Geoicg ixd Tdv "AGHvaiwr
wonAot ved idpvvtat. ‘H Yipa KexdzioGw. Tipd toi épyov ed BeBodvdevoo.
[dow dvSpirorce éureputevpévyn éotiv éxiSvuia tie abtovouiac. Ol Anorat
redovetaSuv. Ol woAéutot cig THY dxpav KataxexAeiovat AéyovTar. Revopav-
roc vid, Tpbaroc Kat Atédwooc, éxenadebobnv év Zaaptn. At cuvSyjKar ind
Tov BapSapwv édéhvvto.

The robber has been murdered. ‘The children of the friend have been well
brought up. The doors are said to have been shut. Before the work, you have
deliberated well. Good and bad desires have been implanted in men. The
treaties are said to have been violated by the barbarians. The two children
have been brought up by the same teacher. The royal authority had been abol-
ished by the people.

XLI. Vocabulary.
(f) Future and first Aor. Mid., and Fut. Perf. Mid. or Pass.

’Ava-rate, to cause to émitydetw, to manage, topetw, to lead forward;
rest; Dfid. to rest, re- transact with diligence, 2d. to go, march, set

cover oneself. practise. out (w. pass. aorist).
yebw (Twva Tivoc), to give woAcTela, -ac, 7, the state, 7vAN, -7¢, 7, a gate (usu-
any one ataste ofany- the administration. ally in the plural).

thing; mid. w. gen., to
taste, enjoy.

Of moAgurcr ert tHv fuetépav wOALv oTparedoovtat. Tlept trie Tov wodiTGy
owrnpiac BovrevotueGa. ‘O ratip pou édeyev, Ste mopetoorro. Oi "EAAnves
éxt trode Ilépcac éotparetoavTo. “’Avaravodueta,' & gidos. Ilpd tov épyov
ed BovAevoa. Tlévtec tipzc® yeboaoSat BoiAovra. ‘O xaTho avanavedpevog
mopevcetat. Ai mbAat tHe vuKToS? KEKAEioovTal. ’Edy ToLodTOES avAp THY To.
Areiay éxitndebdy, adz77 cb PeGovdebcerat.

You will deliberate about the safety of the citizens. The messenger an-
ounced (émayyéAAw), that the enemies would march against our town. Tho
general enjoyed a great honor. If (éév, w. subj.) the enemies shall have been
led (zopeta, subj. aor.) against us, the gates of the town will remain (have been)
clesed. Before the work, deliberate well (pl.). In (év) such a danger it is not
easy to deliberate (aor.). If you have deliberated, (aor. particip.) begin the work,

1 § 158, (a), (1). 2 § 158, 5. (a). 3 § 158, 4.

§ 85. ] VERBS.—AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 91

XLIT. Vocabulary.
(g) First Aorist and first Future Passive.

Anuoxparia, -ac, 7, the m7 after verbs of fear, w. in ne, to be translated
rule of the people, de- —subj.,if a pres., perf. or by ‘that’ or ‘lest,

mocracy. fut. goes before; w. opt., moAéutoc, -d, -ov, hostile
émi-dépw, to bring upon; if an historical tense of the enemy.

moAeuov Tevt, bellum in- goes before; asthe Lat- ripavvog -ov, 6, a sove-

feo. reign, a tyrant.

‘O "Extap 076 Tob ’AxLAAEws EdovetOn. Tod ddeAgod bird Tod aitod didacKa-
hov éxatdeviyryyv. TodAat dnuoxpatiat bd Tév tupavvev KaTeAiEnaav. Meé-
yac goBoc Tode woAitag éxer, pH al ovvdjKat dnd Tov ToAcuiny AvSGaLv. Eide
mavrec veaviar KadGco naidevdeiev. ovedSyti, O kaxotpye. Oi orparedrat
ele Tv ToAeuiav ynv nopevdyjvar AéyovTa. Oi rohépiol, Tov cuvS7yKdy Av-
Vetoav,! juiv woAcnov éexidépovarv. ‘O Anat dovevOHoerat.

You were both educated by the same teacher. We were freed (éz0/ta) from
a great danger. I fear much (a great fear holds me), that the friend, who set
off (particzp.) six days ago, has been murdered by robbers. I feared much, that
you had been murdered by robbers. The two robbers are said to be killed.
The youth is said to be well brought up. The treaties are said to have been
violated by the enemies. Well brought up youths are esteemed by all. The
robbers will be killed.

ee
=

§ 85. A more particular view of the Augment and
Reduplication.

After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication (§ 77,
3 and 4), it is necessary to treat them more particularly.

As has been already seen, all the historical tenses, viz. the Impf.,
Plup. and Aor., take the augment, but retain it only in the Indica-
tive. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal.

(a) Syllabic Augment.

1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem be-
gins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing ¢ to the stem, in the
Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication, in the Piuperfect. In
this way, the verb is increased by one syllable; e. ¢. Bovdevo, Impf.
é-Bovievor, Aor. &-Bovdevoa, Plup. é-Be-Bovievzeu.

2. If the stem begins with 9, this letter is doubled when the aug-
ment is prefixed (§ 8, 12); e. g. 6izzm, to throw, Impf. e¢guzzor,
Aor, i6uwa.

Gen. absolute, like the Abl. absolute in Latin.

92 VERBS.—TEMPORAL AUGMENT. [§§ 86, 87.

Rem. 1. The three verbs GotdAouat, to will, dvvapat, to be able, and
éA 1, to be about to do, among the Attic writers take 7, instead of ¢, for the
augment; still this is found more with the later Attic writers, than with the
earlier; e. g. Aor. 8ovagdyv and 7PovdqSyv ; Impf. édvvauny and ndvvauny,
Aor. éduviSnv and 7ovva7dnv (but always édvvaotyyv); Impf. gueAdov and
juednov (the Aor. is very seldom 7uéAA702).

Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers the augment ¢ is often omitted in the Plup.
of compounds, for example, when the preposition ends with a vowel; in sim-
ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided, precedes; e. g. dvaPeGHKel, KaTa-
dedpaunkecar.

§ 86. (b) Temporal Augment.

The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins
with a vowel, and consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel; in
this way the quantity of the syllable is increased ;

a becomes 7, €. g.

”

ayo Impf. iyov Perf. 7a Plup. 7yev.

é Ns eAmiva sc PAriCov “ fAniKa -“ nAmixey
3 ze i, “* “(kertto “" ‘ixérevor ~~ ‘tkereuna, “© “ikeTevkeee
Qo ss @, “ dputréw “© Guihovy = @tAnka =“ Opidnnery
oe 0, “ WBpilo “ "dBpilov. “° “OBpika “ “OBpixeww
y, ‘ eipéo “ HpovV ‘“ HpnKa “monkey
au. fF nv, *§ aviréw “ niAovy “ nvAnna = ogbAnKev
BE ree @, “ oixTila “ @xKTilov “ xTiKa SS Gh TiKELY.

Remark. Verbs which begin with 7, 7, 0, w, ov and ez, do not admit the aug-
ment; e.g.777 G01, to be overcome, Impf. 7TTOunv, Perf. 7rrnuat, Plup. 777H-
unv; it 64, to press, Aor."izwoa; ‘0 Tv 6 w, to lull to sleep, Aor. “imvwca; @ ¢ €-
Aéw, to benefit, Impf. odéAovv,; ob 7T& la, to wound, Impf. oitalov; ei kw, io
yield, Impf. eixov, Aor. eifa; eix alo, to liken, is an exception, which among
the Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented; e. g. e‘xalov, seldom 7Kalov,
elxaca, seldom 7kaca, eikacpual, seldom zxacuat. Also those verbs whose stem
begins with ev, usually take no augment; e. g. evyouas, to supplicate, evyounr,
more rarely 7iyounv, but Perf. niypa:, not etyyar; ebpicxo, to find, in good
prose, always omits the angment. ;

§ 87. Remarks on the Augment.

1. Verbs beginning with a& followed by a vowel, have ¢ instead of 7; but
those beginning with @, av and oz followed by a vowel, do not admit the aug-
ment; e. g. ’diw, to perceive (poetic), Impf. “aiov; "ay diCopuat, to be dis-
gusted with, Impf. ’dndisounv; avativea, to dry, Impf. avawov; oiaxila, to
steer, Impf. oidKiGov ; also GvaAioxe, to destroy, although no vowel follows 4, has
évaiooda, évaéhoxka, as well as dviiwoa, GviAwKa. But olopat, to telieve, always
takes the augment; e. g. dounv. :

2. Some verbs, also, beginning with oz followed by a consonant, do not take
ihe augment; e. g. oikovp éa, to guard the house, Aor. oixotpnoa.

8. The eleven following verbs, beginning with ¢, have ec instead of 7, for the
augment, viz. 4&0, to permit, Impf. eiwv, Aor. etaca; é&% ila, to accustom, (to
which belongs also ciwa, to be accustomed); eia&mnv Aor. (stem ‘EA), TI es-

§ 88. | VERBS.—REDUPLICATION. 93

tablished, founded; éXiccw, to wind; EAKw, to draw; Aor. eiAKica (stem
‘EAKY); elo, to take, Aor. (stem ‘EA) of aipéw; Exopat, to follow; ép-
yalouat, to work; Epww, Epwi la, to creep, to go; éoTtaa, to entertain;
Ev a, to have.

4. The following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, augment:

ayvi pt, to break, Aor. éaéa, ete.

aghioxopat, capoor, Perf. éAwka and 7Aoka.

@% €, to push, odour, ete.

avéopat, to buy, Impf. éwvotpnv, Perf. éovnpaz.

5. The verb £0p7T &Ca, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second
syllable, Impf. éoptefov. The same is true of the following forms of the Plu-
perfect :

EIKQ, second Perf. éovxa, I am like, Plup. éd« ecv.

éAropat, to hope, second Perf. goAra, I hope, Plup. 2027 euv.

EPTQ, to do, second Perf. éopya, Plup. éopyerv.

6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the
same time:

6p aa, to see, Impf. éOpwr, Perf. éOpaxa, éOpapat.

&v Ooty, to open, Impf. dvéwyov, Aor. avéwfa (Inf. dvoigac), ete.

GAtoKkopu at, to be taken, Aor. éGAwv (Inf. dAdvat, é) and jiwv.

§ 88. Reduplication.

1. Reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the
stem with <. It denotes a completed action, and hence is prefixed
to the Perf., e. g. 2¢-duxa, I have loosed; to the Fut. Perf., e. g.
xe-xoounoouat, I shall be adorned, from xocpém; and to the Plup.,
which as a historical tense, takes also the augment ¢ before the re-
duplication; e. g. é-Be-Bovdevxew. It remains in all the modes, as
well as in the Inf. and Part.

2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem begins
with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid; verbs beginning
with 0, yv, 72, 62,* (except PeBraqa, BeBlopuoe from PLante, to
injure, BeBiacgyugze from Blacgypéw, to blaspheme, BeBiaccyxe
and ¢Biaczyxa from flactave, to sprout,) are exceptions, inasmuch

as they take only the simple augment; e. g.

200, to loose, Perf. 2é-Avxa Plup. é-Ae-2AdKeev
Tb, to sacrifice, * -ré-Suxa (§ 8, 10.) « é-re-SvKey
outed, to plant, “* we-pvTevKa (§ 8, 10.) “ b-e-guTevKey
Xopeby, to dance, ‘“ Ke-xopevka (§ 8, 10.) “6 é-Ke-yopedKel
ypaga, to write, ‘« yé-ypada “ é-ye-ypadgetv
Kiiva, to bend, Ké-KALKG “ 8-Ke-KAiKkely
Kpiva, to judge, “ Ké-Kptka ‘¢ é-Ke-Kpixely

—_—_——

* Such verbs are excepted on account of the difficulty of repeating these
letters —Tr. 1 ( :

94 VERBS.—ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [§ 89.

avéw, tv breathe, Perf. mé-mvevka —-Plup. éqe-avetvxecy
Adu, to bruise, “ 7é-3Aaxa (§ 8, 10.) “ é-re-FAGKeww
pinta, to throw, « éppida “ ébpidery
yvapive, tomake known, “ é-yvopixa ¢ é-yvopixew
Braxeva, to be slothful, “ é-BAdKevka “* -BAaKetKety
yAtou, to carve, “ &-yAvoa “ g-yhdgev.

3. The reduplication is not used (beside the above cases of verbs
beginning with @, 7”, B24, 72), when the stem of the verb begins
with a double consonant or two single consonants, which are not a
mute and liquid; e. g.

(n26, to emulate, Perf. é-CdaKa Piup. eine OKELV
Eevdw, to entertain, &-f€vWOKA é-EevOKElv
WaArdw, to sing, « g-pahka “« é-WaAKetv
o7eipw, to sow, ‘« é-oTapKka ‘6 €-oT GpKelv
KTilw, to build, . “ E-KTLKG s 8-KTiKeELY
xTvocw, to fold, “ é&arvya “ é-arbyew

Rem. 1. The two verbs uiv7oKkw (stem MNA), to remind, and ktTG@opmas,
io acquire, take the reduplication, although their stem begins with two conso-
nants, which are not a mute and a liquid: mé-yvypar, Ké-KTH AL, é-pe-pYHUY,
B-KE-KTHUNY.

4, Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this letter,
but take « for the augment:

AauBave, to iake, Perf. eiAnga Plup. eiAjgerv
Aayxave, to obtain, elAnya “ giAnyew

Aéyo, ovAréyo, to collect, “* ovvethoxa “ ouvEelAdyerv
‘PEQ, to say, “ eipnka “< elpnKetv
peipouat, to obtain, “ eivaptat (with rough Breathing), 7 is fated.

Rem. 2. Avadéyopat, to converse, has Perf. dveia ey Ul at, though the
simple 2éyo in the sense of to say, always takes the regular reduplication, AéAey-
pal, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting).

§ 89. Attte Reduplication.

Several verbs, beginning with @, ¢ or o, repeat, in the Perf.
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of the
stem. This augmentation is called the Attic Reduplication. The
Plup. then very rarely takes an additional augment; 7xyxoew has
the regular Attic reduplication.

(a) Verbs whose second stem-syllable is short by nature:

apou, -G, to plough, éddw (éAavva), to drive,
dp-7npoka ap-hpouat éA-fAaka é-fauat
ap-npoKxelv ap-npounv éA-7AGKeLv éA-nhauny
éA€éyxo, to convince, dpotTa, to dig,
éA-ndeyxa £A-AEeyuat dp-opuxa op-Gpuypat
éA-nhéyxelv éA-nhéypenv dp-wpvyey op-wpvypny

(b) Verbs which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel long.

§$90.| . VERBS.—AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. G5

by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication sonnet
éosidw, to prop, éojosina, Eouoeicpat) :

aAeig¢w, to anoint, dkova, to hear,
dA-naiga GAG Appar Ck-qKoa KOVAL
dA-nrigery aa-nrippnv HK-NK6ELV HKovounv
ayeipa, to collect, éycipw, to awaken,
ay-nyepka cy-hyepyat éy-qyepKa ey-7yeppat
ay-nyépice aY-NYEPUNV éy-nyépKetv EY-NVEPKNY.

Remark. The verb dyw, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and
$epw, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication, with this difference,
however, that the vowel of the reduplication takes the temporal augment only
in the Ind., and the vowel of the stem remains pure:

Gy, to lead, Aor. II. 7y-ayov, Inf. dyayeiv, Aor. II. Mid. 7yayéunv.

@ép, to carry (stem ’ETK), Aor. Il. 7v-eyxov, Inf. év-eyxeiv, Aor. I. 7v-

eva, Inf. év-éynat, Aor. Pass. 7v-éy 9-7, Inf. év-exSFvac.

§90. dugment and Reduplicationin Compound
Words.

1. First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the aug-
ment and reduplication between the preposition and the verb; then
prepositions which end with a vowel, except zegi and zg0, suffer
Elision (§ 6, 8); zeo frequently combines with the augment by
means of Crasis (§ 6, 2), and becomes zgov, and éy and ovv resume
their » which had been assimilated, or dropped, or changed; e. g.
ao-BaAAo, to throw from, Im.ar-éGahAov Pf.aro-BéBAnxa Plp. an-eBeBAqnerv

wept-BaAdu, to throw around, meplt-éBaddov mepl-BéBAnKa wepl-EPEeBAnKev
mpo-GaAdw, to throw before, mpo-gBardov xpo- -BéB? ANKG Tpo-EseBAnkew
TpovBaAAov TpovseBAnnerv
2u-BGA20, to throw in, év-EBaddov éu-BéGAnxa év-eBeBAQKev
éy-yiyvouat, to be in, év-eyltyvounv éy-yéyova EV-EVEYOVELY
gu-oKevila, to pack up, ovy-eoKevalov cuv-eckevaka OVV-ECKEVEKELVY
sup-pizTo, to throw together, ovv-éhbirtov cvv-ébfida ouv-eppiperv
svA-Aéyu, to collect together, cvv-édeyov ovy-elhoya ovy-ernoxerv

2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with dvg take the augment
and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem of the sim-
ple verb begins with a consonant or a vowel which does not admit
the temporal augment; (b) but in the middle, when the stem of the
simple verb begins with a vowel which admits the temporal aug-
ment; €. z-

Crs-Tv XE, to be unfortunate, é-dugruyevv , de-dugriynka &é-de-ducruxynxew

éug-w7éo, to make ashamed, é- -ducarouv

cve-apectéw, to be displeased, duc-ypéoTovv dve-npéoTyKka.

Verbs compounded with e may take the augment and reduplica-
tion at the beginning cr in the middle, yet they commonly omit
inera at the beginning, and evepyezéw usually in the middle; e. g

96 VERBS.—AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. [§§ 91, 92

eb-Tvxéw, to be fortunate, no-Tbxour, commonly ¢b-riyouv
eb-wyéoual, to feast well, eb-axoouny :
ev-epyeTéw, to do good, eb-npyétouv, Perf. eb-npyétnka, commonly et-

epyéTovy, ev-epyéTnKa.
8. Third rule. All other compounds take the augment and re-
duplication at the beginning; e. g.

pvSohoyéw, to relate, éuvdoAoyouy pepvdonoynka
oixodouéw, to build, @xodduouv GKOOOUNKG.

§91. Remarks.

1. The six following words compounded with prepositions, take the augment
in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi-
tion :
duréxouat, to clothe oneself, Impf. jumeryounv or aurety. Aor. NUMECKOUNY

avéxoual, to endure, “ yverxounv NVECKOUNVY
dudiyvoéw, to be uncertain, “ nugeyvoovr and judLyv.

avoptow, to raise up, “ qvepSovv Perf. 7vapSaxa “ 7vapSoca
évoxAéw, to molest, “ fvoxyAovyv =“ HvoxyAnka “ HrvoxdAnoa
mapolvéw, to rid, “ érapdvovyv “ menapsvnxa’ érapovyoa.

2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not com-
pounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, viz.
dtattéw (from diarta, food), (a) to feed, (b) to be a judge, Impf. édujrwv and
dijrwv, Perf. dedujrnka.
dtaxovén, to serve (from draKovoc, servant), Impf. édinxévovv and diqKovov»,
Perf. dedinkévnka.
dudioBntéo (from AM@IZBHTHE, fo dispute), Impf. nudecBarovy and 7p-
pro BATovy.
8. Exceptions to the first rule ({ 90,1). There are several verbs compound-
ed with prepositions, which take the augment before the preposition, since they
have nearly the same signification as the simple verbs; e. g.

audryvoéw (voéw), to be uncertain, Impf. 7udtyvéovy or judgeyvdovv (No. 1)

augiéevvvm, to clothe, Aor. nudieca, Perf. nugieouar

ériotauat, to know, Impf. amc raunv

Kavdile, to cause to sit, “ éxG@dilov, Perf. cexadixa

KkatéCouat, to sit, “ éxadeCounv and catel. (without Aug.)
Kadnwat, to sit, « éxadnuny and xadjuny (without Aug.)
katevda, to sleep, “ éxabevdor, seldom cadyidov.

4, Those verbs form an apparent exception to the first rule (§ 90, 1), which
are not formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by
derivation from a word already compounded (Comp. No. 2); e. g.

évavTLovuat, to oppose oneself to, from évavtiocg Impf. 7vavriobunv
avTlotKéw, to defend at law, “ avridiKog “ AyTLOlKoUY
éurredéw, to establish, “6 éuredog “< nurédovr.

§ 92. Division of Verbs in -o according to the Characteristic, to-
gether with Remarks on the Formation of the Tenses.
Verbs in -c are divided into two principal classes, aecording to
the different nature of the characteristic (§ 77, 5):

§ 93.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 97

I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel; these are again
divided into two classes:

A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, except
&, &,0; e. g. maidsv-0, to educate, iv-w, to loose ;
B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is either a, € Or 0; e. g.
zyuc-c0, to honor, giré-co, to love, u1006-0, to Let.
II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; these are
again divided into two classes :
A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine mutes ;
e. g. Aein-co, to leave, mhéx-m, to twine, met9-«, to persuade ;
_ B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four liquids,
A, ft, %, 03 @. g. ayyéll-w, to announce, véu-w, to divide,
puiv-c, to show, peio-w, to destroy.
Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., all
verbs are divided into, ;
(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not ac-
fented ; e. g. At-w, TAEK-w, etc. ;
(b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumMexed in the first Pers. ; these
are consequently contract verbs; e. g. TING, $17.0, moO.

-

§93. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs.

1. In pure verbs, both Barytones and Perispomena, the tense-
endings are commonly appended to the unchanged characteristic ;
€. g. Bovdev-ow, BeBoviev-ze. Pure verbs do not form the Second-
ary tenses, but only the Primary tenses; the Perf. with x (xe), the
Fut. and Aor. with o (om, cw). Pure verbs, however, are subject
to the following regular change in the stem:

2. The short characteristic-vowel of the Pres. and Impf., both in
Barytones and Perispomena, is lengthened in the other tenses. The
Barytones will first be considered, thus:

t into i, e.g. unr-iw, LqVv-Cw, &-uivi-ca, ete.;
v into 3, e. g. KoAt-a, KwAb-cu, Ke-KOAD-UaL.

kKohiw, to hinder. ACTIVE: :
Pres. | Ind. cord-o Subj. koAt-o Imp. codi-e Inf. codd-ewy Part. cort-av
Impf. | Ind. é-«620-ov Opt. KeAd-orue
Perf. | Ind. xe-x620-Ka Inf. ke-KwAd-xévar Part. KE-KWAD-KOC

Plup. | Ind. 2-Ke-Kw26-Kevy:

Ind. kwAd-ow Opt. xw2t-coius Inf. Korb-cev Part. koab-cwv
Ind. é-x6)0-ca Subj. codt-co Opt. xoAb-carpe
Imp. k020-cov Inf. codi-car Part. koAb-cac.

93 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [§ 94.

MIDDLE.

Pres. | Ind. kwAt-ouat Subj. koAt-opat Imp. K@Ad-ov Inf. KwAd-eoBar
Part. KwAd-duevoc
Impf. Ind. é-cwri-dunv Opt. Ko2i-olunv ,
Perf. | S.1.| Ind. xe-x@Ad-nar Imperative Intinitive
Ké-KOAD-CaL Ké-K@A0-00 Ke-KWAD-oG at
; Ke-KOAD-TAL Ke-KWA0-0FW Particinl
DA: ke-KoAb-wedov oe ee
ke-K@Av-o8ov ke-K@Av-oG ov ee
: ke-K@Av-o8ov Ké-KoA0-oS wy Subjunctive
Poi. ke-KoAb-weta Ke-KWAD-LEvoe @
Ke-K@Av-o0e Ke-KOAv-oSe
KE-KOAV-VTaL ke-KoAv-owoar or Ke-KoAb-oS ar]
Plup. |S. 1. é-ce-kwAd-unv D. é-Ke-Kwdd-uetov P. é-Ke-kodd-weGa Opt. Ke- |
Ind. Q, é-Ke-KOAD-cO é-Ke-KO@Av-o ov é-Ke-K@Av-o8e [KwAv-pé
8. é-KE-K@AD-TO é-Ke-KwAb-ob HV é-Ke-K@Av-vT0 | voc einv
Fut. | Ind. coad-couae Opt. cadAdooiuny Inf. kwAd-cecdSar Part. kodo- |
oomevocg
Aor. | Ind. é-co20-sapnv Subj. koAd-couar Opt. kodd-caiuny Imp.
K@dv-cat Inf. kwdt-cacSat Part. koAd-capevoc.

PASSIVE.

VAor. [Ind. é«oad-Syv Subj. cod0-96 Opt. KoAo-Ceinv

Imp. coat-Gyte Inf. coAi-Sivar Part. koAd-Gei¢
Fut. | Ind. cwAd-djoouat Opt. Kwav-Snooiunv Inf. codo-Sacecbar
Part. KOAD-o6pEVOC.

_~ =

x

§94. Verbs which, contrary to the rule, retain the short Character-
estic-vowel in fornung the Tenses.

1. Several pure verbs, contrary to the rule (§ 93, 2), retain the short charac-
teristic-vowel, either in all the tenses, or at least in some tenses. Most of these
verbs take a o in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. and in the first Aor. Pass. This is
indicated by the phrase, Pass. with o (see § 95). Thus:

X pia, to prick, Fut. ypiow, Aor. éypica, Inf. ypicat. Pass. witho; (but ypia,
to anoint, Fut. ypiow, Aor. éxpioa, Inf. ypicat, Aor. Mid. éypioduny; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. xéypiopat, kexypiobat; Aor. Pass. éypiod nv).

"A vw, to complete, Fut. dviow; Aor. 7vica. Pass. with o.

&p%, to draw water, Fut. dptow ; Aor. j7pica. Pass. with co.

2% w, to close, e. g. the eyes, Fut. picw, Aor. éuica; but Perf. péuixa, L am shut,

am silent.

TT ¥, to spit, Fut. triow; Aor. éxtica. Pass. with o.

idpba, to cause to sit, Fut. idpicw; Aor. idpioa (later idptow, idpica); Aor.

Pass. idpi0-ny.

2. The following dissyllables in -iw lengthen the short characteristic-vowel
in the Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., and dv also in the Perf. and Plup. Act.,
but they resume the short vowel in the Perf. and Plup. Act. (except dv), also
in the Mid. or Pass., and in the Aor. and Fut. Pass. :

6%, to wrap up, Fut. diow Aor. édica Perf. dédixa dédipuat, Aor. Pass, EdbOnv

So, tosacrifice, “ Biow “ éeioa “ Téixa TEDipa “ “briny

A% w, to loose, “ bow “ #doa “ AédinaAéPina “ “ éLOOqv

od

a‘

§ 95.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 99

Remark. When the vowel in the Fut. Act. is long, and short in the Perf.
Mid. or Pass., the Fut. Perf. resumes the long vowel, both in uncontracted verbs
and in contract pure verbs; e. g. Atw, AeAtoopat.

§95. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and Perf. and Plup.
Mid. or Pass. with o.

1. Pure verbs which retain the short characteristic-vowel of the stem in form-
ing the tenses, insert o (Comp. § 94) before the tense-ending -37v, -pa1, etc. in
the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass.; this o con-
nects the endings to the tense-stem; e. g.

TEAE-@ é-reXé-o-Onv Té-TEAE-0- al
Tede-o-Ojoopat é-Té-TEAE-O-ULV.

2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have a long character-
istic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen it in forming the tenses, take the same forma-
tion; e. g. dkobw, to hear, Aor. 7kob-o-Snv, Fut. dxov-c-Gycopat, Perf. 7xov-c-
pa, Plup. 7Kov-o-unv ; évaiw, to kindle; kedebtw, to command; kvdkw, to roll ;
Aeiw, to stone; Fbw, to scrape; mpiw, to saw; cEeiw, to shake; xptw, to anoint (§ 94) ;
ava, to touch, ete.

ACTIVE.

Pres. kedev-w Perf. xKe-KéAev-Kka Fut. KeAet-ow

keAebo, to command.

Impf. é-«éAev-ov Plup. é-Ke-Kehev-Kewv Aor. é-Kéhev-oa.
: MIDDLE.
Present kehev-opat Impf. é-KeAev-duqv
Perf. S. 1. | xe-xéAev-o-ae Imperative Infinitive
Ind. 2. | Ke-KéAev-car KE-KEAEV-00 Ke-KeAev-o8al
3. | Ke-KELEV-O-TAL Ke-Kedev-o0w Participle
D. 1. | Ke-Kedeb-o-weSov pone a = ae
2. | Ke-KéXev-c8-ov Ke-KéAev-o0ov HENS
3. | Ke-KéXev-o0ov Ke-KEAEV-00 WV Subjunctive
P.1. | Ke-nedet-o-ueda KE-KEAEV-0-MEVOE @
2. | Ke-KéAev-ote_ Ke-Kédev-ote
3. | Ke-KeAev-0-uEvol eict ke-KeAev-o8woar or Ke-KeAed-o8wr|
TS SSA A ae IM Eh ell ah i coi oa (ty
Plup. 8.1. | é-«e-cedeb-o-uqv D. é-ke-xedet-o-uetov P. é-Ke-Keheb-o-weta
Ind. 2. | é-xe-KéXev-co é-Ke-KELEv-oVOV é-xe-KéAev-o_
3. | é-Ke-KéLEv-G-TO é-Ke-KeAev-o07nv KE-KEAEV-0-LEVOL OAV

o)
ss

“KE-KEAEV-C-LEVOE ELNV

Future KeAevoouat Fut. Perf. xe-xkeAet-couac _Aor. é-KeAev-caunr.
en SS ST EE SS a TT
PASS VE.

é-KeAev-o-Snv Future xeAev-o-0joopat.

Rem. 1. Some vary between the regular formation and that with o.

S pata, to break in pieces, TES pavouae and 7éSpavpat, eS patodnv

h Aelia, to shut, KéxAecouat and Att. KéxAnwat; Aor. ékAeiod yy.

A pov, to strike upon, xéxpovyat and Kéxpovowat; Aor. éxpotatnv.

Rem. 2. Some contrary to the rule, do not take o, although thgy retain the
short characteristic-vowel; thus, e. g. dtw, Siw, Avw, mentioned § 94, 2.

100 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [§ 96.

XLII. Vocabulary.

AicSavouat, w.gen.oracc., Spouoc, -ov, 6, & course, KaTa-Tave, to put a stop

to perceive, observe. running. to.
aortic, -idoc, 7, a shield. dbvayce, -ewc, 7, strength, xpotw, to knock, beat.
deivéc, terribly, violently, | power, might. cetouoc, -0v, 6, an earth-
extraordinarily. Spavw, to break, shatter, quake.
crush. ceiw, to shake.

Oi orpatidtat mpo¢ Tode ToAEuiove TopevecBar Exededobjoay. LXnapty ToTe
trd cetouov detvic éoeiodn. ‘H tév Ilepodv dbvayec bx6 TOv ‘EAAjvevr Téd-
pavotat. Ol ToAégusoe ei¢ THY axpav KaTeKAeioSynoav. “OTe oi BapBapor Tov
doridwv xpo¢ Ta Oopata brd Tov ‘EAARveY Kexpovopuévav yoavorto, Sphue
Epevyov. ‘O moAeuocg kateravotn.

The soldiers are ordered to march against the enemies. Our town has been
violently shaken by an earthquake. The might cf the Persians was crushed by
the Hellenes. ‘The enemies have been shut up in (into) the castle. The shields
were beaten by the enemies against their spears. The war is ended, i. e. has
been put a stop to.

£

i
* a e
“~~ § 96. Contract Pure Verbs.

1. Contract pure, verbs, as has been seen § 92, are such as have
for their characteristic «, ¢ or 0, which are contracted with the mode-
vowel following. Contraction takes place only in the Pres. and
Impf. Act. and Mid. or Pass., because, in these two tenses only, is
the characteristic-vowel followed by another vowel.

2. The following are the contractions which occur here:

a + « becomes @ e-e =e o+e =ov
OE ety =7 o+ty =a
aty = ¢ ety =7 oty =o
ato = @ eto =ov o-+o =ov
ato = o eto =o oto =a
ate = « ete =e ote = ot (ov in Inf.)
ato = @ e-Fo. = ot oto =o
@To = @o e+ov = ov o+ov =ov.

3. The tenses of contract verbs, as has been seen § 93, are form-
ed like those of uncontracted pure verbs, i. e. the short characteris-
tic-vowel is usually lengthened, in forming the tenses, viz.

é into 7, e. g. pidé-«, to love, pidij-cw, me-qpihy-xe, ete.

0 into @, e. g. wict0-c, to let out, p05 90-00, wE-wicPo-xeL, ete.

@ into 7, e. g. ticé-0, to honor, timyj-ow, té-tiy-xe, ete.

a into @, e.g. é@-o, to permit, Fut. éd-cw. This lengthening
into & occurs, when «, sor g@ precedes (Comp. § 26, 1); e. g.

é-00, 4-00; pEdid-c, to laugh, nedid-cope; papd-o, to catch

5 96.] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 101

a thief, pood-cw (but éyyvé-w, to give as a pledge, éyyvyjow;
Boc-co, to ery out, Bor-copc, like 6750n). To these verbs be-
long the following:
aioa-o, to thresh, alod-cw,
cixpod-ouct, to hear, dupod-copa.
“Remark. The verbs x p @, to give an oracle, yp Gopal, to use, and Tit pao,

fo bore, although a p precedes, lengthen @ into 7; e. g. ypjoouat, tpjow. The
exceptions to rule No. 3. will be stated in § 98.

102

Modes
and
Participials.

Numbers
and
Persons

CONTRACT PURE VERBS.

[§.96.

PARADIGMS OF

ACTIVE.

Present.

Characteristic a.

Characteristic e.

Characteristic o.

Indic-
ative.

S. 1. | 7¢u(a-w)6, to honor, | $1A(é-w)6, to love,
2. | Tiu-(a-el¢) ae otA(é-erc) etc
3. | Tuu(G-eL)a pla(é-eL et
D.1.
2. | Tiu(G-e)a-Tov gu2(é-€)et-Tov
3. | Tiu(G-e)G-Tov $tA(é-e)et-Tov
P.1. | rip(G-0)6-pEv piA(é-0)0d-ywEev
2. | tiu(G-e)a-Te ptA(é-e)ei-Te
3. | TL(a-ov)G-o1(v) oiA(é-ov)od-o1(v)
S. 1. | ruu(G-o)6 } S| gA(é-0)6
2.1 tLu(a-n¢)a¢ =| gea(é-ne)ac
3. | ryu(a-n)a 8 | gcA(&n)9
D.1. 28
2. | Ty(a-n)a-Tov 35 oinr(E-n)j-TOv
8. | TLu(a-n)a-Tov =" | o1A(é-1)7-Tov
P.1.| teu(4-w)d-uev | © 2. pin(é-w) G-ev
2. | Tiu(a-n)G-Te F| oiA(ێ-7)i-Te
3: Tiu(d-«)6-o1(v) J E| 62 (é-w)d-o1(v)
S. 2. Tiu(a-e)a GlA(€-€) et
3. | Tiu(a-é)a-Te lA e-€ )ei-Tw
D. 2. | tipe(a-e)G-rov pin é-e)et-Tov
3. | TLu(a-E)a-Tov bLA(€-€) €l-Tev
P, 2. | Te(a-e)d-Te pla(é-e)et-re
3. | Tiyu(a-é)a-Twoav or | dlA(e- é)
TUL( a-0)0-vTwV otA(e€-6)ob-vTav
TUL(G-erv) av btA( é-eLv )eiv
Nom.} ti(d-wv) dv oiA(é-wv ) Ov
TLu(d-ov)d-ca gLA(é-ov) od-ca
TUuL( d-ov Ov oA( é-ov ody
Gen. | Ti(G-0)6-vTo¢ o1A(é-0)0d-vTo¢
TLL( a-00)0-on¢ oLA(e-00)od-on¢
Imperfect.
S. 1. | éripu(a-ov)ov édin(e-ov ovy
2. | ériu(a-e¢)ac¢ égin(e-er ec
3. | éTiu(a-e)a Egin(e-e) et
Dei.
2. | ériu(G-e)d-Tov EbiA(é-e e)et- TOV
3. | éTup(a-é)a-THVv EptA(e-€)ei-ryv
P. 1. | éryu(G-0)0-wev EgLA(E- -0)od-wev
2, )
3.

éTlu(G-e)G-Te
étip(a-ov)wv

pod 6-w)G, to let,
pod (6-e1¢)ot¢
pod ( 6-et) oF

[tad (6-€)o0-Tor
pto8( 6-€ )ov-Tov
po 6-0 )od-uer
pod (6-€)0v-Te
pod (6-0v)ov-o1(v)
pod ( 6-0)@ |
pucod(6-n¢)ot¢

pod 6-1)ot

pod (6-7) G-Tov
pod (0-7 )G-Tov
poh{ 6-0) O-wev
pod (0-4) 0-Te
pod (6-w)G-o1(v)

Or OO |

pio (0- e)ov
role 0-é)00-T@
pod (6- €)ov-Toy
pLod(0-é)00-Twv
pod 6-e)ov-TE

el-TWOoaVv or pod ( 0-€)0v-Twoav

or pod (0-6) od-vTwy
pod (6-ELv )oov

es oe

Epla(é-e)ei-Te
Egin( e-ov)ovy

pod (6-wyv) Gv
Lod (6-0v)od-oa
[cod (6-ov Jovy
tod 6-0)0d-vTo¢
ptod(0-0v)ob-one.

éuio&(o-ov)ovy
uiod(o-e¢)oug
éuioS(o-e)ov

Eucord( 6-e)od-rov
ema 0-€)ov-T nV
Euros (6 6-0)ob-wev
Euod(6- -€)0v-TE
éuic&(o-ov)ovy

§96.]

CONTRACT PURE VERBS.

CONTRACT VERBS.

MIDDLE.

103

Present.

Characteristic a.

Characteristic e.

Characteristic o.

TLL(G-0) 6-"at
rip ion)
TUL(G-E)G-T aL
TLL (a-0)O-wedov
TLUL{ a-e)a-oF Ov
TL(a-e)d-oFov
TLyL(a-6)O-peFa
TiL(G-e)G-o8e
TUL(G-0)G-vTat
TLL (G-w) G-uae
THe G-9)G

.| Te (G-n)G-Tae
TUyL(a-0)@-weov
TLL(a-n)G-oS-ov
TUyL(a-n)d-oGov
TLuL(a-O) @-pEeFa
TLu(a-n) G-o0e
TLL(G-W)G-vT ae
TLL(G-0v)@
TLL(a-é)a-oSw
TLu(G-£)G-cSov
Tip(a-é)d-oF wv
Ti(G-€)d-o8e

Tiu(a-é)a-cSwoay or

TUy(a-é) a-oSuv
TiL(G-e)a-oF at
TLuL(a-0) O-EVvOE
TLuL(a-0) W-WEVvy
TLL(a-0)O-LeEVvov
TLpL(G-0) @-LEVOU
TL (a-0)a-wEvIC

*9ATIVOIPUT OY) OMT

$1A(é-0) 00-at
pea (é-n) i
plA(é-€) €i-Tae
pinr(e-0)0bv-neGov
pin(é-e) et-oS ov
otA(é-€) el-oSov
piA(e-6)ov-peda
piaA(é-e)el-ote
piA(é-0) 0v-vTat
b1A(é-w) G-uat

| PLA (E77

pLA(é-0)7-T aL
piA(e-)G-wedov
gtA(é-n)7j-cS ov
pir é-4)ij-00ov
oiA(e-0) 0-neGa
pun(é-4)j-oF€
OLA (é-0)G-vTaL
ptA(é-0v) 0d
giA(e-€) el-o8w
gia(é-€) ei-o0ov
pin(e-£) ei-oS wv
gia (é-e)ei-ob_e

guA(e-é)ei-o0woav or

pin(e-é) el-o8 wv
piA(é-€) ei-c0-aL
plaA(e-6) 0b-Evoc
ptA(e-0)0v-nEvn
pin(e-6)00-Eevov
gLA(e-0)cv-uévov
b1A(e-0)ov-uévne

pod (6-0) 00-paL
pat(6-4) 0%
poh (6-2) 0v-Tar
pto'S (0-6) ov-peGov
ptod(6-€)0v-cFov
plod (6-2) 00-oFov
tod (0-6) ob-veta
pLoG(6-e)0v-oFe
poh (6-0) 0b-vTaL
pos (6-w) G-nat
petod (6-79) 04
pod (6-9) G-Tat
[Lod (0-0) G-weFov
plod (6-7) 6-08ov
pos (6-4) 6-oFov
poh (0-0) a-peta
plod (6-9) G-oFe
plod (6-0) G-vT aL
pto'd (6-0v) od
pto’d (0-é)ob-oFw
plod (6-€)00-oFov
ptoS(0-é)0v-cS wv
pod (6-2) 00-oFe
po (o-é)0b-cSwoar or
pod (0-é)0b-o8wv

plod (6-€)ob-o Fat

tod (0-6) 00-wevoc
pod (0-0) ov-wEvn

pod (0-6) 0b-wevov
tod (0-0) 0v-“EvOU
ptot(o-0)ov-Lévne.

Imperfect.

étiu(a-6)O-unv
ér1p(G-0v)@
éTip(G-e)G-TL
étip(a-6)0-weor
étiu(G-e)d-oSov
ériu(a-é)G-o8nv
éripu(a-6)o-ueta
érip(G-£)G-o8e

étipu(G-0)G-vTO

EOLA (E-6)0b-unv
EgtA(é-ov) od
é61A(E-€)€l-TO

8A (e-6 )od-neov

élA(é-e)El-oFov
EptA(e-é)el-o8 nv
&tA(e-6)obd-peda
EpiA(é-e) €l-o0e

é61A(é-0)00-vTO

Eutod(0-6)obv-unv
éutod (d-0v) ov
éutod (6-2)00-TO
éutod(0-6)0b-peSov
éutod(6-e)ov-oFov
éuiod (0-é)ob-oSnv
éutod(0-6)ob-weda
Eutod(6-e)0t-oFe
éutot(6-0)00-vTo

CONTRACT PURE VERBS.

[s.97.

a ;
= m . -
eel ae Imperfect.
ese | Sse
= =z & | Characteristic a. | Characteristic. | Characteristic o.
S. 1. | Teu(G-01)0-pe otA(é-08)oi-ut pod ( 6-0) ol-Ut
2.) Teu(G-ol¢) @¢ oLA(E-ol¢) 066 pod (G-olc)oi¢g
3. | TLp(G-01)@ btA(Eé-0L) 08 ptod (6-04) 0%
pt.
2. | TLp(G-01)@-Tov g1A(é-0L)0i-Tov ptoS(d-01)0l-Tov
3. | TLu(a-0l)d-THv $tA(€-01)0i-T nv pod (0-01) 0i-T nv
P.1. | Tip(d-01)6-wev tA (€-0t)ol-wev puto (6-01) 0i-wev
2. | r1u(G-01)O-TE $t2(é-0l) 06-TE pc (0-0t)0i-Te
3. | Tlu(G-0L)G-ev btA(é-01)ol-ev pod (6-01) oi-ev
S. 1. | tie(a-01)5-nv tA (e-0l)oi-nv pto& (0-01) 0i-nv
9. | TLUu(a-01)S-n¢ btA(€-0i)ol-n¢ pod (0-01 )ol-n¢
3. | Tiu(a-0t)S-7 @1A(£-01)0i-n pod (0-0l) 0-9
D. 2. | r1u(a-01)5-nrov oth(€-01) 0l-nTov pto'S (0-01) 0i-nT ov
3. | TLu(a-0l)W-7T HV OtA(€-0L)0L-AT HV Eto (0-0) 0l-7T HV
P.1.| Te(a-01)65-nuev otA(€-0l)ol-nwev pod (0-01) ol-nuev
2.| TLy(a-ot)s-nTE oA (€-01)0i-nTEe po (0-0¢) ol-nre
3.| Tue(G-01) O-ev otA(é-0l)oi-ev pto (6-01) 0i-ev
Perf. | retiunka TEpiAnKa pepioSuxa
TEpopaKa
Plup.| éreripqjKecy eTEedlAnKely EMEMLOOOKELY
eTEdWPGKELY
Fut. | tiujcw dwpdow | biAjow pLoS OCW
Aor. | étiznoa é¢opdca | é¢iAnoa épioSwoa
F-.Pf.
PAS
Aorist, | érepqOnv eduopdbnv | eocantnv | gucodadny |

Verbal adjectives: tiun-Téoc, -Téa, -Téov, Gwod-TéoC, -Téa, -TéOV,

§97. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract
Verbs.

1. Verbs in -éo with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. 7Aéw, to sail, rvéw, to breathe,
Séw, to run, are contracted only in ez (arising from ée or ee), but in all the
other forms, they are uncontracted ; e. g.

Act. Pr. Ind. tAéo, wieic, rAei, TAEOpmeEerv, TrEiTe, TAEOVEL(Y).

Subj. tAé0, TAENC, TAED, TAEOmEDY, TAEHTE, TAEWCL(Y).
Imp. wAei. Inf. rieiv. Part. tAé wv, TAEovGa, TAEOY.
EtTAEOY, Erhece, Echel, EXTAEOmEY, EmAeite, ETAEOY.
Opt. wAéolpl, TAEOLS, ete.
Mid. Pr.Ind. wAéopat, rAén, TAeira, TAcb peor, TAcioor, ete.
Inf. mdeioGar. Part. tAcdpevoc. Impf. étAcéunrv.

2. The verb 6 é a, to bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu-
larly in compounds; e. g. 7d dody, Tod dodyroc, dadotuat, karédovv.

3. Several verbs deviate from the general rules of contraction ; e. g.

(a) -ae and -aee are contracted into -7 and -y, instead of into -a and -a@; e.g.

$97.

Characteristic a.

CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 105

Imperfect.

Characteristic ¢. | Characteristic o.

Tiu(a-ot)5-unv
TLu( d-0L)@-0
Tu(a-0l)G-To ~
Tyu{ a-0t) 5-wedov
Ti d-0L)G-oFov
TUu( a-01) 5-0 Fnv
Tipu a-0t)@-ueSa
Til G-o1)O-o8e

TLu( G-01)G-vTo

ptA( e€-01)o0i-unv
otX(é-01)ot-0
ptA{€-04)0i-To
ptA(e-0t)oi-wedov
pin é-01)0i-o Sov
piA(e-01)oi-oF nv
ptA( €-01)oi-weda
ptA(é-01)oi-oFe

ptA( é-01)ol-vTo

pot (0-01) oi-unv
puto (6-04) ot-o
puto (6-01) 0i-To
pod (0-01) ot-peov
pod(4-01)ot-oFov
ULod(0-01)ot-oSyv
ott )oi-pea
jutod (0-01) o1-oFe
pod (6-0) 0i-vTo

TETinpat TEgiAn ua pepioSwpat
Tedpopauat
ETETLULNUNY éegeAnunv éueptodOunv
éredupaunv
TLUHCOUAL DPwpdoopat prAjoouat plod aoopat
éTinoaduny edupdoauny| épcAnoaunv éuodwoaunv
TETLUNOOMAL TEPWPAooLal| TEpLAjoomat penmiod aoouat
SIVE.
| Future, | typydjoowat dupadSjoouat | biAndjooua | picdwdfoouat

gtAn-Té0c, -Téa, -Té0v, wLoSw-Té0C, -TEa, -TEOV.

¢(a@-w) 6, to live, Uic, -7, -jTrov, -7Te, Inf. Civ, Imp. 67, Impf. ear, -7e¢,
“9, -TOV, -7THY, -iTe;—meLv(a-w)G, to hunger, Inf. weivgy, ete.;—
dt (a-@) 6, to thirst, dupje, etc., Inf. debiv ;—x v (&-w) , to scrape,
Inf. kvqiv ;—o pp ( &-@) 6, to smear, Inf. ougv ;— (d-w) 6, to rub, Inf.
Whv ;x—v p (4-0) 6-wat, to use, xpF, Xp7Tal, ypjoVat; sodwoxpGpat,
to have enough, to abuse, dxoxpioSa ;—a w 6 ¥ py (abridged from aroyp7),
it suffices, Inf. axoypiv, Impf. aréypn ;—y p ( G- @ ) G, to give an oracle, to
prophesy, xptic, xpi, Inf. xpiiv.
(b) -oo and -oe are contracted into -w, instead of into -ov, and -67 into -6, in-
stead of into-o7,in pry(6-a) 6, to freeze, Inf. bryGv and fpryotv, Part.
Gen. piyévtog and pryotvtoc, Subj. pry, Opt. prydinyv, ete.

4, The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the
Opt. in -7v, namely, in the Sing. of verbs in -éw and -é6, the form in -ofyv is
much more in use than the common form, and in verbs in -d@w it is used almost
exclusively ; but in the Dual and PI. of all three, the common form is more in
use; in the third person Pl., the Attic form is always the same as the common

form; e. g. Tiger.

106 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [§ 97.
5. The yerb 10% 0, to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac-

tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., in the

ending of which there is -e or -0; e. g. éAou instead of éAove, éAoduev instead

of éAobouev, Mid. Aoipar, (Adet,) Aodrat, etc., Imp. Aod, Inf. AotoGar, Impf.

éAobuny, éAod, éAodTO, etc., as if from the stem AOEQ.

Remark. On the change of the accent in contraction, see §11, 2.

XLIV. Vocabulary.

(a) Contract Verbs in -dw in the Pres. and Impf. Act.

Ayaray, to love.
aSavatoc, -ov, immortal.
&FAi«c, miserably, unfor
tunately.
aun, -7¢,7,a point, height,
full power, bloom.
doTpantw, to lighten.
BpovrTaw, to thunder.
Jupao, to thirst, or be
thirsty.
dpaw, to do, act.
éé-avaTaw, to completely
deceive, or mislead.
Epaw, w. gen., to love (ar-
dently).

TloAAGkic yvounv éaratoorv idéat.

THC.

vova.

Tove yovéiac GyarGev.

aw, to live.

HALKiA, -a¢, 7, age, especial-
ly youth or manhood.
Sapparéwe, boldly, cour-

ageously.
idéa, -ac, 7, an appear-
ance, an outward figure.
viKGw, to conquer, over-
come.
ddodbipouat, w. acc., to pity.
6paw, to see.
épuaw, to rush, advance.
metvaw, to hunger, or be
hungry.

’"AvayKn éoti mavtac avSporove TehevTav.

pupopeda Tov év TH THE HAtKiag aKuH TEeAEVTOVTA.

Mf oe vixatw képdoc.
TloAAakig ving Kat Kaxd¢ dvdpa ayadov.
TloAAot dvSpwrot év TH THE NAtKiag aKuG TedEevToow.

Kpeitrov 76 uy Cav éorw 7 Cav G8 Aiac.

mpiv, w. inf., before.

toc; how?

clw7aw, to be silent.

ovykvkKaw, to move to-
gether, bring into con-
fusion, confound.

ovupaxoc, -ov, fighting
with; subst., a fellow-
combatant, or ally.

TeAevTaw, to finish, (Gior
understood) to die.

ToAwaw, to dare, venture,
prevail upon oneself.

"EpG TiH¢ ape-

Oi ayadot épdor Tv KaAGy.

"H olora, 7} Aéye Gpei-

Notc 6p@ kat vot¢ dxkovet.
Oapparénc, © oTpaTlOTat, dpuGpev ext TodE TOAEMIOVE.
Aot éoSiover, mplv 68 Oubqv, rivovory.
TlepixAje jotpantev, éBpdvta, ovvexixa tiv ‘EAAGda.

IIpiv pév wevqv, ToA-

Ovx gore Toic un OpGor ciupayoc Tiyn.

Eive wavtec raidec

Tlé¢ dv toAugyy tov dgidov Brantetv; Td pév cua
moAAaKte Kat Trevi Kal OubH: 7 OF WuxH THC dv H Oubdy H TEeLvedy ;
vaToc Kal dynpws CH did wavroc.

Yuy7 ava-
7O/A0-

Children love their (the) parents. Either be silent (pl.) or speak better.

With the mind (dat.) we see and hear.

Youths should be silent (zmp.).

We

will love virtue. All citizens fear (fear holds all citizens) that (uj, w. subj.) the
enemies will advance against the town. It is well to love our parents. We
pity those who die (part.) in the bloom of youth (7AcKia). The soldiers ad-
vanced courageously against the town. The army is often hungry and thirsty.
All the citizens feared, that the enemies would rush against the town. May
you always, O boy, love your parents!

§97.]

CONTRACT PURE VERBS.

XLV. Vocabulary.

107

(b) Contract Verbs in-éw in the Pres. and Impf. Act.

A¥vpéo, to be dispirited,
despair.

apehéw, w. gen., to neg-
lect, not to care for.

av (instead of éav), w.
subj., if.

aroppéw, to flow away, or
from.

doxéw, to practise, adorn.

dé, w. gen., to want; deZ,
there is need, it is ne-
cessary, one must; w.

acc. and inf.
dvoTuyéw, to be unfortu-
nate. [ praise.

ératvéw, to approve of,

edTvyéw, to be fortunate,
happy.

evx}, -716, 7, & request, a
prayer.

Géw and é3éio, to will,
wish, be willing.

Kav, w. subj. = Kat and
the modal adverb dy, or
kat éav, even if, al-
though; or «ai and the
particle av.

Kpatéw, w. gen., to be mas-
ter of, have power over,
command.

Aaréw, to talk, prate.

paAtora, (superlative of
jada, very) most, es-
pecially.

LEAL, -LTOC, TO, honey.

LaTe—pAte, neither—nor.

ovdéroTe, never.

mAéw, to sail.

moléw, to make, do; ev
ToLelv, w. acc. to do

well to, to confer a fa-
vor on.

movéw, laboro, to take trou-
ble, work, toil.

mpoodokau, to expect, pre-
sume.

pip, pide, 6, 7, a reed.

oryaw, to be silent.

ovAAauBive, w. dat. to
take in common with,
help, assist.

ovurovéw, w. dat., to work
with, help, assist.

TeAéw,to accomplish, fulfil.

imép, w. gen., instead or in
behalf of, on account
of; w. acc., above, be-
yond.

dpovéw, to think; péya
dpovetv, to be haughty.

"Avan movypdc OvcTvyel, Kav edtvyH. Bioc Kpatioroc, Gv Gupod! Kpatae. Le-
p p x xy Pp #- part

ydv paadov, 7 Aaheiv mpérer.
giAw ovprovay abtG? rovet.
'O padota ebtvxGv pH wéya dpoveito.
dei, TA Beatin d& mpogdoKgy det.
vnv dokeite Kal épy Kal Ady.

yoo aréppet.
érHvet.
yointe), @ didot.

Bad men are unfortunate, even if they are fortunate.

Ele, & Sede, Teroing (TeAoic) moe THY ebyqy.
O00 Vérovtoc,® Kav (Kat dv) éxt pide wAéoLC.

"O te Gv roiyre, vouivete dpav Sedv.
Of dvSpwrot Svytot ph dpovoivtav inép Geodbc
Ovdéxor G0upeiv Tov KaKGe TpaTTOVTa

TO rovoivre Bede ovAdapBavet.
’Awd Tie Néoropog yAdrrye, Serep péAt, 6 A6-
‘O Laxparyc Tod cdpatog obk Huéder, trode O& dpehotvtTag obK

Gidoc

Atkatood-

Ei’e ebruyoite (ebtv-

If God were willing,

we could sail even on a reed. Whatever thou doest, believe, God sees it.

Friends, who work with friends, work for themselves.

Practise justice in word

and deed. ‘The Greeks neglected neither the body nor the mind. O that ye,

O gods, would fulfil my desire!
Friends should work with friends!

XLVI. Vocabulary.

O that thou wert happy, my (QO) friend!
It is well to practise virtue.

(c) Contract Verbs in -é6 in the Pres. and Impf. Act

Apavpow, to darken, de- duédea, -ac, 7, careless- dvdparcvoc, -, -ov, hu-

stroy, weaken, blunt.

ness.

man.

1§ 158, 7. (a).

2§ 161, 5.

3 Genitive Absolute.

108

droppon, -7¢, 7, a flowing
off, a source.

doAéw, to outwit, trick,

_ deceive.
dovAdw, to enslave, sub-
jugate.

éAcvt-_epdu, to set free, to
free.

éfic6w, to make equal.

(726, to strive after, imi-
tate, value, think hap-
py, admire.

CONTRACT PURE VERBS.

Cntéw, to seek, strive.

Con, -1, 1 life.

Seloc, -d, -ov, godlike,
divine.

iva, in order that, that,
(after a principal tense
with the subj.; after a
historical tense with the
opt.).

KOLVWVIG, -aC, 7, ComMmMuU-
nion, intercourse.

Atwoe, -ov, 0, hunger.

[sor

dpetic, -ews, 7, a striving
after, a desire.

ép6w, to make straight,
erect, raise up.

ovTe—oUTe, neither—nor.

domep, Hmep, Orep, who-
ever, whatever.

ovy-e§-ou0low, to make e-
qual.

TvoA6w, to make blind, to
blind.

xadrerdc, with difficulty.

Td dAndic KaAAoc, brep éx Deiac xowvwviac éyer THY aroppony, ov’TEe TOvOG })
Aude 7 apéAea TIC, ovTE 6 TOAdE Ypovog ayavpol.
ovvetouoiodv. XaretG¢ dv taic tév dyadav apetaic¢ e£tooing (éftooic¢) Tove

érraivoue.
avopac.

rivyyv Cory auavpot.
xv.
opévac.

Ev’voyia apavpot iBprv.
TloArod¢ KaxOc rparrovrac 6pSot TiyN.

Tyv apetav Kat THY codiav CyAGpev.
Oi rroAégutot 75 OTpaTevpa NuGY éEddAov?Y.

Ai oidtar Ta ESn CyTodce

Zniov, © Tai, Tove éoVAode Kai cOdpovac
TAqSo¢ xaxév tiv avidpw-
Al wept tt obodpat dpéSere TudAovow ei¢ TaAAG THY pv-
Xpuodc éotiv 6 dovdéy Gvytav
Oi veaviar tiv codiav Cy-

Aoiev. Of roAgusor éxAnoialor, iva Tove aiypadatove éAevbepoier.

The violent striving after anything makes the soul blind for everything else.

The enemies approach, in order that they may free the prisoners.

youths, noble and wise men! It is not easy to make praise equal to the vir-

Imitate, O

tues of the good. We love youths who strive (particip.) after wisdom. The

enemies freed the prisoners.

everything else.

XLVI. Vocabulary.

May violent desire not make your soul blind for
Youths should strive after virtue.

(d) Contract Verbs in-dwin the Pres,and Impf. Mid. or Pass.

’Advvaréw, to be unable.

aetkne, -éc, unseemly, dis-
graceful.

axKpodouat, w.gen., to hear,
listen to.

G£t6w (Tv Tivoc), to think
deserving, consider wor-
thy, desire, wish.

yap, for.

giTe — ElTE, sive — sive;
whether — or.

éxcdupéw, w. gen. or inf., to

set my mind or heart
upon, desire.

evepyeTéw, w. acc., to do
well to, benefit.

Lnxavaouat, machinor, to
contrive.

éuoiwc, in like manner,
alike.

700ual, w. pass. aor. and melpdouat, w. pass. aor., to

Sut., to rejoice.

7jLepoopomoc, -ov, 6, (run-
ning through the day,)
a@ courier.

idouat, to heal.

peaxaptoc, -d, -ov, blessed,
happy.

try.

Tiuadw, to esteem, honor.

bm60nua,-aroc, TO, (bound
under) a sandal, a shoe.

Xpdowat, w. dat., to use;
utor.

ObeAéw, w. acc., to benefit.

‘Opuoiws aydgoiv axpodoSat det. “Orav ddvvatie TH TAObTW yoROSaL, Ti dia-

1 By Crasis instead of 7a GAAa.

§ 97.] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 109
gépere To’ wévynTog; Evvove Abyog Aimnv idra.
Bpotot. Oi dvSpwror TOAAG wnxavdvTa. Maxéptoc, o¢ oboiav Kal vow Eyer
xpira yap ei¢ G' dei Kaddc. ‘O ayabog bm TévTUY Tiparat.
kpateiv. lepixAje brd Tv AD qvaiwy jyanadto Kal étysdto. Oi hyepodpipor
obk éypovto brodjuacw év Taic ddoic. Ovk GetKég, ed TIC in’ éy8pav t&ara-
rata. Ete wavtec yoveig tnd Tv Téxvwv dyangvTe. Oi ayaboi bird rap-
tov ayanaoSuv. Eite ind dgidov édérere cyardcbat, Tove gidove ebepyéret,
elre 76 Tivoc TOAEwg ExiSupeicg Tindodal, THY TéhW Odénet, Eite b7d THE ‘EA-
Addo rhone aswoic én’ dpeTH Gavpaleodal, tiv ‘EAAG0a retpO eb roveiv.

Tiyopevor mavtec idovrat

TAarrn¢ retpo

Listen to both, in like manner, O judge!
ceived by enemies. Kind words heal sorrow. Man rejoices in being (part.)
honored by others. We wish to be loved by our friends and honored by the
citizens. Among (apa, w. dat.) the Lacedaemonians old men were extraordi-
narily honored. Let the good man always be loved and honored by all. The
judge should hear both.

It is not disgraceful if we are de-

*

XLVI. Vocabulary.
(e) Contract Verbsin-éo in the Pres.and Impf. Mid. or Pass.

*Adikéw, w. acc., to do
wrong to, injure, do in-
justice.

aidéowat, w. acc, to be
ashamed beforeany one,
reverence, esteem, wor-
ship.

amtotéw, w. dat., to disbe-
lieve ; pass., amLoTéouat,
to be disbelieved.

amo-Avorc, -ewc, 7, deliv-
erance, liberation.

déoual, w. pass. aor. and
gen., to want, need.
Aidot Sedv.

COUVTES PLLGOUVTAL.

udAdov, 7 doBGvTat.

Vebwow.

AidsioGat dei didove.

étoc, -e0¢ = -ovc, TO, a
year.

ioxipoc, -d, -dv, strong,
powerful.

kata-dpovéw, w. gen., to
despise ; pass., Katadpo-
véouat, to be despised.

Aotdopéw, to scold, abuse.

Lioéw, to hate.

émwc¢, how; in order that;
w. subj., after a princi-
pal tense; w. opt., after
an historical tense; w.

Tév ayadév dvdpa rood ératpov.

ind. fut., after verbs of
care.

TAnotoc, -d, -ov, near; of
twAnociov, those near,
neighbors, fellow-men.

ToALopkéw, to besiege.

mpoc-70léw, to add; mid.,
to acquire, claim, or
make for oneself.

goBéw, to frighten; mid.
w. pass. aor., to be fright-
ened, fear.

GiAovvteg ptAobvtTat, mi-

Tov icyupov dei mpdov* eivat, dxwg of TAnoiov aidévTat
? anes e 04 n 2

An.ototvrat of Aa2ot, Kav GAn-
Oi Tlépoas b76 THv ‘EAAQvwv émootvto Kal KaTedoovodyTo.
dév adixav oddevoc deitaL® vouov.

‘O EN-

Tpota déxa étn id TOV ‘EAARVwY érodsop-

Keita. Oi rodirar édoBoivTo, py 7 wOALe ToALOpKOiTO. Aotdopoipmevog dépe- 6
yap Aoopév, éiy 6 Aovdopotpevog uy TpogrosHrat, Aovdopeizar AowopGv. My-
deic goBcicSw Savarov, ardAvoww KakGv.

Worship (pl.) God. One who loves (part.) is loved, one who hates (part.)
is hated. Those who do no (not) injustice (part.) need no law. The king of
the Persians was hated and despised by the Hellenes. The citizens fear, that

a LS
V Instead of ele tatra, eig¢ Gd. 2 See § 48. 3 § 158, 5. (a).
10

110 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [§ 98.

the town will be besieged by the enemies. May you make (pl.) good men your
friends. Parents delight to be honored (part.) by their children. It is not
disgraceful to be hated by the bad.

XLIX. Vocabulary.
(f) Contract Verbs in-6o in the Pres.and Impf Mid. or Pass.

AAka, -7¢, 7, strength. é&-auavpow, auavpdow pepica, to part, divide.
yavp6w, to make proud; strengthened by é&, oapé, -pxéc, 7, flesh.
mid. w. pass. aor, to be page 107. rarewvdw, to bring low,
proud, pride oneself in. ¢y10, to punish. humble. .
6n26w, to make known or 77So¢, -co¢ = -ove, 76, cus- bep7davoc, -ov, haughty,
evident, show. tom, manner, the char- _ proud.
évavriooua, w. dat., ad- _ acter. xelpoouat, to worst, sub-
versor, to oppose, resist, uf@Te—p7re, neither—nor. due, subjugate.
thwart.

AovaocipeSa tH capxt Kal toic xaSeow. ‘Yxd tie avayKng wavta dovdod-
rat Tayo. ‘H gudia ei¢ roddode mepiCouévn &Eauavpodta. Tode didoug éAev-
SepSpev, Todc 68 éySpode yetpbueSa. My yavpod codia,? unr GAKq, pate wAov-
7. Td WGoc padsora éx Tv Epywr Ondodra. ‘O drepHoavog taretvoito. Od
Kanov éorl, TH Gogia yavpotcSat. Oi roic dyeSoic évaytiobpevor GEtoi eiot Cy-
puodoSat. Of otpariGrar ind TGv BapBapwv édoAodvTo. Tlavreg Kaxol Cn
[LoLvTo.

The immoderate are enslaved to the flesh and the passions. Be (pl.) not
proud of your wisdom (dat.). May the haughty be brought low. It is dis-
graceful to thwart the good. The citizens fear, that they may be subjugated by
(i76, w. gen.) the enemies. Cowardly (bad) soldiers are punished by the gene-
ral. One who prides himself in (part.) his (the) wisdom (dat.) is not wise.

§ 98. Contract Verbs which, contrary to the rule, retain the short
Characteristic-vowel in forming the Tenses.

1. As in several uncontracted pure verbs, the short characteristic-vowel is re-
tained (§ 94) contrary to the rule in forming the tenses; so also in several con-
tract verbs. Most of these verbs take a o in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. and in the
first Aor. Pass., and the tenses derived from both of these forms. ‘This is indi-
zated by the phrase, Pass. with o (§ 95). They are the following:

(a) -do.
yeéA2ao, to laugh, Fut. yeAdéoowa; Aor. éyéAdoa. Pass. with o.
£24 (usually éAatvw), to drive, Fut. 2Adow (Att. 2A, § 88), ete.
AG, to bruise, SAdoo, ete. Pass. with co.
KAGO, to break, kAiow, ete. Pass. with o.
7¥aAG0, to loosen, yaricu, etc. Pass. with o.

1 § 161, 2. (a), (0). 2§ 161, 3.

§ 98.] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 111

dando (usually daualw), to subdue, Aor. édapaca., Pass. with a.

1 €pG«, to transport, to sell, Fut. teptiow; Aor. éxépdoa; Perf. wewépaxa; but
mepaw, to pass over (Intrans.), Fut. tepdow; Aor. érépdca. (These seven
verbs have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel a).

o7 4, to draw, oraou, ete. Pass. with o.

ox 2, to loose, to open, cxiou, ete.

(b) -éo.

&Kéowat, to heal, dxécouat, hxecayyv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7xecpat; Aor. Pass.
nKeoonyv.

&1éw, to grind, to beat, Fut. G46 (§ 83); Perf. Mid. or Pass. dajAecpat (§ 89).

a&pkéo, to suffice, etc. Pass. with o (also to be sufficient).

ééa, to vomit, Fut. éuéow, ete.; Perf. Act. gujuexa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éuj-
peeopat (§ 89).

Cé, to boil, usually intrans., and ¢évvvyz, usually trans. Pass. with c.

Eé«, to scrape. Pass. with o—reAéw, to accomplish, Fut. teAG (§ 83). Pass.
with o.

T péa, to tremble.—yx é w, to pour.

Remark. The following have in some tenses the long, in others, the short
vowel:

aivéu, to praise, Fut. aivéow; Aor. yveca; Perf. yvexa; Aor. Pass. yvédqv ,
but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7vnyat. .

aipéu, to take, Aor. Pass. 7pé3nv; also 7; e. g. aipjow, ypnka, ypnpuat.

yapéo, to marry, Fut. yaue (§ 83); Aor. éynwa; Perf. yeyaunxa; Aor. Pass.
éyapnSnv (I was taken to wife).

dé, to bind, dow, édqca, éonodunv; but dédexa, dédeuas, 2dé9nv; Fut. Perf.
dednoopuat, which takes the place of the Fut. Pass. de@7joouar not used by
the Attic writers. :

karéo, to call, Fut. ca26 (§ 83); Aor. éxadeca; Perf. Act. xéxAnxa; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. xéxAnuat, I am called; Fut. Perf. cexAjoouat, I shall be called; Aor.
Pass. éxAgoynv; Fut. Pass. xAnSyoouar; Fut. Mid. cadotuar; Aor. Mid.
éxahecapnv.

70% éw, to desire, old Attic Fut. roécouat; Aor. ét6Seca; elsewhere rodjouw,
éroSyoa; Perf. Act. teré0ynxa; wexdSnuat; Aor. Pass. érotéodny.

mc ovéw, labéro, Fut. rovjow, ete. (to work); movéow (to be in pain); Perf. xer6-
vnka in both senses.

(c) -6w.

&p6, to plough, Fut. dpocw, Aor. 7jpoca: Perf. Mid. or. Pass. dojpouar (§ 89);
Aor. Pass. 7p607v.

112

TENSE-FORMATION OF CONTRACT VERBS.

AGTLY EZ,

[$ 99

§ 99. Para

ee ee
Characteristic a.

Tenses. Characteristic «. Characteristic o.
Present on (G-w)@, to draw, | TeA(é-@ w)6, to accom- | 4p(6-w)@, to plough,
Imperfect éom(a-ov)wv éréA(e-ov)ovy [plish, 7jp(0-0v Jouv
Perfect éordxa TETEAEKG ap- HpoKa
Pluperfect | éowdxewv éTETEAEKELV dp-npoKew
Future onuiow TEAG apocw
Aorist éordoa étéheoa jpooa

PAS
Aorist Jéoma-o-nv |éteré-c-Gnv | 7p6Sqv
Verbal adjectives: oma-o Téo¢, -Téa, -Téov

Rem. 1. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. with o, see § 95; and on the
Attic reduplication in ap-7pouat, § 89, (a)—The further inflection of égo7a-c-
pal, éord-o-uynv, TeTEAE-0-wal, éTeTEAé-c-yyv is like that of KexéAev-o-was, éKe-

KeAet-o-unv (§ 95).

Rem. 2. On the Attic Fut. (TeAéow = TELO, Teheic, etc., TeAécouat = TEAOd-

pat, TeAei, etc.), see § 83.

Rem. 3. Two contract verbs assume o in the Pass, although they lengthen

the characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. yO, to heap, Fut. ydoo,
Perf. Mid. or Pass. céywouat, Aor. Pass. éyoodgy, and 7p Ga, to give an oracle,
Fut. yp7ow, Perf. Mid. or Pass. céypyjopat, Aor. éxphodnv.—X p 0p at, to use,
Fut. yp7oopuar, has in the Perf. xéypyya, but in the Aor. éypyo8nv. On the
contrary, éAda, aivéw, aipéw, déw and apdw, do not assume 9, although the char-
acteristic-vowel in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. and in the Aor. Pass., remains short.

Comp. § 98.

L. Vocabulary.

Formation of the Tenses of Contract Verbs.

Aypoc, -00, 6, ager, afield. sa

adanuwv, -ov, inexpe-
rienced, ignorant.

axéopat, to heal.

aKorovbéw, w. dat., to fol-
low, go behind, imitate.

dvehevdepia, -ac, 7, illibe-
ralitas, disgraceful ava-
rice.

arvxéw, to be unhappy.

d7Ao¢, -7, -ov, evident.

, to let, allow, permit,
leave.

&AKoc, -e0¢ = -ove, TO, ul-
cus, @ sore, an ulcer.

iatpoc, -od, 6, a physician.

Kaiploc, -d, -ov, and kai-
ploc, -ov, at the right
time, opportune, fitting.

kapttoouat, to enjoy the
fruits of.

toouéw, to adorn.

KTGaouat, to acquire, gain ;
perf, to possess, have.

Aoyifowat, to think, con-
sider, reflect.

Adytoc, -d, -ov, eloquent,
intelligent.

pendérote, w. imp. or subj
in an imp. sense, never.

oikéw, to dwell, inhabit

oixodouéw, to build a
house, build.

§ 99.] TENSE-FORMATION OF CONTRACT VERBS. 113

digms.

MIDDLE.

Characteristic a. Characteristic e. Characteristic 0.
om (a-0)G-pat TeA(é-0)ov-wat dp(6-0)00-pat
éom(a-0)0-pyv éteA( e-0)ob-uyv 70(0-0)ov-urv
éoma-o-pal TETEXAE-C- pat cp-npowat
gow a-G-LyV étetehé-c-ugnyv ap-npopnv
oruicouat Tedovpuat apocopuat
éoracamnv éTedeoapunv npooaunv

SIVE.

Future |ora-o-Gyoouat |tehre-c-bhjoopat | apodjoouas

Tehe-c-Té0C, -éa, -EOV apo-Téoc, -éa, -éov.

TEVLY POC, -dy -OV, poor. clwrnAdc, -7, -dv, silent. td, to elevate.
tAovtéw, to be or become of¢/AAw, to shake, make yypdw, to deprive, rob,
rich. fall, deceive. bereave.

Ol rept Tov Aewviday tpiaxdotol! yevvaing paydpevos éreAebrnoav. Nixn-
cov opynv TO AoyilecGal? KahGc. Maxapioc, dcrig ebtiynoer ei¢ réxva. Tloa-
Aode KaKkGg TpaTrovtacg GpSwoe Tiyn. LUPGAAe. éxeivove, ode av thdon riyn.
‘Pddia ravta Seq tedécat. Mydérore Kpivery ddanpovac dvdpac done. "Ev
oic dv Térole Tle GTVYHON, TO’TOLC TAHOLalaY ody FOeTal. ‘O veaviac dKoAov-
Snottw tH cogia.2 ‘O rointhg Tov AoyLoraTov ’Odvacéa clwrynAdtatoyv rEeroin-
kev. Oi ayadet matpida koopjoovow. IloAAGKig meviypd¢ avip ala pan
émAovtyoev. lodAol kextnpévor piv ToAAa ob xpGvrat d& dv dvedevSepiar.
Atcavdpoc, 6 Zrapriarne, peydov Tindvt 75a. Ol huepodpouor odk éxp7-
cavto brodjuacty® év craic ddoic. ‘H rédug woAdGv dvdpdv® éynpbSn. Oi ia-
Tpot Ta éAKyn axécovta. ‘H yAdtra ovyyy Katpiay Kextnwévn Kal yépovte Kal
véw Tyg géper. Ovddetc Exatvov jdovaig éxtHoaTo. Odte TH Kade dypdv gv-
TEvoapery OnAov, O¢TLG KapTAcETAL, oUTE TH KAaAGE oikiay oiKxodounoapéry OF-
Aov, ScTi¢ oikjoet.

The good will love (ayavéw) and honor the good. Noble youths will follow
virtue. The citizens will think the brave warriors deserving of great honor.
Alexander, king of the Macedonians (6 Maxedoy, -é6voc), conquered Darius
king of the Persians. Leonidas and his 300 warriors adorned their country by
their bravery. The citizens thought the brave warriors deserving of great honors.
Fulfil (aor.) for me, O Zeus, my prayer! The soldiers have conquered the ene-
mies. ‘The war has robbed the town of many citizens. The enemies were con-
quered. The brave warriors will be thought by the citizens deserving of great
honors. The physicians healed the ulcer. No one will gaia praise by pleasures.
‘The town has been robbed of many citizens. It has all (piur.) been well fulfilled.

1 i. e. Leonidas and his 800 warriors. *§161,3. %§16) 2. (a), (d).
4 § 158, 7. (y). 5 § 158, 5. (a).
10*

114 IMPURE VERBS.—STRENGTHENING THE STEM. [§$ 100,101.

§100. 2. Impure Verbs.
Pure and Impure Stem.—Theme.

1. Impure verbs, i. e. those whose characteristic is a consonant
(§ 92), undergo several changes in the stem, a part of which take
place in the formation of the tenses; these changes in the stem are
as follows:

(a) There is either a strengthening consonant added; e. g. zvz-z-0, ~
stem TYII; xoal-w, stem KPAT;

(b) or the stem-vowel is lengthened; e. g. mevy-w, stem OTT;
‘An8-o, stem 440; z7ix-w, stem TAK ;

(c) or there is a change of the stem-vowel in the tenses; this
change may be called variation, and the vowel subject to the change,
the variable vowel; e. g. ulént-w, &-xlda-ny, xé-udog-a; Comp.
English fly, flew, flown,—sing, sang, sung.

2. In verbs, whose stem is thus changed in the formation of the
tenses, the two different stems must be distinguished, viz. the origi-
nal, simple one, and the full, strengthened one; the former is called
the pure, the latter the impure, stem. The Pres. and Impf. of these
verbs contain the impure stem, the secondary tenses (when such are
formed), and especially the second Aor., the pure stem; but the
other tenses either the pure or impure; e. g.

Pres. rin-t-a, to strike, Aor. II. Pass.é-tTia-yv Fut. tipo (riz-cw)

Aeinz-w, toleave, Aor. II. Act. é-Ain-ov Aiba (Aein-cw)

3. For every form of a verb which cannot be derived from the
Pres. tense in use, another Pres. is assumed, mostly for the mere
purpose of formation; this may be called the Theme (@¢uc), and is
printed in capitals, so as to distinguish it from the form of the Pres.
in actual use; thus, e. g. qevya is the Pres. form in use, PYTI'Q is
the assumed Pres. form, or the Z'’heme, in order to construct the se-
cond Aor., é-qvy-ov.

§101. Strengthening of the Stem.
1. The strengthening of the stem by consonants consists in mere-
ly strengthening the simple characteristic consonant of the stem by
means of another consonant; e. g.

TUTT, to strike, Aor. Il. Pass. é- ri a-4%
TaTTW, to arrange, a “ &-Tuay-qY
Kpalw, to cry out, al Act. €-kpady-ov.

2. Yet the stem, strengthened in this way, is found only in the

§ 102. ] VERBS.—CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. 115

Pres. and Impf.; in the other tenses the strengthening letters are
omitted and the simple stem appears; e. g.

Pres. tomtw = Impf. érurrov Aor. II. Pass. ériagqv Fut. rinpo (rizow).

Remark. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. 7 in TYII-Q, is called the
pure characteristic; that of the impure stem, e. g. 77 in TimT-o, the impure
characteristic.

3. The short stem-vowel of many verbs is lengthened in the Pres
and Impf.; this short vowel reappears in the second Aor., and in
the Fut. of liquid verbs. Thus;

a is ehanged into 7 in mute verbs, e.g. (é-Aad-ov) 270
a an © hquid - “ (¢av-G) paiva
é as eu a 4 “ (g¢0¢ep-@) oteipw
i is et,*¢ mute...‘ . “6 (é-Aim-ov) Aéeizw
t a i “ © and liquid verbs, “ (é-TpiB-nVv) TpiBo
D 6c yp $6 66 66 66 66 66 (é-dpty-nv) ppbye
D ae ev“ mute verbs, “ (é-gdty-ov) debyo.
ApS.

§ 102. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel. |

1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel, § 100, 1. (c), oc
curs only in the Secondary tenses, except in a few first Perfects.

2. Most mute, as well as liquid, verbs, with a monosyllabic stem
and with ¢ as a stem-vowel, take the variable vowel, namely, skort
@ in the second Aor. instead of ¢; e. g.

TpéTt-, to turn, Aor. II. Act. é-tTpdadm-ov
Tn£b-w, to nourish, “Pass. é-Tp&od- gv
oTéAA-, to send, e “ é-oTGA- qv

pveip-w, to destroy, - “ é-¢0Gp-np.

But not potysyllables; e. g. dyyéAAw, to announce, Aor. I. Pass. 7yyéAnv.

Rem. 1. This change of the stem-vowel does not occur in the second Aor
Pass. of some verbs of this class (the second Aor. Act. not being used), because
the second Aor. Pass. cannot be mistaken for the Impf., see § 103, Rem. 2; e.g
B2AETo, to see, Impf. é-GAem-ov, second Aor. Pass. é-GAéx-nv.

8. Liquid verbs with monosyllabic stems and with the stem-vowel
é, take the variable «, not only in the second Aor., but also in the
first Perf. and first Plup. Act. and the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or
Pass. and the first Aor. Pass.; e. g.

oTéhAw, to send, Fut. oreA-6 Perf. Rorodaca é-oradA-uwar Aor. é-oTaA-8 jp.
But not polysyllables; e. g. yyyexKna, nyyéAdny from dyyéAAw. Comp. No. 2.

4, Those mute verbs, which have « in the final stem-syllable of
the Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf.; but those which
have ez in the final stem-syllable, take o.; liquid-verbs, which have
é or et in this syllable, take 0; e. g.

116 REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. [§ 108.

Tpédw, to nourish, TEeTpoda dépo, to flay, dédopa
Aira, to leave, A€doiTra oreipw, to sow, EoTopa.
5. The following take the variable o, in the first Perf., contrary
to the rule in No. 1.

’ KAétro, to steal, first Perf. xéxA0¢a, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. Kéxreppar (Ké-
kKAquuat very rare and = poetic). &.

Aéyw, to collect, first Perf. SuvetAoya, éFeiAo0HVa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass.
ovvetAeypae.

méeTw, to send, first Perf. + éxoueda; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. néreppan,

Tpéru, to turn, first Perf. tétpo¢a, (in form like the second Perf. of TERI
nourish).

6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with
the stem-vowel ¢, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the variable @ in
the Perf. Mid. or Pass.; still the « is not found in the first Aor.
Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs; e. ¢

oTpéda, to turn, Perf. Mid. or Pass. éoT re aut, but first Aor. Pass. éorpég0 ny
TpéTa, to turn, TET Pappa tl, sé éTpégO yy
TpEGa, to nourish, es TéEdpaupar * me ES pEegony.

§103. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses.

The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting
the tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-
endings, -0v, -Ouy?, -7v, -yooucl, -« and -etv, to the pure character-
istic of the verb; e. g. second Aor. é-Aiz-or, but first Aor. é-zaidev-
o-a; partly in being “formed throughout from the unchanged pure
verb-stem, e. g. Aeizw gi 2-0v, psvym é-pvy-ov; and partly in
having the variable vowel, e. g. ozogya, &-crQdq-7Y, OTOAG-Yoomet ;
but é-crogp-Oyp.

Rem. 1. The second Perf. does not always retain the short stem-vowel, but it
either lengthens it in many verbs, viz. @ into 7, and after p and vowels into 4;

e, &:
Kpacvw, to cry out. second Aor. &-«pdy-ov second Perf. xé-xpdy-a
gpicow, to shudder, stem: ®PIK(Z) “« é-Gpix-a
GAALw, to bloom, Fut. Gda-6 “ Té-OA-a 3

50, Tédnva, AéAnSa from GAN-o, AAC-w; or it retains the long vowel or diph-
thong of the Pres.; e. g. wédevya from ey w, but second Aor. Act. nine: Té-
THKa from 77kw, but second Aor. Pass. éruxyv.

Rem. 2. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. would not be distinguished from
the Impf., at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no second Aor.
Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., because this has a different end-
ing from the Impf.; e. g.

ypi¢w Impf. éypddov Aor. IL. Act. wanting Aor. II. Pass. éypi¢nv.

‘

§§ 104, 105.] MUTE VERBS.—CHARACTERISTIC. 117

A. MutTEe VERBS.

§ 104. Introduction

Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three classes; in
each of these classes, yerbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres.
and Impf. are distingetthed from those with an impure characteris-
tic (§ 100, 2).

1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (6, 2, @ pure char-

acteristic ; zz impure characteristic) ; e. g.

(a) pure characteristic, wéum-w, to send, teib-w, to rub, yeag-a,
to write ;

(b) impure characteristic, z’zz-s, to strike, (pure characteristic ”,
pure stem T'YII), Biant-w, to injure, (8, BAAB), 6int-o,
to hurl, (py, PI®).

2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (x, 7, % pure
characteristic; oo or Attic zz, impure characteristic) ; e. g.

(a) pure characteristic, zA¢z-«, to weave, &y-w, to lead, revy-co, to
prepare ;

(b) impure characteristic, peico-w, Att. poitz-w, to shudder, (pure
characteristic x, pure stem @PIK), téco-w, Att. reézz-c, to
arrange, (y, TAL), Byco-w, Att. Byzt-w, to cough, (y, BHX).

3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (z, 6, & pure char-
acteristic; ¢ impure characteristic) ; e. g.

(a) pure characteristic, avvz-w, to complete, ¢0-00, to sing, 289-0,
to persuade ;

(b) impure characteristic, pgat-w, to say, (pure characteristic 6,
pure stem DPAZ).

5 ar ae ‘ , et _—

§ 105. Remarks on the Characteristic.

1. Some verbs in -oow, -T7To, have a Tau-mute—not a Kappa-mute—for
the pure characteristic: dpudTtTe (dpudfw), to fit, Fut. -dcw ;—épécoa, to
row, Fut. -éow ;—7 G00 @, to scatter, Fut. -iow ;—7r Aa 00 a, to form, Fut. -acw ;
—iTiocs, to pound, Fut. -icw.

The verb v doco, to press together, varies between the two formations, Fut.
vaso, ete., Perf. Mid. or Pass. vévacuaz, verbal adjective vacréc.

2. The following verbs in -¢w, which for the most part express a call or sound,
have for their pure characteristic not a Tau but a Kappa-mute, usually y, viz.
aia lw, to groan, Fut. aidfo; 42a20C 0, to shout; xotCw, to squeak, to grunt
(like a swine); pao, to scream; kp Cw, tocaw; waotilo, to whip; 664-

: Co, to bite; oi pOCa, to lament, Fut. oiuofouar; 62020 C0, to howl; fuer a-
ba, to drag to and fro; oT lw and or ara, to trickle; ct Ev ala, to sigh;

a

118 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [§ 106.

otnpilo, to make firm; oT ila, to prick; cvpila, to whistle; oda fo (Att.
ogatrw), to kill; o¢ 0 Co, to throb; tp ila, tochirp (rétpiya); $A Co, to bubble.

3. The following verbs in -¢ vary between the two modes of formation:
Bactala, to bear, Fut. -Gou, ete, Aor. Bactaytnv ;—vvoT alo, to nod, to
sleep, Fut. -dow and -4§a ;—7 ail, to sport, Fut. arSodpar (§ 1. 6, 3) and rai-
fouat, Aor. éxatoa, Perf. Mid. or Pass. térasouat. ra

4. The following verbs in -¢ have for a pur@l@haracteristic yy: krAalao,
to sound, to clang, Perf. xé-kAayy-a, Fut. cAdygo, Aor. éxAayfa;—r Aaa, to
cause to wander, Fut. tAay&o, ete., Aor. Pass. éxiayybnv ;—oaariCa, to blew
a trumpet, Fut. -iygw.

§ 106. Formation of the Tenses of Mute Verbs.

Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. with —
the tense-characteristic o, and the first Perf. and first Plup. Act.
with the aspirated endings -@ and -zivy, when the characteristic is a
Pi or Kappa-mute ; but with the endings -xa, -xev, when it is a Tau-
mute. The Tau-mute, however, is omitted before x ; and before pu
and z in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. is changed into o; but this o is
omitted before o of the personal-endings; e. 9. weiw, to persuade,
LEMELG MCL, -~OT HL 5 pouloa, to speak, mépouomot, -otat; still, the se-
cond Pers. is zezet-oat. The vowels «, 1, v in the verbs which
have a Tau-mute as a characteristic, are short before endings with
the tense-characteristic o and x (-xee, -xElW) 3 e. &. Moule, gouoo,
Epodae, méipoaxa; miaccw, to form, mlécw; vouico, to think, évo-
nica; xdulo, to wash, xdvco, ete.

Rem. 1. On the changes which the Mutes undergo by the addition of the end-
ings beginning with o, %, w or 7, and before the aspirated endings -d, -eiv, and
also on the lengthening of € into ec before o of verbs in -évdw or -év¥o, e. g.
orévd-w, to make a libation, Fut. (owévd-cw) oretow, see § 8.

Rem. 2. When y precedes a Pi-mute;which serves as a characteristic, e. g.
in réun-o, the yu is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. before endings beginning
with #; thus wéu7-o, to send, wé-rey-wae (instead of ré-repr-wal, wé-Tepp-pat),
Kaunt-o, to bend, Ké-Kay-war (instead of Ké-Kayr-yat, Ké-Kapp-pat). So also
when two 7’s stand before u, one of them is omitted; e. g. ogiyy-a, to bind,
é-ogty-pat (instead of é-cdtyy-pat).

Rem. 3. Verbs whose characteristic is a Tau-mute, do not form the second
Aor., in the Common Language.

Rem. 4. Endings beginning with of drop the o after a mute, and the mute
is changed into an aspirate on account of the + following ; e. g. Kexpvovat in-
stead of kexpinGar, werAéyFa instead of werAéE Pat.

Rem. 5. The third person Pl. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., which, in pure
verbs, properly ends in -vTaz and -vTo, in impure verbs both mute and liquid,
cannot have these endings, on account of the accumulation of so many conso-
nants. Hence this person is usnally expressed by a periphrasis consisting of

$107. | MUTE VERBS. 119

the plural of the Perf. Part., and the third person Pl. Pres. and Impf. of elvaz, to
be; sometimes however the » is dropped, and its place supplied by an d, which ig
aspirated after a Kappa and Pi-mute, but after a Tau-mute is unaspirated ;
. g
TpiB-w, to rub, Té-TpLp-wat third Pers. Pl. rerpiddraz (instead of TéTpiBvrat)
Plup. érerpiddro
THEK-W, te twist, wé-TAey-uar third Pers. Pl.reriéyara (instead of néthexvra)

TaTT-2, to arrange, Té-TAyY-pwaL TeTayarat (instead of TéTayvrat)
oKeval-w, to prepare, é-oxevac-uat ¢ éoxevadarat (instead of éoxevadvrac}
Xopil-w, to separate, ke-yOpio-uat ae kexwpidarat(instead of KexOp.ovrat),

PARADIGMS OF MouTE VERBS.

$107. A. Verbs, whose Characteristic ts a Pi-mute
(8; 2, @).
(a) Pure Characteristic, GB, x, ? (Fut. -po).

TptiB-w, to rub.

A CTLY b.-
Pres. | Ind. tpi3-o Subj. tp{3-o Imp. tpi3-e Inf. TpiB-evv Part. tpip-wv
Impf. | Ind. é-rpz@-ov Opt. tpiB-oupe
Perf. | Ind. (ré-rpi8-d) ré-Tpid-a Subj. re-rTpid-o Imp. not used Inf. re-

Tpig-évae Part. Te-rpid-d¢
Plup. | Ind. (é-re-rpiB-eiv) é-Te-Tpid-erv Opt. Té€-Tpid-olpe
Fut. Ind. (tpiB-cw) rpinbo Opt. tpiporue Inf. tpiey Part. Tplipov
Aor. I. | Ind. é-rppa Subj. tpibw Opt. tpiparue Imp. tpipov Inf. rpibar
| Part. tpitbac.

‘= eee ee ee eee
. MIDDLE.
Pres. | Ind. rpiG-ouac Subj. tpi3-ouac Imp. tpiG-ov Inf. TpiB-eoSat
Part. TpiG-duevoc
Impf. | Ind é-rpi@-dunv Opt. tpiB-oiunv

Perf. | Ind. | ( Té-TplB-uat) Imperative. Infinitive.
S. 1. | ré-rpeu-war (té-rTp1Z-co) (Te-7pi8-Faz)
2. | Té-T plat Té-TpLwWo Té-Tpid-Var
3. | ré-Tptz-TaL Té-Tpid-Fu
D.1. | re-rpiu-weVov Participle.
2. | ré-rTpid-Sov TE-TpLo-Sov TE-TPLU-LEVOG, -n, ov |
3. | ré-rTp1d-Sov Tée-Tpld-Gov
PL. | re-tpiu-ueda Subjunctive.
2. | ré-rpid-Be Té-TpLb-Fe Te-Tplu-wévog @
3. | Te-Tpue-uévor eici( v) | te-Tpid-Swoar
or Té-Tpid-drat or Té-Tpid-Suv
Plup. | 8.1.| 2-re-rpiv-uny D £-Te-Tpiu-wetov P. é-Te-Tpiu-wesa
Ind. 2. | é-ré-Tpio é-Té-Tp1o-Sov é-7é-Tpid-Be
3. | é-7é-TpiT-T0 é-Té-Tpid-Onv TE-Tplu-éEVvoL Hoav.
Opt. TE-TplpapEvoe ely

Fut. Ind. tpipowar Opt. Tpupoiunv Inf. tpibecdar Part. Tplpouevoc

Aor. J. | Ind. é-rpupépny Subj. tpipouae Opt. Tpipaiunv Imp. tpibar Ink.
Tpibaota: Part. Tplpapevoc

©. PF. | Ind. re-rpibouat Opt. Te-rpepoiunv Inf. Te-TpipecSat Part. re-rou-
Womevog.

120 MUTE VERBS. [§ 108,

PASSIVE.
Aor. I. | Ind. (é-rpi8-9nv) é-rpig-Snv_ Subj. tp1g-0G Opt. tprg-Veiny Inf.
tptd-Sjvac Imp. tpi¢-Gyte Part. tp.d-Geic
Fut. I. | Ind. tp1¢-3jcouat Opt. tprd-Gnooiunv Inf. tpco-SyoecSar Part.
TpLo-Onoomevoc

Aor.II. | Ind. é-rpiB-nv Subj. tp78-6 Opt. tpiB-eiqv Imp. TpiB-nS. Inf.
; TpiB-jvat Part. TplB-ei¢
Fut.I. | Ind. 7pi8-7o0uae Opt. tpib-nootunv Inf. tpiB-yoecGat Part. rpiB-

noopevoc.

Verbal adjective: (tpzB-T6¢) Tpix-TOe, -7, -6v, TpLT-TEoC, -Ea, -Eov.

$108. (b) Impure Characteristic, mt in Pres. and
Impf. (Fut. -wo).

KOmTO, to cut.

ACTIVE. | MIDDLE.| PASSIVE.
Pres. KOTT-@ KOTT-OUGL
Impf. é-KOTT-OV é-KOTT-OuNY
Perf. I. | («é-xom-d) Ké-K0d-0 Ké-Kou-pal, like Té-Tplupar
Plup. I. é-Ke-K00- ely é-Ke-Koupny, like é-rTe-Tpiyunv
Perf. IL. ké-xo7-a (Hom.)
Plup. I. &-KE-KOT-ELV Aor. I. 2-x60-Snv
Fut. {xér-ow) Kdpo Kopouat | Fut. I. xod-Sjcouar

Aor. I. é-Kowa é-Kowaunv | Aor. IL. é-Kor-nv
| ce-Kowouae | Fut. Il. Kxon-foouat
Verbal adjective: Koz-ric, -7, -ov, Kom-Téo¢, -Téa, -TEéOV.
Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass.
kaur-T-w to bend (Kéxau-pat for Kéxayp-yat § 106, Rem. 2).
Ind. | S.1.| Kéxapypar | Imperative. Infinitive.

2. | Kéxappat Kéxaepo Kekauovat

3. | KékKaUT TAL Kexauova ripe
DAC Se nie0b ~ ne

2.| Kéxauodov Kékauovov th age eC ad:

3. | Kéxaugovov Kekap“odov Subjunctive.
P.1. | xexappeSa KEKAULMEVOS @

2 Kékaugde Kéxapove

3. | Kexappévot eiol(v) kekauodwoar or Kexauodor]

Verbal adjective: Kkauntoéc, -7, -6v, KaumTéoc, -Téa, -Téov.

LI. Vocabulary. ~~

Aléyv, -Gvoc, 6, aevum, du- BvoodSer ( fr..6 Buv86c, the kaumra, to bend.
ration of time, time, deep), from the depth, xata-Aeizw, to leave be

lifetime. or the bottom. hind, desert.
GAeidw, to anoint. yupvoc, -7, -6v, naked. Kexpnévoc, (perf. part. of
dva-tpérw, to tum up, é&-aAeidw, to wipe or rub ypdopat, utor;) wanting,
overturn, destroy. off, obliterate. UW. Gen.
GBioroe, -ov, 6, life, liveli- GarrTw, to bury. KAéxTo, to steal.

hood, food. kKaAvrrw, to conceal. KonT@, to cut, strike.

§ 109.] MUTE VERBS. 121

kpirrw, to hide, conceal. mpecBevric¢,-ot, 6,anam- Taéic. -ewc, 7, order, a
pédoc, -e0¢ =-ovce, T6, a _ bassador, pl.ol rpéoBerc. rank.

song, a melody. mpo-Aeira, to forsake, de- tpiBw, to rub. [phy.
poxatoc, -7, -ov, inmost, _ sert. TpoTaLov, -ov, TO, @ tro-

hidden. bixrw, to throw, throw out. ¢gaive, to show; mid. to
vavpaxia, -a¢, 7], & sea- GkAnpo¢,-d,-6v,dry,rough, appear.

fight. hard. otévoc, -ov, 6, envy.
wepl-Tpévw, to turn round, ovy-0anTw, to bury to- dp, -wpdc, 6, a thief.

overturn. gether with. Xopevu, to dance.

‘O maic Thy émiatoAjy éyeypager. Oi mohéusoe mpécBere cic THY TOALY Erep-
av. Oivoc kal! ta Kexpuppéva daiver Bvocdbev. Tlév inpoc év Guyt@ yévet
mepléetpeper? 7 xpovoc, 7 d8dvoc. Tac Tév orovdaiuv diriac ob® av 6 mac aidv
éareiperev. Lodoxdpe peta THv év Ladapive vavuayiay wep tpdraov yupvog
dAnAippévoc® éxopevoev. Mbpunkec yng wvxarouc olxove mpodedourére¢ Epyov-
Tat BLoTov Kexpnpuévot. IloAAakic dpyn dvbporar voiv éexadupev. TO ’Era-
petvavdov cauate ovvétape tiv dvvauiv Tov OnBaiwv 6 Kapéc. The dpering
Tov TAOUTOV ov drapenpoueTa Toc ypHuactv. Eipinidne év Maxedovia réSar-
Ta. Osd¢ toic avSparote TO péAAov KexGAvdev. Oi Aakedaipovior étpadncav
év oxdnpoic ntecw. "Axotoag kahov pédog tepdGeing dv. ‘Piya mapa Katpdv
bipSév avétpee moAAakic Biov. Oi dGpec Huiv Ta ypnuata KexAdgacwv.4 Oi
ToAéulol THY TOALY GvateTpogacty.* Oi oTpaTiOTaL Tac TaSeLc KaTEALTOV.S

The letter is (7. e. has been) written by the boy. Ambassadors were sent (aor.)
by enemies into the town. Wine often discovers what the man has concealed
(part. sing.) in his heart. With the body of Epaminondas the power of the The-
bans was buried (aor. 2). The future has been concealed by God from men.
The Lacedaemonians brought up (aor.) their children in rough manners. A
beautiful song delights (aor.) us. Many treasures have been stolen by the
thieves. ‘The enemies destroyed (aor.) (overturned) the town. By the soldiers
the ranks were deserted.

$109. B. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Kappa-
mute (7, %, 7)

a) Pure Characteristic, y, x, vy. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and
17 p
Impf., oo, Att. TT, rarer ¢.

TAEK-W), to weave. Fut. -Fo. Tuioow, Att. TaTTH, to arrange.

ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. THEK-0 TAEK-OMaL TUOO-W Tao0-opat
Impf. é-7eK-ov é-TAEK-OUNV é-TAOO-OVv é-Tago-Ounv
Perf. (wé-7AeKx-G) | (wé-wAex-wac) | (Té-Tay-d)

TE-TAEY-a mwé-TAey-wat Té-TAY-G Té-TAy-pat

Plup. é-re-méy-elv| é-me-mAéy-unv | é-Te-riny-elv |: é-Te-Tay-pyv
Fut. (wAéx-ow) TAEEW miétouat | (Tay-ow) Tako Talouat
Aor. é-rAeka é-77.eFapnv é-raga é-ralauny
F. Pf “me-7AEEOUAL | .Te-Tagouat

‘Even. * The Aor. expressesacustom. 7489. ‘4§102,5. °%§ 101, 3.
11

122

Aor. L.
Fut. I.
Aor. I.
Fut. I.

(&-1Aéx-3-7V)

5
a
2)
_

TETAYPAL
TéTAEQL
TETAKTAL
TeTaypedov
TéTaySov
rétaxVov
TeTaypeda
TéTayve

Ss)

ry e
Go to obo eo te

Inf. revayx Far

‘Auwaptia, -ac, 7, an of-
fence, a fault.
av-éAmioToc, -0V,

pected.
avopvTTa, to dig up again.
aro-KnpvTT@, to cause to
be proclaimed, disin-
herit. [ ness.
aoSéveta, -ac, 7, weak-
doteyoc, -ov, without a
roof, houseless.
ag¢pwy, -ov, foolish, brain-
less. [range.
dia-Técow, to order, ar-
diy6us8oc, -ov, double-

unex-

speaking, false.
€U-TaKTOC, -oVv, well-or-
dered.

7TLOC, -OV, and 7TLOC, -a,

-ov, mild.

TloAAdKie Artoc piSoc Kat ddpova dvépa éSersev.
avopbinc.! Ai dpeviv tapayal xapérAaysay Kat coder.

TeTaypévot ELot(V)
or TeTayaTar |

MUTE VERBS.

é-1Aéx-Snv
TAEX-SATOMAL

é-AGK-nv and &mnAEK-nv
TAGK-]OO/LAt

Verbal adjective: wAexroc, -7, -6v; mAek-TéoC, -Téa, -Té0V 5 TAKTOC, TAKTEOC. |

errr reece a
Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass.

tuioow, to arrange, and o¢tyyo(§ 106, Rem. 2), to bind.

éoolypar Imperative.
éogryfat rétago éodly&o
EOGLYKTAL teTaxde | éodiyySu
sobiypedov

éogtyx Sov réray Sov éogryy Sov
Ecdiyx Sov reTaytav | éodiyySuv
‘éobiypeta

éogiyyte réraySe —_ | éoduyyxSe

| éoglypévot eici(v)

éodiyytar

LI. Vocabulary.

Sérywo, to charm, soften,
soothe.

KaTa-TAntTw, to strike
down, astonish, alarm.

kata-o2éyo, to burn down,
or totally consume.

KAOTL1L0¢, -7, -Ov, thievish,
stolen.

KA@W, -w76¢, 6, a thief.

Kpavw (§ 103, Rem. 1), to
ery, cry out.

Aiay, very, violently, over-
much.

peTaAAarTo, to change.

Sévoc, -ov, 0, a stranger,
a guest. | out.

dpéye, to stretch the hand

mapaShKn, -7¢, 7, deposi-
tum, that which is laid
down by any one.

(é-ray-Onv) &-ray-Syv

reTaxVwoar | todiyySucav
or TeTaySwr| or éogiyy Sor |

Part. reraypévog éodiypévor.

[§ 109.

Tax-Snoouat
é-Tay-nv
Tay-HOOMaL

mapa-TAalw, to lead from
the right way, mislead.
mevyntevw, to be poor.
mept-ayw, to lead round.
wAéK, to knit, weave.
ovv-TaTTH, to order, ar-
range systematically.
odiyy#, to squeeze, or
draw together.
TapatTw, to throw into
confusion, disturb, ren-
der uneasy.
Tapax7, -7i¢, 7, confusion,
disturbance.
Taoow, to arrange, order.
TouBoc, -ov, 6, a tomb.
gvaAarroua, w. acc, to
guard oneself from, be:
on one’s guard agairst,
take care.
My tipBov teSaupivov
O rAotTo¢ TOAAGKE

mepinyayer® ei¢ doSéverav. OxepwoToKAéa, Tov ’AYnvaiov, o TaTHp amexhpvse

dia Ta¢ év TH vedTyTL dpapTiac.
TWAotrov éywv ov yeipa mevytevovoly opesov.

1 $153, Rem. 2.

2 See § 89, Rem.

Ocdc ravta év TH Gboet Aptora dlaTéTayer.
"Edy éyopev xpquata, &opmev®

3 yw has the rough b-eathing in the Fut.

§110.] MUTE VERBS. 128

gidove. Ol moAgucoe cig tiv mod mepebyaow. Révov orydv Kpeirror, } ke-
kpayévat. "EAmive tiyudv' Tove yovéag mpagew Kaddc. Aiav giddv' ceanrov
oby beg didov. ‘"Qv 6 tpdroc¢ éoriv ebtaKtog, TobToL¢ Kal 6 Bioc cvvTéraxras.
Oi mworéutor edtaySnoav. IloAAd pév dvédAmiota xparretat, ToAAG O& méxpak-
TL, TOAAG O& TpaxSqoeTal. Ei roAéuwv Kal mpayyatuv dpovriverc, 6 Biog cov
rapayxdqoetar. Ilepidago todc dvOpdrove, of yAdtrav dixduvbov éxorow.
“Aoteyov eic¢ oixov déar. Pwpdv pi d&&q Kdoripynv- dvdpov rapadjKny: apydo-
Tepot KAGE, Kal 6 deSauevoc kai 6 KAédbac. Tlévov peradAayévroc,? of révor
yAvkeic. “H noAtg ind Tov rodeuiny KatedAéyn. Ol BapBapot xatarhayévTec
améguyov.
The barbarians, pursued by the Hellenes, fied into the town. Their charac-
ter is well-ordered, who have also their life well-ordered. ‘The enemies burnt
down (aor.) the town. ‘The barbarians alarmed the citizens. If thou troublest
thyself about war and exploits, thou wilt render thy life uneasy. Many and
splendid exploits have heen achieved (xpatrw) by the Greeks. I will be on my
guard against men who have a double-speaking tongue. The women, alarmed
by the enemies, cried out.

§110. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau-
mute (6, t, &).

(a) Pure Characteristic, 6; 7, 3. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and
Impf.,, ¢ rarer oo.—Fut. -oo.

. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.

Pres. Weve-w, Wevd-oual, opac-o, gpat-ouat,

to deceive, to lie, to say, to think,
Impf. | é-wevd-ov é-evd-Ounv é-gpat-ov é-opal-ounv
Perf. | (éWevd-xa) | (&-Wevd-pat) (2é-¢pad-Ka) (é-dpad-pat)

é-Wev-Ka é-Wevo-wal Té-bpG-Ka Té-Gpao-Ual
Plup.* | é-ed-Kewv é-Wevo-unv é-re-Gpii-nety | é-Te-Gpao-unv
Fut. (evd-ow) (Wetd-couac) (¢pad-cw) (¢pad-couat)

Wwed-ow wed-couat dpii-ow $pd-couat
Aor.I.| é-ev-oa é-Wev-oaunv ~ é-dpd-oa é-opa-oayny
Es Pf. é-Wev-couat * Te-OPa-TOUal
PASSIVE.

Aor. I. | (é-evd-Syv) é-pebto-dnv (é-¢pad-nv) é-Gpao-Tnv
Fut. 1. Wevo-SHOOUaL dpac-Shoomat

Verbal adjective: (wevd-réoc) wevo-réoc, -Téa, -Téov ; Gpac-TEoC, -Téa, -TéoV.

Inflection of Perf. Mid. or Pass.

Ind. $8.1. | &pevo-uar Imper. Infinitive.

2. | épev-cat Eev-oo é-wWevo-Fae
3. | EWevo-rar épev-o0w

D. 1. | éweto-nedov -Participle.
2.| éWev-cbov éev-oFov é-qevo-Evoe, -7, -OVv
3. | Eev-oVov éped-o0 wv

P.1. | “beto-peda Subjunctive.
2.) épev-ote éwev-ot_ é-WEVO-LEVOE O.

3. | épevo-pévor eioi(v) évev-oFwoay or Evert-oSur]

ae op y's Sal 2 Gen. absolute.

124

‘AuapTava, to err, be mis-
taken, commit a fault.
épracw, to plunder.
abdic, again. | thirst.
dios, -E0¢ = -0VC, TO,
éyK@utov, -ov, TO, eulogy,
encomium.
ért, still, besides.
evopoovvn, -7¢, 7, mirth.
EdnGoc, -ov, 6, a youth.
70n, already.
zadakifo, to soften, ren-
der effeminate.

LIQUID VERBS.—FORMATION OF THE TENSES.

LI. Vocabulary.

petérerta, afterwards.

6ABoc, -ov, 0, riches, pros-
perity.

é7ala, to let follow, be-
stow.

opitw, to fix, appoint.

Tavw, to cause to cease;
TIva tLvoc, to free a
person from anything;
mid. to cease, w. part.

meld, w.ace., to persuade ;
perf. 2, rérovba, w, dat.,

[$111

to trust, to, rely upon.
TAnyn, -iic, 7, a blow, a
wound.
piyoc, -eo¢=-ove, Td, cold.
oxedasw, to scatter, dissi-
~ pate.
omavigw, to be in want.
oTpédw, to turn.
ovv-apuolw, to fit togeth-
er, adjust, arrange.
épacw, to tell, express,
pronounce.

Ilaioév pe, © gide, révwv, oxédacov dé wepivac, oTpépov 0 aibic ei¢ evppo-

obvac.
Adytoat ™pd épyov.
OUVVIPLOKED.

Xraviovoty! of Toig YpHuacw od YpG@vTat.

TIA0bTw® roAAol 70n éuahaxiodnoav.

MeSpidarne 'Aciav npraker.
Oi Geol toic Brvyroic GABov Oracav.
‘Hy od xaxdc dixdone, o& Sede petémeta Otkacet.
Gy Tic TEloele TaYLOTA Ev Aéywv.”
To Toi¢ duapTavovor Cyuia, Vavatoc.
‘Yip ceavtod uy dpaonc éyxapta.
pelv Audv Te Kal diboc Kal piyog, Ete Je TANYaE Kat TOvoVE GAAovC.
pov gpovtteic,' 6 Biog cov TapaxSjoerat.

‘O Gedc &vavTa
Tode guvetove

> ~ 7 ce 7 Lia cA

Ev toic Apakovtog vomotc ia aTaoly @pLo-
IlAottT wero oc? adiKka wy TELp@ ToLeiv.

Oi tov ‘EAAjvav édnBot eidioSnoar* ¢gé-

Ei rodé-

Ol ’AGyvaiot det Savuac8joovrat.

Cares are dissipated through (014, w. acc.) thee. He will be in want who does

not use his money. Success is bestowed on mortals by the gods.

Everything

is arranged by God. ‘The sensible can (dv, w. opt.) quickly be persuaded (aor.

1 pass.).

had already rendered (aor.) all effeminate.

nians.

Draco fixed (aor.) for all offenders one punishment, death. Wealth
We shall always admire the Athe-
The Athenians accustomed their youths to bear all hardships.

Socrates

was admired for (é7/, w. dat.) his wisdom. It is not well to rely upon riches.
The song has dissipated the cares.

B. Liqur1p VERBS.

§11l. Formation of the Tenses.

1. Liquid verbs, i. e. verbs whose characteristic is one of the li-
quids 2, uw, , @, form the Fut. Act. and Mid. and the first Aor. Act.
and Mid. without the tense-characteristic o, but the Perf. Act. with

the tense-characteristic x; e. g

Ss

odahAw (stem ZGAA), Fut. c¢ad-a, first Aor. é-odnA-a, Perf. é-cdar-ka.

Rem. 1. The future-endings of liquid verhs, viz. -6 and -oduaz (arising from

1 § 83.
4 § 158, 6. 1, (b).

26176, 1.

~ ? On the Augment, see § 87, 3.
5 § 161, 3.

§111.] LIQUID VERBS.—FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 125

-éow, -écouat), are inflected like the Pres. Act. and Mid. of contracts m -éo ;
e. g. GtA-@, gtA-otwat. The Fut. Perf. is usually wanting in liquid verbs.

2. The Present tense of these verbs—with the exception of a few
whose stem-vowel is e—is strengthened, either by doubling the
characteristic 2, or by inserting the liquid » after the characteristic,
or by either lengthening the short stem-vowel, as is the case with all
verbs in -iva, dvm, vg@, or by changing it into a diphthong; e. g.
GPAA-)-c, TEU-v-~, “OLY-0, KtY-0, xrEIr-0, Puiv-w, (stems SDAA,
TEM, KPIN(t), -AMYN(v), KTEN, DAN); but pér-o, véu-o
with a pure stem.

3. All the tenses are formed from the pure stem, yet the vowel
in the final syllable of the stem in the first Aor. Act: and Mid., is
lengthened; e. g. omaiid-w (2DAA), Fut. oped-d, second
Aor. Pass. é-cpéd-yy, first Perf. Act. &oai-xa, first Aor. Act.
é-ogy74- 2a, first Aor. Mid. é-oyl-cuny.

4. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes, according as the
stem-vowel of the Fut. is @, ¢,¢ or v before the ending -. ‘In the
first Aor. Act. and Mid., & is lengthened into y, ¢ into e, ¢ into i,
vintov. Thus:

I. Class with d in the Future.

Pres. Fut. Aor.
Kapv-a, to labor, K & “-ovuaL wanting
Tekuaip-w, to place a limit, TEKLap-O é-TéKUNp-a
gaiv-w, to show, gav-d é-Onv-a.

IL Class with ein the Future.

pév-w, to remain, Lev-O é-elv-a
_ GyyéAi-w, to announce, ayYYEA-o nyyea-~a

sais to cut, TEL-O wanting

véu-w, to divide, veL-O é-VElu-a

ipetp-w, to desire, ipep-@ (uetp-a.

il. Class with Zin the Future
tidA-w, to pluck, TLA-G é-Tid-a
kpiv-w, to separate, Kplv-@ é-Kpiv-a.

IV. Class with tj in the Future.

otp-a, to draw, cip-o £-oip-a
apiv-w, to defend, &hiv-o | judv-a.

Rem. 2. The following verbs in -a:vw of the first class, take a in the Acr. m-
stead of 7, namely, icyvaive, to make emaciated, (icxvava, icyvavat), cepdaive,
to gain, (éxépdava, xepdavac), Kordaive, to hollow out, (éxoiAava, koltAavat), Aev-
kaivw, to whiten, dpyaive, to enrage, TéeTaivw, to ripen; also all verbs in -paiva,
€. g. Tepaive, to accomplish, Fut. wepavi, Aor. éxépava, Inf. repavar (except
Tetpuiva, to bore, érétpyva, TeTp7vat), and all in -caiva, e. g. TLaive, to make fat,
ériava, miavat (except ptaive, to stain, feljvat, rarely ucdvac).

IS i

126 ) LIQUID VERBS. [§ 112.

5. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic », ac-
cording to § 8, 4, would end in -yxa, e. g. weniey-xe (from meaives
instead of ps-uiar-xa), népayxe (from aire), wagwgeyxa (from
naowktve, to excite). But this form is found only ameng later wri-
ters. The best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by drop-
ping the », e. g. xexdodaxa (from xegdaiver), or also, as in xveive,
by using the form of the second Perf., e. g. gzove, in the sense of
the first Perf., or, as in the case of verbs in -¢vw, by not forming
any Perf., or, as e. g. in uévw, by forming it from a new theme, as
usnernxe (from MENE®). ;

6. The three following verbs drop the characteristic », not only
in the Perf. and Plup..Act., but also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid.
or Pass. and in the first Aor. Pass. :

4 7 a 4 - PA
Kpivo, to separate, KEKpLKa KEKpILaL Expudnv

, va ~ va - nA
KAive, to bend, KEKALKa KéKAiwat EKATS nV
TAbve, to wash, TETAVKA TET AD UAL EAvO gv.

7. On the formation of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. the following
things should be noted:

(a) When o@ follows a liquid, the o is omitted (§ 106, Rem. 4);
e. g. nyyelPou (instead of nyyél-oF- a), meqarPa.

(b) Verbs in -aive and -dve, usually drop the » before the end-
ings beginning with , and insert o to strengthen the syllable, e. g.
Qair-0o, MEPa-c-Mel, mée-Qa-o-ueFa; but some verbs of this kind
assimilate the » to the following p, e. g. zaookvve, to excite, mape-
Evupar; aicyvy-w, to shame, Zoxvepat, Inf. yoxyvydo. The Perf.
of zéiveo is téeTH MOL.

8. In the second Perf, which, however, is formed only by afew
verbs, the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is lengthened, as
in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with ¢ in the Fut., which take
the variable 0, §102,4; e. g. qair-w, first Aor. é-yv-a, second
Perf. zé-qyv-a; but omeio-w, Fut. omeo-0, second Perf. -cm09-«.

§ 112. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs.

ayyéhAw, to announce.

ACTIVE.

Present, | Ind. ayyéAA-o Subj. dyyéAdw =Imp. dyyeAde Inf. dyyéAAew
Part. ayyéA2ov

Impf. Ind. yyyeAa-ov Opt. dyyéAAors

Perf. I. | Ind. yyyeA-xa Subj. gyyéaxw Imp. notin use Inf. #yyeAnévas
Part. 7yyeAKo¢

Plup. I. | Ind. nyyéa-necy Opt. ayyéA-Korpee

Perf. IL. é-¢0oo0-a, perdidi, from ¢eip-w, perdo; Plup. II. é-d3ép-ecv }-

§112.) LIQUID VERBS. 127

| Fut. Ind. | 8.1. | dyyea-o Opt. dyyehoius or dyyehoinv

2.| dyyed-eic¢ ayyenoic “< dyyehoing
3. | dyyed-et ayyenot “ dyyehoin

D. 2. | dyyed-eirov dyyehoirov “ dyyehoinrov
3. | dyyeA-eitov ayyenoitny “ byyehowntny

P.1.| dyyed-otpuev ayyehoipev “ ayyedoinuev
2.| dyyed-eite ayyenoite “ dyyedoinre
3. | dyyed-ovor(v) ayyehotev “ ayyehoiev

Inf. ayyedciv Part. dyyedGv, -otca, -oiv

Aor. L | Ind. 7yyeta-a = Subj. dyyetAw = Opt. dyyeiAare §=Imp. ayyetdov
Inf. dyyeiAat Part. ayyethag

| Aor. IL. | Ind. jyyea-ov Subj. @yyé2o_ Opt. dyyéAouus ~~ Imp. ayyene

Inf. dyyeAciv Part. dyyedov, -otca, -6v.

MIDDLE.

Pres. Ind. ayyéAA-ouat Subj. dyyéAdwpat = Imp. dyyéAAov Inf. ay-
yérreobat Part. dyyeAAouevog
Impf. Ind. 7yyeAA-dunv Opt. dyyedAoiunv

Pf. Ind. | S.1.| 7yyea-pas Imperative. Infinitive.
2.| 7yyeA-cat nyyér-co nyyéa~Fa
3.| 7yyeA-TaL nyyér-Fo Participle.
Dz 1.| 7yyédA-pedov hy yea-wévog
2.| 7yyeA-Sov nyyer-Sov Subjunctive.
3.| 7yyeA-Fov : nyyéa-Sov nyyer-pévog @
P.1.| pyyéA-peva
Pe aqyyen- Ue nyyea-Se
8.| 7yyeA-pévor eici(v) | 7yyéASwoar or jyyéd-Sur]

Plp. Ind. | 7yyéa-unv, -c0, -To, -ueSov, -vov, -O7y, -wedta, -Se, 7yyeAuévor Hoar |
=== ESS Ey Eye ED a oe PS SE ea a a ee ee

Fut. Ind. | 8.1. | ayyea-otpuar Opt. ayyeA-oiunv Infinitive.
2. | ayyeA-F or -ei ayyed-oto ayyed-ciobat
3. | Gyyed-eiras ayye-oito Participle.
D.1. | ayyeA-obpeSov dyyed-oiueGov | ayyed-obpevec
2. | ayyeA-cioSov ayyed-oioGov
8. | dyyed-eioSov ayyed-otoS nv
P.1. | dyyeA-obpeSa ayyed-oipeta
j 2.| ayyed-eiote ayyed-oiobe_
* | 8.| ayyed-otvras ayyeA-oivto

Aor. I. | Ind. 7yyetA-aunv Subj. cyyeia-opat Opt. dyyetA-aiunvy Imp.
ayyeltA-at’ Inf. dyyeid-acSar Part. dyyetA-Guevocg

Aor. II. | Ind. nyyea-ounv Subj. dyyéA-wwar = Opt. dyyeA-oiunv Imp.
ayyer-od Inf. dyyeA-éoSat Part. dyyed-dyevoc.

PASSIVE.

Aor. I. | Ind. pyyéa-Snv = Subj. dyyeA-GG Opt. dyyeA-Seinv Imp. 47-
yér-Onte Inf. dyyeaA-Cjvat Part. dyyed-Seic
Fut.J. | Ind. dyyea-Sjoouat = Opt. dyyeA-Snooiunv Inf. dyyed-Sjoeo-
Sat Part. dyyea-Syoouevog
Aor. II. | Ind. nyyéa-nv Subj. dyyeA-6 Opt. dyyed-cinv Imp. ayyéa-n8e
Inf. ayyed-jvat Part. dyyed-eic¢
Fut. I. | Ind. adyyea-joouat, ete., like the first Fut. Pass.

Verbal adjective: dyyeA-réoc, -Téa, -Téov.
ect G4 ¢

128 LIQUID VERBS. s

[$ 113,

§113. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to
the Stem-vowel of the Future.

(a) with Gin the Future, o64/A0, to deceive; daivo, to show,
Mid. to appear.

ACTIVE. | MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. obahrA-w opaAdA-ouat paiv-w paiv-ouat
Impf. é-oga2A-ov é-oganA-ounv é-palv-ov é-dalv-Ounv
Perf. I. | é-odad-xa é-obaA-pat (7é-day-Ka) wé-ao-uat
Plup. I. | é-o@aA-xewy é-obaaA-unv | (é-me-bay-Kewv} | é-we-ddo-unv
Perf. IT. wé-onv-a, I appear,
Plup. é-rre-d7v-elv, I appeared,
Fut. obaA-d, etc, et wanting oav-@ | pav-odpat
Aor. I. | é-cdnA-a wanting &-dnv-a &-O7-GUNv.

PASSIVE.
jAor. I. | é-o¢4A-3nv é-dav-Inv, I appeared,

Fut. L obaA-Sicouat gav-Shoopat
Aor. II. | é-of&A-nv é-piv-nv, E appeared,

Fut. I. obaA-joopat oav-joowat, I will appear.
Verbal adjective: o¢aA-réoc, -Téa, -Téov, Gav-Téoc.
; Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. of

« $aLv-o, to show, Enpaiv-w, to dry, and Te&iv-a, to stretch.

Té-hao-Mévoc -Enpau-LEvoe

Ind. 8. 1. | 7é-¢ac-war é-E7pau-uat Té-TG-wal
2. | wé-fav-oat é-ENpav-oat Té-TG-Oal
3. | Té-bav-Tat &-S7pav-TaL TEé-TE-TAL
D.1. | we-¢ao-nedov é-Enpau-wedov Te-Té-wedov
2. | wé-hav-Tov é-E7pav-Cov Té-Ta-o Gov
3. | mé-dav-Tov é-Enpav-Sov Té-Ta-cov
P.1.| we-dao-uweSa é-Enpay-weVa Tée-Té-weda
2. ré-Pav-E é-Enpav-Ce Té-Ta-o0e
3. | me-Gac-pwévor eioi(v) | é-Enpapy-pévor eici(v) | Té-Ta-vrae
Imp. &. 2. | (z é-gav- -00) | (é-Enpav-co) Té-TG-00
3. | Te-bav-So é-Enpav-So Te-Ta-o8W
D. 2. | wé-dav-Sov é-Enpav-Sov Té-Ta-oVov
3. | we-barv-Bov é-Enpiv-Sov Té-Tao8wv
P. 2. | wé-dav-e é-Enpav-Fe Té-Ta-oGe
8. | ze-d4v-Swoar or é-Enpav-Gocay or Té-TA-o0WoaY OL
Te-dav-Suv SMO RY et el TE-TA-O0 WY
Te-pav-Fat ie “é-Enpav-Gar——~<CS*é«dS:C TAL
| €

‘| Te-Td-MEvoc.

§§ 114, 115.] LIQUID VERBS. 129

§114. (b) with e in the Future, ‘ipveip-o» (Ion. and Poet.),
to desire, and oréAhoa, to send.

ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. | iueip-w ipeip-owas oTEAA-W OTEAA-opal
Impf. ipetp-ov ipetp-openv é-oTeAA-ov é-oTedA-ounv
Perf. I. | (uep-Ka iep-eat é-OTAA-Ka é-oTaA-pat
Plup. I. | (uép-xecv (pép-pnv &-OTGA-KELV &-OTUA-Unv
Perf. IT. é-~8op-a fr. 0 cip-w,I have perished,
Plup. I. é-gtop-ewv, I had perished,
Fut. imep-@ ipep-ov par oTeA-O oTeA-ovuat
Aor. I. | (uetp-a imerp-Gunv é-oTEltA-a é-oTELA-GUny.

PASSIVE.

Aor. I. | iuép-Snv é-oTaA-Onv Aor. II. é-ora/-qv
Fut. I. | imep-Cjoouat oTan-Snoouat Fut. II. o7dA-qoonat

Verbal adjective : iwep-réc, -7, -dv, imep-Té0¢, -Téa, -TEoV, OTAA-TOE, oTaA-réoe.
Remark. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. is like 7yyeA-pae.

§115. (c) with 7 and t in the Future.
(a) tiAA-0, to pluck, cipu, to draw, woriv-a, to defile.

Pres. TiAA-W cbp-w ponvv-w
TiAA-opat oup-o1at podvv-ouat
Perf. TE-TLA-Ka o&-OVp-KG (uwe-“dAvy-Ka@)
Té-TlA-wat oé-OUp-[Lal _| pe-oAvo-pat
Fut. TIA-O oip-O LoAdv-@
TiA-ovpwat ovp-ot uae Loddv-od uae
Aor. I. é-TiA-a é-odp-a é-uddiv-a
é-TiA-aunv é-ovp-Gunv é-uwohdv-Gunv
BEF &-7iA-Snv é-ovp-Onv é-odbv-Snv
BLP. TLA-Snoowar ovp-SHoouat podvy-Fjcopat
Aor. II. and Fut. II. P. é-ctp-nv, cip-joopat

Verbal adjective: TvA-T6¢, TLA-Té0¢, oup-T6¢, cup-Téo¢, pvAvY-TOC, pvavy-réoe.

Rem. 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ré-TA-wat, oé-ovp-uat,
is like #yyeA-wat, and je-yoAvo-yat like 7é-dac-ual, and yoxup-pat, from
aicyiv-w, to shame, like é-Ejpapy-pat.

(B) KAiv-w, to bend, TA6v-w, to wash, with v dropped (§ 111, 6).

ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. Kitv-o KAiv-ouae TADV-W TADY-OMaL
Perf. | Ké-kdi-xka ——_ | _ Ké-KAi-wae TéE-TAD-KA Té-TAD-LAL
Fut. Kiiv-O KAiv-obpat Thiv-O TAby-ovpat
Aor.I. | é-KAiv-a é-KAiv-Gnv — -é-mhov-a &-TADV-GUNv
PASSIVE.

Et el a apll ee anRE MCDREREE, 0 1 SRRAD wo- VCEA ARRON Ser eee TSI
Aor. I. | é-«At-Onv Fut. 1. xii-Snoopar | é-rAb-Onv = r20-I7oomat
Aor. II. | é-«Atv-qv = Fut. IL. KAiv-joouar
Verbal adjective: KAl-rTé¢, -7, -6v, KAl-Té0c, -Téa, -Téov, TAv-TO¢, TAV-TEoE.
Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. xé-«Ai-wae and xé-
TAv-pa is like té-7d-yat, and corresponds with that of pure verbs.

130

*AyyéA2do, to announce.
advvaroc, -ov, impossible.
duive, to keep off, repel ;
mid., to revenge oneself.
dro-xretve, to kill.
amo-oTéAAw, to send, de-

spatch.
deGuatoc, -ov, bodiless,
incorporeal.

avénotc, -€¢, 7, increase.

yoa, -7¢, 7, a field.

évoxepaiva, w. dat., to be
displeased with.

éx-gaivw, to show forth,
make known, express.

££-oxéAAw, to drive (pro-
perly a ship) away from
the right course, mis-
lead.

LIQUID VERBS.

LIV. Vocabulary.

émei, when, since.

iueipw, to desire.

ka¥aipw, to purify, clear.

Kava, to labor, be weary.

Kepdaiva, to gain, get ad-
vantage.

KAivo,tobend. _ [secret.

kpuTTO¢, -7, -ov, concealed,

pévo, to remain.

peTa-SaAdw, to
change.

ptaive, to pollute.

vavayoc, -ov, naufrdgus,
ship-wrecked.

vikn, -n¢, 7, victory.

voéw, to think.

Enpaive, to dry.

oikTeipo, w. acc., to pity.

mwapaddswc, unexpectedly.

alter,

($115.

mediov, -ov, TO, a plain.

weraivw, to make ripe,
mitigate.

mepl-oTéAAw, to clothe,
decorate.

TAbivw, to wash.

oreipw, to Sow.

cTéAAw, to send.

otpe, to draw.

Telva, to stretch.

Tekwatpw, to limit.

Téuva@, to cut, lay waste.

TiAAw, to pull, pluck.

oeipo, to lay waste, de-
stroy. _

xaivo and yack, to yawn;
perf. 2, Kéxnva, to gape,
wait with open mouth,
listen.

Kpivar didove ob pddtov. ‘H ddorecyia roarovde ndn duébberpev. ‘*O rhoitoc
monAakic éOnede Tov Kextnyévov ic Erepov 7S0¢.

VEKNDV.
gotiv ddndoc.
Sede absgow rapéset.
Asiv od Sdd.ov.

Of roAéutor THY yopay crégSerpay.

Oi Tlépcat roAAdc vag cig ‘EAAGIa dmeotaAkecav.

Kadoic vonuac. wepiotetiov.

Tat ;
éxépddvar.
Civoc.

The way to Athens from Troezen was cleared of evil-doers by Theseus.

7 ba ‘ 2 SN ~
Kadov éote tHv Opynv mevGvat.

‘O dyyehog éngyyeltre Thy
Navayov¢ oixretpov, érel tAote
"Hy aroxteivyc éySpov cov, yeipa ptaveic.
Ta Kpurta py exonvyc didov.
‘H riyn ToAAGKIC Tog péya dpovotyTag apaddsuc éodnhev.
Ody pév vojoal, yaAer or,
¢pacat d8, ddbvarov~ 7d yap Go@patov capuate onujvat, adbvator.
‘O Karoc Kadoic pidotg TESHAEV.4
Oi moAgutor Ta Tedia OLagGe_epovory.

umepO yoac: 6 6&
Gio movypav petaBa-

Tay poxnr
Ti xéynvac, &

Oi codiotat ék THe copiag ToAAa
"Exadnpe Onoede TOV Kakovpyev THY 60dv THY Ele ’AYAVac éx Tpor-
M7 dveyvepavye Toic ayaSoic.

By

the Persians many ships had been sent to Hellas. The boys gaped. Already
many haughty persons had been greatly shaken (aor. 2 pass.) by fortune. By
prating many have already been ruined. The victory was announced by the
messengers. ‘The country was laid waste (aor.) by the enemies. The good
(man) will pity the poor. The good will choose the good for friends (acc.).
Thou hast derived great gain (hast gained many things) from wisdom. One
friend (a friend) will not make known the secrets of another (of a friend). The
citizens sowed (aor.) the fields, but the enemies laid them waste (aor.). Vice

will soon? show itself. The fields will soon be laid waste by the enemies ( fut.
2] e
2 pass.).

‘ ré0n2a has a present signification. 2 quickly.

§115.]

ASAnric, -od, 6, a wrest-
ler.

aipw, to raise.

aioxive, to shame; mid.w.
pass. aor., be ashamed.

aro-daivw, to show; mid.,
show of oneself, ex-
press, declare.

Backaive, fascino, to be-
witch.

dta-oreipw, dissemino, to
scatter, spread.

éunTva, to spit into or on.

év-TéX20, -ouat, to com-
mission, order, enjoin
upon. .

FTTA, -NC, 77, a defeat.

Oi oTpatTlGtat U6 Tob OTpaTyyod Eig THY payny TapwsdyOnoar.

LIQUID VERBS.

LV. Vocabulary.

Kowvoc, -7, -6v, common,
public, general.

peaxpav (sc. d06v), far, at
a distance.

6utrAéw, w. dat., to asso-
ciate or have inter-
course with.

dpdotc, -ews, 7, sight.

ov-roTe, not once, never.

maLotov, -ov, TO (diminu-
tive of maic), a little
child.

mTapa-Tetve, to stretch out.

mapostve, to encourage.

Tepaive, to complete, ac-
complish.

TAgqtto@, to strike, wound.

131

TroMopKia, -a¢, 7, a siege.
orovddlw, to be in ear-
nest, zealous, active.
oTadLov, -ov, 76, the length

of one hundred and
twenty-five paces, a sta-
dium, a race course.
Tavpoc, -ov, 6, a bull.
Taya, quickly, soon.
Tého¢, -E0¢ = -ovce, TO, an
end; va ré20u¢,through-
out, continually, to the
last.
TLONVN, -NC, 7, & nurse.
TOgevua, -aTo¢, TO, an ar-
row.

Dihinroc

éy TH ToALopKia THe MeSavne eig Tov dobadapov rAnyeic rokebuate dtedSapy*
THY bpaciv. Zodiac 6 xaproc ovmote GUapjoeta. Aioyvybeinn dv, ei daveinv
LGAAov dpovTicery THe éuavtod doEnC, 7 Tig KOVAC CuTnpiac. Midwv, 6 éx Kpé-
Tavoc GIANTHC, TAbpov apapevog Edepe O1d TOd oTadiov pécov. Lic rHv modu
dtéorapto 6 Adyoc, Tove Tohepiovg vinnSjvat. Oi moAitat Tod ToAEpiouc Tept
The ATTHC apvvodvTa. Hi onovddlere, wavta Taya mepavSpoera. EtBora
pakpay maparérata. Kaka épya eic tédoc é&edavy.? ‘O otparnyd¢ Tot¢ orpa-
TLotate éveteidato ént Tove ToAEuiove dpujoat. Ai TiSHval éunTbovor Toi¢ TaAl-
diowe, O¢ py Backayvdowv. Ot rodégucor dteonapyoay. ’OAddupat Tode wévyTac.
O Kpitic THY yvounv anednvato. ’Ayatoic avSparotc bulAGv pido’ av ed-
goavdeing.

The general encouraged (aor.) the soldiers to the battle. Battles will never
destroy the fruit of wisdom. The enemies have spread the report, that our ar-
my has been conquered. The citizens revenged themselves on the enemies for
the defeat. If you are zealous, you will accomplish everything quickly. The
scattered enemies appeared (plup. 2) again. If thou hast intercourse (part.
with good men, thou wilt be much delighted. The good citizen will never ap-
pear (as such), who cares (part.) more for his own reputation than for the gene-
ral welfare. If theu hast had pity (aor. mid. part.) on the unfortunate, thou also
wilt be pitied ir: misfortune (being unfortunate). All the citizens were rejoiced
by the victory. The town has been destroyed by the enemies.

1 Lost. 2 The Aor. here denotes a custora.

132 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [§ 116.

§116. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of
single Verbs, both Pure and Impure.

1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle form ;
e. g. axovo, to hear, Fut. axovoowat, I shall hear, Aor. nuovon, L
heard; anurtaw, to meet, Fut. anavtycouct, I shall meet, Aor.
ényvenoa; amodave, to enjoy, Fut. exohavoouc, Aor. andlaves,
etc. Comp. § 144, ¢.

2. The two following verbs in -éw or -aiw, have ev* in the Fut.

and Aor.:

Kaiw, Att. kéw (without contraction), to burn, Fut. xatow; Aor. éxavea;
Perf. xéxavxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xéxavwar; Aor. Pass. éxatyv; Fut.
Pass. kavS7joopuat ; verbal adjective, kavoréoc, KavoToc, KavTég ;

KAaiw, Att. kAdw (without contraction), to weep. See No. 3.

3. The five following verbs in -é0, viz. Péw, veo, aiéo, avéw and
6g, have ev* in the Fut. and Aor. Besides the common Fut. in
-coucat, the first four have also one in -oovyot. This circumflexed
Fut. is called the Dorie Future. Besides the four above-named,
the verbs uiaio, zailo, zintw and mevyw, have the same Fut. form.

3 éw, to run, Fut. Setoouat or Sevoodyat.

véa, to swim, Fut. vetoouat or vevooiua, No. 3; Aor. évevoc.

™A€w, to sail, Fut. tAcboouat, usually rAevootpar; Aor. éxAevoa; Perf. wé-.
mAevea; Perf. Mid. or Pass. wéxAevowat; Aor. Pass. éxAevoSyv; verbal
adjective, tAevoréoc.

avéw, to blow, to breathe, Fut. rvetoouar or Tvevootpar; Aor. éxvevoa; Aor.
Pass. érvevodny. :

béo, to flow, Fut. petoouar; Aor. éppevoa; instead of these forms the Attics
use, Fut. pujoouat; Aor. é6pinv, and Perf. ée¢fonxa.

Xé«, to pour out, differs from the preceding, Fut. yéw; Aor. éyea; Perf. Ké-
xixa; Fut. Mid. yéouae; Aor. Mid. éyeaqunv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. céyipat ;
Aor. Pass. éyid7v.

AAato, Att. kAdw (without contraction), to weep, Fut. kAavootpat and KAab-
cowat; Aor. éxAavoa; verbal adjective, kAavoréog and kAavoroc. Comp.
§ 125, 14.

devyo, to flee, Fut. devsotwa and devgouar; Aor. éovyov; Perf. rédevya.

mato, to sport, Fut. racEoduar and maifouar; Aor. éracoa; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. wézatouar. Comp. § 105, 3.

zinta, to fall (stem IIET), Fut. recotuar. See § 123.

* The v in the Fut. of these verbs, is occasioned by the reappearance of the
Digamma (F), softened into the vowel v. The Digamma would regularly stand
in the Pres. before the personal-ending -w, but is omitted where it would come
between two vowels. But it can appear in the Fut., as it there stands before the
consonant o.—TR

§116.]

“Aua, at the same time.
avapralw, to seize, catch
up quickly.
aravTaw, to meet.
aroiabw, to enjoy.
avptoy, to-morrow.
éx-Vvéw, endto, to swim out.
éx-7Aéw, to sail out.
éurinto, to fall into; w.
dat. or ei¢ and acc.
évayTiog, -d, -ov, opposite.
qyéopuat, duco, to lead, con-
sider.
KaTa-kaiw, to burn down.

'H orparia aiplov éxmAcioetat (éxmAevoeirat).

OTpATLa ETvEvGEV.

PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS.

LVI. Voeabulary.
Knpo¢, -0v, 0, Wax.
KAaiw, to weep, mourn

for, deplore.

KOAro¢, -ov, 0, a bosom, a
gulf.

viv, nunc, now.

émAov, -ov, TO, a Weapon.

méhayoc, -€0¢ = -0v¢, 70,
the sea.

Teplippéw, to flow round;
to fall down or away.
TLOTLC, 7, belief,
trust, confidence.
mvéw, to breathe, blow.

-E06,

133

TTEPOV, -00, TO, a Wing.

OTpaTLa, -Gc, 7, an army.

ovyxéw, to pour together,
confundo ; confuse, con.
found, disturb.

opaipa, -ac, 7, a ball.

THkw, to melt anything ;
mid. w. 2 aor. and 2 fit.
pass., to melt (intrans.).

Tymwpia, -ac¢, 7, punish-
ment.

xtov, ySovéc, 7, the earth,
the ground, the soil.

y ena 3 7 ~
Avewoc Bofpac évaytiog TH
"Ey 77 vavpayia TH év KOATmw Kpioaiw of eAorovyqotot av-

dpac TOv ’AGvaiwr aréxtetvay, door pH éévevoav aiTdv. “Otay of wohéutot
TH TOAEL! TAnoLaCWoLY, Of OTPATLOTAaL GvapnadcarTes TA bTAa SevoovTat TPOS

Tac twoAac.

Hyovpévorc eivat Tov Biov.
qanicav Tove woheuiovg pevgeiovat.
Tyo ToAAaKLC éExalcev Gua orovddlur.

Gioc.8
UOVv OVYKEXVMEVOL EioLy.

Karéxavoap.

The army sailed away. The north wind will blow against the army.

soldiers hoped to swim (2nf- fut.) through the river.

run to the gates (inf: fut.).

will flee:

Oi raideg odaipav ratkovvrat.
LvyKéyvune viv THY Tiotw 6 Ka? nud
Oi roAéutoe Tac THY EAAQVOY TakeLg cuvEexEay.
"Ixapoc, 6 Tod AaidadAov vide, Takévtog Tod Kypod Kar
tay TrepOv wepippvévtwvr, sic TO Téhayoc évérimTev.
Ai év Avdia Sapdece bd TOV 'EAAHvwv KatexabSyoavr.

TloAAoic kat cogoig avdpior? KéxAavotat cav8pariva, TiYuwpiav
Tic oik dv kiaboete TOV didov aTvy7 ;

Oi rodirat
Lwxpa-

Oi vouor Oca Tov TOXE-

Oi worémine THY TOA

The

The soldiers were going to
You will mourn for the unfortunate.
The children were playing at ball.
children (part., having intercourse with children), thou wilt play.
will disturb the ranks of the soldiers.

The enemies

Tf thou hast intercourse with

The enemies

Pour (aor.) O boy, the water on (ei¢) the

ground! The wax will melt, and the wings will fall away. The town is burnt

down by the enemies.

down the town (acc. w. inf).

The citizens expected that the enemies would burn

4, The following pure verbs, and impure ones, but which by as-
suming an ¢ as their characteristic, are analogous to pure verbs, form
the Perf. Subj. and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass. without the aid of aa

auxiliary verb:

kTG@-opat, to obtain, Perf. xéxtnwat, I possess, Subj. kexT@pat, -7, -7T aL;
Plup. éxextjunv, I possessed, Opt. cextijunrv, KexTyO, KEKTYTO OY KEKT MND,

-@0, -Q@TO.

1§ 161, 2. (x), (8). * Dat. instead of x6 with Gen. °%6 xa® jude Bios, our age.

12

184 SYNCOPE AND METATHESIS.—VERBS IN -w. [§§ 117—119..

ptpvgacKe (MNAQ), to remind. See § 122, 12.
Karéa, to name, Perf. xéxAnuat, Tam named; Plup. éxexAjunr, Opt. cexag-
UNV, -7]0, -7T0.

§ 117. Syncope and Metathesis.

1. In certain forms, some few verbs omit the stem-vowel, which ©
stands between two consonants. This omission of the vowel is call-
ed Syncope. Thus, éye(ow, to awaken, Aor. regularly jyeoa; first
Perf. éyjyeoxa; second Perf. éyey7yooa, I awake; second Plup.
éyonyoeetr, I awoke; Aor. Mid. 7y90 7%, I awoke rétomon,
to fly, Fut.rzyocowat; Aor. éxtouynr,atécoFat .

2. Metathesis is the transposition of a vowel and aliquid. Thus:

BaAAw, to threw, Fut. BaaG; Aor. #8d20v; BAA, Perf. BéBAnKa; Perf.

Mid. or Pass. BéB Anwar; Aor. Pass. 284997 v.
dad, usually dazéla, to tame, Fut. dayiow ; Aor. édéuaca ; AMA, Perf. 0 é 6-
enka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 0é0unuar; Aor. Pass. 26u9707, édauqr.
KaAéw, to call, Perf. kéx 27k a (§ 98, Rem.).—On kava, see § 119.
oKéAdw, okedéw, to make dry, Pert. ck Anka; Fut.ck AH oopeal.

§118. Verbs in -w with the Stem of the Present
strengthened.

It has been already seen (§ 101), that the Present tense of many
verbs is strengthened; but this strengthening remains only in the
Pres. and Impf Besides the modes of strengthening mentioned in
§ 101, by z and o and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are
still others which will be specified in the following list. _

Remarx. All the forms assumed for the purpose ef constructing the tenses
in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 100, 3)—The abbreviation, Ifd., denotes
that the verb forms the Fut. and Aor. middle.— D. M. (i. e. Deponent
Mid.) and D. P. (Deponent Pass.) signify that a verb wants the active form;
such a verb is called deponent middle, when its Aor. has a middle form, and deponent
passive, when its Aor. has a passive form.—The yt in parenthesis shows that the
form standing before it, is analogous to the conjugation in -w, which will be
treated more at large below.

§ 119. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem ts strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting v before the ending.

PRELIMINARY REMARK. Baivw has lengthened the stem-vowel a into az;
éAatvw, a into av; dtvw and iva, d and Z into @ and Z.
1. Baivo, to go, (BA-), Fut. Byoouot; Perf. BéByua; second
Aor. éByv (ut, § 142); Pass. in compounds, e. g. zapaPeSapons
Aor. zapeBa Onp.

§ 120. ] VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 135

2. éhavvw, to drive, Fut. éhiow, Att. £0, -&¢, -&, Inf. lay, § 83;
Aor. ylaca; Perf. édyldéxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. édjdapou; Inf.
ElnhaoGot; Aor. Pass. 7A¢9y».—On a in the fense-formation, see
§ 98, (a). —Mid. |
_ 8. ative, to drink, Fut. rel opece 5 Aor. éuov, Inf. mi, Part. my,
Imp. wide (ut, § 142), poet. wie; (IIO-) Perf. zeawxua; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. wézowou; Aor. Pass. éodnp.

4, tive, to expiate, to satisfy, Fut. ciow; Aor. ?zica; Perf. Act.
zétina; Perf. Mid. or Pass. zézicuor; Aor. Pass. ézicdny; Mid.
zivopet, to avenge oneself, to punish, ticomot, éttocunr.

_ 5. pdaveo, to anticipate, Fut. pOjcouat, more rarely pddow;
first Aor. Zp9aou; second Aor. carat and éepOcaunr (um, § 142);
Perf. ip axa.

Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a con-
sonant :

daxveo, to bite, Aor. taxov; Fut. d7Souor; Perf. Act. dednya;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. d¢d77uar; Aor. Pass. éd7y9np.

xaure, laboro, to exert oneself, to weary oneself, to be weary, Aor.
suapov; Fut. xapyovpor; Perf. xexuyxa (§ 117, 2).

zépvo, to cut, Fut. ceuad; Aor. ézeuov; Perf. récuyua; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. zézunuae; Aor. Pass. écuyOyv; Fut. Perf. cezyyoo
poou.—Mid.

Ps
§ 120. Il. Verbs, whose Pure Stem ts strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting the syllable ve before the ending.

1. Bu-vé-e, to stop up, fill up, Fut. Biow; Aor. Bice; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. BeBvopuou; Aor. Pass. éBvodnr (§ 95).

2. agix-vé-onot, to come, Fut. dgigoner; Aor. agixouny; Inf.
apixtoSoat; Perf. agiyuat; Inf. apiyoar; Plup. epiyunr, aqixco.

3. vmicy-vé-onet, to promise, Aor. vmecy-opnv, Imp. vadozou; but
vmocynoopat; Perf. vzécyyuct. So aumiocyvovuce or guméyouc, to
put on, to wear, (from ayméyw, to put round, Fut. ewpeo; Aor.
numioyor, aumozeiv); Fut. aupesouor; Aor. nemioyouyy and 7u-
mecyouny (§ 91, 1).

LVII. Vocabulary.

Axkpoc, -@, -ov highest, at ama’, once. exclude. yé (enclitic), a strengthen
the point; Td dkpov, areAaiva, to drive away, ingparticle, atleast,certe
the top, the point. aro-Tivw, to compensate, daxve, to bite.

iurioxvotuar or duréyo- pay; mid, to punish, éx-Gaive, to walk or go
at, to put on, wear. avenge oneself. out, turn out, evado

136

éx-zive, to drink out, or
up.

2§-eAavve, expello, to drive

ebdaipovéw, to be happy,
or fortunate.

EGtKvéoual, w. gen., to ar-
rive at, attain to, reach.

iwariov, -ov, TO, a robe, a
garment.

pedia, to drink éSv (un-
mixed wine); hence to
be drunk.

vijua, -aToc, TO, spinning
thread, yarn.

qoAvurTéAeta, -ac, 7, costli-
ness, splendor, sump-
tuousness.

fout.

VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED.

pomadov, -ov, TO, a club.

ovpBaive, to go with;
ovuGaivelt, it happens,
occurs. ;

ovurive, to drink with.

Tadapoc, -ov, 6, a little
basket.

Tivw, to expiate, pay.

Tot (enclitic), a strength-
ening particle, certain-
ly, indeed.

oS ava, to come before, an-
ticipate, w. the acc. of the

« person who is anticipa-
ted, and the part. of the
verb which expresses

the action in which any

[s 120.

one is anticipated; gen-
erally it may be trans-
lated by an adverb, as
before, or sooner than,
and the part. may be

expressed by the finite”

verb, as of woAitat Tove

Todeniove épVacay ci¢

THY TOA dvyovTec,
“the citizens anticipa-
ted the enemies in hav-
ing fled into the city ;”
that is, “the citizens
fled into the city soon-
er than the enemies.”

dopéw, to carry.

Teic¢ orpatiotaic év TH OTpATIG TOAAA Kaka ovveBEBHKEL. Lodoic suidadv

kat abtoc éxBnon codoc.

ody ovdele drreAnAatat vouw' Tiudv? Kat apyov.?
‘'O pediwy dodAdc éoTt TOU TETMKEVAL.
‘O oivoc bd THv oTpaTLoTGy éexdbn.
Oi rodAitat Tod ToAEiove EGUacay eic THY TOALY GvyOrTEC.
'O Aayact bird Tod Kvvicg ednySn.

vovTat gidot.

OakovTa.

Avkotpyoc rodvrédetav é&phace Tig LaapTye.
TloAAot cvpriovtec anak yly-

Tlep-

Ovx éxrriouar Tov oivor

Tove xaxobpyove of Geot dxorticatvrTo.

Kiov? dngerar tov

Otx dv pH Kapov ebdamovoine.

Oi Kexunkotec otTpatiétat dveratvoavto. ’AttiKn bd TGV Ilepody érundy.

‘O ‘Hpakane 76 poraror, 6 épdpet, abtog Ereyev Ex Nepéac.
Oi mpécBete cig THY TéALY AdikovTo.
'O didoc bréoxeTé por adigeoSat.

BéBvora.
avev TOvov.
iuaria.

‘O rahapoc viatog

Ov tot y’ égifer Tov akpwv
Ai yuvaixec nuréoyovTo KaAa

The enemies will proceed into our country. The enemies were driven out
The law will exclude (drive away) no citizen from

of the town by the citizens.

honor and offices of command. lLycurgus has driven sumptuousness out ot
Sparta. The wine has been drunk up by the soldiers. The laws will punish
evil-doers. ‘The citizens will flee into the town sooner than the enemies. The
dog has bitten the hare. The hare is (i.e. has been) bitten by the deg. If you
will work (part.), you will be happy. The enemies have laid waste the land.
The country is (i. e. has been) laid waste by enemies. The enemies will lay
waste the land. The woman filled (aor.) the basket with yarn. The father is
eome. The friend will promise me, to come (/vt.).to-morrow: The boy has
promised the teacher to learn diligently. The women will put on beautiful
garments.

1 § 161, 9. 2 § 157, 3 § 47,6. 4 § 30.

4

5 121.) VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 137

$121. Ill. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting the syllable av, more rarely aww, before the
ending. -
(a) @v or atv is inserted without any change.

All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a three-fold stem,
viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second
Aor. from the pure stem, the Fut. and Perf. from a third stem, con-
sisting of a pure stem and an annexed ¢, which is changed in the
inflection into 7.—The «@ in the ending -dvq is short.

1. aiod-cv-ouct, to perceive, Aor. 7od- OMY, aictécboar; Perf.
joOnuce 5 Fut. ato oope.

2. cwcorévo, to miss, Aor. nuagtov; Fut. apaerjoouot; Perf.
jucornua; Perf. Pass. yucornuc.

3. ansyPavowct, to be hated or odious, Aor. danyOduny; Fut.
Bren iogue ; Perf. aay Oynuc, I am hated.

4, avscaro (and avéw), to cause to increase, to increase, Fut. ad-
syoo; Aor. yv&you; Perf. yv&yua; Mid. and Pass. to grow, Perf.
psnuot; Fut. avgjoouc.; Aor. vénOnp.

5. Blacrave,, to sprout, spring, Aor. Blactov; Fut. Blaoziow;
Perf. 2Bidoryxa and Bepiaoryxe (§ 88, 2).

6. dagdave, to sleep, Aor. éagdor; Fut. dagdjoouet; Perf.
perenne,

7. dluoPave, to slip, to glide, Aor. diicSov; Fut. Ohio PHCO ;
Perf. ohiodynt.

8. doqoutvouct, to smell, Aor. DOPOOPNY 5 Fut. ooqonooua.

9. dgiucxcve, to be liable to a Jine, to ineur punishment, to 0wey—
he double strengthening tox and ay is to be noted—Aor. agiov;
Fut. opiyow; Perf. ipdqgxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dqAnuct

b) dy is inserted before the ieee. ending, and v is insert
ed before the Characteristic-consonant of the
Pure Stem.

The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem, is changed into
1 long one, in inflection. The y before a Pi-mute is changed into
4, before a Kappa-mute, into y.

10. Styyave, to touch. Aor. 2Fiyov; Fut. FiSoueee.

11. Aayycveo, to obtain by lot, to acquire, Aor. 2 Layov; Fut. Aq-
somet; Perf. ethyya; Perf. Mid. or Pass. etlpyuas ($ 88, 4); Aor.

Pass. 2ljy On.

>is, LapBave, to take, Riss éhaBov, Imp. Lee; Fut. Agwoue;
ia

:

:

138

VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED.

rs 121.

Perf. eiljypa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. etAypyou (§ 88, 4); Aor. Mid.
EhaPouny ; Aor. Pass. edngony.

13. Aavddve, (seldom Aye), to be concealed, Aor. andor Fut.
‘iow; Perf. 4éiy9a, I am concealed, Mid. to forget, Fut. Anoop ;
Perf. LEdnopee 5 Aor. 2aPounr.

14. warPave, to learn, Aor. guador ; Fut. wceD Comes 5 Perf. pe-
uadnxa.—The remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are formed
from the stem M_AQE, according to No. a.

15. mv Pevop, to inquire, to ask, to learn by asking, Aor. é7tv-
Sounv; Perf. TEMVO MOL, némvou, etc.; Fut. mevoouer; verbal ad-
jective, mEVOTOS, TLEVOTEOS.

. KS 16. cvyyave, to hit, to happen, to obtain (with Gen.), Aor. év yor ;

t. TEVSOpLUet (TEYX-); Perf. cecvyyxa (TTXE- according to

No. a).

'Ayyehia, -ac, 7, & mMes-
sage, News.

aye, age! come now.

ava-oTpédw. to turn round
(trans. and intrans.).

avSewov, -ov, TO, a flower,
a blossom.

BotAevua, -atoc, TO, ad-
vice, a decision, a reso-
lution.

Gpayxic, -eia, -t, short.

yevvaioc, -d, -ov, of noble
birth, noble, brave.

devpo, hither.

Ajoetv Oa tédove py OoKeita 6 rovnpéc.

BotAov moré.

otk yoteTo.

LVIII. Vocabulary.

Otc, bis, twice.

doxéw, to think, appear,
seem.

éArouat, to hope.

éE-auaptave, apaptave
strengthened by é&.
- ($121, 2)
érapKéw, w. dat., to nels,
étBovan, -7¢, 7, a plot.

ieee, to swear false-
ly; w. acc., to any one.

evepyeola, -a¢. 77, a favor,
beneficence.

KGundoc, -ov, 0, 7, a camel.

AaPé rpdvorav tod zpochKovTog Biov.

kata-dapSavo, to fall a
sleep, sleep.

Avypoc, -G, -dv, sad.

éziow, behind, back.

TPOO-KWV, -7KOVOA, -7}KOY,
fitting, becoming.

w@ (enclitic), yet.

ovudopa, -Gc, 7, an event,
especially a misfortune.

xpvotov, -ov, 7d (diminu-
tive of xpvodc), gold.

Of, as; @¢ Ta&yLoTa, as
soon as.

4 soit ~
Képdo¢g rovypiv py AaBeiv
Aixata dpacacg ovppayou tTevEn Beod.}
det kal pavovera voiv éyerv.
volg érapkv® THv icwy Tet En Tore.

Tpdupata pavteiv

tts
me-

‘O pomiees Tho Tpo¢ éavTov éxiBovane
Oi Ilépoat roig "EAAnowt araxyovro.

Didinroc abric

aregaiveto 01a xpvoiov ud2Aov, } Od Tév brAwy nb EnKéevac ty idiav Bact-

Aeiav.

"AOXTNG T

ETVYXNK OCI love rabTHe Gsw0¢.
Makxapioc, dctig ETVYE yevvaiov dirov.
beig wo Sévoy tEaratnoac aSavarouvc EXAaG ev.

Oi otpatidrat Bpaxdyv ypivov karédaporv.
XLoTA TOV KaUA?wv? of inrol, Oriow GvéoTtpEdov.
cevpo, iva Tv 8 n THC Avypac Gy

yediac.3

M7 Siyne Tod Kvvoc.®
Ocdv éexcopxdv uy doker AeAn Deva.
Kanov, unoév eic didovg duaprteiv.
Mave gépew thy cvpdopayr.

‘Q¢ OogppovTo Ta-
"Aye

Od-

"Aw éoB Adv toFAd wath oy.

1 § 158, 3. (Db).
4§ 161, 2. (c).

3 § 158, 5. (b).
6 § 158, 3. (b).

§ 122.] VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 139

Kai xand¢ roanaxce tiie Kal dbéy¢ EXayev. Tapa tév Gedy ror2ra ra pel-
Andaperv dépa. Ob AEA ED, Getic ddiKa Epya mpatrer. Ei Vedv avno Tic
fAnevat Aabety, dpaptave. Aig éFapapreiv rabrdv' obk dvdpd¢ codod.
"ES dyadic x8ovig EB AaoT er Kara dvdeua, tx 7 dpSav dpeviv Bovireipar
Lobia. Tig ebepyeciac obmore AHoopat.

The king will not perceive the plots against him. If thou drinkest (drink-

ing), talk not much (pl.); for thou wilt err. What man has not once erred?

The bad (man) is hated by the good. Philip increased (aor.) his royal au-
thority more by money than by arms. From a correct understanding will al-
ways spring (8/acréve) excellent resolutions. I have slept only a short time.
J will not touch the dog. Pericles has acquired great fame. The bad will
never acquire true fame. We shall take precaution for a becoming life (gen.).
The town was taken (aor.) by the enemy. The ungrateful (person) has for-
gotten the favor The boy has studied literature well. Hast thou heard the
sad news ?

§ 122. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by annexing the two consonants cx or the syllable wx.

2x is annexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and 10x,
when it is a consonant. Most verbs, whose pure stem ends with a
consonant, form the Future, ete. according to the analogy of pure
verbs, e. g. evo-icxw (from EYPE-). Some of these verbs, in the
Pres. and Impf., take a reduplication also, which consists in re-
peating the first consonant of the stem with .

1. ad-icz-ouot, to be taken, to be conquered, Impf. flicuduny;
(4A0-) Fut. cddcowor; second Aor. 7iar, and sélav (uu, § 142,
9), J was taken ; Perf. jlwxa, and éédaxa, I have been taken (Aug.,
§ 87, 6). The Act. is supplied by aigeiv (§ 126, 1), signifying, to
take captive, to conquer. | ,

2. avahicxue, to spend, to consume, Impf. avydiczov; Fut. ava-
Aoow; Aor. drylaca and dvélooa, xuryvélaca; Perf. dviloxe
and aviloxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dvjlopoe and dvéhepoe; Aor.
Pass. avadadny.

3. doéoxe, to please, Fut. dogow; Aor. yoeca; Perf. Mid. or
‘Pass. joecuor; Aor. Pass. 7o¢o07v.—Mid.

4. yyodoxum or ynoce, to grow old, Fut. yrodcouet; Aor. eyioa-
oa; Inf. yyonou; Perf. yeyjrouxe.

«5. yyraoxuw, to know, (.NO-) Fut. yrocoxer; second Aor. éy-
woo (yt, § 142); Perf. éyvaxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Zyrmopeae (§ 95);
‘verbal adjective, yrworos, yraozéos.

—

* $60, Rem. 2On the Sing.verb, see p. 27.

140 VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. [§ 122.

6. dwdodcxm, to run away (usually compounded, e. g. as08.,
&xd., diad.), Fut. deacouae; Perf. d<doaxa; second Aor. édoav
(ut, § 142, 1).

7s Ev QIOHO0, to find, second Aor. evooy; Imp. eve 5 ; (EYPE-)
Fut. BUONO 5 Perf. EV ONHEL§ ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. evgrpece Aor.
Pass. evosdnyv; Aor. Mid. evQouTy? 5 verbal adjective, Evostos.

8. iPeeoxc, to come to one’s strength, to come to the state of man-
hood, Aor. 78yc0 (jBaw, to be young, but arnBu, to become young
again).

9. Sricxw, commonly ézo9vi0x0, to die, (O.AN-) Aor. anéda-
vov; Fut. axodurovua; Perf. zéOrynza, ete.; Fut. Perf. ceOvyge
old Att., and zeOv7Souon, I shall be dead.

10. iheoxouct, to propttiate, Fut. Adécouat; Aor. Lacauny.

11. piryoxw, to remind, (MN.A-) Fut. wryom; Aor. guryce;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. weurnuct, I remember, I am mindful (Redup.,
§ 88, Rem. 1), Subj. usurapat, -7, -7z00 (§ 116, 4), Imp. peuryoo;
Plup. gusurnunr, I remembered, Opt. usuryuny, -70, -770, or wEnra-
uny, -@0, -@T0 (§ 116, 4); Fut. Perf. ueuryoouast, [shall be mindful ;
Aor. égurjo8nr, I[remembered ; Fut. uvnoOjoonot, IT shall remember.

12. zaoyo (arising from 2a0oxw, by transferring the aspiration
of the # to x), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. éxaor;
(HEN ©- ) Fut. zeicouce (§ 8, 7) ; Perf. zezovba. Verbal adjective,
ta9NTOS.

13. minioxzo, to give to drink, Fut. zicw; Aor. ica.

14. mizodoxw, to sell (Fut. and Aor. in the Common language
expressed by azodwcoua, amedounyv); Perf. wéxoaxa; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. wémoapot (Inf. wexoac8oa); Aor. éxoadyy; Fut. Perf.
memoacouct in the sense of the simple Fut. zoe&yjcoue: (not used).

15. oregioxm (seldom ozeoem), to deprive of, Fut. czeoyow; Aor.
sozzoycu; Perf. éozéonxa; Mid. and Pass. ozeoloxopat, ozegoupan,
Fut. ozeojcoucs; Perf. éocgonuos; Aor. écreondyy.

16. zirewoxw, to wound, Fut. todo; Aor. ézewoa; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. zézomuat; Aor. ézow0yv; Fut. towOijcouce and revwoo-
poo.

17. gaoxo, to think, to say, to affirm, assert (Ind. not used), Impf.
Epaczorv; Fut. gyow; Aor. éqyce.

18. ydéoxo, to gape, (XAN-) Aor. zyévov; Fut. yévovuer; Pert.
xeynva, I stand open.

Remark. Acddoxw, to teach, retains the x in forming the tenses: Fut. didagw ,
Aor. édidafa; Perf. dedidaxa; Aor. Pass. éddax0nv.—Mid.

§ 123. ] VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 141

xy LIX. Vocabulary.
Adiroc,-ov, without trou- étavadépw, to bring back, maAazéc, -d, -6v, old, aged,
ble, free from sorrow. refero, to refer, impute. _ of old time.
durnpovéw, w. gen., to be ebyevic, -éc, well-born, of macy, to feel, suffer ;
forgetful of. high birth, noble. with ev, receive a favor,
dexac, -adoc, 7, a decad, moipa, -ac, 7, a share,a be well treated.
the number ten. lot, fate. mevtéw, to grieve, mourn
é§-evpiokw, to find out. Lopotuoc, -ov, fated. for.

’Oniyoug ebpyaet¢ dvdpag étaipove micTode év yaderoic mpiyuacww. Tla-
av avSparote wopaipov éottv ano avetv. TevGoiuer rove Ted vynkétac.
‘Hdéwg Tav radady rpdgewy! wéEuvynvtas of advdpwro. Ob dv ebporg
aviperov ravta® OABioTatov. "H Kahac Siv,3 7 Knadde TES vynKévar 6 eb-
yevig Bobserar. Ei devva dv’ buetépav xaxotryta Ten OvFare, wy TA Veoic

“TovTwv moipav éxavagépete. Td dda kal roAeuoc Kat petaBoan Tiyne av G-
Awoev® 4 téxvy O& oolera. Ilavt’ éotw é€evpeiv, éav uy tov révow
gevyn Tic. Ei tig ynpaoac Gay evyetat, astéc gore ynpadokety ToAAGe ei¢ éTGv
dexadac. Mépvyoo, dte Buytic brapyerc. Toyn téxvgv etpyKag, od
téxvy Tiynv. ObK« gore Biov ebpeiv ddurov oddevi.2 ’Aydpioroc, Seric ed
Tavav auvnuovet. Aixatov ev mpattovta peuvjotat Tov atvyav.

The town has been taken by the enemies. ‘The citizens expected, that the
town would be taken by the enemies. By the war (dat.) the whole wealth of
the town has been consumed. Seek to please (aor.) the good. The fame of

_ virtue will never grow old. The bad (man) will never perceive the beauty of

virtue. The slaves have run away in the night. They say that (acc. w. inf.)
letters were invented (zf- aor.) by the Phoenicians. The brave warriors will
willingly die for their country. To mortals it is not permitted (ov« éor1, w. dat.)
to say, This I will not suffer. The prisoners were sold (aor.) by the enemies.

The soldiers robbed (aor.) the citizens of their property. Many soldiers were

wounded in the battle. Alexander was instructed (aor.) by Aristotle.

§ 123. V. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and
impf. by prefixing the Reduplication.

This reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the
stem with s. ‘To this class belong:
, yiyvopce (instead of Yiyevopeett), to become, ('EN-) ‘Kor. 2 Ey EVOUNDY 3
“Fut. yevqoouar; Perf. yeyeryuce, I have become, or yéyova with a
present signification, J am.
mince (instead of ainézo), to fall, Imp. mince; (TIET-) Fut. ze-
oovpat (§116, 8); Aor. ézecov; Perf. zézztmxua with irregular
vowel of variation. :

Remark. Several verbs of class IV, § 122, belong here, as yeyrvacko.

* § 158, 5. (b). ? in every respect. OT. a (a). 4 uh TL, in no respect
The Aor. denotesacustom. ®oix éo71—oddevi, noonecan. See § 177, 6

142 VERBS TO WHOSE PURE STEM é IS ADDED. [§ 124.

§ 124. VI. Verbs, to whose Pure Stem « ts added in the Pres. and
Impf.

1. yopeo, to marry (of the man), Perf. yeyounxa, but Fut. yeuo
(§ 88); Aor. Zyyua, yjuor; Mid. yenovpct (with the Dat.), to marry
(of the woman, nubo), Fut. yawodpce (§ 83); Aor. éyjucuyy; Pass.
to be wedded, Aor. éyaundnp, ete.

2. yyéw, usually Perf. yéy7Ga (also prose), to rejoice, Fut. yy-
S700.

3. Soxéo, to seem, videor, to think, Fut. sbi; Aor. 260&a; Perf.
Pass.. dgdoyucu, visus sum; Aor. Pass. 2d0y077.

4. naotieéw, to witness, Fut. uaetveysm, ete. But pxorigopet,
Dep. Mid. to call to witness. |

5. Evegw, to shave, Mid. Eveouar; Aor. evocuqr, but Perf. é€v-
Once.

6. ote, to push, Impf. éa9ovv; Fut. dow and wdc; Aor.
fwoa, woot; Perf. goxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éwopor; Aor. Pass.
sacdry (Aug. § 87, 4).—Mid.

LX. Vocabulary.

'Arwév, to push, or drive éuzizto, to fallonorinto ovu-riztw, to fall with;

away. something,tomeetwith. cuyninret, it happens.
aTy, -7¢, 7, infatuation, eddoxivéw, tobe or become ovu-dépw, to carry with,
and consequent unhap- _ celebrated. conduce, to be of use.
piness, evil. mpo-voéw, to think or con- cvy-dia-7piGw, to spend
eic-wSéw, to push, ordrive sider beforehand. time with, to live with.
in. TOTOTE, ever. g6voc, -ov, 6, murder.

TloAAdkicg éx xaxod éobAdv ébyéveto, kal nakdv && dyatov. Xeipa meodvt.
épegov. ‘O ayardyv xivdvvoy éguneceitat ait. Ol Gvbpwrot mpd¢ apeTHy ye-
yovacwv. My por yévou’ & BobAouat, dA & ovudéper. My onedde mdovtety,
un taxd wévng yévyn. TloAAdKic 6 ebdoximetv retpOuevos, ov mpovonoac, sic pe-
yaanv Kat yarennv atynv éexecev. “Otay arvyeiv oot cvprécn TL, Eipimidov
prjodynti: Ov gory, Setic wav’ avap eidaimovet. Mevédnuoc xpd¢ Tov épu-
THOAVTA, ei yar 0 orovdaiog, éAekev* “EyO yeyaune, x H Tod gidov Suyarip,
évvarnv juépav yeyaunuévyn, TéeSvynKev. "AYLAAEOE Svude éyey7Set oovov
’"AyvaiGy dpGvTo¢. “Edoge TO oF parnyo” éxt Tod¢e ToAEuiove oTparevoacbat.
Lwxparne érekev: ‘Yxd wavtwv paptuphoerai pot, tt éy@ HOixnoa piv ovdéva
maroTe GvOpaTwrv, ov0E Yelpw* érroinoa, BeAtiovg dé TorEety éExetpOunv del TOde
éuol ovvdiatpiBovtac. Anuootévync Sige THY KEegaagv. Ol oTOaTL@TaL elg
Thy TOA eicewoSnoav. Oi oTpaTiGtat anewoavTo ToOd¢ TOAEMiONE.

If thou actest so (so acting), thou wilt soon become poor. The soldiers have
fallen upon the enemies (éuzixrw, w. dat.). The daughter of my friend will

* The general determined. 2 § 35, Rem. 4.

§125.] VERBS WHICH ASSUME ¢ IN THE TENSE-FORMATION. 143

marry the son of my brother. The citizens will rejoice, if they hear (hearing)
the defeat (gen.) of the enemies. It is determined (perf: pass. of doxéw) that (acc.
w. inf.) the soldiers march against the enemies. All will bear testimony te
thee, that thou hast conferred many favors on the state. The slaves have had
their heads shaved. ‘The enemies drove the soldiers into the town.

§ 125. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and lmpf., but which
in the other Tenses assume a Stem with the Characteristic e.

The ¢ is lengthened into 7 in inflection. Exceptions: ayoua: and wayouar.

1. dew, to ward off, Fut. adeSjow; Mid. to ward off from one-
seif, to defend, Fut. adeEjoouce (from AAEK-); Aor. mheSauny

2. ey Fopent to be vexed, displeased, Fut. éydécoucs; Aor. 7ybé0-
Oyv ; Fut. aySecOnooucs having the same signification as ¢yPécouc.

3. Booum, to feed, Fut. Booujow; Aor. éBooxyoa; Mid. to feed
(intransitive).

4. Bovdouct, to wish, (second Pers. Bovie, § 82, 2), Fut. Bovdy-
couet; Perf. BeBovdyuat; Aor. éBovdyIyy and ipoul. (Aug. § 85,
Rem. I).

5. dw, to want, to need, usually Impers. dei, tt is wanting, tt ts
necessary, Subj. dey; Part. déorv, Inf. dsiv; Impf. ge, Opt. dgor;
Fut. degoer; Acr. ed¢yce(v) ; Mid. déouc, to need, Fut. deyoouae;
Aor. 2de79-77.

6. é¢o and Fela, to will, Impf. 7Felov and @Fehov; Fut. 2Ge-
Ajow and Gehycw; Aor. 7Oehycu and éF2iyoa; Perf. only 7edyxa.

7. stho, to press, to shut up, Fut. eidyow; Perf. Mid. or Pass. et-
Ajuat; Aor. Pass. sid ony.

8. EIPOMAY, Aor. joouyy, I inquired, zogoPa, Zompon, égos-
uny, 000, goouev0g; Fut. geycouct. ‘The other tenses are supplied
by gowrey. ‘

Ae aon, to go forth, Fut. édyow; Aor. 766noe.

10. evdm, commonly zadetdm, to sleep, Fut. see Sue (Aug.,

§ 91, 8).
AT: a to have, to hold, Impf. etyov,(§ 87, 8); Aor. eqzor, Inf.
oyei, imp. ae $, maguszes (ut, § 142) Subj. OL» “U8, rugdoxe,
maoucyys, etc., Opt. enh (ut), Part. azar; Fut. &c and oyyow;
Perf. gayyxa; Aor. Mid. éayouyr, Subj. cyauat, Opt. czoiuyr, Imp.
ood, zagccyov, Inf. czéoGu, maoaozscOu, Part. cyouevos; Fut.
oyncona; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éoynnat; Aor. Pass. éoyéOqv; ver-
bal adjective, éz0g and cyerce.

12. &vo, to boil, to cook, Fut. éwijow; verbal adjective, éOdg or
éynzos, Ewytéos.

144 VERBS WHICH ASSUME ¢ IN THE TENSE-FORMATION. [§ 125

13. xadileo, to seat, make to sit, Impf. éxadrlor, old Attic, xadi-
Cov; Fut. xedid (§ 83); Aor. éxaPioa, old Attic, xaPion; Perf.
nexeGina; Mid. I seat myself, Fut. xe dilyooucn; Aor. sxadioauyr,
TI seated for myself, I caused to sit. But xatEeCouct, I seat myself,
T sit, Impf. éxaPeCounr; Fut. zatedovpoe (Aug. § 91, 3).

14. xJaic, to weep, Att. xAdew without contraction, Fut. xAavoo-
uot and xAavoovuos (§ 116, 3), rarer xAaujow or xAajow; Aor.
éxlavoa; Perf. xéudavpot and xexdAavouou; verbal adjective, xAavo-
zoe and xAavtos, xAavoréog.—Mid.

15. poyouce, to fight, Fut. woyovjct (instead of wayscowea) ; Aor.
éuaysccunv ; Perf. usucyyuos; verbal adjective, uayezéog and pa-
ynteos.

16. peddo, to intend, to be about to do, hence to delay, Impf. gued-
Aov and jushiov; Fut. weddgow; Aor. guedAjou (Aug., § 85, Rem.).

17. pede pot, tt is a@ care, anxiety, interest to me, curae mihi est
(rarely personal pedo), Fut. wedjoet; Aor. éugiyoe(y); Perf. meus-
Anue(v); Mid. wédowor, commonly eiehouce (and émimedovmat) ;
Fut. émiehjoouar (sometimes éxiehyOyooucs) ; Aor. énenedndny.

18. pila, to suck, Fut. uvlyjoo, ete.

19. 6f0, to smell, Fut. 6Gjow; Aor. a@ljoa; Perf. o6wda with
the meaning of the Pres. (Att. Redup., § 89).

20. oiowes and ofuct, to think, second Pers. ove (§ 82, 2), Impf.
gouny and @pyv; Fut. oijcoua:; Aor. @7dyy, oindyvras (Aug.,
§ 87, 1).

21. otyouct, to depart, to go, to have gone, abii, Impf. myounr, I
went away; Fut. otyjcouar; Perf. @yguct, in the Common lan-
guage only in composition, e. g. mtaomynwet.

22. oqetho, to owe, to be under obligation, debeo, Fut. opedgoo ;
Aor. aqeidjoa; second Aor. wgedor, -e¢, -e(v) (first and second
Pers. Pl. not used) in forms expressing wzsh, utinam.

23. métouct, to fly, Fut. aryoowae; Aor. ércouny, azéoPos (rarer
éatyy and énzapny, put, §142, 2); Perf. wexdrypasr.—Syncope,
§ 117, 1.

24. yaigo, to rejoice, Fut. yaroyow; Aor. éyaony (ut, § 142, 8);
Perf. xeycoyxa, I have rejoiced, and usyaonwat, [ am rejoiced.

Remark. With these verbs several liquid verbs may be classed; still, these
form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly; e. g. uwéva, to remain, Perf. wewévna, reg=
ular in the other tenses; véuw, to divide, to distribute, Fut. veuO and vewoduat ;
Aor. évesua; Perf. vevéunna; Aor. Pass. éveundnv (rarer éveuédnv); Perf.
Mid. or Pass. vevéunuat.—Mid. ;

ft

3 125.] VERBS WHICH ASSUME & IN THE TENSE-FORMATION. 145

AuBpooia, -a¢, 7, the food
of the gods.
iva-TéTouat, to fly up, or
away.
ivéw®, to boil up.
Sacinetoc, -ov and Paoi-
Aetoc, -a, -ov, royal,
regal.
jia-wévw, to remain.
si, if, 7n @ question, whether.
éyxo,to examine,search,
blame, convict.
TiTHOELOC, -ov and ént-

Oi orpari@rat Tove moAEuiovg aAEEjoovTat.

ravete éheyyouevot.

yéypagev.

LXI. Vocabulary.
THOELCE, -a, -ov, fit, re-
quisite; Tad énityceca,
provisions.

épwTaw, to ask.

nutdeoc, -ov, 0, a demi-
god.

Upovoc, -ov, 0, a seat, a
throne.

kadoxayavtia, -a¢, 7, rec-
titude, virtue.

Acia, -a¢, 7, booty, plun-
der. [ part.

pépoc, -E0¢ = -ouc, TO, a

'O rowuny aiyov THv ayéAnv év Toi¢g bpeot BooKjcet.
ITpaTi@rat énl Tode TOAEuiovE oTpaTeveaUat EBouvrnSnoarv.
TH TOAEuiC Yq TOV Exitndciwr® deqoet.
LEVOC, GAD’ 6 utKp@y denoduevoc.
Ld paAdov nuiteos adv TO adeAdO yevéotat.
waytévtec, cic TOV ToTayoy EiAnnoav.

HE0TO6, -71, -6v, w. gen., full.

fipov, -ov, 76, scented
salve, perfumery.

vénw, to divide, distribute.

épvic, -idoc, 6, 7, a bird.

6po¢, -E0¢ = -0uc, TO a
mountain.

TaTTO¢, -0v, 6, a grand-
father.

TAqv, except, besides.

Tpimovc, -odoc, 6, three-
footed, a tripod.

My aySeotyre txép Gv! Huap-

Oi
Toi¢ orpatiaraic?

Tlhototo¢ éoti ody 6 wWoAAG KexTy-
‘O Todvdetxnge otdé ede 7SéAnce ubvoc, ar-
Of BapGapol, bb Tév ‘EAAQvar
"Epov Tov matépa, et THY éxtoToARy
Ov mpéet Tov oTpaTnyov év KivddvoLe KaSeEvdjoaL.

Oddeic dvSpé-

rav nEwaSy Toicg Seoict Gusheiv, TARY boot pwetecxHKact KaAAove~ Tlédow yap

rouTov évexa auCpociac® wetéoxe Kat Lavupgdn¢e Kal GAdot Tivéc.
ova avewjoaca véov Toljoal AéyETat.

yov TOV PBaciAeLov.

xs

Kvpocg vr

M7deca Ai-

Katdiotuév oe, © orparnyé, ei¢ Tov Bpéd-
‘O Bacthetec Ext Tot Vpdvov Kkadiljoera.
Fahapivi Sappuréwc tuayécavto.

Oi "EAAnvec év

Mardavyc THe unTpo¢c épwrySeic,

> 7 / x ~ 7 = > See oN 2 x <oe a” ca

i BovAoLTO pévely Tapa TH TaTTy, OdK EmédANoEr, UMA Tayd Ehetev, Ste we

yetv BovdAoito. Toic ayatoic® ti¢ apetig™ wsdAqjoec.

Roovaly,® GAAd Kahoxayatiac.
’

buyely Wyorro.

Apyotol véot ov pipav
Of otpatidrat ointévteg Tobe ToAEuioug aro-
Oi ka-
Ci wohiras det-
“aoav Tiy vinta év 10i¢ Opect dte-

‘H puyn avarropévy ofyncetat c8uvatog Kal cvypuc.
‘Hl bd

(
Oi Sypevta

covpyor meyarny Cyuiay adgeiAnoav.?
OC EKEYapHKEoar én TH ViKy.
LELEVTKECAY.
“Eon ).

The soldiers courageously kept off (aor. mid.) the enemies. Many herdsmen
ended (aor.) the herds of goats on the mountains. The father will wish to de-
part to-morrow. A good general takes care, that (that not, d7we, 47, w. ind. fut.)
the soldiers may not want provisions. The good will not wish to go about with
the bad. JI will ask the father, whether he has written the letter. If thou art
weary (being weary, perf. part.), thou wilt sleep comfortably (7déc¢). Those
who are held by evil desires are all slaves. Cowardly soldiers will not take
part in dangers. -Aison, having been boiled by Medea, is said to have become

Vie. itp TotTwr, a. 2 the soldiers will need.
*§ 161, 2. (a), (a). ® § 158, 3. (b). o's 161,
_ © dServ Tevdc, to smell of something. —_® owed, had to suffer.

13

IC @VATETOTHTAL.

Tig Aciac pépoc b76 TOY OTPATLWTOY TH oTpaTHY@ éveuAOy (éve-
Tpirodeg qoav Kpe@v'® wecrol veveunuévur.

3 § 158, 5. (a).
7 § 158, 6. I, (b).
10 § 39, Rem.

146 VERBS.—TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. [§ 126. _

young again. The soldiers set their general upon the regal throne. Good
warriors will fight courageously for their country. I will not delay, but quickly
ask. ‘The laws will care for the general welfare (gen.). The flowers smell
(perf:) beautifully. The youths smelt of perfume. ‘The citizens will not think,
that (acc. w. inf.) the enemies have already fled. Iwill go. The evil-doers will
have to suffer (will owe) a great punishment. The bird will fly away. I shall
rejoice to be honored (being honored) by the good. The soldiers have given
the general a share of the booty.

§ 126. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different Roots, and
which are classed together only in respect to Signification.

1. wigéw, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Fut. aiggow; Perf. qoy-
za; Aor. (from EA) eihov, éleiv; Aor. Pass. joédyv; Fut. Pass.
aigedjoouot (§ 98, Rem.) ; Mid. to choose, Fut. aieyoouas; Aor.
sidduny ; verbal adjective, aigetds, -réog.—Aug., § 87, 3.

2. geyouut, to go, to come (the remaining modes and participials
are borrowed from ius [§ 187]; thus Zoyomon, too, (94, ievect, 600”) ;
Impf. 7oyou7v, commonly ze or ja, Opt. tow; Fut. equ, I shall
go (y&o, I shall come) ;—(EAEYO-) Perf. 2djliGa; Aor. 4-907,
Bo, Go, Ee, “LG civ, ELGwv; verbal adjective, éhevoreor.

3. éodio, to eat, impf. yoduwr; Fut. 2ouer; Perf. sdjdox0;
(DAT-) Aor. tqpayor, paysiv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éd7decpon ;
Aor. Pass. 76¢697y»; verbal adjective, édsozée.

4. ogaw, to see, Impf. éwomy; Perf. éwedua (Aug., § 87, 6);
(IA-) Aor. sidov, 160, tout, id¢, ideiv, (Sav. On the second Perf.
oida, I know, see § 148. (OIT- -) Fut. woos (second Pers. ower,
§ 82, 2); Mid. or Pass. OQGD [LOL 5 Perf. Mid. or Pass. éwpamas or
CU pLeel, COW eit, ete.; Inf. cop Feet ; Aor. Mid. eiddugr, idéo8at, Sov
(and with the meaning ecce, (Sov), as a simple, only poetic; Aor.
Pass. agyor?, oponves; Fut. opdyoouat; verbal adjective, ogazog
and onr0s.

5. zoeya, to run, (APEM-) Fut. deapovuor; Aor. Bocpor;
Perf. dedoaunxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dedocunuce.

6. géoo, to bear, (OI-) Fut. oicw ;—(EI-K-) Aor. yveyxov (rarer
qveyne), Opt. évéyxouut, -Ete(v), etc. (rarer -cuut, etc.) ; Inf. éveyxeir,
Part. éveynov, Imp. éveyze, -érw, etc.; CENEK-) Perf. évipoya;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. EVUVEY LCL -yScut, -yxtat or évyventar; Aor. Mid.
mvey acum, Eveynal, -acP at, CHEV 0G 5 Aor. Pass. qvéyOnv; Fut. ee
Oyoowar; verbal adjective, oiczes, olgréog —Mid.

7. gyut (§ 185, 8), to say, Impf. épyy with the meaning of the
Aor., also gavat and gas; (EII-) first Aor. siza, sinas, eimate,

§ 126.] VERBS.—TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. 147

Imp. efzov, sia, Inf. eizar; second Aor. sizor, eine, etmoust, eine
(compound zodeize), eizeiv, einov. From the Epic Pres. ego, come
Fut. ¢e@; Perf. sioyxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. signuor; Fut. Perf.
eloyoouat. From PE- Aor. Pass. 266797, Oj O7jva, OyOeis; Fut.
Pass. 6yP7coucer; verbal adjective, 6yz0¢, gyté0g.—Mid. only in
compounds, Fut. azepovuae and first Aor. ameinacdat, to deny, to
despair, like aneuzsiv.

LXIUI. Vocabulary.

"Ayavaxtéw, to be dis-
pleased, or indignant.

dva-Kpaco, to cry out.

atpekéwe, exactly, surely.

Bpadic, -eia, -v, slow.

yiav’, Attic yhavs, -Koc,
7, an owl.

detdw, to fear; perf. dé-
dotxa has a present mean-
ing.

daua, -aToc, TO, a house.

EvOTVLOY, -OV, TO, a dream,
a vision.

Kat Bpadvc evBovaoc eihre' raydv avdpa dtoxar.

é&-evteiv, to speak or say
out, utter. [ly.

éppupévoc, strongly, firm-

evBovioc, -ov, one who
consults well, clever,
sagacious.

Avréw, to distress. [dious,

peakpoc, -d, -6v, long, te-

LAT, not yet.

opyilouat (w. pass. aor.),
to be angry.

TapakaTadyHKy, -7C. 7, a
thing deposited, a pledge.

KAEa OTpaTHycv EihovTo év TH Ileporn@ rohéuw.

dipa 7AG Ev.

- "Hy av ~ EA / ) a4 \ x ord Looe
fotpav EAC, TaVTHY bépe Kal fy CYaVaKTEL.

TAPA-TpEXW, w. acc., to run
by, or past.

Tapa-gépa, to carry by or
past.

Tépac, -aTo¢, TO, the end,
a limit.

Tepl-opdw, to overlook,
neglect.

™po-épxoat, to go before.

TTaipw, to sneeze.

peta, -aToc, TO, a stream.

ogodpa, very, violently,
very much.
Oi ’AUnvaiot Cemioro-

"Odvocede cic "Ardov péya

Avrot-

pew’, Gv TTapy Tig’ Gv Eimy KaKGe, Opyloucba: Gv idy tic évirviov, odddpa
poBotpeta> cv yAadg dvaxpayy, dedoixauev. My xioteve Taytora, piv atpe-
Kéoc mépac éwet. Mertping daye. Oddd-elc “Ounpov €ipyke paxpov. “Oc-
Tig Aoyoug, @¢ TapaxaTad7Kyy, AaBov éELeimerv, ddiKdc ect, dyav aKparhe.
My totTo BAe ye, ef vewTepog Aéyw, GAN ei dpovodbvTwv Todc Aédyove avdpir
ép6. Tévter petpiwc trode dxotavortac didovcg: ob yap TeGrvAKaciy, dAAG Ty
GiTiy O00v, yv maow EAGEtv éor avayxn, TPOEAHRADVAGLY. Hévove
mévntag wy Tapadpapunc ida». Torapdc tig nat fpetpa Biaréy zor 6
aidv: apate yoo OGG Kal TapEevAveKTae kal add Tapagépetat, TS Oz
évexdnoetar. "Eveyke Abrny kal BAGBnY eMpopévac.
év Kakoic uy Teplrione.

Pihov dv dpym
Myre péyav ei aye, mpiv Tedevtqoav7’ Loge.

_ The enemies have taken the town. Themistocles was chosen general by the
Athenians. Come, {aor.) O friend, and see (aor.) the unhappy man. If thou
art hungry (being hungry), thou wilt eat with relish (7déwc). The boy has
eaten. ‘The provisions are {i. e. have been) eaten. I have seen the unhappy
{man). The enemies were seen (aor.). If thou seest- thy poor friends (part.
cor.), thou wilt not run past them. The boy has run very fast. The grief was
borne (aor.) by the father with firmness. What has teen said to thee by thy
friend 2

~~

' the Aor. is translated by is accustomed. insteai of aAAo dé.

148 VERBS IN -pt.—CONJUGATION.—DIrIsion _ [§$ 127, 128.

VERBS IN -fl.

$127. Conjugation of Verbs in -me.

1. The principal peculiarity of verbs in - is, that, n the Pres.
and Impf., and also in the second Aor. Act. and Mid. of several
verbs, they take personal-endings different from those in -w, and
have no mode-vowel in the Ind. of these tenses. The formation of
‘all the other tenses of these verbs is like that of verbs in -w, with a
few exceptions.

2. Several verbs in -ws, which have a monosyllabic stem, in the
Pres. and Impf. take a reduplication ($ 123), which consists in re-
peating the first consonant of the stem with t, when the stem begins
with a simple consonant or with a mute and liquid; but, when the
stem begins with oz, zz, or with an aspirated vowel, « with the rough
Breathing is placed before the stem. There are only a few verbs
of this kind; e. g.

AO- 0i-dw-1ut, to give, XPA- Ki-ypy-t, to lend,
ZT A- i-orn-1, to place, ‘E- i-n-jut, to send.

§ 128. Division of Verbs in -pt.

Verbs in -ys are divided into two principal classes : :
I. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. The
stem of verbs of this class ends,

(a) in @, e. g. t-oT7-p1, to station, Stem 2TA-
(b) “ e, “ 7t-bn-1, to place, <'. OL-
(c) “0, “ di-dw-wt, to give, Oe
(d) 1, |. eh, 0-90, aa

(e) “ o, “ eiui, instead of éopi, tobe, “ *EX-.

II. Such as annex to their stems the syllable »v or »v, and then
append to this syllable the personal-endings. ‘The stem of verbs
this class ends, |

A. In one of the four vowels, a, &, t, 0, and assumes vyv,

(a) in a e. g. oxedd-vvb-uL, to scatter, Stem XKEAA-
(b) “ “ Kopé-vvo-pl, to satisfy, “ KOPE-

reyes ‘ only 7i-vvd-j1, to atone, Con ie

(d) “ 0, e. g. oTp@-vvi-p1, to spread out, “ ZTPO-.

B. Ina consonant, and assumes vv,

(a) in a mute, e. g. deix-vi-wt, to show, San AEIK-
(b) “ liquid, oe OM-Vd-UL, to swear, oo” 20M

Remarks. Of this second class, only the verb ofé-vyv-y, to quench, from
stern XBE-, forms a second Aor., viz. éo37v.

§§ 129, 130.] VERBS IN -~1.—MODE-VOWELS.—ENDINGS. 149

§ 129. Mode-vowels.

1. The Ind. Pres., Impf. and second Aor. do not take the mode-
vowel, and heice the personal-endings are annexed to the verb-
stem; e. g.

4

b-oTa-pev é-7i-Ve-pev é-00-pev
i-o7a- peta é-71-0 é-ueba é-66- peta.

2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels w and y, like verbs in -w, but
these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel; hence the fol-
lowing deviations from the verbs in -w, in respect to contraction, are
to be noted, namely,

én and ay coalesce into 7 and 7 (not, as in contracts in -dw, into & and @),

6m coalesces into @ (not, as in contracts in -éa, into ot); e. g.

i-oTd-w = i-oTé i-oTa-n¢ = i-orij¢ i-oTG--Tal = i-oT-TaL
oTd-W = oTd oTa-n¢ = oTTC

Ti-Sé-w = Ti-3O Ti-Sé-no = TL-37C Ti-3é-W-pal = T1-36-wat

01-66-W = 01-00 6-00-n¢ == 0t-06¢ 0t-00-7 = 0-00.

Rem. 1. This form of the Subj. of tornuc and tidnut is like the Subj. of the
two Aorists Pass. of all verbs; e. g. TudUG, -7c, -7, etc., TUT-G, -Fc, -7, from
Ton-Tw, oTa-VO, -7¢, -7, from torn.

Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -vye is like that of verbs in -va; e. g. deckviw,
~on¢, etc.

3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel z, which
is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms a diph-
thong; e. g.

Opt. Impf. A. i-ora-t-yv = i-orai-nv Aor. IL. A. orai-qv Impf. M. i-crai-pyv
Ti-Ge-l-nv = Ti-Sel-nv Vei-nv Te-Vel-unv
6t-00-t-yV = 61-doi-nv doi-nv 6.-doi-unv.

Rem. 3. The form of the Opt. of verbs in -e (ri9nut) is like the Opt. of the
sAorists Pass. of all verbs; e. g. ora-Sei-nv, Tud-Cei-qv, TuT-ei-nv.

Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -vyz, like the Subj. Pres., follcws the.
form in -0; e. g. decxvboupt.

§ 130. Personal-endings.

1. The personal-endings of the Act. are the following:
(a) Indicative Present,

Sing. 1. -l i-orn~l
2: -¢ t-oTN-¢
3. -ou(v) i-orn-o1(v)

Dual 2. [+ -tov l-oTd-Tov
3. -TOV -oTG-Tov

Plar. 1. ~pev i-ord-pev

r 2. -Té i-oTd-Te

3. [-vor(v)] (properly -yte) [i-ora-vre t-ora-vor(x}]

1s

150 VERBS IN -j1t. -PERSONAL-ENDINGS. ~ [§ 180.

The ending of the third Pers. Pl. -vo«(v) is changed into -dov(v), and then is
contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dialect
admits contraction only in the stems ending in a, thus:

from i-ora-vot is formed i-ordot (i-ora-dor)

“ 7i-Se-vot “ Ti-Seiot Att. ti-3é-aou
“© Oi-do-vot 2 dt-dovot “ §4-06-Got
‘¢ Oeik-vu-vot “ O€LK-VUCL ‘© Oetk-vb-Gol.

(b) The personal-endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Subj. do

not differ from those of verbs in -a.
(c) The following are endings of the Impf. and second Aor. Ind.

Sing. 1. | -» Impf. (-ory-v é-ri-Sy-v
2. | -c i-oTn-¢ é-Ti--¢
3. | - i-oTn é-ri-3n

Dual 2. | -Tov Aor. II. é-or7-rTov é-Je-Tov
3. | -THv &-OTH-THL &-Fé-THV

Plur. 1. | -yev &-OT]-LEV é-Ve-pev
Qo ih = FE &-OTI-TE é-e-Te
3. | -cav é-0TN-Oav é-Ge-cav,

So the Ind. of the two Aorists Pass. of all verbs is like the second Aor. éorg» ;
e. g. érin-nv, é-o7-Sny, -N¢, -N, -NTOV, -7TNV, -NWEV, -NTE, -NOAV.

(d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor.,
except in the first Pers. Sing., differ from those of the Opt. of the
historical tenses of verbs in -w, only in being preceded by 7; e. g.

orai-nv i-crai-nv Sei-nv ti-Gei-nv doi-nv 0t-dol-nv.

Rem. 1. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt., the 7 is commonly rejected, and the
ending of the third Pers. Pl. -yoav is regularly shortened into -ev; e.g.

iotai-nte = lotaite

Tiudel-nuev = Ti Eipev
Odoi-noav = dLooiev.

Tisel-noav = Tibeiev

The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs; e. g. rudvetnuev, Tvs

reinuey = TvgSeluev, Tureiwev (wholly like tvHeinv)—On the contrary, in the

Opt. second Aor. Act. of fornut, tidnut, Oidwut, the shortened forms are very
rare, except the third Pers. Plural.

(e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are:

Sing. 2. | -& (i-cra-81) (7i-Ge-9) (dt-do-8:)
Pro) (-oTa-TW TL-3€-TW 6t-06-TW
Dual 2. | -Tov (-cTa-Tov Ti-Se-Tov ' 6i-do-Tov
3. | -Tov [-oTG-Twv TL-Ué-TWOV 0t-06-TOV
Plur. 2. |. -te (-oTa-Te Ti-Se-TE 0i-do-Te
3. | -Twoav l-oTd-Twoav T1-Vé-TWOaV 0t-06-Twoav
or (-oTGVTWV TL-GEVTOVY 6t-OOVTOV.

Rem. 2. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. rejects the ending -, and as a
compensation lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, @ into 7, € into
€l, 0 into ov, v into 0,
ti-Se-S becomes Ti-Jet
Oeix-vi-3. “ deixvd.

i-ora-31 becomes f-oT7
i-do-G4 ‘ di-dov

The ending -? in the Pres. is retained only in a very few verbs. In the

§ 131.] VERBS IN -/l.—FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 151

second Aor. ¢f riSyyut, inut and didwyt, the ending -3: is softened into -¢, thus
Sé3t becomes Bec, &-I. = Ec, 66-9. = d6¢; but in the second Aor. of lornys,
the ending -%: is retained, thus or7-&:, also in the two Aorists Pass. of all verbs ;
e. g. TImN-91, TaldetSy7e (instead of zadeiOy-%, § 8, Rem. 8). In compounds
of o771, the ending -7% is often shortened into -@; e. g. mapaorTd, dnéoTa,
mpoBa, KaTaBda.

(f) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -yat. This
ending is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic-vowel ;
but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel, « being lengthen-
ed into 7, € into et, o into ov, thus,

Pres. i-cré-vat Ti-Gé-vat 61t-06-vat detk-vi-vat
Second Aor. o7f-vai Gei-va. dovvar.

The Inf. of Pass. Aorists of all verbs is like orf#var; e. g. TuTH vat, Boviev-
S7-VAL. :

(z) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. participle are -yz¢,
-yzo0, -vyt, which are joined to the characteristic-vowel according to
the common rule, thus,

i-ota-vt¢ = l-ordc, l-ordoa, i-orav oTdc, oTdoa, oTav
4 4 ~ 4 4 ~ Pa:

Ti-Sé-vT¢ = TI-Veic, -eica, -Ev Veic, Setoa, Sév

di-06-vtT¢ = 01-dobc, -otca, -6v dobc, -otca,. -Av

Oetk-vb-vT¢ = delk-vic, -toa, -tv.

The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like the Part. riBei¢
or Veic; e. g. TuT-ei¢, -eioa, -év, Bovdev’-eic, -eioa, -év.

2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs in
-, except that in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Ind., and
in the Imp., the personal-endings retain their full form, -cae and -oo,
almost throughout; see the Paradigms.

Rem. 3. The Sing. Impf. Act. of ri9nuc and didwut is generally formed from
TIOEQ and AIAOQ with the common contractions. In verbs in -éyz, the col-
lateral forms in -dw are usual for the entire Pres. and Impf., and exclusively
in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt.; e. g. évdecxviw, duviw, cvpptyviw, together
with évdcixvuut, duvet, ovupiyvope.

FORMATION OF THE TENSES.

§ 131. I. First Class of Verbs in -me.

1. In forming the tenses of the entire Act., as well as of the Fut.
and first Aor. Mid., the short characteristic-vowel is lengthened,
namely, « into 7, ¢ into 7 and (in the Perf. Act. of ziOqut and tye)
into <1, and o into #; but in the remaining tenses of the Mid., and
throughout the Pass., the short characteristic-vowel is retained, with
the exception of the Perf. and Plup. Mid, and Pass. of zi@ypu and

152 VERBS IN -/l.—TENSES AND PARADIGMS. —

[$ 181.

inut, where the x: of the Perf. Act. (zéJema, céGsyman, sina, elwat),

is retained.

2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of cnt, tnus and didcju, has x

for the characteristic of the tense, not o, thus:

é-37-K-@, W-K-0, &-OW-K-a.

The forms of the first Aor. Act. 2Oyxa, 7u« and édaxa, are, how-
ever, used only in the Ind., and, for the most part, only in the Sing. ;
in the other Numbers, as wellasin the other Modes and Participials,
the forms of the second Aor. are regularly used. Also the forms of
the second Aor. Mid. of idx, inut and did@pt, are used instead
of the first Aor.—On the contrary, the Sing. forms of the second
Aor. Ind. Act. of ciSyut, tnut and diéopt, namely, 2Onv, 7v, 2do7,
are not in use.

3. The verb ioznus forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like verbs
in -co, with the tense-characteristic o; e. g. &-o7y-G-, &-O77-6-GUnr.
The second Aor. Mid. éozauyy is not used. This tense is formed,
however, by some other verbs; e. g. éazauny, Emoueuyr.

Rem. 1. The second Aor. Pass. and the second Fut. Pass. are wanting in these

verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in toryyt, the Fut. Perf. of which is éornjge
(old Att.) and éorpSopau. °

§ 133. Paradigms of

~

ACTIVE.
g(gi3_
2 \3| 282 | 2TA-toplace.| OE-to put. | AO-to give. | AEIK- to show.
I =| (<3)
B |e |e
i {| j S.1. | Gorn-ue Ti-9-LL di-dw-pe deik-voje!
| 2. | i-oTn-¢ ti-3n-¢ 0i-dw-¢ Oeik-vi-¢
: 3. | t-oTH-ot(v) Ti-Sy-o1(v) di-dw-ou(v) deik-vd-ol{v)
$| D.1.
= 2. | i-oré-rov Ti-Se-TOv 6i-00-Tov Oeik-vd-Tov |
S 3. | i-oTG-Tov Ti-Se-Tov 6i-do-Tov Oeik-vd-TOv |
S| P. 1. | -ord-pev Ti-Ce-wev 0i-do-wev Oeik-v0-LEv |
2. | t-oTé-Te Ti-Ge-TE 0t-00-TE Oeik-vd-TE |
= 3. | -crd-o1(v) TL-8é-Go( | 0t-06-dol(v) | derk-vd-aer{y) |
8 (fromio7a-aor) and T- He by and di-dobou(v)| and deck-vior{y)}
g . 1, | i-o7d Ti-3O 01-00 Jelk-v0-w :
2. | l-or7-¢ TL-O7-¢ 01-00-¢ OElk-Vv-nC,
S 3. | l-or7 TL-O 7 0-00 ete.
‘$/-D. 1.
§ 2. | i-oTi-Tov TL-S7]-TOV 6t-06-Tov
=> 3. | (-oT7-Tov TL-07]-TOV 6t-0G-Tov- ’
®Q) P.l. | i-ord-vev Tl-VGi-wev 61-00-mev
2. | i-oTH-TEe TL-0H-TE Ol-00-Te
8. | i-ord-o1(v) | ri-8G-o1(v) | b1-56-ox(v)
' And deicvb-w, -e0¢, ete. especially desxvtover(v). Also Impf. édeixvioy,

§§ 152, 133.] VERBS IN -4t.—TENSES AND PARADIGMS. 153

Rem. 2. On the meaning of the verb /or7j, the following things are to be
noted: the Pres., Impf., Fut. and first Aor. Act. have a transitive meaning, to
place; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Perf. and Plup. Act., and the Fut.
Perf., have a reflexive or intransitive meaning, to place one’s self, to stand, namely,
éornv, I placed myself, or I stood, éornxa, I have placed myself, I stand, sto, éorn-
Kev, stabam, éornéw, éorngoua, stabo (adeotygw, I shall withdraw). The Mid.
denotes either to place for one’s self, to stand, consistere, or to let one’s self be placed,
i. e. to be placed.

§ 132. Il. Second Class of Verbs in -ue.

There is no difficulty in forming the tenses of verbs of the second
class ($128). All the tenses are*formed from the stem, after the re-
jection of the ending -»vime or -vvut. Verbs in -o, which in the
Pres. have lengthened the o into w, retain the w through all the
tenses; e.g. ozp0)-r90-ml, Cod-r90-wl, 60-VPU-l, YO-vvd-yL, Fut. ozew-
ow, etc.—But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, take, in forming
some of the tenses, a Z'heme ending in a vowel; e. g. 6u-vv-mt, Aor.
ap-o-cae, from “OMO. The second Aor. and the second Fut.
Pass. occur only in a few verbs; e. g. Cevy-vv-ut, second Aor. Pass.
éCvyyv ; second Fut. Pass. Gvyjoouct.

Verbs in -pt.

MIDDLE.

2TA- to place. OE- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show.
i-oTd-uat Ti-Ve-.al 0i-d0-uaL Oeik-vi-wat
i-oTd-oat Ti-Se-catand Ti-0y| di-do-cat Oeik-v0-oat
l-oTG-TaL Ti-Se-Tat Oi-do-Tat Oeik-v0-Tat
i-ord-peGov TL-0E-peGov 61-00-weSov Oetk-vi-weFov
t-ora-oSov Ti-Se-o Sov 6i-do-cSov Ocix-vv-oov
i-oTa-oVov Ti-Oe-cov Ji-do-cBov deix-vv-o8ov
i-oru-peCa Ti-0€-wESa 61-06-peda detk-vt-weda
t-oTa-o8e Ti-Ge-ote 0i-do-o%e Oeik-vu-oe
i-oTa-vTaL Ti-Ce-vT at 0i-0o-vTat Oeik-vv-vTat
i-oTG-yat TL-OG-Uat 6t-00)-uat Oeltk-v0-wuat
b-or7 T1-OF 61-00 detk-vi-7,
-oTH-TAL Tl-07-Tat 0t-0@-TaL ete.
i-oro-wedov Tt-00-wetov 6t-06-wedov
l-or7j-cov Tl-37-o0- ov 01-00-o0ov
b-or7-cSov TL-07-08-0v 61-06-aFov
i-ord-pea Ti-Va-weta 6-00-weta
l-or7-oSe Tt-U 7-0 6t-66-0€
b-orG-vTat « TL-OG-VTAL 61-00-vTat

~ve¢, -ve(v), and the Particip'e usually decxvt-wy, -odca, -ov, § 130, Rem. 8.

154

[§ 138

PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -ul.

ACTIVE.
= Z ~
giagisie
g|3 @=2 | ZTA-toplace.| OE- to put. | AO- to give. | AEIK- to show.
= o
H |= Zz |
S. 2. | orn Ti-Get di-dov Oelk-vo |
: (from tora) | (from rited:)| (from didot)| (from detxvide)
5 3. | -oTd-Tw TL-8E-TW 61-06-Tw O€lk-Vb-TW
s D. 9. | i-o7d-Tov Ti-Ge-Tov 0i-00-ToOv Oeik-vd-Tov
] 8. 8. | (-oTa-Twv TL-GE-TWV 6t-00-TwV O€lK-V0-TOV
S| x8 | P. 2. | é-ord-re Ti-Ge-Te 0i-d0-Te Ocix-vi-re
& 83. | i-ord-Twcav | Ti-Sé-Twoav | d1-d6-Twoayv | detk-vib-Twcav
et i-oravtwv | etTi-Sévtwry | et dl-ddvT@r | et detk-vivTwr
Infin. | i-ora-vat 7l-Bé-vae 0t-006-val Oelk-vi-vat
-oT dc, doa, tv | Ti-Veic,cica,év|0L-do0bc,odca,6v| OELk-vi¢, doa, by
Part. 7 7 4 4
G. avtoc G. évToc G. 6vToc G. dvToc
S. 1. | i-orn-v é-Ti-Sovv é-0l-dovv &-Oeik-vov
2. | i-orn-¢ é-ri-Beue é-0i-doue é-deik-vi¢
: 3. | i-oTn é-Ti-Ger é-0i-dov é-Oeik-vd
pS)
oe ge ae ©
= 2, | t-ord-Tov é-Ti-Ve-Tov é-0i-00-Tov é-Oeik-v0-Tov
3 3. | (-oTd-Tyv é-Tl-8é-Tyv | &-d1-00-TyV &-Oelk-vb-THY
S| RP. 1. | é-ord-pev é-ti-Ge-uev | &-di-do-wev _| é-deik-vi-wev
= 2. | i-oTd-TeE é-Ti-Ve-TE é-0i-00-TE é-Oeik-vv-Te
$ 3. | i-oTd-cav é-Ti-Ve-cav é-0i-00-cav é-Oelk-Vv-oav
> 8. 1. | (-orai-nv Ti-Gel-nv 6t-00t-nv Oelk-Vd-oLe
Ss 2. | i-orai-n¢ Ti-Gei-n¢ 1-doi-n¢ O€lK-VU-OLC,
3. | (-orai-74 Tl-GEl-7 O1-dol-7 ete.
5s)
=| D.1
8 2, | i-orai-rov! Ti-V-ei-Tov! 6t-doi-Tov!
> 38. | i-orai-rTyVv T= el-THV 0t-Ooi-THv
P. 1. | (-orai-uev Tl-Cei-wev 0i-Ool-wev
2. | i-orai-Te Ti-8 €i-TE 0l-doi-TE
3. | l-cTai-ev T1-Oei-ev 0t-doi-ev
S. 1. | é-or7-v, I (é-07-v) ( A.I.|(é-do-v) € ALL
2. | é-orn-¢ [ stood, |(é-G7-¢) 2 used|(é-dw-c¢) 4 used
3 3, | é-0TN (é-07) €forit|\(é-dw) € forit
-8| D. 1.
3 2.\éoTn-Tov | é-e-Tov é-00-Tov
= 3.|é-oTHn-THv | &-é-THV &-06-THV
S| P.l.|éorn-pev | &-Se-vev é-do-ev
~ 2. | é-OT H-TE é-Ve-Te E-00-TE
i: 8.|éorTn-cav | &-e-cav é-do-cav
3B —__—_,__—— : =
BS S. 1. oTa” Gar 00?
x D4. SFC O7-¢ 06-¢
g 3: OTH oR 0o
> : é ’ ‘
$1 D. 1.
S 2.| o7ri-Tov Vij-Tov 0@-TOV
> 3.| OTH-TOV Fij-TOv O@-TOV
Mm) P.l. OTO-LeEVv OG-wev 00-nev
2. OTHTE OI-TE 00-TE
3.| o7d-o1(v) $6-o1(v) 66-o1(v)

1 See § 180, Rem. 1.
? The compounds, e. g. dTOOTH, ExvG, dad, have the same aceentuation
as the simples, e. g. aa s3TGot, éxbiTov, dradauer.

§ 183.]

PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -.

155

STA- to place.

i-oTd-oo and
i-oTw

l-ora-oSw

i-ota-oVov

l-ora-cS wv

i-cra-otte

l-ora-oSwoav and
i-ora-oSwv

=-

i-ora-o0-ar
i-oTd-pevoc, 4, ov

i-oré-unv
i-oTd-oo and i-orw
i-oTd-To
i-ori-yeSov
t-ora-oov
l-ora-o3 nv
i-oTé-weda
i-ora-ote
i-oTa-vTo
i-orai-unv®
l-orai-o
i-orai-To
i-orai-peSov
i-orai-cSov
i-orai-oSnv
i-orai-ueSa
i-oTai-oe
i-oTai-v70
(é-ora-unv does
not occur, but
&-TTG-UNv
é-™pla-unv)

(o7G-war does not
occur, but tplo-
Hal, -%, -7TAL,
etc.)

2 On the accentuation in é7ioravo, etc., see § 134, 1.

MIDDLE.
OE- to put. AO- to give.

Ti-Ge-co and di-do-co and

Ti-3ov di-dov
T1-3é-0 Fw 61-00-00
Ti-Ve-oov di-do-aSov
ti-Gé-oS wv 0t-06-03av
Ti-Ge-ot_e di-d0-o9e
ri-0é-c3wcav and| 6t-06-cS cay and

TL-Gé-oS wv 0t-06-03wv
ti-Ge-oFat di-d0-oFat

Tt-GE-WEvoc, N, OV

é-71-Gé-unv [ou
é-Ti-V e-co and é-Ti-
é-Ti-Ge-To

é-T1-3 €-weSov
é-Ti-be-otov
é-T0-Gé-o Sv
é-71-Vé-neta
é-Ti-Ve-ote
é-Ti-Ve-vTo
Tt-Vol-unv4
TL-Soi-o
Tl-Soi-To
TL-Goi-nwetov
ti-Soi-o-ov
TL-Soi-ob nv
Ti-Soi-weta
Tli-Voi-o_
Tl-oi-vTO
é-0é-unv
é-Sou(from éfeco)
é-Ve-To
é-Gé-wedov
é-Ve-oVov
é-3é-c0 nv
é-Vé-peta
é-Ve-ote
é-3-e-vTO
F-par?
rr]
S7j-T AL
Ca-weGor
O7-oSov
Vi-oSov
Go-peta
Oi-oFe

36-vTat

0t-00-wEevoc, n, ov

é-0-00-unv | dov
é-i-do-oo and é-di-
é-0i-do-T0

é-0t-00-wedov
é-di-do-oov
é-0t-00-o8- nv
é-dt-06-weba
é-0l-00-oe
é-0l-d0-vTO
6t-doi-unv*
dt-00i-0
0t-doi-To
61-doi-peGov
0t-dot-oSov
0t-0ot-oS nv
6t-doi-pea
0t-dol-oe
6t-dol-vTo
é-00-uny
é-dov (from édoco)
é-do-To
é-00-ueSov
é-do-oVov
2-06-08 nv
é-06-ueSa
é-do-oe
é-00-VTO

60-ueSov
60-oSov
60-cS ov
60-neba
00-oE

60-vTat

detk-vi-oipnv

AEIK- to show.

Oe-K-vi-co

detk-vbt-o8w
Oeix-vv-cSov
detk-vb-oFwv
Oeix-vv-oGe
detk-vb-oSwoav

and detk-vt-oSuv

Oeik-vv-oFat

Oelk-vi-MEVOC, 7,

ov
é-detk-vi-uqv
é-0eik-vd-co
> 4 ~
é-delk-vd-TO
é-Oetk-vb-weSov
é-deix-vv-oSov
é-etk-vb-o8 nv
é-detk-Vvd-neda
> 7
é-deik-vv-oGe
é-O€LK-VU-VTO

Oetk-vi-010,
ete.

wanting.

4 See § 184, 2.

® Also in composition, év dua, -7, -7TaL, etc. droSGuat, -F, -7T al, ete, &Kedd-
ual, -O, -OTal, ete., dTodGat, -O, -rat, ete.

156

XT A- io place.

Tenses.
Modes.
Numbers
and
Persons

PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fl.—-REMARKS.

ACTIVE.

OE- to put.

AO- to give.

[§ 134.

AEIK- to show.

S.1.] orai-nv Vei-nv dot-nv
2.| orai-n¢ Vei-n¢ doi-n¢
q 3.| oTai-n Gei-7 dol-7
S| D.1.
iS 2.| orai-ntov! Vei-nrov} dol-nrov'
& 3. | oTal-ATHVv GEl-THV Ool-AT Hv
P.l.| orai-nuev Sel-npLEv Oot-njwev
2.) oTai-yTe GeEt-nTE Oci-nTe
ee 3.| orai-ev Vei-ev doi-ev
3 She Gt ge Séc (GEIL)3 | dd¢ (dd8x)
Sh. <3 3.| oT] -TO Vé-TW 00-T@
N 21 D.2.| ot-Tov Gé-TOV 06-Tov
. 3.| OTH-TOY Sé-TWV 06-Twy
| P. 2. OTH -TE Ué-TE 06-TE
SS 8.| of%7-Twoav| VGé-TwOoaV 00-Twoav
andoravtworv| andévtwv| and ddvTwy
Inf. OTH-Vat VEi-vat dov-vat

rf

Part. oTdc, Goa, év| Veic,cioa,év| dovc,ovcoa,ov
Gen.orévroc| Gen. Gévtoc| Gen. dévtoc
Future. OTi-oW Vn-ow 60-08 deifa
Aorist I. é-oTnoa, I é-0-7-Ka é-dW-Ka é-derta
| placed. Instead of these forms, the second
’ | Aor. is used in the Dual and PI.
Ind. and in the other Modes and
Participials, § 131, 2.
Perfect. é-orT7-ka,4 sto | Té-Ser-ka | dé-dw-ka €é-derya
Pluperfect. | é-or7j-xeww and| é-te- & € i-xecv| &-de- 0 © -Kev | é-de-detyerv
' lel-orH-Kelv
Fut. Perf. |\é-ornSwoldAtt.|. wanting. wanting. wanting.
PAS
Aorist I. | é-ora-Gnv =| &-ré-8-nrv® | é-d6-S7v | é-dety-Snv |

1 See § 130, Rem.1. In composition, tapaornSi, mapaorad; anoorn dt,
aréord, § 130, Rem. 2. 7 In composition, repitec, vtec; ambdoc, éxdog ;
mepidete, Exdore, § 84, Rem. 2. 4 See § 134, 3. © érédnv and redjooua

§ 134. Remarks on the Paradigms.

1. The verbs dtdvapat, to be able, Exiotapmat, to know, kpépapct, to
hang, and tpiac%at, to buy, have a different accentuation from éorayat, in the
Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., namely, Subj. déveuat, érxiotrwpat, -n, -nrat, -nodov
-yoe, -wvtat; Opt. dvvaiunr, émioraiunv, -ato, -atTo, -atoSov, -atoSe, -avTo;
B80 also Ovaipny, -ato, -aito (§ 135).

2. The forms of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor. Mid. with -oz, viz. reSoiuny,
¥Yoiunv, are more common than those with -e, viz. riety, -cio, -eiTo, etc,
Veiunv, -cio, -eiro, etc. In compounds the accent remains as in simples, thus,

§ 134. ] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/Wt.—REMARKS. 157

MIDDLE.

XTA- to place. OE- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show.

(orai-unvdoesnot| vol-u7nv® dot-unv®

occur, but mpai-| Voi-o doi-o

HNY, -alo, -aiTo,| oi-To doi-To

etc.) Foi-ueSov doi-ueov
Goi-cSov doi-otov
Soi-oFnv doi-oFnv
Soi-ueta doi-ueta
Yoi-ote doi-cS_
Goi-vto d0i-vT0

(cTa-co or cra} ov (%éao)? dod (doco)?

does not occur,| té-c0w 66-08

but zpia-co or| é-otov 06-cGov

Tplo) Gé-cBov 66-oS wv
Gé-oF_e d6-c0_e
%é-cSwcav and | 06-c3wcay and

Gé-oFov 06-03 wv

“(ora-c8at) mpiac.| 8é-oFa
(cTa-yevoc) mpia-| Vé-wevoc, -7,-0v | dd-wEvoE, -7, -ov

ns epee che,

06-08 at

pevog
OTh-copal S7-couat d@-couat detfouat
é-oTN-oGunv (é-07-Ka-u7v ) (é-dw-Ka-y7v) é-derSaunv
Instead of these forms, the second Aor. Mid.
is used by the Attic writers, § 131, 2.

E-oTad-pat Té- 8 € b -yat 6é-do-uwar 6é-devy-wat
é-oTG-unv é-Te- 0 et -unv é-de-00-unv é-de-Oely-uqv
é-o7nfopat wanting. wanting. wanting.

OR oe
Ss I V E s

| Fut. I. | ord-Syoouar | re-Spooua® | do-S7jcopuat | dewy-Snoopat

instead of 20é0nv and SeSjoowa (§ 8,10). ® See § 134,2. 7 In composi-
tion, xatavov, arodou; wepidov, drddov; catadeote, repidoove ; évbeo¥e,
mpddoave ; but évbod, eicSod ; mpodod, évdod (§ 84, Rem. 2).

évboiuny (évdeiunv), évboto (évGeio), etc. The same is true of compounds of
doiuny, e. g. dtadoiuny, diadoio, etc.

8. The Perf. and Plup. gornxa, éorjxetv (not eiorjxerv), form the Dual and
Pl. immediately from the stem, viz. Perf. é-crd-rov, &-o7d-uev, -oTd-Te, é-oTG-
ou(v); Plup. @-crd-rov, -arnyv, &-ord-yev, &-ord-te, &-crd-cav; instead of éorTn-
xévat, éotivat is regularly used. The Part. is éoré¢, -Goa, -d¢, Gen. -Grog,
-on¢, also éornKac, -via, -6c, Gen. -6T0¢, -viac. °

4, The forms of the Impf. éritouy, -exc, -et, Edidovy, -ovc, -ov, are constructed
according to the conjugation in -éw and -6a. Tke other forms, éridyy, -g¢, -9,
édidwy, -we, -w, are not used (§ 130, Rem. 3).

14

158

*Anp, -éo0¢, 6, 77, the air.
iviornt, to set up, raise,
awaken; mid., to raise
oneself, stand up, rise
up. |
‘dvtl-TatTa, to set oppo-
site; mid., to set oneself
against, oppose.
aro-o7daw, to draw away.
a7o-oTpéGa, to turn away.
avoc, -7, -ov, Attic avoc,
-ov, dry, thirsty.
agiornut, to put away,
turn off, cause to re-
volt ; 2 aor., to fall away,

VERBS IN -ke.

LXIII. Vocabulary.

revolt; mzd., to go or
stand apart.

OvioTnut, to place apart,
separate, sever.

évioTnul, to put into;
perf., to be present.

é-op0ow,to make straight,
erect, set up, restore.

qvioxoc, -ov, 6, & Yrein-
holder, guide.

Guoia, -ac, 7, a sacrifice.

ioTnut, to place, make to
stand.

KkaSioTnut, to lay down,

‘H roAvdtAia dtiornot Kat Gnoome Kat arooTpédet.

evvouy vouiler Tov Sedv Kadioravat, dpévac Kovdac Exe.
Spwrat Toic dpviow elwv éAebSepov, mayidac Kal vedéhac ioravTec.
un To Képdog oe THe OLKaLoobYAC adLoTH.

[§ 184.

establish, appoint, to
“render, to make.
Aiwvn, -ne, 7, &@ marsh, a
pond, a lake.
Ao1udc, -ov, 0, a plague, a
pestilence.
vedédn, -n¢, 7, a Cloud, a
net for birds.
mapioTnul, to place be-
side, to help.
77, where? whither ?
ToAELéw, w. dat., to carry
on war.
ToAvolAia, -ac, 7, & mul-
titude of friends.
Ei tic Guoiav rpochépwov
Oidé Tov dépa of avs
OvAarrov,

"Ev 7 TleAorovvgo.akd roAéu sic

dvnp, 6 ILepixage, &ap0ov tiv mwoAtv Kat aviorn Kal avteTatteto Kal TO Aoiu@
kal TG rokéuw. My ddiorn tode véove tic ext THY dpetHy ddod.' OzeproroKARe
Aéyetae eiveiv, Oc TS MiATiadov Tpéraoy abrov éx TOv bxvey aviotain. Tay-
Tahoc év TH Aiuvy adog eiorHKket. Td wey Tod xpbvov yeyovdc,? Td dé éveoTo¢
éott, TO 0& wéddov. Ok Kopivdior roAAode cvppayoug anéotnoay and THY ’ASH-
vaiwv. Ol Nagtor amd tdv ’ASyvaiwyv aréotnoav. Tlapadora toic aruxéoy.
Tl7 ori? ; 17H BG*; Ol ’ADnvaiot toig Nagiowg drootadoww am’ abtayv érodéun-
cav. Ilapactainre toi¢ atruyéow. Aédyoc diecnapdn, Tode ovppayoue ard THE
ToAEwe GxooTAval. ‘Hvioyov yvapunv ornoetc aplorny.

Sportsmen place snares and nets for the birds. The bad seek to sever the
friendship of the good. The trophies of Miltiades woke Themistocles from his
sleep. Let us not turn away youths from the way to virtue. Do not sever (pi.)
’ the friendship of the good. ‘The citizens were afraid, that the enemies would
make their allies revolt from them. ‘The bad rejoice, if they sever (part.) the
friendship of the good. Tantalus stands thirsty in the lake. The wise man
takes care not only for (gen.) the present, but also for the future. The soldiers
raised (aor.) a trophy over (xara, w. gen.) the enemies. The Naxians sought to
revolt from the Athenians. Assist (stand by) the unfortunate. Where shall we
stand? where shall we go? ‘Thou shouldst assist the unfortunate. The sol-
diers will raise a trophy over the enemies. .

LXIV. Vocabulary.
"AxporoAle, -ewc, 7, a cit- GAAOTPLOS, -a, -ov, anoth- dva-tidnu, to put up,
adel. er’s, foreign. offer.

1 § 157. 2 § 123. 3 § 153, 1. b, (a), (3). 4§119, 1. and § 142.

§ 184.]

apyaréoc, -d, -ov, heavy,
troublesome, burden-
some.

dvadnua, -aTo¢, 76, a head-
band, a diadem.

dvagvopa, -dc, 7, a differ-
ence, a quarrel, enmity.

VERBS IN -ut.

i. e. w staff of the Bac-
chantes, wound round
with ivy and vine leaves.
KLTTOC, -0v, 6, ivy.
peta-Tidnut, to change,
alter, remove.
pLpéouat, w.acc., to imitate.

évy-ridnut, to put in, instil. mepi-ridnu, to put or set

159

mpoc-TiInu, to add.
mpo-ridnul, to set before,
lay out (for view), set
forth. | tre.
OKITTPOV, -ov, TO, a Scep-
TiSnut, to place, arrange,
propose as a prize, give,
make; mid., place for

Vipooc, -ov, 6,a Thyrsus, round. oneself, take.

T6 kale rootyts Sede moAAa ayaba TiSynow. ‘O TlAotto¢ rodAaKie peta-
TiSnot TOV THY avEparwyv Tpdroy. TloAAaKic of dvSpwrot Toic idiowe Kakotc
aAAOorpta mpocTiBéactv. ic 7d BéAtiov rivet 76 péAdov. ’Avtiyovog Arévucov
TATA éuimetto, Kal KITTOV pév TepLTLOEle TH KEdadq dvTi diadHuatog Makedo-
vikov, Sipoov dé avti oxAnTpov dépwrv. Oi codiotai THY dpetHv rpoeTiGecay.
"EvtidGpev toi¢ véowe tHe cogiag épwra. ‘H tiyn ravta av petatiGein. Ob
pdoor tiv dbotv peratiSévar. TloAAaKic doxotvtec Soe Kaxbv éoSAdv E¥e-
ev, kat dokobvtec éoS Adv ESepev Kaxdv. Td dragopdc petadauev. *Apyadréov
yinpas édnke Sedo. "ASnvaior YaAKjv wonoauevor A€éatvav év rbAaLe THe aKpo-
TOhewc avéVeoav. ‘Pdov' & dyaSod Veivar xakév, 7 éx xaxod éoSAdv. Tod Ka-
Koy ovdeic ypyotov av Sein. Metadtete tac diadopac. Avkoipyor tov Sévra
Aaxedatpoviorg vouove, wahtora Savpavouev. ‘O rédeuoc mavta petatéSerker.
Tipo ti¢ dpeting Veot idpGra éecav.

To those who do well the gods give (= place) many good things. We often
add others’ ills to our own. We often see riches change (changing) ,the char-
acter of men. The war has changed everything. God gave (placed, aor.) to
men many good things. The war will change everything. Who would give
(place, opt. aor. w. av) laws to foolish men? It is not easy to change (aor.) na-
ture. The gods made (=rendered, placed) age burdensome. The bad we
cannot easily make good (opt. aor. w. dv). The general should instil (pres. or
aor.) courage into the soldiers. May riches never change (pres. or aor.) thy
character! We will instil (aor.) into the youths a love for virtue (gen.).

LXV. Vocabulary.

*Arro-didaut, to give back, Kévtpov, -ov, TO, a sting, mayxKdxoc, -ov, thoroughly

repay; mid., to sell. a goad. bad.
didwyt, to give, grant. paxap, -apoc, happy, bless- waAcv, again, on the con
éuredoc, -ov, firm, sure, ed. trary.

lasting. HEALTT, -N¢, 7, & bee. m™po-didwut, prodo, to be-
évl-Aavbavopat, to forget. peta-vidwut Tlvi TLvoc, to tray.

eb0ic and etd, imme-
diately.

Oi Seot ravta bidddolv.
uéuvnoo,* Kal dove értAavod.
Beoi, dote wot OABov Kal ddgav ayadyy Eye.

give any one a share of

anything.

Tvvarki? dpyetv ob didwow 7 dooce.
AaBav arédoc, Kal Anpy*® radu.
‘O rAodroc, bv av ddct Feoi,

xprse, w. gen. to be in
want.

Xap AaBor3
"Q paxapec

1 See § 52, 10.

2 § 47, 2.

3 § 191, 12.

4§ 129, 11.

[§ 184,

"A 7 dbo déduxke, Tad’ Exer pova 6 GvBparoc. ‘H dvorg tab-
pot édwke Képac,' Kévtpa pedirrate. | "Qv? cot Sedc Edwke, TOUTY YpACovor di-
dov. *EoGAG avdpt Kai éoAd didwo Sedc. UrayG ebdd¢ didov. Kpnyara
dainwr kat mayxaxy avdpi didworr, apeTig 0 odAtyoug avdpaox poip’ Ererat.
Oedc por doin didove mioTovc. Toi¢ mAovoiowg mpémet Toig TTwxoIc dodvar. Ol
oTpatiotar Ty mbALy Toig ToAEuiote Tpoddidocav. ‘O ayavoc¢ yaipet Toi¢ Té-

160 VERBS IN -wl.

éurredog OTL.

yor xpnuatar® peTad.oote.

6 Vedc d1d6.
TLD.

Oi Seoi wow avTi kakov ayaa didoiev.

Agi rode ayadodc avdpag yevvaing dépety, 6 TL Gv
"Oc av uéhAg tiv matpida mpodiddvat, peyiorns* Cyuiac aédc5 éo-
Giroc gidov od mpodacer.

God gives everything. If you (pl.) have received (aor. part.) a favor, remem-
ber it; and if you have granted a favor (aor. part.}, forget (it). If you have re-

ceived (anything), give again (aor.).

to possess.

given men many good things.
gods give (aor.) me faithful friends!
subj.) the gods assign (give) thee.
try. God gave men many treasures.
It is well to give to the poor.
Honor the gods, who give (part.) all good (pl.) to men.

the town.
av) ?

Aédtoc, -ov, not to be
seen.

aro-OeikPipl, w. 2 acc., to
show,represent,explain,
declare any one as any-
thing; mid., show of my-
self, express, declare,
display, render.

dcixviul, to show.

dixaiw¢, justly, fairly.

elk, inconsiderately, un-
advisedly.

*Opkov gedye, Kav OlKaiwg duvine.
uétploc Anddeic® povviorr.
Tludayopac mapnyyetde toic pavdavovor, oraviwg pév ouvovat,
e ~ 4 - x ¥ ~
H rAactixy dsixviat Ta etdn TOY

Oeltkviaol.

xXpnoamévouc dé Toi¢ bpKore TaVTMC Eupéverv.

LXVI. Vocabulary.

éupéva, w. dat., to remain
with, abide by.
évToc¢, w. gen., Within.
é£-opxdw, to cause to swear,
administer an oath to.
ériopKov, -ov, TO, a false
~ oath, perjury. [by.
érouvodul, w. acc., to swear
péTploc, -d, -ov, Attic pé-
TpLoc, -ov, moderate.
pnmore, never. [tor.
pLuntaAc, -0v, 6, an imita-

My te Geode éxiopxov érouvd.

Give me, O God, riches and reputation
The wealth which God has given (aor.) is lasting. The gods have
Give ye to the poor immediately.
Thou must bear nobly, what (d¢ av, w.
Good citizens will never betray their coun-
The soldiers intended to betray (aor.)
Who would betray a friend (opt. w.

May the

ovo, to swear.
dpkoc, -ov, 0, an oath.
TavT@C, In every Wy,
throughout, wholly.
TapayyéAAw, to order.
TAaoT KH (i. e. TEXY]), MO-
delling art, sculpture.
povvit, to strengthen.
onaviwe, rarely, seldom.
wholoua, -aToc, TO, a de-
cree, a resolution.

'O olvoc

Oi diddoKador tode paSyTa¢ pLunTac éavTOY aro-

Sedv, Tov avbporwr Kai évi6Te Kat TOV Onpov. My ddéara deiéne HAiw: ’Avdpd¢
voov oivoc édettev. Dpiyec bpxore ob ypdvrar ov7’ duvivtec, ob7 GAAove éop-
kobytec. 'OAtyorc deixvd Ta évrd¢ dpevGv. Oi Kpitat Ta WHdiopara aredeixvy-
cav. Myrorte eixh duvdoite. ‘O BactAede Tov adtod vidv orparnyév arodédetyev.

Do not swear a false oath. Those
The Phry-

Avoid an oath, even if you swear justly.
who swear a false oath, are deserving of the greatest punishment.

1§39, Rem.
4§ 52,8.

3 § 158, 3. (h).

? by attraction instead of d.
§ § 121, 12.

5 § 158, 7. (y).

§ 134.)

gians did not swear.
swear unadvisedly !

VERBS IN =U.

The judges declare their resolutions.
It is not becoming to swear unadvisedly. The Athenians

declared Alcibiades (’A%KuBcadn¢, -ov) general.

’AEi6A0yoc,-ov, worth men-
tioning, noticeable, me-
morable.

SevTEpoc, -a, -ov, second.

divauat, w. pass. aor., to be
able, can, have power.

érioTaual, w. pass. aor., to
know, understand.

‘O mAodroc TOAAG ObvaTat.

LXVII. Vocabulary.

Léon, -n¢, 7, drunkenness.

pwpoc, -a, -ov, foolish; 6
pwpoc, the fool.

vauTlKos¢, -n, -ov, belong-
ing to ships, nautical;
vauTikn dvvautc, naval
power.

Oikal6c éorwv, bcTic ddiKeiv dvvdpuevoc uy BodvAeTat.

TaoaL.
O¢ dvvapeda.

ériotwvrat TO TA0bTH® ypjoaz? ;

"Ap.orév gore wav7’ éxiotac8at KaAd.
TIpd pédn¢ avioraco.
Karadavdévroc tot TleAorovyyoiaxod roAé-

Ti ovpdéper

Tic dv pwpdc dbvaito év oive o1wrdy ;

161

May you never

dAtyapyia, -a¢, 7, the rule
of a few, oligarchy.

TPOTOE, -7, -OVv, first.

ovv-loTnput, to put togeth-
er; mid.,assemble, unite,
bring together.

"AvIp

Ilparre pndév Ov! wn éxia-
ZaGpev® oby oc é&dédopev, GAM

éviowg TAovTely, OTav un

pov dAryapyxiav év talc mAeiotaic ToAEct KaViotavTo. Oi moA€éutot OdK GrOOTH-

covral, xplv av éAwout THv TOALY.
rixny Obvauly a&tdAoyov ovveotgoato.

"ASHvale TpLakovTa Tipavvoel KaTEeoTaU Cay.

Mivac, 6 detrepoc, mp&to¢g ‘EAAQvav vav-
'Yrd Avoardpov, ro’ Xraptiatov, év

Men haye much power through wealth. Rise up (pl.) before intoxication.

The enemies could not take (2 aor.) the town. Of what use is it to thee to be
rich, if thou understandest not how to use riches? What fools could (ay, w. opt.)
be silent over wine? No mortal is able to know everything. There are few
who understand (part.) how to use riches well. ‘The magistrates who are ap-
pointed (aor. part. pass.) to rule over the town, must (de?, w. acc. of pers.) care

for its prosperity.

"ASA10¢, -d, -ov, trouble-
some,pitiable,miserable.
aro-TiO nut, to put away;
mid., take away.
dia-Tedéw, to complete;
w. part., it expresses the
continuance of the ac-
tion denoted by the par-
ticiple, as diated ypa-
pov, “I continue to
write,” or “ writing.”
Sia-ri'Snput, to put in or-

LXVIIIL. Vocabulary.

der, manage; w. adv.
put into a disposition,
dispose.

éxi-Ti0 nut, to add, put up-
on; mid., put on one-
self; w. dat., apply to,
attack, set upon.

éyxpartesa, -ac, 7, self-con-
trol, continence.

&ddd1ov, -ov, TO, viaticum,
travelling money.

7KW, 7&0, | am come.

Snoavpoc, -ov, 6, a trea-
sure.

kata-Tidnut, to lay down,
lay by; mid., lay down
for oneself.

kpGvoc, -€0¢ = -0v¢, 70, a
helmet.

Adgoc, -ov, 6, a crest.

orédavos, -ov, 6, a crown.

powvikeoc, -éG, -E0V, con-
tracted -ov¢, -7j, -OvV,
Furple.

) by attraction instead of uydév tobTwr, a.

8 $161, 3.

14*

? see § 97, 2.
4 see § 126, 1.

162 VERBS IN -wl. [§ 184.

Oi KeAriBnpec wept Tac Kegadd¢e Kpavy yorKa wepitivertar potvixoicg HoKky-
uéva! Addore. Oddéva Syoavpdv ratct Katadijon apusivw® aidodc. Tic dv éxdv
gidov ddpova Soiro; Zevogavre Svovre Hxé tie éx Mavrivelac dyyedog Aéyov,
rov vidv abroad tov Tptadaov reSvavai?: Kaxeivoc anébeto wév Tov orédavov,
Oreréner O& Ghav- éret 08 6 dyyedog mpocéSnke Kalt éxeivo, bTt vixGy TES VAKE,
radu 6 Hevodav éxéSeTe Tov oTépavov. *AAKiPLady¢ Eduvyev ei¢ Lrapryv Kaz
rode Aaxedayprviove mapOsuvev éExidéotat Toic ’ASnvaiow. TO piv 76 oGua®
drareCepévy Kake ypeta éotly iatpod, TH dé THY poy diAov. *Epédzov eic¢
rd ynpac katativov. Oi ’Adnvaios év TH devtépy Tod MedorovvgoaKod woné-
uov éret Ord Tod Aowpod GIALGTaTa dteTESHCAY. Kaxdv obdév gbetar év avdpl
Sepédia Seuévw Tod Biov cwdpocivyyv Kai éyxparerav. Todo marod¢ titecSat
dei Exactov éavtS. Oi woAirar PoBodvTat, pi ot TOAEWLOL TH TWOAEL EmiTLIHvTae.

The citizens attack the enemies. We will take the good as our friends.
The citizens feared that the enemies might attack the town. Lay by travelling
money for old age. Put on (aor.) the crown. Take care that the enemies do
not attack (subj. aor.) you. Croesus deposited many treasures of gold in his
house. The character of men is often changed by riches. Nature cannot easily
be changed. A golden crown was placed (aor.) by the Athenians on the gate
of the Acropolis. Everything has been changed by the war.

LXIX. Vocabulary.

’"AuorB7, -7¢, 7, exchange, the same time; mid. ovv-véw, to spin, weave
recompense, return. give oneself up with together with.

oTparoc, -ov, 6, an army. _ others to a thing.

ovy-erl-dldwul, to give at

Xdpic yapire drodidora. Th eb rovodyte moAAaKiC KaKh GrodidoTat aporPA.
Tlarpides modAakic dia xépdog mpotdodyoav. IloAAd dépa dédotat Toi¢ avSpo-
mole Tapa Tov Bedv. ‘Qe péya TO prxpdv éativ év Kaip@ dovév. "Ore eiAe® rhv
OnBaiwv woAwv ’AAEEavdpoc, drédoTto Tode édeviéEpove mavTac. \ “EKOv ceavToy
tH KAwdoi" cvverididov, napéywr ovvricat, oicrici® mote mpadywace BovAeTat.
‘Opoiwe aicxypév, akotoavta xpyotuov Adyov py wavbavev, Kal Odomevor Te
ayadiv Tapa TOY diduv wR AauBaverv. Oi wodiTat GoBotbyTat, un | TOALC TpO-
61d6Tat. Mazote tr6 TGv didwv rpodidoio. ‘O otpatic tm aitov Tov oTpa-
THOU Tpovdidoto. *Amddov TO KvTEAAov.

Everything is given by God. The wealth which is given (aor.) by God is
lasting. The town was betrayed by the soldiers to the enemies. We must
bear nobly, what is sent (given) by God. The friend will not be betrayed by
the friend. Alexander is said, when he had taken (aor.) Thebes, to have sold
(aor.) all the free citizens. The army is said to have been betrayed (aor.) by
the general. The citizens feared, that the town might be betrayed. Let us
sell (aor.) the goblets.

1 from doxéw, to adorn. 2 see § 52, 1.
3 see § 122, 9. reSvavar instead of t20vnxévar, Comp. § 184, 8.
4 also. 5 § 159, (7). 8.51 260%

7 KAwdé, one of the Parcae, or goddesses of Fate.
~ by attraction instead of mpéypaowy, d BobAetac.

§ 135. ] SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -e. 163

LXX. Vocabulary.

AAS, truly, in reality. érv-deixvipt,toshowbrag- wodutedqjc, -éc, costly,
dudt-éEvvot, to put on, gingly,makea boastful splendid.

dress in. display of; mid, show piTup, -opoc, 46, an orator.
GroAAvut, to ruin; md. of oneself boastfully. | oGévvvy, to quench, ex-

be ruined or lost, per- Kepavvipt, to mix. tinguish.

ish. Tappycia, -ac, 7, free- ovv-ar6A20u1, to ruin at
év-deixvipt, toshow; mid. | dominspeaking,frank- the same time; mid, go

show of oneself. ness. to ruin at the sametime.

Pidor didog ovvardAAvytat Overvyotaw. Oddérore kiéoc toSAov arébAdvTat.
’"Avdpod¢ dixaiov Kaproc obK GxdAAvTaL. Al yvvaixeg yaipovow dudtevvipevar
Kahac éo8irac. Oi dAnddc¢ cogot od oxeddovew énidcixvyvcdat THY abTGy co-
diay. ‘O oivoc, édv tdati' Kepavvinrat, TO cGua povvvow. ‘H dpyn ebSde¢
oBevvioito. "Ast gv 7@ Biw apetav Kal oudpootvyy évdeixvvco. Oi Tlépcat
moAvtedeic oToddc augiévverto. ‘O pytwp THY yvounv peTa Tappnoiag amedei-
faro. ’AAKiBiadne bd Tév ’AGHVaiwy otparnyos aredcixOn.

The Persians put on splendid clothes. Always show in your life virtue and
soundmindedness. We admire the friends who accompany their unhappy friends
to ruin (going to ruin together with, etc.). Let us express our opinion with
frankness. ‘The sophists made a boastful display of their wisdom. "Women

put on splendid clothes. The orator should express (aor.) his opinion with
frankness.

SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/L.

I Verbs in-uwe which annex the Personal-endings to the
Stem-vowel.
§.185. Verbs in -a (i-orn-pt, ST A-):

1. xi-yor-yt, to lend (XPA-), Inf. xyouvar, Fut. yeyoa, ete. ;
Mid. to borrow, Fut. yoyoouou.—Aor. éyoyoupyy in this sense is not
used by the Attic writers. ‘To the same stem belong:

2. yon, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. yoy, Inf. yo7ve,
Part. (zo) yoswv; Impf. éyoqy or yozr, Opt. yesin (from XPE-).

3. amoyzon, it suffices, sufficit ; there are also formed regularly from
XPAQ, anoyoacuw, Inf. ezoyony; Impf. aaéyon; Aor. anezor-
se(v), etc. Mid. azozonpat, to have enough, to abuse, waste, amo-
yonoOcat, inflected like yocouat.

4. dvivnut, to benefit (ON A-), Inf. évwaver; Impf. Act. wanting ;

Fut. 6vyow; Aor. ovysa. Mid. dvivapc, to have advantage, Fut.
éynoowor; second Aor. cripyr, -yoo, -yz0, etc., Imp. oryoo, Part.
6ynpevoc, Opt. dvaiuyy, -cto, -cuto (§ 134, 1), Inf. ovacGar; Aor

1 § 47, 10. and § 161, 2. (a), (a).

164 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -xi. [§ 135.

Pass. avy Pyy instead of wr_uqvy. The remaining forms are sup-
plied by aedeiv.

5. o-u-mhn-w, to fill (IL4A-), Inf. aipndevor; Impf. emymdyp ;
Fut. ziyow; Aor. éxiyou; Mid. nipahepot, miuzdactor; Impf.
éniuniauny; Perf. Mid. or Pass. néniyonet; Aor. Pass. étlyotyy.
—Mid.

The » in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted
in composition, when a / precedes the reduplication; e. g. guzizAauat, but éve-
TYLTAGLHY.

6. miuzonw, to burn, 'Trans., in all respects like tums.

7. TAH-ML, to bear, endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting, (instead of
them vzouera, avéyouct) ; Aor. ézdnv, (710,) thainr, thHO1, TAAVEL,
thas; Fut. cljcouce; Perf. céziqjxa (on the forms zézauer, etc.
comp. § 134, 3).

8. gy-pi, to say (stem @A-), has the following formation :

Present. ACTIVE. Imperf.

Indi- | 8. 1. | éoyv
cative. . | éone, usually é¢nota
Eon

éddoav

66, dic, bf, O7TOV, PGuev, o7-| Opt. | dainv, daing, dain, gainrov
Te, d@aL(v) and gaitov, damrny and

oadi or oubi, duTw, duTor, paitnv, dainuev and ai-
guTor, gure, ddtTwoav and Lev, painte and gaite, -ev
ParTov Fut. | d7ou

guval ; Aor. | édqca.

gac, puca, duv
G. davtoc, daonc

MIDDLE.

Perf. Imp. te¢aotu, let it be said. Aor. Part. damevoc, affirming.
Verbal adjective, datoc¢, daréoc.

Rem. 1. In the second person ¢7¢, both the accentuation and the Iota sub-
script is contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the Ind.
Pres. (except 7/¢), see § 14.

Rem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm
(ato), to assert, maintain, etc. 'The Fut. 970, however, has only the latter sig-
nification ; the first is expressed by Aéfw, éo3. The Impf. é¢yv with ¢avac and
¢a¢, is used also as an Aorist.

In composition, GvTidnput, cbuonut, avTidne, obudne, avTidnat, obudyst, ete.
but Subj. av71g6, dvrid7e, ete.

§ 139. | SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -. 165

The following Deponents also belong here:

1. dyouct, to wonder, be astonished, “alii e, Impf. ry eee Aor.
nyacdny; Fut. gydooua.

2. dvvapet, to be able, Subj. dvvcopce (§ 134, 1), Imp. dvvaco, Inf.
SivacPat, Part. duvepevog; Impf. zovrguyv and 7dvy.; second Pers!
édvvo, Opt. duraiuyy, Svvoo (§ (84, hl); Fut. dvrvycouc:; Aor.
édurydyy, 76. and éduracOny (§ 85, Rem; Perf. dedvvyuas; ver-
bal adjective, duvazdc, able and possible.

3. émiotapnot, to know, second Pers. ézictracat, etc., Subj. ézio-
toma (§ 134, 1), Imp. éxiore, etc.; Impf. yaocéunr, Atcza, ete.,
Opt. émoraipyy, éniocouo (§ 184, 1); Fut. éxvotyoouat; Aor. y20-
mony (Aug., § 91, 3); verbal adjective, ézioryzés.

4, goamcs, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. goéo is used instead of
it in prose); Aor. yoaoPyr, amavi; Fut. goacPnooua, amabo.

5. xoguopat, to hang, pendeo, Subj. xogucopar (§ 134, 1); Part.
xpeuomevos ; Impf. éxoeucuny, Opt. xoguaiuyy, -ca20, -cuto (§ 134, 1) ;
Aor. éxosucodny; Fut. Mid. xoeunoouct, pendebo, I shall hang.

6. zoiacdat, to buy, a defective Aor. Mid., used by the Attic
writers instead of the Aor. Mid. of argouot, viz. govyoapny (§ 87,
4), which is not used by them, Subj. zeta (§ 134, 1), Opt. zovae-
pyy, -c0, -cuto (§ 184, 1), Imp. zotaco or moiw, Part. woiapevos.

LXXT. Vocabulary.

Aaipoviov, -ov, TO, the xoun, -7¢, 7, a village. Tpo-onuaive, to indicate
Deity. ovKéTt,no more,nolonger. —_ beforehand, reveal.
éurizpnt, to set on fire, woActixéc, -7, -6v, relating mpdTepov, sooner, before.
burn up. to the state; Td moAl- ovv-erput, to be with.
evkAea and evKAeia, -a¢, —‘TLKG, politics. owdpovéw, to be of sound
7, fame. TOTEpoc, -d, -ov; uter? mind, sensible or pra-
éwc, as long as. which of two? m6Tepov, _— dent. [save.
iowc, perhaps. whether. detdopat, w. gen., to spare,

LwKpatne Tpd Tavtwv Gero! ypjvat Tove avOparove cwdpooiyynv KtHoacFat.
"Ev éAriot xpy Tode codode Eye Biov. "Epya kat mpagerc apetic, od AOyoug
tnhoiv xypeav. “lowe eimot” Tig av, bre YpHVY TOY LwKpatyn py TpdTEpov Ta To-
derixad didadoxetv Tod¢ EavTH cvvdratpiBovtac } cwdpoveiy. LwKxpatne tHv 1o-
dav TOAAG Gunoev. Oi moréutor TOAAAC KOuac évérpnoav. Lwxpartne Td dat-
KOviov Edn mpoonpatvery éavT@ 7d péAdov. Tlévoc, daciv, eixrciac ratnp. Ob
Nonitat Tove oTpariarac THe avdpetac HyGoSnoav.s *AAKiBiadnc, wo Dwxparet
suvny, édvv7dn THv py Kaddv éexvOvudv Kpateiv. TIpraiunvy xpd TavTwy xon-
“ator Tov codov dvdpa dirov sivai por. TloAAot ypyuatuwr dvvauevor deidecFat,
mplv épdv, gpactévrec obKéte OvvavTat.

Sccrates maintained (aor.), that the Deity revealed the future to him. I

1§ 25,20. 7§126,7. 3 dyac¥ai tivé Tivoc, to admire one for something.

168 VERBS IN -jit. [$$ 136, 187.

maintain, said the general, that (acc. w. inj:) you must attack the enemies.
Virtue will always benefit man. Fill (aor.) the goblets with wine. The town
was set on fire (aor.). The moderate (man) will always be able to control evil
desires. The wise (man) will always love virtue. Socratés understood (aor-)
how to turn the youths to virtue. We cannot purchase a faithful friend for
money.

§ 186. Verbs in -6 (ci-On-ut, OE-):
1. f-y-pe (stem ‘E-), to send. Many forms of this verb are found
only in composition.

ACTIVE.

Pres. Ind. iNet, i116; inou(y ') 5 LETOD ; lepen, leTe, idot(v) or ielov(v).
Subj. (6, ifc, in; ljtov; leper, inte, iGoilv); agee, aglnc, agua
(agin in ‘Xen. ), ete.
Imp. (lec), fet, iérw, ete. Inf. évar. Part. teic, teioa, lév.
Impf. | Ind. fovy (from ‘IEQ), ddiouvvy or 7diovy (seldom ‘evy), tecc, tet; Ce- f
tov, létnv; leuev, tere, teoav. Opt. Leinv.
‘Perf. | eixa. — Plup. eiketv. — Fut. 7ow. — Aor. I. 7xa (§ 181, 2).
Aor. IT. | Ind. Sing. is supplied by, Aor. I. (§ 131, 2); reo elTov, elTNV ;
Plur. eluer, Kaveruer, elTé, aveite, eioav, abetoar.
Subj. ©, tic, 446, aie, ete.
Opt. ely, eine, €i7 ; eltov, elTHV ; ; eluer, eiTé, elev. J
Imp. £6, ager, &tw@; éTov, ETOD ; ére, €Twoay and évTwv.
Inf. eivat, dgetvat. Part, gic, eioa, év, Gen. évTog, elons, aGEVTOS.

Remarx. On the Aug. of ddinut, see § 91, 3.

MIDDLE.
Pres. Ind. ievat, teoar, teTat, etc. Subj. (Guat, agiduar, in, Ady, ete.
Imp. feoo or iov. Inf. ieodar. Part. céwevoc, -7, -ov.
Impf. | /éunyv, ieoo, ete. Opt. loiunv (Leiunyv), Loto, agzoio, ete.
Aor. II. | Ind. eiunv Subj. Opal, abaya, 7h, oj}, TAL, GOATAL
eioo, adetoo Opt. Tpoolunr, -010, -0iTo, -oiweta, etc.
eiT0, adEiTo Imp. ov, go0o, ete.
eiueda, ete. Inf. go0ar. Part. &uevoc, -7, -ov.

Perf. eivar, peeiwar, Inf. eioSar, weSeiodar. — Plup. eiuny, eico, ageiao, ete.
—- Fut. 7o0oua:.— Aor. I. 7Kaunv only in Ind. and seldom.

PASSIVE.
Aor. L. ef3nv, Part. éSeic. — Fut. éevjoouat. — Verb. Adj. étdc, €Té0¢ (dbeToc).

§ 137. Eiwé (stem E2-), to be, and Eime (stem J-), to go.

PRESENT.

Ind. §. 1. { eiui, to be | Subj. o Ind. | eit, to go
2.| e mC 2. | et
3. | é0Ti(v) 7 3. | elou(v)
D. 2. | éorév TOV D.2. | troy
3.| éorov TOV 3. | (Tov
P. 1. | éopev @pLev P.1.| Guev
2.| éo7é ATE 2. | ire
3. | eiai(v) oo1(v) 3. | lao (v)

Seb ea a) secant

VERBS IN -jUt. 167

iode Inf. eivae Imp.

8. | éoTw Part. Ov, otoa,
D. 2. | éorov ov 3. | tw, Tpocita
3. | éoTwv G. évroc,obane | D. 2. | irov
P. 2. | gore oF WERE FE 3. | iTov
8.| Eotwoay, seldom éorwv P.2: Fize
| (more seldom dvrTwv) 3. | (rwoav or lévTov
IMPERFECT.
Opt. Ind. | Opt.
S., b. elqnv S. 1. | gecv or ya, L went tole or
loinv
2.| hota eine 2. | Hetc, us'ly yecota lowe
8.1 mv ein 3. | Het tou
D. 2. | jaTov (7Tov) | einrov D. 2. | jettov, us'ly 7rov iotov
3. | yoTnv (qTnV) | eintny 3. | neitgv, “ ATnv loitny
P.1. | qpev einer (eluev) | P.1.| qeyev, “ quer LoLuev
2.| Hote (7Te) elnte (eire) 2. | gette, ** gyre loiTe
3.| joav eljoav and élev 3. | yEeoav lovev

Fut. écouat, I shall be, éog or écet, éotat, etc. — Opt. éootunv. — Inf. écea-
Sar. — Part. éoduevoc.

Rem. 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of eii, to be (except the second Pers.
el), see § 14. In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back as the
general rules of accentuation permit; e. g. wapetul, mapel, Tapeott, etc., Imp.
mapto8t; but wapiv on account of the temporal augment, mapécras on account
of the omission of ¢ (7apécerar), mapetvas like infinitives with the ending -vaz,
TapO, -7¢, -7, etc.. on account of the contraction; the accentuation of the Part.
im compound words should be particularly noted; e. g. tapov, Gen. zapérToc,
so also wapiov, Gen. mapzévToc.

Rem. 2. The compounds of ei, to go, follow the same rules as those of eiyi,
to be; hence several forms of these two verbs are the same in compounds; e. g.
Taper, Tapet and wGpecor (third Pers. Sing. of ejue and third Pers. Pl. of eiui) ;
but Inf. wapcévar, Part. mapiov.

Rem. 3. The Pres. of eit, to go, particularly the Ind., also the Inf. and Part.,
among the Attic prose-writers, has almost always a Future signification, I shall
or will go, or come. Hence the Pres. is supplied by gpyowar (§ 126, 2).

LXXII. Vocabulary.

"Areiul, to be away, or
absent.

Greil, to gO away.

‘Gpkéopat, w. pass. aor., to
satisfy oneself, be con-
tented, w. dat.

“dinut, to let go, give up,
neglect.

Bi6u, to live.

Béov, -ovroc (from Jez), 76,
that which is owed,duty.

d7ev, namely, forsooth,
scilicet.

elo-erl, to go, OY come
into.

éuspoxitw, to drive into
the net or snare, en-
snare.

é&-inut, to let or send out;
of rivers, empty itself.

évetta, afterwards, then,
hereafter.

édinut, to send up to;
mid. w. gen. send one-
self or one’s thoughts
after anything, i. e. de-
sire.

kaSinut, to let down, lay.

K&TpOC, -0v, 6, a wild boar.

kapTepoc, -d, -6v, strong,
large.

Kpavy], -7C, 7, a ay, a
shout. -

168 . VERBS IN -l. § 138.

AiSoc, -ov, 6, a stone. wéON, -7C, 7, a fetter. acc., to revenge oneself

peSinut, to let go, give mAcovaxcc, oftener. on. [known.
up, neglect. mpoc-eut, to go to, ap- gavepoc, -a, -dv, evident,

mapaokevac, to prepare ; proach. XLOv, -dvoc, 7, SROW-

mid., to prepare oneself. o76ua,-aT0¢,76, themouth. &¢, Attic for ei¢ (with per-
mapinut, to let pass,loosen. T/uapéw, to help; mid. w. sons).

Ol d&ya¥ot ob dia Tov rvov pedidor Ta déovTa mpatrew. “Adele Ta bavepa
uh dioxe Ta ddavz. TloAAol dvbpwrot épievtar tAobrov.! Tédac Aéyovow ei¢
Tov ‘EAAferovrov KaSeivar Hépeqv tiwwpotpevov dipd_ev Tov ‘HAANCTOVTOY.
Obr éx yelpd¢ peSévta Kaptepdy AiGov Adov? KaTaoxetr, ovr’ ard yAoTTNS A0-

yov. ‘“HpakAne tov ’Epvpavd.iov xampov didEac peta Kpavyie eic xlova ToAATY

maperpévov éveBpoxtoev. ‘O Netdoc éinow eic tiv Sadatrav énTa oTopacty.
"Arra’ éreit’ toral, Tadta Geoic péder. Ei Ovyro¢ ei, (BéAriote,*? GuyTa Kal
@povet. Méuvnoo® véog dv, G¢ yépav Eon moTé. Aixaoc io’, iva Kat dukaiwv
roync.® Biac mapobone obdév ioxver vouoc. Eidaivwv einv kat Veoic dihoc.
"AASEavOpoc elrev’> Ei wp’ AAEEavdpoc Hv, Avcoyévyg dv qv. Bidoy® dpkovuevog
rol¢ wapovol, TOY arévTav ovK égiéwevoc. Kal vedrn¢ kat ynpae dugw Kara
gorov. OL dvSporoe ebdaipovetv dbvavrat, xiv révyTeg woLv. "AAR Ela Cot
mapéoTo. “lwpev, © gidor. Pedye Styootaciac Kal epi, ToAEWOV TPOCLovToc.
‘Emel 7 Mavdavn mapeoxevatero Oc arodoa TAAL Tpd¢ TOV avopa, 6 ’AoTvayns
eye mpoc Tov Kipov- *Q rai, jv wévgg map’ Euol, mPGTov uév, Stav Boddy eic-
vévat wc éué, Ext cot Eorat,! Kat yapiv cor uaGAAov Ew, dow av wAeovaxie eicing
Oc éué. "Ererta 68 ixmore Toi¢ éuoic xpnon, Kai, bray aning, Exov are. odbc Gv
abtic é8édne imrove.

The good (man) will never omit to do his duty. Many strive after (é¢teoFat,
w. gen.) the unknown, while they neglect (part. aor.) the known. Xerxes laid

fetters on the Hellespont. Let not a man be a friend to me with the tongue

(dat.), but in reality. Be just, that you may also obtain justice. The friend
cares for the friend, even though he is absent. "When the enemies came into
the town, the citizens fled. Goin, O boy! The soldiers should all go away

from the town. ‘Two armies came into the town.

Ls ar iam oar aD, NAEP ES
1 § 158, 3. (b). 2 § 52, 10. 3 § 62. 4§ 52,1. 5 § 122, 11.
6 § 121, 16. 7 § 126, 7. 8 4 142, 9. ® § 39, Rem.
10 elyar émi Tit, to be in the power of any one.

§ 138.] VERBS IN -Ml. 169

§ 138. Il. Verbs in -ws which annex the Syllable vvi or wi to the
Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings.

Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem ends with
@,€, 0, or with a Consonant.

A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, ¢ or o.

Voice. | Tenses.| a. Stem in a. b. Stem in «. ce. Stem ino (@).

oKeda-vv0-u
é-oK E0G-Vv0-v!
é-GKEOU-KA
é-OKE0U-KELV
OKEOU-OW,
Att. oxed0, -Gc, -d
é-oxé0d-oa

\OKEOG-VVU-Uat

&-OK E0G-VVU-UNV
é-oKé0a-0-Mel
é-oKedu-o-pyV

Kopé-vvo-put!
é-Kopé-vvb-v)
KE€-KOPE-Ka
é-KE-KOpE-KELV
KOPE-0W,
Att. KopG, -eic¢, -e7
é-KOPE-0a
KOpé-VVU-wat
é-KOPE-VVU-pHV
Ké-KOpé-O-plat
é-Ké-Kopé-0-V

OTpO-Vvvv- pL
é-oTpO-vvi-v!
é-OTPW-Ka
é-OTP@-KELV

OTPW-oW

E-OTPW-04
OTPA-VVV-Uat
&-OTPW-VVO-unV
é-OTPW-Uat
é-OTPO-qv

KOpé-G-OfLat
é-KOPE-O- GURY
K€-KOpé-O-OaL
é-oTpa-O7v
oTpw-SHoouat

é-Kopé-o-Onv
Kope-o-0noopuat

é-oxeda-o-Snv
okeda-o-Onoopat

OTPW-TOG

OTPw-TéOG.

KOPE-O-TOE
KOPE-O-TEOC

‘Verbal Adj.

OKE0a-G-TOC
OKeE0a-0-Té0C

B.. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant.

6A-20-u1,? perdo | 6A-A0-pat, pereo | Op-v0-p07 | du-vi-uae
Impf. @A-ho-v? - | GA-Ad-unV Ou-vo-v OU-vv-unv
Perf. I. | 64-dAe-xa (’OAEQ), perdidi, | Gu-@lL0-Ka 6ut-Ouo-wae

§ 89. (’’OMOQ),

Perf. II. | 6A-wA-a, perii § 89.
Plup. I. | 6A-wAé-xewv, perdideram éu-wud-Kety | du-wud-unv
Plup. if. | 64-0A-erv, perieram
Fut. 6A-G, -éi¢, -Et 6A-obat, -Et du-otpat, -et |
Aor. I. | Gde-ca A. IL @A-dunv | duo-ca | @0-CGUNv

A.T. P. @u6-6-3yv et apodny
I. F. P. 6u0-0-Syooua.

Remark. “OAAvue comes by assimilation from 6A-vyyzt. For an example of
@ stem-ending with a mute, see deixviue above, unde the paradigms (§ 138).
‘The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass. of éuvvj is 6uwpoouévoer. The remaining forms
of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the o among the Attic writers; e. g.

‘Opaporat, 6ucuoro.

1 4 ? o7 id 2 ca -
And oxeda-vviw, éoxedd-vyvoyv — Kope-vvtw, &-KOpé-vYVOY — OTPW-VPUO,
b-oTpd-vyvov (always 3).
§ And dAAb-0, bAAv-o»v — duyt-0, Guvv-ov (always 4).

: 15

170 VERBS IN -jl. [§ 139.

SuMMARY OF THE VERBS BELONGING HERE.

The Stem ends:

§ 139. A. In a Vowel and assumes -vvo.

(a) Verbs whose Stem ends ina.

1. HeQd-VO-[Ul, to mix, Fut. nEQdaco, Att. xeo0; Aor. éxgoton;
Perf. HenQane. 5 Perf. Mid. or Pass. xéxocéuou; Aor. Pass. éxoadyy,
also éxegdo dy. —Mid.

2. xosuc-vrv-t, to nee Fut. xosucow, Att. xosuo; Aor. éxgé-
pace; Mid. or Pass. xesuarvua, [ hang myself or am hung (but
xosuapat, to hang, Intrans., § 185, 5); Fut. Pass. xesuaodqoomes
Aor. éxgeucodyr, Iwas hung, or £ hung, Intrans.

3. METH-VVU-, to spread me, expand, open, Fut. metaéow, Att.
meto ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. zéarépor; Aor. Pass. emer to dyy (Syn-
cope, § 117, 1).

4. ouedc-vvv-y, to scatter, Fut. cxeddow, Att. oxeda; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. éoxedaouar; Aor. Pass. goxedacdyp.

(b) Verbs whose Stem ends ine.

1. &vvv-ut, to clothe, in prose augievvipu, Impf. euqievyvy with-
out Aug.; Fut. auqigow, Att. auqio; Aor. yugtsca; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. 7ugiscual, yupliecal, nugieotas, ete., Inf. yugicPar; Fut.
“Mid. augigcopon, Att. eunquovpo.—Aug., § 91, 3.

2. Cé-vvv-ut, to boil, Trans., Fut. Céow; Aor. éleoa; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. élecuot; Aor. Pass. éCéod7v.—(Cém, on the contrary, is
usually intransitive).

3. x0g8-rv-w, to satisfy, satiate, Fut. xopéow, Att. xoge ; “Aor.
éx0geoa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xexdgecuae; Aor. Pass. drops Sye-—
Mid.

4, oBé-vvd-u, to extinguish, Fut. oBécw; first Aor. toBecn, I ex-
tinguished ; second Aor. éoByv, I ceased to burn, went out; Perf.
ZoByua, I have ceased to burn.—Mid. oBévrv peu, to cease to burn,
Perf. Mid. or Pass. goBecuat; Aor. Pass. éo8éodnv. No other:
verb in -vuye has a second Aorist.

5. ozogé-vvv-t, to spread out, abbreviated form ozogvumt, Fut. ozo-
oom, Att. czogm; Aor. gozdgecn. The other tenses are formed
from ozenvrvpl, viz. Zozompot, Eotpo97r, ctomras. See § 138,

A, ¢.

§ 140.] VERBS IN -ut. 171

(c) Verbs in o, with the o lengthened into wo.

1 Co-wi-w, to gird, Fut. Coo; Aor. wou; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. éCoopat (§ 95).—Mid.

2. 60- -9V Ml, to strengthen, Fut. 6000; Aor. pace; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. ééapot, Imp. é66ao00, farewell, Inf. é6600001; Aor. Pass.
Eooacdny (§ 95).

3. otea-vvv-y, to spread out, Fut. orewow; Aor. éorpwoa, ete.
See ozogervvdu and § 138, A, c.

4. yow-vvt-ut, to color, Fut. yowow; Aor. 2yowoa; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. x¢yompce.

§ 140. B. In a Consonant and assumes -v0 (see
deiz-ve-ut, § 183).

1. &y-v0-m, to break, Fut. w&o; Aor. éu&u, Inf. aes; second
Perf. gaya, I am broken; Aor. Pass. é&yyv (Aug., § 87, 4).—Mid.

2. sigy-rv-m (or eioyc), to shut in, Fut. eigfm; Aor. eigfa. (But
Eloy, siege, elo&a, to shut out, etc.).

3. Cevy-vi-ut, to join, Fut. CevEwm; Aor. elevEa; Perf.. Mid. or
Pass. élevyuou; Aor. Pass. CevyOyr, more frequently yy».

4, uiy-vi-m, to mix, Fut. wiSo; Aor. guise, uiSae; Perf. ueutze;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. ueusypor; Aor. Pass. éuizdyr, more frequently
eutyT? 3 Fut. Perf. _meqiSopece.

5. oty-v0-pt or oly, prose avotyroy, avotya, to open, Impf. aveg-
yov; Fut. avoiSo; Aor. aevémfa, cvoisos; first Perf. avémya, I have
opened ; second Perf. avémya, I stand open, instead of which Att.
avepy po 5 Aor. Pass. avepy ny, avoLy ITV EL (Aug., § 87, 6).

6. opooy- r-ut, to wipe off, Fut. ouogSw; Aor. @U0gS a. —Mid.

7. 00-vv-"1, to TOE, Fut. 00G0 ; Aor. woce ; Mid. Corv Let, to
rouse one’s self, Fut. ogovuas; Aor. eodunr.

8. any-vi-ut, to fix, fasten, Fut. ay; Aor. ézyta; first Perf.
nennyo, I have fastened ; second Perf. zénynya, I stand fast, Mid.
anyvv not, I stick fast ; Perf. zénnypou, I stand fast ; Aor. Pass. é2é-
ynv.—Mid.

9. 677-v0-m, to tear, break, Fut. 6n&0; Aor. éé6nEa; second Perf.

aw 2¢wW

ésoaya, I am broken, rent; Aor. é6éyyv; Fut. Pass. 6ayjoouae.

LXXIII. Vocabulary.
*An one, -éc¢, unpleasant, join again; ofan army, do-oBévviy, to quench.
disgusting. set out again. Bodedvypia, -ac, 7, dislike
bva-Lebyri, to yoke, or dva-xaiw, to burn, kindle. disgust.

172 VERBS IN -l. [§ 141,

Srapphyviyt, to break KwriAda, to chatter, prat- gether, make coagulate,

asunder, tear in pieces, __ tle. |light. | compose.

tear away. Abyvoc, -ov, 6, a lamp, a gbdonwa, -aToC, 76, breath.
éyxahAwrivoua, to be padtakdc, -2, -6v, soft, ¢0¢, dwTd¢, TO, light.

proud of, make a dis- rich, tender. xoA0oc, -ov, 6, ill-will, an-

play. dAAduL, to destroy. ger. _ [ jury.
é&-dAAdut, to ruin utterly. otvyéw, to hate. WevddpKiov, -0v, TO, per-

Cebyvoue, to yoke, join. ovunpyvipt, to join to- webdopxoc, -ov, perjured.

Tov Bowopatov Ta Hdtota,! éav tie mpocdépy, Tplv exvOvpeiv, anon patveTat,
kexopeopévolc 68 Kal PdeAvypiav mapéxer. TO abt@ dvonuate Td pev Tip ava-
Kadvcelac av, Td O& TOD Abyvov GG¢ avooPéeLac. Oi ’AVyvator peTa TAONS THE
duvapewc Ertl TOC Tlépcac avélevgav. M7 daiuovav xYoAov opoye. ‘H bGpec
ToAAa On TOV avdparwv anoaecev Epya. El wy gvaagere pip’, amodeic Ta
usitova. Ol roAgutor Guooav rag ovvdnKac PvAasat. Eevodavyc éheye, THY
yay && dépog kat rupo¢ ovuray7vat. Loxpatne, Wav? "Avticdévy 76 pie poyes
iuatiov pépocg aet TolovyTa davepov: Od ravon, En, éykahAwnilouevog HUty 3
Feidopxov orvyet Fede, ocree Guetta. Lede avop’ éodécerev ’OAbpuTLoG, O¢ TOV
étaipov parSaka KwtiAdwy éanarav edéret.

Boil (aor.) the water, O boy! The garment is torn. The milk is curdled
(cuurjyvopt, perf. 2). The doors are open. The wine was mixed (aor.) with
water (dat.). The goblet is broken to pieces. The light is extinguished. The
soldiers will again set out against the enemies. Swear (subj. aor.) not without
reason. Haughtiness will ruin you all. Extinguish (aor.) the light. ‘The wo-
men in sorrow (sorrowing) tore (aor. mid.) their garments.

§ 141. Inflection of the two forms of the Perfect,
| xetwarand nua.
(a) Keipac, to lie down
Keiuou, properly, I have laid myself down, I aim lain down, hence,
Tlie down, is a Perf. form without reduplication.

Perf. | Ind. Ketwal, Ketoal, KeiTal, keiueVa, Kelove, KELVTAL ;
Subj. KEQUAL, kén, KENTaL, ete. ;
Imp. ketoo, keioSe, ete.; Inf. xeloSar; Part. xetevoc.
Plup. | Ind. éxeiunyr, EEL, ExevTo, third Pers. Pl. éxecvTo ;
Opt. Keolunv, Ké0L0, KEOLTO, etc.
Fut. Keioouae.
Compounds, GvaKElpat, KaTakeluat, KaTaKecoat, etc.; Inf. cataxeiotat ; Imp
KATGKELOO, EYKELOO. |

(b) "“Hyeas, to sit. |
1. “Ayeu, properly, I have seated myself, I have heen seated, hence
T sit, is a Perf. form of the Poet. Aor. Act. ioc, to set, to establish

The stem is ZA4- (comp. 7o-zeu instead of 75-za [according to § 8
1.] and the Lat. sed-eo).

Lg 51 1. 2 § 126, 4. ,

§142.| VERBS IN -o WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -m. 173

Perj: | In. jae, Hoal, horal, jueda, node, WvTa1 ;
Imp. 700, iota, etc.; Inf. Hadas ; Part. jpevoc.
Plup. | 70”, 700, jot, peta, jot, iro.

2. In prose, the compound xa9yjuat, is commonly used instead of
the simple. The inflection of the compound differs from that of
the simple, in never taking o in the third Pers. Sing. Perf., nor in
the Plup., except when it has the temporal Augment:

Perf. | cédnyuat, xadyoa, ea9 7 at, ete.; Subj. caduua, cody, cabqrat,

etc.; Imp. xa0yoo, ete.; Inf. KaSpodat : Part. cadipevoc.
Plup. | éxaShunv and cadjunv, éxadyoo and Kadijoo, éxatyro and ka-
UHiaTo, etce.; Opt. caVoiunv, xaoto, caSorTo, ete.

Remarx. The defective forms of jac are supplied by éeo0a or ileodat
poroee Kavéleoda, xavilertat).

‘ cutie SS

§ 142. Verbs in -a, which follow the analogy of Verbs in -w, in
forming the second Aor. Act. and Mid.

1. Several verbs with the characteristic «, ¢, 0, v, form a second
Aor. Act. and Mid., according to the analogy of verbs in -y, since,
in this tense, they omit the mode-vowel, and hence append the per-
sonal-endings to the stem. But all the remaining forms of these
verbs are like verbs in -.

2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the modes
and participials, is like that of the second Aor. Act. of verbs in -ys.
The characteristic-vowel is in most cases lengthened, as in Zoz7p,
viz. @ and ¢ into 7,0 into w,t and v into¢ andv. This lengthened
vowel remains, as in éozyv, throughout the Ind., Imp. and Inf.
The Imp. ending -yd: in verbs whose characteristic-vowel is @, in
composition is abridged into &; e. g. zg0Ba instead of zo0By Gu.

Modes | a. Characteris. a | b. Characteris. ¢ | ec. Characteris. o | d. Charac. v
and BA-Q, Baive, |ZBE-Q, cBévvyps,| TNO-Q, yeyvao- 0v-a,
Persons. to go. to extinguish. ka, to know. to wrap up.
anc cn nnn nnrrn nner ececeereenerceeaeeee ce eeeceeeeaceeeeceeeereececreeeaaec creer SS 2 SLE ES
Ind. S.1.| é-3y-v, I went éoBnv, I ceased | éyvwv, IT knew éddv, to go

2.| &-Bn-¢ éoBn¢ — [to burn | éyvuc édd¢ |in or
3. | é-37 éoBn éyvo édo_ | under
D. 2. | é-Bn-Tov EoBnTov éyPuTov édvTov
8.| &-B7-Tyv éaBntnv EYVOTHY our nV
P..1.| é-Gy-yev éoBnuev éyvopev EdduEV
2.| &-By-TE éoByre EYVOTE édvTE
3. | &-By-cav éoBnoav éyvacav édvoav
(Poet. a) (Poet. Zyvwrv) | (Poet.édiv)
Sndj. §.| 8G, Bac, 67! 0B, -i¢, -7 yva, yr@¢, yvo" | dba, -7¢, -y'
D.| Barov opyrov yvoOrov OvnTov
P. | Bauer, -77E¢, oPGpev, -7Te, yvapev, -OTE, dvaper,
| -Gor(v) -Oou(v) -do1(v) -1T€, -wou(v)

? Compounds, e. g. dva36, dvaB7je, etc.; dxocBG; diayvd; dvadia.

15*

174 VERBS WITH A SECOND AOR. LIKE VERBS IN swt. [§ 142.

Opt. 8. 1. | Bainv oBeinv yvoinv

2. | Bains oBeing yvoing
3. | Bain oBein yvoin

D. 2. | Gainror et -atTov opeinrov et-elTov yvoinrov et -oiTov
3. | Barqrnyv et-aitny oPetatny et-eitnv YvounT ay et-olLT nv

P. 1. | Bainuev et -aipwev oGeinuer et-eiuev yvoinuev et-oluev
2.| Gainre et -aite |oPelyte et-eite | yvoiyte et -oiTe
3.| Baiev (seldom | oPetev yvoiev (rarely

Bainoar). yvoinoay).

Imp. S. | B78, -770!" ond, -7Tw yvod., -aTo! v1, -bTo!
D. 1. | Gytov, -7Twr oBATov, -7Twv | yvaTov, -OTwv | ddTev,-dTwY
P. 2. | Gyre oBHre yvore dvTE

3. | Batwcav and oBytwoav and =| yvoTwoav and | dvtwoar et
BavTov oBévTav yvovTov OvvTwV

Inf. Bavat oBavat yvovat dtvat

Part. Bac, -doa, -4v | oBeic, -eioa, -év | yvobc, -ovca, -ov | dve, -ioa,-tv

| G. Bavrog G. oBévrToc G. yvévto¢ G. divToc.

Remark. The Opt. form dé7», instead of dvijv, is not found in the Attic
dialect, but in the Epic. In the Common language, the second Aor. Mid. is
formed in only a very few verbs; e. g. wéTouar (§ 125, 23), mpiactar, to buy
(§ 135, p. 165).

Summary of Verbs with a second Aor. like Verbs in -ze.
Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form:
1. didodcoxw, to run away (§ 122, 6), Aor. (APA-) soa, -as,

-d, -duev, -até, -aour, Subj. b00, Seas, Sve, doator, doamer, Soaze,

doaou(v), Opt. doaiyr, Imp. dea, -azw, Inf. dear, Part. deas,

~EO0, -0Y. |
2. wécouct, to fly (§ 125, 23), Aor. (IT_A-) éncyy, Inf. azure,

Part. 2ré¢; Aor. Mid. ézrepyr, rtaoO- ae.

3. oxehdo or oxedéw, to dry, make dry, second Aor. (2KAA-)

éoxdny, to wither (Intrans.), Inf. oxdqvat, Opt. oxAaigv (§ 117, 2).
4, pda-vo, to come before, anticipate ($119, 5), second Aor.

EMony, PIRrat, PIAS, PIO, Poainr.

5. zac, to burn, Trans. (§ 116, 2), second Aor. (KAE-) éxcny,*

IT burned, Intrans.; but first Aor. gavoa, Trans.

6. 60, to flow (§ 116, 3), Aor. (PTE-) é66v72,* I flowed.

7. yaiow, to rejoice (§ 125, 24), Aor. (X_APE-) éyconr.*

8. adioxopat, to be taken, Aor. (AAO-) qhov and sada (§ 122, 1)
9. Bio, to live, second Aor. éBiwr, Subj. Bid, -@e, -@, ete., Opt.
tony (not Broinr, as yrotnr, to distinguish it from Opt. Impf.

Brow), Inf. Brovet, Part. Buovg; but the Cases of the Part. Buds

are supplied by the first Aor. Part. Biodcag. Thus, aveBicor, I came

1 Compounds, e. g. dvaBnd1, avaBd, avaByte ; ardoBndet; dtayvods; avadrSe
* These are strictly Pass. Aorists, though they have an Act. Intrans. sien
fication —Tr.

§ 143. ] THE IRREGULAR VERB o(da. 175

to life again, from avapwicxouat.—The Pres. and Impf. of Biom
are but little used by the Attic writers; instead of these, they em-
ploy the corresponding tenses of (a, which, on the contrary, bor-
rows its remaining tenses from ftom; thus, Pres. (9; Impf. gor
(§ 97, 3); Fut. Brdcowas; Aor. éBiov; Perf. BeBimxa; Perf. Pass.
BeBioorot, Part. BeBiopévos.

10 gvo, to bring forth, produce, second Aor. égvv, I was pro-
duced, born, I sprung up, arose, was, puvat, pus, Subj. uw (Opt.
wanting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first Aor. épica, J produced,
Fut. giow, Iwill produce. The Perf. 2éqixa, also has an intran-
sitive sense, and also the Pres. Mid. qvouou, and the Fut. guvcopas.

§ 143. Of d @ (stem EIZ., to see), I know.

PERFECT.

. | oida Subj. eida Imp.
oio Sa eld7e¢ tote 2
oide(v) eld7 toro eldévat
lotov, toTov eldnTov, -7Tov toTov, loTwy
¥ 5] ~

. | comer eldGuev Part.

.| lore elO7TEe LOTE * eldQ¢, -via, -6¢
iodot{v) eldGou(v) LoTwoav

PLUPERFECT.

Ind. S. 1. | gdecv* Dual Pl. qderpev
2. | yee and -eroSa HOELTOV WOELTE
3. | gdet(v) Roeitnv moecav
Opt. Sing. eideinv, -nc, -7; Dual eidetgrov, -a7yv; Pl. eideinuev (seldom
eldeiuev), eideinte, eidciev (seldom eideinoay).
Fut. etoopat, I shall know—Verbal adjective, éoréov.
| Sévo.da, compounded of oida, I am conscious, Inf. cvverdévat, Imp. civiott,
Subj. ovvesd6, ete. :

LXXIV. Vocabulary.

Aiyua, -atoc, 70, blood. ‘Gro-KptTTo, to conceal. wapa-rétowat, to fly away.
akoAactwc, with impu- dypyoroc, -ov, uscless. mp6-o010a, to know before-
nity, extravagantly, li- Bon éw, to hasten tohelp, hand.
centiously. assist. mpooeToc, -7, -OV, OF
aro-Baivo, to go away. div, to go or sink into, 7pdceror, -7, -ov, add-
ano-ylyvaoko, to reject; put on. ed (by art), artificial.
w. éuavroy, give oneself éx-7érouat, to fly away. Tépué, -yoe, , & wing.
up, despair. éurinAnut ti tivoc, to fill. ovyytyvacke, w. dat., to
aro-d.dpacko, w. acc., to vexpoc, -d, -6v, dead; 6 pardon. [that.
run away from. vekpoc, a Corpse. Gore, w. inf. and ind., so

1 First Pers. #6, second #é700a, third #67, are considered as Attic forms.

176

VERBS.—DEPONENTS MIDDLE MOST IN USE.

[§ 144.

Oi dvSpwrot tiv aAnSerav yvovar oxeddovewy. Trad. ceavtov. Tvavat

Narexdv pétpov.

Tove akoAdoTw¢ BidcavrTac.

'Ofcia HOovy wapantdoa GSavet.
Ol orparnyol éyvwoar® toic¢ woAitatc Bontetv. Mymore ceavtoy
Aaidakoc moifcac mtépvyac mpocteTag eénty peta Tod "Ixapov.

dvSporote Edu.
TOV O€OTOTHY.
ITOyvoc.

‘H roduc éxwvdbvevoevy tnd TOY TOdEuiny GAGvat.
Liyyvesi yor, @ waTep. Atpoc péytotov aAyog
'O dodAog éXaGev! dxodpac

Gedye

DoAAac évérAnoe tiv woALy ddvov Kal vexpOv, Ocre Tov Kepapeckov* aivare pu7~

vat.
AovTa.

ovre Oikag AOEcay, OUTE Vvd"oUG.

Go away, O boy!

The general determined to assist the town.

Ol roréuoe THY yav TeudvTect anéBnoav. “Axypynotov mpoeidévat TA MEA-
Oi dyadol maytwr pétpov icacty (know how) éxeww.

TloAAot avSpwroz

The whole town flowed with blood. ‘The bird flew away.
The father pardoned the son.

Mayest thou not live licentiously! Men rejoice to know (aor. part.) the truth.

The town was taken by the enemies.

from his master.
(aor. part.).

Let us not despair.
The boy rejoiced when he saw (aor. part.) the bird fly away
It is well in everything to know (how) to observe moderation.

The slave ran away

Never praise a man, before (7plv av, w. subj.) thou knowest him well. (cade).

§144. Deponents (§118, Rem.),and Active Verbs whose
Future hasa Middle form. :

a. List of Deponents Middle most in use.

’Ayevilopat, to contend,
aixilouat, to treat imju-
riously,
aivitrouat, to speak darkly,
aioSavouat, to perceive,
aitiaouat, to accuse,
axéopuat, to heal,
axpodouat, to hear,
cKpoBorifouar, to throw
Srom afar, to skirmish,
éAAopnat, to leap,
avaB.aokopat, to restore to
life, or to live again,
évakowvéopat, to communi-
cate with,
amteySavopuat, to be hated,
aroAoyéopat, to speak in
defence,
apaouat, to pray,
conagopat, to welcome,
adgikvéouat, to come,
B.alouat, to force,
yéyvouat, to become,

1 § 121, 13.

2 determined.

detoouat, to greet,
déyouat, to receive,
draxedevopat, to exhort,
dwpéopat, to present,
éyxeAebvoual, to urge,
évTéAAouat, to command,
émikeAevoual, to urge,
épyalouat, to work,
evyouat, to pray,
nyéopal, to go before,
Setouat, to see,
idopuat, to heal,
iAacKopat, to propitiate,
nravouat, to ride,
oxvpivoua, to exert one’s
strength,
kavxaopat, to boast,
Kolvodoyéouat, to consult
with,
KTGoual, to acquire,
Anifouat, to plunder,
Aoyilouat, to consider,
Avpaivouat, to maltreat,

t
L
2
£

3a place in Athens.

AwBaouat, to insult,
pavTevopat, to prophesy,
papTipouat, to call to wit-
Ness,
paxouat, to fight,
péugouat, to blame,
Eenxvaviouat, to devise,
juléopat, to imitate,
pvdéouat, to speak,
pvSoroyéouat, to relate,
pevkaouat, to low,
EvAebouat, to gather wood,
EvAifouat, to gather wood,
ddvpopuat, to mourn,
oiwvifouat, to take omens
by birds,
dA0dvponat, to lament,
opxéouat, to dance,
bcdpaivouat, to smell,
TapatTéouat, to entreat,
mapaxedevoual, to urge,
Tapayvdéouat, to encour:
age,

4§119.

§144.] DEPONENTS PASSIVE.—ACT. VERBS WITH MID. FUT. 177

mappnovacoua, to speak oKxéntopat, to consider, inicxvéopuat, to promise,
Sreely, oratudoual, to estimate imoxpivopat, to answer,

méToual, to fly, (distance), peidopat, to spare,

mpayparevouat, to be busy, oroxacouat, to aim at, ptéyyoua, to speak,

Tpooruracoua, to make a otpatevouat, to goto war, diAodpovéouat, to treat
preamble, otparoredebouat, to en- kindly,

mpodacifouat, to offer as camp, xapilouat, to show kindness,
an excuse, Tekwaipouat, to limit, Xpaopat, to use,

rovtavouat, to inquire, Textaivopat, to fabricate, avéopat, to buy.

oéGopat, to reverence, TEexvaouat, to build,

-

b. List of Deponents Passive most in use.

’A2Xaopat, to wander, évavTLoouat, to resist, 700LaL, to rejoice,
axSouat, to be displeased, évduvpuéouat, to reflect, kpéuauat, to hang,
BobAouat, to wish, évvoéouat, to consider well, wvoarrouat, to loathe,
Bpvxdopuat to roar, ériuédouat and -éouat, to oiouat, to suppose,
déouat, to want, take care, Tpotvpuéouat, to desire,
dtavoéouat, to think, ériorauat, to know, oéBouat, to reverence,

dvvapuat, to be abie (Mid. ebAaBéouat, to be cautious,
Aor. only Epic),

Remark. “Ayayat, to wonder, aidéopat, to reverence, dpeifouat, to exchange,
dutAAaopat, to contend, aroxpivoyat, to answer, atoAoyéopat, to apologize, 4pvéo-
pat, to deny, avAicoua:, to lodge, dvadéyouat, to converse with, éxivéeouat, to reflect
upon, Aodopéouat, to reproach, uéudopat, to blame, opéyopat, to desire, wepdouat, to
try, Tpovoéouat, to foresee, dtAogpovéouat, to treat kindly, and ¢cAotipéopat, to be
ambitious, have both a Mid. and Pass. form for their Aorist. Of these, dveuaz,
aidéoual, duiAddopar, apvéouat, draréyouat and dtAoTiuéouat, are more frequently
in the Pass. Aor.; on the contrary, dyeiBouat, aroxpivoyat, drodoyéouat, wéu-
gouat and dcAogpovéowa, more frequently in the Mid. Aor.

e List of Active Verbs mostin use with a Middle Future.

»Ayvoéw,* not to know, Baiva, to go, detoat, to fear,

d0w,t to sing, 2160, to live, didpackw, to run away,
axovw,t to hear, BréTO,* to see, 6t@kw,* to pursue,
diahalo,* to cry out, Godu,t to cry out, éykoulaca, to praise,
duaptavo,t to miss, yeAaw,t to laugh. eit, to be,

aravTaw,t to meet, ynpackw, to grow old, ératvéw,* to praise,
éroAabw,t to enjoy, ytyvacke, to know, émlopKéw, to perjure one’s
dpralw.t to seize, daxve, to bite, self,

Badilu, to go, dapSave, to sleep, éoSiw, to eat,

* Also with Fut. Act., in writers of the best period —Tr.

¢ Also with Fut. Act., but only in the later writers. Comp. Rost. Gr. Gram.,
§ 82, VI.D,c). The forms of the Fut. Mid., however, are to be preferred —Tx.

178

Savpilw,* to wonder,

téw,* to run,

Snpaw, Onpevw,* to hunt,

Siyyave, to touch,

Srv7oKe, to die,

Spdcka, to leap,

Kava, to labor,

K2Aaiw,t to weep,

KAérTo, to steal,

Korala,* to punish,

Koualo,* to indulge in fes-
tivity,

Reyxave, to obtain,

AauBavo, to take,

Atyucw, to lick,

uavSave, to learn,

ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE.

véw, to swim,
oida, to know,
oiuasw,* to lament,
dA0Abfo,* to howl,
ouvul,t to swear,
dpa, to see,
maifw, to sport,
Tacx, to suffer,
mndaw, to leap,
sive, to drink,
mint, to fall,
tAéw, to sail,
avéw, to blow (but
TvEvow),
mviyw,t to strangle,
rotéw,* to desire,

Gvu-

[$ 144.

Tpockuvéw,* to reverence,
péo, to flow,

olyéw, to be silent,
olwraw,t to be silent,
ox@nTa, to sport,
orovdatw, to be zealous,
ovpitTa, to pipe,
tixTw,* to produce,
TpEX@, to run,

Tpoye, to gnaw,
Tvyxavu, to obtain,
Twtalvo, to rail at,
gevyo, to flee,

oSave,t to come before,
xaokw, to gape,
vanta,* to contazn.

BeBe ND: An Re.

CHAPTER I.
ELEMENTS OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE.

§ 145. Nature of a Sentence.—Subject.—Predicate.

1. Synrax treats of sentences. A sentence is the expression | of
a thought in words; e. g. 20 G0dov Gadde, the rose blossoms, 0 0 y-
Fowmos Ivyr0g éorw, tO uadov Gddov Galle év 7H tow MATOOS “YT.
Every thought must contain two parts or ideas related to each
other and combined into one whole, viz. the idea of an action and
of an oject from which the action proceeds. The former is called
the predicate, the latter, the subject. The subject, therefore, is that
of which something is affirmed, the predicate, that which is affirmed
of the subject ; e. g. in the sentences, 20 6dd0v Gadde, 6 cv 9-000
og Syytos éotW,—t0 60doy and 6 &»Pouzoe are the subjects, Oaa-
det and Svryz0¢ éozwy, the predicates.

2. The Greek language expresses the relation of ideas partly by
inflection; e. g. 20 Gdd0r PadA-E1, 0 oreatiarns MOY-ET Ot, OF OTOA-
TLOT Ob paz. OVTAL ae by separate words; e. g. the tree 7s
green, 0 dv Pgemos Oryntos éotw. In this last example, the notion
or idea contained in en Focnos is connected by éoziy to that con-
tained in Syyz0c.

3. The subject is either a substantive,—a substantive-pronoun or
numeral-—an adjective or participle used as a substantive,—an ad-
verb which becomes a substantive by prefixing the articlex—a pre-
position with the Case it governs,—or an infinitive. Indeed, every
word, letier, syllable or combination of words may be considered as
a neuter substantive, and hence can become a subject, the neuter
article being usually prefixed.

TO pddov Garret, the rose blossoms. "Ey & rape. Tpeic 7A8ov. ‘0 |
cogdc etdaivnar éoriv, the wise man is happy. Oi réAat dvépeior hear, the an-.
cients were snl: aoa Ol wept MiAriadny Karoe éuaxéoavro. TO de-

G@oKerv Karov éorw. Td et civdecpdc dorw, the ct isa conjunction.

)

180 SYNTAX.—SUBJECT.—PREDICATE.—AGREEMENT. [§ 146.

4. The subject is in the nominative.

Rem. 1. The subject is in the Ace. in the construction: of the Acc. with the
Inf, see § 172. In indefinite and distributive designations of number, the sub-
ject is expressed by a preposition and the Case it governs; e.g. ei¢ TETTAPAaS
HiSov, about four came; So kaw’ éxdoroue, singuli, cata Evy, singulae gentes.

Rem. 2. In the following cases, the subject is not expressed by a separate
word :

(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun, it is not expressed, unless it is
particularly emphatic; e. g. Ypagow, ypadgerc, ypudget.

(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro-
priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one, the subject being
in a measure contained in the predicate, or, at least, indicated by it and hence
readily known; e. g. évet of ToAEpLoL dvnadov, Exapvée (sc. 6 xppvé, the her-
ald proclaimed) toic "EAAnow mapackevacacva. So onpalve. TH oGArtyye,
doGArcyésey (sc. 6 caAmixrie, the trumpeter gives the signal with the trumped). So
also teu, it rains, videt, i snows, BpovrTG, it thunders, acTpa7T EL, se, O
Zeve, it lightens, are to be explained.

(c) When the subject is easily supplied from the context; thus, e. g. in such
expressions as ¢aci, Aéy 0vcl, ete. the subject avPpwroz is regularly omitted.

Rem. 3. The indefinite pronouns, one, they, are commonly expressed by Tic,
or by the third Pers. Pi. Act. e. g. Aéyovet, daci, or by the third Pers. Sing.
Pass., e. g. 2éyeTat, or by the personal Pass., e. g. ddodpar, otAtj, they love me,
you, etc., or by the second Pers. Sing., particularly of the Opt. with av, e. g.
gaine av, dicas, you may say, one may, can say.

5. The predicate is either a verb, e. g. zo 60d0v & &1.21 1, or an
adjective, substantive, numeral or pronoun in connection with elvett.
In this relation e/vas is called a copula, since it connects the adjec-
tive or substantive with the subject so as to form one thought; e. g.
zo 6b00v xakov éorir. Kipoo nr Bacthets. Bd yobua
névtay toaTOS. Oi dvdges our tosis. Tovro co moayuee
gozt70de. Without the copula siya, these sentences would stand
zo 6080v —xahov. Kigog—Baordeve, etc., and of course would
express no thought.

Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish the use of e/va, when it expresses a
distinct independent idea of itself, that of being, existence, abiding, etc., e. g. ort
Seéc, there is a God, God is, exists, from the use of the same word as a copula.

In the former sense it can be connected with an adverb; e. g. Zwxparne Hv del
ody Toic véolg; KAAGE, KaKGe sor, it is well, ill, ete.

§ 146. Agreement.

1. The finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in number
and person; the predicative* or attributive adjective, participle,

* When the adjective belongs to the predicate, and is used in describing what
is said of the subject, it is called predicative; but when it merely ascribes some

§ 146. | SYNTAX.—AGREEMENT. 181

pronoun or numeral, and the predicative substantive, or the sub-
stantive in apposition (when it denotes a person), agree with the
subject in gender, number and Case (nominative).

"Ey6 ypadu, od ypadete, obto¢ ypager. ‘O dvdpwrog Yuytéc tori. ‘H dperH
Kaan éotiv. TO xpdypa aioypov éotiv. Ol “EAAnveg moheuixdratro joav. ‘O
Kaho¢g Taic, 7 Cod) yuvn, TO uiKpdv Téxvov. Kipog hy Bactdebc ; here the pre-
dicate PaovAci¢ is masculine, because the subject is masculine. Toyipic iv
BaciAea; here the predicate is feminine, because the subject is feminine. Ki-
pec, 0 BaatAcic, Téuvpic, 7 Bactreva

2. As sivas, when a copula, takes two nominatives, viz. one of
the subject and one of the predicate, so also the following verbs,
which do not of themselves express a complete predicative idea,
take two nominatives: vacoyeur, to be, yiyvec9 at, to become, pivat, to
arise, spring from, to be, avgavecOat, to grow, pévew, to remain, xa-
taotivae (from xaPiornut), to stand, Soxsir, éoxévae and gaivecat,
to appear, dndovoFat, to show one’s self, xadeiod a, ovoualecOas and
AéyecD at, to be named, axovew, to hear one’s self called, to be named
(like Lat. audire), aigeioG ot, axodsixyveda and xzoivecSas, to be
chosen something, vowiledot, to be considered something, and other
verbs of this nature.

‘O Kipog éyéveto Pacthede tov Uepody, Cyrus became king of the Persians.
Ala tobtwv 6 Pihimnoc nbeEHnG nH wéyac, by these means Philip grew great. ’AA-
KiBiadng ypédn otpatnyoc. ’Avti diAwv kat Sévov viv Kohaxeg Kal Veoic
éySpot dkovovetv (audiunt), instead of friends, etc., they (hear themselves called)
are called flatterers and enemies of the gods.

RemaRk. Instead of the second Nom., several of these verbs are also con-
nected with adverbs; then they express a complete predicative idea; e. g. Td
aviiog kaAGo absavertat, the flower grows beautifully. 'Thus, the verbs yi y-
veoae and ¢ivaz particularly, are connected with the adverbs diya, ywpic,
éxac, éyyic, dic; e.g. Toi¢ ’"AUnvaiwy otpatnyoic éyiyrovto diva al yvapat,
the views of the Athenian commanders were divided; Ta rpaypata ob TW TéGL-
kev, the affairs were of such a nature.

LXXV. Lzercises for Translation from English into Greek.
(§§ 145 and 146).

Piety is the beginning of every virtue. To mortal men God is (a) refuge.
The wise strive after virtue. Learning (to learn) is agreeable both to the youth
and to the old man. Before the door stood about four thousand soldiers. The
(maxim), know (aor.) thyself, is everywhere useful. The general commanded
(aor.) (them) to hold (their) spears upon (ei¢) the right shoulder, till the trum-

quality to the substantive with which it agrees, it is called attributive; e. g. in
the expression 6 dyadu¢ avip (the good man), «yaSé¢ is attributive, but in 6 avijp
tore ayatéc (the man is good), it is predicative —Tr.

16

182 SYNTAX.—AGREEMENT. [§ 147.

peter should give a signal (with) the trumpet. The herald made (aor.) procla-
mation to the soldiers to prepare themselves for (e/¢) battle. We admire brave
soldiers. Without self-control we can practise (aor.) nothing good. Semiramis
was queen of Assyzvia. Socrates always passed his time in public. After (wera,
w. acc.) death, the soul separates from the irrational body. It is (= has itself)
difficult to understand (aor.) every man thoroughly. The Loves are “perhaps
called archers on this account, because the beautiful wound even from a dis-
tance. Tyrtaeus, the poet, was given (aor.) by the Athenians to the Spartans
as a general. The Lacedaemonians were (xatacr7vat) the authors of many ad-
vantages to the Greeks. Minos, who (part.) had ruled very constitutionally and
had been careful to do justice, was appointed (aor.) judge in (xara, w. gen.)
Hades. Virtue remains ever unchanged. If (éay, w. subj.) one, chosen (to be) a
general, has subjected (aor.) an unjust and hostile city, shall we call him unjust ?

§ 147. Hxceptions to the General Rules of Agree-

ment.

(a) The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree with
the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Constructio xata
ouvecty or ad intellectum).

To rAqSoc éxeBonSynoarv, the multitude brought assistance; the verb would reg-
ularly be singular here, but is put in the plural, because 7A7o¢ being a collec-
tive substantive, includes many individuals. ‘O orpatd¢ dxéGBaivov. Td otpa-
Tomedov avexopovv. Td welpaxiov éoTe Kadoc, the boy is beautiful ; here the sub-
stantive is neuter, while the adjective is masculine, agreeing with the subject,
therefore. only in sense. TO yvvaixidv éote Kary.

(b) When the subject is not to be considered as something defi-
nite, but as a general idea or statement, the predicative adjective
is put in the neuter singular, without any reference to the gender
and number of the subject. In English we sometimes join the
word thing or something with the adjective, and sometimes translate
the adjective as if it agreed with the substantive. _

Oik dyatov roavKotpavia: eic Koipavoc éoTw, a plurality of rulers is
not a good thing, etc. Ai uetTaBoAat Aut pO», changes are troublesome. ‘“H
povapxia kpatiotToy.

Rem. 1. When the predicate is a demonstrative pronoun, it agrees with the
subject in gender, number and Case, as in Latin; e. g. Oiré¢ éoriy 6 avnp, this
is the man. Adtn éoti mnyn Kal apyn mavTwv Tév KaxGv. Todré éore Td av-
Soc. Yet the Greeks very often put the demonstrative in the neuter singular,
both when it is a subject and predicate; e.g. TodTé éorw 7 dtkalocvry,
this is justice. Todro éoTe nyyi Kat apyy yevécews

(c) Verbal adjectives in -zd¢ and -zéog frequently stand in the
neuter plural instead of the singular, when they are used imperson-
ally like the Latin verbal in -dum.

§ 147. ] SYNTAX.—AGREEMENT, 183

Ieora éore roic¢ piaoic, we must trust friends, instead of mictuv got. So
also, when the subject is contained in an infinitive or in a whole clause, where
in English we use the pronoun it; e. g. T7v merpopévgy poipay 1dtivara
oti aropuyety Kai Sed, it is impossible even for God to escape the destined fate.
Aja éorwy (it is evident) bre det Eva yé Twa Hydv Baciiéa yevéoda.

(d) A subject in the neuter plural is connected with a verb in the
singular.

Ta Coa rpéxer. Ta mpdypata éore Kara. Kaxod avdpdc ddpa
évyow obK Ey et.

Rem. 2. When the subject in the neuter plural denotes persons or living be-
ings, the verb is often put in the plural, to render the personality more promi-
nent; e. g. Ta TéAy (magistracy, magistrates) Tove oTpaTiatac ékéreppay. This
is also the case, when the idea of individuality or plurality is to be made particu-
larly prominent; e. g. avepd qoav troxywpotvtwy Kal innwy Kal dvOpdoruv
ixvyn ToAAa (many tracks appeared).

(e) A dual subject is very often connected with a plural predi-
cate.

Ato dvdpe éuayéicarvTto. 'AdeEirgoO Oto Roar Kahoi.

Rem. 3. The dual is not always used, when two objects are spoken of, but
only when they are of the same kind, either naturally connected, e. g. wéde,
xelpe, OTe, two feet, etc., or such as are considered as standing in a close and
mutual relation, e. g. adeAda, two brothers.

Rem. 4. A feminine substantive in the dual has its attributive in the mascu-
line dual; e. g. dudw TO mOdAce; here TH (masculine) agrees with réAce (femi-
nine), and so in the other examples. To yuvaixe. “Augdw todTw TO jpépa.
Toiv yevecéoww. TotvtTw T® Téxva.

(f) When the predicate is a superlative, and stands in connection
with a genitive, the gender of the superlative is commonly like that
of the subject, as in Latin, more seldom like that of the genitive.

bFdv0e yahewartartoc éore téy vow. ‘O HALOC TavTAV AauTpé-
Tatoc éoriv. Sol omnium rerum lucidissimus est.

LXXVI. Hxercises on § 147.

The army of the enemy retired. The people of the Athenians believe that
(acc. w. inf.) Hipparchus, the tyrant, was killed (aor.) by Harmodius and Aris-
togiton. Envy is something hateful. Drunkenness is something burdensome
to men. Inactivity is indeed sweet, but inglorious and base. Beautiful indeed
is prudence and justice, but difficult and laborious. To learn from (7apé, w.
gen.) (our) ancestors, is the best instruction. Together with the power, the pnde
of man also increases. Money procures men friends and honors. Afilictions
often become lessons to men. The misfortunes of neighbors serve (= become)
as (ei¢) a warning tomen. The Athenian (of the Athenians) courts of justice,
misled by a plea, often put to death the innocent (= not doing wrong), while
fdé) they often acquitted the guilty (= wrong-doers), either moved to sympathy

184 § SYNTAX.—AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. [§ 147».

(sympathizing) by (éx) the plea, or because the guilty had spoken (aor.) grace-
fully. The two long roads lead to (ei¢) the city. The Spartan youths, in the
streets, kept their hands within the mantle. The enemy possessed themselves of
two great and magnificent cities. The eagle is the swiftest of all birds. ‘Virtue

is the fairest of all blessings.

§ 147. Agreement when there are several subjects.

1. Two or more subjects require the verb or copula to be plural.
When the subjects are of like gender, the adjective is of the same
gender, and in the plural; but when the subjects are of a different
gender, then, in case of persons, the masculine takes precedence of
the feminine and neuter, and the feminine of the neuter; but in
case of things, the adjective is often in the neuter plural, without
reference to the gender of the substantives..

'O OiAunmoc Kal 6 "AREEavOpOS TOAAG Kal SavuacTa Zpya am Ed Et-
Eavto. ‘0 Lwoxparngs kai Oo WAdtwovyoav cogot. ‘'H ugrnp kal
n Svyatyp hoav kahai. ‘“H OpyH nai 7 dovvecia etot Kkakat.
‘O advap Kat 7 yury dyatot ciow. H yuvy wal ta tTéeava ayatvat
siowv. ‘Qc cide TaTEpa TEekal eyTépa kaladeAgode Kal THY EarToOd yv-
vaika aixyparotoug yeyevnméevore, édaxpvoevy. ‘H ayopad xkaitTé rpr-
ravetov lapiv Aide goxnwéiva gy. AtivortexairrAivbor wat Ebra
kal Képapocg ataxtwc Epplippéva odd&y YpHolma éorwy.

Rem. 1. Sometimes the verb and adjective agree, in form, with the nearest
subject; this is particularly the case, when the predicate precedes the subjects;
e. g. didel ce 6 TaTHp Kal 4 unTnp and ayavo¢g éoTLv 6 TaTHP Kal H uATHP.
Sometimes where the verb follows different subjects, it agrees with the first, the
other subjects being thereby made subordinate; e. g. BaordAede d& Kai of ovy
avTG OLOKovV eioninTel. |

2. When several subjects of different persons are connected, the
first person takes precedence of the second and third, but the second
of the third; and the verb is put in the plural.

"Eyo Kal od ypadoper, ego et tu scribimus; éy Kal éxetvoc ypadouer, ego et ille
scribimus ; éy® Kai od Kai éxeivoc ypadouer, ego et tu et lle scribimus ; od Kal éxei-
voc ypadgere, tu et ille scribitis; éyO Kal éxeivor ypadouev, od Kal éxeivot ypadere,
hueic kal éxeivor ypadouer, dueic Kal éxelvog ypadgere.

Rem. 2. In addition to a subject-nominative which expresses the idea of plu-
rality, there is often one or more denoting the parts of which the first is com-
posed (cy7a*% ka bAov Kat pépoc); e.g.of orpateOrar of piv hvavtid-
Snoav Toi¢c ToAEuiow, of dé axédvyov, some of the soldiers withstood the enemy,
but the others fled; here otpatiGtac denoting the whole is in the Nom., instead of
being in the Gen. and governed by its parts of wév and oi dé.

* A construction by which the whole is named, and a part is put in apposi-

tion with the whole, instead of the whole being in the Gen. and governed by a
word denoting a part—Tr.

§ 148.] SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. 185

LXXVII. Hxercises on § 147».

Socrates and Plato were very wise. Nisus and Euryalus were friends (in)
word and deed. Wisdom and health were always the greatest blessings of man
(plur.). The Spartan Cleonymus and Basias (an) Arcadian, two gallant men,
died in tlte battle fought against (mpdc) the Carduchians. Shame and fear are
innate (in) man. I and my brother love thee. You and your friends have
done me many favors. The citizens ran in different directions, every one to
(éxi, w. acc.) his own. When (my) friends saw me, they embraced me, one on
one side, the other on the other.* (Of) the citizens, some rejoiced over (é7i, w.
dat.) the victory of Philip, others mourned.

§148. The Article.

1. The substantive as a subject, as well as in every other relation,
takes the article 0, 7, zo, the, when the speaker wishes to represent
an object as a definite one, and to distinguish it from others of the
same kind. ‘The substantive without the article represents the idea
im a merely general and indefinite manner, without any limitation ;
e. g. avoumos, man, i. e. an individual or some one of the race of
men; but the substantive with the article makes the object definite,
indicating that such was the view taken of it by the speaker; e. g.
0 ay Foose, i. e. the man whom I am considering, or have in view,
and whom I consider as a different individual from the rest of men.
So gidocogia, philosophy in general, 7 gthocopia, philosophy as a
particular science, or a particular branch of philosophy.

Rem. 1. The article is also used, where one object is to be distinguished from
or contrasted with, another of a difierent kind; e.g. woAeuoc obK éoTiy Gvev
Kivovvur, war is not without danger; but 6 wéXEe pos ov avev Kivddvur, 7 0
eipnvn axivdvvoc; here x6Aeno¢ takes the article because it is contrasted with
elonvn.

Rem. 2. The substantive, as a predicate, usually omits the article, the idea
conveyed by it being mostly of a general nature; e.g. vdé 7 quépa éeyéveTo,
day became NIGHT, éundpioy 0 hy To x wpioyr, and the place was an EMPORIUM;
—but if the predicate denotes something definite, before mentioned or weil
known, it takes the article; e.g. ovveBaaAetTu Tov ’OpéaTyY TodTor Eival,
he concluded that this was Onustxs (the one before mentioned).

2. Hence the article is also used to denote the whole compass ot
the idea, since the speaker considers an object as the representative
of all others of the same class, and therefore as expressing a definite
whole; e. 2.0 &ySoanmo0s Oryzds gst, man (i. e. all men) ts
mortal; n avdoeia nahn éoru, i. e. everything which is under-

*® Gdihog GAdov ev, alius aliunde.
16*

186 SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. [§ 148.

stood by the term @vdoeia;—z 0 7 a1 a éoriv 460, milk is sweet, i. e.
milk in general, all milk.

Rem. 3. When the English indefinite article a or an, denotes merely the class
to which a particular thing belongs, the Greck uses the substantive alone with- -
out the article; e. g. a man, avSpwroc.-

Rem. 4. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where according to No
1, it would be used. Such omission occurs, (a) with appellations denoting kin-
dred or relationship, and the like, where the definite relation is obvious without
the article; e. g. maTHp, wnTHp, vidc, adeAddc, waidec, yovetc, avAp (husband).
yuv7y (wife), etc. ;—(b) when two or more independent substantives are united to
form one whole; e. g. maide¢ Kal yuvatkec, TOALG Kat oikias ;—(c) when common
nouns are used as, or instead of, proper nouns; e. g. 7AL0¢, ovpavoc, Gor, used.
of Athens, 76Atc, of a particular city, known from the context, y7, of a particular
country, PactAebc, of a particular king, commonly the king of Persia ;—(d) when
common nouns which are usually specific, and would take the article, are used
in an abstract sense; e. g. 7yetoSat Veote, to believe in gods, 2d’ immov iévat, to
ride horse-back, ért Srey éA¥ eiv, to come to supper, i. e. to eat.

Rem. 5. Abstract nouns, the names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and
vices, generally omit the article, when they are taken in their abstract sense;
e. g. dAntera, owtnpia, cwdpoctyvyn, OtKaLoobyn, émioTHun, eboéBera, GoéBera,
kakia; but if one class of abstracts is to be distinguished from another, or the:
whole compass of a science, etc. is intended, the article is used.

3. The article very often takes the place of the possessive pro-
noun, when it is connected with such substantives as naturally be-
long to a particular person mentioned in the sentence.

Oi yoveig TA TEKVA OTépyoveLy, parents love THEIR children. Kipoc te kaTa-
mnojoac and TOU Gpwatocg TOY Vpaka évédv kal avaBdc ext TOV it-
TOV Ta TAaATE eig TAC YEipag éAaBe, C. having leaped down from HIS
chariot, put on u18 breast-plate, ete.

Rem. 6. The article is often used in a distributive sense; the article is here to
be explained by its giving individuality to the noun with which it is connected ;
e. g. 6 Kipoc trioyvettas doce tpia nusdapeckd TOD myvog TSG OTPATLO-
tT, C. promises to give three half-Darics, A (EACH) month to EACH soldier.

4, The article, being originally a demonstrative pronoun, is of-
ten used where an object, at first stated indefinitely, is named a
second time; for the same reason it is used, when the speaker points
to an object.

‘O Kipog didworv ait pvpiove dapetxotc. ‘O 6? AaBdov Td ypucioyr, C.
wes him ten thousand Darics ; but he taking THE (THAT) money —, where xpvoiov
. the article, because it refers to the preceding dapetxotc. Reviac dyOva &9y-

' €Gewpel OE TOV GyGva Kipo;. ‘Yrip rig kéune ynaogoc Hv, trav dz lr-
méwv 0 AOb0¢ éverdAjnodn, where 7.6¢0¢ is the same as the preceding ynrogog.
Sépe pol, © rai, TO BiBAcoyv, THE (THAT) Look.

5. Proper names as such, i.e so far as in themselves they denote

§ 148. ] SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. 187

individuals, do not take the article; e. g. Sougarys pn. Evingowy
OnBacor Awned amore ous. My oiea Be pire Kegooph é mt-
THY veo Xegdovycor, pyre Dilimnoyv v7 Ap gind-
Lewes zoheujosy, orav wow yuas undevos tov GLLoToioY épiepé-
yous. ‘They, however, take it, when they have been mentioned and
are afterwards referred to, or even when they have not been pre-
viously mentioned, if they are to be represented as well known;
e.g. And tov Thtoaod héeyetao Bogéas tyy LQoeidurav
COMETH. —

Rem. 7. Proper names, even when an adjective agrees with them, do not com-
monly have the article; e. g. copdg Lwxparne, the wise Socrates. The article is
also omitted with a proper name, when a noun in apposition having the article,
follows it; e.g. Kpoicoc, 6 tév Avddy BactAeic. The names of rivers are
usually placed, as adjectives, between the article and the word worapéc; e. g.
6 Inverd¢e worapoc, the river Peneus.

6. When adjectives and participles are used as substantives, they
regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. ‘The English, in
such a case, either employs an adjective, used substantively, e. g.
oi dyaOot, the good, or a substantive, e. g. 70 ayador, the advantage,
the good, 0 héywy, the speaker, or resolves the participle, which is
equivalent to éxeivog o¢ (¢s, gui), by he, who, which, ete. In Greek,
this use of the participle, in all its tenses, is very frequent; e. g.
O nheisota WpEehav (= éxeivog 09 wpEhEt) tO xoWwoY pEyictoP
ziay agvovtat, he who (whoever) benefits the state most, is worthy of
the highest honors ; 3 0 mheiota OMEAU OAS (= es 09 agédyce)
ZO “OWOY MM. T. HELHGATO; O 7A. agelioas TZ. %. pb. T. a8ieod7-
seta. Iloldovg E€ouev rove écoiuws ovvaywrlousvovs. But if
the adjectives are to express only a part of the whole, the article is
omitted; e. g. xaxa uat aioyon éxoakev. The infinitive also has
the article, when it is to be considered as a substantive; e. g. zo
YOU PEY.

7. Ai ot signifies others, oi &2201, the others, the rest, i. e. all
besides those who have been mentioned; 7 An Edidas, the rest of
Greece. “Eteoos, alter, takes the article (0 éregos), to denote
one of two definitely; so of €¢2 01, the one of two parties. ILoi-
hot signifies many, oi tohiot, the many, the multitude, the mass
(in distinction from the parts of the whole); ef wietoue, the

reater part (in distinction from the smaller part uf the whole); ot
heiotot, the most (of a preponderance in number).

8. The Greek can change adverbs of place and time, more sel-

om of quality, into adjectives or substantives, by prefixing the ar-

138 SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. [§ 148.

ticle. In like manner, a preposition with its Case may be consid-
ered as an adjective.

'H ave roduc, the upper city; 6 wetad Téroc, the intervening place; ot évdade ~

dvSpwrot or of évdade; 6 viv Bactreic, of radar cogot dvdpec, of TOTE, H av-
ptov (sc. 7uépa), 6 del, the ever enduring ; oi nav TOv oTpariwror, the best of the
soldiers ; ) Gyav duédeva, the too great carelessness ; 6 mpod¢ Tode UWépoac wéAepoe,
the Persian war; 4 év Xeppovjow tvpavvic.

9. When a substantive having the article has attributive exple-
tives connected with it, viz. an adjective, adjective pronoun or nu-
meral, a substantive in the genitive, an adverb, or a preposition
with its Case (No. 8), then in respect to the position of the article,
the two following cases must be distinguished :

(a) The attributive is connected with its substantive so as to ex-
press a single idea; e. g. the good man = the worthy ; the wise man
= the sage, and denotes an object which is contrasted with others
of the same kind, by means of the accompanying attributive. In
this case, the attributive stands either between the article and the
substantive, or is placed after the substantive with the article re-
peated.

O dyaSde avijp or 6 aviip 6 dyatd¢ (in opposition to the bad man) ; of 7A06-
clo. woAiTat or of moAiTat of ~2ovcroe (in opposition to the poor citizens); 6
Toy ’ASnvaiwr djuog or 6 Ojuog 6 Tv ’AGnvaiwy (in opposition to another peo-
ple); of viv dvbpwror or oi avOourol of viv; 6 mpd¢ Todc Tlépoag mOAE"OC OF 6
moAe“oc 6 mpo¢ Tod¢ Ilépoac (the Persian in opposition to other wars). In all
these examples the emphasis is on the attributive: the good man, the rich citizens,
the Athenian people, men of the present time, the Persian war.

(b) The attributive is not connected with its substantive to ex-
press a single idea, but is to be considered as the predicate of an
abridged subordinate clause; here the attributive is not contrasted
with another object of the same kind, but with itself, inasmuch as it
is designed to show that an object is to be considered, in respect to
a certain property, by itself, without reference to another. The
English in this case uses the indefinite article with a singular sub-
stantive, but with a plural substantive, omits it entirely. Here the

adjective without the article is placed either after the article and.

substantive, or before the article and substantive.

‘O avyp ayadoc or dyato¢ 6 avip, a good man = dyadic ov, the man:

who is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good. Oi dvbpwrer urcover Tov avdpa
Ka@KOV or KaKOY TOv avdpa, they hate a bad man, i. e. they hate the man, inas-
much as, because, if he is bad. (On the contrary, Tov Kakdv avdpa or Tov dvdpa
Tov Kxakov, the bad man, in distinction from the good; hence, rode pév avadovd,

3 148.] SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. 189

aviporoue ayaxGpev, Toic dé Kaxode pucotpev). ‘'O Pacrrede Hdéwe yapilerar

Toi¢g moAitatc ayaoic, good citizens, i. e. if or because they are good; (on the

contrary, Toi¢ dyadoic roAitatc or Toig moAitaLe Toig dyateic, good citizens, in

distinction from bad citizens). ‘O dedc rHv poynv KpaTtioryy TO dvbpéiry

évédvoev, God has implanted in man a soul, which is the most excellent or perfect.

Ob bd Tod HAiov KaTahauTémevolt TA XpOuaTa pEedavTepa Exovoty, have a blacker
skin; the blackness of the skin is the consequence of the katahaurectat ind
TOU HALov.

Rem. 8. When a substantive with the article has a genitive connected with it,
the position under (a) occurs, only when the substantive with its genitive forms
a contrast with another object of the same kind; e.g. 6 rév ’Adjveiwy djpoc or
6 djpoc 6 Téy ’ASnvaiwy (the Athenians, in contrast with another pecple); then
the emphasis is on the genitive. On the contrary, the genitive without the arti-
cle of the governing substantive is placed before or after that substantive, when
this latter substantive expresses a part of what is denoted by the substantive in

the genitive, the emphasis then being on the governing substantive; e. g. 6 d7j-
uo¢g TOv ’ADnvaiwy or Tév ’AUyvaiwy 6 dijyuoc, the people, and not the nobility —
When the genitive of substantive-pronouns is used instead of the possessive pro-
nouns, the reflexives éavrTod, ceav7ov, etc. are placed according to No. 9, (a);
e. g. 6 éuavtot maTHp or 6 TaT7Ip 6 éuavTod, etc.; but the simple personal pro-
nouns /40v, cov, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the substan-
tive which has the article; e.g. 6 maT7p pov or fod 6 TaTHP, 6 TAaTHP cov or cow
6 nathp, 6 marnp abtod (abtic) or aitot (abric) 6 xathp, my, thy, his (ejus)
father, 6 mat7p ear, buoy, abTOv or 7uGv, buGv, adtSv 6 warnp, our, your, their
(eorum) father. In the Sing. and Dual, the enclitic forms are always used.

Rem. 9. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest
with the adjectives @xk poc, wécoc, écxatoc. When the position mentioned
under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attribute forms a contrast with other
objects of the same kind; e. g. 7 wécy OAL, the middle city. in contrast with other
cities; 7 éoxaTn vijooc, the most remote zsland, in contrast with other islands.
When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) occurs, the substantive
is contrasted with itself, since the attributive defines it more clearly. In this
last case, we usually translate these adjectives into English by substantives, and
the substantives with which they agree as though they were in the genitive; e. g.
él TH Oper Gkpw or éw’ Gkpw TO Sper, on the top of the mountain, properly on the
mountain where it is the highest; év uéoy TH wOAeL or év TH WOAEL péon, in the
middle of the city; év éoyaty TH viow or év vow 7H éoxaTn, on the border or edge
of the island.

Rem. 10. In like manner, the word “ovo has the position mentioned under
(a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive; e. g.
6 povoc Taic, the ONLY son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b),
when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate; e. g.‘O waic uévoc or
povoc 6 rai ratlet, the boy plays alone (without company); whereas 6 uévog mai¢
would mean, the ONLY boy plays.

10. Further; on the use of the article with a substantive which has
an adjective agreeing with it, the following things are to be noted:

190° - SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. [§ 148.

(a) The article is used with a substantive which has an adjective
pronoun connected with it, when the object is to be represented as
a definite one; the adjective pronoun is then placed between the
article and the substantive, e. g. 0 guog wazye; on the contrary,
éuos adedges, a brother of mine (undetermined which), Eudes mais, @
child of mine, but 6 guos zaic, my child, a definite one, or the only
one.

(b) The article is used with a substantive, with which zotovtos,
rovogds, TOCOVTOS, THALZOVTOS, agree, when the quality
or quantity designated by these, is to be considered as belonging to
a definite object, or to a whole class of objects previously named.
The article commonly stands before the pronoun and substantive ;
e.g. 0 TolovTOS KINO Guvmactos ot, TA TOLUDTA MoKyuaTo KOhe
gozw. On the contrary, the article must be omitted, when the ob-
ject is indefinite, any one of those who are of such a nature, or are
so great; e.g. toovtoy ardoa ovu av Encavoins, you would not praise
such @ man.

(c) When z&¢, wayvzeg belong to a substantive, the following
cases must be distinguished :

(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as
altogether a general one, the article is not used; e. g. was avPow-
m0¢, every man, i. e. every one to whom the predicate man belongs,
mavtes avtowzot, all men. Here, 2a¢ in the singular, generally
signifies each, every.

(8) When the substantive to which zag, wavzeg belong, is to be
considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes the arti-
cle, which is placed according to No. 9, (a); e. g. 47 maou yn, the
whole earth, oi mavteg modirat, all the citizens without exception, the
citizens as a whole or body. 'This usage is more seldom than that
under («). The same construction occurs also with Oo, but it
is still more rare than with zag. Here the singular za¢ always has
the sense of the whole, all.

(7) When zag is joined with a definite object having the article,
merely for the purpose of a more full explanation, but without any
special emphasis, its position is according to No. 9, (b); 3 ecg ot
SzoaTIAT at Eihovy TO orgatomedoy mov OF Bene TO OT OG:
ZOMESOV; OL GTOUTLOTAL MAVTES OY HMAVTES 01 OTOU-
TLMTAL xahOS Euazécarto. This is by far the most frequent use
of zac, zavtes. The word 01 0¢ also is usually constructed in the

-Same manner, when connected with a substantive having the arti-

§ 148.] SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. 191

cle; e. g. duc civ modw Odyy or Sic Ohyy env nodW, through the whole
city, i. e. simply through the city (not dia tiv olny modu, which
would signify through the WHOLE city).

(d) When ¢xao7o0¢, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the
article is omitted, as with za¢ in the sense of each, every, when the
idea expressed by the substantive is considered as altogether gene-
ral; e.g. xad éxcoryy jugoay, every day, on all days; when, on
the contrary, the idea contained in the substantive is to be made
prominent, then the article is joined with it, and is always placed
according to No. 9, (b); e.g. xara Ty YMeouY ExdoTNY, OF
usually xa® éxaotyy ty YMEeo ay, every single, individual day.

(e) When éxazeoos, cach of two, éugo and auqoregos,
both, belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here
only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken of. The
article is here placed according to No. 9, (b); e.g. éai cay ahev-
eav &xartéowy or imi ExatéQaY TAY MLEVOHY, TA WTA
auMoreoa or augorega TH OTH, &UMoOLY toi» Leenks
or tory YEQOIY amor.

(f) When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the article
is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is indefinite; e. g.
zosi¢ avdoss 7iGov; the substantive, on the contrary, takes the ar-
ticle which is placed,—(a) according to No. 9, (a), when the sub-
stantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea of a unz-
ted whole; e.g. ot trav Bacidgwy oivoyoor Sidoact toig tToLct
Saxtvhows oyovrtes tiv picdyp, i. e. with the three fingers (the
three generally used); indeed the article is very frequently used,
when a preceding substantive without the article, but with a cardi-
nal agreeing with it, is afterwards referred to;—({) according to
No. 9, (b), when the numeral is joined with a definite object merely
to define it more explicitly, without any special emphasis; e. g.
suayecavto ot usta Tegunheovg omdizar yidwoe or yidiot ot pete IT.
Omhiz ct.

(z) Further; substantives to which the demonstratives 0d 7089,
062, éxeivog and avis, tpse, belong, also regularly take the
ar ticle ; ; but the article has only the es of No. 9, (b); & g&

ovzos 0 e710 or 0 ang ovzoS, not 0 ovTOS ITO,

n08 7 prooey or 7 pron 708,

exeivos 0 avo OF 6 ca749 exeivos,

wvtog 0 Bacthevs or 6 Buctheds avtog, but 0 avzog Bacthevg sig-

nifies the same king.

192 SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. [§ 148.

Rem. 11. The article is omitted—(a) when the pronoun is the subject, but
the substantive the predicate; e. g. airy éoriv dvdpoc dperh, this is the virtueof
the man; so there is a difference between TovT@ TG didacKkdAw yodvrat, they have’
this teacher, and TotT 610. yp., they have this man as or for a teacher ;—(b) when
the substantive is a proper name; e. g. obTo¢, éxeivoc, avToO¢ LwKparne.

LXXVIIL. Hzxercises on § 148.

Avarice is (the) root of every vice. Good education is (the) source and root
of excellence. Wisdom is worthy of all diligence. Man has understanding.
Strive, O young man, after wisdom. A kid, standing upon (é7/, w. gen.) a house,
reviled, when he saw a wolf passing by, and railed at him. But the wolf said:
Ho there,* you do not revile me, but the place. An honorable war is better
(more desirable) than a shameful peace. Too great ease is sometimes injurious.
In the war against (7p0c¢) the Persians, the Greeks showed themselves very
brave. The Athenians, persuaded by Alcibiades to strive (aor.) for power upon
(kaTd, w. acc.) the sea, lost (aor.) even their dominion upon the land. The
wealth of Tantalus and the dominion of Pelops and the power of Eurystheus
are celebrated by the ancient poets. The halcyon, a sea-bird, utters a mournful
cry. ‘Those who were born of the same parents and have grown up in the same
house and have been beloved by the same parents, those indeed (67) are of all the
most intimate. Thy mind directs thy body, as it chooses. I saw thy friend.
Through the park in Celaenae flows the river Maeander. On the top of the tree
sits a bird. On (card, w. ace.) Caucasus is a rock, that has (part.) a circumference
of ten stadia. The city lies on (év) the edge of the island. The words of those,
who (of Gv, w. subj.) practise truth, often avail more than the violence of others.
If (24v, w. subj.) such men promise one anything, they perform nothing less than
others who immediately give. The earth bears and nourishes everything fair
and everything good. Among all men it is an established custom, that (acc. w.
anf.) the elder begin every word and work. The generals resolved to put to
death (aor.) not only those (the) present, but all the Mytilenaeans. Most of the
cities sent, every year, (as) a memorial of former kindness, the first fruits of
their grain to the Athenians. Every day, deserters came to Cyrus. Mysus
came in, holding in each of his two hands a small shield. ‘The peltastae ran
(aor.) to (éi, w. acc.) each of the two wings. When Darius was sick and ex-
pecting the end of (his) life, he desired that (acc. w. inf’) both his sons might be
present before him (sibi). Both the ears of the slave were bored through. Both
the cities were destroyed by the enemy. ‘These works are very agreeable to me.
That man is very wise. Dionysius, the tyrant of Syracuse, founded in Sicily a
city directly (ai76¢) under the mountain of Aetna, and named it Adranum. Ac-
cording to these laws the judge decides. This is a sufficient defence. This is
true justice. Not only the soldiers, but the king himself fought very bravely
This they employ (as) a mere pretence. This Charmides recently met me,
dancing. Cyrus sent to Cilicia the soldiers, that Menon had, and Menon, the
Thessalian, himself. The time of maturity for (dat.) woman is twenty years,
for man, thirty years. The three cities lying on (mapa, w. ace.) the sea were
destroyed by the enemy.

* *Q obroc.

§§ 149, 150.] SYNTAX.—CLASSES OF VERBS. 193

: § 149. Classes of Verbs.

The predicate or verb, in reference to the subject, can be express-
ed in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, which
are indicated by different forms.

1. The subject appears as active; e. 9.6 aaig yod pet, to ér-

Sos Faiie1.—The active form, however, has a two-fold signifi-
cation:
(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is directed,
: is in the accusative, and therefore receives the action; e. g.
TUATHO TOY MEH, youpw tyY éntotoAny.—Transitive verb.

(8) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the subject,

e. g. t0 &vFog Pahie, or when the verb has an object in the
Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a preposition; e. g. é7t-
Guo ris aoerhs, yaigw ty copie, Eoyoucu sig tiv nélu—
Intransitive verb.

2. Again, the subject performs an action which is reflected on it-
self; hence the subject is at the same time the object of the action,
i. e. the actor and the receiver of the action are the same; e. g. tUa-
zopot, I strike myself, Bovlevoucu, I advise myself.—Middle or re-
flexive verb.

Rem. 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects on
zach other, e. g. rimtovrat, they strike each other, dvaxedebovrar, they encourage
auch other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb a reciprocal verb.

3. Lastly, the subject appears as receiving the action; e. g. 08
STQUTLOT OL VEO TOY TOhEuiov EicdyOyour, the soldiers were pursued.
—Passive verb.

Rem. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the Greek
as only two tenses, viz. the Fut. and Aor. All the other forms are indicated
y the Mid., inasmuch as the passive action was considered as a reflexive one.

§ 150. Remarks on the Classes of Verbs.

1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, besides
| transitive signification, have also an intransitive or reflexive sense.
Comp. the English expressions, move [Intrans.] and I move the book
‘Trans. |, the tree breaks [Intrans.] and the ice breaks the trees [ ‘Trans. |,
nd the Latin vertere, mutare, declinare) ; thus, e. g. avayew, to draw
ack, regredi, dutyeww, to continue, perstare, shudvyvew, to ride, éuBod-
ey and eichadiew, to fall into or upon, éxBaddew, to spring forth,
‘moudivew, declinare, toénew, like vertere, ozoépew, like mutare,

i7

194 SYNTAX.— CLASSES OF VERBS. [$1500

yew in connection with adverbs, e. g. ev, xaxag eyew, bene, male

se habere, tehevzay, to end, to die, and many others. — .

2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which form

both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive signification, but in

the second Aor. an intransitive:

dia, to wrap up, first Aor. édd0a, I wrapped up, second Aor. édov, I went in, down,

iornut, to place, éotnoa, I placed, éotny, I stood,
gbu, to produce, * éddoa, I produced, = égov, I was produced,
oxéAdw, tomakedry, * (éoxnaa, Poet. Imade dry), ‘ éoxAnv, L withered. ~

So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which form
both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive signification, but
in the second an intransitive :

éyelpa, to awake, first Pf. zy7yepna, [have awakened, second Pf. éyp7yopa, Lam awake, —

OAADL, to destroy, é dAohexa, I have destroyed, “Awa, I have perished,
meidw, to persuade, “« méretxa, I have persuaded, “ nérrousa, LT trust.
Moreover, some second Perfects of transitive verbs which do not
form a first Perf., have an intransitive signification; e. g. ayvuut, te
break, second Perf. ¢ya, Iam broken, njyvumt, to fasten, nénnya, L
am fastened or stand fast, 6jyvuyt, to rend, i6pnya, [am rent, onmea,
to make rotten, céoyna, I am rotten, tix, to smelt, e. g. iron, tétyxeL,
Iam smelted, paiva, to show, xéqyva, I appear.

3. On the signification and use of the middle form, the rey 4

are to be noted:

(a) The middle denotes first, an action which the subject per-_
forms directly upon itself, where in English we use the active verb

and the accusative of the reflexive pronoun; e. g. zvzzouat, L strike

myself, ecrvwapunr, I struck myself, trvwopnot, I shall strike myself.
This use of the middle is rare. Here belong the following verbs —

which are presented in the aorist-form: aéyo, to keep from, amoc-

yéodat, to keep one’s self from, to abstain from; andySou tid, to |
strangle, to hang some one, anaySac% at, to strangle or hang one’s self ;

wactat, xowacdat, to strike one’s self; émPadsoSou twi, to throw
or place one’s self upon something, to apply one’s self to something ;
mavoucd at, to cease (from wave, to cause to cease); deiSacPat, to
show one’s self; particularly verbs which express an action per-

~—

formed by the subject on his own body: Aovoacdat (to wash one’s »
self), viwacdat, adewactat, yoicactot, youvacdoa, xadvpaodat, .
nocpyoauctat, evdvoncGat, exdvoacPat, xElnacFal, cEMavncnoT ot,

and the like. With the exception of the above verbs and some
others, this reflexive relation is commonly expressed by the active
form with the accusative of the reflexive pronoun; e. g. émaweir

§ 150.) SYNTAX.—CLASSES OF VERBS. 195
éavror, dvagtéy savor, to make himself dependent on, amoupun-
cew savtor, edilew saver, mageyew éavedy, anode éavtoy, to free
himself, anoopacrew éavtor, axoxtetvew suveov. Then the middle
form has the signification of the passive, thus, ézaweic@ut, droxtel-
vecDul, EmooparzEecd at, laudari, interfici, jugulari ab alio, and al-
so has a passive form for its Aorist and Future. ~

Rem. 1. In all the middle verbs mentioned above, the action is such as does
hot necessarily refer to the subject; for I can, e. g. as well wash another as my-
self. But the action may be such as necessarily refers to the subject, inasmuch
as the subject which performs the action, must be considered the same as the
object which receives the action; then the middle form expresses the simple
idea of an intransitive action; this is a frequent use of the middle. Here be-
long particularly very many verbs which express an act or perception of the
mind. Only a very few verbs of this kind have their Aor. with a middle form ;
e. g. puAGSacIat, to guard one’s self, to beware (dv2dEat TLvG, to guard any one),
Bovieicactat, to advise one’s self (Bovdedcai twit, to advise any one), yeboacYat,
fo taste (Act., to cause to taste); on the contrary, most verbs of this kind have
their Aor. with a passive form, but have the future in the middle form; e. g.
Wvauvnodjvat, arvauvycersat, to remind one’s self, to remember, recordari (dvapv7j-
sai Tiva, to remind any one), aicxurdqvat, aicyvveicSat, to be ashamed (aicyivat
riva, to make ashamed), g03n97vat, doBjcec8at, to fear (G087%oat teva, to make
ufraid, terrere), mopevd7val, mopetoecS.at, to 90, proficisct (mopeioai TLva, to cause
me to go, to convey one), TepawSAvat, TEparwceavat (woTawbv), to pass over, (xE-
aLGcal TLVva, to cause to pass over, trajicere), mAayxSHva, mAayeEecbat, to wander
“ae circumvagari (xrayEat Tiva, to cause to wander), dviadivar, aviacecat, to
Uijlict one’s self, to be grieved (dvidoul twa, to afflict any one); also dradAvdFvat,
leaxpeSivat, to separate one’s self, discedere, axadiayivat, abire, KolunSqvat, to
leep, Gavijvat, apparere, Tayhvat, to congeal, érapSivat, to raise one’s self, and
nany others.

(b) In the second place, the middle form denotes an-action which
he subject performs on an object belonging to itself, on one con-
1ected with itself or standing in an intimate relation with it. In
anglish, we commonly use here either a possessive pronoun or a
reposition with a personal pronoun; e. g. c¥mzowat, Ecvwdpny chy
eqaryy, I strike, struck my head (tuntew x., to strike the head of
mother), hovoucPat rove 208«ae, to wash one’s own feet (Lovew Tt. 72.,
wash the feet of another), axoxovwaoda te savtod, to conceal
ne’s own affairs ; xaraozpewacd at piv, sibi subjicere terram, to sub-
ugate land for one’s self, avagtycucdai twa, sibi devincire, to make
ependent on one’s zelf, cnolicacdui twa, to loosen for one’s self, to
deem, nogicact«! zt, sit aliquid comparare, to procure for one’s
if (nogilew ci rim, alii aliquid comparare, to procure something
or another), urnonoPal ct, mugaonevaceo0ui tt, sihi comparare, to

196 SYNTAX.—CLASSES OF VERBS. [§ 150.

acquire, prepare for one’s self; apvvacdot TOUS TOAEULOVS, propul-
sare a se hostes, to keep off the enemy from one’s self, andoacdot
xaxk, a se propulsare mala. ‘This use of the middle is much the-
most frequent.

Rem. 2. As the active can be used, when the subject does not itself perform
an action, but causes it to be done by another, e. g. “AAégavdpo¢g tiv woALY Ka-
récxawev, caused the city to be destroyed, so also can the middle be used to express
the same idea, yet with this difference, that with the middle the action always
refers inl some way to the subject; e. g. 6 maT#p Tove waldac éd.dagato, which
either signifies, the father educated his own children, or, if it is clear from the con-
text, he caused them to be educated ; keipacbat, to shave one’s self or to get one's self
shaved; ’Apyetot éavT&v eixdvag Totnoadmevor avévecar cic AcAgovc. La-
pavtéosSar tpare av, to set a table before one’s self, or have it set before one’s self.

Rem. 3. The middle form is often used to express reciprocal actions (see § 149,
Rem. 1). This is particularly the case with verbs signifying to contend, vie with,
converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or compact ; e. g. waxerUat, to
Fight with, (urdGotat, to contend with, ayavilecdat, to strive, dtaréyecat, to con-
verse with, doralecda, to salute, TaiTa ovvtTivectat, mutually to agree on these
points, orovdac oxévdcotar or Toteiotat, to make a treaty (ovovdac xoveiv signi-
fying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not strictly reciprocal, but
where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily supposes two persons or two
parties, as in questions and answers; e. g. tuvddveota and épeotat, to inquire,
aroxpiveoGar and drapeiBectat, to answer, cvuBovArevectat, to consult with one,
ask his advice, and dvakowwovtoFat, to consult one (avaxotvodv being especially used
of consulting oracles).

4. From the reflexive signification of the middle, the passive is
derived. Here the subject permits the action to be performed by
another upon itself. Hence the subject of a passive verb always
appears as the receiver of an action; e. g. uaotiwyovmat, Cyurovpoe
(vz0 twos), I receive blows, punishment, I let myself be struck, pun-
tshed = I am struck, punished (by some one) ; Phanzowot, cdtnovpat,
TI suffer injury, injustice; didcdoxopat, I let myself be instructed, I
receive instruction, I learn, hence vz0 zwos, from some one = do-
ceor ab aliquo ; ; met Soctt, I persuade myself, or I pernut myself to
be persuaded, vm0 twos, by some one = I am persuaded. |

3. For two tenses, however, viz. the Fut. and Aor., there are
separate forms to express a passive action; yet the Aor. Pass. (see
Rem. 2,) of many reflexive and intransitive verbs, is used instead
of the middle; all the other tenses are expressed by the middle
form. Hence the rule: the Fut. and Aor. Mid. have a reflexive or
intransitive signification, not passive, inasmuch as there are sepa-_
rate forms for the Fut. and Aor. Pass.; all the other tenses of the
middle are used at the same time to denote the passive also.

§ 150. | SYNTAX.—CLASSES OF VERBS. 197

Rem. 4. The cause or author of the passive condition or state, is expressed by
the preposition 476 with the Gen.; ¢. g. Ol orpatiéra: bb TOY TOL,EMinYV
&16x0noar, the soldiers were pursued by the enemy. Instead of i6, tp 6¢ with
the Gen. is used, when at the same time the strong and direct influence of a
person, is to be denoted; e. g. dricceoBat, ddixetotar mpbc Tivoc; also rapa
with the Gen. is used, when the author is, at the same time, to be represented as
the person from whose vicinity or neighborhood, or through whose means in-
ternal or external the action has come; hence especially with réureotar, dido-
o8al, ogereioda, ovdréyecdar, Aéyerda, onuaivertar, éxideixvvcdar (demon-
strari); @. g.'O dyyehoc éréugdy mapa BaotAéwc, was sent from being near the
king, by the king. ‘H peyiotn ettuyxia tottw TO dvdpi rapa Vedy dédotat. TloA-
Ad xphuata Kipw rapa tov pidov cuvetAcypéva jv.

6. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that not merely the active of
transitive verbs governing an accusative, may be changed into the
personal passive, but also the active of intransitive verbs governing
the Dat. or Gen.

@¢ovotmar vr tivo, Lam envied by some one, invidetur mihi ab aliquo (from
dvoveiv Tivi, invidere alicui). Iltotetopal, dmtotovpmat bn6 tive, credi-
tur, non creditur mihi ab aliquo (from micteverv, anoteiv tivt). Kat émiBovaci-

ovtec, Kal ém@tBovAevopervor dtagover Tavta Tov ypovorv (from éxiBovAEeberv
Tivi). “AoKeitat TO del TyuGpevov, GmeAEtT as dé TO atipalouevoy (from aye-
Aciv tivoc). So dpxopat, cpatovpat, katagpovoipac tr6 Tivo
(from dapyev, Kpateiv, KaTadpoveiv TLvoc).

Rem. 5. Deponents (§ 118, Rem.) are merely verbs, which have only the
middle form, and a reflexive or intransitive signification.

LXXIX. Ezerctses on §§ 149, 150.

Cyrus, (as he was) riding by, cried out to Clearchus, to lead the army against
(xara, w.acc.) the centre of the enemy. ‘The river Acheron, which (part.) flows
through Thesprotia, falls into the Acherusian lake. Cyrus died fighting very
bravely (aor.). ‘The general commanded the soldiers to go forward, until they
should engage (opt. aor.) with Cyrus. In the third year of the Peloponnesian
war, Lesbos revolted from the Athenians. ‘The Athenians say that (acc. w. inf.)
the first men were born in (= out of) Attica. When the soldiers slept, the
general was awake. Nothing among men, neither good nor evil, has a (§ 148,
9, b) steadfast order. The wicked are pale from anxiety, and lean (= dried un)
in body. Antisthenes prided himself, that (part.) he always showed his garment
torn. Troy was taken by the Greeks. Some came, after (aor. part.) they had
exercised and anointed themselves, others, after they had bathed. Beware of
the flatterer. Abstain from intercourse with bad men. The youths had adorn-
ed themselves with garlands. The Sphinx flung herself from the height. Ajax .
killed himself in a fit of madness (aor. part.). Those whom (02 dv, w. subj.) men
fear (aor.) very much, they cannot look in the face, even if they encourage
(them).* Xerxes, after the sea-fight at (epi, w. acc.) Salamis, departed (aor.)

* od? rapayuSovpévotc avrTiBArérev.

if*

198 SYNTAX.—TENSES AND MODES. [$§ 151, 152.

with a part of his force from Europe. The soldiers separated. Agesilaus tra-

velied (aor.) from Sparta into Asia. Ulysses wandered about (qor.), ten years.

Ninus, the king of the Assyrians, collected (aor.) a respectable army, and made.
(for himself ) an alliance with (mpd6¢, w. acc.) Ariaeus, the king of the Arabians. °
The combatants anointed (aor.) their bodies with oil. What thou hast not (7)

laid up (aor. mid.), take not. When Alexander took (aor.) the city of the The-

bans, he sold (aor.) all the freemen. ‘The Plataeans repelled the attacks of the

Thebans, wherever they met (opé.) (them). Fair is the man, who (part.) has

adorned his mind with culture. Beside necessary evils, men themselves provide

themselves yet others. The soldiers held (aor.) their shields before them. Al-

ways lay up for thyself travelling-money for (e/¢) old age. If (part.) thou hast

acquired reflection, thou wilt neither strive after riches, nor reproach poverty.

Intelligent parents have their children educated. Darius caused a stone monu-

ment to be made (part. aor.), and erected it (aor.). If we keep off (part.) the

enemy, we shall possess the city free and little exposed (pres.) to stratagems.

A government that (part.) has been neglected (aor.) and begun to degenerate
(taken a transition to [é7/, w. acc.] the bad), is hard to restore again. Hate
flatterers (part.) as deceivers (part.); for both injure those who trust them (aor.).

It is burdensome to be governed by a bad man.

§151. Tenses and Modes.

1. Tenses denote the time of the predicate, which is represented
either as present, future or past; e. g. the rose blooms, will bloom,
bloomed.

2. Modes denote the manner of representing the affirmation con-
tained in the predicate; i. e. the relation of the subject to the pre-
dicate is represented either as an actual fact, as a conception, or as
a direct expression of the will. The mode which expresses a fact,
e. g. the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that which denotes a
conception, e. g. the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive; the mode
which denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, e. g.
give.

§152. A. More Particular View of the Tenses.

1. The tenses may be divided, in accordance with their form and
meaning, into two classes, namely, (a) into Principal tenses, which,
both in the Ind. and Subj., always indicate something present or fu-
ture ;—(b) into Historical tenses, which, in the Ind. always denote
something past, in the Subj. (Optative), sometimes that which is
past, and sometimes that which is present or future.

2. The Principal tenses are the following:

(a) The Present, (a) Indicative, e. g. ypadouer, scribimus; (8) Subjunctive,

2. @. ypadwper, scribamus ;

§ 152.] SYNTAX.-—TENSES. 199

(b) The Perfect, (a) Indicative, e. g. yeypapapev, scripsimus; (8) Subjunctive,
e. g. Yeypadwper, scripserimus ;

(c) The Future, Indicative, e. g. ypipopev, scribemus, we shall write;

(d) The Future Perfect, Indicative, e. g. BeBovAetcouat, I shall have advised
myself, I shall deliberate, I shall be advised.

3. The Historical tenses are the following:

(a) The Aorist, (a) Indicative, e. g. éypapa, I wrote; (8) Optative, o. g. ypa-
pat, I might write, or I might have written ;

(b) The Imperfect, (a) Indicative, e. g. éypadgor, seribebam ; (3) Optative, e. g.
ypadgotut, scriberem ;

(c) The Pluperfect, (a) Indicative, e. g. éyeypadecy, scripseram ; (8) Optative,
e. g. yeypadouut, seripsissem ;

(d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypapoiut, I would write, and of
the Fut. Perf., e. g. PeBovAevcotunv, I should have deliberated, or have been

* advised ; e. g. 6 dyyehog éXeyev, 671 of ToAéuloL ViKHOOLEY, the messen-

ger said, that the enemy would conquer; éXeyev, étt ravta bxd Tod oTpaTy-
yob ev BeBovdretootro, he said that everything would be well planned by
the general.

4, The present indicative represents the action in the time pre-
sent to the speaker. The present is often used in the narration of
past events, since in a vivid representation, what is past is viewed as
present. This is called the Historical Present.

Taitzynv tiv Tadpov BactAede wéyac ToLet advtl épiuatoc, éreidn TvYd G-
vetat Kipov xpocedabvovta. "Hv ric Iprauiddv vedratoc Modtdwpoc, ‘Exa-
Bne xaic, bv éx Tpoiac uot xatip did woe Ipiauog év dduore tpéderv.

Rem. 1. The present ei (éo go) with its compounds, has a future signifi-
cation, in the Ind. and Subj., shall go; the Inf. and present Part. have both a
present and future signification; e. g. obx etbd¢ d¢70 aitov oid Grwetpe
(abibo), GA éEpjoopac aitiv kat &Eetaow Kat éAEyEw. Comp. § 137,
Rem. 83—Otyvopat and 7k with present forms, are often translated in

‘English by perfects, namely, 0 70a, I have departed, and 7 « o, I have come =
yet ofyoat, properly means, Lam gone, and 7K, I am here (adsum); e. g.
M7 Avrod, 6te*Apaoracg olyvetas ei¢ Tove ToAEuioue, that A. is gone (= trans-
JSugit) to the enemy. “Hkw vexpov kevOudva kal oxdtov rbdag Aimdv. ‘Yyeic
bodice adixveiote, bot Hucic TaAat 7 KO "EV (have come).

5. The perfect indicative represents a past action in time present
to the speaker. ‘The action appears as one completed in time pre-
sent to the speaker.

Téypada tyv éxcotoany, I have writien a letter, the letter is now writen, it being
immaterial whether it was written just now or a long time ago; 7 70A¢ éxtic-
Tat, the city is now built, now stands there built.

Rem. 2. Many Greek perfects are translated into English by the present
tense; in this case a condition or state occasioned by the completion of the action
is denoted ; e. g. dédepar (I have been bound), I am now in a bound state, am bound ;

200 SYNTAX.—TENSES. rs 152.

rédyqna (I have died), I am dead ; wégnva (I have shown nyself), I appear, oida,
novi (I have seen), I know, té3nda (I have bloomed), I am blooming, térovda (I have
convinced or persuaded myself ), I trust, BéBnxa (I have stepped out), I go, uéuvguar,
memini (I have reminded myself ), I am mindful, Kéxtnpat (I have acquired for my-
self), I possess, xéxAnpwar (I have been called), E am called, and many others.
Where the perfect is translated by a present, the Plup. is translated by an Imp.;
e. g. éxedfvewv, I appeared.

6. The future indicative denotes ar action as future in relation to
the present time of the speaker. ‘The Greeks very often use the
Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an Historical tense, to
express that which should, must or may be, where the Latin employs
the Subj.; the other forms of the Fut., particularly the Part., are
also so used.

|

|
|
A
|

Népove brapsar det ToLobrove, dv’ Ov Toi¢ uév ayatoig Evtisog Kat éhetFepoc

6 Bioe rapackevacdAceTt at (might be obtained), Toig dé KaKoig TaTeLvog Te
Kal ddyewde kal GBiwroc 6 aidy Exavaketioetat. ‘Hyeudvac édaBov ol
orpatiarat, of abtode &Eovcer (should lead), EvSev EFovce (might obtain) Ta
eTrLTHOELA.

7. The future perfect indicative represents the action as past
(completed) in the future, in relation to the present time of the
speaker.

Kat toic xaxoig wemigetar éodAa, the good shall have been mixed with evil.
"H roditeia Tedéwe KEKOTUNOETAL, édv 6 TOLODTOE a’THY éExtoxony PvAaE 6
Toitayv éxiotnuwv. The Fut. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated

by the present (see Rem. 2), must then be translated by the simple future; e. g.
ueuvjoouat, meminero (I shall have reminded myself ), I shall be mindful.

Rem. 3. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek, only in principal clauses, and in
subordinate clauses introduced by 6rz and g¢ (that). In all other subordinate
clauses, the Subj. Aor. (more seldom the Perf.) in connection with a conjunc-
tion compounded of dv, e. g. diy, érav, érerdar, étav, mplv ay, écr’ av, O¢ av,
etc., is used instead of the Fut. Perf.; e.g. éav totro AéEne, si hoc dixeris, if
you shall have said thus.

8. The aorist indicative expresses past time, in a wholly indefi-
nite manner, without any additional relation; e. g. gyoeawa, I wrote,
Kivoog modla %0vn éevixyosy. It thus stands in contrast with the
other tenses which express past time; still, since it indicates past
time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these tenses.

9. The imperfect indicative represents an action as past, but al-
ways in relation to another past time.

‘Ev 6 od éxatlec, éya Eypador, while you were playing, I was writing.
"Ore éyydo Naoav of BapBapot, of “EAAnvec EudyovtTo, when the barbarians
were near, the G. fought. “Ore oi BapBapo. éreAnaAdSecav (or éxHAVov), of “KA-

§ 152. ] SYNTAX.—TENSES. 201

Anveg évaxyovro. Tore (or év tatty TH waxy) of "EAAnvec Dappa-
AewtaTa EUaXOVToO.

Rem. 4. The Impf. Ind. is also used to denote—(a) the beginning of an ae
tion, e. g. éel éyyic éyévovto éarivys, oi ev aitov &76Eev 4», some of them
began to shoot their arrows ;—(b) the continuance, e. g. of pév EropetorvTo, of
0 eimovrTo, one party continued their march, the other continued to pursue ;—(c}
habit or custom, e. g. aitov oixep rpocdev Tpocektvovy, kai TéTE TpoceKi-
vycayv, those who were before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it then also ;—
(d) endeavor or attempt, e. g. mpOtog Kiéapyoc Tove abtov orpariotac éBLaleTo
iévat, Clearchus endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance.

10. Hence the Aor. Ind. is used in historical narration, in order
to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. is used to denote
the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. narrates, the Impf. de-
seribes and paints ; the Aor. denotes a single, momentary action, the
Impf. a continued action.

Tove weAtactdc é0éFavTo of PapBapor Kal Eépayxevro: énei G éyyde¢
Hoav of OrAita, éTpanovtTo: Kal oi TEeAtacTal ci¥ic cimovto. ‘O dé
KAéapyoc érapayxSy Kai é¢oPeiro, and C. was terrified (a single, momen-
tary act) and feared (continued act).

Rem. 5. The Aor. Ind. is often used in general propositions, which express a
fact borrowed from experience; the verb is then translated by an English Pres.
or by is wont or is accustomed, with the Inf. ;.e. g. KaAAog 7) ypévoc dvadiAwoer,
voooc éuapav er, either time destroys (is wont to destroy) or disease impairs beauty.

11. The pluperfect represents an action as completed before an-
other past action.

"Ereton of “EAAnvec Ew eAnnrtSeoav (had come), of ToAguo ateTweged-
yeoar (had fled). “Ore oi cippayor éxAnoialov, oi ’AGnvaios rode Tépcag
évevikgKkecav. “Eyeypagecy tiv éxiororqy (sc. when the friend came).

Rem. 6. It is to be noticed, that where the relation of one past time to another
is readily seen from the connection, and no special emphasis belongs to it, the
Greeks commonly use the Aor. instead of the Plup.; e. g. éwe1dy of “EAAnve
éxqAavdorv, of woréuor dweredetyecav. Indeed, the Aor. is often used instead
of the Perf. even, when the relation of the past to the present does not require
to be particularly indicated.

12. As the Aor. Ind. expresses a past action as independent and
completed, and as the Impf. Ind., on the contrary, represents an ac-
tion in its duration and progress, (since it always refers to a past ac-
tion which is related to another past action, being used in descrip-
tion and delineation,) so the subordinate modes of the Aor., viz. the
Subj., Opt. and Imp., together with the Aor. Inf. and Part., are
used when the action is represented by itself, as completed; on the
contrary, the subordinate modes of the Pres., together with the

202 SYNTAX.—TENSES. = [$ 152,

Pres. Inf. and Part., and also the Opt. Impf., are used, when the
speaker would describe an action in its duration and progress. In
this manner the following forms stand contrasted:

(a) The Aor. Subj. and the Pres. Subj.; e.g. ddyopmev and gebyopuer,
let us fly; 2€yo, iva pad nye and iva pavvdarvne, that you may learn ;

(b) The Aor. Imp. and the Pres. Imp.; e. g. ¢ dye and gciye, fly; O66
and didov pot 76 BiBAiov, give ; is

(c) The Aor. Inf. and the Pres. Inf.; e.g. @élo guyetyv and ¢ evyetv, IT
wish to fly; Kedetw ce Ootvar and diddvart po 7d BiBAtov ; but the
Aor. Inf. can also denote a past time and take the place of the Perf. Inf,
when the relation to the finite verb does not require to be particularly in-
dicated ; e. g. 7yyetAe Todc rodepioug GTOgvyety and amoTEedev-
yév at, nuntiavit hostes fugisse ;

(d) The Aor. Opt. and the Impf. Opt.; e. g. eyor, iva wa otc and iva
pavdavoce, that thou mayest learn, ut disceres ; el0e TovTO yEVOLTO
and yiyvorro, O that this might happen! The Aor. Opt. can also take
the place of the Plup. Opt., when the relation to another past action does
not require to be particularly indicated; e. g. jyyelAev, Ort, éretd7 ol
"BAAnvec ew éAGorev (had come), oi BapBapor jon anogbyoter
(had already fled).

The Aor. Part. always denotes past time, and hence stands in contrast with
the Perf. Part., since the former describes an action as absolutely past, while
the latter, at the same time, represents it in relation to the finite verb; e. g. o/
abroporor qyyetdar Tove ToAeuioug dno gvybvTag and GroTEebevyoTac.

LXXX. Hyzercises on § 152.

After Darius was dead and Artaxerxes had ascended (aor.) the throne, Tis-
saphernes traduced Cyrus to (7p0¢, w. ace.) his brother, (asserting) that he was
plotting against him (opt.). The latter (6) credits it (is persuaded) and ap-
prehends Cyrus, intending to put him to death (@¢, w. fut. part.) ; but his mother
by entreaty gains his release (= having begged him off for herself, aor.) and
sends him again to his government. Hector, whither has gone the courage, that
thou once hadst? Be not troubled that Araspas has gone over to the enemy.
In good time* art thou come. Themistocles wrote: -(I,) Themistocles, have
come to thee. If any one does not know himself, and believes he has come to
a knowledge of that which he does not truly know, he is a fool. ‘The messen-
gers from Sinope said: We are come to (part. fut.) congratulate you, O war-
riors, that ye have been delivered, as we have heard, through (dé, w. gen.) many
dangers. Under (é7/, w. gen.) Cecrops and the first kings, until (ei¢) Theseus.
Attica was always inhabited by cities. God has carefully regulated everything
in the world. The dwellings in Memphis have remained until (uéyp) modern
times. noe, which lies (=is) on the borders of Attica and Boeotia, had
been fortified. Zeno scourged a slave for (éxi, w. dat.) theft; upon his saying

* cic KaAdv.

§ 153. | SYNTAX.——-MODES. 203

(gen. abs.) : “It was fated for me to steal,” Zeno said: “ To be flayed too (aor.).”
The world is a stage, life a passage across (that stage); thou camest, thou saw-
est, thou wentest away. Xerxes threw a bridge over the Hellespont and dug
through Athos. Destiny casts down what (0/ dy, w. subj.) it has exalted (aor.).
Even the worst (man) acquires riches easily. Inactivity teaches a great deal of
vice. Commanding is easier than doing. Cyrus called (part.) Araspas, a Mede,
who had been a comrade of his (= to him) from youth (é« mazd6c), and bade
him guard for him the wife of Abradatas, the Susian, and the tent, until he him-
self should take (them) in charge. The people resolved to choose thirty men,
who should draw up the laws of the country, in accordance with which
(xara, w. acc.) they should administer the government. Everywhere,in Greece
the usage prevails, that the citizens swear (acc. w. inf.) to be united (fid.). The
soldiers hoped to take the city. I believe, that those, who (§ 148, 6) practise
wisdom, and believe (themselves) to be competent to teach the citizens that
which is useful, by no means become violent. Say what I must do, and it shall
be done. It (= this) is very beautifully said and ever will be (= remain) said,
that the useful is beautiful, the hurtful odious. Tyrants will acquire nothing
valuable. Noble men we shall ever remember.

§153. B. More Particular View of the Modes.

1. The three following modes are to be distinguished, viz. the
Indicative, Subjunctive (Optative) and Imperative (§ 151, 2).

a. The Indicative expresses a fact or phenomenon, asserts some-
thing directly 5 e. 2. 0 go0or Gahkiet—o maryo VEVQaDE Thy
émotolayy — ol mokguion aTEMUYOY— ot nOdiTEL TOVS ModELioUS
VLENOOUGLY.

b. The Subjunctive denotes a conception. The Subj. of the his-
torical tenses is called the Optative in Greek (§ 73, IT.).

(a) The Subj. of the principal tenses, i. e. of the Pres. and Perf.,
and also the Subj. Aor., in Greek always represents the conception
as something future. The Subj. of the principal tenses is used in
principal clauses: (1) in the first Pers. Sing. and Pl. to express an
‘ exhortation or admonition ; (2) in the second Pers. Sing. and PI.
of the Aor. (not Pres.) with py to express a prohibition; (8) in
doubtful questions ; in principal clauses, however, almost exclusively
in the first Pers. Sing. and Pl., but in subordinate clauses, it may
be in any of the different persons.

"Iauev, eamus, let us go. M7 taper, le us not go. My do8ySic, ne metuas, do
not fear. Ti wo.Guev; what shall we do? In subordinate clauses, Ov« Ey, doe
tparwuat, non habeo, quo me vertam, I do not know where to go. Ovx éxet, drat
tpanytat, he does not know where to go. ‘

(8) The Subj. of the historical teases, viz. the Opt. of the Aor.,

204 SYNTAX.—MODES. [§ 153.

Impf. and Plup. as well as the Opt. of the Fut. ($ 152, 3, d), repre-
sent what is conceived either as past, present or future. The Opt.
denotes a present or future, only in conditional clauses, and in such
elliptical clauses as arise from them; e.g. et a 2yous, doing &»,
tf you had anything, you would give it. Both the condition el Tt
Zyoug, and the consequence 50 ing &¥, are here represented as a
present, mostly a future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, a
mere supposition, admission or conjecture (Comp. § 185). This
form of the conditional clause, viz. ¢¢ with the Opt., may express a
wish, the concluding clause connected with it, being understood ; e. g.
si tovto yévouto! tf this should happen (then I would be happy,
evtvyis av einv), = O that this might happen! Instead of the sim:
ple et, the stronger ee, e¢ ye, O that, is then commonly used;
e.g. cide (el yaQ) suot Geo caveyr ry dvropw TAaQad sizer!
O that the gods would give me such power! Very frequently the
concluding clause is used elliptically, the condition connected with
it being understood; e. g. 70éwg av &xovoatpmt, I would gladly
hear (if it were possible, e¢ é§e¢7). Comp. No. 2, ¢. With the
exception of the instances here mentioned, the Opt. generally refers
to the past.

Rem. 1. When a wish is to be represented as one which the speaker knows
cannot be realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used; e.g. et¥e ToiTo
éyiyverto! O that this might be (were) done! cide toito éyéverto! O that
this had been done!

c. The Imp. denotes the immediate expression of one’s will; e. g.
do¢ and S50 mor 70 BiBdior, give; yoaparwo and yeagéto
iv éiotoAnr, scribito, let him write.

Rem. 2. The difference between the Pres. and Aor. Imp., is, that the Pres.

generally denotes a continued, oft-repeated action, while the Aor. denotes a single,
instantaneous action; e. g. Teitov toi¢ codwrépotc, obey those wiser than yourself, .
a direction to be cbserved at all times; dvatervartw thy yxeipa, la him raise
his hand, BAépov cic t& Opn, look upon the mountains, single, instantaneous
acts. So dxovoov, dkovcate, Aétov, Aé€Eate. Comp. § 152, 12, b—The Perf:
Imp., which is of rare occurrence, is used to indicate that the consequences of
the action are to rematn or be permanent ; e. g. kexAcioSw 7 Sapa, let the door be
shut (and remain shut). It will be evident, therefore, that neither the Aor. nor
Perf. Imp., expresses any relation of past time, as the Ind. of these tenses does,
but only such modifications of action as are stated above.
. Rem. 3. In negative or prohibitive expressions with “7 (ne), the Greek com-
monly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp., but instead of it, the Aor.
Subj.; e. g. ui) ypade (but not wu? ypagyc) or wu) yparyc, do not write (but not
#7? yparpov). :

§ 153.] SYNTAX.—MODAL ADVERB ap. 205

REMARKS ON THE MODAL ADVERB Gp,

2. The,discussion of the modal adverb éy is intimately connected
with the treatment of the modes. This adverb is used to show the
relation of the conditioned expression to the conditioning one, inas-
much as it indicates that the predicate of the sentence to which it
belongs, is conditioned by another thought. A complete view of
the use of ay cannot be presented until conditional sentences are
treated of ($185); for the present, the following remarks on its
construction will be sufficient. It is connected :

a. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, viz. the Impf., Plup.
and Aor.,

(«) To indicate that something could take place under a certain

condition, but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled.

Ei todto éheyec, nwaptavec av, si hoc diceres, errares, if you said this, you were
wrong (but now I know you did not say it, consequently you did not do wrong). Ei
TovTo éhetac, Huaptec cy, si hoc dixisses, errasses; at hoc non dixisti, ergo non er-
vasti (the Aor. here takes the place of the Plup.); or without a protasis, e. g.
éxapne av, laetareris or laetatus fuisses (sc. si hoc vidisses).

(6) To indicate that an action took place (was repeated) in cer-
tain cases or under certain circumstances. The historical
tense of the principal clause is then usually an Imperfect.

Ei tig T@ Doxparer wepi Tov GvTswAéyot, ent tHv indVeow éexaviyerv

iv Tavta Tov Adyov, if any one contradicted Socrates, he would (he was aocus-

tomed to) carry back the whole argument to the original proposition (i. e. he would do
this as often as any one contradicted).

Rem. 3. *Av is not used with the Ind. of the principal tenses.

b. With the Subj., in order to represent the conceived future
event, which is naturally expressed by the Greek Subj. [No. 1, b.
(a) |, as conditional, and dependent on circumstances. In the Com-
mon Language, this usage occurs only in subordinate clauses, the
modal adverb then standing in close connection with the conjunction
of the subordinate clause, or combining with it and forming one
word. In this manner originate gay (from e &), ora» (from ote
ay), onocay (from onde hy), MOLY &Y, OOF Hr, Od ky, Om0U ey, Ot ke,
OTOL KP, 7 AY, OTN av, OFEY cv, OMOVEY EY, etc., OS av (quicunque or
Si guts), 010 GY, OMOI0S HY, OO0S KY, OmdG0S ar, and others.

e. With the Opt. (very seldom with the Fut. Opt.), to represent
a present or future uncertainty, undetermined possibility, a mere
supposition, admission or conception, as conditional. ‘The Opt. with
ay must always be considered as the principal clause of a conditional

18

206 SYNTAX.—MODAL ADVERB @y. | § 153.

proposition, even if the condition belonging to it, is not expressed

[No. 1, b. (8)].

Ei roiro Aéyouc, duapTavorc dv. Without a protasis, e. g. xaipore Gv, you
might, could, would rejoice (if you heard this). Tévowr’ dv may év TO waxpO xpove,
all might, could happen. Aéyovg dv, you might speak (sc. si tibt placuerit). The
Opt. with dv is very frequently used, when the speaker wishes to state a strong
affirmation modestly.

d. With the Inf. and Part. (very seldom with the Fut. Inf. and
Part.), when the finite verb, used in the place of the Inf. and Part.,
would be connected with a. ‘i *

Ei te ceiver, toy, dodvar dv, tf he had anything, he said he would give i
(oratio recta, ef Te elyov, dwxa ay, if I had anything, I would give it). Et te exo,
é¢n, dotvace av (oratio recta, ef Te Eyoumt, Ooinv av). AjAog ei GuapTavarv
av, ei TobTO Aéyouc (= ORAOv EoTiv, bTL GuapTavole GY, Et TOUTO Aéyotc).

Rem. 4. As dy represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be
joined with the predicate, e.g. Aéyouue av, éAeyov av; yet it commonly follows
that member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. Kal ov« oer Go-
xnpmov &v gaveicbat Td Tod Zwxpatove mpayua. Hence it is-regularly joined
to such words as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to negative adverbs and
interrogatives; e. g. ob Gv, ov6 dv, obr07’ Gr, obdéror’ Ge, etc. —Ti¢ dv, Ti ay,
ti 0 av, Ti O77 dv, Hc dv, THe yap av, ap’ av, etc.;—also to adverbs of place,
time, modality and other adverbs, which, in various ways modify the expression
contained in the predicate and define it more exactly; e. g. évtata av, T67’ ay,
eikéTuc av, lowe dv, TAY’ Gv, padLoT’ dv, HKLOT’ Gv, padiog av, ndEwE Gy, ete,
Hence it happens that dy is sometimes repeated in the same sentence.

LXXXI. H7zercises on § 158.

Let us shun the unseemly, and aspire after the beautiful. Let us pray (20r.)
the Gods to guide the present (enterprise) to the most honorable issue. Let us
not yield to the enemy. How shall I, who am (part.) mortal, contend with di-
vine destiny? Tell me, whether (7orepov) we shall say that Socrates in his
conyersations speaks seriously or jests (= call S. speaking seriously or jesting).
When Hercules was at a loss, which of two (é76Tepoc, w. gen.) Ways to (é7, w.
acc.) life he should enter (= turn himself), there appeared two majestic women.
One, running to him (aor.), spoke thus: I see, O Hercules, thou art at a loss
(= thee at a loss) which way to life thou shouldst enter. If (éav, w. subj.) there-
fore thou wilt make me a friend (fem.), I will lead thee to the pleasantest and
easiest way. O Gods, that ye might avert danger from us. O that the triad
of the Graces (Xdap:tec) might ever assist (aor.) me. O that I might ever asso-
ciate with the wise and good, and never have intercourse with (gen.) the bad.
O if I could have lived with you then, when you were still a youth. If I were
(but) able to make what is done (part.) undone! Fight bravely, soldiers. Strive
after virtue, young men. The temple-robber ought to be torn in pieces by
wild beasts. Historians ought neither to extol anything in order to conciliate
(zpéc, w. acc.) favor, nor omit (anything), if it is deserving of mention and re-

§ 154.] SYNTAX.—ATTRIBUTIVES. 207

membrance. Judge (aor.) not contrary to (apa, w. acc.) the laws. O war-
riors, despair (aor.) not of yourselves. He who (§ 148, 6) ventures to em-
ploy force, may need not a few allies; but he who can persuade, none. How
could those who do base (deeds), become friends to those who hate such (deeds) 2
Who without self-control could either learn or properly practise anything good ?
With (werd, w. gen.) a wise understanding, one may pass (aor.) life most pleas-
antly. ‘The bad no one can make (= place, aor.) useful.

CHAPTER II.

§ 154. Atiributives.

1. Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea contained
in the substantive to which they belong; e. g. 76 «a0 6600p, 6
wéyas aig. The attributive may be:

a. An adjective or participle, e. g. zd %a10¥» 6000r, to dvbog
Sarrorv;

b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g.0t cov O€ydo0v xuonoi;

c. A substantive governed by a preposition, e. g. 7 mo0¢ THY
mOdty Od06;

d. An adverb, e. g. of vi» &r8Qumo;

e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kgoicos, 6 Bactleve.

Kiem. 1. The genitive depending on substantives, receives different names ac-
cording to the relations it expresses: (a) subjective, when it takes the place of
the subject, ce. g. of Tov dévdpov xapmoé (arising from 76 dévdpov dépex
kaprotc), the fruits of the tree, i. e. which the tree produces ; Ta Tod ‘Ounpov roth-
para, the poems of Homer, i. e. which he made ;—(b) objective or causative, when it
takes the place of the object of an intransitive verb, e. g. 7 TH¢ codiac ére-
Gv uta, the desire for wisdom (éxcSuue tHe codiac, the cogiac being the cause
of the érJupia); edvord tTevoc¢, good-will towards one (ebvove eivé tLvt) s—(c)
passive, when it takes the place of the object of an active verb, and thus denotes
the thing affected or caused by the transitive action, e. g. 97 TH¢ TOAEWC KTI-
og (from Krises tiv m6ALY), the possession of the city (the city being the thing pos-
sessed); 6 TH¢ émLtaTOATC ypadeve, the writer of the letter ;—(d) of quality,
€.g.70 evpog TETTAapuV oTadinnv; dip weydAne apetifc ;—(e) of pos-
session, @. g. TO TOU Mévwvoc otparevpa.

Rem. 2. When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the
attributive, contains a general idea or one which can be easily supplied from the
context, or, by frequent usage in a particular connection, may be supposed to
be known, then the substantive, as it is subordinate in the idea to be expressed,
is often omitted, and the adjective or participle commonly with the article, is
used as a substantive. Such substantives are, e. g. dvdpuwroc, avip (man, hus-
band), yvvn (woman, wife), atip, uATnp, vidc, raic, Suyatnp, ddeAdéc, xpéyua,
XpIua, Epyov, ypovoc, juépa, YOpa, yp, 606c, oixéa, olxoc, and others.

208 SYNTAX.—APPOSITION. [§ 154.

Oi Gvytoi (sc. dvSpwror), mortales. Ta qpuérepa (Se. Xphuata), res nostrae.
'‘H torepaia (sc. puépa). ‘H wodeuia and 7 gcAia (se. yOpa), a hostile and friend-
ly land. ‘H oixovpévn (se. yi), the inhabited earth. Tijy taxtoryy (sc. 606v),
quam celerrime. Td Kaxov, evil, Ta Kaka, evils. ’"AdéEavdpocg 6 Bidinrov (se.
vide). ’Ev ddov (sc. otk) eivat. Ei¢ didackadov, ei¢ WAdravoc goirgv. Te
the tixne, fortune and all which belongs to it; Ta THE TOAEWC, the affairs of the city ;
Ta Tod roAéuov, the whole extent of the war. Oi viv, oi TOTe, Of TaAaL (se. ar-
Sport). Ta oixoe (xpaypyara), res domesticae. Oi xa hdc, our contemporaries.
Oi dudi or wepi TLva, a person with his companions, followers or scholars ; oi aut
Ilewciorpatov, Pisistratus and his troops; oi audit Oarqv, Thales and his school.

2. When a substantive is put in the same case with another, for
the sake of a more exact definition, it is said to be in apposition
with that substantive. A word may be in apposition not merely
with a substantive, but also with a substantive pronoun; e. g. 7uéis,
oi copol — éxeivos, 0 Bacthevs, and even with a personal pronoun
contained in the verb.

OentotoKkARe HKw rapa oé, I, Themistocles, have come to you. ‘0 Maiac
tie “AtAavtog dtakovodpae adroic (instead of éy@ 6 Maiac se. vioc), L£ the
son of Maia, the daughter of Atlas, etc.

3. When a word is in apposition with a possessive pronoun, that
word is put in the Gen., because the possessive then takes the place
of the Gen. of the personal pronoun.

’"Eudc Tod aVAiov Bioc, the life of me wretched; here aSAiov is in apposition
with éu6c, which is used instead of guod. Tapa (= Ta éua) tod dvotyvov Kaka,
the evils of me, unhappy one! Xi Tig KaAAiorne eibpopdia, thy gracefulness, O most
beautiful one! In English, as these examples show, we may often translate the
Gen. by an exclamation. On the expression 6 7yétepoc, duétepoc, opéTepog
avtTayv mathp, see under § 169, Rem. 2.

LXXXII. Exercises on § 154.

In Hades dwell (= are) all the dead. Men send their children to school (to
the house of teachers), that they may learn (part. fut.) the sciences, music and
the (7a) (exercises) in the gymnasium. Alexander, the son of Philip, achieved
many and brilliant actions. Many, who (part.) neglect (aor.) domestic affairs,
attend to those of the state. Leonidas and the three hundred with him, fought
bravely at Thermopylae against (é7i) the Persians. Thales and his school and
almost all philosophers abstained from political affairs. The character of the
Deity we must reverence very highly. O fortunate (man), thy life have the
Gods adorned with every blessing (Greek: thy life of the fortunate). Unhappy
men that we are, our (= the) enemies have ruined our native land. The com-
panions of Ulysses perished (aor.) by their own crime. Our own citizens have
betrayed us. Your own brother deserts you.

§§ 155—157. | SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 209

CHAP YE hy itt.

§155. The Objective Construction.

As the attributive construction (§ 154) serves to define the sub-
stantive more particularly, so the objective construction serves to de-
fine the predicate more particularly. By object, taken in its wider
sense, is to be understood everything by which the predicate is more
particularly defined, viz. (a) the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their
Cases, (c) the Infinitive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb.

"Exiduue tHe codiac. Tpidw tiv éictoAny. Etyouat toi¢g Beoic. “Earn
mapa T@ BactAci. “ExiSuued ypagerv. TeAdv eimev. Kakoc guayéoato. In _
each of these examples, it is evident that the verb is limited, defined or more
fully explained by the word or words connected with it.

CASES.

§ 156. I. Gentiive.

The Genitive Case primarily denotes the relation whence, and
therefore expresses,—(a) in a local relation, the out-going or removal
and separation from an object, since it designates the object or point
from which the action of the verb proceeds; e. g. eixew oduv, cedere
via, to withdraw from the way ;—(b) in a causal relation, it ex-
presses the cause, source, author, in general the object which calls
forth, produces (gignit), excites and occasions the action of the verb;
e. g. émifupa tie aeetyg; here agety¢ is the object which calls
forth, ete. the desire expressed by éaiPupo.

§157. A. Local Relation.

Genitive of Separation.

The Genitive, in a local relation, is used with expressions de-
noting removal, separation, being distant from, beginning, loosing,
abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, missing, deviating from, dif-
fering from, depriving.

Such yerbs are rapayupeiv, troywpeiv, etxerv and breikev, travicractat
and éicrac¥at, voodilery, yuwpilery, diopivev, agiévat, adieoda, axéxewv, ané-
xeoda, dpyev, dpyecda, irapyerv, eapyew, Tate, Tadvecbat, Anyety, kw-
Abe, elpyetv, Abev, éhevOepodv, awaAAarTewv, oTEpeiv, arooTepetv, xnpody,
épnpody, diagépery, duapravery, oddArAcoGat, webdeoVat, etc.; deéyerv and ané-
xewv, to be distant ;—the adjectives éAciSepoc, xadapoc, Kevog, Epyuog, yuuvoc,

18*

210 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. [$ 158.

ipdavéc, wire, dvadopoc, and many compounded with @ privative ;—the adverbs
dvev, yopic, TAH, Ew, Exdc, dixa, TEpav.

Oi Tov Aakedatpoviny vedtepor Toic TpecBuTépotc ovvrTvyxavorTec ELKOVEL
the 600% (withdraw from the road). “Awéxet TOV apyvpetwv (is distant
from the silver mines) éyyitata moAig Méyapa Todd Thetoy TaV TEVTAKOGLWY
ctadiwv. Marnp tarddc eipyet uviav (keeps the fly from her child). Wad-
ov THe UBpewe (cease your insolence). ‘H médic HAevSEpOdH TOY Tr
pavrveav (was freed from tyrants). Oi wodéuot Tove ToAiTag TOY ayatvav
aneotépnoar (deprived the citizens of their goods). TO v6 oi avbpwrot 01 e-
oépovol TOY GAAwY Cow» (differ from other animals). "Apyeotai Te
yoc signifies to begin generally, without any reference to others; e. g. ody Tot¢
Seoic dpyectar ypy TavToc Epyov; but Gpyerv, élapyxecvy, vnap-
yer, KaTapyxetr, signify to do something first (i. e. before others), to begin, hence
also to be the author of, to originate; e. g. Oi moAguior Hp av adixuv Epyor.
Oi ’ASnvaior Kat Aakedaim6vioe bmHpSav THE € Acuteplacg anton TH
‘E2461, libertatis auctores fuerunt. “EA eb Gepoc 96 on, free from fear; k a-
Sapdc¢ adixiag, free from injustice; Gpyata Keva HvL6xwy, chariots with-
out drivers; deaidevtoc povorkye, uneducated in music; Yopic TOY
d2AAwYv, apart from the others; TARY Néwvoc, except Neon; Tépav Tov
xo7Tauod, beyond the river; EF Ber eivat, to be beyond the reach of the darts.

$158. B. Causal Relation of the Genitive.

The Gen., in the causal relation, signifies also an out-going, but
not as in the local relation, a mere external out-going, but an 2nter-
nal and active one, since it expresses the object, by whose inward
power, the action of the subject is called forth and produced (gig-
nitur).

a. The Genitive as an expression of Action,* or the Active
Genitive.

1. In the first place, the active Gen. stands as the Gen. of orzgin
or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to originate from,
to spring from, arise from, to produce from, to be produced from, to
be born from: yiyvecDat, pvew, puveet, Elva.

"Apiotov avdporv dpiora Bovdebuata yiyver at, the best counsels origi
nate from the best men. Iarpoc piv 6) Aéyerar 6 Kipog yevéotar Kap-
Bicovr, Mepcév Bactténc, Cyrus is said to have been the son of (to have originated
from) his father Cambyses ; 6 6? KauBione oitoc 700 Mepoewdav yévove 7%;
but this Ca:nbyses was a descendant of (of the race of ) the Persians; unt pog 08
éuonoyeiras. Mavoarvayng yevéctat.

2. In the second place, the active Gen. stands as that object

a With this Gen. the subject appears as receiving the action denoted by the
nitive.

§ 158. | SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 911

which has acquired another, made it its own and possesses it,—hence
as Gen. of the owner or possessor. "This Gen. stands with the verbs
sive, yevéoOut; also with the adjectives (dwg, otxeiog, tep0s, xb ouog.

Tic dvcews uéytotov Kahiog Eativ, nature possesses (has) the greatest
beauty. Tot Xwoxpartove moray iy dpety, Socrates had much virtue. Hence
originates the Gen. of quality, with which in English we connect the substantives,
business, manner, custom, peculiarity, duty, mark; e.g.’Avdpo¢g éativ ayadvoi
ev Toleiv Tove diAove, it is the business, custom, peculiarity, duty, mark of a good
man to benefit his friends ; or it becomes, it bespeaks a good man, a good man is wont,
etc. Of wév kivdvvot roAAaKic TOV HRyepovarn LdLot, pioddc 0 obk Eat,
dangers are often the lot of (peculiar to) commanders. Kipoc tattng tig xOpag
Kb ptoc éyévero, Cyrus was the ruler of this place. “Innogiepi¢g tot “Hdion,
a horse sacred to the sun.

8. In the third place, the active Gen. stands as that object which
includes another or several other objects, as parts belonging to it;
the Gen. expresses the whole in relation to its parts, and is com-
monly called the partitive Genitive. This Gen. is used:

(a) With the verbs ey at and yiyveo%d at, which then signify
to be among, to be numbered or considered among, to be of the num-

ber of, to be a paré of, to be one of.

"Hv Kal 6 Swxpatye Tov audit Midntov otpatevopévwr, Socrates also
was among those who carried on war around Miletus ; otpatevopévwv here denotes
the whole, of which Socrates is a part. ‘H Zédtevt éote THe ’Aciag Zisa
part (or a city) of Asia. Tov Gavatov jyotvtat mavtec of dAhot TOY pEyio-
TOY KaKGY Elvat, is among, or is one of, the greatest evils.

Rem. 1. The partitive Gen., denoting the whole of which a part is taken, is
very often used as an attributive :-—(a) with substantives, e. g. ctayévec tdaroc, drops
of water, (here idaTo¢ is the whole, parts of which are expressed by orayévec, and
so in the other examples) ; c@uato¢g pépoc, a part of the body ;—(b) with neuter
adjectives and pronouns, e. g. wécov tuépac, the middle of the day; év pésw tie
6600, in the middle of the way; év ToLobty Tod Kivdivov, in such circumstances of
danger ; ei¢ TovTo épyin¢, to such a degree of anger; wAeioTov Tod otparebpuaroe,
most of the army ;—(c) with substantive-adjectives, particularly superlatives, with
participles, substantive-pronouns (interrogative and indefinite) and numerals, e. g.
of ypnoTol Tov avbporuy, the useful part of (the useful among) men; oi ed opo-
votvtec TO avSperwr, the wise among men; Tov broluyiwy Ta dvayxaia Kal TA
duvatotara, the necessary and more able of the beasts of burden ; 76 fyobmevov Tod
etpatetpyazog, that part of the army which lead = the van; of bid£avte¢ tév iz-
téav, those of the horsemen who pursued; tic Tév otpatiwtdv, who of the soldiers?
ol cogetaton Se IEE, the wisest of men.—IloAA02, éAtyo., Tiwi TOV avbpdrar.
(On the contrary, of OvyTol dySpurot, because the property of mortality be-
longs to the whole class; zoAAo? or dAatyou dvSporot, denotes a whole consisting
of many or few, but wonder or dAtyot dvO8paorwr, represents the many or the ae
as a part cf the r3rele) ;—(d) with adverbs, (a) of place, e. g. Oidauy Aiyiztov,
not §-2-) Arye 4x oida, éxov ying é€otiv, I do not know where on earth he is;

212 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. [§ 158

mavrayod Ti¢ yiic, ubique terrarum, everywhere in the world; so also with rover,
roppw, mpocw; (2) of time, e. g. dWe THo Tmépac, THE HAtKkiac, TOD scinasieie late
in the day, late in life, etc. ; tple THe Tuépac, thrice a day ; ToOAnaKLE THE NuEpac,
many times a day.

(b) With words which signify to participate, to share i, to tm-
part, to communicate ;—to touch, to take hold of, to be close to, to
border on ;—to acquire and obtain, or to strive to acquire.

Here belong the verbs weTéxelr, weTEoTl MOL, "EeTA-, OLADLOGVAL, KOLVWVELY, KOL-
vovoar (these often taking a Dat. besides the Gen.), éwapxety (to impart a share
of); diddvat, mpocd.dovat ;—biyyavew, wave, inreovat, AauBavecSat, weTa-,
ovAAapBavewy, ETL-, dvri2auBavecda, cuvaiopeovat, éveoVat (to adhere to, to bor-
der upon), “vT-, mepiéxectat, yaixecGar ;—tTvyxavelv (to acquire, to hit), Aayxa-
vel, egixveiaat, KAnpovopety, mpocyxet (uot TtLvoc, something belongs to me) ;—
bpéyecSat, ipieoSal, dvTetoeiobat, évtpérecOar, oroxyaleotat ;—the adjectives
Kolvoc, Looc, 6uoloc, avtioc, évavTioc, mapan?notoc (which however commonly
take the Dat.), ériyaptoc, diroc, ade.poc, Scadoyoc, also with Dat. ;—the adverbs
énc, éoesic, TpooSev, Eunpooder, dztovev, ueTasv, ev0d, straight forward to, ué-
xXpt, up to, dvtiov, TAncior, ete.

TloAAdnec of kaxot GpyYOv kal TLUGY wETEYOUGLY, evil men often par-
take of offices and honors. OaAmoVE pév kal Poyouve kal oiTwY Kal TO-
tov kat Brvov dvaykn Kal Toi¢ Sobhowe wEeTadLOGval, TOAEMLKIS O
éxiotHmne kal werétne ob peTadorTéoy, tt is necessary to share heat and
cold, etc., with slaves, but we are not to share the knowledge of war, etc. ‘O copig
Tie bUBpewe Gporpge éorey, is free from (does not partake of) insolence.
"Antec tat tHe yEelpoc. Aiuvy Exet at (borders on) TOD on maT og pE-
yarn. “Epyov éxopeta, let us lay hold of, opus aggrediamur. ‘O otparnyo¢
Tov adtav Toic oTpaTléTalg CVVAaipEeTat KLVODVOY, the general shares in
the same dangers as the soldiers. ’Erewn vn tov cOmatog ETVYES, ava-
vaTov O& WuyxHC, TElpG THC Puyo aVavatov urhunv KaTadcrely, since you
have obtained a mortal body, but an immortal spirit, etc. Tuyyaverv, Aayxave,
xpnuatorv, ebtvyiac. Tuyeiv tehevtigg, dvouatoc. ’Opéyeote or édieote Tijc
apetic, strive to obtain virtue. “Ouolocg dvyi¢, ouotog rod ‘Hdaiorov, ed Tv-
Seiov, TAnciov OnBdr, éje TlA0tTwvoe.

Rem. 2. Verbs signifying to take hold of, govern the Gen. of the part taken
hold of ; e. g. €AgGBovto Tie Covng Tov ’Opovtyy, they took Orontes by the girdle;
xepoe édeiv tivG, to take one by the hand. So any verb may govern the Gen.,
when its action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part; e. g. érate
TAoiv cat Iiypnra, Aafdvrac rod BapBaptKxod orpazod, he commanded
G. and P., having taken a PAR? of the army; éd6kel, ovykadécavtac Aoyayode Kal
meAtaoTac Kal TOV OT ALT OY, they thought best, having called together the captains,
targetiers, and A Pant of the heavy-armed, ete.

4, The active Gen., in the fourth place, denotes the place where,
and the timé when, an action occurs. The action or event belongs,

as it were, to the place and time, and in a degree proceeds from
them, and is produced by them.

§ 158. ] SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 413

The Gen. of place is rare in prose. Adverbs of place in the form of the
Gen. Sing. occur very frequently; e. g. ot, where, aitod (réro0v), there, at
that place, obdayot, nowhere, and others. “AvOy téAder Tot Eapoc, blossoms
put forth in the spring, the spring being considered as the producer of the blos-
soms. So Vépouc, in summer, XetuGvoc, in winter, huépac, by day, tic abring jpyé-

- oa¢, vuxtéc. ‘The Gen. too denotes the time within which anything is done; e. g.
Baothede ob paxeitrar déxa juepGv, within ten days.

5. Finally, the active Gen. denotes the material of which any-
thing is made. This Gen. is used:

(a) With verbs signifying to make or form from something ;~
with expressions denoting fulness and want ;—with verbs signifying
to eat, to drink, to taste, cause to taste, to enjoy ;—to smell, and to
emit an odor of something.

Here belong the verbs roceiv, rAnS Ely, TAnpoiv, TiTAavat, yéuewv, caTTELV,
ebropeiy, aropeiv, Téveotal, deiotat, del, onavilev, yp7, éoSiewv, dayeiv, ebo-
yeiotal, river, yeverv, xopécacSat, drodavey, rvetv, bCewv, TpocpaArery, ete. ,
the adjectives tAéoc, wAjpyc, peotoc¢, TAovcLOC, Oaci¢, révyc, évdege, etc.;—ad
verbs, as dAcc.

XGAKov weTwTolnpéva éori Ta ayahwata, made of bronze. "Ect pupé-
vn éotiv 606¢ A193 0v, the way is paved with stone.. (Hence the attributive rela-
tion, “Exzwua 6200, a cup |made| of wood. Tpareladpyvpiov. Xrégavog
bakiveer). ‘H vaic cecaypéivyn fv advtporur, the ship was loaded
with men.. Ta ’Avagayopov BiBdia yépet cogGv AOoywy, are full of wise say-
ings. “Evtavta hoay xayat woAdal weotat citov kal oivon, there many
villages abounded with food and wine. "Arvopeiv, méveotal, omaviverv
TOV XPNUaTOY, to be in want of means. "EoVietv kpeGy, to eat of flesh.
Kopécactat 60p8 76, tobe filled with food. Livery ot von, todrink of wine.
"Arodatvelry Ta4VTOY TOY GyaB GY», to enjoy all good things. Tetecbai
Ttun¢, to taste honor. Tevery tid Tipu F ¢, to cause one to taste honor. *“OCetv
tw v, to smell violets, cipov mv ety, to emit the smell of myrrh. UpocBaarecv
Hipov. Ilveiv tpayov. “Olerv kpoptorv. ‘Qe 7d0 wor wpocé-
TVEVGE YOLPELWY KPEGY, so sweet was the smell of swine’s flesh to me. Aa-
odc dévdpor, covered with tres; Snpiwv TARPS, full of animals.

Rem. 3. Verbs of eating and drinking, govern the Acc., (a) when the substance
ig represented as consumed wholly or in a great measure; (b) when the sub-
stance is to be indicated as the common means of nutriment, which each one
takes; e. g. Ilivw rév oivov, roAdv oivov, I drink the wine, much wine. Hence
ively oivov is said of one whose usual drink is wine, but zivecy ofvev is to
take a drink of wine, to drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of
eating and drinking has a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or
drink. of something. ’ATwohatberv TLvég TL, signifies to receive good or evil
From some one. \

‘A Rem. 4. Aez, as impersonal, rhay take the Dat. of the person, with the Gen.
- of the thing or person needed; elg. Ei wiv tutv tevog dAAov dei, if you need any-
thing ese. Aci and xpq in the setse of necesse, opus est, are followed either by the
x 2
3

214 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. [$158

Inf. alone, or by the Ace. of the person with the Inf; e. e. dez [ Xp) oe TadTa
Tovelv, you must do this. Agi also, though more rarely, takes the Dat. of the per-:
son with the Inf.; e. g. ei cor déor didaskevr, af it were necessary for thee to teach.

(b) With verbs of sensation and perception ; e. g. axovew, &xpod-
oFu, nvvdavecd ul, ciotavecd ct, dogoaivectut, curva, to under-
stand ; and with verbs of reminding, remembering and forgetting ;
e. g. mlpryoxew, prquorever, ukurnoFat, émthavoavecOo, and the
corresponding adverbs, e. g. Audou, xovqa. |

Kal koded cvvinut, kat od PavOUYVTOC &kobw, TI understand the
dumb man, and hear him although he does not speak. ‘Qc Oodpovto réyora
TOV KapujZAwY ot immoL, as soon as the horses smelt the camels. Oix &kpoo-
Hevot Tov Gdovroc, not hearing the singer. *Axobew dine, to hear a suit;
aiodvavectar kpavyfe, VopoBovr, éxiBovaae, te perceive a cry, tu-
mult, plot. These verbs often govern the Acc. of the thing ; often also they gov-
ern the Acc. of the thing in addition to the Gen. of the person; e. g. ‘O ’Apué-
vlc, O¢ WKOVE TOD dyyéAovV Ta Tapa Tov Kipov, éexAayn, but as soon as
the Armenian heard from the messenger the communication of Cyrus —. Oi dyaboi
kal aTOvVTOY TOV didov Héevnvra., the good remember even. absent
friends. Mj éxtdAavdavov raved EpyEeoLOY, do not forget acts of kind-
ness. Aatpa tov otpatyyov, without the knowledge of the generals.

(c) With expressions of being acquainted and unacquainted with,
of experience and tnexperience, of knowledge and ignoranee, of
making trial of something, and with those of ability, dexterity and
skill in anything.

Here belong the words Eumelpoc, amretpoc, ETLOTH LW, eTLOTUMeEvoc, iveriorh-
LOY, OVYYVO"wY, adage, ataidevtoc, loLarne, TetpaoS-at, areipoc and Févac EXEL.
and adjectives in -cxé¢ (derived from transitive verbs) which express the idea of
dexterity. .

"Eumetpog or é TLOTH MOV sil THe Tévvync, Iam acquainted with the
art. "“Amaidevtog ap ETHC, MOVOLKTE, egnorant of virtue, music; ovy-
YvOpnorv TOY av porivaer TPAYLETwYV, pardoning (not knowing) hu-
man errors. “ATweipwc évetv TOV vo 2», to be unacquainted with, ignorant
of, the laws; Gronetpaotar YV@uUNS, to venture, to try an opinion. II € t-
pOmevoc Tot Pavone, trying (making trial of) the depth; TELPOUEVOL
TabTHC THO Thee, making trial of this arrangement. Kai rapackeva-
OTLKOY TOY eic Tov T6AEuOY Tov oTparnyov eivat yoy Kal TOpLOoTLK OD
TOV EriTHdetor Tole otpatibraie, it is necessary for the general to be capable
of providing what pertains to the war, and of furnishing what is necessary for the sol-
dies. Atdackadatkde tHe co diac, skilled in teaching philosophy.

(d) Finally, with verbs signifying to see, to observe, to judge, to:
examine something, some action, external indication or single cir-
cumstance in one (ci0g), particularly with verbs signifying to ad-.
mire, to praise and blame.—The person in whom one sees, ete.
something, is put in the Gen., and that which is seen, etc., in the

‘

§ 158. | SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 215

Ace., or in an accessary clause, or in the Gen. of the Part. which
then agrees with the person.

Such verbs are dpgv, Vedabat, cxoneiv, itovoeiv, évvoeiv, yryvaokewv, éxia-
taovat, eidévat, évbvuciodar, nvvbivecvat, aicdavecda., paviavety, Kpivery,
&eracerv, Aéyerv, dnhoiv, dyacda, Savualew, éraweiv, wéugecdar, wéyerv.

IIpérov pév avtdv éoxoret, he first considered in respect to them. "Hodyoat
Tovpow Biov, thou hast observed in my way of life. “Eyvw éuod motoivtoc, he per-
ceived that Iwas doing. To Bpadd kai péAAov, 6 wivdovrat pahiota Wuov
(which is the chief complaint they make against us), wh aicxivecde. Ei Gyacat
Tov TaTpd5e, boa némpaye, if you admire my father for what he has done. ’Ey®
kai tovTo Ew aLvG ’AynotAdon, I praise Agesilaus for this also. Topyiov
Hahtora Tata Gyapet, I admire these things especially in Gorgias. “O Sav-

palo Tot éEtaiponr, Téde éoriv, what I admire in a companion is this. TloAAa

‘Opgjpov éxatvoiper, we praise many things in Homer.

Rem. 5. When the above words refer merely to a thing which one admires,
blames or loves, they govern the Acc., sometimes also the Acc. of the person
alone; e. g. émaiveiv, péyelv, wéudeotai tia; so also, dyacGat, Gavuacew
Tivd, to look with wonder at one, either at the person himself, or the whole nature of the
person.

sib The Genitive as the expr ession of Cause.

6. The second division of the causal Gen. includes the Gen. which
expresses cause; i. e. the Gen. denotes the object which calls forth
and occasions the action of the subject. This Gen. stands:

I. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the mind,
viz. (a) with verbs signifying to desire, to long for ;—(b) to care for,
io be concerned for ;—(c) to be pained, to.be grieved, to pity ;—(d)
to be angry and indignant ;—(e) with pdorveiv, to envy (cwi twos,
Dat. of person and Gen. of thing);—(f) to admire, praise and
blame (zie twos, Acc. of person and Gen. of thing).

Such verbs are, (a) éxiupeiv, épav, tputixog eye or dtaxeiotat, duppr,
rewgv ;—(b) éxyedeiobut, dpovtiferr, xpdecSat, neptopaotar, mpoopav, brepo-

pay, mpovoeiv, méhet, pevapéner, Guehelv, OAtywpeiv, deidecSat ;—(c) dAodipe-
oar, mevdixec éxerv, éAcetv and oixreipery (with Acc. of person and Gen. of

;

thing) ;—(d). opyifectat (with Dat. of person), yarewGe dépery ;—(f) Davuacerr,

| GyaoIat, (ndoby, évdatpovilery, éravetv, wénderdat (all with Acc. of person and

Gen. of thing).

Oideic moTOD éexcbupei, dia xpHoTod TOTOD, Kal ov CiTOV, GARa

xpnoTod citov: aavtec ydp dpa TOY Gyavav ExtBvupeodveey, no one

desires drink, but wholesome drink, ete.; for all desire what is good. Té avouotov

Gvopoton éxitvupei xe épa, desires and loves the unlike. UWervgv tov

citav, TOv TOTOY, Tod Exaivon, to long for food, drink, praise. Oi vé-
‘uot TOD KoLvod Gyatod éxipérovrat, the laws care for, have a regard for
*he public good. Oi yoveig wevb Kade cixov Tod Tatddc TEvvAKOTOG

216 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. [§ 158.

the parents grieved for their dead child. Ulocedév KikAwmog éxexdrato,
Neptune had been angry with the Cyclops. Oi kaxot ¢Sovodvas Toi¢g ayadoig
THC codiac, the evil envy the good on account of their wisdom. “Ayauat.ce-
tae avdpeiac, I admire you on 7 account of your bravery. Oavpalouerv Tov
Soxpaty THE cogiac, we admire Socrates for his wisdom. ZyAG oe Tod
chobrov, Ladmire you for your riches. Evdatpovilw ce tov ayatar,
I consider you happy on account of your blessings. Aiv® oe tie Tpotumiag,
I praise you for your readiness.

Rem. 6. The verbs dyanvGv, @tAciv, orépyecy, to love, and rovein,
to long for, do not govern the Gen., but the Acc.—M é/ 2, as impersonal, takes
the Dat. of the person caring, and the Gen. of the person or thing cared for;
e. g. MéAer ot tivo, I care for some one. If the thing cared for is expressed by
a neuter pronoun, it may stand in the Nom. as the subject of the verb, which
then becomes personal; e. g. Taira VeG weAjoet, God will take care of these things.
—The verbs davupualerv and dyactaz have the following constructions:
(a) the Acc. of the person or the Acc. of the thing alone, when the wonder or
admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole nature of a
person or thing; e. g. Pavualw (dyapat) Tov oTparyyov — Savpuilw Thy codiav ;
—(b) the Gen. of the person and the Acc. of the thing, when we admire some
action, external manifestation, or single circumstance in a person; e. g. TodTo
Savpalo cov — Savualw (dyapat) cov, dL4Tt obK Apyvpiov Kat ypvaiov TpoEthov
Snoavpove KekTHoPat paAdov fH codiac.. Comp. 5, (d) ;—(c) the Ace. of the per-
son and the Gen. of the thing, when we admire a person on account of some
quality ; e.g. Savudlo (dyapar) Tov Lwoxparyn ti¢ codiac. Comp. 6,1. Instead
of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition can be used here, commonly ézi with the
Dat.; e.g. Vavudlo Tov Lwoxpaty ext TH codig.—lIt will be seen that the relation
of the Gen. with verbs of praising, admiring and the like, is expressed by the
prepositions for, on account of.

II. With verbs which signify to requite, to revenge, to punish, to
accuse and condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as
the cause of the requital, revenge, etc.

Here belong the verbs tiuwpeiobar, Tiverdat, aitiaotat, ératiaotat, d1o-
kew, eicayelv, bmayelv, ypagecdat, mpockadciobat, diKalerv, Kpivery, aipeiv, to
convict (all with Acc. of person and Gen. of thing), éregsévat, éyxaheiv, éxioxg-
mreoSat (all with Dat. of person and Gen. of thing), detyerv, to ie accused, GA6-
vat, to be convicted.

"Odvacede ETicato tTode pvnotHpac THE bwEpBactiac, Ulysses punished
the suitors for their wickedness. Tipwpeiotai tia d6vov, to punish one, or
take vengeance upon one for murder "Erattidot ai tiva d6vo0v, to accuse one
of murder. *Extoxyntecdai tive TOV PevdouapTtuvpLGy, to prosecute one
Sor false witness. MiArsadny of étxbpol Ediwsav trupavvidog tHe év Xep-
povjow, prosecuted (pursued judicially) Mailtiades for his tyranny in Chersonesus.
Tpadecdai tiva rapavopwr, to indict or accuse one for unconstitutional measures.
betiyecy (to be accused) chore, dovov, doeBeiac. Kpiveotat (tobe accused)
dceBeiac. Atkalovoryr oi Ilépoa cal éykKAnparoc....&dyaptoriag,
the Persians condemn as a crime, ingratitude, etc. ‘AAGvat kAore, to be con-

§ 158. ] SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 217

victed of theft. Also the punishment of the guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen.
is to be considered as the Gen. of price, § 158, 7. (y); e. g. davarou, kpivew,
KpiveoSat, to conlemn, to be condemned, to death.

Rem. 7. "Eyxuietv besides the above, has the following constructions: (a) the
Dat. of person and Acc. of thing, to charge something upon some one ;—(b) the Dat.
of person followed by a‘ clause with 67 or by the Inf. ;—(c) the Dat. of person
alone, to accuse (§ 161, 2. c) ;—(d) the Acc. of thing alone, to bring as a charge.
Karnyopeiv, to accuse, is construed, (a) with Gen. of person, sometimes with
kara@ and Gen.;—(b) with Gen. of person and Acc. of thing, to lay something to
one’s charge ;—(c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, sometimes with rept
and Gen. of thing ;—(d) with Acc. of thing alone—Tvuév, tyudodat, to fine or
punish one with, take the Dat. of person with Gen. of punishment; e. g. Tizdv
TiVl OEKA TAAGVTWY, TOU Gavarou, to fine one ten talents, sentence one to death.

Rem. 8. The causal Gen. is used with the adverbs et, caddc, petplug
and some others, connected with the verbs éyecv, 7K eLv, and sometimes eivas,
to denote the object by which a particular condition is caused; e. g. eb tow
Biov 7KeELv, to be well off as to the means of living; ot Tw TpbToV ExXELE,
you are thus in respect to circumstances = you are in such circumstances; O¢ TG-
xouvc éxaotog eiyxev, as quick as each one could.

ce The Genitive denoting certain Mutual Relations.

7. The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by
which certain mutual relations are expressed. In these mutual re-
lations, one idea (e. g. that of superiority or inferiority) necessarily
supposes the other, and thus in a measure calls it forth and occa-
sions it. Hence the Gen. is used:

(a) With expressions of ruling, preéminence, excelling, promt-
nence, and the contrary, viz. those denoting subjection, yielding to,
and inferiority.

Here belong the verbs.dpyerv, xpatetv, deondlew, Tupavveiv, Tupavvevery,
oTparnyelv, éxitporevecy, éxtotateiy, Paothevery, fyeuovevery, HyeioSal, mpoé-
xe, Tepleivat, weptyiyvectal, mpocrareiv, inepBaArey, brephépery, dragéperv,
Tpwtevely, ToecBeveryv, Tpoxplverv, mpoTiudy, wAeovexteiv, WTTadoVat, botepeiv,
~ilewv, deinecSat, aroheinecbat, éXatrovatat, petotoGa, wecovextety, boTepov
elval, 7TTOva elvat; the adjectives axpat7c, éyxparie.

'O Aéyoc TOD Epyou expr er, the report exceeded the thing itsedf, Td poySy-
pa avdoarnia Trashy, oiuat, Tov ExcGuultdv GkparhH tori, depraved men
are subject to (not able to control) all their passions. TloAdGKig Aimy bo epBarAree
Td ddtkeiy TOD GdtKeict at, the doing an injury often excceds in grief the being
injured. Oi xovypol 7TTOvtar tov extbupucGr, wicked men are slaves to
{inferior to) their passions.

Rem. 9. ‘Hyevoveterv and 7yeioPat in the sense of to go before, with dd6v ex-
pressed or understood, to show the way, govern the Dat.; xpareiv in the sense of
to conquer, regularly governs the Acc., but in the sense of to rule, the Gen.

19

218 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. _ [§$ bs8.?

(8) With the comparative and with adjectives in the positive,
which have the force of the comparative, e. g. numerals in -actog”
and -ziove, etc., the object by which the comparison is. made, is put
in the Gen. | |

‘O vide weil éoti Tob TaT p 6¢, greater than his father. Xpvod¢kpeitTTav
pvpiav Adyar Gporoic, gold is better for men than a myriad of words. Td
‘EAAnvixdy oTparevua gaiverae TOAAaTAGCLOY éEcec8a TOU NMETEPO v,
many times larger than ours. OddEvO¢ devTtepoc, bat epoc, inferior to no one,
Tév dpKovvter repltta KtHoacbal, to acquire more than enough.

(vy) With verbs signifying to buy and sell, exchange and barter,
and with expressions of valuing (a&wvv, “&vo0s), of being worthy or
unworthy ; and generally, the price of a thing stands in the Gen.

Such verbs are OveioSa, dyopilev, xpiacdat, kTadodal, TapadapBavetyv, TH-
Asiv, Gro-, TepLoidocVat, didévat, dAAaTTELV, -ecSat, OrapelBecVal, Avy, TILEY,
TydoSal, ToeioSat.

Oi Opakes GvOdvTat Tag yuvaikac Tapa TOY yovéoy YPN UAT OV mEYGAwY,
buy their wives from their parents at a great price. TGv Tévav torodtory uv
TavrTa Tayae oi Geol, the gods sell all good things to us for toils. Oi ayaSol obdevoe
av Képdove tHv THe TaTpidos éAcvUepiayv dvTaAAaEatyvTo, the good would
exchange the freedom of their country for no gain. ’latpig TOAAGY GXAwv avTG-
§406¢ éoTlv, a physician is worth as much as many others. *“Eywye obdév avicwtepov
vouila Tov év dvOpdroce civat To} TOY Low Toy Te KaKdY Kal dyaSov GELOd-
oat, I think there is nothing more unequal among men than that the evil and the good
should be honored equally. “AEtocg temic, worthy of honor. Wocov didao-
Kel; mévte “VGY, for how much does he teach? For five minae; apyvpior,
utotov épyalecdat, to work for money, for hire.

LXXXIII. Hxereises on §§ 157, 158.

The soul must be restrained from evil desires. It is mournful and grievous
to be deprived of the good-will of men. ‘The soul, if (éav, w. subj.) it deparé
from the body polluted and impure, is not immediately with God. As the body,
bereft of the soul, sinks away (= falls), so also a state, bereft of laws, will be
dissolved. He who (é¢rv¢) does not consider the highest good (= the best),
but in (é«) every way seeks to do that which is (= the) most agreeable, how
can (§ 153, 2. c) (he) differ from the irrational brutes? The battle has deliver-
ed us from shameful slavery. We esteem the old man happy, because he. is
free from passions. Epaminondas sprang (= was) from an obscure father.
From Telamon sprang (yiyveoa) Ajax and Teucer, from Peleus, Achilles,
It is the business of the general to command, but the duty of the soldiers, to
obey. Stags were sacred to Artemis. Of all friends, the first and truest is a
brother. Socrates generously proffered what was his to all. The hired labor-
ers, who (écrv¢) for the sake of a subsistence performed slave-labors and parti-
cipated in no office, were the poorest of the Athenians. A good king allows the
citizens to enjoy (= participate in) a just freedom of speech and action. The
word takes hold upon the spirit. Hold fast, young men, to instruction, and dic

§ 158. ] SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 219

rect yourselves to (700¢, w. acc.) that which is (= the) more excellent (plur.).
The virtues of good men obtain honor and fame even with enemies. ‘The young
(comp.) must (xvp7, w. acc. and inf.) aspire after the good (plur.) and abstain
from evil actions. The pains of the sick are more violent at night than by day.
In winter, men desire summer, but in summer, winter. Hercules cleared (=
tamed out) Lybia, which was (part.) full of wild beasts. The good lack not
praise. ‘Those (= the) natures, that seem (part.) to be the best, most need ed-
ucation. The earth is full of injustice. Virtue leads us (in) a rugged and
toilsome (= full of sweat) path. Aetna is filled (yéyvev) with valuable firs and
pines. We contrive much, whereby (d.’ ov) to (= we may) enjoy the good
(plur.) and avert the evil. Milo, the Crotonian, ate twenty minae of flesh (plur.)
and as much bread (plur.), and (dé) drank three flagons of wine. Men derive
many advantages from sheep, horses, cows and the other animals. It is writ-
ten in the laws, that both the plaintiff and the defendant should be heard alike
(= to hear alike both, etc.). It is fair and right, to be mindful of the good (plur.)
rather than of the evil. It is pleasant to the unhappy to forget, even for a short
time, present evils. Since (part.) thou art young, be willing to hear thine (=
the) elders. He who is unacquainted with the sciences, though he sees, sees
not ( = the unacquainted — seeing, sees not). Hermes had great experience
in the medical science. It is better to die (aor.) than to exercise (= make trial
of) violence. Socrates considered with respect to philosophers,—whether (76-
tepa) they devoted (= turned) themselves to (é7@, w. acc.) reflection (Td ¢pov-
tiger, w. gen.) upon the celestial, from the opinion (art. aor.) that they already
sufficiently understood (inf. pres.) the human (plur.), or (whether they) supposed
that they did what was befitting in neglecting (aor.) the human and (= but)
contemplating the divine. ‘This we admire in Socrates, that even while banter-
ing, he could instruct the young men, who (part.) associated with him. Socrates
exhorted young men to aspire after the fairest and choicest virtue, by (dat.)
which both states and households are wisely (= well) directed. Pluto, who
(part.) loved (aor.) Proserpine, stole her away secretly with the codperation of
Jupiter. That is a poor president, who (dc¢Tv¢) cares for the present time, but
is not (u7) also provident for the future. Do not neglect even absent friends.
Be sparing of time. The good (man) is more concerned for the common weal,
than for his (own) fame. Many care more for the acquisition of money than
for that of friends. The Athenian state (of the A.) often repented (aor.) of sen-
tences passed (== which happened, aor. part.) in (eta, w. gen.) anger and with-
out (= not [wy] with) examination. I pity thee for thy mournful fate. Envy
(aor.) me not the memorial. Demosthenes we admire for his (= the)
greatness of nature and self-command in action ( = practice), and for his dig-
nity (= gravity), promptitude, boldness of speech and firmness. Anaxa-
goras is said to have been condemned (aor.) for impiety, because he called the
sun a red-hot mass. Melitus accused (aor.) Socrates of impiety. Themistocles
was accused, in his absence (dodyudv), of treason and condemned to death.
All (things) everywhere are subject to the gods, and the gods rule alike over
all. Apollo led the nine Muses, whence he was also called the Muse-leader.
Why are the educated prominent above the uneducated? Cadmus of Sidon
( = the Sidonian) reigned (aor.) over Thebes, but over the whole of-Peloponne-

990 SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE. [§ 159.

sus reigned Pelops, the (son) of Tantalus. Many are slaves (77Tovec) to money.
Govern appetite, sleep and anger. The bravery of the Greeks triumphed over
(xeptyiyvecSat, aor.) the power of the king of the Persians. Nothing is more
valuable to men, than the cultivation of the mind. No teacher of hunger, thirst
and cold is better than necessity. Thou canst (§ 153, 2. c) not purchase virtue
and nobleness of mind for money. Diphridas took Tigranes with his wife, and
released them for a large sum (= much) of money. The Chaldaeans enlisted
for pay, because they were very warlike and poor. They only who (§ 148, 6)
practise virtue, are worthy of honor. The benefactors of men are deemed
(aor.) worthy of immortal honors. —

§ 159. Il. Accusative.

1. The Accusative Case expresses the relation whither, and de-
notes, (a) in a local relation, the Limit or point to which the action
of the verb is directed ; in prose, however, a preposition is regularly
used here; e. g. ei¢ aory élGeiv ;—(b) in the causal relation, it de-
notes the effect, consequence, result, of the action of the verb, as well
as the object on which the action is performed. n this latter rela-
tion, the object in the Ace. receives the action performed by the
subject, i. e. is in a passive or suffering condition ;. whereas, with
the Gen., the subject is represented as receiving the action. Comp.
§ 158, a. et seq. The Acc. also differs from the Dat., in being the
emmediate or direct object of the verb, while the Dat. is the remote
or indirect object. Comp. § 161, 2.

(a) Accusative denoting Effect.

- 2. The Accusative of effect is used as in other languages; e. g.
youge énictoAny (émiczodyy being the effect of the action of the
verb). In respect to the Greek, it is to be observed, that a verb
either transitive or intransitive very frequently governs the Ace. of
a substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or
has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pronoun
commonly belongs to the Acc. This is commonly called the Acc.
of a kindred or cognate signification.

"Emipedodyvtar nacay ixipéxrerar, they take care with all diligence.
Aéopat tur dixaiay dénotv, I ask of you a just request. So xaddc rpagsere
mpaTrerv,—épyavecVar Epyov Kakov,—dpyeww apynv,—dovietav dovAevety,—16-
Aguov To/eneiv,—vacov vooeiv. “Opxove duvivat, to swear oaths ; doeveiv vo-
gov, to be sick of a discase ; Civ Biov, to live a life.

§ 159.] SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE. 221

(b) Accusative of the Object on which the action is
performed, i.e.the suffering Object.

3. Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin,
take some other Case than the Acc., or are constructed with prepo-
sitions. They are:

(1) The verbs ogedeiv, dviwarat, ovivacda (Lvowedeiv, however,
with Dat.), to be useful; Blancew, adieiv, vboilew, dupaiverdan,
AwBaodut; evoepeiv, aosbeiv; hoyar, évedgevew, insidiari; timo
osioDar; Degumeve, Sogvpogsir, émitgonevew, to be a guardian;
nohaneve, Ooneve, Gonrewv, moocuvveiy; mEtOew ; apsipecS cet,
respondere and remunerart; puiarcscOa, eviapeioIo1; pimeiodct,
Cydovr.

Oepaneve toc cVavaroue, serve the gods. ’"AAKiBiadne Exrere Td
724% 0¢, Al. persuaded the multitude. WActiotapyov, tov Aewvidov, évta Ba-

| othéa Kal véov ETL, ETeTPOTEVEDY O Ilavoaviac, Pausanias was the guardian of
Plistarchus, ete. My koAaKkeve tode pidAove, donot flatter friends. ’Q 6 é-
Aet TOdG btAove, Kal wy BPAaKTE TOdG ExXV POE, assist friends, and do
not injure enemies. M7 Gdiket Tode didrove. My bBpile todc rai-
Oac. TloAAanig Kat dovAot TLMwWpovvTat TOE Adikove JOEecTéTaeE,
often even slaves take vengeance on their unjust masters. ’ApetBeotat tTiva
poSocc, Adyotc, to answer one; duet Becta Yaply, evepyeciav or amec
Beodai Tiva xapitt, to return a favor to one.

(2) Verbs which signify to do good or evil to any one, by word
or deed. Such are evegyereiv, xaxvvgyeiv, xaxomoisir,. evdoyeiv, xa-
xohoyEei?, EV, KaLOS, Kang LeveL, EimEiv, amayooEdEl.

“AvSpure, uy Opd TOD TEGVHKOTAC KaKOC, do not injure the dead.
My kakovpyet Tove diirove, do not harm your friends. Eiepyéret
tv matpida, do good to your country, Ev woler Tove girove, confer
favors on your friends. Ev.Aéye Tov ev AéyovTa, kal ev Toler TOV Ed
cotovvrTa, speak well of him who speaks well, and do well to him who does well.
Instead of the adverbs ed and xakGéc with roveiv, ete., the Greek also uses the
corresponding adjectives: KaAd, kaka woletv, Aéyety TLvG, todo or say
good or ill to one. See under double Accusative ({ 160, 2).

(3) Verbs of persevering, awaiting, waiting for, and the con-
trary; e. g. meve, Ouddeiy; evyew, anodidoaoxew, Soumetevew.

My gedye Tov Kivdvvoy, do not flee from danger. Xp7y Sappetv &4a-
vaT oy, it is necessary to meet death bravely = not to fear death. ‘O dotAog az é-
dpa Tov dcaoxoTny, the slave ran away from his master. Oc Tov TpaypaTov
kaipol ob wévovor THY HmEeTtépav BpadvTHTa, the favorable opportunities
for action do not wait for our slothfulness. .

(4) Verbs of concealing and being concealed, viz. LavSavew,
xovntew (celare), uodntecGot;—also the verbs pS avery (to an-

:*

222 SYNTAXK.—ACCUSATIVE. [§ 159. i

ticipate), Leiwe vy, Exthet mets, to fail ;—verbs of swearing and:
the like. With verbs of swearing, the object sworn by is put in the
Ace. Hence also adverbs of swearing are followed by the Ace. ;
A, &. Ube, OV [el, PUL MO, VI}.

Seodvc obte Aavdavetv, ovTe BracacSat dvvaroy, it is not possible to be
oncealed from, to escape the notice of the gods, etc. Oi moAgusor EGGnoaV TOdS
AVnvaiove ddixouevos ei¢ TO GoTV, anticipated the Athenians in coming into the

city, i. e. reached the city before thm. "Emtheinet me 6 xpovoc, 7 7Huépa, the
time, the day fuils me. "Opvupme ravtag tod¢ Seodc, I swear by all the gods.
Nal wa Aia, yes, by Jupiter! Ma rode deots, by the gods.

(5) Very many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the
mind; e.g. popeioPut, Seicor; aicziverPut, aideiodat; &yFeoFat;
dusyeoaiven; éxmhyrrecS ut, natandyrtecdas; olnreiger, éhesiv,
ohopueec Oa, ete. |

Xpy aidetaoVat Tove eors, itis necessary to reverence the gods. Aio-
xivouat Tov 8edr, Lam ashamed before the god. ’Ohodipov trove Té-
vntac, pity the poor.

(6) With verbs of motion, the space or way is put in the Ace.
these being the objects on which the action of the verb is perform-
ed; so also the #éme during which an action takes place, in answer
to the question, How long? so too measure and weight, in answer to
the question, How much?

Baivectv, wepay, prety, ropevectvac 606», to goa way, like ttque
reditque viam. Xpo6vov, TOv ypovor, along time, ViKTAa, HRuépav, dur-
ang the night, day. ‘H LiBapic nxuale ToD TOV TOV Xpovovy madota, was
flourishing during this time. “loyvodv te kat OnBaiot Tode TEhEevTatiove
TOUVTOVOL YpOvoVeE peta THY év AEdKTPOLC uaynv, during these last times.
MeAriadne axérier Uapov rodwopxnjoac é§ kat eixootv 7m ép ac, having besieged P.
twenty-six days. T6 BaSv2caviov radavrov divarat Eb Botdac éBdomyZKov-
ra uve, the Babylonian talent is worth (weighs as much as, amounts to) seventy
Eubsean minae. So divayat, signifying to be worth, regularly takes the Acc.

(7) Finally, the Acc. is used with intransitive or passive verbs
and intransitive adjectives of all kinds, to explain them more fully.
Here, also, the Acc. represents the object as acted upon or suffering,
since it denotes the object to which the intransitive action of the

erb or adjective refers or is directed. ‘This is the Acc. of more
definite limitation, or, as it is often called, the Ace. of synecdoche.

Kayvew tTod¢ 6d0ahpore, to be pained in or in respect to the eyes; TA,
dpévac bytaivery, to be sound in mind; Gayeiv Trod¢g TO0ac, TA COpaTa,
to have pain in the fect, body. Avadéper yuv7) avdpic THY GbaLv, woman differs
in (in respect to) her nuture from man. ‘O dv8purog tiv S&KTVAOY GAyel, the.
man has a pain in his finger (is pained in respect to). *Ayaddg Téexvny Treva,

§ 159. ] SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE. 223

distinguished in some art. Acepdappévog THY PvxHY, corrupt in spirit. Lavyag
kai yvouny ixavoc, kal TA TOAEMLA GAKyog jv, Phanes was competent in
counsel, and brave in batile. ’Avéotn Pepaidac TO cGpa oik ddvi¢g Kal THY
wvuynv ovK ayevvet avdpi to.xoc. The English commonly uses prepositions
to express the force of this Acc., viz. in, in respect to, of ; or when it stands with
an adjective, the English sometimes changes the Acc. of the thing into a perso-
nal substantive and makes the adjective agree with it; e. g. dyadoc réxvgv, a
good artist, or the prepositions of or with are placed before the substantive denot-
ing the thing, and the attributive adjective is made to agree with that substan-
tive; e. g. veaviac Kaho THY Puxny, a youth of or with a lovely spirit.

REMARK. In this way many adverbial expressions are to be explained, as,
evpoc, ioc, péyeSoc, Bator, ujKoc, TASOC, apiduov, yévoc, bvoua, uépog; also
Tl, TOoevTOV, méya, Nav, TaVTA, TO AoLTOY, etc.; e.g. KAéavdpog yévog jv B-
yarede ax’ ’Apxadiac, a Phigalian by descent. Meta taita adixovto éxt Tov
ZaCatov worayov TO evpocg Tettapwv TAET pwr, four hundred feet in width.

LXXXIV. Heeretses on § 159.

He who is enslaved (part.) to pleasures, submits to (= serves) the most shame-
ful servitude. The laws not only punish the wrong-doers, but also benefit the
virtuous. If thou wishest to be beloved by friends, benefit (thy) friends; if thou
desirest to be honored by a state, be useful to and benefit the state. Riches of-
ten injure both the body (plur.) and the mind (plur.). He who (§ 148, 6) flatters
friends, does them much (70AAG@) wrong. Revenge not thyself upon thine ene-
mies. Those who (part.) injure a benefactor, are punished by God. We wor-
ship no man as lord, but the gods. Sedentary trades injure the body (plur.) and
enfeeble the mind (plur.). -'The hunter lays snares for the hares. Endeavor to
repay benefactors with gratitude. Beware most of all of meetings for (2v) ca-
rousal. Imitate wise men. Prudent men (sing.) take heed to the danger, from
which they have once been rescued (aor.). We must (ype@v) emulate works
and acts, not words of virtue. It is said, that (acc. w. inf) Xerxes threw down
(aor.) fetters into the Hellespont in order to revenge (part. fut.) himself upon
the Hellespont. A slave, who has run away (aor. part.) from his master, de-
serves stripes. Shun a pleasure that afterward brings pain. The general must
(xpn, w. acc. and inf.) demean himself kindly towards (zpoc, w. acc.) his soldiers,
that they may have confidence (Vapfeiv) in him. Tell me, what (ézoioc) pun-
ishment the betrayer of his country will expect after (ueTd, w. ace.) death. Con-
ceal (aor. mid.) from me nothing, (my) friend. To deceive (aor.) men is easy;
but to remain concealed from God (is) impossible. Provision (ioc) failed the
army. I swear to you by all the gods and all the goddesses, that I have never
injured any one of the citizens (= to have injured no one, etc.). Young men
must (dez, w. acc. and inf.) have respect, in (éi, w. gen.) the house, to parents,
in (év).the ways, to those who meet (part.) them, in solitude (plur.), to themselves.
The beginning of wisdom is to fear God. Have compassion (aor.) upon me,
ho (part.) am unfortunate beyond desert. ‘The Lacedaemonians had not less
reverence for old men than for (their) fathers. Shrink not from going (inf) a
long way to (pdc, w. acc.) those who (§ 148, 6) profess to teach anything useful.
For a long time the Lacedaemonians had (aor.) the supremacy of Greece by

224 SYNTAX.—DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. [$ 160.

(xaré, w. acc.) land and by sea. Theophrastus died (aor.) after (part.) he-
had lived (aor:) eighty-five years. Phanes was of sufficient prudence (= suffi-
cient in prudence), and brave in battle. Men seem to be well in body (plur-.) :
after (476) many labors. Cyrus was very beautiful in person, of a humane
heart, (and) very fond of learning and very eager for honor. Larissa was built
of (dat.) earthen tiles; underneath was a stone foundation of twenty feet in ~
height.

In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the Acc.
with one verb.
1. In the construction mentioned above, § 159, 2, when the verb
has a transitive signification, e. g. gidia» gideiv; then the idea of

activity consisting of the verb and substantive, with which an ad-
jective usually agrees, being blended into one, may at the same time ~
be extended to a personal object; e.g. pia weyahyy gihiap -
(= péya pd) Ov 2078 «, Llove the boy with great love (greatly) ; |
xalo oe TovtTO TO Ovopma, L call you this name or by this name.
Here qitiav and dvoue are Accusatives of cognate signification, —
having a sense similar to their respective verbs.

2. Expressions of doing or saying good or evil, which may contain
an Acc. of the thing said or done, take the object to which the good ©
or evil is done in the Acc. ‘The Acc. here also, denotes the object
acted upon; ¢. g. zolsivy, moczrewv, évycleoFas, etc., Aéyew, sizeir,
ete., ayaa, xaxa tive, to do good or evil to any one, to say
good or evil of any one.

§160. Double Accusative.

SS

Tore d} 6 OemtoroKAfe Exeivév texal rode KoptvGiove roaaa te
Kal Kaka éXeyerv, Themistocles said much evil of him and the Corinthians. Ov-
Sexorote éxavovTo TOAAA Huadc ToLodvTEeg KaKkG, never ceased to do
much evil to us.

Rem. l. instead of the Acc. of the object acted upon, the Dat. is sometimes
used, which is to be considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvantage; e. g.
mpockorel, Ti TOL ToLHoovoLy of apyspevot, consider what your subjects shall da
FOR you; but with of, what they will do TO you.

3. Moreover, verbs take two Accusatives, which signify to make,
to choose, to appoint, to nominate, to consider as anything, to de-
clare, to represent, to regard, to know, to say, to name, to call; e. g.
zoueiv, tuo éveee (to appoint), naSictaveat, aiosioD at, voice, 77 Eto O ot,
Azyew, dvoualew, xedety, ete.—One of these Accusatives is the ob-
ject acted upon, or the suffering object, the other is the predicate,
and hence may often be an adjective.

§ 160.] SYNTAX.—DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 225

‘O Kipog rovd¢g gidove émoinoe miovaiove, made his friends rich.
TLavdeberv tivd cogar, to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education.
Aipetyv Tivd wéyay, to make one great. NopiCerv, nyeiovat riva
évdpa ayatéy, to think, to consider some onea good man. ’Ovopalerv tiva
cogtotHy, to call onea sophist. Aipeitcai tiva orpatn yd», tochoose one
acommander. Tov TwoBpiav cbvdernvov mapéiraf er, he made Gobryas
his companion at supper. U6diews tAottov yotpat cvppaxove, rio-
Tiv, EVVOLAD.

Rem. 2. In the passive construction, this explanatory Acc. is changed into
the Nom. and agrees with the subject; e.g. Tlasdeterv tivd coddv, but Pass. ri ¢
éradevby copoc; aipeiodai tiva otpatyyov, but Pass. tic gpedy otpa-
THY OC.

4. With verbs, («) of entreating, beseeching, destring, inquiring,
asking, e. g. aizeiv, mourrew (to demand), nodzrec9at, éowray,
éSeralew, tocogeiv; (6) of teaching, e. g. diddoxew, moudevew; (y)
of dividing, cutting im preces, e. g. diaipeiv, téuver, Staveuew; (6)
of depriving, taking away, e. g. apaipsiod at, oregeiv, dmoctegeir,
ovdgy, etc.; (&) of concealing or hiding from, e. g. xgvatew; (€) of
putting on and off, e. g. evdvew, éxdvew, Kugriervivas.

Tléupag KapBtong eig Atyurtov kypvxa, ret "“Apacty Buyart épa, asked
Amasis for lis daughter. Attod¢ éxatov Téhavta éxpaéav, demanded of
them a hundred talents. “Apytptov mpartrecv TLvia, to exact money from one,
Toad dtdGoKet me 6 Tove Bioros, teaches me many things. Ward etov-
ot Tove Tatdac Tpia “ova, they teach the boys three things only. T2Gr-
T&v Te tTHY’ATTIKhY Kal TpOTOVE TOV ’ADnVaiwy édidackov TOdc TA4i-
0 ac, they taught the boys the Aitic tongue and the Athenian customs. Tpeic poi-
pac 6 Béping EOGoatTOo TavTa TOV welov oTpaTdoy, divided all the
land-army into three divisions. Téuvetv, dtarpeiv Te pip, poipas, todi-
vide anything into parts. ‘O Kipoc¢ T6 oTpaTevpa Katévetme OG0EKa
wépn, divided the army into twelve parts. Tov wovov po kal diAov raida
abethketo THY WUXHY, deprived my only child of life. Thv timjv aroo-
tepet me, he robs me of honor. Tad Huétepa quadc adroorepel 6 G-
Ainroc. Kptrrw ce 76 atoyxnpa, I conceal the misfortune from you. Tai¢
uéyac ETEpOY Taida pikpoy péyav xLTOva éfédvoe, kal TOY HE-
TOva pév Eavtod Exeivov judgiece, a large boy stripped another small boy of
his large tunic, and put his own tunic on him.

Rem. 3. ’Avoorepetv and 4darpeiob-at, to deprive, to take away, are construed (a)
with Ace. of thing alone ;—(b) with Acc. of person alone, but rarely ;—(c) with
Acc. both of person and of thing, very often ;—(d) with Gen. of person and Ace.
of thing, less often ;—(e) atoortepetv with Acc. of person and Gen. of thing, very
often (§ 157.), a¢a:peioSar very seldom, and then means to prevent; otepeir
is construed both as in (c) and (e).

Rem. 4. When the active verbs mentioned under No. 4, are changed into the
passive, the Acc. of the object receiving the action, becomes the Nom., but the
Acc. of the thing remains (according to § 150,4); e.g.’EpotrGuar THY yva-

226 SYNTAX.—DATIVE. [§ 161.
Ss

nv, I am asked my opinion. Ia:detopuat, dcdGoKopar povork7y, L
am taught, Ilearn music. Ti 08 kai oixnoeg Ta adTa wépyn OtaveundAta,
let the land and its habitations be divided into the same number of parts. “A aup &-
VAvalt, GTOCTEPYSHVaAL THY apx7v, to be deprived of office. Kpiarto-
war Tovro TO Tpayp"G, this thing is concealed from me. ’AwOlLévvvpat
yit ava, Tam clothed with, or I put on a tunic. ;

Rem. 5. Even some verbs, which in the active are constructed with the Dat.
of the person and the Acc. of the thing, in the passive change this Dat. of the
person into the Nom., while the Acc. of the thing remains.. The following are
regularly so constructed : émiTarrey, émitpémety, extotéAdety TLVi TL, to com-
mit, to entrust something to some one, e. g.’Enitpénopat, éxitattoual, émeoTéAAouat
Thy dvaakgy, Lam entrusted with the guard, or the guard 1s entrusted to me.

Rem. 6. The oyjya xa’ 6Ao0v Kat wépog occurs with the Acc. as well as with
the Nom. (§ 147b, Rem. 2); e. g. Oi woAguioe TodG ToAiTag TOvE pév
dméxtetvav, TOdE 6% édovAdcarTo, as for the citizens, the enemy killed some, and
enslaved others, or the enemy killed scme of the citizens, ete.

LXXXYV. Hrxeretses on § 160.

When Pyrrhus had twice conquered (aor.) in engagements (ovuSaArecy, aor.
part.) with the Romans, having lost (aor.) many of his friends and leaders, he
said: Although (av, w. subj.) we have conquered (aor.} the Romans in battle,
we areruined. Critias and Alcibiades occasioned (aor.) very many evils to the
state. The gods have conferred (aor.) many blessings upon human life. Esteem
labor as the guide to (gen.) a pleasant life. Plato called (aor.) philosophy a
preparation for (gen.) death. Misfortune makes men more thoughtful. Socrates
did not exact from those who (§ 148, 6) had intercourse with him, (any) money
for (gen.) his conversation. Apollo, who was (ylyveoat, aor. part.) the inven-
tor of the bow, taught men archery. The Greeks, in the Median (wars), took
(aor. part.) the supremacy from the Lacedaemonians and gave it to the Athe-
nians. ‘The public square of the Persians surrounding (= around) the gover-
nor’s residence, is divided into four parts; of these, one is for boys, another for
youths, another for adult men, another for those who ({ 148, 6) are (yiyveotaz,
perf.) past (= over, beyond) military years. Many, who (part.) have mean
minds, are adorned (= invested) with fine persons and fine lineage (plur.) and
wealth (plur.). Wisdom was taught to many young men by Socrates. After
(part.) the power was taken from (aor.) Croesus, he lived with Cyrus. ‘The sol-
diers, to whom (part.) the guard had been intrusted, had fled.

§161. Ill. Dative.

1. The Dative Case expresses the relation where, and hence is
used, first, to denote, (a) the place in which an action is performed ;
in prose, however, prepositions are commonly joined with substan-
tives expressing this relation, e. g. éy 0081, in monte ;—(b) the
time when or in which an action is performed, e. g. TavtTYy TF

§ 161.] SYNTAX.—DATIVE. 227

nuéod, this day; ti] avty vuxci, the same night; molLoig
Erecuy, many years; TQITY wyvi; TH ZYTY OG; here also
the preposition éy is often used;—(c) the being with, associating,
accompanying, (a) the Dat. singular of collective nouns, or the Dat.
- plural of common nouns, connected with a verb of going or coming,
e. g. Adyvaios yor aiy DE odu Gdiyo, modhaig vavety,
CTOUTH, COTOATLOTEULS, etc., came with a large number, with
many ships, with an army, with soldiers, etc.; (8) the Dat. connect-
ed with «vzog¢ which agrees with the substantive in the Dat., to
express the idea, at the same time with, together with, e. g. Ot mohe-
joe évetiumpacay ty nO AV TOTS TOTS LEQois, burnt the city
together with the sanctuaries.

2. The Dat. is used, in the second place, to denote an object,
which is indeed aimed at by the action of the subject, but which is
not, as with the Acc., attained, reached or accomplished, but only
participates and is interestnd in it. Hence the Dat. is used:

(2) With expressions of association and union ; here belong, (a)
expressions denoting ¢ntercourse, associating with, mixing with,
communication, participation ;—(B) verbs and expressions signify-
ing to go against, to encounter, to meet, to approach, to be near to,
and their opposites, e. g. to yield to, to submit ;—(y) to fight, to quar-
rel, to contend, to vie with ;—(6) to follow, to serve, to obey, to trust
and to accompany ;—(é) to counsel, to incite, to encourage.

Here belong, (a) the verbs diddval, mapéyery, dutaciv, utyvivat, -voGat, Kot-
vovy, -ovo0al, Kolvwveiv, Oi-, KaTaAAaTTELV, -ectat, SevoiacGat, orévdeoVat or
orovdacg moleioSal, xpatrev, ixicyvetoGa, eimeiv, Aéyev, dtaréyeoSat, ev-
yeoval, Katapdovat, also adjectives and adverbs and even substantives, as Kou-
voc, CvYTPOdoL, Ciudavoc, cvyyevfc, ueTaitiv¢ and others compounded with ody
and weta ;—() the verbs troorhval, ddiorac8at, dravTav, bravTav, bravTia-
Ce, TAnoracew, meddle, éyyilew, ciety, breikerv, ywpetv, the adjectives 7A-
oiec, évavtioc, the adverbs éyyic, téAac ;—(y) the verbs épilerv, uayeoar, rode
peiv, aywovilecbat, dixdlerda, dudioBynreiv ;—(d) the verbs éxec3at, axodov
Veiv, dradéyeoUar (to succeed), wetSeo9at, ixaxotew, aneelv, TioTEvEelv, TE
mo.téval, the adjectives and. adverbs dxéAovVoc, -we, duadovog, Eke, egesHe s—
(e) the verbs mpoc-, éxitarrety, mapatveiv, wapakeAciecSat.

‘Opitrer toicg dyatoic advdpérzotc, associate with good men. Ev-
xeote totic teolc, pray tothe gods. "AnavTgr, mAnoltaletv, tyye-
Cevv revi, to meet, approach, come near to one. Mi eixete Toig Tohe-
tore, do not yield to the enemy. Ol "EAAnvec nade EpaxécavTo Toi¢
TLépoate, fought with the Persians. Oi orpariita: dvnKkobtotyoay Toi¢
otpatnyotc, disobeyed the commanders. Ieidov roic vopote, obey the
laws. Ti apetg akoAov ci d6éa, glory follows virtue. TWerovSivar revi,
to trust one. “YOare mepcypévoc tiv ualay, having mixed the maize with water.

228 SYNTAX.—DATIVE. $161.

(b) With expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness
and unlikeness, of agreement and difference. Under those of like-
ness is included 6 adzés, signifying the same. |

Such are éorxévar, dpuorody, -odoSat, Guovoc, -we, iooe, -w¢, Eudepne (similar), ©
mapanAjotoc, -wc, dua, dtapopoc, dtapwvoc, and very many words compounded
with 608, civ, weTa; e. g. duovoetv, 6uoyAwrToc, svpdwvety, ete.

Oi raideo Eu Gepéctaror hoa TH warp, the children were very much
like their father. ‘Qrd.tomévor wavtec hoav of rept Tov Kipov totic atToic TO
Kip érdotc, all Cyrus’ soldiers were provided with the same arms as Cyrus.

(c) With verbs and expressions signifying, («) to assent to, to
agree with, etc.;—(B) to upbraid, to reproach, to be angry, to envy ;
—(y) to help, to be useful to, to avert from, and verbs compounded
with cvy, expressing this idea;—(d) to be becoming, to be suitable,
to be fit, to please, and with many others, the personal object is put
in the Dat. In addition to the Dat. of the person, these verbs fre-
quently govern the Acc. of the thing. The Dat. is also used with
verbs signifying to rejoice at, to be pleased with, and the like. In
many cases, however, the Dat. with such verbs may be regarded as
the Dat. of cause. Comp. § 161, 3.—In general, the Dat. is used,
when the action takes place for the benefit or injury of a person or
thing. This is called the Dat. of advantage or disadvantage, and
often includes what is termed the limiting Dat., or the Dat. express-
ing the relation of io or for.

Here belong, (a) éuodoyetv ;—(@) péudeoSae (with Acc. it means to blame),
AovdopetoGat, émiriuay, éyxadeiv (§ 158, Rem. 7) and émcxadeiv (revi te), éme-
mAArrely, dvewilev, evoydAeiv, Supotoba, Bpiwotodat, yaderaiverv, P3oveiv,
Baoxaivesy (to envy) ;—(y) apqyetv, dubvecv, aréserv, Tyswpetv, BowSetv, Excxov-
peiv, arodoyeloSat, Avowtedciv, exapketv, Ypatopetv, ovpPépely, ovunparrery,
ouvepyetv, and adjectives of similar signification, e. g. yp7ouuoc, PiAog; and those
of an opposite signification, e. g. éydpoc, BAaBEpoc, etc.;—(0) mpéwerv, dpyuor-
tev, TpochKelv (with Inf. following), elx¢g éoTt, dpéoxecv, the adverbs mperov-
Tac, OmpEeTc, ElKdTws.

Tocesdv odddpa émevéarver ’Odvocel, was very angry with Ulysses. "E 1 t-
tAATTELv, dverdiferv, éyxadketv TLvii Tt, to reproach one for something,
to charge something on one. Ob toig dpyew Bovdopévors wéugopat,
GAAa Toicg brakovery ETOLLOTEpOtC otctyv, I do not reproach those wishing
to rule, but those, ete. "Hy dyrec 6 Gidunmoc roic “ADyvatotrc, Philip gave
trouble to the Athenians. @Goveiv tive, to envy one. “ALVVG TO vopy,
I will defend (the idea of aiding) the law, ete. ’Opeorng 7SéAnoe Tim wpeEty
xatpt, Orestes wished to help his father, ete. "AyiAdedc Erte pOpnoe Iatpo-
tA 70 étaipw Tov d6vor, avenged the murder of ( for) his friend Patroclus.
‘H dpet? Gpécket toic ayavoic, virtue pleases the good. Eixétwg cot
yaipovory of Aakedarpoviol, rejoice in, are pleased with you. “Hdecdat
tLvt, to be pleased with a thing.

§161.] SYNTAX.—DATIVE. 229

(d) Finally, the Dat. is used to denote the possessor with the
verbs cival, vmaeoyery and yiyvecd «1, these verbs then be-
ing translated by the verb to have, and the Dat. as the Nom.; e. g.
Kivew 7v peycdn Bacideia, Cyrus had a great kingdom; and in
general, the Dat. is used, ee an action takes place im respect to,
in relation to a “a pita or an object considered as a a e. g.
Loxparys towdros wv tins “Eos yv tT] OLE paddov, 7 Gave-
zov, Socrates being such, deserved honor in respect to the city rather
than death. ence the Dat. is also frequently used with the pas-
sive, and regularly with verbal adjectives in -zéo¢ and -z0c, instead
of vz0 with the Gen.; e.g. wo wot modregoy Sedihwzo, as has
been before shown by me. Aoxyréu éori oot 4 aoety, virtue must
be practised by you. On the construction with the verbal adjective,
see § 168, 1, 2.

8. In the third place, the Dat. is used like the Latin Ablative
(Abl. of instrument), to denote the cause, means and instrument
(hence with yeyoda:), the manner and way, the measure (by which
the action is limited, particularly with comparatives and superla-
tives), conformity (according to, in accordance with), often also,
the material.

Of rodéutot 668 wy an7jAGor, went back through, on account of fear (the fear be-
ing the cause of the aeen)- "Aya@Adouat Ti vtK 7G, I exult on account of victory.
Lrépyo, dyarG Tol¢c UTapxovolv ayavtoic, I am pleased with those who
are good. ’O¢UVadpoitc opiuev, Goiv dkobouer, we see with our eyes, we hear
with our ears. “Ioxtetv TH oGmaTL, to be strong in body. Oi otparidrat ov p-
pope peyadn éxpynoarvTo, experienced (used) great misfortune. ’AAéEavdpog
dtdackadw éxpjoato’Apiototéner. Oi wodéutor Bia eic Thy TbALY ei¢gecay,
entered the city by force. Oi’ACyvaiot tov MiAtiadny mevtqKovTa TaAaVYTOLE
énpiwoar; fined Miltiades fifty talents. ‘H ayopa TLapio 2iSw@ hoxnuévy Fr,
the Agora was adorned with Parian marble. TLoAAG, d2Aiyo peilwr, greater by
much, little (the Dat. measuring the degree of difference between the things com-
pared). T7% dAnGeia xpivery, to judge according to truth.

4. The Dat. of the thing often stands with verbs, substantives
and adjectives, to denote in what respect their signification is to be
taken ; e. g. umepBadiew t 61 7, to excel in or in respect to boldness ;
Kvdvosg 676 wart, Cydnus by name; tayvs 206 t, swift of foot. This
Dat., however, is often the same as the Dat. of means or instrument.

5. The Dat. stands as the indirect object or complement of very
many verbs, to denote the relation expressed in English by éo or
for ; e. g. didi oo4 70 BiBdiov, I give a book to you; Kigoo evra,
sinev, Cyrus said to him; ov we pihot moogepeoorto 7 wiv, they did

20

230 SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS. [$ 162.

not conduct towards us as friends ; oteatevpa ovveheyeto Kv 0 @, an
army was collected for Cyrus. |

5. (a) The Dat. is also put after adjectives to denote the object to
which their quality is directed. The relation of this Dat. is usually
expressed by tc or for, e. g. 2 ce ot djhov éyevero, it became evident
toall; avt@ oa dyatoi evvot Zour, the good were well disposed to-
wards him; éySo0g avFown2ors, hateful to men.

Remark. The rules 5 and 5, (a) are mainly included in 2, (a), (b), (¢), but are
stated here in a more specific form, for the benefit of beginners.

LXXXVI. Hzercises on § 161.

Cyrus resolved (aor.) on this day to engage with the enemy ; after the battle
he marched (aor.) the same day twenty stadia. The Athenians made an expe-
dition (cTparetecy) with thirty ships against the islands of Aeolus. When the
Persians came (aor.) with (their) entire (waumAnS7jc) force (oTdA0c), the Athe-
nians dared (aor. part.) to encounter (aor.) them, and conquered them. ‘The
Athenians conquered the enemy and took their ships together with the men.
Associate not with bad men, but cleave ever to the good. Thamyris, who was
distinguished (aor. part.) for beauty and for (skill in) harp-playing, contended
(aor.) with the Muses for (the superiority in) (epi, w. gen.) music. Human na-
ture is mingled with a divine energy. Truth discourses with boldness (yerd,
w. gen.), and therefore men are displeased with it. It is easy to advise (aor.)
another (érepoc). The general exhorted the soldiers to fight bravely. Life is
like a theatre. Most of the Roman women were accustomed to wear (= to
have) the same shoes as the men. Actions are not always like words. Homer
compares the race of men to leaves. ‘The mind ruined by wine is in the same
case as (= suffers the same as) chariots, that have lost (part. pres.) their
charioteers. Some object to the laws of Lycurgus, that they are indeed suffi-
cient to call forth (zpd6c, w. acc.) bravery, but are insufficient to maintain (=
for) justice. To please the multitude is to displease the wise. Esteem those as
true friends, who (§ 148, 6) censure faults. Quails have a pleasant song. Hu-
man destinies (= the human, plur.) have been deplored by many wise men, who
believed (part.) that life is (zxf) a punishment. ‘The gods rejoice in the virtue
of men. The bull wounds with the horn, the horse with the hoof, the dog with
the mouth, the boar with the tusk. The Thessalians practised (ypyoac) law-
lessness more than justice. Helen was very (= much) distinguished (aor.), as
well by birth as for beauty and fame. Wisdom is far (by much) better than
riches. One can (= it is possible) neither safely use a horse without bridle,
nor riches without consideration.

§162. Prepositions.

1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whither and
where, so the prepositions denote other local relations, which desig- —

§ 163. ] SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.—«avti, 700. 231

nate the extension (dimension) of things in space, viz. the Juata-
position of things (near to, before, by, around, with), and the local
opposites, above and below, within and without, before and behind,
etc.

2. The Case aomenied with the preposition shows in which of
the three above-named relations—whence, whither, where—the local
relation expressed by the preposition, must be considered.

Thus, e. g. the preposition 7 ap @ denotes merely the local relation of vicinity,
the near or by; but in connection with the Gen.,e.g. 7402 Tapa rot Baci-
A éw¢, it denotes the direction whence (he came from near the king, de chez le roi) ;
in connection with the Acc.,e. g. jet mapa Tov BPacthéa, the direction
whither (he went into the vicinity or presence of the king); and in connection with
the Dat.,e.g. éoT7 Tapa 7 Pacctret, the where (he stood near the king)

3. The prepositions are divided according to their construction °

(a) Into prepositions with the Gen.: dvri, a76, éx, mpd, évexa;

(b) Into those with the Dat.: év and oiv;

- (c) Into those with the Acc.: ava, eic¢, dc;

(d) Into those with the Gen. and Acc.: 6:a, xara, brép ;

(e) Into those with the Gen., Dat. and Acc.: audi, mepi, éxi, peta, rapa,
Tpoc and v7n6.

4. The local relation expressed by prepositions is transferred to
the relations of time and causality (cause, effect, etc.); e. g. Uz0
77° 775 sivacand vz0 MoBov gevyew, to be under the earth, to
flee for, on account of, fear; &% t7>9 MOkEwS anedOeiy and
EE jyueous anehdeiv, to depart out of the city, to depart imme-
diately after daybreak.

A. PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE.

$163. I Prepositions with the Gen. alone.

1. Av ci, Lat. ante, original signification, over against, before,
opposite ; then for, instead of, in the place of, e. g. otra avee
ziv0s¢, to stand before one; Sovkog av rai Baotréws, a slave in-
stead of king; avri nuéous wv€& éyévero, instead of day there was
night; av® ov, wherefore, because.

2. ITo0, pro, prae, before, for, agrees with cyzi in all its rela-
tions, but is used in a much greater variety of relations; e. g. ozq-
yor 200 2v1.@», to stand before the gates; 700 HueQus, before
day (aoe is not used of time); payscdu, anodareiy 200 THES
zat oid0%, to fight, to die for one’s country; Sovdog 200 Secnotov,
a slave instead of master; 200 t@vd8, for these things, therefore.

232 SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.—a70, &%, évexa. [§ 163.

|

3. Ax6, ab, original signification, from, eo g. & 20 a O-
Lews ater ;—of time: from; since, after, e. g ano deinmvoy
suazécaurro, after the meal salva peyreo San awe tivos, to be de-
scended from some one ;—7 G20 TOY ZOLEMLOY pope, on ac-
count of fear of (from) the enemy, like metus ab aliquo sean the
means: by, with, e. g. cospew TO VOLTIAOY &MO ME0G6O», to
support the fleet by revenues j—azo tiv0g nahsioSa, to be called
by something.

4. “Ex, é&, ex, original signification, out of, e. g. éx 7H ¢ mohewe
anihOev ;—of time immeniatety following: after,e.g. 2€& yuéous,
ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it was day; éx matdarv, from
childhood; 2& widoias te xo vyveulag ovredoaper eascivys
vgn, after the clear weather clouds suddenly collected—O oo¢ zo-
rio éy tds TY pe yuo EF EPQoVOS cwpowy yeyEryTaL, your
8 as in this one day, from a senseless man has beconie discreet ;—
sivat, yiyveoGat éx tivo 6, to be descended Jee some one ;—accord-
ing to, by virtue of, after or for, e. g. 8x TiS OWEWS TOU OvEiQo,
according to the appearance of the dream.— Ovopaleobau éx tiv 0S,
to be named after or for some one.

5. ‘“Evexa« (placed before or after the Gen.), on account of, for
the sake of ;—by means of.

_ Remarx. Also some adverbs and substantives are very often used as prepo-
sitions, and are therefore called improper prepositions (see, however, § 157, et.
seq.); e. g. tpdovev and éutpoorver, before, omraber, behind, avev
and ywpic, without, rAnv, except, weTAasd, between, wEX Pt, until, Yaptv
(usually placed after the Gen.), gratia, for the sake of: Instead of the Gen. of the

personal pronouns, vap-v regularly takes the possessive pronouns agreeing with
it in gender, number and case; e. g. gu7zv, ov Yaplv, mea, tua gratia.

LXXXVII. Exercises on § 163.

No one would (§ 153, 2. c) take (aor.) a blind leader in place of one who could
see (=a seeing one). It is beautiful to exchange (aor. mid.) a mortal body for
immortal fame. Those who (§ 148, 6) have made proficiency (aor.) in philoso-
phy, become free instead of slaves; truly rich instead of poor; considerate (pe-
Tpl@Tepol) instead of unintelligent and stupid. Before action deliberate. A
(art.) friend often does for his (art.) friend, that (plur.) which he did not do (aor.}
for himself. Ephesus is distant a three days’ journey from Sardis. The Helle-
spont was named from Helle, who there lost her life (= who died [part.] in it).
When (part:) Socrates brought (= offered) small offerings from (his) small
(means), he believed (himself) to be no less meritorious (uevotodar) than those
who (§ 148, 6) from (their) many and great (means) bring many and great (of-
ferings). Socrates lived very contentedly with very little property. We may
not judge the best (men) by (= from) (their) exterior, but by (their) morals. Itis-

§§$ 164, 165.] sYNTAK.—PREPOSITIONS.—¢2y, Guy, avd. 233

easier to make (= place, aor.) evil out of good, than good out of evil. The
character reveals itself especially in (= out of) the actions. From the fruit
I know the tree. After the war came peace. Men plot against each other
for the sake of gold, fame (plur.) and pleasures. Semiramis reigned until
old age over the Assyrians. A beautiful action is not performed without
virtue. The gods bestow upon men nothing good (plur. gen.) and beautiful,
without labor and care. Tempe lies between Olympus and Ossa. Conceal
good fortune, lest it excite envy (= on account of envy).

$164. 2. Prepositions with the Dat. alone.:

1. Ey denotes that one thing is in, wpon, by or near another; it
indicates an actual union or contact of the two objects spoken of,
and hence is the opposite of &%, €. 2. €v VUOW, Ev YT, ev 27 &Q-
eye Omhous,é ev z0Soeg diayorilectar; ev MOOMaYOLE,
gy te Feois ua avd x @mOLS (among) ; hence, before, coram ;
upon, Ev OQETLY, EV imnolts, gv Fodvotss—at, by, near to,
so especially of the names of cities, and particularly in describing
battles ; e. g. 7 év Mavriveta pay, the battle near Mant.—Of
time, EV TOVTH TH YOOVG, é G ®, in or within this time, while,
during the time that, év wévre yméoats.—Of the means and in-
strument with the expressions dyiouyv, Oyhov sivat, onuat-
perv =v TLvt, to show by something; e. g. Ott of Geol oe the@ 72
Har evueveig mEéurtovol, xat Ev LeQois OGAOY xual ev OVEaVI-
OLS ONMELOLS, tt rs evident both by the victims and the signs from
heaven, that, ete.

Rem. 1. With several verbs of motion, the Greek commonly uses év with the
Dat., instead of ei¢ with the Acc.; e. g. Tedéval, KatatiSévat, avaridévat (to
sonsecrate) and the like.

2. Svv (Evr, mostly old Attic). The original signification of
vy corresponds almost entirely with the Latin cwm and the English
with, e.g. 0 GTUTTYOS GVY TOS GTYUTLATALC;—of assistance
or help, e.g. cv DEQ, by the help of God;—cdv tayet, ovr
Bim movEty Tt.

Rem. 2. Here belongs dua, at the same time with, with, one of the adverbs
used as improper prepositions.

§165. 38. Prepositions with the Acc. alone.
1. Ava. Original signification, up, on, upon. It forms the
strongest contrast to xazaé with the Acc. As zazva@ is used to de-
note motion from a higher to a lower place, so eve to denote motion

from a lower to a higher place; e.g. @vya& TOV TOTAMOY, AVE
20*

254. SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— ig, @¢. 1S 165. |

600” heir, to sail up the stream (the opposite being xata@ 207 a
0», down the stream). It commonly serves to denote local exten-
sion from a lower to a higher place, from bottom to top: throughout,
through; ava tyv ELA aba—ava TO” TOLEMOY TOVTO?,
(per, during). Thus éva ricav ti» yméour, through the
whole day, ava wav t0 &tos, during the whole year; hence
without the article, ava wikcav yusour, VA MAY ETOS,
every day, every year, daily, yearly, av a v¥xT OH, per noctem, aY &
100” 07, in course of time ;—to denote the manner and way; e. g.
ava xoatos, up to the full strength, vigorously, ava péoos,
by turns ;—in a distributive sense with numerals; e.g. @va@ mévre
TUOKTAYYASTHS yuEoas, five parasangs daily; also with
numerals, like the English about (Lat. circa); e.g. dva@ OlLaxOota
ortadta, about two hundred stadia.

2. Ets (és, old euee corr esponds almost entirely with the Lat. |
an with the Ace.; e. . EVOL EL $ tI » wor bY, anto the evty ;—in a
hostile sense: ee e: 2 EOTOUTEVOUY gto T 7 vy Attix 7, into,
against Attica ;—with numerals: about, e. g. vaig ig TAS TE
toaxo0clas, about four hundred ships ;—in a distributive sense
with numerals; e. g. ei¢ &% az 0», centent, by hundreds, each hun-
dred, cig dvo, bini, two by two, two deep ;—in the presence of, co-
ram, yet with the collateral idea of the direction whither ; e. g. ho-
yous wolEioD aL ELS T ov S707, to speak to or before the people.—
Of time: until, towards, upon, ig éoaéouyv, towards evening,
sic tyv votEQauiar, upon the following day, ei¢ toityy Amé-
0 av, to or on the third day—— To denote purpose, object, respect; e. g.
éyOnsauto Tog youwaow Eto TyY ZOLLY, he used the money for the
city; etc x€od0¢ tt doar, to do something for gain; Siapéeoew tt-
vos elo aQETHY, to differ from one in respect to virtue; eto maY-
T a, tn every respect.

3. 2¢, ad, to, is used only with persons, or objects considered as
persons, to denote direction towards them; e. g. teva, TLEUTEELY 0s
Bacthéa, new ag tyv Midyzoy (to the Milesians).

LXXXVIII. Hwvercises on §§ 164, 165.

(He) is the best (man), who (G¢7cc) is nurtured amid the greatest necessities
(ta avayxaorara). Said Diogenes: A friend is one soul, that (part.) dwells
(= lies) in two bodies. My sons, do not deposit (aor.) my body either in gold
or in silver, but restore it as quickly as possible to the earth. The Grecian ar-
mament conquered the barbarians at Salamis. With the help of the gods let
as go against the unjust. The acquisition of true friends is by no means

§ 166.] SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— Oud, “070. 235

made by {= with) violence, but rather by beneficence. At daybreak (= with
the day) the soldiers began their march (= marched out, off). The Car-
duchians dwell on the mountains and are warlike. The vessels could not
sail up the river. The deeds of Alcibiades were celebrated throughout all
Greece. During the whole war the greatest harmony prevailed (= was)
‘among the generals. The three daughters of Phorcus, having (but) one eye,
made. use of it alternately. The enemy pressed into the middle of the city.
Apollo was sent (aor.) out of heaven to the earth. Time, revealing everything,
brings (it) to the light. The Athenians performed (= displayed, aor.) many
beautiful actions before all men, as well in a private as in a public capacity.
The Lacedaemonians made an expedition against Attica. Employ the leisure
of (= in) life in listening (inf) to beautiful discourses. God brings like to
like. Agesilaus sent ambassadors to the king of the Persians.

§166. B. Prepositions with the Gen. and Ace.

1. 4a, original signification, through. A. With the Gen. through
and out again, e. g. &ijlavve tov oroator bia tho Ooduns ent
ayy Eliade, through Thrace ;—through, e.g. dca wediov, per
campum, Sia mokEuiag mogevecFun, to march through a hostile
country.—Of time to denote extension through a period: through,
after, properly, to the end of the period, through and out, e. g. 8
étovs, through the year; Sia wodLov, waxoQod, diiyou yxoo-
vov, after (through) a long, short time; dia mavetos tov yo6-
you ToLAvTE ovx éyéveto, throughout the whole time. So also of an
action repeated at successive intervals, e.g. dua toltov rove
ovryecar, every third year, tertio quoque anno, always after three
years; Sta wéumrov Etovs, Sia wevts Et HP, quinto quoque
anno; Sia toitys yucous, every third day.—To denote the
means, e.g. OF OPTaLUAY OO», to see with, by means of, the
eyes ;—the manner-and way, e. g. dia omovd7¢, with earnestness,
earnestly; Sta tayouvs, with speed, speedily.—B. With the Acc.,
of time, e. g. dua vvx7a, per noctem ;—to denote the cause, means,
e. 9.0L tovTtO, Tadz a, therefore, because of this; bic Bovlas,

means of counsels; Sia wyvey.

2. Kacé, original signification, from above down (desuper).
- With the Gen., e. g. egiztovy éuvtovg uata& TOD TEiyous
xato, threw themselves down Srom the wall ;—down into, e. g. nate-
eduxevaa rata tig Palecens, to go down into the sea ;—un- -
58.2. %0T a v7 ¢.—To denote the cause, author: de, concerning,
2. héyew xaTH TiVO, dicere de aliqua re, especially in a hos-
ile sense, e. g. Leyew xaTH TLYOS, against one; wevdscPut rata
ov Deor, to le against God—B. With the Acc., xezé forms a

236 SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.—v7e0. [$ 166.

strong contrast with ava, in respect to the point where the motion
of the action begins, but agrees with eva in denoting the direction
to an object and the extension over it, the one being down through,

the other up through. The use of ave in prose is not so frequent

as that of xate.—To denote local extension from above downwards:
throughout, through, over, e. g xa Ell ada, xara maoaP
zyv yr; it often signifies, over against, opposite to, e. g. usitat 7

Kegedlyvia nata Axaovaviar, opposite to Acar.—Of time, to.

denote its extension or duration: during, through, e. g. nate TOY
avTOY yoOoro?r, during, or in the course of the same time; xav&
TOv MOOTEQOY ZMOLEBMOY.—To denote purpose, object, e. g. x a-

v4 ° «
ta Déay yxew, spectatum venisse ; conformity (secundum), respect,
reason, e.g. xaTa VOmO, according to, agreeable to law; nate
A070», ad rationem, pro ratione, agreeable to reason; nate yPO-

Lyny THY &UnV; xaTa TOTO, hoc respectu, hence propter hoc,
ZOTAR PVGLy, secundum naturam; xata Svvamey, to the best of
one’s ability; xata xoatos, with all one’s might; xata wix-

00%, nearly, by degrees; xat avdouwnor, according to the man-
ner or standard of man;—to denote an indefinite measure, e. g. |
zak éEnuovea ery, about sixty years ;—to denote manner and
WAY, C.F. 4aTA THYOS, swiftly, xatTa cuYTVyLa», by chance;
° ° ° ° ? . ° 4 ey
—in a distributive sense, e.g. 4aTH AOUAS, vicatim; HATE LY
5) ¢€ ? “s oy >. 3€ j
ya, monthly, xa 0 yusour, daily, nat éecos, yearly, xa en-.

Z 0, septent, by sevens.

3. ‘Lado, super, over. A. With the Gene. g. uméo y75.—_
To denote the cause: for, for the good of, in behalf of, e. g. wo-
yeotu ymin TES maTOLO0S, to fight for one’s country, as it were |
to fight standing over it; 6 uzéo t7¢ EL adog Varvatos, death
in behalf of Greece.—B. With the Acc.: over, beyond, e. g. oimceu |
vmig tov S6mo0», to throw over the house; vaig Ehhyngmor- |
zov oixeir, beyond, i. e. on the opposite side of; uzéog tHy qAt-
niar, Vmio Ovvauty, VtiQ &vO0MZOY, beyond the nature or |

¢ \\ \ Us ld
strength of man, VEO TH TETTAOHKXOVTH ETY.

LXAXXIX. Hyzxercises on § 166.

There is a middle path that leads neither through dominion nor through sla-

very, but through freedom. Socrates conferred the greatest benefits (ta wéyore |

abexetv) upon men, by teaching wisdom to all who wished (it) (§ 148, 6).
The river Euphrates flows through the middle of Babylon. ‘The presidents of
the cities come together every three years. Those who (§ 148, 6) learn every-
thing by their own efforts (= by themselves), are called self-taught. Apollo

§ 167.] SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— “ipl, 7801. 237

benefitted the human race by oracles and other services. He who (§ 148, 6}
is indolent for the sake of pleasure, may (§ 153, 2. c.) very soon be deprived (aor.)
of that,charm of inactivity, for the sake of which he is indolent. Praise not 4
worthless man because of: (his) wealth. Some rivers penetrate into the earth
-and flow (= are borne) a long way, concealed under the earth. The island At-
lantis sank (part. aor.) under the earth and disappeared (aor.). He who (§ 148,
6) contrives a snare against another, turns (mepiTpérecy) it often against him-
self. During the period of the holy war, great (= much) disorder and dissen-
sion prevailed (= was) over all Greece. Do not impose upon others a greater
(charge) than their abilities permit (= than according to ability). It is neces-
sary that (acc. w. inf.) men live according to laws. The city was in danger of
being (= to be) taken (aor.) by force. A bad man who (part.) obtains (aor.)
power, is not wont to bear good fortune as man ought (= suitably to man).
The Athenians annually sent to Crete seven boys and seven maidens (as) food
for the Minotaur (= to the M. as food). God has given (aor.) us the powers,
by which we are to bear ( fut.) all the events of destiny. The sun passes over
the earth. Overhanging (= over) the city is a hill. Arsamus governed tle
Arabians and Aethiopians dwelling over Egypt. Alcestis, the daughter of Pe-
lias, was desirous (aor.) to die (aor.) for her husband. It is very dishonorable to
shun (aor.) death for (one’s) country. Clearchus waged war with the Thracians
dwelling beyond the Hellespont. It is folly to attempt (= to do) something |
above (one’s) capacity. Numa Pompilius, the most fortunate of the Roman
Kings, is said to have lived above eighty years.

$167. C. Prepositions with the Gen., Dat. and Acc.

1. Au qé denotes that one thing is around another (on both sides),
near, close to, another. A. With the Gen. seldom used of place, e. g.
aupi tye to1Ewe olxein, to dwell around the city.— Of cause:
about, for, for the sake of, e. g. uayscbu agi tivos, to Sight
about, for something.—B. With the Dat., as with the Gen.—C. With
the Acc., e.g. dug: t7v 2641»—To denote time and number
indefinitely, e. g. auqt éazéguy, about evening; dug cove
Hvotovs, about ten thousand.

2. IHeoé signifies all around, round, containing the idea of a cir-
cuit or circumference, and in this respect differing from aut, which
signifies properly on both sides. A. With the Gen.—In a local re-
lation it is not used in prose, but the more frequently in a causal
sense: concerning, for, about, on account Of, @. g. mayecP al, ao-
Davey megi 779 mareidos, to fight, die for one’s country; )é-
yew megi tivos, to speak about something; gopeioPou meet 2a-
totdo0¢;—to denote value, in the phrases ZEOL zoriov, mEgt
Mhetiovoc, wegi wheiorov, wegt dhiyou, wept otdevds
moreisPon or 7ysicPut ct, to value high, higher, ete—B. With the

238 SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.—€zl. f§ 167.

Dat.: around, on, near, e. &. WE ol tais xEemadaie sixor TLAOUS,
around, on their heads; meot TH YELot yovoovy Saxtvdroy peoetv;
—in a causal sense: about, for, on account of, e. g. dedievar wept
tivt, to fear for, about one.-—C. With the Acc.: about, near, by,
throughout, e. g. @xovy Doivixes wEQt maoav THY Linehiay
(about, throughout). —To denote time and number indefinitely, e. &
mel TovUTOVS TOVS xYQOVONVS, about these times; EOL fLv-
eiovs ortgatiazasg.—In a causal sense to denote respect, e. g.
copoorsiyv tEOL TOS Deore, tn respect to the gods.

3. Ei signifies primarily, wpon, at, near. A. With the Gen.,
e.g. ce aYSy ot men KerdQEs ETL THY HEDALOY qogovow, ai de
yuvaixes ELL TOY WUBY, the men carry burdens on their heads, the
women on their shoulders ; pevew emt tH @ ox US, én LTS yvo-
47S, to remain in; ol eat TOY LOAY MU atav, those intrusted
with business ;—towards, if the idea is that one is striving to reach
a place, e. g. wleiy €xi DA&mov [according to § 158, 3. (b)].—In-
relation to time, to Bee the time a or during which something:
takes place, e.g. é2t Kvgov Bpacthevortos, during, in, under
the reign of Cyrus.—To denote the occasion, the author, e. g. xa-
AsioGan éxi tivos, to be named after, for one; conformity, e. g.
xoives TL Emi TLVOS, to judge according to something.—B. With
the Dat.: upon, at, by, e.g. éwi tots SGQact Golds siyor youoas,
upon the spears; oineiy ini Gahkacry, by the sea, upon the sea-
coast.—To denote dependence, e. g. eat tive sivat, to be in the
power of any one; yiyvectut Emi tivt, to come into the power of
any one ;—condition, purpose, object, motive, e.g. mt TOUT o, hae
conditione, on this condition; ixi xax@ evGoumov otdyo0g avev-
oyzat, In perniciem hominis ;—cause, occasion, e. g. yaiosw mt
zivt, to rejoice at something.—C. With the Ace.: upon, on, over,
towards (different from évi with the Gen., since with the Acc. mere-
ly the direction to a place is denoted), to, e. g. aveBaivew ig tn-
mov; éx avoanove (among).—Of time: until, gy éonée-
ear; for, during, per, iat mohiasg yuéous.—To denote pur-
pose, object,e.g. mt Ono ay lev Ot, venatum tre; in a hostile sense:
against, e. g. ocpatevecSut ext Wéooas, to make an expedition
against the Persians.

XC. Exercises on § 167, 1, 2, 3.

The poets have uttered such language (= words) about the gods themselves,
as no one would dare (aor., § 153, 2, c) to utter about (his) enemies. Consider
first. how (o7wc) the adviser has managed (aor.) his own (affairs); for he whe

~

§ 167.] SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— 87d. 239

{§ 148, 6) has not (47) reflected (aor.) upon his own (concerns), will never de-
cide well upon another’s. Carthage waged war with Rome for Sicily, twenty-
four years. All men value (their) kindred more than strangers. With reason
dost thou esteem the soul more highly than the body. Gyges found a corpse
that had on the hand a golden ring. Some of the Persians had both necklaces
about the neck, and bracelets about the hands. The motion of the earth around
the sun makes the year (évcavtéc), but the motion of the moon around the earth,
the months. ‘The Spartan boys (= of the S.) as (part.) they went round the
altar of Orthia, were scourged by law. Be (yiyvowaz) such towards thy parents,
as (olo¢) thou wouldst (§ 153, 2,c) wish (aor.) thy children to be (ace. w. inf.)
towards thee. No human pleasure seems to lie (= iva) closer at hand (yyv-
Tépo, w. gen.), than joy on account of honors. The enemy, despairing of (aor ‘
their cause, about (¢u¢i) midnight abandoned the city. There are said to be
about one hundred and twenty thousand Persians. Each of the Cyclops had
one eye in the forehead. In Egypt, the men carry burdens on their (= the)
head, but the women on their shoulders. The soldiers returned home. After
the battle Croesus fled to Sardis. Under Cecrops and the first kings until The-
seus, Attica was inhabited in cities. All the children of the better (sup.) Per-
sians were educated at the court (ai Gipac) of (the) king. Strive not after that
which ({ 148, 6) is not (7) in thy power. Macedonia was in the power of
the Athenians, and brought tribute. Dost thou consider that which (74, w. part.)
happens for thy (= the) advantage, as the work (plur.) of chance or of intelli-
gence? For epic poetry we most admire Homer, for tragedy, Sophocles, for
statuary, Polyclétus, for painting, Zeuxis. We ought (xp) not to be displeased
at (the) good fortune of others, but rejoice for the sake of (6:4) our (= the)
common origin. The Nile flows (= is borne) from south to north. Xerxes
collected (part. aor.) an innumerable army and marched against Greece. So-
crates not only exhorted men to virtue, but also led them onward (zpoéyeu, aor.)
to it. Jupiter permitted (aor.) Sarpedon, the king of (the) Lycians, to live for
three generations.

4. Meza (from éooc) denotes the being in the mddst of some-
thing. A. With the Gen. to denote association, connection, and
participation with; e.g. wet avioanar sive, to be among men.
Ein wet tivoe, to be with, on the side of one. “Yyiv oi modyo-
yor covr0 7S yéousg éxzyourto “al xatélimov meta MOLL@Y nal
° eyahov xivdvvar, with many and great dangers ;—to denote

onformity: eta TaY VOmwY, META TOU LOYOU, in confor-
miy with the laws, with reason.—B. With the Dat., only poetic:
mong, e.g. wex adavezoi.—C. With the Acc., in prose it is used
Imost exclusively to denote that one thing follows another in space,
ime and order ; e.g. ixeoFous meth tive, after; meta TOY Bio»,
ifier life; morapos peyiotog peta Lore or, the greatest after the
ster, and in the phrase wera yetous eye tw, to hold something
etween, in the hands.

240 SYNTAK.—PREPOSITIONS.— 7000. [$ 167.

5. ITaoé signifies the being near something: by, near, by the side
of. A. With the Gen. to denote a removal from near, from beside
a person: from, e. g. dbs 2.a9a TLVOS, to come from some one.
—To denote the author, e. g. meuqoyrvas maoa tLvo0s, to be sent
by some one (§ 150, Rem. 4), dyyehol, mogoPeig TaQa TLVOS, ENn-
voys from any one; ayyelhew LUQK TLYOS, TH MAOH TLVOE,
commissions, commands, etc. of any one ;—parO ave TH0K TLYOS,
axovew 7a0& TLV06, to learn, to hear from.—B. With the Dat. to

denote rest near a place or object, e. g. gory Maga TH Bactieai..

—C. With the Acc. to denote direction or motion so as to come
near a person or thing, e. g. agixécda maou Keoitcor, to Croe-
sus ;—direction or motion along by a place: along near, by, beyond,
e.g. ta0a ty” BaBbviarva zagievat, to go by Babylon. Hence,
maoa Soar, practer opinionem; zag éhaida, contrary te
hope; maoa pial, mage TO Sixator, TaQa TOUS OQ-
2ovsg, tage Suvaptr, beyond one’s power; also, besides, praeter,
mana TAaVTE, praeter haec, besides these things ;—to denote local
extension near an object: along, e.g. za9a tov Acowmo», along

the A.—To denote the extension of time, e. g. zag 7uMéQur, TH
oa TO” modEpO», during the day, the war; Za0G THY ZOGLY,

inter potandum, while drinking. So also of particular, important
points of time, during which something takes place, e, g. a@ av-

cov Tov xivdvvoy, in ipso discrimine, in the very moment of dan- |

ger-—In a causal relation to denote a comparison, e. g. yhtov éxdsi-

=] ~ a
WES MUUVOTELAL YOUY TAOA TH EX THU AOL YOOVOY WY] MO-
yevomuer ce, eclipses of the sun were more frequent compared with |

(than) those mentioned in former time.

XCI. Exercises on § 167, 4, 5.

Strive (pursue) after reputable pleasures. No one deliberates safely: in (=
with) anger. It is noble to fight with many and brave allies. The good after
death (= dead) lie not in (= with) oblivion, but ever bloom in memory. The
Athenians, amid very many hardships and very famous contests, and dangers
very honorable, liberated Greece, and highly exalted (weyiorny aroderxvivaz,
aor.) their native country. The judge ought to render judgment conformably

to the laws. After life the wicked await their punishment (plur.), but the vir- |
tuous are forever happy (= abide in happiness). After the sea-fight at Sala--

mis, Sophocles, who (part.) was still a boy, having been anointed, danced naked.

The Chians, first of the Greeks after the Thessalians and Lacedaemonians, made |

use of slaves. Of all things (aT#ya) in life, after the gods, the soul is most di- |
vine. A messenger came from Cyaxares, who (part.) said that an embassy of |

Jews had arrived (= was present), and brought a very beautiful dress from him

§ 167.] SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— 7006. 241

to Cyrus. Prometheus stole (part. aor.) fire from the gods and brought (aor.)
itin areed to men. The praises of good men are very pleasant. The gods
rejoice most in honors from the most pious men. What is not ( #7) manifest to
men, it is allowable (for them) to ascertain from the gods by divination. It ig
said, that (acc. w. inf:) the invention of the sciences was given (aor.) by Jupiter
to the Muses. In (kara) the war against the Messenians, the Pythia gave as a
response (paw, aor.) to the Spartans, that they should ask (= to ask, aor.) a
general from the Athenians. Minos pretended to have learned his (= the) laws
from Jupiter himself. The Persian boys (= of the Persians) are educated not
with (the) mother but with a (= the) teacher. The good are honored among gods
and men. Cyrus sent ambassadors to the king of the Persians. Osiris is said
to have travelled from Egypt through Arabia to the Red Sea. The river Seli-
nus flows by the temple of Diana in Ephesus. The Amazons dwelt (aor.) on
the river Thermodon. A word unseasonably (= against season) thrown out,
often destroys (= subverts) life. Paris, contrary to all justice (décuov, plur.),
earried off (aor.) the wife of his (= the) host Menelaus to Troy. The Roman
lawgiver (= of the Romans) gave (aor.) to (art.) fathers full power over (xara,
w. gen.) their (= the) sons during their (= the) whole life-time (= time of life).
No man (—no one of men) will be fortunate during his (=the) whole life.
In comparison with (art.) other creatures, men live as gods, since (part.) by (their)
nature, body and mind, they are superior (kpatloTeto}.

6. ITgo¢ (arising from 79) signifies before (tn the presence of).
A. With the Gen. to denote direction or motion from the presence
of an object, especially in reference to the situation of a place, e. g.
Oineiy 7Q0S POTOV aYE MOV, towards the south, like ab ortente.
Sometimes it is to be translated by i the view of, in the eyes of, ete.
(properly before one), 6. g. 0 tu Sixadtutov nat m00¢ Gear xat
Z00S avVFoaRMY, codt0 mpd, inthe eyes of, in the judgment
of gods and men ;—also, for the advantage of any one, on the side of,
for some one, e. g. Soxeig wor cov Loyow MOOS Emod deve, to speak
for me.—To denote the cause, occasion and author, hence with pas-
sive and intransitive verbs, e. g. aziudleodau zoo¢ ITeictortoa-
zov, to be dishonored by Pisistratus ;—in oaths, e. g. wo0¢ Deas,
ver deos, by the gods, properly before the gods.—B. With the Dat. to
lenote local rest before, near or by an object, e.g. 200¢ 7] mOLkEL,
efore, by the city, zo0¢9 toig uoiraie, before the judges, sivat,
yiyvecD cet moog tivt, to be earnestly engaged in something, e. g.
ZOOS TOAYMAGl, TO0G TH Ady q, tn business, in conversation.
Then, i addition to, besides, e.g. 2669 tovtTo, TO0S TOVTOLE,
vraeter ea.—C. With the Acc. to denote the local limit, direction or

1otion before an object, both in a friendly and hostile sense, e. g.

ASeiy 1009 tiv a, to, dnobhémew 2Qd¢ TLv Ea, Upon, dEyew mods

LY c, to, ovupayiar rorsiodon mods TLVAS, With, meyecSat, wO-
21

242 SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.—v700. [§ 167.

deusiv 70S Tiva, against, 7Q0o mecyuBoluy, towards, gdew
200¢ avo», to sing to the flute, i. e. to the flute’s accompaniment.
—To denote indefinite time, e. g. 700¢ 7 méQar, towards day-
break. Also in reference to indefinite number.—In a causal sense
to denote purpose, e. g. murtodumd& evonusva taig mohect 2Q05
puianxyy uot cwrtyoiar, various schemes were devised to guard
and save the cities ;—conformity, conformable, according to, e. g.
MOOS THY OWLY TAHUTHY TOY Yom covTOY éomEvou, according
to this view. So xoivew tu 200g Tt, to judge according to some-
thing. Also,2e0¢ Bian, by force, against one’s will, wo0S$ av ay-
un, necessarily, forcibly ;—hence, on account of, propter, e. g.7 005
ZaUT a, properly, in conformity with these things, hence, on this ae-
count, therefore ;—hence to denote a comparison, usually with the idea
of superiority (prae): in relation to, in comparison with, before, e. g.
Ajoos éoxt wQOS Kuvynotar, hers mere talk, nonsense, compared
with Cinesias ;—in general to denote a respect, e. g. cxometv, Bléneur
200 Tl, Suapeoety MOOS aQETT», to differ in respect to virtue.

7. ‘70, sub, original signification, under. A. With the Gen. to
denote motion from a depth out: out from under, forth from, e. g.
vt annvns dAvew inmovs, tc loose the horses from the chariot ;—to
denote rest under an object, e. g. uz0 7745 otxeiy—To denote the
author, with passive and intransitive verbs, e. g. xzsiveoOut um0
TLVOS, amodavey vO tTLVvOS, to be put to death by some one ;—
the cause, occasion, active influence, e.g. VT0 “AUMAaTOS, for, On
account of, because of the heat, vm 60779, from, out of anger ;—to
denote the means and instrument, particularly with reference to the
accompaniment of musical instruments, e. g. éozearevort0 V0 6 @A-
miyyov, they marched by the sound of trumpets; vm aviovd yo-
gevelv, to dance by the music of the flute—B. With the Dat., e. g.
V0 77 Eira, etc. as with the Gen.—C. With the Acc. to denote
direction or motion towards and under, e. g. isvar vm0 yqv; exten-
sion under an object, e. g. Umect oixnuata v0 yqv, are under the
earth.—To denote time approximately, e. g.vz0 v¥x%ta, sub noc-
tem, towards night ;—to denote extension of time, e.g. vz0 THY
vU%7 a, during.

Remark. When the article (alone or with a substantive) in connection with
a preposition, expresses a substantive-idea, and the preposition év ought to ba
used, then this preposition is attracted by the verb denoting the direction whence,
and is changed into d@76 or éx; e.g. Ol éx THO dyopaGe av8pwrot anédv-
yov, the men belonging to the market-place fled, instead of of év TH ayopg dv-
Cowra Ek THE Gyopae arégpvyov.

§ 168.] SYNTAX.—VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -7£06. 243

XCII. EHwercises on § 167, 6, 7.

Rhampsinitus, a king of Egypt, erected (= placed, ar.) two statues, of which
the Egyptians call the (one) standing (perf) towards (the) north, summer, the
(one) towards (the) south, winter. Arabia is the most remote of the inhabited
countries towards the south. (It is) time for us to deliberate about ourselves,
that we may not (that not = 7), in the judgment both of gods and of men, ap-
pear (arogaiveodat) very mean and dishonorable. The Persians were deprived
(aor.) by the Lacedaemonians of the supremacy of Asia. It is not for the ad-
vantage of your reputation, to sin against the public (= common) laws and
against our (= the) ancestors. By the gods, abstain from injustice. Stesicho-
rus, the poet, was magnificently interred (aor.) in Catana, near the gate called
from him (the) Stesichorean. Near the dwelling of the king, a lake affords an
abundance of water. Socrates was zealously employed in discourse. Alcibia-
des was beautiful, and more than this, also very brave. Aristippus, the Thes-
salian, comes to Cyrus, and asks of him about two hundred mercenaries.
The Megareans buried their (= the) dead, turning them towards the east, but
the Athenians towards the west. Nicocles demeaned himself (aor.) towards the
citizens with (wera) very great (—much) lenity. The Greeks fought (aor.)
against the Persians. ‘Towards evening the enemy retreated. Socrates was
very much hardened (= very enduring) against winter and summer and all
hardships. (All) estimable men have the same disposition towards their (=
the) inferiors as their (= the) superiors have towards them. The Thracians
danced to the flute with their (= the) arms. The exercise (plur.) of the body
is useful for the health. Let us not judge happiness by (= according to) money,
but by virtue and wisdom. Socrates despised everything human, in comparison
with (art.) counsel from the gods. A very beautiful fountain flows under the
plane-tree. Hector was slain by Achilles. Already many masters had been
violently (= with violence) put to death (dovjoxerv, aor.) by the slaves. Ar-
chestratus travelled over (aor.) all lands and seas from a love of pleasure. The
rich often do not enjoy their (= the) prosperity from its (= the) unvarying
pleasure. The soldiers go to the battle to the sound of trumpets. All (the)
gold upon earth and under earth (acc.) is not equivalent to virtue. Dionysius
founded a city in Sicily just (aité¢) at the foot of mount Aetna, and called it
Adranum. Towards night the enemy retreated. ‘Towards the end of the war
there arose a violent famine.

§168. Remarks on the construction of Verbal Adjectives in -te0s,
_ -réa, -té0v, and on the construction of the Comparative and Su-
perlative.

1. Verbal adjectives derived from transitive verbs, i. e. from such
as govern the Acc., are used either like the Lat. verbal in -dum,
mpersonally in the neuter, -zéov or -zéa [§ 147, (c) ], or personally,
like the Lat. participle in -dus ; but verbal adjectives derived from
intransitive verbs, can be used only ¢mpersonally.

244. SYNTAX.—USE OF THE PRONOUNS. [§ 169.

2. The verbal adjective when used impersonally takes its object
in the same Case as the verb from which it is derived. The per-
son acting stands in the Dat., called the Dat. of the agent [§ 161,
2, (d)].

*Ackntéov (or -Téa) éoTt cou Ty &petHy or doxnréa zott cor h ape,
you must practise virtue, or virtue must be practised by you. — ort
col The apeTtac, you must desire virtue. ’Eniyerpytéov éott cor TO Epyg,
you must attempt the work. Kodaoréov (or -téa) éort cou TOY avépanrovor
KoAaoréoc éoTi oot 6 Gv¥paroc, you must punish the man. So with deponent
verbs; e.g. Muunréov (or -téa) éori oot Tod dyadode (from ppeiodat
ria) or pipnréor eici oot oi dyadot, you must unitate the good.

3. When two objects are compared, the one by which the com-
parison is made, is put either in the Gen. [S 158, 7, (6) |, or is con-
nected by the conjunction i (than) ; 5 & g. 0 matyo pellor got cow
viovd or oO Z. pt. éotly, 7] 0 Vi0G, ts greater than the son.

Remark. When two qualities belonging to an object are compared with each
other, both are expressed by the comparative adjective and are connected by 77 ;
e. g. GaTTor, 7) copaTeEpsc éoTey, celerior, quam prudentior, he is more swift than
prudent. So also with adverbs; e. g. TodTo Varror, 7 copatepov éroinoag, cele-
rius, quam prudentius, you did this with more dispatch than prudence.

XCIII. ZHxercises on § 168.

We must shun a (= the) dissolute friend. The citizens must obey the laws.
We must attempt noble actions. We must despise dangers for the sake of vir-
tue. We must avoid (= keep ourselves from) him who (part. pres.) is governed
by (art.) evil passions. We must put the hand even to difficult undertakings.

§169. Remarks on the use of the Pronouns.

1. The subject, predicate, attribute and object are expressed by
pronouns, when the parts of the sentence containing the pronouns,
are not to represent the ideas of objects or qualities, but when it is
merely to be shown, that an object or quality refers either to the
speaker himself or to another (second or third) person or thing (§ 95).

2. All the rules which have been given on the substantive and
adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective pronouns; still, a
few remarks are here necessary on the use of the personal proneuns.

3. The substantive personal pronouns in the Nom., viz. éy0, ov,
adTOS, -77, -0, Nuste, etc., and the adjective (possessive) pronouns as
attributives, e. g. €40¢ matzo, are, in Greek, as in Latin, expressed
only when they are specially emphatic, hence particularly in anti-
theses; e. 9. xai od tadta émpatac; ual oO¢9 marno anéOaver j-—

§ 169. ] SYNTAX.—USE OF THE PRONOUNS, 245

éy@ per Gey, ov Oé weve. But where this is not the case, they
are omitted, the substantive pronouns being supplied by the endings
of the verb, and the adjective pronouns by the article prefixed to
the substantive; e. g. yeagu, yeapes, youpe—y wit ye eine por
(my mother) — ot yoveig orégyouct ta téuya. (love their children).
See above, § 56 and § 59, also § 148, 3.

Rem. 1. Adz o¢ in the Nom. is not generally used as the subject of the verb,
but for the most part as an intensive pronoun (self, very), agreeing with another
pronoun expressed or understood, or with a substantive. In some instances,
however; it seems to be used as the simple subject of the verb, though even then
retaining something of its intensive force; e.g. 6 mat7p abtic éboBay; od
aitoc érvpac ue; adTd¢ &$7. It has its intensive force also, when it agrees
with a pronoun or substantive in any other Case than the Nom.—The demon-
strative ob rog (hic) and 6de, usually refer to what is near, he, this man, this
thing ; the demonstrative ék ei voc (le), on the contrary, properly refers to what
is more remote, the person or thing there, that person or thing, but sometimes to what
immediately precedes. Hence when éxeivog and oito¢ are used in opposition
to each other, the latter refers to what is nearer, the former, to what is more re-
mote, though the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Lat. hie and ille.

Rem. 2. The difference between the accented and enclitic forms of the perso-
nal pronouns, e. g. 20d and jov, lies in the greater or less emphasis with which
they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented forms are always used,
e. g. in antitheses; e. g. €uod wiv Kateyénace, o& O& éExqvecer, he derided me,
but praised you.—On the use of the Gen. of substantive, instead of adjective (pos-
sessive) pronouns, see § 148, Rem. 8 and § 59——On the possessive pronouns
taking the word in apposition, in the Gen., e. g. 7uétepog aiTGv maT7p, see Rem.
4, below.

4, The reflexive pronouns always refer to something before
named, this being opposed to itself as an object (in the Gen., Dat.,
Acc., or in connection with a preposition) or as an attribute.

'O cogic Eautod xparel, the wise man rules himself. 2d ceavt@ apéokecc,
you are pleased with yourself. 'O maig Eavtov érarvel, the boy praises himself.
Oi yoveic dyarGot toc EavTGyv maidac. Tveti ceavrov. Odroc 6 avap
mavr7a Ov éavtos peuadnnev. ‘O otpatnyoc tx6 Tov EavTOD oTpaTiwTGE
anéSavev, was killed by his own soldiers.

5. The object before named, to which the reflexive pronouns re<
fer, is:

(a) The subject of the sentence, as in the examples of No. 4;

(b) An object of the sentence, e. g. Kogog Sujvsyus tav adder
Bactiéor, tar aoyas O66 Exnvtay xtyouusvor, O. differed
from other kings, who acquired sovereignty by themselves. Mu-
Govper Tove avFoumove tors PIorovrtag EavTois, we hate

a”

246 SYNTAX.—“WSE OF THE PRONOUNS. [§ 169.

men who bear ill-will towards themselves. And oavtov eyes
ce 0ake.

6. In Greek, as in Latin, the reflexive pronoun may be used in
the 1elations above named, with the construction of the Acc. and
the Inf., or of the Part., and even when it stands in a subordinate
clause. In this case, the English language often uses the persona,
pronouns him, her, it, instead of the reflexive pronouns.

'O ripavvog voile: trode mohitacg bmnpetety EauT @, the tyrant thinks that
the citizens are subject to him. TloAAGv éSvév iptev 6 Kipoc ob éavto
6uoyAWTTWY OVTWY, OUTE aAAnro.c, Cyrus governed many nations, not speaking the
same language with him nor with each other. ‘O Kathyopog é6n TOY BoKpaTHy
avareiVovta Tove véove, O¢ aiTic Ein COPOTATO¢ TE Kal GAAOUE ikavOTaToOg TOLH-
cat codotc, ottw draTiWévar Tode aLT@ ovvovTac, cre wndayod Tap’ avroig
rode dAAove eivat mpd¢ EavT 6», the accuser said that Socrates, by persuading
the youth that he himself was the wisest of men, and most capable of making others
wise, so influenced the minds of those who associated uxth him, that others were of no
account, in comparison with him.

7. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun avzoc,
~H, -0: Viz. AVTOV, -]$, HUVTQ, -T], VTOY, -4V, -0, LUTOY, et.
or of a demonstrative, are universally used, when an object is not
opposed to itself, but to another object; e. g. O zazyo aut @ exe
zo Bipdior, gave the book to him (the son). Szégyw avzoy (him).
Angyouas avtov, I abstain from him. The pronoun wvzoi, ete.
is here nothing else than the pronoun of the third person.

Rem. 3. The personal pronoun 02, o/, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense in
the Attic writers. But in this case, it is regularly employed, only when the re-
flexive relation has respect, not to the nearest, but to the more remote subject;
e. g.'O ripavvog vouiler Tode ToAitag UmnpeTetv oé (but not ripavvoc yapileras
ol).

8. In the instance mentioned under No. 6, the corresponding
forms of w@vzog¢ are very frequently used instead of the reflexive
pronoun; and this is always the case, where a member of a sen-
tence or a subordinate clause, is not the expression or sentiment of
the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the expression of the
speaker (writer).

Kipoc édeito tod Laka ravTw¢ onuaivery abT@, OmdTEe éyxwpoin eicrévar
mpo¢ Tov manmov, C. rogabat Sacam, ut tndicaret s1B1, quando tempestivum esset.
Of roAéutor evBde Adjoovot THv Aeiav, éxeddv idwot Tivag EW avLTODE éAad-
vovrac, the enemy will stop plundering, as soon as they see any coming against them.
Tyv éavtod yvounv aregaiveto Lwxpatne mpd¢ Tode duthovvTag avT G, Socrates
expressed is views to those who associated with him. Xwxparns éyva Tov Ett (Hv Td
reSvavat abt 6 xpeirroy eivat, S. knew that death was better for him than a longer

period of life.

§ 169. | SYNTAX.—USE OF THE PRONOUNS. 247

9. In the compound reflexive pronouns, «v7 6 ¢ either retains its
exclusive force or it does not, i. e. it is sometimes emphatic, and
sometimes not.

(a) Aixasov éore didove piv roreiodat trode buoiwe abtoi¢c Te (or ohice
te avToiC) Kal Toig GAhote Ypwpévove, PoBeiaGa dé Kai dediévar TOde mpdg
coacg wév abtove (or EavTodvc) oixec6tata diaxetpévouc, mpd¢ dé Tod GA-
dove aAdotpiue, it is proper to make friends of those who treat themselves and others
alike, but to fear those who are very friendly to themselves, but hostile to others; here
the reflexives aitoic and o¢d¢ avtovc, each being compounded of airéc, are em-
phatic = se ipsis and se ipsos—(b) Oc orpatiGra: mapetyov EavTode (orcogae¢
avtovc) avdpeotatoug (se), showed themselves very brave. Oi roAéutor rapédo-
oav éavtode (orogdadc abtrode) toi¢g “EAAnovw (se), delivered themselves to the
Greeks ; in these two examples, the aité¢ contained in the reflexives is not em-
phatie.

Rem. 4. The reflexive possessive pronouns are either used alone, e. g. wetadi-
Owpi coc TGv éuGv yxonuatwr, I share with you my effects; dixarérepév éore
TEN PETEPA Hude ExeLv 7 TovTOUE, it is more just that we should have our own
than that they should have it; tueic dxavteg TOG buetéEpove naidac ayanGate:
oi TodiTas TA OHETEPG GHleWW éxetpHvTO; or with the addition of the Gen.
of av 7 6¢ (according to § 154, 3); or instead of the possessives, the Gen. of the
compound substantive-reflexives is employed; and indeed in the common lan-
enage, the last form is always used with the singular pronoun, and more fre
quently than the possessives with the third Pers. Pl., but the Gen. of airé¢ ig
usually employed with the plural of the possessives (except the third person).
Thus:

$.6 éuavtod (ceavrod, éavtod) maT7p not 0 &ubg (og, O¢) abtod x.
THY éu“avTov (ceavTod, éavTod) untépa not Thy éuny (ony, Hv) abrod p.
Toig éuavrod (ceavrod, éavtod) Adyorc not toi¢ éuotc (col, oi¢) abrod A.

P.6 mpétepoc abtOv matip extremely rare 6 uv avTép or.

THY buetépav abTov puntépa extremely rare T7v tudv adTév p,
Ta HéTEpa AVTOY GuapTHuaTa extremely rare 72 uGy adToy a.
6 ogétEepocg aitév raTHp more frequent 6 éavTdv rar7p, but not

f

6 oddv aiTér tx.

Here also, ai76¢ is sometimes emphatic, sometimes not: (a) ‘O wai¢ tBpitec
Tov éavtTowd xarépa, suum ipsius patrem, his own father, buei¢ bBpilere tode
DpmeTéEpove avTAv narépac, vestros ipsorum patres, your own parents, of zai-
dec bBpilovar tode EéauT Gv rarépac, suos ipsorum patres; (b) Ztpatovixny, tiv
éavtod adeAd7y,didwot Levy, suam sororem, his sister ;—in the examples un-
der (a), airdéc retains its emphatic force, in the one under (b), it does not.
Rem. 5. Airéc with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after the substan-
tive and adjective pronouns; e. 2. 7udv abtdv, duiv abrots, 6 buérepoe abTov
tatip, etc. But when the personal pronoun is used with the reflexive sense,
then aiToc, used in its exclusive sense, may precede or follow the personal pro-
moun; e. g. aitod éuod (pov), abt éuot (uot), aitov éué (ue), or Euod adroit,
fol ait, etc.
Kem. 6. For the sake of perspicuity, or rhetorical emphasis, a demonstrative
ronoun, particularly adv, is frequently put in the same sentence after a pre-

248 SYNTAX.—THE INFINITIVE. [$ 170. |

ceding substantive or pronoun, when a long intermediate clause s¢parates the —
Case from the verb which governs it. This pronoun again resumes the preced- —
ing substantive or pronoun; e. g. KAéapyoc 0& Todwidny "Haeiov, ov
érbyyavev éyov map’ EavTd Kipuxa Gptotrov Tov ToTré, TOUTOYV dvermeiv EKé-—

devoe, Clearchus commanded .Tolmides of Elis, whom he happened to have with him, —

and who was the most distinguished herald of his time, that he should make proclama-

tion. "Eyo pév oby Bactréa, ToAdd obTug éoTi Ta Cvupaya, eiTeEp mpotv- —

sitar hud aro2éoat, obx oida, 6 te dct ab Tov budoa Kal degtdy dodvat.

XCIV. Hezercises on § 169.

The dissolute (man) makes himself the slave of himself. Care for all, but
most for thyself. The passions (/dovai), implanted in the soul, do not persuade
it to be considerate, but forthwith to render service both to themselves and to
the body. I should (§ 153, 2, c) be ashamed (aor.) if I cared more for my re-
putation than for the common welfare. (Those) whom (ov¢ Gy, w. subj.) we
esteem (aor.) as better than ourselves, those we are willing to obey and (that)

without compulsion. To those who (§ 148, 6) do not (“7) command them-

selves to do right (= the good), God assigns others (as) masters (= comman-

ders). The Chaldaeans came and prayed (part.) Cyrus to make (aor.) peace -
with them. The Athenians thought they ought (if*) not to thank others (ére- —

poc¢) for (art.) deliverance, but the other Greeks them. In the Peloponnesian
war, Grecian cities were destroyed (aor.), some by (the) Barbarians, others by

themselves. Enrich thy (= the) friends; then thou wilt enrich thyself. Phrixus, ©

as soon as (part.) he learned (aor.) that his father was about (“éAAevy, opt.) to

sacrifice him, took (part.aor.) his sister, and mounting (aor.) a ram with her,

came (aor.) through the sea into the Pontus Euxinus. The Persians went
through the whole country of the Eretrians, binding (aor.) their (= the) hands,
that they might be able (éyevv) to tell (aor.) the king, that no one had escaped
them. :

$170. The Infinitive.

The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract sub-
stantive-idea; but it differs from the substantive, in retaining so

much of the nature of the verb, as that, on the one hand, it exhi- ©

bits the nature or quality of the action, viz. duration, completion

and futurity, e. g. yeapew, yeyougpévos, yoawat, yoawew, while on
the other, it has the same construction as the verb, i. e. it governs —
the same Cases as the verb; e. g. youmew émtorody», émcOvpeiy

THS aQETHS, varvtovseda Tots mohEpmiorg. The attributive
qualification of the Inf. is an adverb, and not, as in the case of an
actual substantive, an adjective; e.g. xala¢ adnoPaveiy (but xadog
Savatos). The Inf. will first be considered without the article,
and then with it.

.
H

3§ 171, 172. ] SYNTAX.—THE INFINITIVE. 249

$171. A. Infinitive without the Article.

1. The Inf. without the article is used, in the first place, as the
subject.

Ov kakov Bacthedver ¥, to be a king is not evil. ’Aet BG Toic¢ yépovat eb
Lave, the ability to learn always remains young even to the old. MéyzSoc pé-
yloTO¢ Vig MaTplag oTéEpEoV at.

2. In the second place, the Inf. is used as the object in the Acc.,
© express something effected, wished, aimed at, the purpose, object
yr result, with the following classes of verbs* and adjectives:

(a) With verbs which denote an act or expression of the will;
2. g. to wish, to desire, to long for, to dare, to ask, to command, to
counsel, to permit, to fear, to delay, to prevent ;—(b) with verbs which
lenote the exercise of the intellectual powers or their manifestation ;
2. g. to think, to intend, to hope, to seem, to learn, to say, to deny ;—
‘e) with verbs which contain the idea of being able, effecting, of
power or capacity ;—(d) with many other verbs and adjectives to
xpress a purpose or object, a consequence or result.

BoviAopal, uédAho ypadetv. "Exitduye ropetecO ar. ToApuo
smomévery tov xivdvvoy. aparvd cot ypagetv. Odroc rode dotdrove
imetoev emtvdéiotar toic deondta. TH GAAy orpaTid Gua Tapeckeva-
eTo Bonteiv ir avtotc. Kwhia cetaita rotetiv. PoBotpac due-
Léyxetv oe. NowilCw duapteiv. "EAriCo ettrvyqgoery. HH mb-
uc Extvdbvevoe mace dtagtapyvar. "Edy eivast orparnyoc. Aé-
yo eidévat taita. Mav¥davoinnwetecv. Atddckwe ce ypagecv.
N\ivapat wotetiv tavta. IWlolteé oe yeagv. “Agtéc éort Savpace-
rat. “Heowev pavdavery.

Remark. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that with these adjectives, it com-
nonly uses the Inf., Act. or Mid., instead of the passive Inf. Such Infinitives
nay be translated both actively and passively into English; e. g. xaddg éori

deiv, he is beautiful to see, or to be seen, ftd¢ gore Savudoat, worthy to be admired,
loyoc dvvatog tote Katavojoat, able to be understood.

3172. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Acc. with the Infini-
tive.

1. Most verbs which take an Inf., have, in addition to this object,
also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the principal

* 'The verbs which take an Inf. after them, are usually such as do not express
2 complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other construction,
complete the idea. The Inf. therefore, is the complement of the verb on
Which it Aen Comp. what is said on the Part. as a complement of the verb,
)175.— TR. .

250 SYNTAX.—THE INFINITIVE. [§ 172.

verb requires; e. g. Ogouat cov éhdsiv, I beg you to come.
SvuBovieta cor owgooreiv, I advise you to be discreet. “E 20-
Tovva ce peyecOu, I urge you to fight. Kelevo oe yougew.

2. But when the principal verb is a verbum sentiendi* or decla-
randt, governing the Acc., and the subject of the principal verb is at
the same time its object (or in English, when the subject of the
principal verb is the same as the subject of the dependent clause,
e. g. I think that I have erred), then the Acc. of a personal pronoun
is not joined with the Inf., as in Latin, but is wholly omitted.

Ofouat duapreiv (instead of otouwa: éuavtiv duapretv), I think that I have
erred, credo ME errasse; ole GuapT ety (instead of ole: ceavTov duapreiv), you
think that you have erred, credis TE errasse; olerat GuaptTeitv (instead of oterar
éavTov auaptetv), he thinks that he has erred, credit SE errasse. '

3. When adjectives or substantives are joined with the Inf, as
explanations of the predicate, they are put, by attraction, in the
same Case as the object of the principal verb, viz. in the Gen.,
Dat. or Ace.; and when the subject of a verbum sentiendt or decla-
randi is also its object, i. e. when the subject of the principal verb
and of the Inf. is the same, the explanatory word is put in the Nom.
by attraction.

Nom. with Inf. ‘O orparnyo¢ é¢n rp dSumog eivat émtBondetv, the comman-
der said that he was zealous to render aid.

Gen. with Inf. Aéouat cov rpotvuon eivat, I wish you to be zealous.

Dat. with Inf. ZvpBovrcio cor rpotoipy eivat.

Ace. with Inf. ’Exorpiva ce rpoduuov eiva. "Eby ce eddaipnova
elvat.

Rem. }. When the subject of the principal verb and of the Inf. is the same, and
the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is the case particularly in
antitheses, then the subject of the Inf. is expressed in the Acc.; e. g. Kpoicog
évouile EauTOv elvat TavTwy OAGBLOTAaTOY, Crocsus thought that he was the most
happy of all men.

Rem. 2. Very frequently the predicative explanations which are joined with
the Inf., and refer to the object of the principal verb, are not put in the sama
Case as this object, but in the Acc.; this is explained by considering the object
of the principal verb, at the same time as the subject of the Inf.; e. g. déouar
buadv (buadc) Bontore yevéodar. “AUnvaiwr eédendnoar odict Bon Sode
yevéodat, they requested the Athenians to assist them; here the word ’AYyvaiwy
stands in a two-fold relation, first as the object of éde7yoav, in the Gen., and
second, as the subject of yevéo’as, in the Acc.; Zevia jew mapnyyede Aa-
Bovra tov¢e avdpac; éeott 0 tyiv, ei BodAcc¥e AaBévrac érda eic kiv-
évvov éuBaiverv.

* Verba sentiendi are such as signify to believe, think, see, perceive, hope, hear, and
the like ;—verba declarandi, such as signify to say, affirm, show, announce, ete—TR,

§ 173. ] SYNTAX.—THE INFINITIVE. 251

Rem. 3. When the Inf. is used as the subject (§ 171, 1), and has a subject of
its own or predicative explanations, connected with it, both the subject of the
Inf. and the predicative explanations are put in the Acc.; e. g. 'Yxtp tig ma-
tpidog paxomévoue anovavely kahov éorwy, it is honorable to die fighting jor
our country ; here adroGavetv which is the subject of éovi, has for its own sub-
ject the Acc. T1vG¢ or jude understood, and for its predicative explanation, pa-
youévouc, also in the Ace.

XCV. LHxercises on §§ 171, 172.

Critias and Alcibiades believed that, if they should associate (aor. opt.) with
(art.) Socrates, they might (§ 153, 2, d.) become very competent both to speak
and to act (= in speaking and in acting). Endeavor to be a lover of labor with
thy (=the) body, a lover of wisdom with thy mind, that (iva, w. subj.) thou
mayest execute thy (=the) purposes (rd ddgavTa) with the one, foresee that
which is for thy advantage (= the advantageous) with the other. The Persians
thought they were invincible by (card) sea. Thou wilt find many tyrants who
(part.) have been destroyed by those who (§ 148, 6) seemed most to be (their)
friends. Socrates said, that those who (§ 148, 6) consult an (= the) oracle
(for that) which the gods have given (aor.) men (the ability) to learn (part. aor.)
and to decide, were insane. It becomes every ruler to be discreet. I believe
that men have (art.) riches and (art.) poverty not in their houses (sing.)
but in their minds. Their (=the) common dangers made the allies kindly
disposed towards each other. Some philosophers (= of the philosophers) be-
lieve (doxei, w. dat.) that everything (plur.) is in motion (= moving itself),
but others that nothing can ever move (§ 153, 2, d.), and some, that everything
is coming into existence (= becoming) and perishing, but others that nothing
can ever cither. (= neither) come into being (aor.) or (= nor) perish (aor.).
Men, when they are sick (part.), submit (= present) their bodies both to be am-
putated (act.) and cauterised (act.) amid (wera) sufferings and pains. Cyrus
ordered the enemy to deliver up (aor.) their arms. It is better to learn late
than to be ignorant.

§173. B. Infinitive with the Artirele.

1. The Inf. with the article (z0) is treated in all respects as a
substantive, and is such, since by means of the article, it can be de-
clined, and is capable of expressing all those relations, which are
indicated by the Cases of the substantive. On the contrary, it here
also, as in the Inf. without the article, retains the nature of a verb;
€.8.70 EXLOTOANY YOUHEM, TO xo) og yocper, etc., 70 xahas

modvroxew, an honorable death, to vmE0 at matoidoog aot aveiv,
eath for one’s country.

2. When the Inf., whether used as a subject or object, has a sub-
ject and predicative explanations belonging to it, then both these,
as in case of the Inf. without the article (§ 172, A.), are put in the

202 © SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. [$ 174.

Ace. When, however, the subject of the Inf. is the same as that
of the principal verb, it is not expressed, and the predicative expla-
nations are put by attraction in the same Case as the subject of
the principal verb, i. e..in the Nom. (§ 172, 2 and 3).

Td droGavely tiva trip tHe maTpidog KadH Tic THXN, that one should die
for his country is a happy lot. Td duapravety dvdporore bvrac o-
dév, oizat, Savuaoror, that those who are men should err, I think, is not surprising,
or it is not surprising that, etc. Kiéapyog pixpdv égépuye TOU KaTAT ET Pw-
SHvat, C. barely escaped being stoned to death. LXwxparyg mapexdder émipedei-
o8a. Tot OC Gpovipotraroy eivat kal ObEALUoTaToY, Socrates ex-
horted each one to make it his object to be (to have a care for being) as wise and as
useful as possible; here ¢povimeraror, etc. agrees with éxaorov understood, which
is the subject of the Inf. eiv.az, while the whole clause is used as a substantive.
(Very often tod or Tod wf with the Inf. is used to denote a purpose or object;
e. g. Advapwy mapackevaverat TOD wy AdtKeio Sal, he is preparing a force in
_ order that he may not be injured). Oi év8pora: ravta unxavevta éxt TH Ed T v-
xetv, use every expedient in order to be prosperous. ‘O Kipog 01a TO pL Ao-
patio eivar ToAAd tode mapdvtTag avypaTa, Kal boa abtog bm’ aAdwy (sc.
dvnpwtato), dca Td Gyxivove eivae tayd amexpiveto, on account of his
fondness for learning, Cyrus was in the habit of proposing many questions to those
about him, and whatever he himself was asked by others, he readily answered, on ae-
count of his quickness of perception ; in this sentence, the subject of the Infinitives
being the same as that of the principal verb, the predicative explanations ¢cAo-
padhe and ayxivove, are put in the Nom. by attraction, agreeing with the im-
plied subject of the Infinitives. So in roivo éroies éx rod Yahewde eivat,
this he effected by being severe.

XCVI. Hxercises on § 173.

The huntsmen cheerfully toil in hope of game (AapuBaverv, fut.). Prome-
theus was bound in Scythia, because (da) he had stolen fire. The Spartans
are proud of (é77) showing (= offering) themselves submissive and obedient to
magistrates. Avarice, besides (7p0oc) conferring no advantage (= benefiting
nothing), often deprives even of present possessions. In order that the hares
may not escape from the nets, the hunters station scouts. So far from (avri)
corrupting young men, Socrates incited them, in (é«) every way to practise vir-
tue.

$174. The Partictple.

1. The Participle is used, in the first place, as the complement of
verbs and adjectives, e. g. yalow tov pihov adgedjoac, I rejoice that
I have assisted a friend, where the Part. agedyoug explains or com-
pletes the idea of the verb, which is imperfectly expressed without
it; in the second place, the Part. serves not merely to denote an
immediate attributive qualification of a substantive, e. g. zo & a&A-

§ 175. ] SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. 223

Low 6odov or ta G0dov 10. 9 &11LO>»D, the blooming rose, but it can
also express the adverbial relations of time, causality, manner and
way, and, in general, every explanatory circumstance, as well as a
more remote attributive of a substantive.

2. The Part. represents the idea of the verb as that of an adjec-
- tive, and is like the adjective both in its form and in its attributive
use; but, in the same manner as the Inf. (§ 170), it exhibits the
nature or quality of the action (yeagwr, yeyougws, yoawas, you-
wor), and retains the construction of the verb (yoagwr éaicto-
Anv, xahkac yoagwr). As the Part. has an attributive form
and signification, it can never be used independently, but always
depends on a substantive, agreeing with it in gender, number and
Case.

§175. The Participle as the complement of the Verb.

1. As the Part. is an attributive, and therefore represents the ac-
tion as already belonging to an object, only such verbs can have a
Part. for their complement, as require for a complement an action
which, in the character of an attribute, belongs to an object,—the
object being in some state of action, or in some condition. Hence
the following classes of verbs have a Part. for their complement.
(a) Verba sentiendt, i. e. such as denote a perception by the senses
or by the mind, e. g. to hear, to see, to observe, to know, to perceive,
to remember, to forget ;—(b) Verba declarandi, e. g. to declare, to
show, to make manifest, to appear, to be known, to be evident ;—
(c) Verba affectuum, i. e. such as denote an affection of the mind,
e. g. to rejoice, to grieve, to be contented, happy, to be displeased, to
be ashamed, to regret ;—(d) Verbs signifying to permit, to endure, to
persevere, to continue, to be weary (meguoegy, énizoenew, aréyecd au,
naoTEoEiv, xepve, etc.; but é¢v always with the Inf.) ;—(e} Verbs
signifying to begin and cease, to cause to cease, to omit, to be remiss
in something ;—(f) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish
one’s self, to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, to do wrong, to
enjoy, to be full of something.

Rem. 1. The Part. used with the preceding classes of verbs, is alten equiva-
lent to a subordinate clause introduced by 67z or ei, and in English, must often
be translated by that or if, or by the Inf.

2. The construction is here evident. The Part. agrees in Case
with the substantive-object of the principal verb, this object being
in the Case which the principal verb requires. But when the sub-

22 |

954 SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 175.

ject of the principal verb is, at the same time, its object, as oid
(zy) guevrd» Gvyzdv dvza, then the personal pronoun which rep-
resents the subject as an object, is not expressed, and the Part. is
put by attraction in the same Case as the subject of the principal
verb, i. e. in the Nom. (comp. § 172, 2).

‘(Ope tov advdpanov tpéxyovra, I see the man running. Oida av-
Sparov bvytov ovta, L know that man is mortal. Oida Yunrog Ov,
I know that IT am mortal. ’Akotw abtodt rAéyovtocs, I hear him say. Ot
"ADnvaios EGaivovTo brepaxtecdévrec tH MiAgrov didoet, the Athe-
nians seemed to have been exceedingly grieved at the capture of M. ‘Padiwg éX ey x-
Son Pevddpervor, you will easily be confuted if you falsify. Oi Seot yat-
povol Tipopmevor brd Tov aviporur, the gods rejoice, if they are honored,
at being honored. Xaipw cot éaAvovrut, I rejoice that you have come. Ok
morita tepletdov thy yav bd TOV TOAEuioy Tun S eloay, the citizens per-
mitted the country to be laid waste by the enemy. Iatw ce adtxotvra, I make
you cease to do wrong, or doing wrong. ILatopai ce adtKdy, I cease to injure
you. "“Apyopat Aéywr, I begin to speak. Et éwoinoag adikéopuervos,
you have done well that you have come. ‘Apaptavete taita Told», you err in
doing these things. WaAnpye sipt tattra Geauevoc, I am satisfied with seeing
these things.

Rem. 2. Yet attraction is omitted, and the Acc. of the personal pronoun, as
the object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is
emphatic; e. g. mepretdov ait ode ynpa advvatoug yevopméevore, they permit-
ted themselves to become enfeebled by old age.

Rem. 8. With ctvoida, ovyytyvookw éuavT@, the Part. can either-
refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun which
stands with the verb; if it refers to the subject, it is put in the Nom., if to the
pronoun, in the Dat.; e. g. cbvoida (ovyytyvookw) éuavT@ eb motjoag or svvol-
da éuavt® eb mogoavtt, Lam conscious that I have done well. But when the sub-
ject is not at the same time the object, but is different from the object, then the
object with its Part. is either put in the Dat., cbvoidd oor eb rorgoavrt, I am con-
scious that you have done well; or (though 1\ore seldom) the substantive is put in
the Dat., but the Part. in the Acc.; e. g. 4)@ oot civoida eb TOLHoaYTa.

Rem. 4. Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with
the Inf., yet with a different meaning.

(a) @kovecy, with the Part., implies an immediate perception by one’s own
senses; with the Inf, one not immediate, but obtained by hear-say; e. g.
&kovw abdTos diakeyopévon, i.e. ejus sermones auribus meis perci:
pio; but ldeiv éreGiper 6 ’Aotvayne tov Kipov, tt 7KeveE (ex altis au-
diverat) kaiov kayadov aitiv civat;

(b) eidévar, éxioractat, with a Part., to know, with the Inf, to know
how to do something (to be able); e.g. oida (émictapac) Seodre ce PB d-
Hévoc, I know that I reverence the gods, but c&Beodat, I know how to
reverence the gods ;

(ec) pavdiaveryv, with the Part., to perceive; with the Inf, to learn; eg

§ 175. ] SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. 255

pavedave codode wr, psn that Tam wise, copic elvat, I learn
to be wise ;

{d) yeyvooxecy, with the Part., to know, to perceive ; with the Inf., to learn,
to judge, to conclude; e.g. ytyvooKkw dyatove bvtae Toi¢ orpatie-
tac Tove ayGvac, I know that the prize-fights are useful; but dyatods
eivat, I judge that, ete.;

(e) wexvaotat, with the Part., to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf., to
contemplate doing something, to intenc’, to endeavor; e. g. wipvgntac ed
ToLnaag Tove ToAitac, he remembers that he did good to the citizens; 20
ToLtnoat, he strives (wishes) to do good ;

(f) ¢aiveodat, with the Part., to appear, apparere, tv show ones sdf; with
the Inf., to seem, videri; e.g. é¢aiveto kiAaiov and kAaietv;

(g) ¢vyéAAecyv, with the Part., denotes the annunciation of actual events;
with the Inf., the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed ; e. g.
6 ’Acotpioc cic THY YOpay EUBAGARoV aGyyédAAET AL, it is announced
that the Ape has made an irruption into the country (a fact); but é p-
Barrerv ayyédAdXerat (whether he has made an actual irruption or
not, is not certain) ;

(a) decxkvovae or drogaivery, with the Part. to show, to prove; with
the Inf., to teach; e.g. Ed erEa oe ddLtKHoavrTa, I proved that you had
done wrong; but 7 BovAy Aicyivny kat mpoddTyny eivat kai Kaka
vovv tpiv arégacver (docutt) ;

(i) woveiv, with the Part., fo represent; with the Inf., to cause, to suppose
e.g. 70l6 oe yeAsOrvta, I represent you laughing; but m01 ce ye-
Adv, I cause you to laugh, or I will suppose that you laugh ;

(k) acicyiveotdar and aideiot cat, with the Part., to be ashamed on ac-
count of something which one does ; with the Inf, to be teal or afraid to
do something, to omit something from shame; e. g. aioxbvomuat Kaka
Tpattwv Tov gihov, [ am ashamed of doing evil to a friend; but aiaxt-
vom“al Kaka TpaTTeELvy Tov didov, I am ashamed to do evil to a friend ;

(1) dpxeo%as, with the Part., to be in the beginning of an action; with the
Inf., to begin to do something (something intended); e. g. 7pFav@o ra
teiyn oikoOomovvTec and oixodopeir.

Rem. 5. Instead of the impersonal phrases, O7/A6v éoTl, davepdv éorl, daiverat,
it appears, it is evident, the Greek uses the personal construction, and makes the
Part. agree with the subject; such phrases, however, are generally rendered in-
to English as if they were impersonal; e. g. 07A0¢ eit, davepog eiut, daivouat
Thy TaToida eb ToLnoac, it is evident that I have done well for my country.

3. Finally, the Part. is used as a complement with the following
verbs: (a) tuyyava, tohappen; (b) Lav d cv «a, to be concealed,
unobserved; (c) dtateda, Stayiyvowat, Stayo, which ex-
press a continuance; (d) pave, to come before, to anticipate ;
(e) of yopat, to go away, to depart. With these verbs, the English
ofter changes the construction, the verbs being frequently rendered
by a1 adverb, and the Part. connected with them by a finite verb.

256 _. SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 175.

Kpoico¢ govéa tod maiddc EAGVVavE Bbckwy, Croesus nourished the mur-
derer of his son UNWITTINGLY (without knowing it). Avdyo, dcateAG, dra
yiyvopat kaad rolrGv, [ ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what ts honorable. "Qt
XETO GEvYWY, went away QUICKLY, or flew away, 6XovTO adwoTAEOVTES,
sailed away, oiyopmat bépor,celeriter abstuli. “ETuxov éndiva év TH ayope
Kavevdovtec wc mevtHKovta, about fifty heavy armed soldiers were then, just
then, by chance, sleeping in the market-place. (Tvyxéve is always used, where an
event has not taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental co-
Operation of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things; it may
sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance, but often cannot be
translated at all into English). Xaderov qv dAhov oS acat Toit TOLH-
cava, it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him in do-

ang it.

XCVII. Exercises on §§ 174, 175.

I hear (w. gen.) that some are commended, because they are men observant
of law. It is pleasant to learn (w. acc.) that a friend is prosperous. I once
heard Socrates discoursing upon friendship. No one repents (aor.) of having
been silent (aor.), very many of having talked. Remember that thou art a man.
(They) will fight more boldly against the enemy, who (02 dy) are conscious
that they are well trained. Socrates was well known to be humane. The man
had been convicted of having deceived (aor.) us. It is evident that the enemy
will besiege the city, at the same time, by sea and by land. Industrious pupils
rejoice to be commended. Xerxes repented of having scourged (aor.) the Helle-
spont. The citizens repented that they betrayed the city. It is hard to suffer
friends to be ruined. Be not weary (aor., § 153, Rem. 3) of benefiting a friend.
Socrates never ceased both to seek for and to learn the good. ‘The enemy left
off (aor.) besieging the city. Endeavor to surpass thy friends in kindness. I
was conscious of having done no wrong (aor.) to my friend. The Persians learn
betimes, while (part.) they are still children, both to govern and to obey (= te
be governed). A kindly-disposed friend understands (how) to alleviate (the)
grief 6f a friend. If (part.) thou art rich, remember to do good to the poor
Let us not be ashamed that we learn that which is useful from a stranger. The
Lacedaemonians, believing (aor.) that war would benefit them, resolved (aor.) to
render aid to Cyrus. Philip seems to have enlarged his dominion by gold ra-
ther than by arms. Death is (the) greatest of all blessings to man. ‘The sol-
diers were at this very time drawn up (in order of battle). Canst thou tell me
what thou thinkest? He who (é¢rz¢) fears others (érepoc) is, without knowing
it, himself a slave. Callixenus, the Athenian, who (part.) had been confined
(aor.) in the prison (of the state), secretly dug through (aor.) it and escaped to
the enemy. Socrates did good continually (part.). Benefactors are always be-
loved. If (2a, w. subj. aor.) we first kill (ao;z.) the enemy, no one of us will die.
After death the body indeed will be dead, put the soul immortal and never
growing old, will soar swiftly upward (aor.). The prisoners dug through (part,
aor.) the prison and speedily escaped.

§ 176.] SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. 257

§176. B. The Participle used to express Adverbial Relations and
Subordinate Explanatory Oireumstances.

1. In the second place, the Part. denotes the adverbial relations
(a) of time: when, after, while ;—(b) cause: since, because, as, inas-
much as ;—(c) conditionality and concession: if, although ;—(d)
manner and way ;—(e) purpose, object: to, in order to, for the pur-
pose of ;—(f) and, in general, both every explanatory circumstance
which we translate by who, which, and a more remote attributive ot
a substantive.

(a) "Hv dé oréte Kal aitoig Toig GvaBGoL TOAAe Tpaypata TapEtyor of
BapBapo mahiy KkataBaivovery, sometimes also after they had ascended, the
barbarians again annoyed them much, while descending; dkotcact taita Toit
otpatnyoic TO éevdiunua yapiev édoKxer eivac, when the generals heard this, they
thought the device ingenious ;—(b) 7jyueig 0 éxt tig ying BEBnKkbtec mrodd icyv-
potepov raicouer, but we, inasmuch as we stand upon the ground, will be able to strike
a more severe blow; ‘lepovupoc, npecBizatoc Gv Tév Royaydv, jpyeto Héyew,
because he was the oldest of the captains; ta émitndera byovev éx THe xOpac, ToA-
Ane Kal dyadic obo 7 ¢, they might obtain supplies from the place, because it was ex-
tensive and fertile;—(c) ¢oBobvmevor thy dddv buw¢ of TOAAOL cvryKoAobSy
av, although they feared the journey, yet many followed; tode didove ebepye-
Totyrec éxSpore duvqcete Korie, if you confer benefits on friends, you will
be able to punish your enemies ;—(d) yeAGv eixev, he spoke laughing; ti oix
éroince mpéoBere TET wV, Kal TAaPEXYwY Ta éniTHOELa EctEe OTOVdGY éETV-
xev, what did he not do, by sending envoys and by furnishing supplies, until he obtain-
ed a truce?—(e) todte Epyouat ¢paowr, I come to (in order to) say this; otpa-
Tidy TOAAHY aywv Oc BondH wv Bacrrei, leading a large army to assist the king ;
—(f) 2éS Tove mpoc Eué AEyovTag oc, etc., I will mention those who say to me,
that.

2. Here two different constructions of the Part. must be distin-
guished. The Part., like the attributive Part., either agrees with
its subject (i. e. the word to which it belongs) in gender, number
and Case; e. g.0 Kigos yelav sizer; toig IIépcag sig cyy yap
eicBadovoty ot Edlyves jrartiodycar, etc.; or the Part. and
its subject are put in the Gen., called the Genitive Absolute ; e. g.
tov tatdog yehoretos, 0 Kigos einer, the child laughing, C.
said.

Rem. 1. In English, the explanatory Part. is more seldom used, than in
Greek, the place of it being supplied either by subordinate clauses introduced by
the conjunctions when, since, after, because, inasmuch as, if, although, etc.; or by a
substantive with a preposition; e.g.aroSavovrog Tov Kivpov, after the death
of C, pebdyor, in flight; or by an adverb, e. g. Taita 7017 0 a6, thereupon, then.
Very often also, we use the finite verb, where the Greek uses a Part.; e. g. of

22*

258 SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 176.

Tohéutoe GvydvTec édtoyOyoar, FLED and were pursued. But, where several
actions are combined into one whole, the Greek very carefully distinguishes the
principal action from the accompanying subordinate circumstances, by express-
ing the former by means of the finite verb, but the latter by the Part.

ToAAot ra ypjpata avaidcavrec, av xpdcte_er admeixovto Kepodr, aicxypa
vopwilCovrec eivat, TobTwy ov« dxéyovtat, many after having squandered their
wealth, have recourse to those means of gain, which before they did not resort to, because
they thought them dishonorable. Toi za poc éAdovrocg, ta Gvby GaAAEL, when
tue spring comes, the flowers blossom. Anigfépmevor Cow, raptu vivunt, live by
plundering. WloaAag téxvn yp opmevoe rode rodeutoue évixnoer, he conquered the
enemy by using much stratagem. Hic AcAdode wopeb_erau Xpnodmevog TO xpN-
ornply, oraculum consulturus. ’Adbvatov moAAa TEX YO Levon avpwrov rav-
TG KadO¢ ToLely, it is impossible for a man who devises many things, to do all weli.
The particles wetasv (during, while), da (at the same tyme), Kal, Katwep
(although), are sometimes joined with the Part. to express its force more fully.

3. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. also is used, but for the
most part, only when the Part. has no definite subject, consequently,
where the verb from which the Part. comes is dmpersonal, e. g.
é§ 6» (from €eczt, té ts lawful, possible), or with ¢mpersonal phrases,
e.g. aiazxooyv Oy (from aicyody éocu, it is shameful). ‘The sub.
ject is sometimes expressed by a neuter pronoun.

Tapov ait Baoréa yevéoda, ddA repréSynke Td KpGTo¢, SINCE it is pos-
sible for him to be a king, ete. ’AdeAdoxrévoc, obddv déov (quum fas non esset, fiert
non deberet), yéyova, I slew my brother, although it ought not to have been done. So,
66fav ravta, when these things had been agreed upon; 06€av abroic (quam tis
wisum sit, esset) when, because they thought best; dokotv (quum videatur, videretur)
avaxapely ; ™pochkov, quum deceat, deceret, since, when it is fit, proper; &&6v,
quum liceat, liceret, since, when it is in one’s power, when he can. Also passive par-
ticiples: dedoypuévorv, guum decretum sit, esset; eipnpmévor, quum dictum sit,
esset. In the third place, adjectives with dv; e. g.aioxpov 6», guun turpe sit,
esset, since it 1s shameful; Gdn Xov bv, since (as, when) it is uncertain; Ovvarodv
6v, GdbvaTor Ob».

Rem. 2. The particle of comparison, dc, is joined with the simple Part., and
also where it stands in the Gen. or Ace. absolute, when the idea expressed by the
Part. is to be indicated as something merely supposed, as the subjective view of the
agent ; hence where the view expressed is that of the agent, and not that of the
writer or speaker. In English the force of the Part. with wg can be translated
by as if, as though, since forsooth, because, thinking, intending, ete. The particle &re,
on the contrary, is used when a cause or reason is to be represented as an objec-
hive one, i. e. really existing, in oppositien to what is merely supposed.

a. Simple Participle. Oi dpyovrec, xav édxocovody Xpovov apyovrec Orayévav-
Tal, Javualovtat, O¢ codoi te kal evTuyeic yeyer 7 LZEV Ot, are admired, being
thought to have been wise and fortunate = vo HiCémevor codot re al cbrvyeig
yevergodar. ’Ayavakrotouy, O¢ peyahwv tivdy dneote PNLEVvOL (i.e. HYOb-

Hevot uey. T. avectepio8ar), they are displeased, thinking that they have been de

§ 177. } SYNTAX.—THE ADVERB. : 259

pried of some great things. Oi wodémor dre éaidvng emimecovtec uvdpa-
moda TOAAG éAa30v, took many slaves, because they fell upon them suddenly.

b. Genitive Absolute. Ilapjyyetdev abtoic napackevasectat, oc payne éoo-
wévne (ie. vouilwy uaynv écecba), he ordered them to get in readiness, as (in
his opinion), thinking that, there would be a batile. ’Exjputtov éfvévar navrag On-
Baiove, O¢ Tov tvpavvur tTeSvEedTur, they announced that all the Thebans
should come out, because (as they thought) the tyrants were dead. “Ate mvuKvoi év-
TO¢ TOD GAcouc, ody EGpwv oi évTdg Tod¢ éxTOc, because the grove was thick, those
within did not sce those without (a fact).

Rem. 3. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with ¢, occurs
with the verbs eidévai, éviotactval, voeiv, Exerv yvopny, dta-
KetovarTyHv yvounr, dpovTifecy, also sometimes with 2éyecv, and
the like verbs, where, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Acc. of the substantive
with a Part. or the Acc. with an Inf., should stand as the object. The result of
the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by otrw joined to the predicate; e. g.
O¢ évod ovv idvTog, brn dv Kal tueic, OU TH THY yvounY ExETE, be
assured that I will go wherever you decide to go; here @¢ éuov idvrog stands instead
of éu? iévac.

; XCVIII. Exercises on $176.

The enemy burned (aor.) the city and immediately sailed to (é7/) the islands.
If the body (plur.) is rendered effeminate, the mind (plur.) also becomes far
weaker. If agriculture prospers, the cther arts also flourish. Should we say of
all unintelligent men that they were insane, we should (§ 153, 2, c.) speak (=
say) correctly. Be assured (= believe) that you would (§ 153, 2, c.) be able to
live more securely, if there were peace, than if you were waging war. If thou
dost not labor (aor.), thou canst not be happy. All things (sing.) may (§ 153,
2, ¢.) happen (aor.), if God (so) disposes. Tyrtaeus, the poet, was given by the
Athenians to the Spartans at their request (as) a leader. Alexander killed Cli-
tus while supping, because he had ventured (aor.) to praise the deeds of Philip.
The soldiers break up their encampment in order to march against the enemy.
These seem to be the actions of a man fond of war, who (é¢7/¢) while it is in
his power to have peace without injury or (= and) disgrace, prefers to carry on
war. While it was in his power to become (aor.) king himself, he gave the
sovereignty to another. Although it was possible to have taken (aor.) the city,
the enemy retreated. When the generals had resolved (doxei, w. dat., aor.) to
fight, the enemy hastily fled. The Athenians sent out colonies to Ionia, be-
cause Attica was not sufficiently spacious (= sufficient). Socrates enjoined on
men to endeavor to begin every action with the (approbation of the) gods, since
the gods controlled all actions. Endeavor so to live as if thou wert to livea
short as well as a long (= much) time.

§177. The Adverbd.

1. The objective relation, finally, is expressed by adverbs. Ad-
verbs denote the relation of place, time, manner and way of a predi-

260 SYNTAX.—THE ADVERB. [8 17.

3

cate or attribute; e. g. yy der 7lder, yOes aneByn, nalas
ames aver. }

2. Besides adverbs of place, time, manner and way, there are
still other adverbs, which do not, like those above-named, define the
predicate more precisely, but they point out the relation of the pre-
dicate to the subject. These are called modal adverbs. They de-
note certainty or uncertainty, affirmation or negation. Only those
expressing negation will be treated here, viz. ov and «7. On @y
see § 153, 2.

3. Ov (as well as its compounds, e.g. od b¢, oVTE, OVO ELS,
etc.), is used when something is denied absolutely, by ttself; wy
(and its compounds), on the contrary, when something is denied in
reference to the conception or will of the speaker or some one else.
Both are commonly placed before the word which is to be made
negative. 3

4, Hence ov is used in all sentences containing a direct assertion,
whether these are expressed by the Ind. or Opt.e. g. ov yiyvetat,
OUx eyevEeto, OV PEryGETHL TOVTO — OU AY yiyvoito Tata; also
in subordinate clauses with 071, w¢, that, e. g. oidu, oT TedTE
ovx éyéveto; in clauses denoting time, with oze, ézedy, etc., and
ground or reason, with oct, doz, etc., and consequence, with COTE
and the Ind., e. g. oze on Hider — én tadta ox éeyéevET0;
finally, when the idea of a single word in the sentence is to be ne-
gatived absolutely, e. g.0vx ayados, 0¥ xaxws; in this last case,
ov remains even when the relation of the sentence would otherwise
nae Mh, e.g. ef ov dwoe (recusabit).

. My, on the contrary, is used with the Jmp. and swith the Limp.
Subp » & 2. 7] YOURE, wy yours (comp. § 158, Rem. 3); with
wishes and exhortations, e.g. wy youpors, may you not write; uy
yougaper, let us not write ; in all clauses denoting purpose, with ie,
etc.; in conditional clauses, with et, eur, Orav, mur, ews ay, etC.,
e.g. devo, Wa wy yougys — Ee wy yeas; in clauses denoting
effect or consequence, with weze and the Inf., e. g. of zodizan ay-
Sosiwg suayéourto, were wy cove mokeniovs cic tiv modu sisbahew,
so that the enemy did not fall upon-the city; in all relative clauses,
which imply a condition or purpose, e.g. 0¢ wy ayadog éott, tov-
Tov Ov Gidovpey (i. @. et TIC Wy ay. &.), whoever ts not good, if any
one 1s not, etc.; in interrogative clauses, which express anxiety on
the part of the inquirer, and hence demand a negative answer, e. g.
en voceic ; Hon py voceic ; you are not sick, are you? (in other in-

§ 177.) SYNTAX.—THE ADVERB. 261

terrogative clauses ov is used, and an affirmative answer expected)
usually with the Inf. also; and finally with participles and adjee-
tives, which may be resolved by a conditional clause; e. g.0 wy
MGTEVOY, Si quis non credit, if any one does not believe (but 6 ob
MiGTEvOOY = 18, gut non credit, or quia non credit, he who does not
believe (absolute), or because he, ete.

6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or ad-
verbs, e. g. any one, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc.,
these are all expressed negatively. The negatives must all be of
the same kind, i. e. all compounded of ovx or uy; e. g. mixed qos
ovdev piya ovdemotE OVOEVA OVTE idWWtHY OTE mod
dog, a mean nature never does ANYTHING either for ANY private in-
dividual or for the State ; juEi¢ ov 8 éxwoovpev 00 O8v TOLODTOY,
we do not intend any such thing; avev yao aoyortwy ovdéeY ap
OV TE xahov, OVTE ayador yeroito OVS amo, for without leaders,
nothing great or advantageous could ANY WHERE be accomplished.

7. After expressions of fear, timidity, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt,
distrust—denying—hindering—forbidding, prohibiting, the Inf. usu-
ally follows with 7, instead of the Inf. without wy. This 7 is
not expressed in English; e. g. %OAVM OF Ly tavta movi, 1
prevent you from doing this. Annyogevoy LuvGous wy émBatvew
rav oMEetéowy ovowr, they forbade the Scythians to pass their boun-
darves.

Remark. When expressions cf fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed
by 7 with the Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), “7 must be considered as an interrogative,
numne, whether not, and may often be translated by that; e. g. dédovxa, wy aro-
Savy, metuo, ne moriatur, I fear whether he will not die = that he will die; éidedoi-
KEL, LH aToUavot, metuebam, ne moreretur ; OédotKka, wH TEDvAKEY, ne mortuus sit,
I fear whether he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is dead. On
the contrary, “7 ov with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after the above ex-
pressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not take place, or
has not taken place; e. g. dédocxa we OK arodavy, ne non moriatur, I fear that
he will not die; édedoixew um obK arobavot, ne non moreretur, I feared that he
would not die; dédo:xa, wy 0b TéSvyKEV, ne non mortuus sit, that he is not dead.

8. M7 ov with the Inf. is used instead of the Inf. without nega-
tion, with expressions of hindering, denying, ceasing, abstaining,
distrusting and the like, when the negative ov, and in general, any
negative expression precedes jx7 ov.

Jidév kohtbes ce wH obK arodaveiv, nothing prevents you from dying ; obdete
ipveital, THY apEeTHY 167 0b Kady sivat, no one denies that virtue is lovely; obK
irecxouny 7 ov Tavta Aéyewv, I did not refrain from saying this—Also after
the expressions dervov eival,aicoxpov, aicoxirvnr cival, aicyive

262 SYNTAX.—THE ADVERB. [$ 177.

o% at, which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with 17 0%, -when it is to
be made negative; e.g. Gcte macy aioxdvyy ecival, LH OY) Gvorovdd-
Cetv, so that all were ashamed Nov to be busy.

9. Ov wy with the Subj. or Fut. Ind., is elliptical, since with
ovx a verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also ex-
pressed, must be supplied, and wy must be referred to this verb.
Hence ov m7 is used, when the idea to be expressed is, 2¢ ¢s not
(ov) to be feared that (u7) something will happen; e. g.00 wy 7é-
VYTHL TOVTO, Non vereor, Ne hoc fiat, this CERTAINLY will not happen.

XCIX. Exercises on § 177.

The truly wise will never be the slaves of base desires. What might (§ 153,
2, c.) not happen in a long period? What evidence did they employ (to prove)
that Socrates did not believe (in) the gods, (in) which the state believed. As
(évei) the Persians did not hold out, the Greeks took the city. If (éay,
w. subj.) thou hast not heard (aor.) from thyself, that what is right ( = the right)
is useful, then trust (aor.) not another, who so says. Let us not flee before the
enemy. He who (d¢ri¢) does not believe a man on his oath (= trusts [7eie-
oaz| nothing to one swearing), can (étioracPaz) easily swear falsely himself. It
is a great misfortune not to be able to endure misfortune. No one is free, who
(part.) does not control himself. Give (aor.) to friends, even if (part.) they do
not ask. The Sophists were not willing (é%éAev) to converse with those who
(§ 148, 6) had no money to give. What is not manifest to men, they endeavor
to ascertain from the gods by the art of divination. What one neither
earned (= wrought out) nor saw, nor heard, nor executed for himself, friend
often furnished (aor.) friend. I might (§ 153, 2, ¢.) affirm that no one gains
(eivat, w. dat.) any cultivation from one who ({§ 148, 6) does not please.
You affirm that you need no man for (ec) any purpose (= thing). If
(part.) thou doest (aor.) anything shameful, never hope to remain concealed
(fut.). No envy at anything ever arises in (= to) a good (man). What is
beautiful never anywhere appears to any one as deformed. The Thirty Ty-
rants forbade Socrates to converse with the young men. Prexaspes denied that
he killed (aor.) Smerdis. Clearchus then scarcely escaped being stoned (= to
be stoned, aor.). All laws prohibit inscribing (the name of) any liar in the pub-
lic decrees. I fear that the city is already taken by the enemy. I am doubtful
(= fearful) whether it is not best for me to be silent. Neither snow-storms
(sing.), nor rain, nor heat, nor darkness (= night) hinder the Persian couriers
from most rapidly accomplishing (aor.) the journey (= course) before (= lying
before) them. No fear shall prevent me from saying what I think. Be of good
courage; surely nothing unjust will be done (= happen, aor.), if there is justice
at heart (= if justice is present). The bad you will certainly never make bet-
ter. If (éav) we conquer (aor.), the Peloponnesians will certainly never enter
{aor.) the country. Socrates said: As long as (fwcrep dv, w. subj.) I breathe
and am able, I surely shall not cease { wr.) to philosophize.

§ 178.) SYNTAK.—COORDINATION. 263

SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES, OR THE CONNEC-
TION OF SENTENCES.

CHAPTER I.

§ 178. A. COORDINATION.

1. When two or more sentences stand in an intimate connection
with each other, there is.a two-fold relation to be distinguished.
They are either related to each other in such a manner as to form
one thought, each, however, being in a measure independent of
the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise, Plato also was very wise;
or they are wholly united, inasmuch as the one defines and explains
the other, or appears as the dependent member of the other, e. g.
When the spring comes, the flowers blossom. The first kind of con-
nection is called Codrdination, the last, Subordination, and the sen-
tences, Codrdinate and Subordinate.

I came, I saw, [ conquered.—Coordinate.
When I came, L conquered.—Subordinate. a

2. Coordination consists either in expanding or restricting the
thought. The former is called copwlative coordination, the latter,
adversative. Copulative coordination is either a simple succession of
words, or it is an enhaneing or strengthening of the thought.

3. A simple succession of words is made,—(a) by ««4é, et, and,
more seldom in prose by z ¢ (enclitic), gue, and, e. g. Lwxoarys nat
Tatar ;—(b) by xai—xat, et—et, both—and, more seldom,
tTé—té,e.g. xa ayador xat xaxot, both good and bad ;—(c) by
zé—xt, both — and, as well so —as so, not only — but also, e. g-
xaos TE nul yas, YOYGTOL TE %EL ZOPNOOE.

Rem. 1. Kai also signifies even, etiam, with which the negative 0i06é, not
even, ne — quidem, corresponds; e. g. Kai od TadTa éAesac (etiam tu), even ye said
this; ove od Tatra éXelac (ne tu quidem), not even you, ete.

4, The enhancing or strengthening of the idea is expressed by
the simple za, but still more definitely by,—(a) ov novo »—aa-
ha xat (cdV ovdé);—(b) od7 Ott (62mg) Or wy OTE
(O26) [i €. 00% 290, O74, ey eye, 0TH] — ALG nal (AAV

264 SYNTAX.—COORDINATION. — [§ 178.

ov 6 2), not only — but also (but not even), when either the more im-
portant member precedes the less important, or when two strongly —
antithetic clauses are opposed to each other.

Laxpatyns ob “Ovoy oogdc Hv, AAA Kat ayatoc, not only wise, but also
good. Kal pyv breparotyaokew ye povor édéhovow of épOvtTec, ov MOvoYV
67 Gvdpec, CAAA Kal yvvaixec (non modo — sed etiam), indeed, only lovers are
ready to die for each other, not only men, but also women. Oby bmwc¢ Tode ToOAE-
uioug éTpéavto ol “EAAnvec, GXAG Kat THY YOpay abtov éxaxwoar, I do not
say that the Greeks = the Greeks not only put the enemy to flight, but even destroyed
heir country. Aioyivngoby bmw yaplv Toic ’ADnvaioy eivev, GALE modo-

\ A

sag éavTOV KATA TOUTwWV! éErodLTEvETO (non modo non — sed diam). M7 6ma¢
pyetotar év pubud, aAW ot0 dpbeticbar édivayvto (non mado non), they were
wt only not able to dance to the tune, but not even to stand erect.

5. Adversative coordination consists in 7estricting or in entire abro-
jation; e. g. he ts indeed poor, but brave—he is not brave, bet cow
ardly; (here the clause but brave restricts the one preceding, amif
but cowardly wholly denies the idea of brave). Restriction is moét
generally expressed by 0 ¢, autem. With this 6 ¢ there usually cor-
responds the connective uév, standing in the preceding contrasted
sentence. Mev primarily signifies, in truth, truly, indeed, yet com-.
monly its force is so slight that it cannot be translated at all into
English. M¢»—6 é is particularly used in divisions, e. g. ot ey —
at dg, some — others, t0 uév —70 O8, on this side—on that, partly
— partly ; also where the same word ts repeated in two different
sentences, e. g. éyo ovveyu wey Peois, ovr O avPoumots tois
ayatois.

6. The following words also are to be noticed, viz. «v, commonly
in connection with 6¢ (5° av) rursus, on the contrary ; xaitot, and
yet, yet, verum, sed tamen; usy tot, yet, however; 0a ¢, although,
nevertheless ; finally &12¢, but, which according to the nature of
the preceding member, denotes either the opposite of that which
is expressed in the first member, so that the first member is abro-
gated by the last, and one cannot exist at the same time with the
other, e. g. ovy of movoror evdaiuorée siow, GAR ot ayadol, not the
rich are happy, but the good ; or it merely denotes something differ-
ent from what is contained in the first member, so that the first mem-
ber is only abrogated i in part, i. e. it is only restricted (stl, yet, but),
e. S. TOVTO TO MOANA BMEhiwov wey Ect, GAR Ov nado».

7. The succession of negative sentences is made by ov rs —ovVT2
(un tTE—punTe), nec —nec, neither — nor, e. g. ovze Geol, ovts
“vow, neither gods nor men. Ov8S¢ expresses either contrast

3 179.) SYNTAX.—-SUBORDINATION. 265

but not), or it serves to annex a new additional clause (and not,
uso not).

Rem. 2. When a negative sentence follows a positive one, it is regularly
ormed in prose by xai ov or kai #7; @ g. Paivouar yapiToc TETUXNKUWC,
cai ov péwpewc, obd% Timwpiac, I seem to have met with fuver, and not blame
vor punishment.

8. Disjunctive coordination consists in combining into one whole,
sentences, the one of which excludes the other, so that the one can
be considered as existing, only when the other does not. This re-
ation (disjunction) is expressed by the disjunctive conjunctions, viz.
1 — 7, aut — aut or vel — vel, either —or; eite—cize (with Ind.),
avr E—é&YTE OF HytEe— qrte (With Subj.), sive — sive, whether
—or, etther—or; e.g.% 0 mato 7 0 vies anéSuver, either the
‘ather or son died (the first 7 can also be omitted, e. g. 0 ZUTHG
16 vies am.); EitEe uawa size makoud tadtE éotw, whether these
ure new or old; 2av te nacyo yodwy, sav te pfeyo, whether
ather or mother wili write.

9. Finally, those sentences also can be codrdinate with each
ther, the last of which denotes either the cause of the preceding
entence, or the conclusion, inference from it. The clause denoting
he cause is expressed by 7@o, for, enim, nam, and that denoting
he conclusion, by ov, consequently, therefore, &0a, then, there-
ore, toivur, then, so then, toly ao, ergo, therefore, to tyaotoL,
or that very reason and no other, therefore, TOLY OOD», Jor that
eason then, wherefore ; e. g. Oarpclouer cov Soxpdry dvio 7 &o
v xahos uot dyadds. ZS. avin qv nalog net ayatos: Savpalousr
0% KOTOP.

;
CHAPTER II.
B. SUBORDINATION.

§179. Principaland Subordinate Clause.

1. When sentences, which together present one united thought,

e so related, as to their import, that the one appears as a depen-

mt and merely completing member of the other, then their con-

ction may be expressed either by codrdinate conjunctions, as xal,

', YOO, U0, ete., e.g. 70 Zao FAVE, Ta b& 6000 drb-ei, the spring has

me, and the roses blossom ; or in such a manner that the sentence,
23

266 SYNTAX.—SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 18.
which, as to its import merely completes the other, is manifestly in
its outward form, a Mependent,” or a simply completing member of
the other; e.g. 072 70 a0 HAGE, ta 60ba avOsi, when the spring :
has come, the roses blossom. ‘This mode of connection is called Sub-
ordination.

2. The clause to which the other as a complementary oral
belongs, is called the principal clause; but the completing one, the
subordinate clause, and the two together, a compound sentence; e.g. i
in the compound sentence, oze 70 gag qAde, ca dendga Sadhe, the
clause za dévdga Sadie, is the principal clause, and ore 70 gag ihe
&s, the subordinate clause. |

3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of the subject, the attri- |
bute, or the object of a whole sentence, and hence must be regarded .
as substantives, adjectives or adverbs expanded into a sentence.
Accordingly there are three classes of subordinate clauses : sulci
tive, adjective and adverbial clauses. :

Thus, e. g. in the sentence, “ The victory of Cyrus over the enemy was an-_
nounced,” the subject may be expanded into a subordinate sentence, viz. “ That
Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ;” further, in the sentence, “Sing”
to me, O Muse, the far-wandering man,” the attributive far-wandering, may be”
expanded into a subordinate sentence, who has wandered far. Comp., “He an-
nounced the victory of Cyrus over the enemy,” with “He announced that Cyrus
had conquered. the enemy ;” “In the spring the roses bloom,” with “ when the springs
has come, the roses bloom.”

ee ee ee ee

ee

§180. I. Substantive-Sentences.

1. Substantive-sentences are substantives or infinitives expanded.
into a sentence, and, like substantives, constitute the subject, as —
well as the attribute and object of a sentence.

A. Substantive-Sentences introduced by 6r¢ or ¢, that.
2. Substantive-sentences introduced by the conjunctions 676
and « ¢, that, express the object (Acc.) of verba sentiendi and de-
clarandi (p. 250), 4 i. e. of such verbs as express either a sensation or.
perception ; €. g. 0okr, axovelw, vosiv, parPavew, yiyvooxe, ete., OF
such as denote an expression of a sensation and perception; e. g.
Aéyer, Sexrvvvat, ayyeddew, Oho sivas, ete.
3. The predicate of this substantive-sentence may be expressed,
(a) in the Ind., (b) in the Opt., (c) in the Opt. with és, (d) in the
Ind. of historical tenses with és.

5 180.] SYNTAX.—SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. 267

4. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when what is affirmed is to
be represented as a fact or phenomenon, something certain or actual,
[In particular the Ind. is used regularly, when the verb of the prin-
cipal sentence is a principal tense, viz. the Pres., Perf. or Fut.

5. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when what is affirmed, is
to be represented as a mere conception or supposition, hence, par-
‘icularly, when what is stated as the sentiment of another, is to be
indicated as such.

"Edeyov, Tt apxtot ToAdode On TAnoLaoartac dLéEG UV Eetpar, they said that
ears had already destroyed many. “Ote 67 Tavita évedvpoipeda, oitu¢ éytyvo-
CKOMEY TEPL AUTOYV, WC avOpOTW TEPUKOTL TAVTWVY TOV GAdwY pdov ein Cour
7 aviparwr apyew, when we were reflecting upon these things, we concluded that it
was easier for man, as he is, to rule all other animals than men.

6. The Opt. with @» is used, when the affirmation is to be indi-
eated as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, or as an
undetermined possibility (§ 158, 2, ¢.).

Aéyo, 6Tt, e taita Aéyow, duaptavorc av, I say that if you say these
ings, you would err. Mépvnpat axovoacg moré cov, OTL sikéTwo GY Kal Tapa
SE@y TPAKTLK@TEpoc ELH, WoTEp Kal Tapa avbparuwr, beTLg uy (= Et TLC Mm),
oT OTE év UTOpOLE Ein, TOTE KOAaKEvOL, GAN STE TA UpLoTAa TPaTTOL, TOTE UaALET
ray Yewv peuveto, I remember once to have heard you remark, that he would reason-
ably be most likely to obtain what he wished from gods, as well as from men, who
should, etc.

7. The Ind. of the historical tenses with &@» is used, when the
affirmation is to be represented as conditional, as one whose extst-
ence or possibility is denied [§ 153, 2, a. (a) ]; e. g. Ojhov éozw,
OTL, si THUTH EhEyes, nuaoTavEes cp, it 1s evident that if you said this,
you. erred, but you did not say it, hence you did not err.

ReMARK. Impersonal forms of expression are often changed into those which
are personal; e.g. d7A0¢ elute (bavepos ciplt), TL Taira ev Expaka, it
is evident that IT -——; dH A0t ciaty, 6TL Tadra éelayr, it ts evident that they
said this. Comp. § 175, Rem. 5.

C. Exercises on § 180.

We know, that the kings of the Lacedaemonians are descendants from Her
cules. The Athenians fortified the city in a short (= little) time, and it is even
now evident, that the construction was done (= took place, aor.) in (xa7é) haste.
I have often wondered (aor.) by what (¢7¢¢) arguments the accusers of Socrates
convinced (aor.) the Athenians, that he was deserving (coi eivac) of death from
(dat.) the State. Tissaphernes traduced Cyrus to (7pdc, w. acc.) his brother,
(saying) that he was plotting against him. Brasidas not only (7é) showed him
self prudent (= moderate) in other (respects), but (xaé) in his speeches also he

:

268 SYNTAX.—FINAL SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. [$181

everywhere manifested that he was sent forth to liberate (part. fut.) Greece
Many of those who ({ 148, 6) pretend to philosophize, might ({ 153, 2, c.) per
haps say (aor.) that the just (man) could never become (aor.) unjust, nor the
sober-minded arrogant. It is evident that we may be delivered (aor.) far more’
speedily, if (part.) we say (aor.) nothing, than if we defend ourselves poorly. i}
pray you to observe beforehand that, if (part.) Aeschines had not brought for
ward (xaryyopeiv, aor.) something foreign to (= besides) the indictment, neithe
would I (= I also would not) say (woveio%ar) a single (= any) word.

§181. B. Final Substantive-Sentences introduced by |
Oc, iva, ete.

1. The second kind of substantive-sentences, are the jinal sen-
tences, i. e. those which denote a purpose, intention, end. These
sentences are introduced by the following conjunctions, w ¢, 020 ¢,
(VO, 09 L7,02OS wy, lye my.

2. The mode used in final sentences is commonly the Subj. or
Opt. When the verb of the principal sentence is a principal tense
—Pres., Perf. or Fut., or an Aor. with the signification of the
Pres. (§ 152, 12.)—the final conjunctions are followed by the Subj.
mode; but when the verb of the principal sentence is an historical
tense—Impf., Plup. or Aor.—the final conjunctions are followed by
the Opt. (but never by the Opt. Fut.).

Taira ypaga, yéypaga, ypda, iv’ E20 ¢, ut venias, that you may come; 2é-.
Sov, tv’ e106, dic, ut sciam, say, that I may know ;—raita éypadov, éyeypadecv,
éypapa, tv’ EXGotC, ut venires, that you might come. "Ex tie TOv Ilepoay éAev-
Sépac dyopadc Kahovuévyc Ta wev Ovia Kal oi dyopeios GwEAHAaVTAL elc GA-
Aov TOTO, OC I) plLyvoytar | TovTwv TipBy TH TOY Texadevuévwr edxKO-
outa, traffickers and their goods have been removed from the public forum of the Per-
sians, that the disorder of these may not mingle with the correct deportment af, the edu-
cated. “Iva cadéctepov dniAwt 7% naoa 7 Tlepody xodureia, fLLKpOV ET AVE L-
jet (paucis repetam), in order that the entire polity of the Persians may be more clea ly
understood, I will recapitulate briefly. KayBtiong tov Kipoy dmexaier, dmu¢
Ta év Wépoare éxiryopia eu TEAoin.

Remark. Hence what in Latin is the sequence or dependence of tenses, in Greek -
is the sequence of modes. For example; if in Latin the principal verb is in the
Pres., the verb of the subordinate clause is generally in the Pres. also; and if
the principal verb is a past tense, so is the verb of the subordinate clause.
But in Greek, if the principal verb is a Pres., Perf. or Fut:, the Subj. is used in
the subordinate clause; and if the principal verb is a past tense, the Opt. is
gener ally used in the subordinate clause; e. g. raira ypadu, rene ap a, ete.,
iv’ EXGn¢, haee scribo, scripsi, ut venias;—raira é ypadgor, éyeypadety,
iv’ EAVore, scribebam, scripseram, ut venires—On the Subj. after an historical
tense, see § 188, 4.

~§ 181.4 SYNTAX.—FINAL SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. 269

3. With the final conjunctions 0 ¢ and 62@¢, also 7» , the mo-
dal adverb &» is sometimes joined, which refers to a conditional
sentence, pty not expressed, but to be supplied ; e. g. ua tas
ONS YaQus ates judas, Onws av Eidamer, & Te dei Hikia nal
moléue vouilew, you will lead us through your territory in order that
(when we set our foot on it) we may know, both what tt ts necessary

to regard as friendly and what hostile.

4. Verbs of care, anxiety, considering, endeavoring, striving, ef-
fecting and admonishing, e. g. énimedeiod-cat, goorrilewy, puLaccrew,
oxoreiv, Bovlevecdou, oogr, noir, mecrrew, curare, pyyevacd an,
Magurahsy, napayyéhhen, mgosmeiy, aizeioOu, dys, and the like,
are followed by the conjunction 62m¢ (6za¢ 7) either with
the Subj. and Opt. (according to No. 2.), or, what is more usual,
with the Ind. Fut., not only after a principal tense, but very often
also after an historical tense; in the latter case, the accomplishment
of the purpose is represented as really occurring and continuing.

Of MWeporkot vopot éwimédovrat, brwc¢ THY GPXHV [LH ToLodTat Ecovrar
0i ToAizaL, olor rovypod 7) aicxpod épyou édieoGat, the Persian laws take care,
that the citizens shall by no means be such as to desire any wicked or shameful act ;
BKoweiaote tovt0, & dvdpec AVyvaiol, br wc 47 Aoyouc Epotoe pévov ob
Tap’ iuov mpéoBelc, GAAG Kal Epyov Te detkvbew EEovaLyv, consider this, that
our envoys will not speak only, but they will be able, ete.

5. The final conjunctions ¢» « and o ¢ (more seldom 6 ¢), are
followed by the Ind. of the historical tenses, when a purpose is to be
expressed, which has not been accomplished or which cannot be ac-
complished.

"Expiv ce Unyéacov Cetlar nrepiv, bTuc édaivor Toic Vevig tpayixd-
TEpoc, it would be necessary for you to mount your Pegasus, that you might appear
more majestic to the gods; éBovréunv © dv, Siuwva thy abriv yrounv éuot
Exe, Lv’ Gudorépwv qudy aKotcavree TaAnd7A paiing ~yvate ra dixara, I
would that Simon were of the same opinion as I am, that having heard both of us, you
might easily judge what ts just.

CI. Exercises on § 181.

| Contemplate thine actions as in a mirror, that thou mayest adorn the beanti-
ful, hide the unseemly. The Lacedaemonians were not permitted (¢mpers. w. dat.)
fo travel abroad, lest the citizens should be filled with frivolity by (d76) for-
signers. Remember absent as well as (= besides, zpéc, w. acc.) present friends,
lest it may seem that you would neglect the latter also in their absence (part.).
Agesilaus took care that the soldiers should be able to endure hardships. The
president of the city must (xp#, w. acc. and inf.) see to it, that the best (men)
nave the greatest honors. Noble (= honor-loving) and high-souled men (= of
men) do everything, that they may leave behind an immortal remembrance of

23*

270 SYNTAX.—ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 182.

themselves. Endeavor to fight with all ardor, that you may surpass your fore-
fathers in renown. Would that (ei yap odeAov) the multitude (01 toAAoi) were
able to effect the greatest evils, that they might also be able (to effect) the great-
est good (plur.); then (= and) it would be well (= have itself well, § 153, 2, a.).
Why (72) didst thou not seize (part. aor.) and slay me, that I might never show
(aor.) myself to men 4 ;

§ 182. Il. Adjective-Sentences.

1. Adjective-sentences are adjectives or participles expanded in-
to a sentence, and, like adjectives, define more fully a substantive
or substantive-pronoun; e. g. of moléutot, ot éx tS mohEewo amequ-
yov = Ol MOA MLOL EXT. T. ALODVYOVTES; Ta MOdywura, & AdEs-
avdoos éngateyv = ta v20 Alskavdpov moaydévta nodypara.
These sentences are introduced by the relative pronouns 6¢, 7, 0,
OGTLS, HTLS, O Tl, 0106, ete. .

2. The relative pronoun agrees in gender and number with the
substantive (standing in the principal sentence) to which it refers,
in the same manner as the attributive adjective with its substantive ;
but its Case is determined by the predicate standing in the subordi-
nate sentence; e.g. 0 avo 0» eideg — 1] HOETH, 19 MEaPTES OL ayatol
Ext Puuovow — Oi GTQAaTLOTOL, OFS MayouEda., etc.

Rem. 1. When a predicative substantive stands in an adjective-sentence, very
frequently the relative does not agree, in gender and number, with the substan-
tive to which it refers, but, by means of a kind of attraction, with the predica-
tive substantive. The verb of the adjective-sentence is usually a verb signify-
ing to be, to name, to call; e.g. ‘TH 606¢ mpo¢ éw TpéreTat, 6 Kadeirat IqAod-
olov oT 6a, the course turns to the east, which is called the Pelusian mouth ; here 6
takes the gender of the predicative ordua, instead of that of its antecedent dddc.
"Axpa, al kadodvta KkAeidec ti¢ Kixpov. ITlepotxdy Fidog, Ov axeva-
Env Kadovow. Adyor pny eiow év éxdoTolg NUuGr, dg EATIidas dvo“ato-

fev.

Rem. 2. There is an exception in respect to number in the. formula éorzy oi,
e. g. Aéyovot, sunt, qui dicant. ‘This formula is treated in all respects as a sub-
stantive-pronoun, inasmuch as neither the number of the relative has any influ-
ence on that of the verb éorzy, nor is the tense changed, when the discourse re-
lates to past or future time.

Nom. | éoTev of (= évtot) aréguyov.

Gen. EOTLY OV (= évior) GTECYETO.

Dat. éotiv oic (=éviotc) ody obTa¢ édoker.
Ace. | éoTlv 00g. (=éviovc) amékTever.

3. The person of the verb in the adjective-sentence, is deter-
mined by the substantive or pronoun (expressed or understood), to
which the relative refers. Eyo,0¢ yoagpw—ov, 0¢ youges—

3.182. ] SYNTAX.—ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 271

) ano or éxsivos, 0g youge:. Hence after a Vocative Case, the
second person is commonly used; e. g. dy Powe, 0 Tuas Tombra
none &toinoas, O man, who inflicted such evils on us.

4. The relative is plural, when it refers to two or more objects;
and when the gender of the substantives is the same, the relative
agrees with these in gender; often, however, it is neuter, when the
substantives denote inanimate objects.

"Ey éxeivy TH Govg Te Kal TO TpdTyW Eheyov, tv olewep éreSpappnr. ‘Opa
TOY KEKoopunuevoy Kal OPdahuOv dmoypady, Kal ypGuarog évrpinper, Kad Kbpare
TpocHEToLc, a O07 voutwa Hv év M7dorc.

5. When the substantives are of different gender, the relative,
when persons are spoken of, agrees with the masculine rather thar.
the feminine ; but when things are spoken of, it is usually neuter.

‘O avip Kal yuvn, of mapa o& GASov. “Hrouev éxxAnovalovrec repi re
rohEéuo Kal Eip7vnc, a weylorny exer Obvauly év TH TOY GvSpbrwv Biw.

6. When the relative should be in the Acc., and refers to a sub-
stantive in the Gen. or Dat., it is commonly put in the same Case
as its substantive, when the adjective-sentence has nearly the force
of an attributive adjective or participle. This construction is called
attraction of the relative. ‘The substantive frequently stands in the
relative sentence.

"Apiov dObpauBov mpdrog dvOparav Ov F ete tower éxoinoev (in-
stead of od¢ tower), Arion was the first among men known to us, to invent the dithy-
ramb, ‘O otpatnyo¢ nye THY oTpaTidy awd THY TOAEwY Gy» (instead of Gc)
Emetoev (= Tov retoteoGr), the general led the army from the cities, which he
had persuaded. Xdv toigc Snoavpoic ofc (instead of otc) 6 raTHp KaTEAL
Tev (= Toi¢ b76 Tod warpi¢ KaTadeotectow), with the treasures which his father

=

eft. Kipoc xpocjASe cdv 7 eixe Ouvapmet, Cyrus came with the force which
ie had. “Ey® col brioxvotpat, jv 6 Sede eb 0106, av Y Ov (= ar7t robrTwr, G)
Lv wot davetone, dada rrelovoc aka ebepyeTioety.

7. The relatives of0¢, O00¢, O¢tLgovr, yAixos, both as
Accusatives and Nominatives, are attracted, when the verb sivae
and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause; e. g.
piog GU &, log éxsivog or 0 Lwxoutye éoti. This attraction is
made in the following manner. ‘The demonstrative in the Gen.,
Dat. or Acc. to which the relative refers, is omitted, but the relative
is put in the Case of the preceding substantive or of the (omitted)
substantive demonstrative, and the verb «iva: of the adjective-clause
is also omitted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the
Case of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause,
has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective; the connec-

272 SYNTAX.—-ADJECTIV-SENTENCES, f§ 182.

~

tion of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still more com-
plete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in tle adjective-
clause; e. g. in the full and natural form of the sentenve yogivoman
cevdot be sm, oiog ov ei, by omitting the demonstrative, covovtm, to
which the relative oiog refers, by attracting olog into the Case of the
preceding substantive avdgi, and by omitting sé of the relative sen-
tence, and attracting the subject ov into the Case of the relative,
we have the common form yagifouer avédoi cig coi, or by transpo-
sition yaoilouat oi cot avdgi. In English the above relatives may
be translated by as or such as.

Gen. | £06 ofov cod avopac. éo6 olfov cod.
' Dat. xaptcopas | ofw col avopi. xapicouat of col.
Ace. | éxaiv6 oiov oé Gvopa. évalv@ oiov cé.
Gen. | 0d olov budy avdpar, é00 olwv OpoOr.
Dat. xapicopat olor buiv avopaary. yxapifouar otorg dpi.
Ace. | éraivi oiovc bude Gvopac. ~ éraiva oloug bua.

Rem. 3. Attraction also takes place, when olo¢ or oi6¢ Te is used instead
of écre with the Inf, signifying I am of such a nature, character that (is sum gui,
with the Subj.), hence, I can; e. g. AvedéySynv ZtwikS roobro of pare Ave
weitoGat, par opyifectat, I conversed with such a Stoic as could neither be
grieved nor irritated. ‘The demonstrative is commonly omitted; ¢. g. Movgy riv.
Tay av8porav yAGtrav éroijcay ot Geol olav apdpowy tiv dwviy, the gods
made the human tonque only, capable of uttering articulate sounds; here the demon-
strative TosovT7Vv, to which ofav refers, is omitted.

Rem. 4. Sometimes an attraction takes place directly the opposite of that
mentioned in the adjective-clause, since the relative does not take the Case of
its substantive, but the substantive, the Case of the relative which refers to it.
This may be called inverted attraction; e.g. T7v ovoiay (instead of odcia)
Av KaréAine TH vid, ob wAeiovor asia éotiv, the property which he left to his son is
worth no more. This inverted attraction is very common with oddelc¢ éd¢Ti¢
v4 {no one, who not = every one), after an omitted éori.

Nom.| otdcic OCTEC obK ap TaDTA ToLnoetev.
Gen. | oddevig dT ov ov KaTeyéAacev.

Dat. | oddevi 570 ovK arekpivaro.

Ace. | ovdéva 6vrivea ov KQTEKAQAVCEY.

8. On the use of the modes in adjective-sentences, the following
1s to be observed :

(a) The Ind. is used, when the attributive qualification (i. e. the
idea contained in the predicate) is represented as something actual
or real; e.g. 7 mods, 7 urilerat, 7 éxtiody, 7 uticSnoeton. The
Ind. Fut. is very frequently used, even after an historical tense —
($ 188, 4), to denote what should be done, or the purpose. (§ 152, 6) ;
G. &. CTOUTHYOUS aipoUrzal, 017M Diiinam moheunoouvatr, who
Should fight, or to jight with P. Also after negations. the Greek

§ 182. | SYNTAX.—ARJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 273

uses the Ind., where the Latin has the Subj-; e. g. zag’ euol 0U-
Beic, Og rig py ixavds EotLy iow moreiv enol, nemo, qui non pos-
sit. .

(b) The relative with dy, e. g. 0g a, | Gr, 0 ay, Ogus a», ete.,
is followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is
one of the principal tenses (Pres., Perf. or Fut.), if the attributive
qualification is to be represented as merely conceived or assumed.
Hence it is also used to designate quality and size indefinitely, and
also to express indefinite frequency (as often as). The adjective-
sentence can commonly be considered as a conditional sentence,
and the relative with ay can be resolved into the conjunction éay
with zie or any other pronoun and the Subj.

Odc Gv (= 2 tivac) Bedtioug tiwvic EauvTdv WyAGwVvT at, TobTOLC TOA-
Aakeg Kat Gvev avayKne Edédovoer Teiecdat, whomsoever any persons think (if any
persons think any) superior to themselves, these they, etc. “Avdpwrot én’ oddévag
udAdov ovvicravta:, 7 ént TobTOVe, OVE Gv (= éav TIVdc) aioSurvTat ap-
yelv avTov eriyeloovvtac, men combine against none more than against those whom
they see endeavoring to rule them.

(c) The relative (without a) is used with the Opt., in the first
place, with the same signification as with the Subj. and a, but re-
ferring to an historical tense. Hence, it is used in general and in-
definite statements; so also in expressing indefinite frequency,—in
which case the verb of the principal sentence is commonly in the
Impf. Here also the adjective-sentence may be resolved by et with
the Opt.

Oi woA€éutoe mravrac éijc, 6T@ (= ei Ti) EvToYoLEY, Kal xaidac Kai yv-
vaikac éxtetvov, the enemy killed all, one afier another, both children and women,
whomsoever they fell in with (= if they fell in with any). Pidove, Gcovg ToLg-
Catto kal evvovg yvoin bvrac, Kai ixavode Kpivete ovvepyods eival, 6 TL
TVYXAVOL Bovabpevoc KatepyaleoVal, ouodoyeitat Tpbg TaVTwY KpaTLoTOE J}
yevéota. Cepavmevecy.

(d) In the second place, the Opt. is used, when a present or fu-
ture uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, a mere supposition,
conjecture, assumption, is to be denoted. The adjective-sentence
is then considered as an uncertain or doubtful condition [§ 153, 1,
b, (8) ], or forms a part of a sentence expressing a wish. .

Tod abrov héyew, & py cadic eidetin, deidcoSar del, he must avoid saying,
what he does not fully know (= if he does not fully know). “Epdot tw, Av Exa-
oroc eldein réxvny, any one can practise the art with which he is acquainted (=
tf he is acquainted with it).

(e) The Opt. with a» is used, when the attributive qualification

274 SYNTAX.—ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 182.

is to be represented as a conditional supposition, conjecture, assump-
tion, an undetermined possibility (§ 1538, 2, ¢.).

Todce AyBavovrac Tig duthiag wotov" dvéparodioTae éEavTov amekaAet Dw-
Kpatyr, Od TO dvaykaiov abroic sivas diahréyeobal, rap’ Ov av AaPoteEY
Tov wo86rv, Socrates said that those who receive a reward for their instruction, bar-
tered their own freedom, because tt was necessary for them to converse with those from
whom they might receive a reward. Ovx got 6 TL Gv TLC peilov TovTOV Kako
a &8 01, there is no evil which any one can experience, greater than this.

(f) The Ind. of the historical tenses. (Impf., Plup., Aor.) is used
with a», when it is indicated that the attributive qualification could
take place only under a certain condition, but did not take place,
because the condition was not fulfilled [§ 153, 2, a, (@)]; ¢ 9.4

/ >

, a e x 3 Y 5 c ~ 3 Ud
MOA, HY Ol MOAEULOL OVH AY EMOOTYNOAY, & OL OTQUTIMTEL EBOY-
Syoar, quam hostes non diruissent, st milites auxilio venissent.

Cll. Hxercises on § 182.

Many acts have become (the) occasions of very great advantages, which at
first (= at the beginning), all supposed (aor.) to be calamities (sing.). Who
would (§ 153, 2, c.) not praise you (aor.), who have fought (aor.) boldly for the
freedom of your native land? The ungrateful (men) forgot us, who conferred
on them great benefits. There are men who (or some) are esteemed happy by
all more than by themselves. Cannot thy brother, O Chaerecrates, said So-
crates, please (aor.) any one, or doth he please some very highly? Cleopompus
rayaged some (tracts, neut. plur.) of sea-coast. In the young man there dwells
a fear which we call shame. For the acquisition of a friend, which we say is a
very great blessing, we see that the multitude care little. There arose confused
noises, cries and shoutings, which is (a) common (thing) to all who (§ 148, 6)
engage in a naval battle. Of the nations with which we are acquainted in
Asia, the Persians rule, but the Syrians, Phrygians and Lydians are depen-
dent (= are ruled). I have never yet esteemed a rich man happy (aor.), who
(part.) enjoys nothing of that which he possesses. "We must remember not only
the death of the departed, but also the virtue, which they have left behind. Many
indeed commend fair words, but nevertheless do otherwise (another, newt.) and
opposite to that which they have commended (aor.). Do nothing which thoa
dost not understand. A rational man, if (part.) he has lost (aor.) a son or any-
thing else which he prizes very highly, will bear (it) more easily than others.
I have sent (aor.) thee this wine, said Cyrus, and I pray thee to drink it (aor.)
to-day with those whom thou most lovest. The tyrant has given sufficient sat-
isfaction for what he has done (aor.). The general led (aor.) the army away
from the cities, which he had subjected (aor.) to himself. The Persians wera
not able to fight (aor.) courageously against men so brave as were the Athe-
nians and Lacedaemonians. In a man such as thou art, the citizens of the
State will cheerfully confide. It is no trivial matter to engage in single combat
(aor.) with a man like thee. Socrates was one of those who listen only to rea-
s0n (= was such as to listen, etc.). The barbarians had dwellings (so built}

§ 183. ] SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 275

as to be fitted to shelter (them) both in winter and in summer. There was no
peril which our forefathers did not undergo for the freedom of their native land.
There was no one present (= of the present) except Socrates, whom Apollodo-
rus did not move (aor.) by his weeping (part.) and complaining (dyavaxreiv).
“What one does not (47) possess, he cannot (§ 153, 2, ¢.) give (aor.) another.
(It is) not the golden sceptre (that) preserves royal dominion, but faithful
friends, that are the truest and surest sceptre for kings. ‘The Phaeacians gave
Ulysses treasures, more than he would ever (= so many as he would never)
have gained (aor.) from Troy, if (¢, w. ind. aor.) he had come unharmed to his
native land. ‘There was then not a Spartan (gen. plur.), who, if the country
had been in danger, would not have been ready to die for it. States are called
very fortunate, that continue most of the time in peace. It is a great mark of
a sovereign, if the citizens voluntarily obey him and are ready to abide by (hira)
‘n dangers. A man is truly great, who can accomplish (aor.) a great (object)
by intellect (yvOu7) rather than by strength of body. He, at sight (part. aor.)
of whom men are stirred (aor.) and ardor and emulation seize (éuxinrewy tii,
aor. sing.) every one, he I might assert has something of a kingly nature. The
Assyrians prayed all whom (é¢rv¢, sing.) they might meet, that they would not
flee and leave them behind (part. aor.), but succor (aor.) them. We cannot
(§ 153, 2, ¢.) enjoy (aor.) a man, who delights in dainty food and wine more
than in friends. Who could hate (one), whom he knew to be considered noble 2
Socrates always said, that there was no (00) better way to a (= the) good repu-
tation, than (that) by which one should become (aor.) versed (= good) in (ace.)
that in which he wished to appear so. Those who (§ 148, 6) took pay for their
| instruction, Socrates called man-sellers of themselves, because (dvd@ 76) they
were obliged to converse with those from whom they could receive pay. There

was no (ov) city there, by which they could defend themselves.

§183. III. Adverbial Sentences.

_ Adverbial sentences are adverbs, or participles used adverbially

(§ 176, 1), formed into a sentence, and, like adverbs, denote an ad-
verbial object, i. e. such an object as merely defines the predicate,
but does not, like the object = by the substantive-sentence,
complete it; e. g. Ove TO 2a0 HAGE, Ta Gry Oodle (= tov
EL éiGovrtos).

A. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES OF PLACE AND TIME.

1. Adverbial sentences of place are introduced by the relative
adverbs of place, ov, 7, Oy, Oz0v, eva, va (ubl); oer, WEP
(unde) ; vi, Oot, 7, omy (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express
the three relations, where, whence, whither. 'The use of the modes
in adverbial sentences of place, is in all respects, like that in adjec-
tive-sentences.

276 SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [$183

2. Adverbial sentences of tzme are introduced by the following.
conjunctions :

a. ‘lo denote that one action is contemporary with another, by 6te, ozore, ic,
qvixa, which designate a point of time, and év 6, éwc, while, which designate a
space of time.

b. To denote that one action is prior to another, by é7ei, éxetd7, postquam, 2&
ov, 2& dtov, ex quo, and a@’ ov, since.

c. To denote that one action succeeds another, by mpiv, Pet, Ewc, Ewe 0d,
ele 6, cre, wept ob, wEYOL OTOV, MéexpL.

3. On the use of the modes, the following is to be observed:

(a) The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented as
a fact; hence in mentioning actual events or occurrences.

‘Qe quspa TaxLoTa éyeyével, angzASov (ao TaxXLoTA, quum primum, as
soon as it was day, they departed). - Ov mpotrepov ératoarvto, Tpiv Tou Te TaTépa
éx Tod arpa cae metrenméEppavrTo, Kal THY $idwy adtod Todc wey ATE K-
Tetvay, Tove O ék Tig TOAewe EEEBaAOY, they did not cease, before they sent
tor their father from the camp, and put to death some of his friends and banished others..
"Eyayovto, wéxpst ol ’ASyvaion avérAevoar.

(b) The Subj. is used, when the statement of time or the asser-
tion of the predicate, is represented as something conceived and
generai, and refers to a predicate of the principal sentence, the verb
of which is in one of the principal tenses. The modal adverb ay
1s united with the conjunctions; e. g. ocav, omdtar, yin bv, ema
(éanv), éxedcav, mov av, kag a, wéyou ay, ec ay. Accordingly,
the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions from ota» to zoir
&v, when the statement of time is also to be represented as the
condition, under which the predicate of the principal sentence will
take place. But with the conjunctions, which signify #d/, the Subj.
expresses an object expected and aimed at. In like manner also,
the Subj. is used to denote indefinite frequency; the conjunctions
are then translated by as often as.

"Emetddv od BovaAy draréyeobat, wc éyo divaya éxeoBat, ToTE cor OLa-
AéEouat, whenever you (tf you) wish to discourse so that I can follow, then I will dis-
course with you. Ov rpoTepov wabtcopa, Tplv av éAw Te kal TYP OOwW Tag
"Adjvac, I will not cease, before I take and burn Athens (unless I take, etc.). “Ewe
ay cOlnTaL TO OKagor, TOTE xpH Kal vabTnVv Kai KYBEepraTHY mpoimoug eivat
(dum servari possit), while the ship can be saved, the sailor and the pilot should be ae-
tive (if the ship, etc.). ‘Omdtav otpatormedetvuwrTat oi BapBapo Baact-
Aeic, Tabpov TeplBGAdovrat eireTGc OLd tiv ToAvyetpiav, as often.as the barba-
rian kings make an expedition, they easily intrench themselves by means of the great.
number of workmen.

(c) The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time,—(«) when the

§ 183.] SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 277

statement refers to an historical tense in the principal clause. When
the Opt. is used to denote indefinite frequency [as often as, comp.
(b) ], the Impf. generally stands in the principal sentence; (2) when
the statement of time is to be considered also as a condition of the
principal sentence, and such a condition as appears as a present or
future uncertainty, as a mere supposition, conjecture, assumption or
undetermined possibility [§ 158, 1, b. (8)]. With the Opt. the con-
junctions are used without av; e. g. Océ, éméi, etc. (not drar, émay,
etc.).

Ob mpoTepoyv éxaboato, mpiv %hot Te Kal TUpGcere Tag ’ADqvac.
‘Orore (as often as, whenever, if ever) oTpatoTedevoivTo ol BapBapor
Baotreic, Tadpov TepteBaAAovToO ebretic Old THY ToAvyEpiav. ‘OndTE
TO dlAoocodgely aicypov Vy yn oatuny Elvat; ov0 av GvySpwrov voxicaius EuavT
eivat (if I believed it disgraceful to be a philosopher, I would not think myself a man).
So also, re u7 with Opt., nisz.

Remark. In addition to the constructions already mentioned, the conjunc-
tion «piv is constructed with the Jnf, especially after affirmative sentences,
containing one of the principal tenses, when the action is to be represented as
an incidental or casual designation of the point of time. The subject of the Inf.
is put in the Acc.; on attraction, see § 172,38. Aapeioc, tplv aiyuakdétoug
yevéctalt Tove ’Epetrpléag, éveiyey advtoic devov yoror, before the Erre-
trians were taken captive, Darius cherished bitter hatred towards them. ‘Hoav Aa-
peiw, tpiv BacltAcioat, yeyovétec tpeic maidec, three children were born to
Darius before he was king. So mpotepov 7 and the Epic répoc, are followed by
the Inf.

CII. Exercises on § 183.

The soul is freest when it leaves the body. Agesilaus offered sacrifice and
waited until the fugitives had brought (aor.) a sacrifice to Neptune. The Athe-
nians did not cease to be angry (év opyq éxecv) with Pericles, until they had
punished (aor.) him by a fine. If men have robbed (aor.) or stolen, they
are punished. Do not decide (aor.) before thou hast heard (aor.) both parties
(= the plea of both). We must (dez, w. acc. and inf.) resolutely perform (dvi-
ev) the journey, till we have reached (aor.) the goal. What does it profit some
to be rich, who do not (§ 177, 5.) understand how to use riches? Those who
(§ 148, 6) have received favors (ed macyevy, aor.) we call ungrateful, if (when)
able to requite (aor.) they do not. No one was permitted (= it was not
permitted) to go (eicépyeoVa:, aor.) to the general, if he was not (§ 177,
5) at leisure. The Chalcidians gave way (évdcdévaz), as often as the enemy
charged, and as they fell back (d7voywpeiv, part. pres.) the eneray pressed
on and threw javelins. Whenever young men associated with Socrates,
they made progress in virtue. He who (§ 148, 6) is voluntarily hungry, can
(§ 153, 2, c.) eat (aor.) when he will, and he who is voluntarily thirsty, can drink
(aor.) when he will; but he who suffers this by necessity, has not the power
(25eor, w. dat.) to cease to hunger and thirst, when he will. Eat not, before

24

273 SYNTAX.—CAUSAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§$ 184, 185.

thou art hungry, and drink not, before thou art thirsty. That (= the) death is
without pain, which (part.) happens (aor.) ere (one could) think (doxety, aor.) |
of (it). The tradition is, that the island (of) Delos, before Apollo appeared”
(aor.) to men, was concealed by the sea (76 wéAcayoc).

/

B. CausaL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES.

§184. a. Adverbial Sentences denoting Cause.

1. Such as are introduced by the conjunctions of time, o7ze,
O20TE, WC, EEl, guoniam, since, med y, quontam, since the
cause is considered contemporary (ot, 620Té, we), with the predicate
of the principal sentence, or prior (ézei, ée.dy) to it. The Ind.
is the prevailing mode in these adverbial sentences; e. g. My
pe uel, él OY OMoyacTQLOS Extogds Ef wt, guoniam — non sum,
do not slay me, since I am not a brother of Hector. “Ors coivuy
cave ovtme 278, moocyner MeOGVUWS EGEdEW auovEL, since these
things are so, etc.

2. Such as are introduced by the conjunctions ozs and 61674,
because. With these also, the Ind. is the prevailing mode; e. g.
"Apa tO dowry, OTL Goldy ECTL, Hideiron VAd Tay Gewr, 7, OTE
Mudetztat, oor éctw, is what ts holy, loved by the gods because
vt ts holy, or ts it holy because tt ts loved?

§185. b. Conditional Adverbial Sentences.

1. The second kind of causal adverbial sentences, are those which
express a condition, and are introduced by the conjunctions ¢¢ and
&av (jv, &», which must not be confounded with the modal adverb
av, see §153, 2). The principal clause expresses that which is
conditioned by the subordinate clause. As the conditioning clause
precedes the conditioned, the former is called the Protasis, the lat-
ter, the Apodosis.

2. The Greek language has four different ways of expressing
conditionality :

(1) The protasis has ¢¢ with the Ind., and the pices likewise
the Ind. (sometimes also the Imp.). Then both the condition and
that which is subject to the condition, are represented as a reality or
faci, and hence as certain.

Ei totto Aéyetc, duaptavece, if you say this (admitted or assumed as a
fact), youerr. Ei eict Bwpoi, eici xai Geol, if there are altars (an admitted fact),
there are also gods. Ei tars Sede, codec totiv. Ei raita wemoinkag,

§185.] § SYNTAX.—CAUSAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 279

ématveiobat dgiog ei. Eire elye, nai édidov. Ei ¢Bpévryce, nat qo-
Tpawev. Eitaitaérmetvotnket, yuaptaKet. Ei rovto 7AéE exc, G [t a p-
Thon. Hi te é4 etc, 066.

(2) The protasis has ¢¢ with the Ind. of an historical tense, and
the apodosis also the Ind. of an historical tense with @v. This
form is used, when the reality of the condition and of that which is
subject to the condition, is to be denied. It is asserted that some-
thing could take place under a certain condition, but did not take
place, because the condition was not fulfilled.

Ei te cixev, 2didov ay, si quid haberet, daret (nunc autem nihil habet; ergo
nilul dare potest), if he had anything, he would give it (but he has nothing, conse-
quently he can give nothing). Ei toiro éAeyec (éAeSac), 7#uapravec (juap-
Tec) Gv, si hoc diceres, errares. Ei totto éXeEac, ijpaptec dv (Aor. instead
of the Plup.), st hoc dixisses, errasses, if you had said this, you would have erred (but
you have not said it, consequently you cannot have erred). Ei érveiotyy,
obk dv 7PH/POorTovy, si obedissem, non aegrotarem.

(3) The protasis has ¢a@y with the Subj., and the apodosis the
Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fut. (also the Imp.). The
condition is then represented as a supposition, the accomplishment
of which is, however, expected ; that which results from the princi-
pal clause is represented by the Ind. as certain or necessary.

"Edy (jv, dv) Todt Aéy ne, GuapTi oy, if you say this (shall say), you will
err. (Whether you will actually say this I do not yet know; but I expect, I as-
sume, that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.)
"Edy te Exoperv, O@comer, if we have anything (which we expect is the case,
or which depends on circumstances) we will give. ’Edv toito AéEnc, duap-
THON, si hoc dizeris, errabis.

(4) The protasis has ¢¢ with the Opt., and the apodosis the Opt.
with a». (The Opt. Fut. is not then used). By this form, both
the condition, and that which is subject to the condition, is repre-
sented as a present, mostly a future uncertainty, as an undetermined
possibility, a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption, without
any reference to the thing supposed, being real or not real, possible
or impossible. |

Ei tT voc, dotne av, tf you have anything (it neither being assumed nor de-
nied that you have), you would give. Ei totto Aéyorc, duapravore av. OdK
ivimevéykatmer ovre Td Kaipa, obte 7d Wiyor, ei axivne yiyvosto. Ht
dvaykatov ein ddicely 7 ddiKeiobat, EA0i wy Gv wadAAov ddiKeioSat, 7} adiKetv.

Rem. 1. Ei with the Ind. or @4@v with the Subj. is frequently followed by
the Opt. with Gv; e.g. el TobTo Aéyetc, Guapravore av, if you (really) say this,
you would err; édv TodTo Aéyye, duapravore dv, if you say this (as I expect), you
would err; 2n the contrary, ef with the Opt. is sometimes followed by the Ind.;
e. g. ei Tobr0 Aéyouc, duapravers, if you should say this, you certainly err.

280 SYNTAX.—CAUSAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§ 185.

Rem. 2. Ei with the Opt. is frequently used instead of a conjunction of time
[§ 183, 3, (c)] to denote indefinite Jrequency in relation to what is past. Then
ei is translated by as often as, and the principal clause has the Ind. of an histori2
cal tense, usually the Impf., with and without dv; e.g. El ruc abt donot 7
TOY Tpb¢ TOUTO TeTaypLévan BraKebelv, EraLEerv v, as often as any one of those
appointed to this work, seemed to him to be indolent, he would beat him. Ex Tig ZwKpa-
Tet wept TOV GvTLAEyoL, ent THY bnb6GECW day Hyev av Tayra Tov Adyov.

Rem. 3. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, @v is commonly omitted in
the conclusion with expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, justice,
possibility, freedom, inclination, thus, e. g. with yp7v, édeu, @bedov, with’ verbal ad-
jectives in -téoc, Tpocyke(v), Karpd¢ Hv, eikdc HV, KaAov jv, aioxypov qv, KaAdc
eixe(v), 2&qv, 2Bovddunr; e. g. Ei aicypév zt tuedAov épyaoacda, Savarov avr’
aiTod Tpoatpetéov Hy, mors praeferenda erat. What is here expressed ab-
solutely by the Greek, is expressed with an implied condition in English, e. g. elkoe
AV, it would be just, aicypov Fv, it would be shameful.

Rem. 4. The protasis is often omitted, and then the Opt. with dv stands with-
out any conditional clause; yet the protasis is contained in an adjective-sen-
tence, or in a participle, or in some word of the sentence which may be expand-
ed into a conditional protasis, e. g. in the adverb ovTwc, in a preposition, or it
is indicated in what precedes or follows. "Og Tatra Aéyou (= et Tie TabTa
Aéyot), Guaptavort &v, whoever (¢f any one) should say this, would err. Tatra.
AéEacg (=e od AéSac), duapravore av. OTe (= «i otTw TOLnoaLc)
yY Gv duaptavore. Very often, however, the protasis is actually wanting,
particularly where it can be easily supplied, e. g. by such phrases as, when one
unshes, if it is allowed, if I can, if circumstances favor; e.g. Bovroi ny ay
(scil. ei duvaiuny).

CIV. Exercises on § 185.

If we strive after virtue, we are happy. If thou wilt follow me, said Virtue.
to Hercules, thou wilt become a good artificer of noble (deeds). If thou wish-
est the gods to be gracious to thee, thou must honor them. If: thou art eager
to learn, thou wilt learn much (woAvuasy eivat). For all men death is (the)
boundary of life, even though one shut (aor. part.) himself in a cell and ‘keep
watch. That which is (= the) unexpected, if it be good, delights men the more,
but if it be fearful, it terrifies the more. If thou callest to mind the past, thou
wilt decide better upon the future. If we have money, we shall have friends.
The possession is nothing, if it is not used (= if there is not using therewith).
If men supposed (aor.) that thou wert ungrateful towards thy (= the) parents,
no one would believe that he would be repaid (= receive back a favor), if ( part.)
he did thee a favor (aor.). The whole time would fail (aor.) us, if we should
enumerate all the deeds of Hercules. If we should banish (aor.) from life the
love of fame, what then would become (aor.) of virtue (= what would the good
become to us), or who would strive to do (aor.) anything illustrious? If thou
shouldst be ready to take hold (aor.) of philosophy, thou wilt shortly see how
much thou wilt be distinguished from others. Wisdom would awaken (= af-
ford) a vehement love (plur.), if it were seen by the eyes. Said Alexander: If
I were not Alexander, I would be Diogenes. If Socrates had not himself been

§ 186.] SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 281

(impf.) very temperate, how would he have made (aor.) others temperate? IE
ever Astyages demanded anything, Cyrus observed it first. If ever any one
served (aor.) Cyrus, when, (part.) he had given a command (mpocrarrevy, aor.),
in no case (= to no one) did he ever leave (aor.) his readiness unrewarded. It
would not be (= have itself) well, if the gods delighted more in great offerings,
than in small. Ifa greater danger were to (uéA/Aw) threaten (= be to) us there
than here, then we must perhaps prefer the greatest security (= the most se
cure, neut.).

§186. Adverbial Sentences denoting Consequence
or Liffect.

1. Adverbial sentences of consequence or effect, are introduced
by the conjunction w¢ze (more seldom w¢). On the use of the
modes the following is to be observed:

(a) The Ind. is used, when the consequence or effect is to be
represented as a fact, something actually accomplished; the Inf.,
on the contrary, is used, when the consequence or effect is to be
represented as merely conceived, not actually accomplished, but
merely as possible or aimed at, or as the condition of the affirmation
in the principal clause (on condition that, supposing that).

“Apyoc avdpay éynpodn ob TAC, GoTe oi dotAce aitGv Ecxov Tavta Ta
mpaypata, Argos was left so desiitute of men, that the slaves had all their effects.
Loxparne mpo¢ TO petploy deioGar wexatdevpévoc Fv ob THC, OGTE TAY pL-
Kpa Kextnpévog wavy fading &yerv dpKodvta, Socrates was so educated to have
moderate desires, that although he possessed very litile, he very easily had a sufficiency

(here the consequence is not carried into effect, but is founded only on the na-
ture of Socrates).

Rem. 1. If the Inf. after Scre has a special subject, different from that of the
principal sentence, this is put in the Acc., but if the subjects of both sentences
are the same, then attraction takes place (§ 172, 3).

Rem. 2. Instead of cre with an Inf., a relative, particularly olo¢, dcoc, is of-
ten used in connection with an Inf.; this relative corresponds to a demonsira-
tive in the preceding clause, thongh sometimes the demonstrative is to be sup-
plied; e. g. Tovotrocg 6 Xraoinnoc Fv, olo¢g py BotAeatat roAhove
aroKtivvivar Tay TOALTOY, Stasippus was such, as not to desire to put many of the
citizens to death.

(b) The Opt. with &y is used, when the consequence or effect is
to be represented as a contingent conjecture, supposition or assump-
tion (§ 153, 2, ¢.).

(c) Finally, the Ind. of the historical tenses with av, or the Inf.
with ay is used, when it is to be indicated, that the consequence or
effect would take place only under a certain condition [§ 153, 2, a.
(a) and d. ]. ;

24*

282 SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§ 186.

Tofixny kat latpicyy kal pavtixiy ’AndAAwv avedper,, exvduuiag Kat Epwrog
Syewovetoavtoc, Octe Kal ovtog "Epwroc &v ein wadyrhc, Apollo discovered
archery, medicine and the »rophetic art, under the instruction of desire and love, so that
he was a disciple of Eros. Ulavtec¢ oi wohitat wodeuKa 6xAa Kateoketvaloy, d¢-
TE THY TOALY bvTWOSG HYHOwW av ToAguov EpyaoTHptov eivat (se. ei eidec), all the
citizens were preparing weapons of war, so that you would think that the city was ac-
tually a manufactory for war. Oi Geot obtw pot év Toig¢ iepoi¢g éofunvav, OCTEe
kat idtoTnv Gv yvOvat, ti Tig wovapyiac dnéyecBai pe dei, so that even a pri-
vate man (if he had been present) might have perceived.

Rem. 3. Instead of 6¢7¢e with the Inf., signifying ea conditione, ut, or ita, ut,
(on the condition that), 6’ G7 e also, either with the Ind. Fut. or with the Inf, is
used; e. g.’Em? tovt@ trekiorauat tic dpyic, é¢ Gre bm odbdevdg tudv
apfopuat, I will give up all claim to the government on this condition, that I shall be
ruled by no one of you.

Rem. 4. ‘Q¢ is used with the Inf. in independent or parenthetic clauses; e. g,
©¢ elmer, so to speak; O¢ yé wor 00K ei Y, as tt seems to me; Oc is also often
omitted in such clauses; e. g.0d TOAAG Adyw Eeizety, to speak briefly.

d. Adverbial Sentences denoting Comparison.

2. Comparative adverbial sentences of manner and way, are in-
troduced by the relative adverbs, wo, wots, WOMEO, 02S, as.
The use of the modes in these sentences corresponds with that in
adjective-sentences (§ 182, 8).

3. Comparative adverbial sentences of quantity or degree, are in-
troduced by the relative 06 (0co0¥), and with this the demon-
strative zoc0vtT@ (toc0vTOY) in the principal clause corres-
ponds; these are translated so much —as, but with a comparative
or superlative, by the — the.

Tocodroy diadgépetv qude det Tov OobAwy, doo of wiv dodAoL dKovTec TOC
deorétatc brnpeTovory, we ought to differ so far from slaves, as slaves unwillingly
obey their masters. “Oow (dc0v) coddrepiée tig ott, TOCOUTH (TOC0bTOY)
cadpovéotepoc éoruy, the wiser any one is, the more discreet will he be. “Oo

(600v) cogatatécg¢ tic éctt, TOCOUTw (TOCOdTOY) CwHpovéaTaToO’
éorwv.

CV. Hxercises on § 186.

Cyrus had soon killed off (avadicxw) the beasts in the park, so that Astyages
eould no longer collect others for him. The Greeks were obliged (ded, w. ace.
and inf.) to go back so far while fighting, that (during) the whole day they went
(dcépyeoPar) not more than twenty-five stadia, and (dAA@) came into the villages
in the evening. In process of time (O¢ mpoyyev 6 ypdvoc), Cyrus became (so)
filled with modesty, that he even blushed, if he met his parents. God provided
for men eyes that they (might) see the visible, and ears that they (might) hear
the audible. What law is full of so gross injustice, as to deprive him of recom-
pense who (§ 148, 6) gives away (aor.) something from his*own (store, plur.)s

‘

§ 187. ] SYNTAX.—INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 283

and does (aor.) a humane deed? The Athenians were permitted to rule over
the rest of the Greeks, provided that they themselves obeyed the Persian king.
Cyrus was very eager for honor, so that he underwent everything for the sake
of being praised. The generals stood firm, that the enemy might not throw the
wings into disorder. There are vessels at your command, so that you can sail
wherever (677 &v) you will. The excellence of Nestor is well known to all the
Greeks, so that, if I should speak of (Aéyecv) it, I should speak to (those) ac-
quainted (with it). The cup was so strong, that it could not be broken. The
barbarians had invested (aor.) the city so that the Greeks could not escape from
it unobserved (AavSdvevv, aor.). The intestines of the sick burned (xaledac)
so, that they would very gladly have plunged themselves in cold water.

§ 187. Interrogative Sentences.

1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence or
dependent upon it; e. g. Js the friend come? and I do not know
whether the friend has come. The first is called a direct question,
the last, an indirect. Both may consist either of one member, or
of two or more members ; e. g. Ls the friend come, or ts he not come?
Knowest thou not whether he is coming, or whether he is not coming ?
According as the question refers to an olject (person or thing) or to
a predicate, the questions are divided into nominal and into predi-
cative questions; e. g. who has done this? (nominal question), and
hast thou written the letter? (predicative question).

2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which the in-
quirer wishes to receive an answer on a single point, are introduced
by substantive or adjective interrogative pronouns, tic, 20103, 20008,
or such interrogative adverbs as z0zegos, 700¢, 2, 70v, ZO9t, mOTEr ;
e. &. Tig tavTH énoincev ;—the predicative questions, i. e. those
where the inquirer desires only an affirmation or denial of his in-
quiry, are introduced by adverbial interrogatives, as, gga; €. 2. G0 «
THVT EMOINGUS §

Rem. 1. Predicative questions are frequently indicated by the mere fone and
by the position of the words, the predicate, or that word on which the force of
the question rests, standing first in the sentence. Thus particularly in the case
of negatives; e.g. 0vK étédetc iévat, do you not wish to go?

8. On the use of the interrogatives, the following is to be ob-
served :

(1) "H, commonly in connection with other particles, implies an assertion, as-
severation, since it supposes that that in regard to which the question is asked,
actually exists, e. 2. 7 otros rorémoi siowv, are these enemies? } Tov, num
_ forte, truly? indeed? when the inquirer expects a negative answer; e. g. 77 Tov
TeToAunK Epyov alcyiotov 7éde, has Jason indeed dared this thing? 7 yGp, ist

4

284 SYNTAX.—INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [§ 187

not so, is it not true? e.g.97 yap, © ‘Inia, éay Tt tpwrG oe Loxparye, aroxpt-
vel, will you not answer, if Socrates asks you?

(2) "Apa is properly used with questions of doubt, sinectesaia) and wonder, but
often, also, with a degree of modesty with questions wholly definite; e. g. dp
oioS& Tivac, of dvadeheic bvTeg Obehivove divavtar didove roreiobat, do you
know any persons destitute of all recommendation, who are able to acquire valuable
friends? (to which a negative answer is expected).

(3) Od or va is jomed with dpa, according as the inquirer expects either an
affirmative or negative answer; e. g."Ap’ ob éotwv astevng ; nonne aegrotat? (he
is not sick, is he?) Ans. Aegrotat. "Apa pi got doverag; numnam aegrotat?
(he is not sick, is he?) Ans. Non aegrotat.

(4) M7 always expresses apprehension or anxiety on the part of the inquirer,
and hence expects a negative answer; e. g.’AAAG 7 apyitéxtov PovAe. yevé-
oSat; OvK odv éywy’, ébn, do you not wish to become an architect ? by no means,
said he. ’AAAG 2%} yewuéetpne exidupetc, Eby, yevéodat ayadoc; Ode yeo-
pétpne, 26n, kK. T. A.

(5) MG» (arising from the interrogative “7 and odv), corresponds in all re-
spects with the Lat. num, and hence always requires a negative answer; e. g.
LOv TeToAunkac Tad’Ta dpdcat, you have not dared to do these things, have you?
For the sake of perspicuity, the particles odv and pj—uGv oiv, uOv wA—are

often joined with it; e.g. “Gv obv TetoApykag—;,—or ZOv pH TETOAUAKAG
— ;—but when the negative od is joined with “av, the question is affirmative
(nonne); e. g. MGV od TeTOAUHKaGC— 3 nonne ausus es—?

(6) Od, non, nonne? and od Ko», non or nonne ergo? with the collateral idea
of conclusion from what precedes, always denote affirmative questions; e. g. 0 0-
Kody yéhuc Hétotog eic ex pode yeAGy, is it not then the sweetest laughter to laugh
at one’s enemies ?

(7) Eivaand évecra are used in questions expressing indignation, astonish-
ment and irony, and denote opposition or contrast, and yet, since an unexpected
conclusion has been drawn from what precedes; e.g. ETeELT OdK Olet dpovTi-
Cerv Veode dvdpozwv, and yet do you not suppose that the gods care for men?

(8) Direct double questions are introduced:

a. By wéTepov (tOTEpa) — 7%, utrum—an; e. g. TOTEpoY ovTOL bGpLoTat
elowv, 7 o120£evot, are they insolent, or hospitable? (~oTepov in the first member is
sometimes omitted); b. by "Apa— 7, ne—an; ce. by M7 — 7%, whether not —or ;
d. by "AAAo re 7 (instead of GA2o te yévolr’ av, 7) and GAAOT 4, nonne; e.g.
GAAO TL H Aeimerae 7d évreiVev euol Kivdivoy 6 méystoToc, nonne relinquatur
mihi —*% is not the greatest of the dangers left to me? “AX XoTt obv oiye gtAoKep-
heic dtAovot TO Képdoc, therefore, do not those fond of gain, love gain?

(9) Single indirect questions are introduced :

a. By the interrogative pronouns 6c¢Tic, droloc, drba0¢, 67d6TEPOC, SWC, Tov,
Sz, Om6Te, etc. (§ 62, Rem. 1.); e. g. ovx oida, d¢Tig éotiv — ovk oida, brwc 7d
mpaypa éxpasev.

Rem. 2. But often the direct interrogatives tic, zoioc, 7a¢, etc., take the place
of the indirect question, the indirect question then assuming the character of the
direct; e. g. oi oida, Tic raiTa éxpagev (instead of é¢rr¢).

bh, Ei, whether, like 7, is properly used only in double questions, and denotes

§ 188. ] SYNTAX.—INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 285

a wavering between two possibilities; but often only one member is expressed,
while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. Hence ¢/ is used after
verbs of reflecting, dekiberating, inquiring, asking, trying, knowing, sayiny: Opav, oxo-
meiv, oxovrelobal, idéval, doBetoa, ete.—mnreipdotal, éxivoeiv, tpwtdv—éyewy,
ppalery, eic.; e.g oxéWal, ei 6 ‘EAAjvov vopog KaAXov éxet, consider whether the
Greek custom is nt better. Also édv with the Subj. is used in such questions,
when things expiicted and yet to be proved, are spoken of; e. g. cxéipat, tay
TOde Cot UGAhov apéoky, consider whether this would please you better.

c. M7, as in direct questions, whether not, is used after expressions of reflecting,
considering, inquiring, asking, as well as after those of anxiety and fear, which also
have the idea of reflection. In English, this 7 after verbs of fear and anxiety
is translated by that; e. g. Opa, 7 ToUTO obTw¢ Exel, see, whether this is not so.
Dpovtiva, pi KpatLotoy y ot otyav, I am considering whether it is not best for me
to be silent.

(10) An indirect double question is introduced by, (a) ro7epov (xéTepa) —7 ;
e. g. ovK aida, TOTEpoY CH 7 TESYnKEV; (b) ef —7, the same as TOTEpOV — 7, yet
with this difference, that ei —7 expresses uncertainty and choice; (c) eite—
elite, in the same signification as «i—7, except that by efte — cite, the cor-
responding relation of the two members is denoted, and the indecision of the
speaker between two possibilities is made more prominent; e. g. xal deiferg 7a-
4a, ELT ebyevng wédvKac, ELT o8AGy KaKy.

Rem. 3. On the use of the modes the following is to be observed: The Ind.
is used in direct and indirect questions; the Subj. and Opt. are used in doubtful
questions, and differ only as they are affected by the tense of the verb in the
principal sentence; e. g. ob« Eyw, br0L Tpaxwuat and ovK Eiyov, 6rot TparotunD
|§ 153, 1, b. (z)j. On the Ind. and Opt. of the historical tenses with dy, see § 153,
2, a. (a) and c.

Rem. 4. The answer is expressed:

a. By the repetition of the interrogative word; e.g. Opd@e¢ pe, déorow’, o¢
éyo, TOV GUALov; Ans. ‘Op. Ina negative answer, a negative is joined with
the interrogative word; e.g. Otc otv GBpotoi¢ O¢ kadéotyKev vouoc; Ans.
Ob«x oida.

b. By ¢nui, O7p eyo, Eywye; negative, ov O7Hi, OUK Eywye, OD.

ce. Very frequently by yé, quidem, utique, assuredly, certainly, which denotes
that the answer completes the thought contained in the question, extends it fur-
ther, continues and strengthens it, or by an additional clause, limits and cor-
rects it. Also by yap, though still stronger.

d. By vai, vy tov Aia, mavv, xkaprta, ev ye, and the like.

§ 188. Oblique or Indirect Discourse.

1. The words or thoughts of a person,—whether this be a third
or second person, or the speaker himself—may be repeated again,
either without change, in precisely the same form as they were at
first stated by the person who uttered them,—then the discourse or
thought quoted is independent of the representation of the narrator,

286 SYNTAX.-——-INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 188.

and is called direct (oratio recta); e. g. I thought, “all men are mor-
tal,”—he announced to me, “peace has been coneluded,’—and with-
out a preceding verb, all men are mortal ;—or, in the second place,
the discourse is made to refer to the representation of the speaker
or some one else, and thus depends on a verb of perception or com-
munication (verbum sentiendi or declarandi) in the principal sen-
tence. The statement is then quoted as the sentiment of the per-
son spoken of, i. e. of the person by whom it was originally uttered.
This is called indirect or oblique discourse (oratio obliqua) ; e. g.
he announced, that peace was concluded.

I will make peace with the enemy.—Oratio recta.

He said that he would make peace with the enemy.—Oratio obliqua.

2. The principal sentences of direct discourse, and also sentences
introduced by the coérdinate conjunctions, e. g. yee, ovr, xalzOl,
etc., are expressed, in oblique discourse, when they contain a simple
affirmation, and denote something which happens, has happened, or
will happen, (a) either by the Ace. with Inf. ($ 172, 1), or by ozs
and w¢ with the finite verb ($180, 2), or by the participial con-
struction (§ 175, 1); e. g. émyyyerde TOUS MOAEMLOVES aAZOQV-
VElLv—OTL OL Mohsuor ATODVyoLEy or aMEMVYOYV—TOVS
zohepmiors anogvyorvtag—or, (b), when they express a
command, wish or desire, by the Inf. ($171, 2), e. g. eeSe cote
cteatiataics éxtOéeoTat tog modeniors, he commanded the sol-
diers to attack the enemy ; in oratio recta this would be expicteett by
the Imp. ézideote.

“Hoopat, & KAéapye, dxovwr cov ¢povipovg Aoyovg (oratio recta), J am pleased,
Clearchus, to hear you make these sensible remarks. 'Ticoadépvng éAegev, 6tt H00LTO
axotwv Kieapyov dpovipovg Adyovc, Tissaphernes said that he was pleased to hear
Clearchus, etc.

3. The subordinate clauses of direct discourse are not changed in
indirect discourse, except that, after an historical tense in the prin-
cipal sentence, they take the Opt., in the place of the Ind. and Subj.,
when the indirect discourse is to be represented as such, i. e. when
the statement contained in the subordinate clause is to be viewed as
the opinion or sentiment of the person spoken of.

Thus, e. g. éav todTo Aé€y ne, Guapr7oy, in oratio obliqua becomes éAeéé oe,
ei rodTo Aéyore, auaptnoecSat. Tedevtav éXeyev, doa ayada Kipoc Iépaoac
weTotn Kor ( fecisset), he finally mentioned what advantages C_had conferred on
the Persians. Ticcadépvne Gmooev ’Aynothaw, ci om eioatto, éoc EAVoLED,
ode wépmpere poco Baorhéa Gyyéhove, dvaTpaseodat ait, ddbedi var adTove-
hove Tag év TH’ Agia T6AcLC ‘EAAnvidac, Tissaphernes took an oath to Agesilaus, if ~

§ 189. ] HOMERIC DIALECT.—HEXAMETER. 287

he would make a treaty, until the messengers, whom he had sent to the king showd re-
turn, that he would effect that the Grecian cities in Asia should be independent.

4, Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse takes the
form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in the prin-
cipal clause, the verb of the subordinate clause is in the Ind. of one
of the principal tenses, and in the Subj., as in direct discourse.
Here, although the actions and representations contained in the sub-
ordinate clauses, belong to the past, they are transferred to the time
present to the speaker. The use of the Ind. is regular, when the
statement in the principal sentence, is present to the time of the
speaker; e. g. A¢ya, ore 0 &vOommos Grytog ~o7tP, or instead of
oz with the finite verb, the Acc. with the Inf. is used; e. g. eyo,
tov avOoumuy Gyntoyv Eivat.

*Ael EME mEXELTO O Kipoc, dmdTE GuoKyvolev, OTHE evyaploToraroe Aoyat
éuBrntyoovrat, Cyrus always took care, whenever they were with him in his
tent, that the most pleasant subjects of conversation should be presented. “Edo0gée TO
Onuw TplaxovTa édéoVal, of Tode TaTpiovy vouovg Gvyypawovet, Ka¥ ob¢
mohitevoovory, the people resolved to choose thirty men, who should draw up
laws for the state, in accordance with which they should administer the government.
‘Opxiowe pweyahoig KaTeivovTo ’AUnvaiol, déxa Eryn xpjoecSa vouole, ODE
dv avtoicg Lohwv GAtat. Todo inméag éxéXevoe Kipoc ovdarretvy rove aya-
yovtag, 26 GV TIE ON LAV.

5.. The Greek can also use the Acc. with the Inf, instead of the
finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses.

ZKiGac gact trove vouadac, Ere? aitoic Aapeiov cic Bareiv ei¢ tiv
YOpar, wEeTa Tavita pewovévar avrov ticactat, they say that the Scythian nomads,
after Darius had made an irruption into their country, eagerly desired to take vengeance
on ham.

ALP PEN D-DX.

HOMERIC DIALECT.

§ 189. Introductory Remarks on the Hexameter.

1. The measure of the Homeric verse is Hexameter, which consists of six por-
tions, called feet. Tach of these feet is a Dactyl or Spondee. A dactyl consists
of one long and two short syllables (~~~ ), a spondee of two long ( ne
The first four feet of an Hexameter verse may be either dactyls o1 spondees;
the fifth is usually a dactyl, and the sixth a spondee or trochee(—~). The
following is the scheme: .

288 HOMERIC DIALECT.—HEXAMETER. [§ 189.

-_ _— , — , = es >=
wy a ed eS kk vw = Ww _— vw ee

b¢ uwaaa | roAda

“Avdpa pot | évvere, | Modtoa, ro | Abtporor,
edpov é| mepoev.

thayx8n, &| wet Tpot | n¢ ie | pov mrodt

2. The first syllable of the dactyl and also of the spondee, is pronounced witn
a stress or elevation of voice, which is called the Arsis ; the short syllables follow
ing the Arsis, or the long one, if the foot be a spondee, are pronounced with a
depression of voice, which is called the Thesis. The Arsis is marked in the
scheme by the sign ( — ).

Remark. The fifth foot is commonly a dactyl, but sometimes a spondee;
then the verse is called a spondaic verse. A succession of dactyls indicates a
quick and lively motion, while a succession of spondees, a slow and heavy mo-
tion.

3. In every well constructed Hexameter, there is at least one Caesura, which
is occasioned by the ending of a word in the middle of a foot. But as the har
mony of the verse requires that the ending of the foot and of the word should
generally not coincide, several words of an Hexameter verse may end in the mid-
dle of a foot, and hence there may be several caesuras in an Hexameter.

xoouevov | kata Suey | éif@voro | yuvacxéc.
In this line the ending of the foot and of the word coincide only in the word
kata. Ina dactyl the word may end with a long syllable in the arsis ( — | + » },
or with the first short in the thesis (+ |). In the former case, the caesura
is called masculine, in the latter, feminine. The principal caesuras are the fol-
lowing:

(a) The most usual and most emphatic caesura is the masculine after the ar-
sis of the third foot; e. g.

, ? U m , ? ,
-_ ed a YY! = Velie YY = VY v

GAN 6 wév AiSiorag || uetexiade THAOY’ éovTac.
(b) Often also a less emphatic feminine caesura occurs in the thesis of the
third foot; e. g.

, ? ’ ’ ? ,
SR ES) Pea aa da) ey eek Dir fuerte <2 Ye fog icc

avopa mot évvere, Modoa, || moAbtporov, b¢ uada ToAAG.
(c) A third caesura is the masculine after the arsis of the fourth foot; this is
usually preceded by a masculine caesura in the second foot; e. g.

, ’ 4 7 {4

,
-vv/=- -|- -|- oh [Wier Ow

2 va id SS XN 7 e Ta
apvupevos || 7v Te Puyny || Kal vooToy ETatpwr.

4. Beside these principal caesuras there are still other subordinate ones.

5. Beside the caesura, the Diaeresis (dcaipeccc) also is of frequent occurrence,
i. e. a separation of the verse, occasioned by the ending of the word and of the
foot coinciding. The following are the principal diaereses: (a) after the first
foot; (b) after the second foot; (c) after the third foot; (d) after the fourth
foot; e. g.

(2) 7od.ov- | abrap 6 Toiow adeideTo vootimoy Zuap

(b) Gav dre dn éEroc | HAVE, wepimAouévoy éviavTav

(c) évvjuap wév ava orparov | dyeTto KjAa Yeoio

(d) avdpa pou tvvere, Motca, xoAbrporor, | b¢ pada ToAAG.

§190.| HOMERIC DIALECT.—QUANTITY. 289

§190. Quantity (Comp. § 9).
PRELIMINARY REMARK. Only a few general rules will be given here; the

quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned by
observation.

1. A syllable which has the vowels « or 0, followed by another vowel or a
single consonant, is short by nature; e. g. TEKéc, D%dc, B67.

2. A syllable which has the vowel 7 or w, or a diphthong, is long by nature;
so all contracted and circumfiexed syllables are long by nature; e. g. 7pac,
obpavoc ; dxov (instead of aékwv), étivd (from étiude), mac, citoc, Wixoc, viv.

3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel, a, 2, v, followed by another vowel
or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position; e. g. dei-
duvtec, datwovin, oi7, waxy, dtAoc, upydpEoc.

4, A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two conso-
nants or a double consonant, is long by position; e. g. ‘xéodat, ExaréuBy, défa-
otal, Ex Slotoc, pbAnov.

Exceptions to No. 3.

(a) @ of nouns of the first Dec., which have the Gen. in -ac, is long in all the
Cases in which it occurs; e. g. 7uépd, PLAld, -dc, -G, -av, ete.

(b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec., is long; e. g. Nom. Sing
Aéavd, Dual Aeaiva.

(c) ais long in the Gen. Sing. in -ao and Gen. Pl. in -Gwv; e. g. ’Atpeidao,
ayvopawy.

{d) the ending -a¢ of the first Dec. is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing.,
and in the Acc. Pl.; e. g. Nom. rayidc, Gen. oxide, Ace. Pl. ddgde.

(e) @ of masculine and feminine participles in -a¢ is long; so also other words
in -a¢ where v7 or v have been dropped; e. g. axotvods (akoveav7¢), axov-
odoa, totic, Bac; yiyd¢ (ytyavtc), méAde (pwedave).

(f) @ in the third Pers. Pl. Perf. Ind. Act.; e. g. rerigaer.

(g) v is long in the Sing. of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs in -vyz,
also in the masculine and feminine Sing. of the participle; e. g. devaviyz,
2deixvov, decevic, detxvioa.—Other exceptions may be learned by obser-
vation.

5. In Homer, a mute and liquid commonly make a syllable long by position.

6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position: (a)

when it ends with a consonant, and the next word begins with a consonant;
e. g. Kal Kad. | cov Tp | ac; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a short
vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with two sin-
gle consonants, which are not a mute and liquid; e. g. dduq | tyr, 7v | ora
@ | 30 Wvyoar | 7yayev | dvfp. A mute and liquid, in this case, always makes the
syllable in the arsis long, while the syllable in the thesis may be either long or
short, according to the necessities of the verse; e. g. uw? scot | dap’ Epa | ra =xpé-
ge | pé xpv | oén¢’Adpo | dizn¢; on the contrary, in the thesis, advap 6 (6) | wAn-
siov | éorH | Kev.

7. A long vowel or diphthong at the end of a word, is usually made short in

25

290 HOMERIC DIALECT. —HIATUS. [§§ 191, 192.

i]
Homer, before a word beginning with a vowel, but it remains long when it is in
the arsis, or when the following word has the digamma (§ 193); e. g. 7uév7 | év
Bév | Seoow ; —viec, 6 | wey Krea | tov, 6 8 ap’ | Kdpbrod | ’Axropi | wvoc ;—
_abrap 6 | éyva | jow é | vi gpeot | davy | cév ze (Gory = Fyowv).

8. A long vowel or diphthong in the middle of a word, before a following
vowel, is but seldom shortened; e. g. éerj (vv —), Eumatog (~~~ ), log (vw),
BéBAjat.

9. The arsis can make a short syllable long, both at the beginning of a word,
e. g. doridoc | dkaua | tov zip, and also at the end,—in which case it is gene-
rally followed by a liquid, or a o or 0, the sound of which is- easily doubled iz
pronunciation, or by a word with the digamma; e. g. xa? wedi | @ Aw | TetvTa;
—dvyaré | pa jv (= Fav).

10. Not unfrequently in Homer, merely from the necessities of the verse, a
short vowel in the thesis is measured as long, when it stands between twa long
vowels; e. g. io | dééz | 7.

§191. Hiatus.

Hiatus, i. e. a harshness in the pronunciation, arising from the concurrence
of two vowels, one of which ends a word, and the other begins the following
word, is generally avoided by the Greeks, but especially in verse. In the Ho-
meric Hexameter, however, it is admitted in the following cases:
(a) With long vowels or diphthongs, either in the arsis, e. g. dyTw9é | 'Udu |
oyi, or in the thesis, in which case the long vowel or diphthong is short;
e. g. oiKol E | oar;

(b) When the vowel does not admit elision, or but seldom; e. g. mad? dyv-
VED;

(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark; e. g. a2’ ava, el

péwovac ye ;

(d) In the feminine caesura {§ 189, 3), after the. first short syllable in the third

foot of the verse; e. g. xewvy | dé tpvda | Aeca || aw’ | éorero | yep? ra |
XEN 5 .

(e) In the diaeresis ({ 189, 5) after the first and fourth foot of the verse; e. g.

éyyxet | Idowevijog ; — réupar éx’ ’Atpeidn ’ Ayapéuvove | odAov *Ovetpov ;

(f) When the first word has the apostrophe; e. g. dévdpe’ éVaddev ;

(g) Words which have the digamma occasion no hiatus (§ 193, 3).

§192. The Homeric Dialect.

The language of Homer and his school is the older Ionic; these poets, how-
ever, were not satisfied with their own dialect merely, but selected from all the
dialects, in accordance with the true principles of art, those forms which were
adapted to the nature of their poetry; the regular laws of versification, also.
had much influence in forming the language. Thus they produced a peculiar
and definite poetic language, called the Epic or Homeric. 7

§§ 193, 194.] HOMERIC DIALECT.—DIGAMMA.—VOWELs. 291

§ 193. Digamma or Labial Breathing F.

1. The Greek language had originally a special labial breathing, the sound
of which corresponds nearly to the English f From its form fF, which re-
sembles one gamma standing upon another, it is called Digamma (double
gamma).

2. The Acolians retained this character the longest; among the other Gre-
cian tribes it disappeared very early; its sound, however, was in some instances
changed into the smooth labial {, e. g. Cia, arising from Fic (later i¢), vis; in
some instances, it was softened into the vowel v, and after other vowels coal-
esced with these and formed the diphthongs av, ev, 7, ov, wv, e. g. vai¢ instead
of vat c, navis, Bod¢ (86F¢), bévs, bds, Gen. bd-vis; in others still, it was merely
changed into a smooth breathing, which, at the beginning of the word, is indica-
ted by the Spiritus lenis, but in the middle of a word and before p, it was not
indicated by any character; e. g. Fic, vis, i¢; eiAéw, volvo, 6F ic, ovis, Fpddov, fo-
dov ; finally, it was also changed, at the beginning of some words, into a rough
breathing, which was indicated by a Spiritus asper; e. g. fom epoc, vesperus, év-
Vout, vestio.

3. In the Homeric poems, the character denoting the breathing F, no longer
exists; but it is very clear that in the time of Homer, many words were pro-
nounced with the digamma; e. g. dyvit, dvdava, éap (ver), the forms of "EIAQ
(video}, éorKa, eiua (vestimentum), évvipe (vestio), eixetv, Exndoc, €oc and 6¢ (suus),
ob (suz), Zomepog (vesperus), eixog (vicus), olvog (vinum); this is obvious from
several facts: (a) words that have the digamma cause no hiatus; e. g. mpd éSev
(= po Févev) ; (b) hence also a vowel capable of elision, when placed before
such a word, cannot be elided; e. g. Aimev dé é (= 0€ Fe), instead of 0’ €; (c)
the v é¢eAxvotiKov is wanting before words which have the digamma; e. g. daié
oi (= daié For), instead of daiév oi; (d) od instead of ox is found before the
digamma; e. g. éwel ov EV Ev éoTt Yepeiwy (= ov FeVev), instead of ovy Ver;
(e) in compounds neither elision nor crasis takes place; e. g. dvaevréuev (=
dua evréwev), instead of dverméuev, dayne, instead of «fay7c; (f) long vowels
are not shortened (§ 190, 3) before words that have the digamma; e. g. KaAAet
Te oTiABwv Kai eivact (= Kai Feipact).

§ 194. Change of Vowels.

Contraction.— Diaeresis.—Crasis.—Synizesis.—Apocope.

1. The Homeric language often varies in the use of contracted and uncon-
tracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse; e. g. déxwv and dakar.
The particular instances of contraction will be seen below, under the contract
declensions and conjugations. The contraction of o7 into w takes place in the
verbs Body, to cry, and voeiv, to think; e. g. Bacac, instead of Boycac, ayvaca-
oxev, instead of dyvofoackev ; so also, dydGkorTa, instead of dydo7KovTa.

2. Diaeresis is the separation of a diphthong into its vowels. The use of this
is not rare in Homer; it occurs most frequently in those words where the two

292 HOMERIC DIALECT.—CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [§ 195.

vowels are separated by the digamma; e. g. Tdic, ait, breath (from df),
tick, éixrivevoc, di¢ (0 t¢, ovis), dtouat (comp. opinor).

3. The use of crasis is limited to a few cases, particularly: xayo, TaAAa, ob-
pc, odvexa, @ptoToc, wiT6¢, instead of kai éy@, Ta GAda, 0 éu6c, 6 aptoTog, o
avroe.

4, Synizesis, i. e. the contraction of two vowels into one, which is perceptible
only in the pronunciation, but is not indicated by the form of the word, is of
very frequent occurrence :

(a) In the middle of words, most frequently in the following combination of

vowels: €d, €@, EL, EG; £0, E0l, E0V; EW, EW; e. g. OTHUEA, TuéaC, Deol,

ypvaéorc, TeGveGTe; much more seldom in ae, la, Lat, ty, 1, Lo; e. g. deb-
Asbwv, ToALac, TOALog; co only in dydooyv; vol only in daxpberot; nein
Ontoo, Oniwy, OnioLoL, HLA ;

(b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels: Nl a, 7 €,

—_ —— os a

N77 €l, N OV, 4 OL; EL OV; @ a, © ov; the first word is one of the follow-
ing: 7, 7, 67, wn and éei, or a word with the inflection-endings 7, ©;
e.g. 7 Ov, Of advEeLoTaTor, [ij GAAOL, Eiharivy HE yauoc, GoBEoTwH OVO’ vidr.

5. Elision (§ 6, 3) occurs very frequently, namely:

(a) The a in the Neut. Pl. and in the Acc. Sing. of the third Dec.; seldom
in the Aorist-ending -oa; e. g. GAew)’ évé; usually in the particle dpa ;
(b) The ¢ in the personal pronouns éé, we, oé, etc.; in the Voe. of the second
Dec.; in the Dual of the third Dec.; in endings of the verb, and in par-

ticles, e. g. dé, Té, TOTE, ete. (but never in édé) ;

(c) The ¢ in the Dat. Pl. of the third Dec., much more seldom in the Dat.
Sing., and indeed only when the connection is such, that it could not be
mistaken for the Acc.; e. g. yaipe 6& TH 6pye ’Odvoevs; in aypt, dupe
and og; in adverbs of place in -, except those derived from substan-
tives; in e/koov; finally, in all the endings of the verb;

(d) The o in a6 and i76 (but never in 7p0), in déo, in Neut. pronouns (ex-
cept 76), and in all endings of the verb;

(e) ac in the endings of the verb, was, Tar, oFar ;

(f) oz in wor, to me, and in the particle Tov.

6. Apocope (azoxo77), i. e. the rejection of a short final vowel before a word
beginning with a consonant, occurs in the prepositions ava, kata, mapa, seldom
in G6 and i76, and in the conjunction dpa.— Av before P, 7, ¢, yw, is changed
into du (§ 8,4); e. g. du Bwpoict, Gu méAayoc, Gu Povov, dumévw; K aT assimi-
lates its T to the following consonant, except that the rough mute is preceded
by the corresponding smooth; e. g. Kad divauy, Kan Kedadyc, Kay yovu, Kar
gaAapa; examples of azo and i706 are anréuer, BBGAAev, instead of ao-
méuwet, UTOBGAAELY.

i

§ 195. Change of Consonants.

1. A and & remain before (contrary to § 8, 2); e. g. iuev, kexopvb-xévec,
instead of touev, KeKoovopevoc.

3§ 196, 197.] HOMERIC DIALECT.—FIRST DECLENSION. 293

2. The metathesis of p with a preceding vowel, occurs not unfrequently; ¢. g.
Kpadin, instead of xapdia, heart, kaprepoc and Kparepoc, Bapdiatoc (from Bpadic) ;
also in the second Aor.: érpavoy, édpadoy, édpaxov (from réptu, dapdivo,
dépKopat).

3. In Homer consonants can be doubled, after short vowels, according to the
necessities of the verse, in the following cases:

(a) The liquids and c on the addition of the augment, when there are three

successive short syllables; e. g. éAAaBov, éupadorv, tvveov, toceva;

(b) In composition, also, the liquids and o are doubled; e. g. vedA2ouror (from

véog and Aovw) ;

(c) The o in the inflection of the Dat. in ov, and of the Fut. and Aor.; e. g-

VEKVOOLY, Ppdoooual, KahEcca ;

(d) The o in the middle of several words; e. g. d0cov, réccov, driccu, ete.

Of the mutes, 7 is doubled in the interrogatives which begin with é7; e. g.
ommac, etc.;—K in Téhexkov, TedeKkdw ;—rT in 6TTL, 6tTEo, btTEv;-—6 in =d
detoe, Addeéc, GOdnv.

Remark. The doubling of p, when the augment is prefixed and in composi-
tion (§ 8, 12), can be omitted, if the verse requires it; e. g. ZpeCov (from pa),
xpvocpuvtoc. For the same reason, though but seldom, one of the consonants,
which otherwise usually occur doubled, is omitted; e. g. ’Oducetc, ’AyiAetc, O4-
pvyoc, instead of ’Odvccetc, "AxlAAeic, dapvyyog.

DECLENSIONS.
§196. Suffix gi(r).

In addition to the marks for the Cases, the Homeric dialect has the suffix
¢¢(v), which expresses the relation of the Dat., and in connection with prepo-
sitions, that of the Gen. This suffix is always appended to the unchanged stem
of the word; e. g.

I. Dec. only in the Sing.: dyéAndt, ard vevpHdry ;

II. Dec. in Sing. and PI.; all these forms, without respect to the accentuation
of the Nom., are paroxytones (-6¢:): Geddy (for ted), of the gods, an’
daTedduv (for d0Téwv), of bones.

HL. Dec. almost exclusively in the Pl.: dpeodu(v), upon the mountains, éx or7-
Seods (comp. § 44), vaide.

§ 197. First Declension.

1. Instead of the long a, 7 is used through all the Cases of the Sing.; e. g.
‘TInvedoreine, IIyveAorein from Inveiorera, dpntp7, Bopénc, Bopéy, Bopénv.

Exceptions: Sed, goddess, -dc, -G, -év; Navoixad, Geiad; Alveidc, Abyeiae,
‘Epyeidc, and some other proper names in -a¢ pure. The Voc. of viugy is
vipa.

2. Substantives in -eca@ and -ova, derived from adjectives in -7¢ and -ovg,
and also some other feminines, change short @ of the Attic dialect into 7; e. g.

25*

294 HOMERIC DIALECT.—SECOND AND THIRD DEC. [§§ 198, 199.

aAnSein, avaidein, evxXoin, Kvicon, instead of GAnSeta, dvaidera, edrdova,
Kviood.

3. The Nom. Sing. of eo in a great number of words, have the end--
ing -a (like the Lat.), instead of -7¢, according to the necessities of the verse;
e. g. inzé7d, aiyunti, pntieta, eiptore. The Voc. retains in all these the
ending -d. ;

4, The Gen. Sing. of masculines has the following endings: - do, - (con-
tracted from -ao) and - ew; the last ending -ew is always pronounced with syni-
zesis, and in relation to the accent, @ is considered short (§ 30, Rem. 2); e. g.
‘Epueiac, Gen. ‘Epueido and ‘Epuciw ; Bopénc, Gen. Bopédo and Bopéw; ee
onc, Gen. ’Atpeiddo and ’Azpeidew.

5. The Gen. Pl. of masculines and feminines, has the endings: -@wv, -d»
and -éwv (éwv is regularly pronounced with synizesis) ; e. g. Khotaov, KALGLOY,
TVAGwY, TVAEWY.

6. The Dat. Pl.: -7o7¢(v),-7¢, and - ace (only in Veaic and dxtaic) ;

e.g. KALoinot(v), métpNS TPdG wEYGAOL.

§ 198. Second Declension.

1. Gen. Sing.: -ov and -010; e. g. Guov, © woLo from Gpoc, 6, shoulder.

2. Gen. and Dat. Dual: - 077 (instead of -ovv); e.g. Quote.

3. Dat. Pl.: -ovoc(v) and-01¢; e.g. Ouorory, pore.

4. Attic Declension. Gen. Sing.: - Go, instead of -w; e.g. Ijvededo, from
Tinvédewc. In yéAus, sister-in-law,*ASwc and Kc, the -w¢ produced by con-
traction, is resolved by 0; e. g. yahdue, ’Atéwe, Kowe.

5. Contracted forms of the second Dec., occur but seldom, viz. voic, usually
vooc, xeyuappove and yetuappooc, IlavYovc, TlayvGov, UavSm. With those in
-eoc, -cov, Homer either lengthens the e into e/, or employs synizesis, as the na-
ture of the verse requires; e. g. yptcecoc.

§ 199. Third Declension.

1. Dat. Pl.: -o2(v),-cor(v),-eor(v) and-ecor(v). The endings -eor
and -eoc4, like the other Case-endings, are always appended to the pure stem;
e. g. kiv-ecot (from Kvov, Gen. Kvv-6¢), vexd-ecor (from véKu¢, v-0¢), YElp-Eot.
In neuters, which have a radical o in the Nom. (§ 42, 1. and § 44), this o is
dropped; e. g. évé-eoor (instead of éxéo-ecor, from Td éroc, instead of ézec),
dexa-eco.v (from 76 dérac); v is dropped in stems ending in av, ev, ov (§ 41);
e. g. Bd-eoor (instead of B6/-ecct, bov-ibus), immj-ecot.—The ending -ocz is
appended almost exclusively to stems, which end in a vowel; e. g. véxv-cot
(from vékve, v-oc).

2. Gen. and Dat. Dual: - 0/7 (as in Dec. I1.); e. g. wodoitv.

3. The Acc. Sing. of those in -vc, sometimes has the ending -a; e. g. evp éa.
xovtov, ivia, véa, instead of cipiv, iySiv, vaiv.

4. The words yéAwe, laughter, idpoc, sweat, and pwc, love, which properly be-
long to the third Dec., in particular Cases in Homer, are declined like the Attic
second Dec.: yéAo and yéAwr, instead of yéAwra, yéAw, instead of yéAwre ;
idpG, idp®, instead of idpdra, idpSrt; épw, instead of épare.

§ 199. | HOMERIC DIALECT.—THIRD DECLENSION. 295

5. Those in -¢¢, Gen. -- doc, especially proper names, often have th2 inflee-
tion - 40 ¢, etc., and in the Dat. always; e. g. wjvioc, OéTL0¢, Oéri.

6. The neuter ov¢, @Téc, ear (§ 39), in Homer has the form otac, otaroc, PL
ovata; the neuters oréap, fat, oi ap, breast, and meipap, issue, have -droc in the
Gen.: oréatoc, ovata, Teipata, weipact. In the neuters répac, xépac and xpéac
(§ 39), the 7 is dropped; e..g. Tépaa, -dwy, -decor; Dat. xépg, Pl. xépa, xepawy,
Kepdecot and képacl; Pl. xpéa, kpedwv, xpeGv and KperOv, Kpéaory.

7. In the words mentioned under § 36, Homer can either retain or omit e, as
the verse may require; e. g. av7p, avépoc and avdpoc, dvéps and dvdpi, ete. (but
only dvdpév, avdpaot and avdpécor); yaorHp, -époc, -épt and yaorpéc, yaorpi,
yaotépa, yactépec ; Anuatnp, -yTépo¢ and -ytpoc, Anunrépa ; Suyatnp, Svyaré-
pog and voyarpos, etc., Yuyatépecot, but Yuyatpév; marip and pArnp, -répo¢
and -7poc, ete.

8. The word iyop, blood of the gods, in the Acc. has iy6, instead of iyépa, and
KuKkeov, 6, mixed drink, in the Acc. has kvkeG or kuKetd.

9. To § 41* belong -av¢,-evc,-ovce. Of ypaic, there occur in Homer only
Nom. yp7ic¢, ypnic, Dat. ypyt, and the Voc. ypyé and ypyi. The word Bote
does not admit contraction, thus: dec, Bac; Dat. Pl. 86-ecc1, see No. 1.

10. § 41. In common nouns in - e%¢ and in the proper name ’Ay/AAcbic, 77 is
used instead of ¢, in all the forms in which v (F} of the stem is dropped; e. g.
Baotheic, Voc. -ev, Dat. Pl. -etot (except dptotjecowy for dpiotet¢), but Baor-
Ajjoc, -Hi, -a, -jec, ~jac (a in the Acc. Sing. and Pl. is short). Among the
proper names, the following are to be specially noticed: ’Odvoceic, ’Odvecihoc
and ’Odvojo¢g and ’Odvocéoc, also ’Odvoceic (contracted), "Odvo7i and ’Odvoei,
’Odvooja and ’Odvocéa, also ’OdveH ; InAetc, UnAjoc and -éoc, -7i and -éi. -Fa;
the others, as ’Atpetc, Tudetic, generally retain ¢, and contract -eo¢ in the Gen.
by synizesis, and sometimes -ea in the Acc. into -7, thus: Tudéoc, -é, -éa and
-f.

11. §42. -n¢and-ec, Gen.-e0¢. The Gen. Sing. remains uncontracted ;
the Nom. Pl. is -ee¢ and -eve; the Gen. Pl. remains uncontracted (except when
the ending -ewy is preceded by a vowel, in which case contraction takes place;
e. g. CaypyGv from Caypyéwv, which is from Caypyie, impetuous), also the Acc.
Pl.-eac¢. "Apne is thus declined: “Apyog and -zoc, Dat. *Apyi, “Apy, “Apel, Acc.
"Apn and *Apyv; Voc. "Apec and “Apec.

12. § 42. Proper names in -« 4% c¢ contract ce into 7; e. g. ‘Hpakaéne, -KAgjoe,
jt, a, Voc. “Hpakrerc ; but adjectives in -éy¢, have both ee and 7; e.g.
axienc, akAneic, dyakajoc, but éixAeiac (Acc. Pl.) from éixAenqe, édppeqc, Gen.
éippeioc from 2ippejc. So the forms duckAéd, trepdéc, instead of -eéa, occur.

18. §48. -a@c¢, Gen.-woc¢. In Homer the contracted forms 7p Dat., and
Mivo Acc., occur. Of the words in -d¢ and -w, Gen. -éoc, only ype and its
compounds, are uncontracted: ypodc, ypot, ypda.

14. § 44. (a)-ac, Gen.-aoc; the Dat. Sing. is uncontracted or contracted,
according to the necessities of the verse; e. g. y7pat and y7p¢. But the Nom.
and Acc. Pl., are always contracted; e. g. déta.—(b) -o¢, Gen. -e0¢; accord-
ing to the necessities of the verse, both the uncontracted and contracted forms

* These numbers refer to the sections in the first part of the Grammar.—TR.

296

HOMERIC DIALECT.—ANOMALOUS WORDS. [$ 200.

are used, (except in the Gen. Pl., which always remains uncontracted, also in
the Gen. Sing., except in some substantives, which contract -e0¢ into -eve ; e. g.
’EpéBevc, Gepoeve,) Dat. Sépet and éper, KaAAet and KaAder; Nom. and Aca
plurals in -ea, commonly remain uncontracted, but must be pronounced with
synizesis; e. g. veikea, BéAea.—In oréoc, KAéog, déoc, ypéoc, € is sometimes
lengthened into €, sometimes into 7, thus: Gen. ovelove, Dat. onl, Acc. oméog

and

oreloc, Gen. Pl. omeiwy, Dual onéoot and omyjecot; ypéoc and xpeioc;

KAéa and KAcia.
15. § 45. -Z2¢, Gen.-toc;.-i¢, Gen.-toc. The Dat. Sing. is contracted;

e. g.

Gilvi, tAnSvi, véxve; the Acc. Pl. as the verse may require, is sometimes

uncontracted, sometimes, and indeed more commonly, contracted; e. g. ivdic,
instead of iy@iac, dpi¢; the Nom. Pl. never suffers contraction, but is pro-
nounced with synizesis; e. g. iy0ve¢ (dissyllable). The Dat. Pl. ends in -tace

and

-becor (dissyllable); e. g. iyStoowv and ixvvecou.

16. § 46. -ic¢ and -i, Gen.-Zoc (Att. -ewc); -i¢ and -%, Gen. -ioc¢ (Att.
-ewc). (a) Words in -¢¢ retain the ¢ of the stem through all the Cases, and
are always contracted in the Dat. Sing., and sometimes in the Acc. Pl., e. g.
TOALC, -Log, -l, Pl. -tec, -twv, -tot, -tag and -ic. The Dat. Sing. has also the
endings -ei and -ec; e. g. wécei and récei, from 76org ; in some words the ¢ of
the stem is changed into ¢ in other Cases also; e. g. émaAfere (Acc.), éwaace-

OLV,
into

especially in w6A:¢, which, moreover, as the verse requires, can lengthen ¢
7, thus: Gen. réAioc, réAe0¢ and 76Anoc, ete., and in dic, ovis, Dat. Pl

éiecowv, olectv, deotv.—(b) Words in -t¢, which in the Attic Gen. end in -ewc,
have -eoc, and in the Dat. Sing. both the uncontracted and contracted forms,

e. g.

ebpéi, wHYEL, TAaTel ; in the other Cases, the uncontracted forms are com-

monly used, though these are generally to be pronounced with synizesis.

§ 200. Anomalous Words (Comp. § 47).

1. Tévv (170, knee) and 06 6p v (70, spear):
Sing. | yobvarog and youvés dotparo¢ and dovpéc, doipare and dovpi
PIN. | yotvara and yotva dotpara and dotpa; Dual dotpe
G. | yobver dotpwr

2.

D. | yobvac: (-cor) and yotvecot dotpact and dovpecot.

K apa (70, head).

Sing. N. xapy Gen. Kkapnrog Kapnaroc Kpato¢ Kpaaro¢g

3.

4.

Dat. Kapnr7e Kapnare Kpatt kKpaate
Acc. xapn (kpata, Masc., Od. 8, 92).
Plur. N. apa kapyata (and Kkapyva)
G. Kparov : ( “ Kapyver)
D. xpaci
A. Kpaata ( “ Kapnva).
Naidc (7, ship):
Sing. N. vni¢ Plur. vec and véec
G. vnéc and vedc vy@yv and vedv
D. vii au VHVOL, VHECOL, VEETCL
A. v7a and véa vyac and véac.

Xetp (7, hand), Dat. xepi, Ace. yépa, Dat. Pl. yeipeocy and yelpecar.

~

4

§§ 201—203.] HOMERIC DIALECT.—ADJECTIVES.—PRONOUNS. 297

§ 201. Adjectives.

1. The adjectives Sai¢ and oxic have sometimes the feminine form -éa
or -én: Baténc, Badénv, Okéa. Some adjectives in -i¢ are also of common
gender; e. g. “Hpn dave éoica, n0v¢ diTp7.

2. Adjectives in -7¢1¢, -7 e004, -7% «ev often occur in the contracted form:
-7C, -HOOd, -7v; e.g. TiyuAc; those in -delc, -de00a, -dev contract oe
into ev; e.g. media AwredvyTa.

3. ILoAa¢ (§ 48) is thus inflected:

Nom. Sing. woAi¢ and rovaic; wodb; and w0AAbc, zoAA6v; Gen. roAéog;
Ace. roAty and rovAtv;—Nom. Pl. wodéec and zoreic; Gen. rohéav;
Dat. 7oAéo1, toAécot and Twodéecor; Acc. ToAéac and Todeic.

§ 202. Comparison.

1. The endings -7epo¢ and -Graro¢ are sometimes used, although the vowel
of the preceding syllable is long [comp. § 50, I. (a)]; e. g. 6iGipataroc, Kaxoger-
vetepoc. Adjectives in -t¢ and -poc, have the Comparative in -iwy and -zorToe,
though sometimes also the regular form; e.g. yAvkic, yAvkiwy; Batic, Ba-
BioTo¢ ; OixTpog olkTLoTo¢ and oiKTpdTaToc.

2. Anomalous forms (§ 52).
ayatoc, Com. dpciwv, Awiwv and Awitepoc, Sup. Kaptioroc¢
KaKkoc, Com. Kakdrepoc, yelpoTepoc, YEepeiwy, yepeLoTepoc, Sup. 7KLoTOG
dAtyoc, Com. dAifuv ;—fnidtoc, Com. pyiztepoc, Sup. pyioro¢g and pntrarog
Bpadvc, Com. Bpacowrv, Sup. Bapdtotoc ;—uakpo¢, Com. paccwv
raxvc, Com. zaccur.

§ 203. Pronouns.

1. Sing. Nom. eva, before a vowel, éyav | ob, tivy

Gen. éuéo, éuev, wed (ev) oé0, ced (cev) Eo, ev (eb)
Eueto, éuedev ceio, céS ev, TEOLO | ELo, EGev
Dat. | éuoi, yor GOt, TOL, TElv éol, of (oi)
Ace. | éué, me oé (ce) ée, € (é), pv
Dual Nom. | véi oddiv, obi, 060
G. and D. | viv coGiv, cbGv odutv (odwiv)
Ace. | vi and v6 o¢Gi and od@ ~—=| odwé (odwe)
Plur. Nom. netic, ayes dusic, tupec
Gen. | 7éor, HuEiov bpéwv, dueinv | odéwv (odewr), ogGv
(cdr), odeiwv
Dat. | 7uiv, jyiv, dups(v) bptv, bype(v) adiot(v) [odsox(v)],
o9i(v) [76u(»)]
Ace. | 7uéac, juac, Gupe ipéac, duue odéac (odeac), odae¢
Le (odac), ode.

2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns éuavtot, ceavTod, ete,
never occur in Homer; instead of them, he uses the personal pronouns, and
the pronoun avré¢ separately; e. g. fu’ abrov, éuol aitG, éued avt7e, — adrHy,
ol abri.

3. Possessive pronouns: Teéc, -7, -6v, instead of cdc; é0¢, -7, -dv and be, 7,

298 HOMERIC DIALECT.—NUMERALS.—VERBS. [§§ 204, 205.

bv, suus, -a,-um; auc, -7, -dv, instead of juéTepoc ; vettepoc, -d, -ov, of us both,
tube, -#, -6v, instead of tuérepoc ; opelrEeNs, -d, -ov, of you both; oddc, -7, -Ov,
instead of o¢érepoc.

4. Demonstrative pronouns: roio and red, instead of Tod; Tot and tai, in-
stead of of and ai; tawy, instead of THv; Toior, instead of Toi¢; Taior, THOL
and T7¢, instead of tai¢ ;—00e Dat. Pl. roicdeot and troicdecot, instead of roicde.

5. Relative pronouns: 6, instead of é¢; of0, dov instead of ov, éy¢ instead
of 77¢, #ot and 7 instead of aic.

6. Indefinite and intcrrogative pronouns: (a) Gen. téo0, Ted, instead of Tivde ;
Dat. 7é, TO, instead of rivi; Pl. doca, instead of teva; Gen. réwrv, instead of
tivav; Dat. Téolot, instead of tect ;—(b) Gen. Té0, Ted, instead of Tivoc.

(c) dereg: Sing. Nom. é7v¢, Neut. 672, 6771 Plur. 6tiva -
Gen. 6rev, 6te0, 6TTEO, 6TTEV OTEWV
Dat. é7&0, 6T@ OTéOLOL
Ace. é7iva, Neut. 671, 677 étivac, Gtiva and dooa.

§ 204. Vumerals.

The collateral form of pia is ia, ing, in, av, and of évi, the form i6. Ado,
déw are indeclinable; collateral forms of these are dol, doroi, dovai, dora, ete.
Tliovupec, -a, instead of téooapec, -a. Avédexa and dvoxaidexa and dadexa.
’"Reikoot, instead of elxoot. ’Oyddxovra and évygKovta, instead of dyde7x.,
évevnk. "EvvedytAot and dexaytAor, instead of évvaxicyidsot and pipiot. The
endings -dxovra and -akéo1oc become -7KovTa, -7Kdov0t. Ordinals: tpitatog,
tétpatoc, EBdduaToc, dyddaTog, évatog and elvaroc.

THe VERB.

§ 205. dugment.—Reduplication.

1. The augment is prefixed or omitted, as the verse requires; e. g. Atoe, Jé-
cav, 6pato, éAe. In the Perf. the temporal augment is omitted only in single
words; e. g. dvwya.

2. Words which have the digamma, always take the syllabic augment; e. g.
évdave, éddov; eidouat, éevodunv, and also in the Part. éecoduevoc. ‘The e
seems to be lengthened on account of the verse, in elocxvia and evade (éF ade
from dvdavo).

8. The verbs oivoyoéw and dvdava, take the syllabic and temporal augment
at the same time, viz. €wvoyder, yet more frequently voy., éjvdave and jvdave.

4. The reduplication of p occurs in pepuvtwpyévoc from putdw, to make foul.
On the contrary, the Perfects éuuopa from peipouat, and éoovuat from seta,
are formed according to the analogy of verbs beginning with p.—Krdaoyat makes
éxtnpac in the Perf.

5. The second Aor. Act. and Mid. also, frequently takes the reduplication,
this remains through all the modes, also in the Inf. and Part. The simple aug-
ment ¢ is but seldom prefixed to this in the Ind.; thus, e. g. xauve, to become
weary, second Aor. Subj. Kexauo; KéAouat, to command, éxexdouny; Aayxavo,

§ 206.1} HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. 299

to obtain, AéAaxor ; AauBava, to receive, AeAapécGar; dpalu, to say, wéppadov,
éréppadov.

6. The following are examples of, the Homeric Perfects with the Attic redu-
plication (§ 89); e. g. dAdgouat, to wander, d2-dAnua; "AXQ (dnaxilw), to grieve,
aK-HYEual, dk-aynuat; épeitu, to demolish, tp-épimto; épilw, to contend, ép-7npis-
peat. |

7. Homeric Aorists with the Attic reduplication (§ 89, Rem.): dAé&w, to ward
off, 7A-aAKov, dA-aAxeiv, GAadKav ; év-inta, to chide, év-évirov ; bp-vupt, to ex
cite, ®p-ope ; and with the reduplication in the middle: épixw, to restrain, npr=
«a-kov, Inf. épveaxéery and évintu, qvi-ra-rev.

§ 206. Personal-endings and Mode-vowels.

1. First Pers. Sing. Act. Several subjunctives have the ending -w; e.g.
KTetvopt, instead of KTeiva, éVéroput, Owl, TIYopL, ikoul, Gyayoue.

2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. The ending -oda (§§ 137 and 143), occurs in
the second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -y; e. g. TiGyoda, didoicda; also fre-
quently in the Subj. of other verbs; e. g. évéAnoa, eimyoa, more seldom in
the Opt.; e. g. KAaiow8a, BadooFa.

8. Third Pers. Sing. Act. ‘The Subj. sometimes has the ending -o1(v); e. g.
EVEAgol(v), dygot. GAaAKgot, Odnot (instead of 06), ueSigor; the Opt. only in
Tapagpeainct.

4, Personal-endings of the Plup. Active:

First Pers. Sing.-ea (so always); e. g. mewoivea, éredqrea, dea, in
stead of éreroi¥erv, ete.

Second “ “ -eac¢; e.g. ére0nreac, instead of éredArex¢
Third “ “« -ee(v); e.g. éyeyovee, Katahedoinee, 2BeBpOxeev.

Rem. 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in ev, and also the same Pers. of
the Impf. in ez, occurs in Homer before a vowel, with v édeAnvorixov; éorr-
kelv, BeBAjneryv, joxewv, Impf. from doxéw. Comp. § 1438.

5. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses, Act. and Mid.,
are sometimes exchanged for each other: -trov and -oto v, instead of -Ty»r
and -obnv; e. g. dtaxetov, SupyoceoVor, instead of diaxéTyv, Sopnocéacd gv.

6. The second Pers. Sing. Mid. appears either in the uncontracted form, -eaz,
-Nal, -£0, -00; e.g. Aeimeal, AtAaieal, adixna, éptocea, éexaipyat, brehicao,
éyeivao, or in the contracted form -7 (from -eaz, -yat), -ev (from -e0), -@
(from -ao); e. g. ddixy, éxev, épyev, éxpéuw. The endings -eeac and -ceo are
also lengthened into -¢az and - eo, or one € is dropped; e. g. uudetac, vetat,
Epelo, oreio ;—vvéat (instead of pvdéeat), mwdAéat, Exdeo, étoAco.—In the
Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass.,o is sometimes dropped, viz. wéuvar (and uéurvg,
formed from péuve-c-at), BEBAnaL, Ecovo.

7. The first Pers. Dual and Pl. Mid. ends in -ueoSov and -ueVor, -ueoda
and -veta; e. g. dpaloueoda and -peda.

8. The third Pers. Pl. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., and Opt. Mid. has
the ending -ata, -aro, instead of -vrat, -vT0; e. g. dxnyéatat, TedoBHaTo,
éoradato, tetpadarat, dpnoaiato, yevoiaro.

500 HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. [§ 207.

9. The third Pers. Pl. Aor. Pass. has the ending - ev (instead of -7cav); e.g.
Tpagev, instead of érpadycar.

10. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. © and 7, are frequently shorten-
ed into e and o, as the verse may require; e. g. ‘over, instead of topyev, orpé-
gerat, instead of orpégyrat.

11. The Inf. Act. has the endings -éwevat,-éwev and -ecv (« being the
mode-yowel and -evas the ending) ; e.g. TunTévevar, TUNTEWEV, TUTTELY ; Verbs
in -Gw and -éw have -#uevae (the 7 arising from the contraction of the mode-
vowel ¢ and the final vowel of the stem); e. g. yo7pevat (yoaw), dtAjpevar (ot-
2é); with the ending -7ueva, that of the Pass. Aorists corresponds; e. g. TU-
whwevat, instead of tut#vat. In the Pres. of verbs in -, the endings -wevae
and -vev are appended immediately to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in
the second Aor. to the pure stem; e. g. Ti0é-pwevar, Tu0é-pev ; ioTa-pevar; du-
dé-pevar; derkvd-yevar; Sé-uev, 66-vevar; there is an exception in the case of
the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs in @ and v, which, as in the Ind., retain the
long vowel; e. g. oT7-wevat, 0b-pevar.

12. The Impf. and Aor. Ind. take the endings -cxor, -ec, -e(v), in the Mid.
-oKounv, -ov (-c0, -ev), -eT0, when a repeated action is to be denoted; hence this
is called the Jierative form; it regularly omits the augment; e. g. dlveb-e-oxor,
Book-é-oKovto, vikd-oKouev, Kad€é-e-oke, éXGo-a-oKev, 00-GKE, OU-CKE, OTA-OKE.

Rem. 2. In verbs in -w, the mode-vowel of the Ind. is used before these end-
ings; in those in -&w, -deoxov is abridged into -@oxo0¥v, which as the verse
may require, can be lengthened into -d@acxov; e. g. vateTaackov; those in -éo
have -éeoxov, seldom -eckoy (e.g. kahéoxeTo), also -eleokor (e. g. vet-
kelecxov) ; in verbs in -uz the mode-vowel is omitted.

§ 207. Contraction and Resolutionin Verbs.

1. A. Verbs in-aw. In these, the uncontracted form occurs only in single
words and forms; e. g. wépaov, xateoxiaov; always in tAdw and those verbs
which have a long a for their characteristic; e. g. dewdwr, mervdwr, éypae (from
zou-w, to attack). In some verbs, a is changed into e, viz. wevoiveoy, from pe-
volvaw, 7v7E0V, from avTaiw, dudKxAeov, from éuoKAdw.

2. Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, there is a resolution of
the contracted syllable, by a similar vowel, d (z) being resolved into da (da)
or Gd (da), and ® into ow or ww; e. g. dpaacvat (instead of dpdoPat); uevor-
vag (instead of wevocvd); dpdw (instead of 6p); dpawou (instead of dpdor).

Rem4rkK. In the Dual-forms, xpocavdjrny, ovAgrny, ovvavtarny, doitArgy
(from verbs in -dw), ae is contracted into 7, and in éuaprqrny and aneAnrny
(from verbs in -éw), e€ is contracted into 7, instead of into ez.

3. When v7 comes after a contracted syllable, the short vowel may follow
such contracted syllable; e. g. 7G@orro, instead of 7Gdvra, yeAdovrec; in the
Opt. also, the protracted w 01, instead of » is found in 7@douut, instead of #84-
ou (= 78Gput).

4. B. Verbs in-é. Contraction does not take place in all the forms in
which ¢ is followed by the vowels o, , 7, 7, 0c and ov; e. g. biAéwuer, plAéorut,
etc.; yet such forms must commonly be pronounced with synizesis. In others,

§ 208. | HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. 301

contraction is omitted or takes place, as the verse may require; e€. g. giAéet,
épéw, oTpuvéovoa; aipeiunv, yévev. Sometimes é is lengthened into «2; e¢. g.
éTedeteTo, utyein (instead of uty7, second Aor. Pass.).

5. C. Verbs in -6., These follow either the common rules of contraction,
e. g. yovvodual, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into w, so that the
forms of verbs in -dw resemble those of verbs in -dw; e. g. idpdovrat, idpdovaa,
imvoovrac (comp. 7f@ovTa); or they become wholly analogous to verbs in -dw,
since they resolve -ovox (third Pers. Pl. Pres.) into -6 014, -oivTo into -édwvro,
-olev into -dmev; e.g. (dpd-ovel) dpodor dpduce (comp. dpdwar) ; (dyidovTo)
dniobyto Oni6wvTo (comp. dpowvTo); (Onidavev) dSniciev dniéwev (comp.
Opdwer).

§ 208. Formation of the Tenses.

1. The Attic Fut. (§ 83) occurs in verbs in -i{w; e. g. kreptodct. In verbs
in -éw, the ending -é is often used instead of -éow; e. g. Kopéecc, instead of
kopécetc, waxéovTat, instead of wayéoovrac; in verbs in -aw, after dropping o, a
corresponding short vowel is placed before the vowel formed by contraction ;
e. g. dvTLOw, éAdwot, dauaa; of verbs in -vw, épvover and Tartovex occur.

2. The following liquid verbs form the Fut. and first Aor. with the ending
-owand-oa: keipu, to shear off (Képcat), KéAAw, to land (kéAoat), eiAw, to press
(éAcaz), ipa, to fall upon (Kkipow), *APQ (dpapicKw), to fit (dpcar), dp-vupe (6p-
ow, apoa), to excite, dtagdeipw, to destroy (dvagdépoat), dipa, to mix (dbpcw).

8. The following verbs form the Fut. without the tense-characteristic o: Béo-
pat or Betowac (second Pers. Béy), I shall live, éjw, I shall find, xeiw or xéw, I
shall lie down.

4. The following form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic ¢: yéw,
to pour out, Exeva; cevw, to put in motion, Ecceva; GAéowat and dAetoyat, to
avoid, jAEbaTo, Gdevauevoc, ahéaoVat; Kaiw, to burn, éxna and éxera.

5. The endings of the second Aor. are sometimes exchanged with those of
the first Aor.: Paiva, to go, EByceT0, Imp. Bice; dvouat, to plunge into, édiceto,
Imp. dtvceo, Part. dvoduevoc; dyw, to lead, dgete, akéuev; ixvéowar, to come,
ifov ; éhéyunv, I laid myself down to sleep, Imp. A€f0, A€Eeo ; Spvvpt, to incite,
Imp. dpceo(ev) ; dépw, to bear, oice,.oicéuevat ; deidw, to sing, Imp. deiceo.

6. In the first Aor. Pass. of some verbs, v is prefixed before the ending -¢nv,
as the verse may require, viz. dcaxpivdqte, KpivGeic, éxAivdn (§ 111, 6), idpiv-
Env (from idptw), durvivdy (from wvéw).

7. Several second Aorists, in order to make a dactyl, are formed by a trans-
position (metathesis) of the consonants; e. g. édpaxov, instead of édapxov (from
dépkopat), éxpavov (from tépSw), édpator (from dapSarvw), 7u8poror, instead
of juaprov (from aduaptavw). In like manner, on account of the metre, a vowel
of the stem is dropped; e. g. dypouevoc, from dyepounv (dyeipu, to assemble) ; éy-
peo, from éyepouny (éyeipw, to awaken) ; négvov, éxedvov (®ENQ, to put to death).

8. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs as
assume e ({ 124) in forming the tenses, or are subject to metathesis; e. g. yaipw
kexapnka (from XAIPEQ); 8a2A0 BéBAnxa (from BAA-). Besides these, he
forms only second Perfects; but even in pure verbs and in the impure verbs
just mentioned, he rejects the « in single persons and modes, and regularly in

26

302 HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. [§§ 209, 210.

the Part.; thus these forms become analogous to those of the second Per?.; e. g.
Kekunog, from kaurve; Kexapnos, from xaipo, BeBdec, from Paiva (BA).

§ 209. Conjugation tn -pe.

1. Even in Homer, the forms of -é# and -d (§ 180, Rem. 3) occur in the
second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf.; e. g. érivet, didotc, d:dot.— Also
a reduplicated Fut. of didwue occurs: dtdacouev and diddce.

2. Verbs in -vuz form an Opt. both in the Act. and Mid.; e. g. éxddpev (in-
stead of éxdvinuev), from éxdvw, db7 (instead of guin), from ‘Go dawvdTo; so
also ¢8i0, ¢8ito, Opt. of éoViuny, from ¢0io.

3. The third Pers. Pl. Impf. and second Aor. in -e-cav, -7-pav, -0-cav, -W-oar,
-v-cav, is shortened into -ev, -dy, -ov, -iv; e. g. évidev, instead of érivecar,
ESev, instead of &tecav; é~ordv, instead of éoryoay; *didov, instead of édido-
cav; édov, instead of édocav ; éddv, instead of épdcar.

4. In the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. and second Aor. Mid., Homer rejects
o, and uses the uncontracted form; e. g. daivvo (instead of daivuco), wapvao,
gao, civbeo, évdeo.

5. The short stem-vowel is lengthened before the personal-endings beginning
with and v, as the verse may require; e. g. TeSjuevoc, dudodvas (instead of
6id6vat), didwSt, iAnSu.

6. In the second Aor. Subj., the following forms are used, as the verse may
require :

contracted : resolved and lengthened forms:
Sing. 1. o7@ oTéW, oTeiW
2. OTN oThIC
3. OTF oth, uBan, on%, ouTy
Dual = or zon TAPOTHETOV
Plur. 1. or@pev oTéwper, OTELOMED, KaraBeiouer
2. OTHTE OTHETE
8. ordot(v) orTéwor(v), TEploTHwot(v)
Sing. 1. 3a Géw, Seiv, dapeto
2. Bic Sénc, Tine, Feinc
3. On Sén, Sn, ava; pedvein
Dual SHTov Selerov
Plur. 1. dauev ‘Séwuev, Selouev
2. Onre Oapetete
8. Fadou(v) Séwo(v), Feiwor(v)
Sing. 3. 06 ddnot(v), don
Plur. 1. déuev ddomev
8. dGor(v) ddwot(v).

Remark. Instead of goryjcav (Aor. I.), the shortened form éordoav occurs,
and instead of éo7dre (Perf.), the lengthened form go77Te.

§ 210. Eiué (ES-), to be.

Pres. Ind. | 2. éoov. Pl. 1. eiwév. 3. Edou(v)
Subj. | 1. peteio. 3. &p, Enor(v), Hou(r), sig. Pl. 3. Ewou(v)
Imp. | 2. 2000. Inf. Eupevar, Eueva, éuev. Part. ov, Eodoa.
Impf. Ind. | 1. éa, ha, Zov, €oxov. 2. énoSa. 3. énv, Hev, 7nv. Dual 8. Rorgy.
Pl. 3. sav, eiaro (instead of 7vT0, from 7nunv).—Opt. 2. Eore.
3. éot. PL ahelre Brerev:
Fat. Ind. | !. écoua: (2ocouar), ete. 3. éoerac and écetrat.

§§ 211, 212.] HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. 303

§ 211. Eipe (I-), to go.
Pres. Ind. | 2. eioba. Subj. 2. igoda. Inf. ivevas, iver.
Impf. Ind. | 1. 7ia, jiov. 2. tec. 38. ge, te(v). PL 1. gowev. 8. gicav, Foar,
jiov, toav.—Opt. Lot, iein. ;
Fut. Ind. } 1. etcowat: Aor. Ind. 3. eicaro and éeicato.. Dual 3. zecodoGnv.

VERBS IN -@, WHICH IN THE SECOND Aor. Act. AND Mip., 1N THE PERF.
AND Prior. Act., AND Pres. AND Impr., FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF VEEBS
IN -[l.

§ 212. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. (Comp. § 142).

A. The Characteristic is a Vowel: a, €, 4, 0, v.

BG2.2.0, to throw, second Aor. Act. (BAA-, EGAnv) EvuBAgrnr, Inf. EvuBAjpevae
(instead of -7va); second Aor. Mid. (&BAjunv) éBAnto, Siu82nvto, Subj.
SbuBaAnra, BAnetar, Opt. Preto (from BAE-), Inf. GAjoGa, Part. BAjpevoc.
Hence the Fut. GAjoouac.

yupaw or ynpacka, to grow old, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Sing. éy7pd, Part.
ynpas.

kreive, to kill, second Aor. Act. éxrav, Pl. éxrdyev, third Pers. Pl. xray, Subj.
Pl. xtéwpev, Inf. crauevat, xtauev, Part. crac; second Aor. Mid. with pas-
sive sense, dvéxtTaTo, kTacVal, KTapevoc.

oitaa, to wound, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Sing. otra, Inf. obtéyevar, obra.
pev ; second Aor. Mid. oirapevoc, wounded.

mehalw, to approach, second Aor. Mid. éxAjunv, rARTo, TARYTO.

rAgta (riurAnuc), to fill, second Aor. Mid. éxAyjro, Opt. tAeiunv (from TAE-),
Imp. 7Ajoo.

mtnoow, to shrink with fear, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Dual cataxrarny.

oSavw, to anticipate, second Aor. Mid. ¢3duevoc.

Remark. From £7» come the forms arnv (third Pers. Dual), and irép-
Bacav (third Pers. Pl.), with a short stem-vowel.

AAQ, Epic stem of d:daoxw, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) 20anv, I learned
Subj. daeiw, Inf. dajuevac.

¢Si-vw, to destroy and vanish, second Aor. Mid. é¢3iunv, Opt. d8iuny, o8iro,
Imp. $ico, Inf. ¢8ioda:, Part. oivevoc.

BiBpackw, to eat, second Aor. Act. é8pwv.

TAO, to swim, second Aor. Act. érAwv, Part. tAéc, Gen. -GvToc.

Kb, to hear, second Aor. Act. Imp. cate, KAdTE, KéexATG1, KEKATTE.

Ad, to loose, second Aor. Mid. 2iT0, Abvro. :

mvéw, to breathe, second Aor. Mid. (IINY-) dumo7o, instead of dvérviro, he
took breath.

cebw, to put in motion, second Aor. Mid. éoctyuny, I strove, éoovo, cio.

xéw, to pour, second Aor. Mid. yivro, yipevoc.

B. The Characteristic is a Consonant.
GAdopuat, to leap, second Aor. Mid. ddaco, dAro, émaApevoc, excddpevoc, Subj.
GAnrat.
dpapickw (’APQ), to fit, second Aor. Mid. dpuevoe, fitted to.
yév70, to seize, arising from FéAro (from éAeiv, second Aor. of aipéw).

304 HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. [§$ 2138, 214.

déyouat, to take, second Aor. Mid. ééexro, Imp. défo, Inf. déySaz ; the first Pers.
édéyunv and the Part. déyuevoc, like the Perf. dédeypatz, signify to expect.

éXeAilw, to whirl, second Aor. Mid. éAéAux7o.

ixvéopaz, to come, second Aor. Mid. ixto, ixwevog and ixpevoe, favorable.

Aéyouat, to lie down, select, to count over, second Aor. Mid. éAéyuny, éAexto, AéxTo.

paiva, to soil, wavy (third Pers. Dual, instead of éusav-o0 qv).

Liyvout, to mix, second Aor. Mid. pixro.

dpvigt, to excite, second Aor. Mid. pro, Imp. épco, dpaeo, Inf. épdat, Part. dp-
LEvoC.

madd, to brandish, hurl, second Aor. Mid. #a@Ar7o, he sprang.

mépSw, to destroy, second Aor. Mid. rép0atz, instead of rép0-cbar.

mhyvipt, to make firm, to fix, second Aor. Mid. 77xT0, KatémyKto.

§ 213. (2) Perf. and Plup. Active.

(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel.

yiyvopat, to become, Perf. Pl. yéyduev, -ate, -adou(v), Inf. yeyauer, Part. yeyaoe ;
Plup. éxyeyarny.

Baive, to go, Perf. Pl. GéSauer, etc.; Plup. éGacav.

deidw, to fear, Inf. decdiwev, instead of decdvévar, Imp. deiduSs, deidtre; Plup.
édeidipev, édeidtoay.

Epxopuat, to come, eiAnrovbpev.

Svjokw, to die, Perf. PL. réSvauev, treSvdor, Imp. réSvati, Inf. reSvapuer and
Tredvaueval, Part. redvyac, -GTo¢, TeSveGTL; Plup. Opt. redvainv.

TAAAQ, to dare, Perf. Pl. rérAauev, Imp. tétAadi, Inf. rerAduev, Part. teTAqoc.

MAQ, to desire, Perf. Pl. uéuarov, -duev, -Gte, -ddor, Imp. ueuéto, Part. wepade,
-OTo¢ and -dTo¢; Plup. uévacar.

(b) The Stem ends in a Consonant.

PRELIMINARY Remarx. The 7 of the inflection-ending, when it comes im-

mediately after the stem-consonant, is changed into ¥, in some Perfects.

aveya, to command, aveypev, Imp. dvoxydt, avoxSu, avoxte.

éypnyopa, I awoke (from éyeipw, I awaken), Imp. éypyyop%e, Inf. éypyyopSar ;
hence éypyyopact, instead of éypyyépact.

mérowdta, I trust (from reid, to persuade), Plup. éxéxedpev.

oida, I know (from ’EIAQ, video), iduev, instead of topvev, Inf. téuevac.

éoixa, I am like (from ’EIKQ), second and third Pers. Dual écxrov ; third Pers
Plup. Dual éixtyv; hence, Perf. Mid. or Pass. éx7o.

Tacxo, to suffer, Perf. réxooVe, instead of merdzr Fare.

§ 214. (8) Present and Imperfect.
aviw, to accomplish, Opt. Impf. dvito(d).
Tavo0w, to expand, to stretch, Tavitat (instead of ravierat).
épiw and eipvw, to draw, eiptarat, instead of elpvrtat, Inf. EovoSa, eipvodat,
in the sense of to protect, to guard.
&dw, to eat, Inf. éduevar.
gépw, to bear, Imp. pépre, instead of dépere.

I. GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY,

WHICH ALSO

CONTAINS ALL THE ANOMALOUS VERBS AND ANOMALOUS
FORMS MENTIONED IN TREATING OF THE VERB.

The numbers 1, 2, 3, after an adjective, denote that it has one, two or three end-
ings.— Other numbers placed after a definition, denote the page, where the word
is more fully defined——Abbreviations: w. a., with the Accusative; w. d., with
the Dative; w. g., with the Genitive; Char., Characteristic—The numerals and
prepositions are not inserted here; the definitions of these may be found in the
sections where they are treated.

A.
*ABiwtoc 2, insupportable.
aBAG8eva, innocence, 88.
ayavov, advantage, 27.
ayatéc 3, good.
ayaAdw, to adorn, 56.
dyadua, 76, statue.
Gyapuat, to wonder |§ 135,

p- 165].
’"Ayapéuvov, -ovoc, 4,
Agamemnon.
ayav, too much, 36.
dyavaxtéw, to be dis-

pleased, 147.
ayaraw, to love; w. d., to
be contented with.
ayyenia, 7, message, 138.
ayyédiw, to announce.
Gyyeroc, 6, messenger.
aye, age, come now.
ayeipw, to collect [Perf.,
§ 89, (b)].
ayéAn, 7, herd, 36.
dyevvi¢, -é¢, ignoble.
dynpws, -ov, not growing
old, 31.
dyktotpov, 76, hook.

ayvouut, to break [§ 140, 1].

ayopa, 7, market-place.

ayopaioc, 6, trafficker.

ayopebw, to say.

aypevo, te catch.

aypoc, 6, a field.

ayxivove 2, shrewd.

ayw, to lead, 23 [ Aor., § 89,
Rem.; Perf: 7ya, Perf.
Mid. or Pass. #ypat].

ayav, -Ovoc, 6, contest.

adanuwv, -ov, inexperi-
enced, 112.

adergy, 4, sister.

adeAgoxtovoc, 6, murder-
er of a brother.

adeAdéc, 6, brother.

adndog 2, uncertain, 29.

donc, -ov, 6, the lower
world.

adkéw,to do wrong to, 109.

adtkia, 7, injustice.

adtkog 2, unjust.

adoAécyne, -ov, 6, prater.

adodecxia, prating, 22.

advvaréw, to be unable.

ddbvarog 2, impossible.

26*

dow, to sing, 34.

aet, always.

Getkne, -éc, unseemly, 108.

deToc, 6, eagle.

an Shc, -éc, unpleasant, 171.

andiouat, to be disgnsted
with [§ 87, 1].

a7np, -époe, 6, air.

avavaroc 2, immortal.

aSéatoc, not to be seen.

"ASHvat, -Ov, ai, Athens

adAnric, -od, 6, wrestler.

a&A10¢, troublesome, 161.

aS Aiwc, miserably, 106.

aShov, T6, prize, 37.

atvuuéo, to be dispirited,
107.

*Aduc, -w, 6, Athos.

aiafo, to groan [Char,
§ 105, 2].

Aiaxéc, 6, Aeacns.

aidéouat, to reverence, 109

aidac, 4%, shame, 47.

Alyurtoe, 7, Egypt.

aidnp, 7, ether, 36.

aiSpia, 7, pure air.

aia, -aToc, TO, blood.

306

aivéw, to prise [§ 98, (b),
pelt,
aig, -yéc, 7, goat.
aioeTo¢ 3, chosen, 56.
aipéw, to take [§ 126, 1].
aipw, to raise.
aicSavouat, to perceive,
100 [§ 121, (a), 1].
aicypéc 8, disgraceful.
aicypGc, disgracefully.
aicyive, to shame, 131.
Alowy, -ovoc, 0, Aesou.
aitéw TLva TL, to ask.
Airvy, 7, Aetna.
aixuadwroc, captured.
aia, quickly.
aidy, 0, age, 34.
&xéouat, to heal [§ 98, (b)].
akiwaKnc, -ov, 0, a Per-
sian sword.
axuala, to be at the prime.
aku, point, 106.
aKkoAdcTas, adv., with im-
punity, 175.
éxodovéw, to follow, 1#2.
dkovw, to hear [Pf., § 89,
(b); Fut. cxotcoua ;
Pass. with o, § 95].
axpa, 7, summit, 90.
axpaTne, -é¢, immoderate,
46.
axpGroc, unmixed.
axpodouat,to hear [§96, 3].
aKpoarne, -ov, 6, auditor.
axporoAcc, -ewe, 7, citadel.
akpoc 3, highest.

axtic, -ivoc, 7, beam, ray.
aKOv, -ovoa, -ov, unwilling.

Giaralo, to shout [§ 105,
2}.

éAa6w, to make blind.

GAyewvoc 3, painful.

aAyéw, to feel pain.

dhyoc, -ov¢e, TO, pain.

GAcidw, to anoint [Pf,
§ 89, (b)].

aAexrpvar, -dvoc, 6, acock.

*A2éEavdpoc, 6, Alexander.

aréEw, to ward off [§ 125,
Lt:

aiéw, to grind [§ 98, (b),
p. 111].

GAnSe.a, 7, truth.

aAytevw, to speak the
truth.

akndne, -éc, true.

aAndivoc 8, true.

adntac, truly, 163.

aA.c, enough.

adhickouat, to be taken
[§ 122, 1].

a2XKn, 7, strength.

’"AAKiBiadge, -ov, 6, Alci-
biades.

dAKiwog 3, strong.

GARG, but.

G2AniAwY, of one another

[§ 58].

GAAoSev, from another
place.

aGAdoc, -n, -0, another,
alius, 58.

ahAoTptoc, another’s, 158.
aAdotping, adv., foreign.
dAoGw, to thresh [§ 96, 3].
ddoog, -0vc, TO, grove.
dAvro¢g, without trouble,
141.
GAwolc, -Eo¢, 7, capture.
dua, at the same time.
Guaptava, to err, 124
[§ 121, 2].
dwapTnua, TO, error, 40.
duaptia, 7, offence, 122.
apavpow, to darken, 107.
auCpocia, 7, food of the
gods.
Guéheva, 7, carelessness.
aperéw, to neglect.
auvnuovéw, to be forget-
ful of.
ayorBn, exchange, 162.
apotpog 2, without a share
in.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

auredoc, 7, vine.
apméxoual, to put on, 135
[§ 120, 3].
autva, to keep off, 130.
audtyvoém, to be uncer:
tain [Aug., § 91, 3].
apdo.évvvpt,to clothe [§ 139,
(b), i; Aug., § 91, 3].
audioBytéw, to dispute
[Aug., § 91, 2].
aude, both [§ 68, Rem. 2].
av, with Subj., instead of
dav, if.
avaGaive, to go up.
avaBaolc, a going up, 72.
avaytyvooke, to read.
avayKava, to compel.
avaykatoc, necessary.
avaykn, necessity, 59.
avalebyvuut, to yoke
again, 171.
avakaiw, to burn, 171.
.avakpaza, to ery out.
avakinTw, to peep up, 49.
avanriokw, to spend [§ 122,
2:
’Avatayépac, -ov, 6, Anax-
agoras. [90.
avarava, to cause to rest,
avareitw, to persuade.
avarétouat, to fly up, or
away.
évariéw, to sail upon the
high sea; (2) to sail
back.
avaprala, to seize, 188.
avapxia, anarchy.
avaotpéga, to turn round.
avatidnut, to put up, 158.
avatpéro, to turn up, 120.
avaxywpéa, to go back.
avoparodlaTyc, -00,
slave-dealer.
avdparodov, Td, slave.
avopeia, 7, bravery.
avopetlog 3, brave, 31.
avédpeinc, adv bravely.

b,

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

’Avdpoyews, -w, 0, An-
drogeus.

Avedevepia, disgraceful
avarice, 112. #

dvéAriorog 2. unexpected.

dveuoc, 0, wind.

dvepwTao, to ask.

avev, W. g., Without.

avevpioxe, to find.

avéxouat, to endure [§ 91,
Li

avéwo, to boil up.

dvnkovotéw, w. d., to be
disobedient.

avyp, 6, man [§ 36].

dvSeyov, TO, a flower.

avoc, T6, a flower.

avSpartvoc, human.

aviporziov, 76, man.

avbpwroc, 6, man.

Gvico¢ 2, unequal.

aviornul, to set up, 158.

evoiyvupl, dvotyw, to open
[§ 140, 5].

aviépuotog 2 and 3, unlike.

avouog 2, lawless.

avooe, -oov, imprudent, 29.

avop8éu, to raise up [§ 91,
1].

avopitrw, to dig up again.

avTaAiaTTo, to exchange.

av7as.og 3, w. g., of equal
worth.

*Avtiyovoc, 0, Antigonus.

av7ilKéw, to defend at
law [§ 91, 4].

avTtAéyo, to contradict.

’AvticSévne, -ovc, 0, An-
tisthenes.

dvritatte, to set oppo-
site, 158.

dvi, complete [§ 94, 1].

évw, above.

avoyewy, 76, hall.

avodenne, -é¢, useless.

a£t6A0y0¢, worth mention-
ing, 161.

agiacg 8, w. g., worthy of,
18.
a£t6w, to think worthy,108.

> vad
, “o.on, song.

arayopety, to call.

anayw, to lead away.

araidevtog 2, uneducated.

dmahirattw, to set free
from.

aravtTéu, w. d., to meet.

amas, once.

drag, altogether, 43 [§ 40,

Rem.].

drewt, Inf. dxetvat, to be
absent, 167.

areuut, Inf. amtévar, to go
away.

areipoc 2, Ww. 2,
quainted with, 87.

dmeipwc, ady., inexperi-
enced.

arehabva, to drive away,
135.

arépyouat, to go away.

arexSavouat, to be hated
[§ 121, 3].

aréxoual, W. g., to abstain
from; from

anéxw, to keep off; (2) to
be distant from.

arnvn, 7, wagon.

amtoTéw, to disbelieve.

amioroc 2, unfaithful, 52.

ax2oo¢ 8, simple.

aroBaive, to go away.

aroBAézw, to look upon.

aroylyvacky,to reject,175.

arodeixvupt, to show, 160.

arodéxouat, to receive, 89.

arodnuéw, to be from
home.

arod.dpaoxw, to run away
from.

arodidwut, to give back,
159.

amoxahéw, to call back,
name.

unac-

307

aroknpiTTw, to cause to
be proclaimed, 122.
drokpivoya, to answer.
arokpt7Tw, to conceal.
anoxteiva, to kill.
arodaiw, W. g., to enjoy.
ardAAvut, to ruin, 163.
ardAvete, deliverance, 109.
’"AtrOALwY, -wroc, 6, Apol-
lo.
aroretpaoual, w. g., to try.
aropéw, to be in want.
amopog 2, difficult ; év a76-
pote eivat, to be in a
strait.
aroppéw, to flow from.
aroppon, a flowing off.
anooBévvvut, to quench.
anoonaw, to draw away.
arootéAdw, to send, 130.
amootepéw, to deprive of
arootpépw, to turn away
anorinut, to put away
161. [135.
arotivw, to compensate,
arotpéra, to turn away,
87.
arogaivw, to show, 131.
arogetyo, w. a. to flee
away.
aréypn, it suffices [§ 135,
3].
aroxpGuatto have enough
[5 97, 8, (a)].
antouat, to touch, 40.
arwtéo, to push away,
142.
dpa; [interrogative, § 187].
apa, igitur, therefore.
apyadéoc,troublesome,159.
apyvpeoc, made of silver.
dpytplov, 76, silver.
adpyvpoe, 6, silver.
apéokw, to please [§ 122,3]
apeTn, 7, Virtue.
apSpow, to articulate.
apud dc, 6, number, 72.

308

Aptoreiénc, -ov, 0, Aris-
tides.
apioTevo, to be the best,
16.
apkéw, to suffice; Mid. w.
a. [§ 98, (b)].
apKToc, 6, 7, a bear.
dpya, -aToc, TO, chariot.
dpuoTru, to fit [§ 105, 1].
adpvéouat, Dep. Pass., to
deny.
dpotpov, TO, a plough.
apo, to plough [§ 98, (c)
and § 89, (a)].
apravw, to plunder.
aptas, rapacious.
aptoc, 6, bread.
apbw, to draw water [§ 94,
1}.
épy7, a beginning, 50 ; T7v
apxnv, from the begin-
ning.
GpXLTEKTMV, -OVvOC, 0, AaY-
chitect.
apyoual, w. g., to begin.
cpxw, w. g., to rule, 44.
aoéBera, 7, impiety.
dceBéw, w.a., to sin against.
doéhyela, 7, EXCess.
aovévera, 7, weakness.
daevéw, to be weak.
aovevnc, -éc, weak.
dokéw, to practise, 107.
coric, -idoc, 7, shield.
doreyoc 2, houseless, 122.
dotparn, 7, lightning.
acTpanTw, to lighten.
dorv, TO, city [§ 46].
dovvecia, 7, stupidity.
dobvetoc 2, stupid.
acdarne, -é¢, firm, 48.
aoauaroc 2, bodiless, 130.
aTaxtoc, adv., without or-
der.
arn, infatuation, 142.
ariualw, to despise, 44.
étipia, 7, dishonor.

arpexéwc.adv., exactly,147.

"Arriky, 7, Attica.

arvxéw, to be unhappy.

aroxnpda, 76, misfortune.

atuxne, -é¢, unfortunate.

aTvyxia, 7, misfortune.

avaivo, to dry [Aug.,
§ 87, 1].

abSic, again.

av2éc, 6, flute.

aisave, to increase [§ 121,
4].

avénolc, increase.

avoc¢ 8, dry, 158.

avplov, to-morrow.

aitéporoc, 5,/deserter.

abrovouia, wf, freedom, 90.

abtovouog 2, free.

avroc, self [§ 60].

agatpeouai TLva TL, to de-
prive of.

adavye, -éc, unknown, 46.

agvovia, absence of envy,
53.

adSovoc 2, unenvious, 64.

adinut, to let go, 167.

adxvéouat, to come [§ 120,
2].

adiornut, to put away, 158.

’"Adpodirn, 7, Venus.

adpwr, foolish.

agvyc, -é¢, without natu-
ral talent.

*Avatoc, 6, an Achaian.

ayaploria, 7, ingratitude.

ayaploroc 2ungrateful,44.

dySouat, to be indignant
[§ 125, 2].

aySoc, -ovc, T6, burden.

’AytAAsic. -éwe, 6, Achil-
les.

axpnortoc 2, useless.

‘B.
BafBviw. ia, 7, Babylonia.
BaSoc, -ovc, 76, depth.
Badic, -cia, -0, deep.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. ~

Baive, to go, 31 [§ 119, 1].
Gadde, to throw [§ 117, 2].
BapBapoc, barbarian, 72.
Bapic, Maia, -b, heavy, 57.
Gaoiiera, 7, queen.
Baotieia, 7, royal author-
ity. me |
Bacirea, Ta, palace.
Bactretog 2, royal.
Baorreve, -éwc, 6, king.
Bacthedw, to be aking, 4%
Gackaive, to bewitch.
Baora lo, to carry [§105,3}.
Batpayoe, 6, frog.
BbeAvypia, 7, dislike, 171.
BéBato¢ 8 and 2, firm, 50.
Biya, -ato¢, TO, step, 72.
Bia, 7, violence.
Bralopuat, w. a., to do vio-
lence to.
Biatog 8, violent.
BiBrtov, 76, book.
Biog, 6, life, 28.
Boredu, to live.
Bioroe, livelihood, 120.
B26, to live [§ 142, 9].
BAaBepoc 8, injurious.
BAGBn, %, injury.
BAaxebo, to be lazy.
BAaxTw, to injure [Perf.,
§ 88, 2].
GAacravw,to sprout [§ 121,
ak s
GAéro, to look at, 68 [se-
cond Aor. Pass., § 102,
Rem. 1]
Bondera, 7, help.
BonSéw, w. d., to help, 175.
BonSnua, -aToc, TO, help.
Bon Soc, 6, helper.
Bofppdc, -d, 6, Boreas.
Bécko, to feed [§ 125, 3].
Bérpie, -to¢, 6, cluster of
grapes.
BobAevpa, advice, 138.
Bovaeve, to advise; Mid.,
te sdvise one’s self

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

Baran, 7, advice, 28.
BodAowat, to wish, 44
[§ 125, 4].
Bode, 6, 7, OX.
Bpadic, -cia, -d, slow.
Bpayic, -eia, -’, short.
Bpovraw, to thunder.
Bpovr, 7, thunder.
Ppordc 3, mortal.
PpGyua, -atoc, 76, food.
Bpaotc, -ewc, 7, eating.
Bvvéw, to stop up, [§ 120,
1]. [120.
Bvood¥ev, from the depth,
Popac, 6, altar.

E.

Tada, 70, milk [§ 39].

yaueth, 7, wife.

yapéw, tomarry [§ 124, 1].

yapuoc, 6, marriage.

Tavupyone, -e0¢, 6, Gany-
mede.

yap, for (stands after the
first word of the sen-
tence).

yaornp, 7, belly. e

yavpow,to make proud,110.

yé, at least, 135.

yeiTwv, -ovoc, 0, neighbor.

yeAaw, to laugh [§ 98, (a)].

yéAwe, -w7o¢, 6, laughter.

yéuo, w. g., to be full.

yéveole, -EW¢, 7, origin.

yevvaioc, of noble birth,
138.

yevvaiwc, nobly, 87.

yépac, TO, reward, 41 [§ 39,
Rem.].

/Epav, -ovToc, 6, old man.

yebo, to cause to taste, 90.

VYewpeTpre, -0Vv, 6, georae-
ter.

Yi, 7, the earth.

yntéw, to rejoice [§ 124, 2].

yipac, 76, old age [§ 39,
Rem.].

ynupackw, ynpiw, to grow
old [§ 122, 4].
yiyac, -avToc, 6, giant.

paiyvouat, to become, 22

[$123]. ~/7/
yryvookw, to know, 34
[§ 122, 5, and § 142].

yravé, -K6¢, 7, owl.
yhuxive, -eia, -d, sweet.
yAartra, 7, tongue, 23.
yvoun, 7, opinion.
yovetc, 0, parent.
yovu, -aToc, 76, knee.
Topyo, -ot¢, 7, Gorgo.
ypaua, TO, letter, 63.
ypavc, 7, old woman [§41].
ypabo, to write, 16.
TpvAdoc, 6, Gryllus.
yvia, 7, field.
yuuvase, to exercise.
yupuvoc 3, naked.
yuvatxetoc, belonging to
women, 88. ;
yuvaixtov,7é, little woman.
yur”, 7, woman [§ 47, 2].

A.

Aaidahoc, 6, Daedalus.
datpoviov, TO, deity.
daipwy, -ovos, 6, 7, divinity.
daiopuat, to distribute.
dakve, to bite [§ 119].
OaKpvov, TO, a tear.
daxpiw, to weep.
daxtidtoc, 6, ring.
daxtTvaoc, 6, finger.
dapata, -4@, to tame

[§ 117, 2].
daveilw, to lend.
dapSavw,to sleep [§121,6].
dé, but (stands after the

first word of the sen-

tence).

‘déjotc, -ew¢, 7, entreaty.

dei, it is necessary, 107
[§ 125, 5].
deidw, to fear [Perf. dé-

509

dotxa and dédia; Aor
édetoa].
Oeixvupt, show [§ 133].
deiAn, 7, evening.
detAoc, timid, 32.
detvoc, fearful, 87.
detvac, terribly, 100.
dexac, decad, 141.
deAdic, -ivoc, 6, dolphin.
dévdpov, TO, tree.
déouat, w. g.,
[§ 125, 5].
déov, 76, duty. 167.
dépkopat, to see [Perf. dé-
dopka, § 102, 4].
dépw, to flay [Perf., § 102,
4; second Aor. Pass.,
edupny].
déorotva, #, mistress of
the house.
deomoTy¢, -0v, 6, master
devpo, hither.
déxouat, Dep. Mid., to re-
ceive.
déa, to want, 107 [§ 125,
5]; (2) to bind [§ 98,
(b) ; cohtracted, § 97, 2].
O7tev, namely, scilicet, 167.
djAoc 8, evident. —[110.
0746, to make evident,
Anunthp, -Tpoc, 7, Deme-
ter or Ceres. [91.
Onwokpatia, }, democracy,
dijpo¢, 6, people, 36.
Anuootéevyc, -ovc, 6, De-
mosthenes.
O7ra, certainly.
d:aBoan, 7, calumny.
dvayiyvomat, to live.
diaye, to carry through,
live. [tend.
dcaywvilouat, w.d., to con-
d:adnua, TO, diadem, 159.
Oratpéw, to divide.
Ciara, #, mode of life.
dtaitaw, to feed [Aug.
§ 91, 2].

to want

310

dvaxetuat, to be in a state,
to be disposed.
dvaxovéa, to serve | Aug.,
§ 91, 2].
dlanva, to dissolve, 88.
OtaueiBouat, to exchange.
dtawévo, to remain.
d.avéuw, to distribute.
dvatpatT@, to effect.
dappyyvuut, to break a-
sunder, 172.
dtaoreipw, to scatter, 131.
dcaTatTw, to order, 122.
dvaTeAéw, to complete, 161.
dcaTiGnut, to put in or-
der, 161.
dLaTpog7, 77, nourishment.
dcadépe, to differ from, 63.
dtagveipw, to destroy, 63.
dtagopa, 7), difference, 159.
dLagopoe 2, different.
d.daxréc 8, taught.
didacKaxoc, 6, teacher.
é.dacka, to teach.
d.dpdckw, to run away
[§ 122, 6].
didwut, give [§ 133].
duedéyxo, to censure, to
make ashamed, con-
vince.
di0ipauBoc, 6, song.
duictyut, to separate, 158.
dxala, to judge.
dikaLog 38, just.
dtxatocivy, 7, justice.
dikaiwc, justly, 160.
drkaorTHe, -0v, 0, judge.
Oikn, 7, justice, 22.
Avoyévyg, -ovc, 0, Dioge-
nes.
Azédwpoc, 6, Diodorus.
Atévucoc, 6, Bacchus.
dott, because.
dic, bis, twice.
diva, w. g., apart from.
Jixouidoc, double-speak-
ing, 122.

dryooracia, 7, quarrel.
dupau, to thirst [contract-
ed, § 97, 3, (a) ].

‘Oitpog, -ovc, TO, thirst. -

dL@kw, to pursue, 16.

Ouac, -wd¢, 0, slave.

doxéw, to think, 188 [§ 124,
3].

doAéw, to deceive, 108.

d0fa, 7, report, 23.

ddpv, TO, spear [§ 39].

dopudopéw, W. a., to attend
as a life-guard.

dovAeia, 7, servitude.

dovAEeba, to be a slave, 37.

dodAoc, 0, slave.

dovAdw, to enslave.

Apakov, -ovtoc, 6, Draco.

dparerevo, w. a, to run
away.

dpa, to do, act.

dpevavydopoc,scythe-bear-
ing, 72.

dpouec, 0, running, 100.

divayat, to be able, 161
[$135].

dvvaute, 7, power, 100.

duvato¢g 8, possible, pow-
erful.

dvcxoAoc,hard to please,4l.

dtoryvoc 2, unfortunate.

ducrvyéw, to be unfortu-
nate.

ducxepaivw, to be dis-
pleased with.

OGua, -aro¢, TO, house.

ddpov, 76, gift.

E.
EG», w. subj., if.
éap, Eapoc, TO, spring.
éapivoc 3, belonging to
spring. |
éaw, to permit, 112 [§ 96,
3; Aug., § 87, 3].
éyyito, w. d.,to come near.
éyytvev, from near, near.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

éyyve, near.

éyeipw, to awaken, 39 [§ 89,
(b)].

éyKahAwnifouat,
proud of, 172.

éykAnua, T6, accusation.

éyxpareca,self-control,161

éyKpat7e,-é¢, continent,57

éyKoutov, TO, eulogy.

éyxedue, -voc, 7), eel.

éyxwpel, it is possible, al-
lowable.

éyxoploc 2, native, 89.

évédw, to wish, 107 [§ 125,
6].

éviCo, to accustom [ Aug.
§ 87, 3].

éFvog; -ove, TO, nation, 56.

éVoc, -ovc, TO, custom, 53.

el, if; in a question, whe-
ther.

eldog, -ove, 76, form, 48.

"EIAQ, see opaw.

elde, w. opt., O that.

eixago, to liken [Aug.,
§ 86, Rem.].

eik7}, Inconsiderately, 160.

to ba

.eiko¢ éoT1(v), it is right.

eikoT wc, adv., naturally.

"EIKQ, see éorka.

etka, to yield to, 22.

ELKQY, -OVOC, 7, Statue.

eidov, gee aipéw.

eld, to press, 143 [§ 123,
7

eiul, to be [§ 187].

eit, to go [§ 137].

"EINQ, see dpi.

elpyvuut, to shut in [§ 140,
2].

elpyo, W. g., to shut out.

"EIPOMAI, to inquire
[§ 125, 8].
eioa, to establish [Aug,

§ 87, 3].
eicBaAdw, to throw into;
(2) intrans., to fall into.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

eicelt, to go into, 167.
eicw¥éw, to push in, 142.
eita, then.
elte — eire, whether — or.
eluta, see é0 ilu.
Exe, w. g., far.
Exaoroc, -7, -ov, each.
éxBaiva, to go out, 135.
éxBGA20, to throw out.
éxyovoc, 6, 7, descendant.
éxdvo Tivé 71, to strip off.
éxeivoc, -7, -0, that, he.
éxkaiw, to burn out.
éxxadinteo, to disclose.’
éxkAnaia, 7, assembly.
éxxAgjotaca, to hold an as-
sembly.
ExAenbee (7) 7/Aiov, eclipse
of the sun.
éxvéw, to swim out.
éxréurw, to send out.
éxmétouat, to fly away.
éxrivw, to drink up, 136.
éxttAéw, to sail out.
éxmAqttw, to amaze ; Mid.
Aor., to be amazed.
Exrrwa, -aTo¢, TO, drink-
ing-cup.
éxt6¢, w. g., without.
“Extop, -cpoc, 6, Hector.
éxgaiva, to make known,
130.
éxdépw, to bring forth, 32.
éxdebyo, w. a. to flee
from, escape.
éxOv, -obca, -dy, willing.
éhadoc, 7, stag.
éhabve, to drive [§ 119, 2].
EAeaipw, W. a., to pity.
éxéyxw, to examine, 145
[Perf., § 89, (a)].
éAcéw, W. a., to pity.
'E2évy, 7, Helen.
éhevtepia, 7, freedom.
éAebtGepoc, free, 59.
tAzute_epow, to make free.
EAEYOQ, see épyouas.

éhépac, 6, elephant, 43.

éhioow, to wind [Aug.,
§ 87, 3; Perf. Mid. or

* Pass. éAqaryuac and el-
Atypat, § 89].

EAxoc, TO, a sore, 112,

‘“EAKYQ and éAkw, to
draw [Fut. 225; Aor.
elAxvoa, éAxioat; Aor.
Pass. eiAxtodnv ; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. eiAxvo-
pac; Aug., § 87, 3].

‘EAAG¢, -ddoc, 7, Hellas,
Greece.

"EAAgY, -yvoc, 6, a Greek.

"EAAnvic, -idoc, 7, Grecian.

‘EAAgqorovtoc, 6, the Hel-
lespont.

éAutyve, -cvSoc, 7, worm.

éArilw, to hope, 88.

édric, -idog, 7, hope.

EArouat, to hope [Perf
§ 87, 5].

‘HAQ, see aipéw.

EA@On¢, -Gdec, marshy.

éuBaAAw, to throw in: (2)
intrans., to fall ‘pa or
upon.

éuBpoxilw, to ensnare, 167.

éuéw, to vomit [§ 98, (b)].

éupévo, to remain with,
160.

éumedoc, firm, 159.

éuTetpog 2, w. g., expe-
rienced in.

éurinAnye, to fill.

éurinpyst, to set on fire,
165.

éurinto, to fall into.

éumTbw, to spit into or on.

éudepnc, -éc, w. d., simi-
lar to.

éudutedw, to implant.

Eugvtog 2, implanted.

éudbo, to implant.

évayTloouat,to oppose, 110.

évaytiog 3, opposite.

311

évaiw, to kindle [ Pass.
with o, § 95].

EvOELa, 7, Want.

évodeixvuul, to show, 163.

évdvw, to put on, 88.

éveyeipa, to awaken.

évedpebo, w. a., to lie in
wait for.

"ENEKQ, see dépu.

évéxw, to have, hold.

évda, there.

évdacde, hither.

évtev, whence.

évbupéouat, Dep. Pass., to
consider.

éviautoc, 6, year.

évlot 8, some.

évlore, sometimes.

éviornut, to put into, 158.

évvatog 3, ninth.

Evyuul, see Gugévvms.

évoxiéw, w. d., to molest
[Aug., § 91, 1].

évrava, here.

évTéAiw, -ouai, to com-
mission, 131].

évrevUev, hence; 7d év-
tedUev, thereupon.

évtiSyut, to put in, 159.

évtiuog 2, honored.

évTo¢. W. g., within.

EvTpLipic, -Ewc, 7, cosmetic

évtuyxave, w. d., to fall
in with.

éviTviov, T6, dream.

éfaidvyc, suddenly.

éEadeiba, to wipe off, 120.

éSapuapTave, to err greatly.

éSauaupow, to obscure ut-
terly.

2favaTdo, to deceive com~-
pletely, 106.

éSarivnc, suddenly.

éSeyut, éEeort, licet, it is
lawful, in one’s power.

éSeuul, 25céval, to go out

eeizov(Aor.),to utter,147

312

~

éfeZaive, to drive out;
(2) to lead out.
éfeTalw, to examine.
éfevpioxe, to find out.
éé7¢, in order.
éfinut, to send out, 167.
é£100w, to make equal.
éfoxéA Aw, to mislead, 130.
*F6AAvut, to ruin utterly.
efop0ow, to make straight,
158. [160.
éfopKéw, to cause to swear,
éouxa, to be like [§ 87, 5].
éoAma, see EATromat.
Zopya, see "EPT'Q.
éoptacw, to celebrate a
feast [Aug., § 87, 5].
érayyéAho, to announce;
Mid. to promise.
éxayw, to bring on.
ératvéw, to praise, 107.
éravoc, 6, praise.
éraiTlaoual, to accuse.
’"Exauvoveac,
Epaminondas.
éxayv (éx7v), w. subj., if.
éravayo, to lead back.
éravanepat, to lie upon.
éxavagépa, to bring back,
141.
ézapkéw, w. d., to help.
émei, when, since.
éxedav, w. subj., when.
éxetd7, since, because.
ézeita, then, 167.
érépyouat, to ‘come to.
éxiBontén, w. d., to come
to the assistance of.

-ov, 0,

éxiBovAedu,to plotagainst.

ériBovdy, 7, plot.
éxideixvut, to show boast-
fully, 163.
éx10LOk@, to pursue.
éxiuSvuéw, to desire, 108.
ériSvupia, 7, desire.
éxixivovvog 2, dangerous.
éxixovdica, to alleviate.

értAavSavouat, to forget.
émlpéAeta, 7, care.
érlpmédouat, -ovpuat, to care
~ for, 25 [§ 124, 17].
émivoéw, to think of.
éxtopkéw, to swear falsely,
138.
ériopkoc, 6, perjured.
éxixinTo@, to fall upon.
éxtoxoTéw, to look. upon.
éxiotrauat, to know, 161
[§ 135, p. 165].
émioTéAAw, to command.
éxoTnun, 7, knowledge.
émloTHuwv 2, W. g., ac-
quainted with.
émtoToAn, 7, epistle.
éxiTaTTw, to entrust to.
émitedéw, to accomplish.
émityoetoc, fit, 145.

éxitndevo, to manage, 90.
éxiTiOnpl,to putupon,161.

émiTpérw, to entrust to;
(2) to permit.
émiTpoTtevw, W. a., to be
guardian.
érlgépw, to bring upon, 91.
érliyelpéw, w. d., to put the
hand to something.
éxtyaptoc 8, of or belong-
ing to, the country.
éxouat. Comp. éra.
érouvoul, to swear by.

€T0C, -ove, TO, word.

éroTpvve, to urge on.

éxw, to be busily engaged
in, occurs in prose in
comp. (mepléeta, OLeTO,
etc.) [Aug., §87, 3; Aor.
Act. orov not used in
Att. prose]; Mid. é7o-
pat, to follow [Impf.
elzounv ; Fut. épouat ;
Aor. éoréunv, édeor-
pnv; Inf. onéodar;
Imp. ood, ériorov].

Epawat,to love [§135,p.165]

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

épaoTHc, 6, lover, 25.

’"Eparta, -ov¢, 7, Erato.

épau,to love [§135, p.165].

épyacouat, to work [Aug.,
§ 87, 3].

épyaornplov, TO,
shop.

Epyvupl, see elpyvuue.

épyov, TO, work, 27.

"EPTQ, to do [Perf., § 87
5].

épdw, to do.

épeidw, to prop [Perf.,
§ 89, (b)].

épifw, to contend with.

pic, -Ldo¢, 7, contention,
39.

‘Epu7jc, -od, 6, Hermes,
Mercury.

"EPOMAI, see EIPOMALI.

épr bso, épr@, to creep
fAug., § 87, 3].

éppw, to go away [§ 125,
9].

éppoévoc, strong.

éppopévac, strongly.

Epvua, -atoc, TO, defence.

"Epvuav$1oc,Erymanthian

épxouat, to go, come
[§ 126, 2].

Ewe, -wToc, 0, love.

épwTG, to ask.

éoVio, to eat, 16 [§ 126, 3].

éotAoc 3, noble, 23.

éorépa, 7, evening.

écre, until.

éoTlaw, to entertain [Aug.,
§ 87, 3].

écyaroe, last, 88.

éraipoc, 6, companion, 27.

érepec 8, the other,alter, 87.

érz, besides, 124.

étotuoc 3, ready.

éroiuwc, adv., readily.

Tog, -ove, TO, year.

eb, well, ed zpat7a, to do
well to.

work-

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

EiGo.a, 7, Euboea.

evGovioc, consulting well,
147.

evyevgc, of high birth, 141.

eivdaipovéw, to be fortu-
nate, 136.

ebdaimovilw, to account
happy.

evdatpovuc, fortunately.

evdaipor, -ovoc, fortunate.

evdloc 2, serene.

evdoxtwéw,to be celebrated.

etdw, see Kateidu.

evetia, 7, good condition.

evepyecia, 7, beneficence,
138.

enEp yer, to benefit, im

evyaple, attractive.
evyaplotoc 2, winning.
ey, 7, request, 107.

‘evyouat, w. d., to pray, 31.

épnBoc, 6, a youth.
épinut, to send up to, 167.
éptxvéouat,to arrive at,136.
épodcov, To, travelling
money. [tes.
Evdparne, -ov, 6, Euphra-
éyVaipw, w. a., to hate.
éybavouat, see amex ta-
VOMGAL.
éypoc 3, hostile, 27, 58.
RES firm.
Pato have ; OWS wae 70)
w. inf., to be able [§ 125,

ebeoTo, 7, prosperity, 47. > 11].~
edSivo,tomake straight,23 Zp, to boil [§ 125, 12].

ebGic, adv., immediately.
evKAeca, 7, fame.
ebxoAwe, adv., quickly.
ebxoopia, 7, good order,24.
evAaBéouat, w. a. Dep.
Pass., to be cautious.
ebuev7c, -Ec, well-disposed.
ebuopdia,y, beauty of form.
ebvopuia, 7, good adminis-
tration.
evvooc 2, well-disposed, 29.
evTreTac, adv., easily.
ebvropoc, w. g., abounding
in. [des.
Baeenao Te, -ove, 6, Euripi-
eee, to find [§ 122, 7].
| evpoc, -ove, 76, breadth.
: ebpic, -eia, -v, broad.
: ebocBéw, w. a. to rever-
| ence.
| eboeBic, -éc, pious.
ebraxtoc 2 2, well-ordered.
ebrvxéw, to be fortunate,
107.
ebtvy7c, -é¢, fortunate.
ebtvxia, 7, good fortune.
ebdpaive, to rejoice, 28.
ebdpocivn, 7, mirth.

éwc, as long as.
Ewe, -@, 7, morning.

Z.
Zao, to live [Con., § 97,
8, (a)]. Comp. Bide.
Cévvvpt, Céw, to boil [§ 139,
(b), 2].

Cevyvuut, to yoke, 172
[§ 140, 31.

Zeve, 6 [§ 47, 3], Zeus or
Jupiter.

¢nAdw, to strive after, 108.

Chia, 7, injury.

(nto, to punish.

Cnréw, to seek, 108.

fan, 7, life.

Cavum, to gird [§ 189,
(ec), 1].

CHov, 70, animal, 58.

.
“H, or; 7—7, aut — aut.
%, where.
nBacKa, 78dw, to come to
manhood [§ 122, 8].
78%, 7, youth. [way.
7yeovevy, to point out the

27

313

nyeuav, -ovoc, 6, leader.
jryéouat, to lead, 133.
70éu¢, adv., pleasantly, 16.
707, already.

70opuat, to rejoice.

700v7, 7, pleasure.

700¢, -via, -0, sweet.
nYoc, -ovg, TO, custom, 110.
jktoTa, least of all.

7k, | am come.

hitkia, h, age, 106.
nirikoc 8, as great as.
nAtoc, 9, sun.

7ypeay to sit [§ 141, (b)].
nuépa, 7}, day.

Ae Aepodpou0.,6, courier,108.

(ee 0, demigod.
nv, W. subj., if.
#vika, when.
hrvioxoc, 6, guide, 15&.
noc 3, mild.
“Hoa, 7, Hera or Juno.
‘Hpakaje, -éovc, 6, Herz
cules.
pwc, -woc, 0, here.
novxatw, to be quiet, still.
novyxia, 7, stillness, 24.
hovxoc 2, quiet.
7TTQ, 7, defeat.
qTTaoual, W. g., to be de
feated, inferior to.

6.
OaAatTa, 7, sea.
Varia, 7, feast.
Sariw, to bloom, 34.
VaAroc, -ovc, 76, heat.

. Yavaroc, 6, death.

Gantw, to bury. [106.
Vapparéwc, adv. boldly,
Sappéw, to be of good
courage; . TLva, to
have confidence in; ¥.
_ Tl, to endure something.
Savualo, w. g. to won-
der, 16.
Savpaortic 8, wonderful.

314. GREEK

Gecouat, Dep. Mid., to sez.
Vedrnc, -0d, 6, spectator.
Seiov, TO, deity.
Geioc 8, godlike.
Géhyo, to charm, 122.
GéXw, to wish, 107 [§ 125,
6].
Seuédov, TO, foundation.
OeuoToKAne, -éouc,
Themistocles.
%ede, 0, God.
Separava, 7. female ser-
vant.
Separeia, 7, care.
Separredvw, to honor, 22.
Vepitwv, -ovToc, 6, ser-
vant.
Vépoc, -ovc, TO, summer.
%éo, to run [Fut., § 116,
3>° Con. $917. Che
other tenses from 7pé-
xo, which see.
678at, ai, Thebes.
Sp, -6¢, 6, wild beast.
SnpevT7jc,-ov, 0, huntsman.
Onpevo, to hunt, 31.
Snpiov, TO, wild beast.
Syoavpoc, 6, treasure.
Onoetc, -éwc, 6, Theseus.
Siyyaveo, to touch [§ 121,
10].
Adu, to bruise [§ 98, (a)].
Grvjcke, to die [§ 122, 9].
SvyToc 3, mortal.
BépvBoe, 6, tumult.
Spavw, to break,
[§ 95, Rem. 1].
SpiE, tpryos, 7), hair.
Gpdvoc, 6, throne, 145.
Space, to leap.
Svyarnp, -poc, 7, daughter.
Supoc, 6, mind, 28.
Sipa, 7, door.
Sipooc, 6, a thyrsus, 159.
Yuoia, 7, sacrifice.
Ww, to sacrifice [§ 94, 2].
Bac, Swdc, 6, 7, jackall.

e
O,

100

AND ENGLISH, VOCABULARY.

Goredo and VOrTo, W. a,
to flatter.

it

"Taouat, Dep. Mid., to heal.

iatplKy, 7, medicine.

iatpoc, 6, physician.

18ypla, 7, Spain.

idéa, 7, appearance, 106.

idvog 3, own, peculiar.

idtOTy¢, -0v, 0, private
man; (2) layman.

idpbw, to build, 90 [§ 94,1].

idpdc¢, -GTo¢, 0, sweat.

iepeve, -€wc, 0, priest.

iepov, 70, victim.

iepdc 8, w. g., sacred to.

ifm, see Kadivo.

inut, to send [§ 136].

iGive, to set right, 52.

ixavog 8, sufficient, able.

“Ixapoc, 6, Icarus.

ixeTevo, to supplicate, 88.

ixéTy¢, -ov, 0, suppliant.

iKVEOMAL, SES GOLKVEOMUAL.

iAdoxouat, to propitiate
[§ 122, 10].

thewe, -wv, merciful.

TAtae, -doc, 7, the Liad, 53.

iuartov, TO, garment.

iueipw, to desire.

iva, that; (2) in order
that.

"Ivdtxh, 7, India. [dia.

"Ivdoi, oi, inhabitants of In-

tov, 76, violet.

immede, -éwc, 6, horseman.

inmedo, to ride.

ixzoc, 6, horse.

ioog 3, equal, 49.

iornut,to place,158 [§133].

toropéw TIva TL, to in-
quire of.

icroptoypadéoc, 6, historian.

iotéc, 0, loom.

ioxvaive, to make emacia-
ted [§ 111, Rem. 2].

ioxipos 8, strong.
ioxiw, to be strong, 59
tows, perhaps.

iyvog, -ovg, TO, track.
iySic, -boc¢, 6, fish.
"IQ, see eit, to go.

K.
Kadaipo, to purify, 130.
Kkavécouat, to sit down
| Aug., § 91,3; Fut. «a-
Sedodpuar]. [10].
Kavevdw, to sleep [§ 125,
kadquat, to sit [Aug.,
§91, 31.
Kkadico, to set [§ 125, 13]
kadint, to let down, 167.
kaSiornut,to establish,158.
kai, and, even; Kai — Kai, -
both —and (et—et),38.
Kalvoc 8, new.
kaiptoc, opportune, 112.
kaipoc, the right time, 58.
kaiw, to burn [§ 116, 2].
KQKia, 4, Vice.
kaxovooe 2, ill-disposed.
xaxoc 8, bad, wicked.
Kak0oTn¢, 7, wickedness, 39.
KaKOUpYé®, W. &, to do
evil to one.
Kakovpyoc, 0, evil-doer.
kako, to treat ill, hurt.
Kakac, adv., badly.
kaAapoc, 6, reed.
kadéw, to call, name [§ 98,
(b); Opt. Plup. Mid. or,
Pass., § 116, 4].

KaAdiag, -ov, 6, Callias.. he

KGAAoc, -ovg, TO, beauty..
kadoxayavia, , rectitude,,
145.
kadéc 8, beautiful, 27.
Kadorro, to conceal.
Karoc, adv., well.
Kaunroc, 6, 7, camel.
kava, to labor (intrans.),
130 [§ 119].

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

xav, even if, 107.
Kaveov, TV, basket.
«ampoc, 6, wild boar.
«apdia, 7, heart.
«aprooual, to enjoy the
fruits of.
Kaproc, 6. fruit.
KapTa, very.
aapTepéw, to be patient.
Kaptepoc 3, strong, 167.
KGorup, -opoc, 6, Castor.
kaTaBaorc, 7, retreat, 72.
KaTayedaw, W. &.,to laugh
at. [sleep, 138.
KkatadapSave, to fall a-
katadva, to go down, 88.
Katakaiw, to burn down.
KaTakiaiw, to bewail.
KaTakieiv, to shut, 90.
KATaKpUTTY, to hide.
KaTahauTo, shine upon.
Kataieizw, to leave be-
hind, 120.
KaTahiw, to loosen, 88.
KaTavévw, to distribute.
kaTaratea, to puta stop to.
KaTaTeTpow, to stone to
death. [122.
KaTarigAtTtT@, to astonish,
KaTaokevalw, to prepare.
katatiGnut, to lay down,
161. [122.
katadAéya, to burn down,
KaTadpovéw, to despise.
Katadvyy, 7, refuge.
Katepyalouat, to accom-
plish.
Katéyw, to restrain, 23.
KaTHyopoc, 6, accuser.
Ka&TOTTpOV, 76, mirror.
Kato, below.
Katya, -aToc, r6, heat.
KG, see Kaio.
xeipuat, to lie down [§ 141,
(a)}.
Keebu, to order, bid [§ 95].
KedriGnpec, Celtiberians.

kévTpov, TO, sting, 159.

képapoc, 6, clay.

kepavvvut, to mix [§ 139,
(a), 1].

kepdaive, to gain, 130
[§ 111, Aor. II; Perf.
Keképdaka). -

képdoc, -ove, TO, gaih.

KevO pov, -Ovoc, 6, lair.

Kev0o, to conceal.

Kedadn, 7, head.

kexpnuévoc, wanting, 120.

kyTo¢, 0, garden.

Kip, Kipo¢, TO, heart.

Knpoc, 6, Wax.

Knpvé, -dKoc, 6, herald.

knptTTe, to make known
(by a herald).

xitapa, 4, lyre.

KiAckia, 7, Cilicia.

kevdvvedtw, to incur dan-
ger, 88.

kivddvoc, 6, danger.

Kic¢, KL6¢, 0, cormm-worm.

KioTy, 7, chest.

KLTTOC, O, ivy.

Kixonut, to lend [§ 135, 1].

kAalw, to sound [§ 105, 4;
Fat. Perf. cexAdyfo and
-ySouat|.

kAaiw, to weep, 133 [§ 125,
14].

kia, to break [§ 98, (a)].

kieic, ), key [§ 47, 5].

Kiera, -odc, 7, Clio.

kAeio, to shut, 28 [Pass.
with o, § 95, Rem. 1].

KA€o¢, -ove, 76, fame, 48.

KAET TIC, -Ov, 0, thief.

KAérTo, to steal | Fut. x2é-
wowat ; second Aor.
Pass. éxAarnv; Perf,
§ 102, 5].

KAive, to bend [§ 111, 6].

Kiown, 7, theft.

KAO oc, thievish, 122.

KA, -otc, 7, Clotho.

315

khinp, -wri¢, 6, thief.

kvao, to scrape [Cont.,
§ 97, 3].

koitw, to squeak [Char.,
§ 105, 2].

kothaivo, to hollow out
[§ 111, Rem. 2].

kolvoc, common, 131; 7d
Kolvov, commonwealth.

Kolvovia, 7, Communion,
108.

Koipavoc, 6, ruler.

KoAdiw, to punish.

kohakeia, 7, flattery.

konakevu, Ww. a., to flatter.

K6Aag, -akoc, 6, flatterer.

koAacr7¢, -0d, 6, punisher

kodobw, to curtail [Pass.
with o, § 95].

KoAroc, 6, bosom, 133.

kouila, to bring.

KOTTO, to cut, 120.

Kopag, -akoc, 6, crow.

kopévyvp, to satisfy [§ 139,
(b), 3].

KopivSiec, 6, Corinthian.

Kopuc, -vdoc, 7, helmet.

koozéw, to adorn.

coouoc, 6, ornament, 51.

Koevooc 3, light, 39.

Kpagw, to cry out, 122
[§ 105, 2; Fat. xexpa-
Souar].

Kpavoc, -ovc, 76, helmet.

KpaTéo, w. g., to have
power over, 107.

kpar7p, -7p0¢,mixing bowl

Kpatoc, -ove, 76, strength

Kpavy7, 7), Shout, 167.

kpéac, 76, flesh, 41 [§ 39,
Rem.].

kpéuapuat and Kpenavvvue,
to hang [§ 139, (a), 2].

Kpive, to judge, 48 [§ 111,
6]. [sa.

Kpicaioc, belonging to Cri-

KpiTHe, -od, 6, judge.

316

Kpiriac, -vv, 6, Critias.
Kpoicoc, 6, Croesus.
KpokodetAoc, 6, crocodile.
Kpduvov, TO, onion.
Kpétwr, -wvoc, 6, Crotona.
kpobw, to knock, 100 [ Pass.
with o, § 95, Rem. 1}.

Kpomroc 8, concealed, 130.

kpvmTw, to conceal, 121.

xpatw, to croak [§ 105, 2].

xTaoualt, to acquire, 112
fRedup., § 88, Rem. 1;
Subj. Perf. and Opt.
Plup., § 116, 4].

xteivo, to kill, usuallyaro-—

«reive | Perf. Act., 3111,
5. Instead of éxtauar
and éxTadnv, TES vyKa
and aréSavov b76 TLvoG
are usual].
KTelc, -evoc, 6, comb.
KTevila, to comb.
KT7HUa, -aTOC, TO, posses-
sion.
KTHOLC, 7, possession, 51.
KTifw, to found, 31.
KuBepvyATnc, 0, pilot.
KvGoc, 6, a die, cube.
Kédvoc, 0, Cydnus.
KvAio, to roll [Pass. with
G, § 95].
komehAov, TO, goblet.
Kuptedw,to be master of, 88.
Kuploc, Ww. g., having pow-
er over. [clops.
KikAww, -wroc, 0, Cy-
Kipoc, 6, Cyrus.
Kdov, Kuvoc, 0, 7, dog.
KwAvw, to hinder.
kOun, 7, village.
KwTiAAw, to chatter, 172.
kwtiAoc 3, loquacious
kadoc 8, dumb.

Re
Aayxava, to acquire [§121,
11]

Aaxedaiuovioc, 0, Lace-
daemonian.
Aayac, -@, 6, hare.
Aaiiay, -aro¢, 7, storm.
Aaréw, to talk.
Aahog 2, talkative.
Aausave, to take,
[§ 121, 12].
Aaurpoc 8, brilliant, 23.
Aavitave, to be concealed
from, 89 [§ 121, 13].
AGpvyé, -vyyos, 6, throat.
Aéava, 7, lioness.

3l

Aeaive, to grind, 43.

eyo, to say, name; Aéyo-
pat [§ 88, Rem. 2]; (2)
to collect [§ 88,4; Aor.

Pass. éaéySqv and éré-.

ya}.
Aeia, 7, booty, 145.
Aelu@v, -Ovoc, 6, meadow.
Aeizw, to leave, leave be-
hind [ Aor. éAuwov ; Pf.
Aédoira, § 102, 4].
Aewvidac, -ov, 0, Leonidas.
Aerro¢ 8, thin.
AevKaive, to whiten [§ 111,
Rem 2].
Aevw, to stone [Pass. with
o, § 95].
Aé@v, -ovTec, 0, lion.
AeG¢, 0, people.
Anpoc, 6, loquacity.
AnoTHe, -ov, 6, robber.
hiav, very, 122.
AuBin, 7, Libya
Asoc, 6, stone.
Awuny, -évoc, 0, harbor.
Aiuvn, 7, maarsh, 158.
A.uoc, 6, hunger.
Aoyifouat, to think, 112.
Aoyzto¢ 3, eloquent, 112.
Aoyoc, é, word, 27.
Aodopéw, to scold, 109.
Aoiuoc, 6, pestilence, 158.
Aowroc 8, remaining. [5].
Aobw, to wash [Cont., § 97,

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

Addoc, 6, crest.

Aoxaw, w. a., to lie in wait,

Avypo¢ 3, sad.

Avdia, 7, Lydia. —

Avxotpyos, 0, Lycurgus.

Avpaivouat, w. a., to abuse,
maltreat.

Abpn, h, disgrace.

Avié@, to distress.

Ao77], 7, SOLrOW-

Avmnpo¢ 3, sad, 47.

Avpa, 7, lyre.

AvptKoc 8, lyric.

Adoavodpos, 6, Lysander.

Avoiac, -ov, 6, Lysias.

AvoiteAéo, w. d, to be
useful to.

Avxvoc, 6, lamp, 172.

Aba, to loose, 22 [§ 94, 2}.

AwPaouat, w. a., maltreat.

M.
Matric, -ov, 6,a pupil,28.
Maiavdpoc, 6, Maeander.
pakap, -apoc, happy.
paxapifw,to esteem happy.
pakaptoc 8, happy, 108.
Makevovia, 7, Macedonia.
Maxedovikoc, Macedonian.
Maxeddr, -dvoc, 6, a Mace-
donian.
pakpay, far, 131.
peaxpoc 38, long.
pahakivw, to render ef-
feminate, 124.
pearaxoc 3, soft.
padtaroc 3, soft, 172.
Ladera, especially, 107.
padAov, rather, 64.
Mavoavn, 7, Mandane.
pavdave, to learn, 24
[§ 121, 24].
Mavtivera, 7, Mantinéa.
[AVTLC, -Ew¢, 0, prophet, 8&
Lapaive, to make wither.
LapTupéo, eapTipopuat, to
bear testimony [§124,4}.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

prapTrpia, 7, testimony.

paprve, -Tvpoc, O, witness.

paortyow, to scourge.

paorivw, to whip [Char.,
§ 105, 2]. [38.

paorié, -iyoc, 7, scourge,

paxn, 7, battle.

peaxouat,to fight, 16 [§ 125,
15].

péyac, -dAn,-a, great [§48].

péyetoc, -ovc,76,greatness.

“edn, 7, drunkenness.

Leon UwY, -ovoc, negligent,
65.

uedinut, to let go, 168.

uedio, to be drunk, 136.

Meavn, 7, Methone.

pelpakLov, TO, young boy.

péAac, -atva, -av, black.

péret, it concerns, 24
[§ 125, 17].

perérn, 77, care.

HEAL, -:T0¢, TO, honey.

péditra, 7, a bee.

LéAXw, to be about to, 88
[§ 125, 16].

péAopat, to have a care for
[§ 125, 17].

péAoc, -ovc, TO, song, 121.

péudopat, w.a., to blame;
w. d., to reproach.

péurpic, -ewc, 7, reproach.

pév — dé, truly — but, 38.

Mevédcwc, -ew, 6, Mene-
laus.

pevevaivo, w. d., to bear
ill-will towards.

pévo, to remain; w. a., to
await; second Perf. é-
ova, to desire [§ 111,5].

pepila, to divide.

uépluva, 7), care.

uépoc, -ovc, 76, part.

geonuBpia, 7, mid-day.

péogc 3, middle.

uecdTn¢, mediocrity, 57.

peoroc 3, w. g., full.

peTtaBaddAu,to change,130.
peTtaBorny, 7, change.
peeTadidut. to give a share
of, 159.
petad)artru, to change.
eras, w. g., between.
petaréurouat, to send for.
peTatidnut,to change,159.
LeTagvépw, to remove,
change.
peTayelpifoual, to take in
hand, 65.
petérerta, afterwards.
peTéx@, to take part in.
pétploc 3, moderate.
LeTpiwc, adv., moderately.
péTpov, TO, measure, 28.
Expt, until.
py, not, 16; after expres-
sions of fear, 91.
pendapzov, nowhere; pL. éi-
vat, to be of no value.
Meta, 7, Medea.
pndetc, -Euia, -Ev, no one
[§ 68, Rem. 1].
pendérore, never, 112.
M7doc, 6, a Mede.
Lijkoc¢, -ouc, TO, length.
pny, -voc, 6, month.
pavic, -Lo¢ or -Ldo¢, 7, an-
ger. [ with.
unvio, w. d., to be angry
pnmore, never.
pArw, not yet.
pate — unre, neither —
nor.
Lenn, -Tpoc, 7, mother.
unxavaouat, Dep. Mid.,
to contrive.
ptaive, to pollute [§ 111,
Rem. 2].
piyvvyut, to mix [§ 140, 4].
MiSp.darne, -ov, 6, Mith-
ridates.
jutxpoc 8, small. [des.
McAriaddne, -ov, 6, Miltia-
Mi2wr, -wvoc, 6, Mile.

~ O7*

317

pipéopuat, to imitate.
pLpntyc, -00, 6, imitator.
Mivuc (Gens Mivwoc and
Miva), 6, Minos.
puprvyjcko, to remind
[§ 122, 11].
picyw, w. g., to mix with
pcéw, to hate.
potoc, 6, reward.
porto, to let out.
pvd, -Gc, 7, mina [§ 26].
pvnun, 7, raemory.
pLvnpovevw, to remember.
pevnothp, -jpoc, 6, suitor.
HOAtc, with difficulty.
povapyia, 7, monarchy.
Lovor, only, 64.
povoc 8, alone.
poipa, 7, fate, 141.
Lopotwoc 2, fated.
Motoa, 7, a Muse.
povolky, 7, music, 87.
10x9np6¢3,miserable,base.
poxoc, 6, toil, distress.
poxhoc, 6, bolt, 28.
Lite, to suck [§ 125, 18].
pitoc, 6, word, 40.
pvia, 7, fly.
pvpiog 8, innumerable.
popuns, -Koc, 6, ant.
Lvpov, 76, perfumery, 145.
vc, -d6c, 7, mouse.
poxarog 8, inmost, 121.
Lbo, to close [formation
of tense, § 94, 1].
fewpéc 3, foolish, a fool.

N.

Nai, truly.
vaiw, to dwell.
Naéioc, 6, Naxian.
vacow, to press together

[Char., § 105, 1].
vavayia, 7, shipwreck.
vavayéc, 6, shipwrecked.
vavuayia, 7, sea-fight

- yauTnc, -ov, 6, sailor. .

318

vavTiKo¢ 3, nautical, 161;
TO VAUTLKOY, a fleet.

veaviac, -ov, 6, a youth.

Neidoc, 6, Nile.

vexpoc 3, dead, 175.

véxTap, -apoc, TO, nectar.

véxvr, -voc, 0, corpse, 49.

Neuéa, 7, Nemea.

veo, to divide, 145 [Fut.
veu® and veujow ; Aor.
Evetua ; Perf. vevéunke ;
Aor. Pass. éveundyyv
and -ét77].

véoc 8, young, 28.

vedTne, -NT0¢, 7, youth.

Néorwp, -opoc, 6, Nestor.

vedéAn, 7, Cloud, 158.

védoc, -ove, 70, cloud.

véw, to swim [§ 116, 3].

veoc, -, 6, temple.

vn, yes, truly.

VIA, -aTo¢, TO, yarn, 136.

vyyveuia, 7, a calm.

v7jcoc, 7, island.

vilw, to wash.

vikaw, to conquer, 106.

VLKH, 7], Victory.

vinTo, to wash.

videl, it SROWS.

voéw, to think. [57.

vonua, -aToc, 76, thought,

vouac, -adoc, 6, 7, nomad.

vouedc, -éwc, 6, shepherd,
44,

voun, 7, pasture.

vouiCo, to think, 56.

vouluoc 3, customary.

vopoc, 6, law.

vooc, 6, mind, 29.

vooéu, to be sick.

véc0c, 7, disease, 28.

votoc, 0, south-wind.

Niyudn, 7, a Nymph.

viv, Now.

vo0£, vuKroc, 77, night.

vvoTavw, to nod [Char.,
§ 105, 3].

=
Se

evia, 7, hospitality.

févoc, 6, guest, 122.

Eevogdarvye, -ove, 6, Xeno-
phanes. [phon.

Revogoar, -vToe, 0, Xeno-

£éw, to scrape [formation
of tense, § 98, (b)].

Enpaive, to dry.

idoc, -ove, 76, sword.

EdAov, 76, wood.

Evpéw and fdpouat,to shave
[§ 124, 5].

fd, to scrape [Pass. with
o, § 95}.

O.
’Odalw, to bite [Char.,
§ 105, 2].
éde, this.
666¢, 7, Way.
édov¢, -dvToc, 6, tooth.
ddipouat, to mourn, 16.
’Odvocete, -éws, 6, Ulysses.
66, to smell of [§ 125, 19].
6ev, whence.
oi, whither.
oiaxi~w, to steer [Aug.,
§ 87, 1].
oida, I know [§ 148].
oiyvupl, oltyw, see avoly.
oixetoc 3, belonging to,
own, intimate.
oikéT HC, -0v, 6, servant.
oikéw, to dwell, 112.
oiknole, -ewc, 7, dwelling.
oikia, 7, house. [112.
oikodouéw, to build a house,

* oikoc, 6, house.

oikovpéw, to guard a house
[§ 87, 2].

OikTEipw, W. 2., to pity.

Olwal, see OLouat.

oiatw, to lament [Char.,
§ 105, 2].

oixtpoc 3, pitiable, 58.

oivog, 6, wine.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

oivoxdoc, 6, cup-bearer.

otopat, to think [§ 125, 20]

oioc, such as; w. inf, in
stead of @¢re, so that.

bic, diog, 6,7, sheep. [21].

otxouat, to depart [§ 125,

7OIQ, see dépa.

6ABLo¢g 3, happy.

6ABoc, 6, riches, 124.

dAtyapyia, oligarchy, 161.

dAtyot, few.

ddiyog 3, little, 53.

dAtoS ave, to slip [§ 121,7].

dAAvut,to destroy|§138,B].

620A06w, to howl [Char.,
§ 105, 2].

éA0¢ 3, whole.

dAodipouat, to pity.

“Ounpoc, 6, Homer.

outréw, Ww. d., to associate
with, 131.

6utria, 7, intercourse with.

duvoput, to swear [§ 138, B].

duvdw, to swear.

duoyaorploc, 6, brother.

6uoyAwtrog 2, speaking
the same language.

duoLoTne, -TyTOC, likeness.

époiwc, in like manner,168.

duodoyéw, to agree with,
admit.

dudpyvuut, to wipe off
[§ 140, 6].

évetpoc, 6, dream.

6vnole, -Ewe, 7, advantage.

évivnut, to benefit [§ 135,
4].

dvoua, -aToc, TO, name.

dvouato, to name.

évTwe, really.

6f%b¢, -eia, -d, sharp, sour.

érala, to bestow, 124.

6xn, whither, where.

éricw, back, 138.

érAila, to arm.

orAirne, -ov, 6, heayy-arm-
ed man. :

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

drAov, 76, Weapon.

bot, whither.

émoiocg 3, qualis, of what
sort. [as.

oTOo0¢ 3, quantus, as great

érococoty 3, how great,
how long, soever.

éméTav, w. subj., when.

émoTe, when, since.

ém6Tepo¢ 3, which of two.

Omov, where.

*OIITQ, see dpa.

émac, how, 109.

épaotc, -ews, 7, sight.

dpaw, to see [§ 126, 4].

épyaive, to enrage [§ 111,
Rem. 2].

opyi, 7, anger.

épyifouat, Dep. Pass., to
be angry.

épéyo, to stretch, 122.

épece, a striving after,108.

op%oc 8, straight, 57. [108.

opdow, to make straight,

épSptoc 8, early.

Opi, to fix, limit, 124.

dpktov, TO, oath.

6pkoc, 6, oath.

épuaw, to rush, 106.

6pu4, 7, impulse, 57.

doviSo8npac, -a, 6, bird-
catcher, 24.

épvic, -i8oc, 6, 7, bird.

dpvit, to rouse.

dpo¢, -ove, TO, Mountain.

dprvé, -yoc, 0, quail. -

épbrra, to dig [Fut. dpi-
a; Pf. dpdpuya; Pf.
Mid. or Pass. dpapvy-
pat, § 89, (a)].

dpxnSuoc, 6, dance.

ésto¢ 3, holy.

dou7, 7, smell.

éo0¢, as great as, 67.

écmep, Hrep, Sep, who-
ever, 108.

agréov, -oiv, Td, bone.

beTlc, 7TL¢, 6 TL, whoever,
67 |§ 62].

dogpatvouat, w. g., to smell
[§ 121, 8].

érav, w. subj., when, 87.

OTe, when.

ott, that, because.

ov, not, 17; ov, where.

ovdauy, nowhere.

ovdé, neither, 57.

ovdeic, -euia, -év, no one
[§ 68, Rem. 1].

obdémroTe, never.

ovK, not, 16.

obxéTt, no longer, 165.

ovv, therefore.

ovTore, never, 131.

Odpavidat, oi, gods, in-
habitants of Olympus.

ovpavioc 3, heavenly.

ov¢, @TO¢, TO, ear [§ 39].

ovoia, possession, 64.

ovTe—ov7e, neither—nor.

otTw(c), thus, 87 [§ 7].

ovx, not, 28.

ddeiAw, to owe [§ 125, 22].

6¢éAAw, to nourish, 53.

ogiaduoc, 6, eye.

bdtc, -ewc, 6, snake.

dodtoxava, to owe [§ 121,
9].

oxvéw, to bear, endure.

6xAoc, 6, the common peo-
ple (plebs).

oy, O76C, 7, VOICE.

owé, late.

éwzoc 8, late. [47.

wee, -Ews, 7, sight, visage,

opopayoc 2, dainty.

II.
Ilayic, -idor, 7, trap, 49.
mayKakoc, thoroughly bad.
Traoc, -ovc, suffering, 53.
Talay, -Gvoc, 6, war-song.
taoeia, 7, education, 87.
Taldevw, to educate, 16.

319

ma. diov, 76, little child, 131.
maifa, to play, 17 [§ 116,
3].
mai¢, -d6c, 6, 7, child, 39.
Taiw, to strike.
mé/a1, formerly, long ago;
of wéAat, the ancients.
tahaiw, to wrestle [Pass.
w. 0, according to § 95].
Tahato¢ 8, ancient.
mTaAtv, again, 159.
TavrTaxov, everywhere, in
all respects. [kind.
mavtodano¢ 8, of every
mavtwc, wholly, 160.
mavv, altogether, very.
mantoc, 6, grand-father.
TapayyéAAw, to order,
mapadidwut, give over to,
commit. [edly.
Tapadoswe, adv.unexpect-
TrapadyKn, 7, something
entrusted, 122.
Tapatvéw, w. d., to advise,
to exhort.
Tapaxaiéw, to call to, to
exhort. [147.
mapaxatadnKn, 7, pledge,
Tapahauave, to receive.
Tapavouog 2, contrary to
law.
TapanéToual, to fly away.
mapatAagw, mislead, 122.
maparAjotog 3, like.
Tapackevacw, to prepare,
168.

TapackevacTiKoc 3,w.gen.,
skilled in preparing.
mwapateiva, to stretch out.
mapaTivnut, to place be-

side, provide.
mapaTpéx@, to run by or
past. [past.
Tmapagépw, to carry by or
Tapert, inf.;apetvat, to be
present; mapeorz(v), it
is lawful, in one’s power.

320

mapeyut, inf. raprévat, to
go by, near.

Tapépxouat, to go by.

mapéxe, to offer, grant, 27;
Mid., 58.

mapinut, to let pass, neg-
lect, 168. [158.

rapioTnt, to place beside,

Tapo.véw, to riot [Aug.,
§ 91, 1].

mapogivw, to encourage.

Tappnota,7,frankness,163.

mac, every, all.

maoow, to scatter [Char.,
§ 105, 1].

Tacx, to suffer,
[§ 122, 12].

TaTnp, -poc, 0, father.

Tarpio¢ 2, belonging to
the country.

matpic, -idoc, 7, native
country.

Tlarpoxioc, 6, Patroclus.

TETPWC, -woc, 6, uncle, 47.

ave, to cause to cease,
124 [Aor. Pass. éxad-
adnv ; Pf. Mid. or Pass.
TéTavpat, to cease; Fut.
Perf. wexatoouat, will
cease].

mé6n, 77, fetter.

mediov, TO, a plain.

mete, to persuade, 124;
Mid., 22 [Aor.ézeiod ny,
I obeyed].

melo, -o0¢, 7, persua-
siveness.

metvaw, to hunger [Cont.,
§ 97, 3]. ftry.

meipaoual, Dep. Pass., to

TEAAYOC, -OVE, TO, Sea.

141

TleAorovyvyoakoc, Pelo-
ponnesian.

TleAoré1vy00¢, 7, Pelo-
ponnests.

IléAow, -ozoc, 6, Pelops.
meATaoThc, 6, shieldsman.

méure, to send [§ 102, 5].

TEVNC, -NTOC, O, 7, POOF.

mevyntevw@, to be poor.

Twevdew, to grieve.

mevdiKGe ExW, W. g., to be
sad about something.

TIENOQ, see wacyo.

wevia, 7, poverty.

mevixpoc 3, poor.

tTévoual, to be poor.

mer aive, to make ripe, 130
[§ 111, Rem. 2].

Tem puuery, 7, fate.

TET OV, -OVOG, ripe.

tepaivw, to complete, 131
[§ 111, Rem. 2].

Tepaiog 3, beyond.

mépac, -aToc, 76, end, 147.

mepaw, to transport, [§ 98,
(a)].

meplayw, to lead round.

TeplBa2rAw,to throw round.

mepidpo“og 2, running
round. [cles.
TlepixAje, -éovc, 6, Peri-
Teplopaw, to overlook,
permit, 147.
mepitAoo¢, -ove, 0, voyage
round. [133.
Teplppéw, to flow round,
mepltoTéAAw, to clothe, 130.
weplTiOnut, to put or set
round, [121.
TepitpéTo, to turn round,
mepitto¢ 8, beyond the
usual number, more
than sufficient.
meptdépw, to carry about.
Tlepcedovn, 7, Proserpine.
Tlépone, -ov, 6, a Persian.
Ileporxoc, Persian.
meTavyvpl, to expand
[§ 139, (a), 3].
méTouat, to fly [§ 125, 23].
wéTpa, 7, rock.
IIEYOOMAI, see zur ha-
voudt.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

aH; whither? where ?
TnyN, 7, fountain.
THyvuul, to fix, make firm
[§ 140, 8].
THYXVG, -Ew¢, 0, cubit, 51.
aiKpoc 8, bitter.
mélw, to press.
ripnaAnue, to fill [§ 135, 5].
TiTpyyut,to burn [§135,6].
xivw, to drink [§ 119, 3].
mimioxa, to give to drink
[§ 122, 13].
mimpaokw,to sell[§122,14]
mint, to fall [§ 123].
TloTEvw, to trust, 25.
TioTL¢, -Eu¢, 77, belief, 133.
mloTo¢ 8, trustworthy, 27.
Tiwy, -ovoc, fat.

TAala, to cause to wan-
der [Char., § 105, 4].
tAacow, to. form [Char.,

§ 105, 1].
ThaoT1Kn,7,sculpture, 160
TiAdraca, 7, Plataea.
mTAESpov, 76, measure of

100 feet. -
tAetoToc 3, most.

TAEKW, to knit, weave. —
TAcovakic, oftener.
TEOVEKTNC,-OV,aVaricious.
mAeovesia, 7, avarice.
mwAevpa, 7, side.

mwAéw, to sail [§ 116, 3;

Cont., § 97, 1].

TAnyn, 7, a blow, wound.
TAnSoc, -ovce, 76, multi-
tude, 72.
TARY, W. g.. except, 145.
mAnpne, -€¢, Ww. g., full,
satisfied with.
TAnovavw, to approach.
mAnotocg 8, near, 109.
TAnTTo, to strike, 131 [Pf.
mér Anya, L have struck;

Aor. Pass. éaajynv;

but in composition, é7-

Atyy, e.g. exAdynv].

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

wAivioc, 7, brick.
tAbo¢ = TAove, 0, Voyage.
mAovatog 3, rich.
mAovTéw, to be or become
rich.
miovtilw, to enrich, 64.
mAovToc, 6, riches, 39. —
tive, to wash [§ 111, 6].
mvéw, to breathe, blow
[§ 116, 3; Cont., § 97,1].
movev ; whence ?
movéw, to desire [§ 98,(b)].
moéw, to make, do; «0
toléw, 107.
ToalnTHC, -ov, 6, poet.
motkihoc 8, variegated, 40.
Town, -Evoc, 6, shepherd.
motoc ; 3, of what kind ?
Todeuéw, w. d., to carry
on war.
moAéutoc 8, hostile, 88.
TodeutKoc 8, warlike.
mOXEuOC, 6, war.
moAtopKéw, to besiege.
ToALopKia, 77, siege.
TOAtC, -Ewe, 7, city, 51.
modreia, 7, the state, civil
polity, 90.
moAttevw, to govern the
state; Mid., to live asa
citizen, to govern the
state.
ToAiTyC, -ov, 6, citizen.
ToAiTiKo¢ 3, relating to
the state, 165.
moAAakic, often.
moAAarAaoltog 3, many
times more.
moAAoi, many. flux.
TloaAvdeixnc, -ovc, 6, Pol-
moAvKotpavia, 7, the rule
of many.
Todvioyoc¢ 2, loquacious.
moAvrovoc 2, laborious.
mode, much, 53 [§ 48].
mohvtéhera, 7, costliness,
136.

ToAvTeEdne, -é¢, costly, 163.
Tohugiria, H, multitude
of friends.
ToAvyetpia, 7, multitude
of hands, of workmen.
movéw,to toil,107 [§98,(b)].
movypoc 8, wicked, 48.
Tovoc, 0, toil, 28. [90.
topevw, to lead forward,
Topvéw, to destroy.
ToploTtKoc 3, w. g., Skilled
in procuring.
topdupeoc (otc) 3, purple.
Tloceidév, -Gvoc, 6, Po-
seidon, Neptune.
Toate, -Ewe, 7, drinking, 51.
mOc0¢ ; 8, how great ?
TOTALOC, 0, river.
moré, once, 438.
moTEpoc, which of two, 165.
moTov, TO, drink.
movc, 700dc, 0, foot.
TpadypLa, -aTOC, TO, AN ac-
tion, 40.
TpaxTLKOc 8, capable of ac-
complishing, obtaining.
mpaélc, -Ewe, 7), an action.
mpdoc 3, mild, 53.
TpaTTw, to do, act; mpar-
TW, TpaTTou“atl TLva ap-
yiplov, to demand of
one; w. adv., 89.
mpétet, it is becoming, 24.
mpéoBerc, oi, ambassadors.
TpEeoBEVvTNe, -0v, 0, ambas-
sador, 121.
mpEapue, -eLa, -v, old.
mpiaota, to buy [§ 135,
p- 165].
mpiv, before; w. inf, 106;
mplv av, w. subj., 88.
mpiw, to saw [Pass. with
0, § 95].
Tpoarpéopuat, to prefer.
mpoBarov, 76, sheep.
Tpoyovoc, 6, ancestor.
Tpodidwut, to betray.

321

mpodorne, -o0, 6, betrayer.
mpoetrov (Aor.), to say
before, command.
mpoépxouat, to go before.
mpotvuia, 7, willingness.
mpobipoc 2, willing.
mpotipws, adv., willingly.
mpodeirw, to forsake, 121.
mpopaxoc, 6, fighting in
front, champion.
mpovoéw, to consider be-
forehand, 142.
mpovola, 7, foresight, 87.
mpootda, to know before-
hand.
Tpocayopevu,to call, name.
TpocBaAru, w. g., to smell
of something.
mpocBAérw, to look at.
Tpocdokaa, to expect, 107.
mpocesut, inf. zpoceivat, to
be present, 47.
mpocerut, inf. zpocrévat, to
go to, 168.
Tpocedavva, to advance
towards.
mpocépyouat, to come to.
Tpocnkel,it is becoming,24.
Tpocnkwv, becoming, 138,
Tpooniaiva, to reveal, 165.
mpooder, before; w. g.
[§ 24]. |
mpocteroc 8, artificial, 175.
TPOCKUVEW, W. 2., tO WOr-
ship, honor.
m™pocodoc, #, approach, 54.
mpocrintw, to fall upon,
occur, 87.
mpoc7véw,to breathe upon.
mpocrotéw, to add to, 109.
mpoctidnut, to add.
mpocdépw, to bring to, 30.
mpotepog 8, before, sooner.
mpoTidnut, to put before,
159.
TpoTpéTw, to turn to, 41.
mpodntevw to prophesy.

322

mputavelov, 76, court of Adrarov, 76, a club.

justice at Athens.
apoio 3, early.
mpOToc 3, first.
mTaipw, to sneeze.
mrTaiw, to strike against
[Pass with a, § 95].
TTEPOV, TO, wing.
mrépvé, -yos, 7), wing.
mticow, to pound [Char.,
§ 105, 1].
TTwxOC, Very poor, 56.
IluSaydpac, -ov, 6, Pytha-
goras. | pact.
TuKvo¢ 8, numerous, com-
rbAn, 7, gate.
moveavoua, to
[§ 121, 15].
mip, Tupdc, TO, fire.
Tvpyos, 0, tower.
Tupdw, to burn.
mo (enclitic), yet.
TwAéw, to sell.
TOTOTE, ever.
m™G¢; how?

inquire

ia
‘Pddzoc 3, easy-
padiwc, adv., easily.
peta, -aToc, TO, stream.
péw, to flow [§ 116, 3].
‘PEQ, see onl.
pyyvuut, to tear, break
[§ 140, 9].
pjua, -aToc, 76, word.
AjTwp, -opoc, Oo, orator.
piyoc, -ovc, TO, cold.
pryéa, to be cold [Cont.,
§ 97, 3, (b)].
pirréw, to throw.
pixrw, to throw.
pic, ptvoc, 7, nose.
pi, burdc, 7, reed.
pododaKrvaoc 2, rosy-fin-
gered.
§ddov, 76, rose.
ford, 7, pomegranate.

puSyuoc, 6, rhythm.

proravo, to drag [Char.,
§ 105, 2].

povyvut, to strengthen
L§ 139, (c), 2].

=.

Ladapic, -ivoc, 7, Salamis.

oGAntyé,-tyyoc,7,trumpet.

caAriva, to blow a trum-
pet [Char., § 105, 4].

oaAniKkTy¢, -0d, 0, trum-
peter.

Xayutoc, 0, Samian.

LapdavaraAoc, 6, Sarda-
napalus.

Lapoere, -ewy, ai, Sardis.

Ldpoc, 6, the Sarus.

caps, capkoc, 7, flesh.

oa7Ta, to load. |

cad7e, -é¢, clear.

oadeec, clearly.

oBévyvpt, to quench, 163
[§ 139, (b), 45 second
Aor., § 142].

céBac, TO, respect, 47.

oéGouat, to honor, 31.

oetouoc, 6, earthquake.

ceiw, to shake [Pass. with
o, § 95].

céhac, -aoc, TO, splendor.

ond, TO, Sign, monument.

onuaive, to give a sign.

onueiov, TO, sign.

olyaw, to be silent.

oLyf, 7], Silence.

cidnpoc, 6, iron.

Givarl, -€0¢, TO, mustard.

citoc, 0, corn.

olwrdw, to be silent.

olWT7], 7, Silence.

clornA6c 8, silent.

oKad06, -ov¢g, TO, trench.

oxedalu, to scatter, 124.

oxedavyvut, to scatter
[5 189, (a), 4],

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

okédAw,to dry up [§142,3]

OKHTTpOV, TO, sceptre.

oKLG, 7), shadow.

oxAnpoc 3, dry, 121.

cKkoALo¢ 3, crooked, 23.

oKxoréw, -éouat, to behold,
consider.

oxdr7oc, 6 and 76, darkness.

OKOTTW, to joke, 59. |

ouaw, to smear |Cont.,
§ 97,3; Aor. Pass. éo-
Lax env].

codia, 7, Wisdom. [46.

coglotic, -0b, 6, sophist,

LogokAje, -éovc, 6, Soph-
ocles.

oo¢dc 3, wise.

oravifa, w. g., to be in
want. :

omravic, -ew¢, 7, need, 51.

oraviwc, adv., rarely, 160.

=rapty, 7, Sparta.

Lraptarye, -ov, 6, Spar-
tan.

ZraptiatiKoc, Spartan.

oxaw, to draw [§ 98, (a)].

omeipw, to sow [Pf. éoxo-
pa; Aor.Pass.éomipyv].

onévdw, to pour libations
Mid., to make a, treaty.

orevdw, to hasten, 17.

orovdatw, to hasten, be
zealous, 131.

orovdaioc 3, zealous, 34,

orovdaiwc, adv., zealously,
63.

orovey, 7, zeal.

oTayOY, -6voc, 7}, drop, 52.

oTdad.ov, TO, stadium, 131.

oTaduoc, 6, a station, 72.

oTalw, oral, to trickle
[Char., § 105, 2].

sTactafw, to revolt, be at
variance, 87.

oTaale, -ews, 7, faction, 51.

oTayue, -voc, 6, ear of corn.

oréyn, 7), roof, house.

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

j

oTéAAw, to send [second
Aor. Pass., § 102, 2, and
§ 114].

orevavw, to sigh [Char.;
§ 105, 2].

oTépya, W. a., to love; w.
d., to be contented with.

oTepéw TIVE TL, to deprive
one of something [§ 122,
16]. fof.

oTépouat, to be deprived

oTepickw, to deprive of
[§ 122, 15].

oTébavoc, 0, crown.

oTHAn, ), pillar.

oTnpitw, to make firm
[Char., § 105, 2].

orifw, to prick [Char.,
§ 105, 2].

OTOAH, 7, robe.

oToua, -ato¢, TO, mouth.

cTopévyupt, OTOPVUp"L, to

~ spread out |§139,(b),5].

oTpaTevpa, -aToc, TO, ar-
my, 72.

oTpaTeva, to make an ex-
pedition, 89.

oTparnyoc, 6, a general. .

oTpaTla, 7, army.

OTPATLOTNG, -ov, 0, soldier:

oTparomedevouat, to en-
camp.

oTpatéredov, TO, encamp-
ment, encamped army.

oTpatoc, 6, army.

oTpéG26w, to torture.

oTpédw, to turn | Aor. Pass.
éoTpadny, eéoTpéddyy ;
Perf. Mid. or Pass.
§ 102, 6].

oTpavvuul, to spread out
[5 139, (c), 3].

cTvyéw, to hate.

ZuBapirne, -ov, 6, Syba-
rite.

syytyvookw, to think
with, agree with; éuav-

T@, to be conscious; o.
TLvi, to pardon.
OVYYVOLWY, -OV, W. g., par-
doning; (2) agreeing
with.
ovyypadu, to describe, 72.
ovyKvKdw,to confound,106
ovyxaipo, to rejoice with.
ovyxéw, to pour together,
133.
ovky, 7, fig-tree.
ciKov, TO, fig.
ovAdw Tivé TL, to deprive
one of something.
ovAdap Cava, to take with,
seize, 107.
LbAAac, -ov, 6, Sylla.
ovAréyew, to collect.
ovAdoyoc, 6, assembly.
ovpPaive, to go with, 136.
ovpBoviedw, to advise.
ciuBovaoc, 6, adviser.
ovupuayia, 7, alliance, aid.
obpmaxoc, 0, ally, 106.
oburac, all together, 72.
ovurinyvuel, to join to-
gether, 172.
ovurive, to drink with.

pe: to fall with, 142.
ovprovéw, to work with,

107. - (142.
cuudépw, to carry with,
oupdopa, 7, an event, 138.
ovvayavigouat, to contend

with.
ovvaipouat, W. g., to take

part in.
ovvaroAAvml, to destroy

together, 163. 124.
cvvapuoca, to fit together,
ovvoeitvoc, 6, table-com-

panion.
civoeecpuoc, 6, band; con-

junction. [142.
ovvd.aTpiBa, to live with,
obverut, inf. cvvetvat, to
be with.

823

obverpt, inf. ovviévat, w.
d., to come ca assemble
with. [qual.

ovvegopuolow, to make e-

ovverroidwpt, to give up,
162.

cuvepyoc, 6, helper.

civecic, -ewc, 7, under-
standing.

ovveto¢ 8, sensible, 72.

ovv7 FeLa,7,intercourse,22,

ovyGantw, to bury with
ovve7kKy, i), treaty.
ovviornpt, to put together.

cvvvéw, to spin with, 162.

cbvoida, to know with;
éavT@, to be conscious.

ovyTatro, to arrange, 122.

ovyTpéyo, to run with one.

ovvrvyxavew, to meet with,
happen.

ovpty§, -tyyoc, 7, flute.

ovpifw (cupitTw), to whis-
tle [Char., § 105, 2].

Lvpoc, 0, a Syrian.

ovpa, to draw.

ov¢, ovdc, 6, 7, boar, Sow.

ovoknvéw, to tent with,
eat with.

ogalw, ogatTa, to kill
[Char., § 105, 2].

ogaipa, 7, ball.

oduAdw, to deceive, 113.

ogddpa, very, 147.

ogodpéc 8, violent.

o¢ifw, to throb [Char.,
§ 105, 2].

odvpa, 7, hammer.

axaw, to loose [§ 98, (a)].

oxodaiog 3, lazy.

cola, to save, 52 |Perf
Mid. or Pass. céowopar;
Aor. Pass. éood7v].

Dwxparnc, -ove, 6, So-
crates.

capa, -atoc, 76, the body

GwThp, -7poc, 6, preserver.

324

owT7pia, 7, preservation.

cwdpovéw, to he of sound
mind, 165.

owdpoovyn, 7, modesty, 59.

cadgparv, wise, 36.

f.
TaAavroyv, 76, talent (a
weight).
TaAapos, 6, little basket.
TaAac,-atva,-av, wretched.
Tavradoc, 6, Tantalus.

Taéic, -ewc, 7, order, 121.

tamelvoc 8, low, humble.
TaTelvow, to humble.
TapatTw, to throw into
confusion, 122. .
rapay7, 7, confusion, 122.
TaTTw, to arrange, 122.
Tabpoc, 6, bull. [40.
tavTodoyia, 7, tautology,
TadpoC, 7], grave.
Taxa, quickly, 131.
Taxéwe, quickly.
TGYXOG, -ovg, TO, quickness.
Taa¢, Ta®, 6, peacock.
Té—xai, both—and, 44.
Teyéa, 7, Tegea.
Teiva, to stretch [Pf. ré-
taxa; Pf. Mid. or Pass.
§ 113].
Telpw, to wear out, tire, 22.
TEeLyoc, -ovc, TO, wall.
Tekuaipw, to limit.
Tékvov, TO, child.
Tedevraioc 8, last.
TeAevTaw, to end, die.
TedevTn, 7, end, death.
TeAéw, to accomplish, 107
[§ 98, (b)].
téhoc, -ove, TO, end, 181.
Téuva, to cut, divide, 130
[§ 119].
Tépac, -atoc, 76, wonder.
tépt@, to delight, 34.
tetpaivw, to bore [§ 111,
Rem. 2].

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

tétTe&, -iyo¢, 0, grasshop-
per.

Texvaoual, Dep. Mid., to

' contrive.

TEYYN, 7, art.

TExviTne, -ov, 0, artist.

THK, to melt, 1338.

TnAéuayoc,6, Telemachus.

THAtKkovTOE, so large, 67.

tnAov, far.

Tidpa, 7, turban.

TiGnut, to place, 159; v0-
pooug TideoSat, to make
laws [§ 133].

TLORVN, 7, nurse.

tixtw, to beget [Fut. ré-
Eowat; Aor. éTeKkov ;
Perf. réroxa].

Ttuaw, to honor.

Tun, 7, honor.

tiutocg 3, honored, 56.

Ti“wpéw, to help, 168.

Tiwpia, 7, punishment.

tivo, to expiate, pay
[§ 119, 4].

TLTpOokw, to wound [§122,
16].

TARvat, to bear [§ 135, 7].

Tol, indeed, 136.

toivuy, hence, therefore.

Toio¢g 8, of such a nature.

TotovTog 3, such [§ 60].

ToAuaw, to dare, 106.

TOFEevua, -aTOG, TO, arrow.

To&tky, 7, archery.

To6£0v, TO, bow.

Tomoc, 0, place.

TooovToe 3, so great [§ 60].

Tore, then.

Tpaytkoc 3, tragic.

Tpayoc, 6, goat.

Tpaywola, 7, tragedy.

Tparela, 7, table.

tpérw, to tum; Mid., to
turn myself; (2) for
myself, i. e. to put to
flight. [Aor. étpewa;

i
Mid. -aunv ; Pass. érpé-
ony; étparov, -dunr,
étpamyv ; Pf. Act. Té-
tpopa ; Pf. Mid. or Pass.
TéTpappat, § 102, 5, 6). -

Tpéba, to nourish, 25 [Fut.
Spébw; Aor. EVperna ;
Pf. rétpoda, § 105, 2;
Pf. Mid. or Pass. rés-
paupat, ibid., 6; Aor.
Pass. étpédnv (seldom
éTpégd ny) ].

Tpéxo, to run [§ 126, 5].

Tpéw, to tremble [§98,(b) ].

TpiBw, to rub.

TpLNPNS, -Hpove, 7), trireme.

Tpit{w, to chirp [Char
§ 105, 2].

Tpimove, -0do¢, tripod, 145.

Tpowlnv, -qvoc, 7, Troe-
zene.

TpoTatov, TO, trophy.

TpOm0¢, 6, Way, manner,67.

tpvo7, 7, luxury, 22.

Tpuvdnthc, -ov, oO, luxu-
rious, 24.

Tpoyw, to gnaw [Fut. Tpd-
Eowat; Aor. étpayor].

uyyave, to obtain [§ 121,
16].

TiuBoc, 6, tomb.

TtoumTa, to strike.

Tupavvic, -tdoc, 7, tyranny.

Tbpavvoc, 6, tyrant, 91.

TopBy, 7, crowd, bustle.

Tug¢Adw, to make blind.

roxy, 7; fortune, 23.

¥
‘YaxivSoe, 6, hyacinth.
bBpilecy, w. a.,to be haugh-
ty towards one, to mal-
treat. (51.
bGBptc, -ewc, 7, insolence,
bBptorhe, -od, 6, insolent
man. [health.
tytaiva, to be in good

GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

:

tdwp, T6, water [§ 47].

vel, it rains.

widc, 6, son.

imaxoverv, w. d., to obey.

imdpxw, to be at hand, to
be, 41.

imeciornut, to remove;
Mid., to go or come
out from.

imeparoUrvyoKw, W. gen.,
to die for one.

birepaySouat, to be much
grieved.

brepBarAw, to throw be-
yond, exceed.

brepBacia, 7, trespass.

brepngavoc?,haughty,110.

brepopaw, to look over,
to despise.

birépdpwv, haughty, 36.

mnpEeTew, W. d., to aid,
serve.

imioyvéoua, to promise
[§ 120, 3].

bavoe, 6, sleep. [ing.

broypady, 7, paint, paint-

brodnua, -aToc, TO, san-
dal, 108.

biméectc, -ewc, 7, hypo-
thesis.

bTOMEVO, W. a, to await,
endure.

inrogépw, to endure.

troxwpéw, to go back.

torepaiog 3, following.

torepoc 3, later, following.

igaive, to weave [Perf..

tgayxa; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. t¢acpat].
trpoc, -ovc, 76, height, 48.
invéw, to elevate.

®.
@ATQ, see éodin.
gaivw, to show, 121.
gavepoc, evident, 168.
gapyakor, Té, remedy.

daoxw,to assert [§ 122, 17].

pavroc, bad, evil.

deidouat, Dep. Mid., w. g.,
to spare.

gévas, -dKoc, 6, impostor.

Pepextdnc, -ovg, 6, Phe-
recydes.

pépw, to bear, 23 [§ 126, 6].

gevya, to flee, 17 [§ 116,3].

oni, to say [§ 126, 7; in-
flection, § 135, 8].

gave, to anticipate, 136
[§ 119, 5].

oeipw, to destroy [§ 111,
Pf. Act. é¢vopa; Pf.
Mid. or Pass. é¢ap-
pac; Fut. Pass. ¢¢apy-
coat and second Aor.
Pass. é¢%apnv, in the
sense of to perish].

odovoc, 0, envy.

gaan, 4, drinking-cup.

giAavSpwro¢g 2, philan-
thropic, 43.

ocAéw, to love.

gtria, }, friendship.

gidtog 3, friendly.

gtAokepdnc, -é¢, fond of
gain.

prAouadhc, -éc, fond of
learning.

gAdgevoc 2, hospitable.

otAocodgéw,to philosophize.

gidoc, 6, a friend, dear.

orAoxpnuoovvn, 7, avarice.

gAifw, to bubble [Char.,
§ 105, 2].

¢o03éw, to frighten, 109.

goBoc, 0, fear.

gotvixeocg (otc) 3, purple.

golTaw, to go to and fro.

govet¢, -Ewc, 6, murderer.

govedw, to murder.

gévoc, 6, murder.

dop87, 7, pasture, food.

gopéw, to carry.

poppuyé, -cyyoc, #, harp.
28

625

¢palu, to say, tell, 124.

opny, -evoc, H, mind, 36.

ppovéw, to think, 107.

dpovTilw, to care for, 27.

ppovtic, -idoc, 7, concern,
39.

Dpvyia, 7, Phrygia.

bpvé, -byoc, 6, a Phrygian.

ovAaky, 7, guard, watch.

otAaE, -Koc, 6, a guard, 51.

guiatra, to guard, 36;
Mid. w. a., to guard
against something, 122.

gvonpua, -atoc, 76, breath.

ovotc, -ewc, 7, nature.

guTevw, to plant.

dt, to bring forth, 88
[§ 142, 10].

dwvéw, to produce a sonnd,
speak.

$av7, 7, Voice.

6p, dwpéoc, 6, thief.

$G¢, @wtdc, 76, light.

X.
Xaivw, to yawn, 130.
xaipw, to rejoice, 17 [§ 125,

24].
xaAaw, to loosen [§ 98,
(a)]. [22.

yarenéc¢ 8, troublesome,
xarerds, adv., with diffi-
culty.
xanivoc, 6, bridle.
xaAkéc, 6, brass.
xXaAKeo¢ 3, brazen.
xaptetc, graceful.
xaplértwc, gracefully.
xapilouat, to gratify, 37.
xaptc, -iToc, 7, favor, 39.
xaoKw, to yawn [§ 122,18].
xeluov, -Gvoc, 6, winter.
xeip, -poc, 7, hand [§ 35,
Rem. 2].
Xelpoouat, to subdue, 110.
xeALdan’, -6voc, 7, swallow.
xéa, to pour [§ 116, 3].

326

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

ynpow, to deprive of, 113. ypiw, to anoint [Pass. pevorye, -ov, 6, liar.

x2é¢, yesterday.

xy8or, -dvoc, 7, the earth,
133.

XlTOV, -Gvoe, 0, coat.

XLV, -Ov0C, 7), SNOW.

yore, yoae, 6, measure,44.

xoipeiog 3, of swine.

xoAdouat, to be angry at.

xOAoc, 6, anger, 172.

xyopevw, to dance.

xvopés¢, 6, dance.

yoo, to heap up [Pass.
with o, § 95}.

ypaouat, to use [§96, Rem;
Cont., § 97, 3, (a)]-

xpaw, to give an oracle
[§ 96, Rem.; Cont., § 97,
3, (a)]. |

xpeia, H, need, 22. [2].

xp7, it is necessary [§ 135,

XPKO, W.g., to be in want.

AXpHua, -aToc, Td, a thing,
property, 41.

xphotuwoc, useful, 56.

xpnopoctvn, poverty, 39.

xpnoroc 3, useful, 41.

with o, § 94, 1].
xpovoc, 6,.time.
xpvotor, 76, gold.
xpvods, 6, gold.
xpvoeoc (ovc), -€a (77), -eov
(odv), golden.
xpGua, -atoc, Td, skin.
xpavvuut, to color [§ 139,
(c)].
xopa, H, country, region.
xwpic, Ww. g., separately,
apart from.
xwolopuoc, 6, separation.

+.
Yaiw, w.g., to touch | Pass.
with o, § 95].
aw, to rub [| Pass. with o;
Cont., § 97, 3, (a)].
wéya, to blame.
wevdye, -é¢, false.
Webdopkog 2, perjured; TO
webdopkov, perjury.
weddoc, -ovg, TO, a lie.
wevdw, to deceive, 47;
Mid., 89.

pv, wnvec, 6, wasp.
whgolroua, -aTog, TO,
cree, 160. .
wuxn, 7, the soul.
pixoc, -ove, Td, cold.

de-

Q.

’Q10n (Gdn), 7, song.

a@véw, to push [§ 124, 6].

Oxide, -ela, -b, quick.

@uoe, 6, shoulder.

evéouzat,to buy [Aug.,§87,
4. Comp. mpiactat].

@vio¢ 8, for sale; Ta Ga,
wares.

@¢, as, when, how, because;
O¢ TaYLOTA, aS soon as
possible; with indefi-
nite numbers;—that;
in order that [§ 181].

@cmep, as, just as.

OcTe, so that.

ogédeta, 7, advantage.

ObeAéw, w. a., to benefit.

OpéAuuog 2, useful.

dp, ordc, R, eye, counte-
nance.

II. ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

The numerals after a Greek word, denote the page where the meaning of the
word is more fully given, or where another word of the same signification may
be found. For the proper use of the prepositions, the student will depend prin-
cipally upon the definitions given in §§ 163—167.

A.

Abandon, éxAeizw, mpo-
Acizw, KaTadeinw, ért-
Acirw, Adin.

ability, dtvapse, -ewe, 77.

abide by, wapayévo, éu-
péva.

able, to be, dévayat, icyia,
oidg Te ipl, EXW.

abolish, Avw.

abounding in, evtopo¢ 2.

about, 7epi, cdi.

Abradatas, “AGpadarac,
-ov, 0.

abroad, to travel, dody-
pew.

absence, in the, day.

absent, dav.

absent, to be, dept.

abstain from, améyouas.

abundance, d¢Vovia, #:

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

accompany, é7rouat.
accomplish, éfepya¢ouaz,
_ TEAéw, OlaT., TEepaiva,
dviw ; to accomplish, as
a journey, katavio; =
to effect, duampatropuat.
according to, in accord-
ance with, xara.
account of, on, dca, ézi,
évexa, U7ép.
account, on this, 0é TotTo.
accuse of, ypadouat, kaTy-
yopéw, LOK.
accuser, KaT7yopoe, 0.
accustom, étifw.
Acheron, ’Avépwv, -ovTog,
re
Acherusian, ’Ayepototoc.
achieve, 2fepyafouat, dua-
TpaTTOUat.
Achilles, ’AysAAcbe, -éwe, 6.
acquainted with, to be,
ida, éxioTapae.
acquire, KT@ouat,
TOLEW, AayXEVO.
acquisition, KT7OL6, -Ewe,
acquit, droAvety.
Acropolis, ’AxporoAuc,
EC, UE
across, passage, 7apodoc,
7).
act, an, TpGsec, “EOS, 1,
mpadyua, TO; = work,
Epyov, TO.
act, to, TeaTTw, Opao.
action, see act.
add, mpocrotéw, mpocrti-
Onl, eretcOnue.
administer, dsovxéw, mrods-
Teva ; to be an admin-
istrator, oikéw; to ad-
minister the govern-
ment,Olotkéw THY TOALY.
administration, good, ev-
vouia, 7.
admire, Javyaco, Zyapat,
108.

Tpoc-

ia

Fe

adorn, Koopéw, dydAhu,
doKéw.

adorn with (invest), dp-
plréevvvpl Twa TL.

Adranum, “Adpavoy, 76.

adult, TéAevo¢ 38.

advance, TpoPaivw, dpuaw.

advantage, ogéAeta, 7, 6v-
NOL, -EWC, 7.

,an, dyadov, 76; ad-

vantages, Ta dayavda.

, for the, of, mpdc.

advantageous, ypfoluoc 3,
xXpnotos 3, adéALuoc.

advice, BovAg, 7, Bovaet-
La, TO.

advise, BovAciw, cvpBov-
Asbo Tivi.

adviser, cbuPovdoc, 0.

Aeolus, Alodog, 6.

Aeschines,Adoyivye, -ov, 6.

Aetna, Airy, 77.

Aeson, Alowyv, -ovoe, 6.

Aethiopian, an, Aidiow,
-ioToe, 0.

affair, mpGyua, TO; = 0C-
cupation, mpa&c¢, 7.

affirm, $7ul.

affliction, watoc, -ovg, Td.

afford, tapéyw, rapéyoua.

afraid, to be, doGéopuar.

after, ueTa.

afterwards, émecta, peté-
ELTA.

again, adic, maAuv.

against, dvti, mpdc, ért.

Agamemnon, Ayayéuver,
-ovoc, 0.

age, 7Atkia, 7, 106.

, old, y7pac¢, -aog, TO.

Agesilaus, ’Ayyoiddoc,
-aov, 6.

agreeable, 70v¢, -eia, -d.

agriculture, yewpyia, 7.

aid,to render, BonVéw, w.d.

Ajax, Aiac, -avToe, 6.

alarm, to, KaTaTwAqTTo.

327

Alcestis, "“AAKnotig, -t0¢
and -ido¢, 7.

Alcibiades, ’AAKiPiadq¢,
-0v, 0.

Alexander,’A2éfavdpoc,6,

alike, duoiwe.

all, tac, dmdae.

alleviate, érixovdila; to
alleviate, as grief, Vepa-
Tevo.

alliance, cvypayia, 7.

allow, éd@w.

allowable, to be, eer.

ally, an, ciupayos, 6.

almost, oyxeddv, ddiyov
deiv.

alone, Lovoc ; adv., uévov

already, 767.

also, Kai.

altar, Bapoc, 6.

alternately, év pépec.

although, «dv or kat éap,
KauTép.

always, dei. ;

am (to be), eiui, yiyvopas,
ITapYO, Exo w. adv.

Amazon, ’Aualév, -évoe,
7. [-0d, 6.

ambassador, mpeoSeur7e,

ambassadors, mpéaGece, ob.

amid, év.

among, év, wapd.

amputate, dtoTéuva.

Anaxagoras, ’Avatayépac,
-0v, 0. [oé.

ancestors, Tpoyeyevnuéevot,

ancient, zadaiog 38.

and, Kai.

anger, 6py7, 7, XOAo¢, 6.

angry, to be, dpyifouat,
év Opyf Exo.

angry with, to be, dyo-
pat, 88. [76.

animal, (Gov, 76, Pnptov,

announce, ayytAdAo, 88.

annually, car’ évvavrév.

anoint, dAsi¢w, xpiw.

328

another, GAAoc.

ant, wipuné, -nKoc, 0.

Antisthenes, ’Avtiodévge,
-oue, 0.

any one, 7c.

any thing, 72.

any where, 70d; in a sen-
tence with a negative,
ovdauod.

anxiety, see care.

Apollo, A76AA a», -wvoe, 6.

appear, daivouat, 138.

appetite, yaor7p, -époe, 7.

appoint, dodetkvupe ;
appoint something to
one, Opifw, 124.

Apollodorus, ’A70A/6do-
pos, 6. :

apprehend, ovAdauBavo.

approach, to, wAyjolalo,
TpOGEelue.

approbation, dox:uacia, 7.

approve of, ézaivéw, 89.

Arabia, ’ApaGia, 7.

Arabians, “Apaec, oi.

Araspas, ’Apéorag, -ov, 6.

Arcadian, ’Apkac, -adoc, 6.

Archestratus, ’Apyéorpa-
ToC, 6.

archer, Togé7T7¢, -ov, 6.

archery, Tofx7, 7.

ardor, otovdn, 7, Suuce, 6.

argument, Adyoc, 6.

Ariaeus, ’Apiaiog, 6.

arise (= to be), yiyvoua:.

Aristides, ’Apsoreidye, -ov,
0

Aristippus, ’Apiorimroc, 6.

Aristogiton, ’Apiotoyei-
TWY, -OvoC, O.

Aristotle, ’AparoréAne,
-0uG, 0.

armament, o7éAoc, 6.

arms (weapons), 67Aa, Ta.

army, OTpaTla, 7, oTpa-
Tc, 6.

around, epi, audi.

arrange, dlaTaTTw, ovv-
TaTTO, 124, 159.

arrogant, iGpioT7¢, -od,

brépopov.

arrow, Togevua, TO.

Arsamus, “Apoayog, 6.

art, TEyvN, 77.

Artaxerxes, “Aptagép&ne,
-0v, 0.

Artemis, “Apreytc, -idoc, 7.

artificer, oyaorne, -ov, 0,
épyaTne, -ov, 0.

artist, Teyvirye, -ov, 0.

as, O¢, Ocrep.

as long as, éw¢.

as much, TocovToc.

as soon as, O¢ TUyLoTA.

as well as, Kai — kai.

ascend the throne,ei¢ Baot-
Aeiav KATAOTHVAL.

ascertain, Tuy Pavouat.

ashamed, to be, aidéouaz,
aioxvvouat.

Asia, ’Aoia, 77.

ask, épwTao, aitéw, 88.

aspire after, opéyouat, w.g.,
OLOKELY, W. 2.

assert, ont.

assist, TapacTHval, ovp-
mwovéw, 175; =to de-
fend, dive.

assign to, didwpe.

associate with,
oDvELLL.

assured, to be (think), vo-
bilo, Hyéopat.

Assyria, ’Acoupia, 7.

Assyrian, ’Aoctptoc, 6.

astonish, KaTaTAqTTw.

Astyages, ’Aorvayne, -ove,
;
6.

OuLnéw,

at, Tapa.

Athenian, ’A0yvaioc, 6.

Athens, ’AYf#vat, ai.

Athos, “Awe, -a, 6.

Atlantis, ’ArAavric, -idoc,
7).

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

attack, an, tpocGoaq, 7.

attack, to, émuriSeuat, 161

attempt, to, mepdomat ;
= do, 7oléo.

attend to, émipmedéopdl,
gpovTiva.

Attica, "Atriky, 7).

attractive, evyapic, -iTo¢.

auditor, dxpodr7¢, -od, 0.

audible, dkovoro¢ 8.

author, airzoc¢, 0. [?.

authority, royal, GaovAcia,

avail, dvvayat, icxiw.

avarice, wAcovetia, 7, dl-
Aoxpnpocvv”n, 7).

avaricious, 7AeoveKTN¢C,-0U

avert, dAéfw, ayive, ao
TpETO.

avoid, devyo.

await, mpocdokadw, imoué-
VQ, W. a.

awake, to be, éypyyopévat,

awaken, éyelpa, aviornue ;
= to afford, mapéyo,
oTTalo. *

away, to lead, arayw.

B.

Babylon, BaBvadar, -Gvog,
7.

back, dézico ;
avayupéw.

bad, xakéc, wovnpdc, dai-
Aoc, 82. [r6.

bad, the (abstract), caxov,

ball, o¢aipa, 7.

banish, é«GaAAw.

banter, wailo.

barbarian, a, GapGapog, 6.

base, Tazrervéc, KakOdc, 70-
vnpoc.

Basias, Baciac, -ov, 6.

basket, x@veov, 76.

bathe oneself, Aovboyat.

battle, uay7, 7.

be, to, eiul, yiyvcwat, Exw
w. adj. or ady.

go back,

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

be with, civerps.
bear (carry), ¢épw, gopéw,
Baorala; = endure,

TAgut; = bring forth,’

produce, div, dvadgio,
TikTa@.
beast (wild), Onpiov, 76.
beat, xpoidw, 100.
beautiful, xaAdc 3; beau-
tiful persons, of Kado.
—~, the, caddy, 76.
beautifully, xarce.
beauty; xad6v, 76, KGAAoc,
-0uC, TO.
because, 672, 6267.
because of, dvd.
become, yiyvowa.
becomes, it, 7poc7Ket.
becoming, 7pocykwv.
——, it is, mpocnKec.
befitting, zpocjKwy.
before, p96.
(conj.), mpiv, mpore-
pov.
beforehand, to observe,
Tpovoéw.
beg off, éSartéouar.
beget, TikTw.
begin, apyouat.
beginning, 4py7, 7.
behalf of, in, i7ép.
behind, ézicw; to leave
behind, cataAcirw.
being, to come into, yiy-
voudae.
believe (trust), weiSouar ;
= think, 7yéouat, vo-
Hilo, doxet w. d.
believe in gods, teovd¢ vo-
pio. [ywac.
believed, to be, moTeto-
belly, yaor7p, -epdc, 7.
beloved, to be, see to love.
benefactor, evepyérne, -ov,
6.
beneficence, evepyecia, 7.
benefit, to, OgeAéw,dvivgut.

benefit, ebepyecia, 7, xa-
plc, -tTo¢, 7; to confer
a, EvEepyeTEW W. a.

bereave, orepéw, d7oor.
TLVa TLVOEG, Ahatpéopat.

beside, =pé¢ w. d.

besides, ét1, A7v, 145.

besiege, woALopkéw.

best, to be the, dpsoredu.

bestow, didwu, draw.

betimes, etic.

betray, mpodidwyt.

betrayer, mpoddrne, -ov, 6.

between, wetaso.

beware of, dvAarroyat
w. a., evAaBéouat TL.

beyond, prep., i7ép.

beyond desert, zap’ agiav.

bid, keAedw w. a. and inf.

bind, déw.

bird, dpvec¢, -iFo¢, 6, 7.

birth, yévoc, -ovg, 76.

bite, daxva.

black, “éAac 3.

blame, to, éAéyxo, eyo.

blessing, a, dyaSv, 76,
evepyecia, 7.

blind, adj., TudAdc 3.

——, to make, Tv¢A6u.

blood, aiva, 76.

bloom, c¢xu7, 77.

bloom, to, @aAAw.

blow, to, Tvéw.

blow, a, TAny7, 7.

blush, to, épv0paivopar,
w. Aor. and Fut. Pass.

boar, Kampoc, 0.

boastful display of, to
make, émideixvvpe.

body, the, cGya, 76.

, in a (= together),
oourac.

Boeotia, Bowwria, 77.

boil, to, Zw, Cévvvpe.

boldly, Gapparéwc.

boldness (of speech), za-
pnoia, 7.

28*

329

bolt, woxA6c, 6.

booty, A¢ia, 7.

bore through, tpu7déw.

borders, wedopia, Ta.

born, to be,pivat,yiyvoua

both, dudw.

both — and, cai — kai, ré
— Kai.

boundary, zépac, -aroc,
TO, pedopla, Ta.

bow, T6gov, 76.

bowl, mixing,
-71p0¢, 6.

boy, zai¢, 6.

bracelet, WeAAiov, 6.

Brasidas, Bpacidae, -ov, 6.

brass, yaAkéc, 6. [41.

brave, dvdpeiog, yevvaioc,

bravely, dvdpeiwcg, yev-
vaioc. [7.

bravery, avdpia, 7, aperh,

bread, aproc, 6.

break, Jiyvuput, dvap7., Ka-
Tayvvut, 100.

up an encampment,

avalebyvuput, dpyaw.

in pieces, dsapp7jy-
vue.

breathe, tvéw, éurtvéw.

bridge, to throw a, over
Cebyvume w. a.

bridle, yaAcvéc, 6.

brilliant, Aauzpos 8.

bring, ayo, dépw, Kopite.

forward, as a charge,

KaTnyopew.

on, ézayo.

—— to, mpocdépw.

up (= educate), zaz-
debvw, TPédw.

brother, adeAdgéc, 6.

brute, Bdoxnua, TO.

build, idpiw, «rife, 112.

bull, tavpéc, 0.

burden, dyVor, -ove, Td.

burdensome, Papic, yade
wc, apyaréoc, 22.

Kparnp,

330

burn, kalo, tivmpyyt, 171.
burn down, KaTakaiw, Ka-
Taghéyo, éunimpnye.

bury, Garrow.

business, Epyov, TO, aif
La, 76.

but, dé, dAAa.

but also, GAAG Kai.

by, i706, dua, mapa, mpdc.

C.

Cadmus, Kadyoe, 6.

calamity, dtuyia, 7, Ka-
KO6v, TO.

call, to, kadéw, drayopebu,
29; =name, dvoudavo.

call to mind, “vypovedtw
Th.

Callixenus, Kadifevoe, 6.

calumny, daBorn, 7

can (be able), divayac.

capacity, dvvauic, 7; in
a private, idig; in a
public, dnuocie.

Carduchians, Kapdotyou,
ol, adj., -coc.

care, émimédea, 7, dpov-
Tic, -idoc, 7, wépluva, 7,
40.

care, to, care for, take
care for, éxiuédopat,
dpovTiva, 27.

careful, to be (w. inf.),
gpovTifa w. g.

carefully, entpehoc..

carousal, m6acc; eee “Be

carry, dépo, Baoraéu.

about, zepidépw.

—— 0n war, ToAEéew w.d..

— off, dréyu.

Carthage, Kapyndév,
-0V0C, 7).

cast down. to, JimTw.

eastle, dxpa, 77.

Catana, Karéva, 7.

catch, Oypebw, dypebo.

Caucasus, Katxdcor, 6.

cause (= affairs), mpday-
pa, TO.

cauterize, Kalw, aoK.

cease, wavoual, diaheizo.

Cecrops, Kéxpow), -oroc, 6

Celaenae, KeAavat, ai.

celebrate (= praise), é7az-
vEW.

in song, do, tuvéw.

celestial, odpaviog 3.

cell, oikidtov, 6.

censure, wéyw, wéuooual
Tl, éyKahéw.

centre, “écoc 3, pecdTne,
“TOC; 7).

certainly not, or never, ov
#7 |§ 177, 9].

Chaerecrates,
TNC, -OVC, O

Chaldaeans, XaAdaior, oi.

Chalcidian, Xadxudede,
-éwe, O

chance, Ty, 77

change, to, peTaAAatTo,
ere 58, 159.

character, Tpomoe, 6, nYoe,
-0UG, TO.

character of Deity, T2 tot
Seod. [ve.

charge, to take in, AauGa-

charge, to (= attack), émz-
Titeuat w. d.

chariot, dpyua, TO.

charioteer, 7vioyoc, 6.

charm, Tep76v, Td.

Charmides, Xapyidyne, -ov,
6.

cheerfully, 7déw¢.

Chian, Xiog, 6,

child, waic, 6, 7, Téxvor,
TO. [-é¢.

choice (adj.), zoAvTeAge,

choose, aipéowat; = will,
Covaebopat, étéAw, 48.

Cilicia, KuAcxia, 7.

circumference,wepiwerpog,

LZ

7}.

Xaipexpa-

~~ *
.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

citizen, woAirye, 6.

city, TéALC, 7

clear, to (= free from wild
beasts), é&nuepdw ;
purify, xavaipo.

Clearchus, KAéapyoe, 6.

cleave to, éyowar w. g.

Cleonymus, Kieovupor, 6,

Cleopompus,KAedroprog,
6.

Clitus, K2eiroe, 6

close (adj.), éyyve.

, to, KAeio.

clothes, éod37e¢, -7T0¢, 7.

cluster (of grapes), (6-
Tpue, O

cold, pixoc, 76, piyoc, Té.

— (adj.), puxpoc 8.

collect, cvAAéyw, ovviorn-
je.

colony, a7otkia, 7.

combatant, adAnrfe, 6.

combat, “ayy, 7; to en-
gage in single combat,
povopayéw w. d.

come, épyouat, adiKvéo-
par; =TI have come,
am present, 7k.

in or into, ei¢épyo-
Lal, Elcerpe.

come into existence, yiy-
voude.

together, cvvépyopat.

— to a knowledge of,
ytyvaoke.

command (= office), dp-
XI, 7

command, to; keAeva, éri-
TaTTW, TpOCT.; of gen-
erals, wapayyéAdo.

command, to be at one’s,
TAPELLe.

commander, éiTaxr7p,
-jipoc, 6; = a general,
oTpatyyoc, 6; to be a
commander, dpyo.

commend, ézatvéo.

—

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 331

common, Kolvdc 3.

common origin, cvyyev7e,
-é¢.

companion, éTaipoc, 0.

compare, 6“oldw TLvi TL,
elkal@ TLVE TL.

comparison with, in, tapa
W. 2.

compassion upon, to have,
KaTeheéw TLVva.

competent, /xavéc 38.

complete, to, drateAéw.

compulsion, avaykn, 7.

comrade, éTalpoc, 0.

conceal, dmo-, Kataxpir-
Tw, KEvVY, 88.

concealed, xpu7roc 3.

concerns, it, wéAet.

concerned, to be, ¢povti-
Co w. g.

condemn, ‘pivw ; to death,
Gavartov.

confer blessings, ed tovéw
TlVa, EvepyEeTeW TLVG;
great blessings, weyaAa
ebepy. TLVva.

confide in, éxitpéra, re-
Towdévat.

confidence, to have, in,
Cappéw.

confine (= shut up), xa-
Takheio, Kadeipyo.

conformably to, weTa w. g.

confused noises, 0dpuZor,
ol. [w. d.

congratulate, ovvmdouat

conquer, Vikdo, 88.

conscious, cvvetdéc; to be
conscious, obvolda.

consider, oKxo7éw,
133; be considered, vo-
piCouat.

considerate (= moderate),
péTploc 3.

, to be, cwdpovéw.

eonsideration, Aoy:op6c, 0.

constitutionally, vouiuwe.

voew,

construction (building),
OiKOOOUNOLC, EWC, 7).

consult an oracle, wavTeb-
oud.

consume, dvaiickw.

contemplate, Jewpéw, oko-
TEW.

contend (fight), wayouds ;
as in music, with des-
tiny, etc., épifw w. d.

contentedly, very, aitap-
kKéOTaTQ.

contention, épi¢, -idoc, 77.

contest, MGx7, 7), ayov,
-Ovoe, 0.

continue, draTedéw, day.

continually, dei, ovvexdc ;
also by dvateAéw, with
the Part.

contrary to, wap@.

contrive, unyavaopat.

control, «upledo w.
KpaTéw W. g.

conversation, d:aAoyoc, 6 ;
= instruction, 6ucAca, 7.

converse with, dvaAéyouat
TLE.

convict, to, éAéyyw, éer.

convince, 7eiSw w. a.

codperation, with the, of,
OvvEepyovvTog Tivos.

corn, oiToc, 0. [6.

—,, ear of, oTayue, -voc,

corpse, vékue, -voc, 6, vE-
Kpo¢, 0.

correct (adj.), dp0d¢ 3.

correctly, dp0dac.

corrode, éoViw.

corrupt, to, drageipw.

Cotyora, Koriwpa, ra.

counsel, BovA7, 77.

country, YOpa, v7, 7; one’s
country, waTpic, -idoe, 7.

, of the, belonging t»

the, zazproc 3.

, native, taTpic, -idoc,

$+

i.

courage, “peT7, 7), up6e, 6.

courageously, Gapparéue.

courier, dyyehoc, 6, qpe
podpopog, 6.

course, Opoyoc, 6; = jour
ney, 0d6¢, 7.

court, Sipas, ai.

of justice, dicaorh-
plov, TO.

cow, Pots, 7.

creature, COov, Té.

credit, to, weiouat.

Crete, Kp7rn, 7.

crime (= insolence),bSpte¢,
“EWC, 2.

Critias, Kptiac, -ov, 6.

croak, Kpalfw.

crocodile, xpoxddetrog, 6.

Croesus, Kpoicog, 6.

Crotonian, Kporwyridrae,
-0v, 0.

crown, a, oTédavoc, 6.

crush, Upato.

cry, a, Kpavyf, 7.

cry out, Kpdlw, dvak.; to
cry out to, Bode tui.

cubit, 77yue, -ewe, 6.

culture (—education),7az
dela, 7, TaidEevete, 7.

cultivation, see culture.

cup, KiTeAAov, 76.

custom, éVoc, -ove, Té,
noc, -ouc, T6; itis an
established custom, vo-
piveTa.

Cyaxares, Kvafdoge, -ove
(ace -7”), 6. 1d.

Cyclops, KizAwy, -aroe,

Cyrus, Kipog, 4

D.
dainty food, éwov, 76.
dance, to, vopetw, dpyxéo-
peat.
danger, kivddvog, 6.
, to incur, or be in
danger of, xivévveta.

332

dare, ToAudo.

Darius, Aapeiog, 6.

dark (= black), “éAac.

darkness, vit, vuK7oc, 77.

daughter, Puyarnp, -Tpdc,
7.

day, 7£pa, 7.

daybreak, at, dua juépa.

dead, azoreDrykdc, vexpic
3; to be dead, teS17-
Kéval.

deal, a great deal of, woAtc.

dear, diAoc 3.

death, Savaroc, 6.

——, to put to, droxreiva.

deceive, éavarau, 47,108,
113.

decide, xpivw, dtak., dta-
ylyvoOok.

—— upon, Povdrcbowa.

declare, dzo¢aivoyat, aro-
OgikvouL.

decree, a, 7¢toua, 76.

deed, mpdyya, 70, épyor,
TO.

deem, vowifw ; to be deem-
ed worthy, avodpar.

deep, Badic.

defeat, 777a, 7).

defence (by speech), a7o-
Aoyia, 7.

defend, ¢vAarTw; to de-
fend oneself by speak-
ing, amchoyéouar; by
force, or fortress, ai-
voudat.

defendant,dzoAoyoipevoc.

deformed (= disgraceful),
aicypoc¢ 8.

degenerate, to, ueTaBoAnv
émt TO KaKov AauBarvu.

deity, eiov, 76, dapud-
viov, TO, Gedc, 6.

delay, to, ZéAAw.

deliberate, to, BovActopar.

delight, to, ed¢paive, Tép-
TH,

delight in, réproat, ayer
Homa.

' deliver, cOfa, dmadAar-

T#®; =to free from,
éAevdepow.

—— up, wapadidwt.

delivered, to be (= to be
saved), c@Copuac.

deliverance (= safety),
owTnpia, 7; = freedom
from, d76Atorec, 7.

Delos, A7jA0¢, 7.

demand,to (= ask), aitéo.

demean oneself to one,
mpocpépopat TLve ; kind-
ly io, dtAodpovwg exo
w. d.

Demeter (Ceres), Anui-
THP, -TPOC, 7).

Demosthenes, Azpoovdé-
VNC, -OUC, 0.

deny, apveopae.

depart, dwelt, axaddart-
TOMAL, ATEPYOUAL.

departed (= dead), dzo-
TEVVIKOC.

dependent, to be (= be ru-
led), apyouat,xparéouae.

deplore, KAaiv.

deposite, T70nut ; in some-
thing, év reve.

deposited, a thing, wapa-
KaTaunKy, 7.

deprive, orepéw, adatpéo-
feat, 113.

derive (= enjoy, e. g. ad-
vantages), do0Aata ;
derive gain, Kepdaivo.

descendant, éxyovoc, 6, 7.

descended from, éxyovoc,
e, 7).

describe, cvyypadw.

desert, beyond one’s, ap’
agiav.

desert, to, KaTaAeitw, a70-
gevyo.

deserter, duydc, -ddog, 6.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

deserve, aoc eipt.

deserving, @§coc.

, to think, a&:0w.

desire, a, ému0vpia, 7, Ope-
Sic, -E@¢, 7).

desire, to, érudupéw; =
wish,GotAouat; = pray,
evyouat.

desirable, aiperéc.

desirous, to be (= wish),
evéno.

despair, to, dwoytyvocko,
aduuéw; of oneself,
aToyltyvOokw éuavTov.

despise, dtiualw, Kara-
gpovéw.

despised, to be, katagpo-
véoudt.

destiny, “olpa, 7. -

destroy, @Veipw, dtag., ka-
Tadbiw, oAAvm ;
overthrow, avatpéro.

determine (= resolve),
ylyvooko.

determined, it is, doxed.

devote oneself to (turn),
TpéTroua.

=—_
=

‘Diana, ’Apreuic, -idoc, 7.

die, to, Sr7oKxw, aot,
TEAEvTaw.

for, iweparodvAcKo.

differ from, d:agépw w. g.

different, dvadopog 2; to
run in different direc-
tions, dcaddpackw.

—— from, to be, dragépuo.

difficult, Bapic, -cia, -0,
dvoKo2oc 2.

dignity (gravity), Papo,
-0UC, TO.

dig through, dopvrra
OlacKanTO.

diligence, ozovd7, 77.

diligent, c7ovdaioc 8.

diligently, orovdaiec.

Diodorus, Arédwpcy, 0.

Diogenes, Aloyévye, -ove,o

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

Diphridas, Avdpidac, -a, 6.

direct, to, l3tvw; = to-
wards something, xa-
TevSvve ; oneself, rpé-
Toual; == to manage,
oikéw.

disappear, ddavifouat, w.
Aor. Pass.

disclose, éxxadinrw.

discourse, Adyoc, 0.

discourse, to, daAéyoua.

discover (= show), ¢aivo.

discreet, dpdvzuo¢ 8, ovve-
Toc 3.

disease, vdco¢, 7.

disgrace, Atdun, 7.

disgraceful, aicxpéc 3.

disgracefully, aicypéc.

dishonest, tovnpé¢ 3.

dishonor, aula, 7).

dishonorable, aioypé¢ 8,
GELKHC, -EC.

disorder, tapay7, 7; to
throw into disorder, Ta-
paTTo.

dispel, Avw.

dispirited, to be, aGupéw.

display, aogaivopat, aro-
Oeikvve.

displease, amapéoxw Tuvi.

displeased with, to be, ay-
Fouat.

dispose (= arrange), Tey-
vaopat.

disposed, kindly, eivove 2.

disposition (= feeling),
YvOuUN, 7, Ppevec, ai.

dissension, Ocyooracia, 7.

dissipate (= scatter), oxe-
alo.

dissolute, dxpat7c, -éc.

dissolve, katahtu, diarbo.

distance, at a, from, pé-
cater.

distant, to be, from, d7éyu.

distinguish oneself, be dis-
tinguished for, dcadépu.

distinguished for, éxio7-
fog 2.

disturb, rapattw, cvyxéu.

disturbance, tapay7, 7).

divide, wepilw, véww, Ka-
TAvéuw.

divine, Seio¢ 3.

divination, wavTiKy, 7.

do, TpaTTw, ToLéw, dpaw.

do good to, evroléw tiv,
evepyeTéw TLVa; do
wrong, d0tKéw, Kakdc¢
TOLEW.

dog, Ktwv, Kvvdc, 6, 7.

domestic, 6 ofkot.

dominion, 4py7, 7, 7é/0-
via, 7).

door, Supa, 77, miAn, 7.

double-speaking, diyvoui-
Voc 2.

doubtful, to be (= fear-
ful), doBéouac.

Draco, Apakwr, -ovroe, 6.

draw, cipw.

draw up (of an army),
TaTTw; (laws), ovy-
yeaa.

dress, oToA7, 7, iwarcov,
TO.

dress in, audiévyvpe.

dried up, éoxAynxdc, -via,
-0¢.

drink, to, tive.

—— out or up, éxrivo.

drive, éAatvw.

away,

arudéo.

amedatbva,
[Séw.

in, eiceAatva, eicw-

—— out, éedatvw.

drunkenness, wéo7, 77.

during, Kava, év.

duty, dgov, ré, 167.

duty or part of any one,
it is, ejui w. g.

dwell, oixéw, vain; = to
be, eiui ; = be in, mpdc-
eyit; = lie, Keiuae.

333

dwelling, olxia, 7, olxog,
6, OiKnua, TO.

E.

Each, éxaoroe.

each other, dAA7Awr.

eager to learn, $:Aoyua-
o7n¢ ) -é¢. [2.

for honor, ¢:A6ripog

eagle, deréc, 6.

ear, ob¢, OT6c, TO.

earn, to (= work out),
éSepyavouar.

earth, the, y7, 7, xév,
xvvovec, 7.

earthen, Kepapetog 8.

earthquake, ceopéc, 6.

ease, 7ouxia, 7.

easily, Aadiue.

east, Za¢, -a, 77.

easy, Paddtoc 3.

eat, éodio.

echo, 770, -od¢, 7. [4.]

edge, éoyatoc [§ 148, Rem.

educate,raldebw, d:ddoKkw.

education, wacdsia, 7, du-
Oackaiia, 7.

educated, temacdevpévoc.

effect, to (= accomplish),
éSepyacouar.

effeminate, to render, ua-
Aakilo.

efforts (= by themselves},
kaW éavtote.

Egypt, Atyurroc, 7

Egyptian, Aiyizrucc, 6.

either — or, 7 — 7.

elder, see old.

elegance (—gracefulness),
xaple, -lTOC, 7.

elevate, dd.

eloquent, Aéyzoc 8.

else, everything, dAogc,
Aotroc 38.

embassy, 7peaeia, 7.

embrace, dowagouat.

employ, ypaouac w. d.

334

employed in, to be zeal-
ously, orovdalw.

empty itself (of a river),.

éuBarrw, einue.
emulation, :AoTipia, 7.

encampment, o7tpatorme-
dov, 76.

, to break up an, cva-

Cebyvupe. [w. d..

encounter, to, Umoor7vas

- encourage, Tapakaréw, 7a-
pauvdéoua.

end, TéAoc, -ovc, 76; end,
e. g. of war, KaTaAiouc,
“£06, 7}.

end of life, teAevTy Tod
Biov.

endeavor, to, mepdopat,
Dep. Pass.

endure, ¢$épw, wtodgépa,
DMOMEVO.

enduring, very, KapTept-
Koc 8.

enemy, 7woAéutoc, 0, éy-
Fpoc, oO.

energy, Odvape, -ewe, 7.

enfeeble, reipw, kaTayvupmt.

engage with (of an army),
ovplyVvupm.

in a nayal battle,
vavpaxéw; in single
combat, ovouayéw.

enjoin upon, évTéAAo.

enjoy (= taste), dtoAatea
W. g. yevoual w. g.;
allow one to enjoy (par-
ticipate in) something,
petadlowui TLVvi TLVOC.

enlarge, TAaTivo.

enlist, covyypé¢; intrans.,
oTpaTevouae.

enrich, TA0uTilw.

enslave, dovAdw.

enslaved, to be, dovAcbw.

enter, ei¢BdAAw; = to
take a course or way,
Toérouat ddov.

entreat, ixeTeba.

entreaty, 0énorc, -Ewc, 7;
to gain release by, éSar-
Téopat.

entrust to, étitpéro.

enumerate, KaTapidpuéw.

envy, ¢Védvog, 6.

, to, dvovéw; envy
one something, or on
account of something,
gvovéw Tivi TLVOE.

Epaminondas, Evaucvov-
dace, -ov, 6.

Ephesus, “E¢eooc, 77.

epic poetry, woijoie Tv
ETOV, OY TA ET]:

equal, icoc 3.

, to make, éé060.

equivalent, to be, avragié¢
ell.

ere, mpiv.

erect, to, dp6w, éEop Fé ;
as a statue, dvatidnut,
avioTnyte. [o.

Eretrian, Epetprete, -éwc,

err, duapTavo.

escape, to, dwodebyw w. a.

especially, wadcora.

establish, xaViornut.
established custom, it is,
vouiceTat.

esteem, to, Tyudw, Bepa-
Teva; = value much,
Toléowat wept TOAAOD ;
= consider, think, vo-
pita.

happy, vakapifa, Cy-
A060.

esteemed, Titoc 8.

estimable, d£voc 8. [o.

Euphrates, Eidparye, -ov,

Europe, Eipdrn, 7.

Huryalus, Eipiaroe, 6.

Eurysthenes, Eipvadévne,
-0ue, 0.

Eurystheus,

~Euc, 6.

Eipucteic,

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

Euxinus Pontus, EiSes
voc Ilévroc.

even, «ai.

if, cat dar.

—— now, Kal viv.

—— though, cat éar.

evening, deiAn, 7:

event, ouudopa, 7.

ever (= always), dei.

every, Go; = quisque,
EkaoToc.

everything, 7av.

everywhere, tavrayod.

evident,07A0¢ 3, pavepéc 3.

evidence, Texu7jplov, Té.

evil, Kax6¢ 3, movypde 8,
gavroc.

evil, an, Kaxév, 76, Kakia,
7.

evil-doer, kaxotpyog, 6.

exact from, to, dma:téw
TL TLVa, TPGTTO Ti TIVE.

exalt, dWdo.

examine, éfeT alu, éréyyo.

examination, éAeyyoc, T6;
= deliberation, xpiote,
EWC, 1).

excellencé, xadoxayavia,
1), GpETh, 7.

excellent, dyaVéc.

except, 7Aqv.

excess (= luxury), 7pv-
$7, 7; excess in any-
thing, doéAyeva, 7.

exchange, to, weTadAar-
TO}

= to exchange
one thing for another,
avTiKaTarAatrouat ti
TLVOC.

excite, éyeipu.

exclude, d7eAatva.

execute (= accomplish),
ETlTEAéw, Olavow.

exercise, to, yuuvalw, do-
kéo; = make trial of,
Telipaouas.

exercise, GOK? oC, -Ewe, 9.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

exhort, mpotpérw, mapa-
Kahéw. [yiyvouat.

existence, to come into,

expect (= hope), éA7ifa;.
= look for, irorreiu,
TpocooKkaw.

expedition, to make an,
oTpaTEevu.

experience, éuzecpia, 7.

exploit, mpdyua, 76.

exposed to, see stratagems.

express, to, dpau, éxdaiva,
aropaive, 160.

extent, dpuSudc, 6, TAq-
Soc, -ovc, Td.

exterior, oyjuara, Ta.

extol, ei¢ toc éFatpéw.

extraordinarily,decvéc,100

eye, d¢3aAude, 6.

F,

Face, tpdcurov, 76, dye,
“E06, 7.

fail, éxAeinw, mpod., Ka-
Tan., én.

fair (= beautiful) cardc 3.

faithful, wcTé¢ 3.

fall, to, ito.

away, ao-, wepippéw.

—— hack (= retreat),
aToyapéew,

—— upon, éurinto.

into (of a river), eic-
BaAAa, éuBarArw.

falsely, to swear, éxzopKéu.

fame, ebxdera, h, KAéoc,
-E0UC, = report,
00&a, 7.

famine, Aude, 6.

famous, ebxAenc, -éc, da-
vepoc 8.

far (of distance), paxpér,
THAOd ; with Com.roid.

‘ar, so far from, dvri.

fare, to, mpattw, w. ady.,
e. g. ev’, to fare well.

ast, to hold, éyowaz w. g.

7
TO;

fasten, KAeiw.

fat, miwy, -ovoc.

fate, woipa, 4; = fortune,
TOXN, 1).

fated, it is, efuapra: w. d,

father, warnp, -Tpéic, 6.

fault, d@uaprtia, 7.

favor, xapte, -itoc, 7.

——, a, evepyecia, 7.

on, to confer a, do to,

eb Toléw w. a., ebepye-

TEW W. a. [oxyo.

, to receive a, ev ra-

fear, d6foc, 6, 54.

, to, po éouaz, dédorka,

fearful, decvicg 3; to be,
poBéouae.

feet, 760ec, of. [xoc, 6.

fellow-combatant, cippa-

fetter, a, téd7, 7.

few, dAiyor, -at, -a.

field, dypéc, 6, yvia, 7.

fight, to, wayouas.

fill, wiurAnue, éuTrimAque.

filled with, neord¢ 3, rA7-
PIC, -EC.

find, chpickw, 141.

fine (—=beautiful), xardc 3,

fine, a, xXphuara, Ta, nua,
7; to punish by a, &7-
plow.

fir, webKn, 7.

fire, tip, zvpdc, 76.

—— to set on, gutinpnue.

firm, BéGatoc 3; stand firm,
brouéva,

firmness, Kaprepia, 7.

first, TeGTo¢ 83; adv. mpi-
TOV, TPOTa, Ta.

first, at, év apy7.

fish, a, iySic, -toc, 6.

fit (proper), émvtqdetoc,
ixavoc 3.

fit, in a, of madness,
Harvouevoc, daluovaer.

fitted (= of such a na-
ture), ToLvToC¢.

335

fix (= determine), dpivu ;
= to make firm, may-
VOL.

flagon, yoebc, 6 [§ 41].

flatter, KoAckeiw.

flatterer, x6Aaé, -ikog, o.

flattery, Kodaxeia, 7.

flay, dépw.

flee, debyu.

—— away, arogetyu w.a.

flesh, xpéac, -éwc, 76, oapé,
-PKOC, 7.

fling, pirrw.

flock (= herd), dyéAn, #.

flourish, to, F422.

flow, to, béw.

—— by, rapappéw.

flower, a, évPoc, -ovg, 76,
avtEnov, 76.

flute, abioc, 6, odptyé,
-iVyoc, 7).

fly away, dvarérouat, xm,

follow, éroyat w. d., dKo
hovdéa w. d.

folly (madness), wavia, 7.

fond of learning, plAoua-
oNC, -é¢.

fond of war, dcAor6AEuog 2,

food, Bpapua, 16, Bopa, #.

fool, z@poc, 6.

foolish, uépoc 3.

foot of, at the, i76. [yép.

for, mp6, imép, ext; (conj.),

forbid, dzayopeiw.

force, military, divayze,
EWC, 7.

—— (violence), Bia, 7.

——, to employ, Gralouaz,

forefathers, zpoyeyernué-
vol, Oi.

forehead, uétwrov, 70.

foreign, GAAérpio¢ 8:

foreign to (= besides),
TARY W.g., XYopic W. Bo
é5@ Ww. g.

forzigner, Sévoe, 6.

foresee, mpoopaw.

336

forever, dei; to-be for-
ever (= abide in), eiyé,
dtaTpiBo. [w. g.

forget, Aavbavopar, eta.

former (= old), aA.azoc 8.

forthwith, 77v tTaxloTyv,
O¢ TaYLOTA.

fortify, Tecxilo.

fortune, Tiy7, 7.

, good, evTvyia, 7.

fortunate, eddaiuwy, -ovoc,
evTuyne, -éc.

——, to be, etTvyéw, ed-
darpwovéw.

forward, to bring as a
charge, Katy yopéw.

found, to, Tifa, idpbw.

foundation, xpy7ic, -idoc,
7; metaphor., Peuédtov,
TO.

fountain, 777, 7).

frankness, wappyota, 7.

free, éAciFepoc.

——,, to, Avo, érevd _epdw.

from, a7oAto.

freedom, éAcutepia, 7; of
the state, avrovouia, 7.

of speech, appycia,7.

freemen, éAebPepor, oi.

friend, @iAoc, 6, épaorne,
-0v, 0.

friendship, ¢cAia, 7.

frivolity, badcovpyia, 7.

frog, Batpayor, 6.

from, a76, éx, mapa.

fruit, xap7éc, 6.

fruits, first, drapyat, ai.

fugitive, dvyac, -Zdoc, 6.

fulfil, reAéo.

full, ueor6¢ 8, rANpNE, -EC.

full power, 2fovoia, 77.

furnish, ézapkéw.

future, the, 76 wéAAov.

G.
Gain, xépdo¢, -ovc, 76, KT7-
Ole, -EWC, f.

gain, to (= acquire), x7a-
ouat; = get gain, Kep-
daive; to gain release,
éfalTéoua.

gallant and noble, caAd¢
kat ayadoc ; yevvaioc 3.

gape, Kéxynva, 130.

garden, x770¢, 0.

garland, oré¢avoc, 0.

garment, /uaTvov, TO, oTO-
An, 7.

gate, wiAn, 7, Supa, 7.

general (common), xoc-
voc 3.

general, a, orpaTyoc, 6.

generation of men, ye-
ved, 77.

generously, a¢dovec.

get out of the way of, e/-
kw 000d.

giant, yiyac¢, -avToe, 0.

gift, dGpov, TO.

give, didwpt, Tine.

a sign or signal, o7-

paivo.

one a share of any-

thing, wetadidwpl Tivi

TLVOG.

a response, ypdao.

—— back, arodidwue.

way, évdidwpt.

gladly, very (=by all
means), TaVvTwC.

g0, Paiva, ropevoual, Tpoc-
ett, 89.

about, weplGaiva, ép-

po.

back, dvayupéw.

away, Grell, arép-

xoua, aroBaive, olxo-

pea.

down (as the sun),

KaTadvouat.

forward, 7povévat.

into, eloemut; as a

contest, etc., vddw.

——, over (as to another

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

party), dwépyouat, aioe

Baivo.

through, dcépyowat.

round, wepiecpe.

goal, Tépua, -arToc, TO.

goat, aif, -ydc, 6, 7).

goblet, kiweAAov, 70.

God, a god, Vedc, 6.

goddess, Vea, 77. [r6.

gold, xpvodc, 6, ypvoior,

golden, ypvoéoc, -ov¢ 3.

gone, to be, otyvouaz.

good, dyatéc, Kaddc; of
ayatoi, the good; 7d
ayatov, the good (ab-
stract).

good will, evvoza, 7.

govern, KpaTéw w. g., ap-
Xo Ww. g.

government, 7toActeia, 77 ;
= a governed province,
apr, 7-

governor's residence, ap-
yetov, TO.

graceful, yaptetc, éxixa-
ple, -tTO¢.

gracefully, yaptévtwe, ért-
yapitac.

Graces, yapire¢, ai.

gracious, éAew¢ [§ 30].

grain, ciToc, 6.

grant, to, didwu, mapéxo.

gratify, yapifouas.

gratitude, edyapioTia, 7,
xaple, -iTo¢, 7.

gravity, Bapoc, -ove, 76.

great, wéyac.

greatly, weyaAwe, dewvdc.

great deal, woAtc. _——‘[Td.

greatness, wéyeVoc, -ovc,

Grecian, ‘EAAnviKéc.

Greece, ‘EAAdc, -idoc, 7.

Greek, a, "EAAnv,-7voe, 6.

grief, A077, 7.

grievous, yaeroc 3.

grind, Aeaive. [?.

ground, the, Pav, -ovéc,

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY,

gross, “éyac.
growing old, not, dyypws,
“OV.

grow up, avfavowat, with-

: Pass. Aor.

~ guard, the, dvAax7, 7.

guard, to, dvAdTTo, dad.

——, against, to be on
one’s guard,@vAarroua,

guardian, @vAag, -Koc, 0.

guide, a, 7yEua@v, -dvoc, 0,
mvioxoc, o.

, to, Wve, KaTevdi-
Va, Nyéouat.

guilty (= wrong deer),
GOiKGv.

Gyges, Tvyne, -ov, 6.

gymuasium, taAaiorpa, %.

H.

Hades, é07¢, -ov, 6.
hair, Fpis, tpryoc, 7.
halcyon, dAKvov, -dvoc, 7.
hand, yelp, velpoc, 7.
happens, it, cuyBaiver,tuy-

Havel, ovuninre.
happiness, evdawovia, 7.
happy, evdaivor.

, to be, eddatyovéw,

evTVYEW.
, to esteem, vaKapicu.
harbor, A1u7v, -évoc, oO.
hard (difficult), vaderoc 3.
hardship, 76voc, 0.
hare, Aayae, -0, 6.
Harmodius, ‘Apyddzoc, 0.
harmony, Oudvoca, 77.
harp, popucs, -Lyyos, 2.
harp-playing, c-0apwdia, 7.
haste, orovd7, 7.
hasten, orevdw.
hastily, to flee, ozyouae

gevyor [§ 175, 8].
hate, to, wicéw, éyVaipw.
hated, to be, dreyCavouat.
hateful, zronror 8.
haughtiness, @Gpcc¢, -ewc, 7.

haughty, drép¢pwv, tre-
pypavoc 2.
have, yw, KEKTHUAL.
head, cegaag, 7.
heal, idouat, dxéouat.
health, dyieva, 7.
hear,dkovo,dxpodouat w.g.
heart, Kapdia, 7, Kip, K7j-
poc, T06; =feeling or
disposition, poy, 77.
heat, VaAroc, -ovg, Td.
heaven, obpavoc, 6.
Hector, “Extwp, -opoc, 6.
heed, to take, ebAaBéopuai
Ele
height, iwboc, -ove, T6; =
summit, Gkpa, 7.
Helen, ‘EAévy, 7.
Hellas, ‘EAAde¢, -idog, 7.
Helle, “EAA, 7.
Hellenes, "EAAnvec, oi.
Hellespont, ‘EAAj¢rovroc,
O.
help of, with the, civ.
Hera (Juno), “Hoa, 7.
herald, x7pv, -tKxoc, 6.
Hercules,“HpakdAje,-éove,c.
herd, ayéA7, 77.
herdsman, vouete, -éwe, 0,
TOLMAV, -EVOG, O.
Hermes (Mercury), ‘Ep-
LACS -0v,; 6.
hero, 7pwc, -wog, 6.
hide, cpirrw, docx. [2.
high-souled, weyadowiyog
highly, very, xaz mavv.
highly, to esteem more,
Tept wetlovoc moréouat 5
to reverence or prize
highly, ep? meAnod
TOLeoual,
hill, y7Ao¢oc, 6.
hinder, eipye. [6.
hired laborer, G7¢, 3n76¢,
Hipparchus, “Imzapyoe, 6.
his own (business, posses-
sions), T2 éavTod.

29

337

historian, /oroptoypa¢oc, 6.

hold (have), yw; hold
fast, Exouat w. g.; take
hold of (= touch, en-
gage in, effect), dxro-
POL W. g.

hold before, tpoBaA2zo.

hold out (= sustain the
attack), drocrqvas.

holy, /epéc 8.

home, oixoc, 6.

Homer, "Ovypos, 6.

honor, to, Tia.

honor, T17, 7.

honor-loving, ¢cAériuog 2,

honorable, evdofo¢ 2, Ka-
A6¢ 8, davepéc 8.

honored, Tizo¢ 8.

hoof, 67A7, 77.

hook, @ykioTgov, 76.

hope, éAric¢, -idoc¢, 7.

hope, te, éAmitw, éAropac.

horn, «épac, 6 |§ 39].

horse, izzroc, 6.

host, évoc, 6. [3.

hostile, toAgucog 3, évdpéd¢

house, oixoc, 6, oixia, 7.

household, eixog, 6.

how? wc; in an indi
rect question, O7w¢;
how much, éco¢ 3.

human, aviperivec 8;
human race, Td yévog
avd pore.

humane, ¢/Advpwmo¢ 2.

hunger, Acuoc, 6.

, to, be hungry, ze-
Va.

hunt, to, S7peto.

hunter (huntsman), ¥y-
PEVTTC, -00, 6.

hurtful, G2Aa8epd¢ 8.

kusband, dv7p, avdpés, 6.

I.
Tf, ei, av, Wr, av.

ignorant, aquatic, -&.

338

illness, véooc, 7.
ills, KaxG, Td.
illustrious, Aaumpéc 3.
imitate, wyuéouar; = em-
ulate, (7A6w w. a.
immediately, ei0ic¢, tapa-
XPIEC.
immoderate, dxparic, -é¢.
immortal, a0avarog 2.
impel, tpoTpérw.
impiety, dcéGeza, 77.
implant, gug¢uTedvo.
implanted, éudvro¢ 2.
impose upon (enjoin),
TPOCTaTTH,EVTEAAY W.d.
impossible, adivarog 2.
impostor, ¢évag, -aKoc, 6.
imprudent, dvoog [§ 29,
Rem.].
impure dkaSaproc 2.
in, év.
in order to, by Fut. Part.,
or a final conjunction,
as iva, oc.
inactivity,dmpaypyocivn, 7,
apyia, 7, PwoTovn, 7.
incite, TpoTpéTw.
increase, to, avSavouat.
incur danger, kivdvveto.
indeed, vév ; indeed—but,
pév — 08.
indictment, ypa¢7, 77.
indolent, to be, dxvéw.
industrious, ovrovdaiog 8.
inferiors, Ta7elvdrepol, oi.
inglorious, ddofo¢ 2.
inhabit, oikéo.
inimical, éySpdc 3.
injure, KaxG¢ Toléw, BAGT-
TW W. a., GOLKEO W. a.
injurious, GAaPepéc 8.
injury, B24B0, h, Snuia, h.
injustice, ddcxia, 7.
innate, éudirog 2.
innocent, ov ddixGr.
innumerable, avapidun-
To¢ 2.

insane, to be, patvopat,
dalpwovaw.

inscribe, ypa¢w.

instead. of, dvti, b7ép.

instil, évT¢onme.

instruct, TaLdebu, OLdacKo.

instruction, tavdeia, 7, dt-
dackadia, 7, 6utAia, 7.

insufficient, to be, evded¢
EXO.

intellect, yyoun, 7). [77

intelligence, civecte, -ews,

intelligent, ovveroc 3, ¢pd-
VLOG 3.

intemperate, dxpar7c, -é¢.

intend to, uéAAw; also by
Fut. Part.

inter, Va7Tw.

intercourse with, ducAia
w. d., 7, Kolvwvia, 7.

, to have, with, du-
Aéo w. d.

intestines, Td évroe.

intimate (of friends), o/-
Keloc.

into, eic¢.

intoxication, “é07, 7.

intrust (commit), éwcrpé-
TO. 7

invent, etpioke.

invention, epeotc, -EwC, 7).

inventor, etpéTy¢, -0v, 0.

invest a city, tepixatéco-
pat TOALY.

invest with (= clothe),
- GULEVVUMLE TLVG TL.

invincible, duayoc 2.

Tonia, Iwvia, 7.

irrational, d¢pwv, avoog 2.

island, v7coc, 7.

issue, TéA0c, TO, KaTaAd-
GLC, -EWC, 7).

ivory, éAédac, -avToe, 6.

J.
Javelin, dkwv, -01 ToC, 6,
GKOVTUY, TO,

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

jest, to, wailw, oxorro.

journey, dpdpoc, 0, 6d0¢, 7.

joy, Xapa, 7. |

judge, a, xpitjc, -ov, 6,
OLKkaoTHC, -0v, 0.

, to, Kpiva, dak.

jadgment, to render, d:-
Kal; in the, of, 7pd¢
W. g.

Jupiter, Zedc, 0.

just dixazoc.

justice, d:xacoobvy, 7, din,
73 court of, dixacrg-
plov, TO.

justly, dcxaiwe.

K.

Keep, éyo; keep off, aAé-
Eoual, aubvopac.

oneself from, a7éyo-

pal W. g.

watch, T7peEw.

key, KAeic, KAewdbc, 77.

kid, éprdoc, 6.

kill, droxteivw ; = mur-
der, dovevu.

kind, evvove, -ovv.

kindly, to demean one-
self, deAodpdvuc éyw.

kindly-disposed, evvove,
-OUv.

kindness, evepyeoia, 73
= favor, apie, -iToc, 7.

kindred, oikeiog, 6.

king, Paotrevc, -éwe, 0,
avaég, -akToc, 0.

kingly nature, Baotaixov
noc.

know, ylyvookw, ériora-
pat, oida.

know truly, éxiorapat.

knowledge of, to come to
a, YLYvOoKo.

known, well-known, dave-
po¢ 8, O7Aog 8.

, to make, d7/A0w.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

L.

Labor, 7évoc, 6.

——, lover of, 6:A6ro0vo¢ 2.

-——,, to, (= work), épya-
Coat ; with toil, rovéw ;
with the accompanying
idea of being weary,
KGLVO. [6.

laborer, hired, 07c¢, Onréc,

laborious, woAbirovog 2.

Lacedaemonian, Aaxedar-
pOvlog, 0.

lack, oraviga, déw.

lake, Aiuvy, 7.

land (region), xopa, 7;
by or upon land, kara
ynv ; native, marpic,
-ido¢, 7.

large sum, ToAvec.

Larissa, Adpiooca, 7.

lasting, éumedoc 2,

late, 6Weoc, adv. dpe; la-
ter, boTepov.

latter, odroc.

law, vouoc, 6; by law, Ka-
Ta VOo“OV or VvoLipuc ;
observant of, voucuoc 3.

lawgiver,voyodEerne, -ov, 0.

lawlessness, avouia, 7.

lay (place), 77Syuc; lay
by or up, KatariSnpe.

waste, dvadveipu,
TELVO.

lazy, to be, BAaxketa.

lead, to, dyw, nyéopat.

away, arayo.

round, wepiaye.

leader, 7yeu@v, -dvoc, 6.

leaf, vA Aov, TO.

lean, éokAnKOc.

learn, uavtave ; = ascer-
tain, cipioke, mvvda-
VOUaL.

learning, fond of, d:Aoua-
One, -é.

leave, 2xAcivo, KaTaheiTo.

— behind, karareira.

leave off, wabvopat.

unrewarded, éaw ei-
vat aYapLoTov.

leisure, cy0Aq, 77.

, to be at, to have,
oxyoralo.

length, wijKoc, -ovce, T0; =
number, measure, dput-
0c, 0.

lenity, tpaoty¢, -nTo¢, 7.

Leonidas, Aewvidac, -ov, 6.

Lesbos, AéoZo, . 77.

lesson, wana, -aTo¢, TO.

lest, after a word denoting
fear, “7; = that not, by
iva, 6mwe or O¢ LN.

let (permit), édo.

letter, an alphabetical,
Ypauua, -aroc, TO.

letters, ypauuara, Ta.

liar, wetorne, -ov, 6.

liberate, éAevtepow.

licentiously, dxoAdorus.

lie, a, Weddoc, -ovg, TO.

——, to, Wevdoua.

—— (be situated), cezyaz.

—— in wait for, évedpeto.

life, Bioc, 6, a7, 7.

light, @¢, dwréc, TO; =
a light or lamp, Ad«-
voc, 0.

lightning, dotparn7, 7.

like, éuovo¢g 3, too¢g 3, Ta-
partAgowoc; = suchas,
oloc.

likeness, duordrne, -nTOC,
7.

lineage, yévoc, -ovc, TO.

listen to, dkpodopat w. g.;
= to obey, welPouar,
bTakova.

literature, ypauuara, Ta.

little, oAzyog 3; adv. px-
pov; less, uetov.

live, Gt6w, Cao, Bioredbu.

with, ovyyiyvoyat

w. d., ovvdatpibw w.d.

539

long, paKpoc ;
Tone.

= much,
[To.

look after (guard), @v2aT-

look at, BAéru, mpocré-
Tw, avrg.

loquacious, toAvAoyog 2,
KwTinoc 3.

lord, Kiptoc, 6, dearérye,
-0v, 0. [BaArw.

lose, to, am6AAvut, dro-

loss, to be at a, xopéo.

Loves, épw7e¢, oi.

love, épw¢, -wToc, 6.

of pleasure, ¢:Anjéo

via, 7.

, to, diAéw, oTépye ;
= ardently, épdo.

lover, épaor7c, -ov, 6

of labor, ¢A670 20¢
2 [2.

—— of wisdom, #:Adc0¢0¢

Lybia, AcBon, 7.

Lycian, Avxcoc.

Lycurgus, Avkoipyog, 6.

Lydian, Avdzoc.

lyre, Atpa, 7, xeSdpa, 7.

Lysias, Avoiac, -ov, 6.

M.
Macedonia, Maxedovia, 9.
Macedonian, a, Maxedav,

-Ovoe, 0.
mad, to be, atvouat.
madness, in a fit of, wac-
vouevoc, datmovar.
magistrate,d.xacri¢,-00,6.
magistrates, dpyat, al.
magnificent, peyadompe-
THC, -EC.
magnificently, toAvTeAGe.
maiden, Ké07, 7.
maintain (affirm), dni.
majestic, “éyac.
make, woléw; cause to
make or be made, make
for oneself, moéouat ;

raake one something,

s

340

arodcixvuul ; = place,
TiOnut; = take place,
yiyvoua.

make an expedition, oTpa-

make use of, ypaopai Tive.

man, dvUporoc, 6, avqp,
avdpos, 0.

, old, yépar, -ovTos, 0.

man-seller,dvdparodtorie,
-o0, 0.

manage, OlolKéw, TOAL-
TedW; = arrange, da-
TiO HLL.

manifest, davepdc 3, O7A0¢
8, cad7e, -EC.

, to (show), d7A0w.

manner, 7Tp0m0¢, 06; =
custom, 70o¢, T6, é%oc,
TO.

, in like, duotws.

mantle, (watov, TO.

many, ToAvc.

march, a, ora¥uoc, 0.

, to, OTPATEvouaL, TO-

pevopua.

, to begin a, (march
off ), éxoTpatevouat.
mark (evidence), Texy7-

pLov, TO.
marry, 7/aéw [§ 124, 1].
mass, red-hot, dsa7vpog 2.
master, Kiplog, 0, Odeon 0-
TNC, -OV, 0.
matter (work), épyov, TO.
maturity, dku7, 7.
meadow, Aer, -Ovoc, o.
mean (base), xakd¢ 3, ai-
oxpoc.
means, by no, ovdauéc,
KLOTG.
Mede, a, Mijdoe, o.
Medéa, Mdeva, 7.
Media, Mndia, 7.
Median, M7dcxoc.
medical, iatprxoc.
meet, to, dmavTiw; =
fall in with, évrvyyxave

[Tevo. °

CVVTVYXEVY W. d., Tpos-
| into Ww. d.
meeting, a, cvvovoia, 7).
Megarian, Meyapete, -éws,
6.
Melitus, MéAyjroc, 6.
melt, T7K@, 133.
memorial, ixéuvynpa, TO,
Evia, TO.
memory, 72, 7-
Memphis, Méydcc, -coc and
-idoc, 7. jo.
Menelaus, Mevédews, -ew,
Menon, Mévor, -wvoe, 6.
mention, Adyo¢, 6, uiGor, 6.
mentioning, worth, @§.0-
Aoyog 2.
mercenaries, Sévol, ol.
merciful, ‘Aewe.
mere, “Ovoc; adv., “ovov.
message, dyyeAia, 7).
messenger, dyyeAoc, 0, 7;

= ambassador, 7peo-
Bevtqe, -ov, 0; plural,
mpeopetc.

Messenian, Mecojvioc, 0.
middle, middle of, uécog 3.
midnight, wéoas vixtes.
might, dvvapic, -ews, 7.

mild, mpdoc, -ela, -ov,
RTLOC.

military years, cTpatetou-
pea ETH.

milk, yaAa, -axTo¢, TO.
Milo, MiAwy, -wvoc, 0.
mina, va, 7.
mind, voic, 6, gpévec, al.
, to call to, urvjpo-
vEevw TL. [wae.
mindful of, to be, wéur7-
mingle with, picyw, Ke-
Pavyvpel.
Minos, Mivwc (Gen. Mi-
vwoc and Mivo), o.
Minotaur, Muvdtavpor, 6.
mirror, KaTOTTpOP, TO.
misfortune, a, dTvyia, 7,

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

KaKOV, TO, ovudopa, h,
TUYAL, Gi.

mislead, tapiyo, mapa-
TAG, €apaptava.

mix, piyvuul, usoyéw, Ke-
pavvvpe.

mob, O7u0¢, 0.

moderate, wéTpto¢ 35 =
abstinent, éyxpartieg, -é¢.

moderation, pétpov, TO,
HEGOTHS, -TCC, 7.

modern, véoc, comp.deg. of.

modesty, aida, -ot¢, 7,
cwdpoovyy, f.

money, xp7ara, Ta.

, travelling, é¢ddcov,

76.

month, “jv, unvoc, Oo.

monument, “vijua, TO.

moon, cEeAnvn, 7).

morals, 797, Td.

more, 7Aelov, tAéor, plus ;
pahiov, magis (comp.
much).

mortal, Svy7é¢ 8.

most, tAeioToc 3.

most of all (especially},
pahlora.

mother, 7771p, -Tpdc, 7).

motion, Kivyolc, -ews, 7).

, to be in, Kivéouae
w. Pass. Aor. [w. a.

mount, to, avaGaivw éri

mountain or mount, opoc,
-0uc, TO.

mourn, ddtpouat, Aviéo-
ual.

for, KAain, wevdéw.

mournful, Avypo¢ 3, Av-
mnpo¢ 3; = plaintive,
yowdne, ~€¢.

mouse, /i¢, -td¢, 6.

mouth, o7dua, -aToe, TO.

move, i0, Klvéowat ;
affect, kaTakAadw Tivi;
moved to pity, to be.

éAeaipa, oikTeipw.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

much, 7oAvc.

multitude, 7Ai3oc¢, -ove,
Tb, OL TOAAUL.

murder, to, povebw.

Muses, Moicoaz, ai.

~ muse-leader, povonyérye,
-0v, 0.

music, LovotKy, 7.

must, deZ, x7.

Mysus, Muodc, 6. — [oe, 6.

Mytilenaean, MurcAnvai-

N.
Naked, yuuvéc 3.
name, 6voua, TO.

, to, dvoudla, Karéu,
amo-, Toocayopevu.

nation, é0voc, -ove, Té.

native land or country,
Tarpic, -idoc, 7.

nature, ¢vol¢, -eH¢, 773
kingly, GaotaAckov Hoc.

naval, to engage in a, bat-
tle, vavpayéw.

Naxian, Na£oe, 6.

near, Tapa; adj., tAnoiog

8; adv., éyyic.

necessary, avaykaiog 8.

, to be, dei, xh w.
ace. and inf.

necessity, dvayxy, 7.

neck, dép7, 77.

necklace, oTpeTO¢, 0.

need, to, dgouar w. g.,
XPRCO W. g.

neediness, ov vic, -Ewe, 7).

neglect, to. duehéw w. g.;
= to esteem lightly,
dAtywpéw ; = overlook,
Teplopaw ; = pass by,
TAPELLL. [7.

neighbor, yeiTwy, -ovoc, 6,

neither, oddé; neither —
nor, ovTe—ovTe, PATE
— pre.

Neptune (Poseidon), Io-
GELOOY, -Ovoe, 6.

Nestor, Néorwp, -opoc, 6.

net, a, vepéAn, 7).

never, ov7oTe, obdémorTe,
pamote, undémote, 112.

nevertheless, duwc.

news, dyyedia, 77. [6.

Nicocles, NixoxaAje, -éove,

night, vvé, vuKroc, 7.

Nile, NezAog, 6.

Nisus, Nicog, 6.

no, no one, none, ovdeic,
pndeig; by no means,
ovdaes, HKltoTa; no
longer, ovKéTe (uKéTL).

noble, éo%Ad¢ 8, yevvaiog
3, evyEvTgc, -é¢; = hon-
or-loving, pAdtipoc 2.

nobleness of mind, yev-
VQLOTNC, -NTOC, 7).

nobly, yevvaiwc. [oi.

noises, confused, VdpvGor,

north, apxtos, 7, Boppac,
-d, 0.

north-wind, Boppde, -d, 6.

nose, pic, pivoc, 7.

not, ov (ovK, ody); with
the Imp., “7; not only,
ov ovov ; not less, ot-
dév qTTOV;- not even,
ovdé (unoe).

nothing, oidév (undév).

nourish, Tpé¢w.

Numa, Novpde, -d, 0.

number, aputpoc, 6.

nurture, to, Tpéde;
educate, wadcto.

O.

O that, ete w. opt.

oath, dpxoc, 6.

——, false, éiopKov, Té.

obedient, xaT7Koo¢ 2 w. d.

obey, wetVouat w. d., b7a-
Kovw w. d.

object to (bring as acharge
against), éyxadéw Tt
TLVL.

29*

341

obliged, to be (necessary),
dei w. ace. and inf,
avayKaiog eipt.

oblivion, A707, 7.

obscure, gave, -éc. [8.

observant of law, vopuipog

observe (perceive), aiada-
VOUGL W. g. OF a.

observe beforehand, zpo-
voéew.

obtain, AauBavu, rvyxave
w. g.

occasion (cause), airvog 8.

, to (bring), dyw.

odious, aicypéc.

——, to be, awexSavopat.

(Enoe, Oivéy, 7.

offend, duapravo.

offer (afford), zapéyw ; as
a gift to a divinity, ava-
TiSyut; = offer sacri-
fice, Vio.

offering, to bring an, 3v-
ciav moléouat. [7.

office (in the State), doy7.

often, woAAGKLIC.

often as, as, 6rTav, é676Ta2r
[see § 183, (b)].

oil, é2aLov, 76.

old, mpécGue, -era, -v, ye-
pato¢ 3; never growing
old, dynpwe.

—— age, yiijpac, To. [6.

— man, yépwr, -ovToe,

Olympus, “Odvuroe, 6.

omit, Tapareizo.

once, = before,
mpoTepov ; = at a cer-
tain time, 7orTé.

one, any one, some one,
tic; when contrasted
with the other, by ei¢
pév or éTEpOC.

one another, of, dAA7Aw»r.

only, 6vov.

open, to be, avéwya.

opinion, an, yvoun, 7.

amaég ;

342

opinion, to be of, vouila,
Vyéouae.

—, from the, vouicavrec.

opposite, évavtio¢ 3, éte-
poc 38.

oppressive, yareroc 8.

oracle, ypyopoc, 9.

——», to consult an, pav-
Tevomal.

order, kéopoc, 6; = aline,
TAS, -EWC, 7).

order that, in, iva, oc.

, good, ebxoopia, 7.

, to (= to arrange),
TaTTO, OlaT.; = com-
mand, KeAevw w. ace.
and inf, évréAAw.

origin, common, ovyye-
vac, -EC.

ornament, Kécp0¢, 0.

Orthia, ’Opvia, 77.

Osiris, “Oczpic, -idoc, 6.

Ossa, “Occa, 77.

other, the (= alter), éte-
po¢ 3; =alius, aAdoc.

otherwise (= another)
aAAoc.

ought, det, yp7, dere.

out of, éx.

over, O7ép.

overhanging (over), i7ép.

overturn, GvaTpéro, TEpLT

owe, O¢eiAw.

own, idto¢ 8; his own, 72
EQUTOD.

ox, Boic, Bods, 6.

P.

Pain, dAyoc, -ove, TO; =
grief, Minn, 73 = se-
vere, O00v7, 7.

painting, Gwypadia, 7.

palace, royal, BeoiAeva, Ta,

pale, aypoc 3.

parasang, apacayyne,
-ov, 6.

pardon, to, ovyyeyvé oko.

patent, yovets, -éws, 0.
Paris, Ilapzc, -idog, 6.

park, tapadetooe, 6.

part, a, “époc, -ove, TO.

, to, wepicw; take part
in, ueTéyo W. g.

participate in, “eTévo.

parties, both, qudoiv Adyoc.

pass (= go), wopevouat.

— by, tapaBaivo.

—, to (of life), diayw;
time in public, év 76
pavep® eivat.

passage across, Tapodog, 77.

passion, 7aUoc, -ovc, TO;
= evil desire, éredv-
pid, 7).

past (what is past), wape-
AnavSéoc, -via, -6¢.

path, 6d6c¢, 7.

pay, ploddc, 0. [dape.

to, GroTivw, a77odi-

?

peace, eip7v7.

, to make, elpyrvnv
TOLéouat.

peacock, Tao, -0, 6d.

peep up or out, dvaxirro.

Peleus, I7Aete, -éwe, 6.

Pelops, IléAow, -oroe, 6.

Peloponnesian, IeAozov-
VICLAKOC.

Peloponnesus, IeAorév-
VOC, 7.

peltastae, weAracrai, oi.

penetrate into, elezinTw
eél¢ Tt.

people, djuoc, 6; =na-
tion, é0voc, TO ; = mul-
titude, zA7Voc, 76.

perceive, aioVavopat, yry-
VOOKW.

perform, épyafoua, dra-
TPaTTOMAL, avoo; =
display, damodeixvupt ;
= take place, yiyvouar.

perfume, pipov, 76.

perhaps, lowe.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

Pericles, IlepsxAne, -éove, 6.
peril, xivddvoe, 6.
period (time), ypdvoc, 6.
perish, dwoAAvpat.
permit, é4o, didwut: it is
permitted, éeore.
Persian, Ilépoy7e, -ov, 6.
person (appearance), ef-
doc, -ovg, TO; = body,
oapa, TO.
persuade, weiSw w. a.
persuasiveness, evda,
-0U¢ ? 7]. ;
perverted, oxoAsd¢ 8.
Phaeacians, ®aiakec, ob.
Phanes, ®avye, -yTo¢, 6.
Philip, @iAvmzog, 6.
philosopher, ¢sAoco¢gog, 6.
philosophize, ¢:Aocodéw.
philosophy, ¢:A0cogia, 7.
Phoenicians, Poivirec, of :
adj., Porvixetoc.
Phorcys, ®dpkve, -vog, 6.
Phryxus, ®pifoe, 6.
Phrygians, ®piyec, ob.
physician, iarpéc, 6.
pieces, to tear in, dtap-
pnyvom.
piety, evoeBeia, 7.
pillar, 077A, 77.
pine, éAar7, 7.
pious, eioeB7c, =e.
pity, éAeaipw, oikreipw;
to have, on, xateAeéw
TLva. [avri.
place, tomoc¢, 6; in, of,
, to, TES nL.
plague, to, Teipw.
plaintiff, xatjyopos, 6.
plane-tree, tA aravog, 7.
plant, to, éudvTedo.
Plataeans,Aarazeic,-gor,
Oi.
Plataea, WAarara, 7.
Plato, WAadrov, -avoe. 6.
play, to, wailw; play at,

rail.

—s

ee

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

plea, Adyoc, 6.

pleasant, 7c, -eia, -v.

pleasantly, 7déwe.

please, dpécxw w. d.

pleasure, 7d0v7, 7).

plot, a, éxuBovd7, 7.

against, to, é¢Gov-
Acbw w. d.

plunge, dizrw.

Pluto, [lA0tTwv, -wvoe, 6.

poet, 7o1nTH¢, -ov, 0.

poetry, epic, toinoe ev,
TO E77].

political, woArtiKde 3.

pollute, ucaivo.

Polyclétus, WoAdKiectoc,o.

Pontus Euxinus, Id6vro¢
Evéecvoc, 6.

poor, wévy¢, -nTOCG, Tevi-
xXp0¢ 8; =mean,dadAoc.

, to be, mévouat, tre-
VITEDO.

poorly (badly), caxdc.

Poseidon (Neptune), IIo-
celoav, -Gvoc, 0.

possess, YW, KEKTN UAL ;
oneself of, Kparéw w. g.

possession, KT7 Ud, TO, KTI-
OlC, 7], OVOTA, 7).

possible, dvvatoc 3; as
quickly as, ¢ Tay.oTa.

——, to be, éSeort.

poverty, 7evia, 7.

power, dvvapic, -ewc, 7);
= influence, éfovcia, 77 ;
to be in the, of, yiyvo-
par ért Teve.

, it is in one’s (pos-
sible), éSeore.

practice, doxnote, 7.

practise, to, ueAeTaw, do-
kéw, yuuvaco ; the last
two, usually of athletic
exercises.

praise, éauvoc, 6.

, to, Eruvéw.

prater, ddcAzcyn:, -ov, 6.

prating, ddoAecyxia, 7.
pray, evyouat; = entreat,
lkeTebdu.

. prayer, eby7, 7).

precaution, 7pdvoca, 7.
prefer, aipéopat.
preparation, “eAéT7, 77.
prepare oneself, mapao-
kevacouat; for some-
thing, ef¢ TU.
present, tapov, éveorac,
~via, -O¢. [péxw.
(submit, afford), za-
, to be, mapetpt, Kw.
preserve, c@Cw.
president,pocratfe,-ov,0.
press into, eiewintw etc TL.
on, éyKeluae.
pretence, 7pd¢dore, -ews, 7.
pretend,
gacko.
prevail (exist), eiui; (of
a usage), Kezae.
prevent, eipyw, anéyo.
pride, ¢povauata, Ta; =
arrogance, #Gpz¢, -ews,7.
oneself, to, yaupdo-
pat, GyGAAopat ext Tive.
priest, fepedc, -éwe, 6.
prison, deouwrnplov, TO.
prisoner, aiyuadwroe, 6.
private capacity, idie.
prize, atAov, Td.
highly, to, wovéouat
tept TOoAAOD.
proceed, Baiva, mpoBaiva.
proclamation, to make,
éxdaiva.
procure (= find for), ed-
pick.
prodigy, tépac, -atoc, 76.
profess, érayyéAAoua.
proffer, wapéyo, érapKéw.
proficiency, to make, in,
TpoKOnTw, éeénididwpt
mpo¢ or én TL.
profit, to, S¢eAéw; what

Tpocroléouat,

343

does it profit? 7/ ovp-
pepe. [ficiency.
progress, to make, see pro-
prohibit, drayopetu, are:-
TEL.
prominent, to be, above,
Tpoexu.
promise, to, dmioxvéopat,
érayyédAopat. [7-
promptitude,ofir7¢,-4T0¢,
properly, a&toAdyuc.
property, vp7yara, Ta, ob-
Cia, 7.
Proserpine, [lepcedévy, 7.
prosper, to, ed ¢époyat.
prosperity, evTvyxia, 7.
prosperous, to be, evrv-
xéw, evdatmovén.
proud of, to be, ceuvive-
fae ech Tivl, GyaAAopat
én TLL.
provide for, tpoctiGyuc.
for oneself in addi-
tion to, mpocropiCopat.
provident, to be, zpovoéo-
pal w. g.
provided that, ei, av.
provisions, éxir#deta, Ta.
prudence, cwdpocivy, 7.
prudent, ¢pdviuoc 3;
moderate, éTploc 8.
public, dyyoctog 38;
common, kolvo¢ 3; in
a public capacity, d7-
ooia; to pass time in
public, év 76 gavep@
eval.
public square, dyood, 7.
punish, xo1dlw, arorivo-
at; to punish by a
fine, Cnutdw.
punishment, tiuwpia, 7;
as a fine, (ypia, 7. [at.
purchase, ovéouat, mpia-
pupil, nadyrihe, -ov, 6.
purple, zopdipeoc 8, dat-
vixeog 3 (see § 29).

=

344

purpose, for any, e/¢ Te.

pursue, dcoKka, cxohovSéw.

put the hand to, émzyeu-
péo w. d.

put on, dudiérvume, auré-
youat.

put to death, amoxteive ;
= murder, govevu.

Pyrrhus, Ilipfoe, 6.

Pythia, Tludia, 7.

Q.
Quail, a, dprvg, -dyar, 6.
queen, Gaciiea, #.
quick, Oxide, -eia, -. [2ba.
quickly, tayéwe, Taxa, al-
as possible, w¢ Ta-
ylora.
quiet (adj.), 7otvo¢ 2.

R.
Race, yévoc, -ove, T6; hu-
man, Gv0poTwv yévoc.
rail at, oxO7Tw.
rain, ouBpoc, 6.
ram, Kploc, 0.
rank, a, 7aSc¢, -ewe, 77.
rapacious, gpraég, -ayoc.
rapidly, tayéwe, Taye.
rather, #aAAov.
tational, cOdpav, -ovoc.
ravage, 0700.
raven, K0pa&, -dkoe, 0.
reach, é¢:kvéopar w. 2.
ready, to be (willing),
eGého.
readiness, mpo0vpia, 7.
reality, in, dAnGGc.
reason, Adyoc, 4;
reason, OlKaiwc.
receive, dévouat, AauBave.
recently, apt, Evayxoc.
recompense (favor), 7é-
plc, -iTo¢, 7).
record together, ovyypad¢o.
rectify, einive.
Red sea, Envi pa SaAarra,

with

reed, a, KGAauoc, 6, pir,
peroc; 77.

reflect, dsavoéopat, Aoyt-
Coat.

reflection, Aoyapoc, 0.

refuge, Karadiy7, 7).

regal, BactAetoc.

regulate (= prepare), Ka-
TAGKEVEL.

reign over, BactAebw.

rejoice, yaipw w.d.,7dopuat.

release, GwoAbw.

rely upon (trust), T/oTEvo.

remain, févw, Olay. ; con-
cealed, dsaAavBavo.

remember, éuv7pae W. g.

remembrance, “v7u7n, 7.

remote, most, éoyato¢ 3.

render effeminate, pada-
KiG@; service to (be a
slave to), dovAeiw w. d.;
aid to, Bontéw w. d.

renown, €vxAela, 7, 00£a,
7}, KAé0¢, -ove, TO.

repay, drodidwul, apei-
Bouat TLva TLVL; some-
thing is repaid, 7? dzo-
AauPaverat.

repel, étadéo.

repent, peTauédouat, or
impers. peTauédet TLvi
TLVOE.

report, a, Adyog, 6.

reproach, to, péyw,éAéyxo.

reputable, eidofo¢ 2.

reputation, evKAeta,
66£a, 7.

, good, ebdogia, 7.

request, to, aitéw, déopat
W. g. ledx7, 2.

> 4, dénote, “EWS, 1,

requite a favor, dzodidw-
pe xaptv.

rescue, calu.

residence, governor’s, dp-
yetov, Td.

resolutely, mpoViuos.

7,

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

resolution, a (decree), Sov
Aevua, 76, WHdropa, TO.

resolve, ytyvaoke, doket
TLVL.

respect, aidac, -ov¢, 7; to
have, for, aidéouai Tiva;
with respect to, wepé.

respectable, a&cdAoyog 2.

response, to give a, ¥pdw;
a, XP7TLOS, 0.

rest, the, dAdoc; = reli-
guus, Aowro¢ 8.

restore, dodidwpyt.

restore, hard to, dugera-
voptwrtog 2.

restrain, eipyw, améxo.

retire, dvaywpéo. [2-

retreat, a, KaTaBdore, -Ews,

, to, dvaxywpéw.

return, Gvaywpéw.

reveal, éxxadirtu ; itself,
dnAdouat.

revenge oneself on, or up-
on, Tiuwpéouat Ww. a&,
Gpovoual w. 2.

revenue, 7pdcodoe, 77.

reverence, aidd¢, -ov¢, 7.

———,, to, aidéouat, o&Bo-
pat; highly, wept moA-
A0b movéouat.

revile, Aodopéw w. 2.
revolt, to cause to, ddio-
Tthut; Mid., to revolt.
reward, &0Aov, 76, yépac,

-t, TO. [rog, 6.
Rhampsinitus, ‘Paypive-
rich, wAobotocg 3, etmopog

2; be or become rich,

TAOVvTEW. [ra, 7a.
riches, tAodToc, 6, xpjua-
ride by, tapeAabvo.
right (just), dixacog 3; =e

dexter, de&té¢ 3.
ring, daxrvAlog 6.
ripe, Tétwv.
rise up, Gviorayas.
river, woTdp6c, 6.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

road, 6d6¢, 7.

rob, dp7aw; = deprive
of, ddarpéopuat.

robber, Ano77¢, -ov, 6.

robe, oT0A7, 77, (uartvov, 76.

rock, 7éTpa, 77.

Romans, ‘Pwyaioz, ol.

room, dvoyewr, -w, TO.

root, pila, 7.

rope, Kaus, -w, 6.

rose, fddov, 76.

rough, okAnpéc 3.

royal, Bacideoc; royal
dominion, PaciAcia, 7;
royal palace, BaciAea,
Ta.

rugged, Tpaxoc 3.

ruin, to, a7oAAvue.

——, to go to, at the same
time, ovvardAAvum.

rule, rule over, to, dpyo,
Bactrcbo.

ruler, Gpyov, -ovTos, Oo.

run, Tpéx ; run to, 7po¢-
TpEXO.

away, 0.dpackw, aro-
OLdpackw w. a.

—— past, tapaTpéyo.

—— in different direc-
tions, dcadidpackw.

rush, to, 6pude.

S.
Sacred to, /epo¢ 3 w. g.
sacrifice, Svoia, 7; to sac-
rifice or offer, Jiw; to
bring, Yvotav roléopat.
sadness, A077, 77.
safe, daddAne, -é¢.
safely, dodaddc.
safety, owrnpia, 7.
sail, TAéw.
—— away, a7oTéw.
sake of, for the, Zvexa, wept.
Salamis, ZaAapic, -ivoc, 7.
same, the, 6 aitéc.
Samian Lauoc, 6.

Sardis, Lapderc, -ewyv, ai.
Sarpédon, Zapryndar,
-6voc, 0.
satisfaction, dixy, 7 ;
give, didwyt.
say, Aéyo, dnp, ciety.
scarcely, usxpov ; scarcely
escape, lKpov éxdevyo.
scatter, oxedala, oKedav-
vou, OLaoreipw.
sceptre, OK77TpoV, TO.
school, see Thales.
science, éloT7uN, 7).
sciences, ypaupara, Ta.
scourge, to, uaoTLyow.
scout, a, oko7dc, 0.
scythe-bearing, dpexavy-
dopoc 2.
Scythia, ZxvVia, 7.
sea, Vadarra, 7; by sea,
kata Gahatrav.
sea-coast,tapavahartria,7.
sea-bird, Sadarria dpvec.
sea-fight, vavuakia, 7.
season, against (nnsea-
sonably), wapa Kaipév.
secret, KpuTrToc 8.
secretly, xpi¢a, see § 175,3.
secure, doddAne, -é¢;
firm, BéGatog 3.
securely, dodddcc.
sedentary trade, Gavavor-
Kh TEXVN. [uat.
see, BAETH, Opdw, dépKo-
—— to it, cxoréw.
seek, seek for, (y7Téw.
seem, doxéw, daivoyat.
seen, not to be, a0édtoe¢ 2.
seize, ovAAauBavw; seize
quickly, dvaprrafu.
self, avroc. [7.
self-command, éyxpareca,
self-control, éyxpareva, 7.
self: taught,abtrodidaxroe 2.
Selinus, Zedcvoic¢, -odvr-
ToC, 0. [wac.
sell, mimptioxy, airodido-

to

845

Semiramis,
-idoc, 7].

Lepipaute,

send, réyru,oTéAAw,aroo.

back, dzoréuro.

—— forth or out,éxréurro.

senseless, doivertoc 2.

sensible, cvveTéc 3; to be,
cudpovéw.

sentence (judicial), <pioce,
-EWC, 7], OLKN, 7.

separate, to, driornut, Kpi-
vw ; (intrans.), diva yiy-
vouat, dtakpivopat.

seriously, to speak, o7ov-
0afu.

serve (= be a slave), dov-
Aebw w. d.; =render
service, Um7peTéw w. a3
= become, yiyvopat.

service (benefit), depa-
Tela, 7).

, to render, to, dov-
Achbo w. d., xapifouat
w. d.

servitude, dovdcia, 7.

set (place), ca¥ifo.

set off (of a journey), 7ro-
pevouat.

set upon (place), éxivid-y

sever, OLioTnut.

shake, cela.

shame, aiddc, -ove, 7.

shameful, aicypdc, ceckqe,
-é¢.

shave, fupéw.

sheep, 7p08drov, 76, ole,
oidc, 6, 7.

shelter, o7éyo.

shepherd, rorunv, -évoe, 6,
vousve, -éwc, 6.

shield, doric, -idoc, 7;
small, wéATn, 7.

shieldsman, tadraorne,
-ov, 6.

ship, vadc, vedc, 7.

shoe, 76dnua, TO.

short, Spayic, -eia, -%,

346

shortly, év Bpaxel,

shoulder, aoc, 0.

shouting, a (calling to),
TMIPAKEAEVGLC, -EWC, 7.

show, to, detxvupt,arodeix-
vupl, daive, arodaiva,
gavepdv ToLéw, OnAdw ;
= offer, tapéyw. inf.

shrink from, katoxvéw w.

shun, dcdyw w. a.

shut, KAciw, KaTaKAeiw.

in or up, KaTakAela,
kateipyo.

Sicily, ZuxeAla, 7.

sick, doVevic, -E¢.

sick, to be, vocéw, doSevéw.

side, by the, of, wapa.

Sidon, Zcddyv, -dvoc, 7.

Sidonian, 2iddvioc.

sight, at sight of, Part. of
Opa.

signal, to give a, onuaive.

silent, to be, olw7dw, ot-
yao.

silver, apyipoc, 0.

simple, dAdoc, 29.

sin, to, duapTave.

since (because), te, é7et;
see also § 176, 1.

sing, to, dw.

single (= any), in a nega-
tive sentence, ovdeic,
§ 177, 6.

single combat, to engage
in, wovoyayéw.

sink into or under, xata-
dvw ; sink away (fall),
TiNTO.

Sinope, Luvern, 7.

sister, dAcAd7, 77.

sit on, é¢/Cavw w. a.

slave, doiAoc, 6.

——,, to be a, dovretw.

slave-labor, dovAciov ép-
yov.

slavery, dovAcia, 7.

slay, droxreiva, dovebw.

er

sleep, ixvoe, 6.

, to, evdw, kadedda,
daptiavo.

small, uixpd¢ 8, dAtiyog 8.

smell, to, dc¢paivouat.

of anything, 0¢w.

Smerdis, Zyépdcs, -ioc, 6.

snare, wayic, -idoc, 7; lay
snares for, évedpeio.

snow, Vr, -dv0¢, 77.

snow-storm, vigeroc, 0.

SO, OUTw¢; = this, TovTO.

so far from, avTi.

so that, o¢re [§ 186].

soar upward, dvarérouat.

sober-minded, ocddpwyr,
-ovoc. [6.

Socrates, Zwxparye, -ove,

soldier, a, oTPaTLOT IE, -0v,
6.

solitude, épypia, 7.

some, évlol; some one,
tl¢ ; something, T?.

sometimes, évl0Te, woré.

son, vidc, 6. [76.

song, 307, 7, pédoc, -ovc,

soon, Taya.

sooner, 7pOTepov; =ra-
ther, uaAAov.

sophist, cogsor7e, -ov, 6.

Sophocles, ZogoxAije,-Eove,
6.

sorrow, Ad77, 77.

soul, pux7, 7-

sound, to the, of, see
§ 167, 7.

sound-mindedness,
ppoowrn, 7.

source, 777, 7.

south, weonuGpia, 7. [6.

sovereign, dpywv, -ovTos,

sovereignty, apy7, 7).

SOW, t0, O7ELPO.

spacious, sufficiently (=
sufficient), icavécg 3.

sparing, to be, detdouar

W. g.

OG@)-

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

Sparta, Zrapry, 7).

Spartan, a, Zxaprtidrye,
-0v, 0.

speak, Aéyw, odéyyouar ;

- speak seriously, o7ov-

dato.

spear, Odpu, TO [§ 39].

spectator, edt7c¢, -od, 6.

speech, Adyog, 6, pitoc, 6 7

freedom or boldness of
Tappnoia, 7.
speedily, Taya, Tayéws.
Sphinx, 2¢yé, -yyos, 7.
spirit, voi¢, vod, 6, gp7r,
-EvOC, 7).
splendid, Aaumpo¢ 8, mo-
Avtedne, -é¢. [o.
sportsman, O7pevTig, -0v,
spread, dlaoreipw.
spring, belonging to the,
éapivoc 8.

spring from (=be, or.

originate from), eis,
yiyvoua.

square, public, dyopa, 7.

stadium, oTadzov, TO.

stag, éAddoc, 6, 7.

stage, oKnvH, 77.

stand, to, or#vat, éoravat.

firm, dropuévo.

state, a, ToAtTeia, 7, 16-
Ag, -EwC, 7.

, relating to the, 7o-
AitiKéc 8.

station, to, TE0nu. [7.

statuary, avdpravrorocia,

statue, avdplac, -GvToe, 6.

steadfast,éoTnkO¢,-via,-6c.

steal, xAémTo@ ; steal away
dpralo.

steersman,
-0v, 0.

Stesichorian, Zryotyoproc.

Stesichorus, 2ryoixopoc, é.

still (yet), érv.

stillness, 7ovyia, 7.

stir (move), to, Kivéw.

KuBepvarnc,

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

stolen, KAdmuoc¢ 3.

stone (made of stone) 4/-
Givoc 3.

, to, KaTaTeTpOw.

stranger, févoc, 0.

stratagems, to be exposed
to, éxiPovAevouat.

street, 606c, 77.

strength, pour, 7, dAKn, 7.

stripes, TAnyai, al.

strive (= endeavor), 7é-
paouat; = seek, (7Téw.

for or after, dpéyo-
pat Ww. g., OLOKG W. a.

strong, iovipoc 3; = firm,
BéBatoc 8, dagarne, -éc.

study, to, wavive.

stupid, doivetoc 2, TeTv-
gwpévoc 3.

subject to, ioyue 2.

subject, to, vecpdopuar w. 3..,
dovAdw w. a.; subject to
oneself, kaTaorpepouat.

subjugate, yerpoouat, dov-
A6o.

submissive, Tazrecvoc 3.

submit (present, afford),
TADEXO.

to (serve), dovreiw.

subsistence, T0067, 77.

subvert, dvatpéro.

success, evTvyia, 7;

riches, wAovTo¢, 6, OA-

Bog, 6.
succor, to, mapaoTHvat,
ovupTovéw w. d.
such, ToLovTo¢ 3 [§ 60].
such as, olo¢ [§ 182, 7].
suffer, Tacyo ; = permit,
Teplopaw Ww. Part.
suffering, 76voe, 6.
sufficient, ixavé¢ 3; to be,
ixavéc éyo.
sufficiently, ixavéc.
suitably to (conformably),
Kara.
sum, large (much), 7oAztc.

summer, Vépoc, -ove, TO.

sumptuousness, oAvTé-
Aeta, 77.

sun, 7/ALo¢, 6.

superiors, of Kpeitrovec.

supping, while, Part. of
Ocizva w. weTaso.

suppose, 7yéouat, vouicu.

supremacy, 7yeovia, 7.

sure, dodahhe, -é¢, Eume-
dog 2.

surely, dtpexéwe; by ov
Ln (see § 177, 9).

surpass, ViKaw TLVG, VTEP-
Barrouat Tiva. [ pt.

surrounding (around), 7é-

Susian, Zotozoe, 6.

swear, Ouvipe.

— falsely, émvopréw.

sweat, (dpc, -@roe, 6.

sweet, 700¢, yAvkic, -eia,
-0. [dSdc.

swift, Tayie, -ela, -b, OKdve,

swiftly, raya.

swim, véw.

sympathize, éAeaipw.

sympathy, be moved to,
éheaipw.

Syracuse, Zupaxoveas, ai.

Syracusian,Zvpaxotozoc,o.

Syrian, Zipzoc, 6.

oes
Take (receive), AauBavo ;
= capture, aipéw.
care, émiuédopar.
from, ddaipéopat Ti-
va TL. [re.
heed to, evAaBéouat
— hold of, drroua: w. g.
—— in charge, AauBavo.
place (be done), yiy-
VOUAL.
taken, to be, dAicxoyat.
talk, to, AaAéw, KwTiAAw.
tame out, énuepow.
taste, to, yevouaz w. g.

347

teach, diddoKw Tivé Tt.

teacher, d:dacKxd2oc, 6.

tear, a, ddxpiov, 76.

tear, to, pjyvipe.

—— in pieces, dcappjyvt-
jt. [6.

Telamon, TeAapar, -dvoc,

tell, Aéyo, gpafo.

Tempe, Téyury, -Gv, Ta.

temperate, éyxpar7e, -é¢.

temple, vedic, -e0, 6.

temple-robber,/epdadA0¢,6

tend (feed), Bocxw.

tent, oxyv7, 7.

terrible, decvoc¢ 8.

terrify, kararAgrro, éxr.

testimony, “apTupia, 7.

Teucer, Tetxpoc, 6.

Thales, Gare, 6 (G. OG-
dew, D. -7, A. -fr);
Thales and his school,
ot Gudl Caan.

Thamyris, Oduvplc, -Lo¢
and -idoc, 7.

than, 7; also by the rela
tion of the Gen. after a
comparative.

thank, to, yapuv eidévat.

that, in order, 6¢, dzwe.

theatre, Séatpov, TO.

Theban, O7Gaioe, 6.

Thebes, 07Gaz, ai.

theft, xAo77, 77.

Themistocles, OQeysoTo-
KAnje, -Eove, 6. [ Toe, 6.
Theophrastus, O©«d¢pac-

therefore, ovv.
therewith, weTa Tobrov.

Thermodon, Oeppddar,
-OVvTOE, 0.

Thermopylae, Oepyorb-
Aat, ai.

Thesprotia, Qeorpwria, 7.
Thessalian, OerraAde, 6.
thief, «Aéxryc, -ov, 4,
KAOW, -w7de, 6.
thievish, «267«uo¢ 3.

348

thing, yp7Ua, 76, KTHUA,TO.

think, #yéoua, vopila,
doxéo.

about, dpovTila w. a.

thirst, dipoc, -ovc, TO.

—, to, or be thirsty,
dupaw.

thirsty, avog.

thoroughly, to understand,
diayltyvacke.

though, kal dv; also by a
Part., see § 176, 1.

thought, vénua, TO.

thoughtful, gpdoviuog 3.

Thracian, @p@é, -Gxde, 6

throne, Updvoe, 6

—, to ascend, ei¢ ae
Aclay KaTaoTHVat.

through, ocd.

throughout, dva ; = whol-
ly, TavTas.

throw, pixTo.

a bridge over,

Cebyvupe.

down, cavdinut.

—— into disorder, rapar-
TO.

out (as words).Ai7Tw.

thus, odTa/(c).

thwart, évavridopar w. d.

Tigranes, Teypav7e, -ov, 6.

tile, tAivJoc, 77.

till, foc, wéype.

time, xpdvoc, 6; right,
Katpoc, 4; life-time,
aid, -Gvoc. 6; at the
same time, da; to pass
time in public, éy 76
gavep@ eivat.

Tissaphernes, Tvccagép-
VNC, -OVS, 6

to-day, T7MEpOV.

together with, dua w. d.

toil, to, Hox Séw.

to-morrow, auplov.

tongue, yAdrtTa, 7.

too (also), kat; denoting

ava-

intensity, dyav, or by
the comp. deg.
tooth, ddot¢; -dvToc, 6
top, éxpoc 3 [§148,Rem.9].
touch, to, &mToual Ww. g&.,
Siyyavo w. g.
towards, 7poc.
town, TOALG, -EwC, 7.
trade, a, TExVN, 77
tradition, Adyoe, 6
traduce, d:aBarrAw.
tragedy, Tpaywdia, 7.
train (exercise), to, doxéw.
transition, peTaGoay, 7
(see degenerate).
travel, to, wopevouat.
- abroad, amodnpéw.
elling-money, épddiov,

ay
Td
Be mpodocia, 7.
treasure, Ojcaupoc, O.
treasures, yo7aTa, Ta.
treaty, ovv07Ky, 7.
tree, dévdpov, TA.
triad, Tprac, -tidoc, 7

trial, to make, of, 7evpio-
pat Ww. g.

tribute, ¢dpoz, of.

trivial, gadAoc. [7.

Troezene, Tpoljv, -7vo¢,

trophy, Tpd7atoy, TO.

trouble, zrévoe, 6.

oneself about, dpov-
TiGw W. g.

troubled, to be, Auréouat.

troublesome, yaterd¢ 3,
Avinpoe 8, pyanéog 3.

Troy, Tpoia, 7

true, dAndie, -éc, dAnvdi-
voce 8; = faithful, ac-
Toc 38.

truly (really), aA7ddc ; to
know truly, ériorapat.

trumpet,oaAmyé,-tyyoc,7.

trumpeter, cadmiyKtie,
-0v, 6. [redw.

trust, to, mei0cuat, m0-

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

truth, dAqSera, 77.

, to speak the, dAr-
Sebo W.

turn, to, oTpé¢w (trans.);
= devote oneself to,
TpéTOMal. [Type.

away, Tpétw, adio-

to, mpoTpéra.

tusk, ddobc, -dvTo¢, 6.

twice, dic.

tyrant, Tipavvoc, 6.

Tyrtaeus, Tvpraiog, 6.

U.
Uleer, éAKoc, -ovg, 6.
Ulysses, ’Odvoceic,-éwe, 6
unacquainted with, a7et-
po¢ 2w. g.
unadvisedly, eix7. [2.
unchanged, dueTraBAnroe
uncle (by the father’s side)
TATPWC, -WOC, O
under, 076. [ Pépa.
undergo, dzopévw TL, bTr0
underneath, to be, drecps.
understand, éxiorayat,
olda. [vookw.
, thoroughly, dvayty-
understanding, votc, 4,
gpévec, ai.
undertaking, Epyov, TO.
undone, azpextog 2.
uneasy,to render,taparrw
uneducated, amaidevtog 2
unexpected, wapadotoc 2,
avéAriartoc 2.
unfortunate, dTiyfe, -é.
, to be, duervyéw.
ungrateful, dyapioroc 2.
unhappy, tixne, -E¢.
unharmed, a77uwv, -ovoc.
unintelligent, dvoocg, aov-
veToc 2.
united, to be, 6uovoéw.
unjust, adixo¢ 2.
unknown, a¢av7e, -éc.
unrewarded, ayapioro¢ 2.

|
:
|
|

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.

unseemly, aloypéc, det-
KIC, -é¢.

until, uéypl, mpiv.

unvarying, Oyvexne, -é¢.

up, ava; lay up, Karati-
Ont.

upon, é7t. [yat.

upward, to soar, dvaréto-

usage, vouoc, 0.

use, to, ypdouat.

—-, to be of, ovudépo.

, to make, of, xpao-
pai TeV.

useful, yp7otuoc 2, ObéAL-
log 2,

——, to be, d¢eAéw.

using, YP7ol¢, -ews, 77.

utter, to, Aéyw; = emit
as a sound, mpoinue.

VV.

Valuable, woAvreAnje, -éc,
Tip.og 3.

value more, or more high-
ly, wept peilovog mrotéo-
pat.

vehement, devvdc 3.

venture, to, ToAudw.

verdant, to be, 0aAAw.

versed in, ayadoc, éuret-
pocg 2.

very, Aiav, ogddpa; also
by the Comp. or Sup.
of the adjective.

vessel, 1/olov, 76.

vice, Kakia, 7, KakdérTn¢,
“TOC, 7).

victory, vixy, 7.

village, KOun, 77.

vine, GuTedoc, 7.

violate (as a treaty), Adw.

violence, Bia, 4.

violent, Biatoc 3, o¢odpéc¢

3; =severe, /ovipéc 8.

violently, o¢ddpa, Aiav,
ioxupac.
virtue, dpet7, 7

virtuous, dyadé¢ 3, oxov-
daioc 8.

visible, dparé¢ 3.

voluntarily, éxovoiwe.

voluptuous, Tpvdyr7e, -ov.

W.

Wage war with, todeuéw
w. d.

wait, wepluévo.

walk, to, Paive.

wander about, wepi7Aa-
vaouat.

want, to, déw, déouar w. g.

, be in, oraviva w. g.,
XETSw Ww. g.

war, T0Aeuo¢, 0.

, to carry on, ToAEEw.,

warlike, toAeuiKog 2.

warning, owdpoviopoc, 0.

WAITIOY, OTPATLOTNG, -OV, 0.

war-song, Taldv, -dvoc, 0.

wash, virtw, TAdve.

wasp, ~7v, Wrvoc, 0.

watch, to keep, t7péw.

water, idwp, tdatoc, TO.

way (road, journey), ddo0c,
73; = manner, Tpdzror, 6.

wax, k7p0¢, 6.

weak, davev7e, -éc.

weaken, to,Tsipw, duavpow.

weal, owrnpia, 7.

wealth, wAodro¢, 6, xp7-
para, Ta.

wear (have), éxo.

out, Teipw.

weary, to be, Kauvw.

weep, to, KAaiw.

welfare, cwrnpia, 7.

well, caAdc, ed; do well
to, 6d TpaTTu, ed ToLéw,
evepyeTéw ; to be well,
ev Ey.

well-disposed, etvooc.

well-known, d7/0¢ 3, ¢a-
vepoc 3.

well-ordered, evraxto¢ 2.

30

349

west, Zomepoc, 0.

what? Tic, ri.

whatever, d¢ric, dcrep

when, Ore, ézet.

whence, 2 od.

whenever, drav. [77 ,

where, 0v, dz0v; where?

wherever, 0d, d-ov w. opt.

whether, 76Tepov.

while, expressed by the
Part. [§ 176, 1].

whip, paorzé, -iyoe, 7.

whither? 77; [ tic.

who, which, 6¢ ; interrog.,

whoever, é¢ri¢, d¢rep.

whole, ac, ciurac, 6A0¢ 3.

wicked, kaxéc 3, xovnpbc 3.

wife, yuvy, yvvalkoc, 7,
YOPLETH, 7.

wild beast, Onpiov, 76.

willing, éxov, -oica, -év.

—-, to be, Povdouas,
Etéro.

willingly, 7déwe.

wind, avepoc, 0.

wine, olvoc, 6.

wing, wTeTpov, 76, xré pug,
-y0¢, 7). [r6.

(of an army), Képac,

winter, Vélu@v, -Gvog, 0.

wisdom, codia, 7, cwdpo-
OvvN, 7.

wise, cogd¢ 3. °

wisely, cogG¢ , = well, ed.

wish, to, GotAouar, &3éAw.

with, civ, wera w. g.

within, évré¢ w. g.

without, dvev w. g.

witness, “apTv¢, -dpog, 6, 7.

wolf, AdKog, 6.

woman, yvv7}, yuvarKds, 7.

——,, old, ypade, ypaéc, 7.

wonder, to, Javuato.

wonderful, Cavzacrég 3.

wont, to be, é0ifo.

word, Adyo¢, 6, Exog, -uve,
TO, pHa, TO.

350

work, épyov, 76.
— for, to, dovAciu.
—— out, éfepyalopac.
—— with, cvuTovéw.
world, xdopoc, 6.
worship, to, mpooxvvéu,
aidéomat.
worst, to, vetpoouat.
worthy, aco¢ 8; to think
worthy, a&:6w.
worthless, dvaéEcoc.
wound, to, TuTpdcka ;
strike, TAqTTw.
Write, ypadu.
wrong-doer, ddixév.

wrong, to do, ddixéw, Ka-
K@C TOLEW.

xX.
Xenophon, Eevogor, -Gv-
To¢, 6.
Xerxes, Zépize, -ov, 6.

Y.
Yarn, via, 76.
year, ETo0¢, -ove, 76, Eviav-
Tc, 6.
yet, ért, 70.
yet even now, Ere cal viv.
yield, exo.

ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. ‘

young, véog 3.

young man, veaviar, -ov,
6, véoc, 6.

youth, vedryc, -7To¢, %,
780, 7. [6.

C4 2
, 2,VEAVLAE, -OV, 6, VEOC,

Z.
Zealous, orovdaiog 3.
zealously, orovdaiwc; to
be zealously employed,
oTrovddla.
Zeno, Zjvwr, -wvoe, 6.
Zeus, Zevc, 6 [§ 47, 3].
Zeuxis, Zevéic, -idag, 4.

ENGLISH INDEX.

[The figures refer to the sections].

Accent in contraction, 11, 2.

Accentuation, 10—16 ; of the first Dec.,
26, 4 and 5; of the second Dec., 28,
Rem.2; of the Attic forms, 30, Rem.2;
of contracts, 29 and 11, 2; of the third
Dec., 33; of adjectives of three end-
ings, in Gen. Pl., 26, 4, (vy); of con-
tracts, 29; of the verb, 84.

Accusative, Synt., 159 et seq.; double
Acce., 160; Acc. with Inf, 172; Acc.
with Part., 175,2; Acc. Abs., 176, 3.

Active verb, 71; with Fut. Mid., 116, 1
and 144, ¢; Synt., 149, (a); with
trans. and intrans. sense, 150, 1; with

_ a causative sense, 150, Rem. 2.

Acute accent, 10, 2.

Adjective, 23 ; Declension of adjectives,
see Declension; Comparison of. 49
et seq.

Adjective-sentences, 182.

Adverbial sentences of place and time,
183; denoting cause, 184; condition,
185; consequence or effect, 186, 1;
comparison, 186, 2 and 3.

Adverbs, 53; Comparison of, 54.

Agreement, 146 et seq.; Mase. Adj.
with Neut. subst., 147. (a); Pl. verb
with Sing. Subj., 147, (a); Neut. Adj.
with Mase. or Fem. Subst., 147, (b);

Sing. verb with Pl. Subj., 147, (d);
Pl. verb with Dual Subj., 147, (e).

Anomalies, see verbs and Dec.

Answer to question, 187, Rem. 4.

Aorist, Synt., 152; Aor. second with
intrans. sense, 150, 2.

Apocope, 194, 6.

Avodosis, 185, 1.

Apostrophe, 6.

Apposition, 154, 2; with possessive
pronouns, 154, 3.

Arsis, 189, 2.

Article, Synt., 148.

Atonics, 13.

Attraction with prepositions, 167, Rem;
with Inf, 172, 3; with Part., 175, 2;
in adjective sentences, 172, Rem. 1;
with the relative, 182, 6 and 7.

Attributives, 154.

Augment, 85 et seq.; in composition.
90 et seq.

Barytones, 10, Rem. 2, and § 12.
Breathings, 5.

Caesura, 189, 3.

Cardinal numbers, 65, a, and 67.

Cases, 22; Synt., 156 et seq.

Characteristic of the verb, 77; of the
tenses, 79, (a); pure and impure
characteristic, 104.

Circumflex, 10, 3.

Classes of verbs, 70 et seq. and 149.

Comparative, construction with, 168, S.

Comparison of adjectives, 49 et seq.;
of adverbs, 54.

Conditional adverbial sentences, 185.

Conjugation, 76; in -w, 81 et seq.; in
-pt, 127 et seq.

Consonants, 4; movable consonants
at the end of a word, 7, change
of, 8.

Coérdinate sentences, 178.

352

Copula elvaz, 145, 5.

Corsnis, 6.

Correlatives, 63.

Crasis, 6; with the accent, 12, 2.

Dactyl, 189, 1.

Dative, 161; with Inf. 172, 3; with
Part., 175, Rem. 3.

Declension of substantives: first, 25—
27; second, 28—30; contraction of
second, 29; Attic of second, 30;
third, 31—48; gender, accentuation
and quantity of third, 33; anomalies
of third, 47; Dec. of adjectives in
-0¢, -7, -0v, 28, Rem. 3, and 26, Rem.;
in -0¢, -ov, 28, Rem. 3; of contracts
in -00¢, -67, -oov, in -oo¢, -oov and
in -e0¢, -éa, -eov, 29; of those in -we,
-wv, 30; in -n¢ and -ac¢, 27, Rem. 2;
in -wy, -ov, 35, Rem. 4; in -et¢, -é0-
oa, -ev, 40, Rem.; in -tc, -ela, -d,
46, Rem. 1; of the irregular adjec-
tive, 48; of pronouns, 56 et seq.; of
numerals, 68.

Demonstrative pronouns, 60.

Deponents, 144; Synt., 150, Rem. 5.

Diaeresis, 3, Rem. 3; in verse, 189, 5,
and 194, 2.

Digamma, 193.

Diphthongs, 3.

Disjunctive codrdination, 178, 8.

Division of consonants, 4.

Division of syllables, 17.

Division of vowels, 3.

Dual, Synt., 147, (e) and Rem. 3 and 4.

Dual subject with Pl. verb, 147, (e).

Elision, 6; accent in elision, 12, 3.

Ellipsis of the Subst. on which the Gen.
depends (év ddov), 154, Rem. 2; of
the Subject, 145, Rem. 2.

Enclitics, 14—16.

Feminine substantives connected with
neuter adjectives, 147, (a) and (b);
in Dual with Mase. Adj., 147, Rem. 4.

Future, Attic in -G and -odyaz, 83;

ENGLISH INDEX.

Doric in -covpat, 116, 3; without o,
111, 1; with the Mid. instead of Act.
116 and 144,¢; Synt., 152, 6; Fut.
Perf... 152: 2.

Gender of substantives, 21; of third
declension, 33.
Genitive, 156—158; attributive Gen.,
154; Gen. with Inf, 172, 3; Gen.
Abs., 176, 2, and Rem. 2 and 3;
Gen. Abs. with o¢, 176, Rem. 3.

Grave accent, 10; grave instead of
acute, 12, 1.

Hiatus, 191.
Historical tenses, 72, 2,b; Synt., 152, 3.

Imperative, Synt. 153, 1, (c}; with
7, 158, Rem. 3. »

Imperfect, Synt., 152, 9 and 10.

Impersonal construction changed into
the personal with the Part. 175,
Rem. 5; in substantive sentences
with &¢ and 672, 180, Rem.

Inclination of the accent, 13 et seq.

Indicative, Synt., 153, 1, (a); of a past
tense in expressing a wish, 153, Rem.
1; of a past tense with dv, 153,
2.

Infinitive, Synt., 170 et seq.; with ay,
153, 2,d; with the article, 173; with
OcTe, 186, 1, (a); with o/o¢ and daoe,
186, Rem. 2; with 颒 dire, 186, Rem.
3; with o¢, 186, Rem. 4.

Interrogative pronouns, 62.

Interrogative sentences, 187.

Intransitive verb, Synt., 149, (1), (2);
in the Pass. (¢8ovotpar), 150, 6.

Tota subscript, 8; with Crasis, 6, Rem

Masculine adjectives. connected with
Neut. substantives, 147, (a).

Metathesis,117, 2.

Middle verb, Synt.; 149, (2), 150.

Modes, Synt., 151 et seq.; sequence
of, 181, Rem.

Mode-vowel, 79, (b) et seq. and 129.

ENGLISH INDEX.

Movable consonants at the end of a
word, 7.

Negative particles, 177.

Neuter adjectives connected with a
Mase. or Fem. substantive, 147, (b) ;
Neut. Pl. with a verb in Sing., 147,(d);
Neut. Pl. of verbal adjectives instead
of Sing., 168.

Nominative, Synt., 145, 4; two Nomi-
natives, 146, 2; with Pass. of intrans.
verbs which govern a Gen. or Dat.
(¢Sovotuat), 150,6; Nom. with Inf,
172, 1 and 2; with Part., 175, 2.

Number, 22; see also Agreement.

Numerals, 65 et seq.

Object, 155.

Objective construction, 155.
Oblique or indirect discourse, 188.
Optative mode, Synt., 153.
Oxytones, 10, Rem 2.

Paroxytones, 10, Rem. 2.

Participials, 74.

Participle, Synt., 174 et seq.; difference
between Part. and Inf. with certain
verbs, 175, Rem. 4; with tvyyavo,
etc., 175, 3; denoting time, cause, etc.,
176, 1; with dv, 153, 2, d.

Passive verb, Synt., 149, (8).

Perfect, Synt., 152, 5; second Perf.
with intrans. sense, 150, 2.

Perispomena, 10, Rem. 2.

Person of the verb, Synt., 146; when
the subjects are of different persons,
147b, 2.

Personal endings of the verb in -o,
79, (b) et seq.; in -yz, 130.

Personal pronouns, 56.

Personal construction instead of the
impers.; see impers. construction.
Pluperfect, Synt., 152, 11 and Rem. 6.
Plural Subj. with Sing. verb, 147, (a).
Position, syllable long by, 9, 3, and

190, 4; short by, 190, 3.

Possessive pronouns, 59.

353

Predicate, 145, 5, and 146.

Prepositions, 24; Synt., 162 et seq.;
attraction of, 167, Rem.

Present tense, Synt., 152, 4.

Principal sentence, 179.

Principal tenses, 72, 2,a; Synt., 152, 2.

Proclitics, 13.

Pronouns, 55 et seg.; use of, 169.

Pronunciation of particular letters, 2.

Proparoxytones, 10, Rem. 2.

Properispomena, 10, Rem. 2. _

Protasis, 185,1; omission of, 185, Rem.4.

Punctuation-marks, 18.

s
Quantity, 9 and 190; of third Dec., 33.

Reciprocal pronoun, 58.

Reciprocal verb, 149, Rem. 1, and 150,
Rem. 3.

Reduplication, 77 and 88; Attic, 89;
in composition, 90.

Reflexive verb, Synt., 149, (2).

Reflexive pronoun, 57.

Relative pronouns, 61.

Relative sentence; see Adj. sentence.

Sentence, 145.

Sentences denoting purpose, 181.

Singular Adj. connected with Mase. or
Fem. Pl., 147, (b); Sing. verb with
Neut. Pl. Subject, 147, (d).

Spondee, 189, 1.

Stem of the verb, 77; pure and im-
pure stem, 100; strengthed stem,
101.

Subject, 145; when omitted, 145, Rem.
2, (a), (b), (¢).

Subjunctive mode, Synt., 153.

Subordinate clause, 179.

Subordination, 179.

Substantive, 20; Gender of, 21; Num-
ber and Case, 22.

Substantive sentences with 6rt, ¢
(that), 180; with 6zwe, iva, o¢ (in
order that), 181.

Superlative, 49 et seq.

Syllables, 9—17; division of, 17.

304:

Syncope, 117, 1.
Synizesis, 194, 4.

Tenses, 72; formation of secondary
tenses, 103; Synt., 151 et seq.
Tense-characteristic, 79, (a).

Tense-endings, 79, (b).
Theme, 100, 3.
Thesis, 189, 2.

Transitive verb, Synt., 149, (1), (a).

Trochee, 189, 1.

GREEK INDEX.

Variations of the stem vowel, 102.
Verb, 70—114; pure, 93 et seq.; con-

tract, 96 et seq.; mute, 104—-110;
liquid, 111—115; special peculiari-
ties in the formation of particular
verbs in -0, 116; anomalous, 118 et

seq.; verbs in -yt, 127—i48; verbs
in -@ analogous to those in -yt, 142
Verbal adjectives, 168.

Vowels, 3.

GREEK INDEX.

“Ayaodac const. 158, R. 6.

éyyéAAeLv w. part. and inf.
175, BR. 4, (g).

aidcioa: w. part. and inf.
175, R. 4, (k).

aidéc dec. 43.

aicxiveoSat w. part. and
inf. 175, R. 3, (k).

akovery vw. part. and inf.
175, R. 4, (a).

axpoc¢ w. art. 148, R. 9.

dAAG 178, 6.

audi prep. 167, 1.

ay 153, 2; omitted 185,
R. 3.

Gy instead of éav w. subj.
185, 2.

ava prep. 165, 1.

avev w. gen. 163, R.

avinp dec. 36.

avi prep. 163, 1.

dmAodc dec. 29, R.

amo prep. 163, 3.

*ArrOAAwv dec. 34, Rem. 1.

arodaivery w. part. and
inf. 175, R. 4, (h).

dpa 178, 9.

dpa 187, 3, (2) and (3)
and (8).

"Apne dec. 42, R. 3.

aoTnp dec. 36, R.

dorv dec. 46. Pio:

-aTaz instead of -vTaz 106,

are w. part. 176, R. 2.

-azo instead of -vTo 106,
Reb.

aTTa and arta 62.

av 178, 6.

abrapKne accent. 42, R. 4.

aitog, use of, 169, 3, 7, 8
and R. 1, 5, 6.

ag’ ov 183, 2, b.

Bowc dec. 41.

Tara dec. 39.

yap 178, 9; in a question
187,3,(1); in the answer
187, R. 4, ¢.

yaoTnp dec. 36.

yé with pronouns 64, a; in
the answer 187, R. 4, ¢.

yépac dec. 39, R.

ynpac dec. 39, R.

ylyvookely w. part. and
inf. 175, R. 4, (d).

yovu dec. 39.

ypatc dec. 41.

yvrn dec. 47, 2.

Aé, autem 178, 5.

de, suffix 53, R. 3.

decxvivas w. part. and inf,
175, Rem. 4, (h).

Anuntnp dec. 36.

6a prep. 166, 1.

616Tt 184, (b}.

ddpv dec. 39.

dvo dec. 68.

"Ea 185, 2.

éavte — éavte 178, 8.

éavtod Synt. 169, 4—6.

éyo Synt. 169, 3.

el, Si 185, 2 and R. 2; in
expressing a wish 153,
1, (2) end -E Als —=
whether 187, 3, (9), b;

ei —# 187, 3, 10.

eldévat w. part. and inf.
175, R. 4, (b). i,

eiGe 153, 1, b, (CG) and R.

eixov dec. 35, R. 3.

eiut With the sense of the
Fut: 152, R. 1.

el¢ prep. 165, 2. [(7).

eita in a question 187, 3,

elre— elite 178, 8; 187,
3, (10).

éx prep. 163, 4.

éxeivoc, use of, 169, R. 1.

©

éy prep. 164, 1.

éy oJ 183, 2, a.

2& 6rov, 2& od 183, 2, b.

érei 183, 2,b; 184, 1.

éreidav 183, 8, b.

éreton, see éret. [8, (7).

éretTa@ in a question 187,

éxi prep. 167, 3.

été, é¢7 dv 183, 2 and 8.

éoTlv of 182, R. 8.

颒 dre 186, R. 3.

Ewe, Ewe av 183, 2 and 38.

Ze, suffix 53, R. 3.

Zebc dec. 47, 3.

"H with the Com. 168, 3;
in a question 187, (8); 7
— 7, aut— aut, 178, 8.

# in a question 187, 3, (1).

7k with the sense of the
Perf.-152, RI.

qv (éav) 185, 2.

nvixa, 7vik’ dv 183,2 and 3.

Gavyudcerv const. 158, R. 6.

Sev and &, suiiix 53, R. 2.

Spis dec. 47, 4.

“Iva, in order that, 181;
where, 183, 1.

Kai; xai—kai 178, 3,
and R. 1.

Kairoe 178, 6.

Kara prep. 166, 2.

képac dec. 39, R.

KAei¢ dec. 47, 5.

Kiéog dec. 44.

Kpéag dec. 39, R.

Kowv dec. 47, 6.

Aaywe dec. 30.

Adg dec. 47, 7.

Maprv¢ dee. 47, 8.

péyac dec. 48.

pév — 0€ 178, 5.

uévTot 178, 6.

péooc w. art. 148, R. 9.

peta prep. 167, 4.

pexpl, wExXpt Gv 183,2 and 8.

#7 177,5; with the Imp.

GREEK INDEX.

Pres. or Subj. Aor. 153,
R. 3; pleonastic 177, 7
and R.; in a question
187, 3, (4) and (8) and
(9), ¢.

py Ott (boc) —GAAG Kai
(GAAd obdé) 178, 4.

py ob w. inf. 177, 8.

pnoeic dec. 68, R. 1.

pate — pate 178, 7.

Lovocg w. art. 148, R. 10.

pov 187, 8, (5).

N é¢eAx. 7, 1.

vave dec. 47, 9.

Oiog re w. inf. 182, R. 3.

oiyouat with the sense of
the Perf. 152; R. 1; w.
part. 175, 3.

dua 178, 6.

omoTav 153, 2, b; 188.
3, (b).

émoTe 183, 2,a; 184.

owe 181, 1.

6cW-TocobTHW 186, 3.

érav 183, 3, (b).

dre 183, 2, a; 184, 1.

67t, that, 180; because,
184, b.

ob (obx, oby) 177, 3;
in a question 187, 8,
(b).

ob 7 177, 9.

ob pdvov —ahAd kai {dA-
Ad obdé) 178, 4.

ov, ol, &, use of, 169, R. 3.

ovdé 178, 7.

ovdei¢ dec. 68, R. 1.

otdetic Scrig ob 182, R. 4.

ovxovy in a question 187,
3, (6).

ovv 178, 9.

ov¢ dec. 89.

ovTe — ovre 178, 7.

ovToc, use of, 169, R. 1.

ovx bre (dmwc) — adda
kat (dAAa obdé) 178, 4.

355

Ilai¢ dec. 38, R. 1.

mapa prep. 167, 5.

mac, naoa, Tav dec. 40, R. ;
w. art. 148, 10, ¢.

wept prep. 167, 2.

tohi¢ dec. 48; compari-
son of, 52, 9.

Tlocewdév dec. 34, R. 1.

TéTEpov (w6TEpa)— 7 187,
3, (8) and (10).

mpdoc dec. 48.

mTplv 188, 2, c, and R.

mp0 prep. 163, 2.

m™poc prep. 167, 6.

Lov prep. 164, 2.

ogeic, use of, 169, R. 3.

oxjpa Kav ddov Kat pé=
po¢ 147d, R. 2; 160, R. 6.

ow77p voc. 34, R. 1.

Té; ré—ré; té—kai
178, 3.
Tolyap, TolyapTol, Torya-
povy, Toivuy 178, 9.
TOLOCOE, TOLODTOC, ToOCOD-
To¢ w. art. 148, 10, (b).

Tpinpn¢g dec. 42, (1); ac
cent. 42, R. 4,

°Ydwp dec. 47, 10.

inép prep. 166, 3.

i706 prep. 167, 7.

Gaiveota: w. inf. and part.
175, R. 4, (f).

odavev w. part. 175, 3.

Xeip dec. 35, R. 2.

xedtdav dec. 35, R. 3.

xoebe dec. 41.

‘Qe prep. 165, 3.

@¢ w. part. 176, R. 2; w.
inf. 186, R. 4.

o¢, that, 180, 2; in order
that, 181; as, when,
183, 2,a; because, 184,
(1); as, 186, 2.

O¢ év 181, 3.

acrep 186, 2.

OcTe 186.

ESS SESS STS SSS See

ee rere

PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINN EY, NEW YORK.

>

a

GERMAN.

i

GWovdvurn’s Complete German Series.

I. WOODBURY’S NEW METHOD WITH
German. $1 50.

11. WOODBURY’S SHORTER COURSE WITH

German. 175 cents.

IT. KKY TO WOODBURY’S SHORTER COURSE.
50 cents.

.
IV. WOODBURY’S ELEMENTARY GERMAN

Reader. ‘75 cents.

DDG LDS OS VW FBV WV B WSS HB-B SF HOH VTLS TVS SWS VVOT FAVOD*A

V. WOODBURY’S ECLECTIC GHRMAN
Reader. $1.

VI. WOODBURY’S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND

English-German Reader. 25 cents.

VIL. WOODBURY’S NEW METHOD FOR GER-

mans to Learn English; or, Neue Methede zur Erlernung der
Englischen Sprache. $1.

Vii, ELWELU’S GERMAN DICTIONARY. A

New and Complete American Dictionary of the English and
German Languages, with the Pronunciation and Accentuation
according to the method of Webster and Heinsius. By Wm.
Odell Elwell. New Stereo. Edition. $1 50.

The attention of those interested in the study of German is specially invited to the
several works composing this series.

They have been subjected to a rigid examination on the part of the most com-
petent judges, and fully tested in the class-room by the most able teachers. Such, in-
deed, is the favor everywhere accorded to them by those fully conversant with’ the
German tongue, and such uniformly their efficiency in the hand of the student, as to
justify the utmost confidence in commending them as “ais decidedly the best
German Course ever yet offered to the public.

‘
A
asegnah eee LRA OEE S STEREO EEEREREEEE REDE OEREE OSLER OT EHS YL SOEUR EHH EE SDE SL OOD OBO Oe WLM Mf Se BA eM I
Oe ee ee ee

j

FB BSF BSS SS SH VSOS FB SOS SHUT VTS SSF SOS OOlS BSS COSTES ISS > yiVeesd 2

6

-
& > SSBB TST Ste

§

== bee

PPO SSS SST SVS UST SVE

PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. .

= ——

WOUDBURY‘S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES.

~~ SS

I. WOODBURY’S NEW METHOD WITH THE

German Language; embracing both the Analytic and Syn-
thetic Modes of Instruction; being a plain and practical way
of acquiring the art of Reading, Speaking and Composing Ger-
man ; containing likewise a choice selection both of Prose and
Poetry; to which a complete Vocabulary is appended. By
W.H. Woodbury. $1 50.

te ied

NOTICES.

From the Watchman and Reflector, (Beston.

“Tis plan is highly approved by competent judges, as simple and philosophical, as
leading to the knowledge of the science and the art of the language, thus making pro
gress thorough.”

From W. H. Allen, President of Girard College.

“The New Methog, with German contains all that is necessary to make the acqui-
sition of German easy and delightful, to the student. Its style is perspicuous, its ar-
rangement natural,tan# its method, combining as it does the practical with the
theoretic, is well adapted to all classes of learners. The ‘ Eclectic German Reader,’
and * Shorter Course with German,’ I ecnsider deserving unqualified praise.”

From O. Faviile, A.M., Principal of Ohio Wes. Female College.

“ After a careful examination of Woodbury’s Method with German, I am convinced
of its superiority over any other that I have seen on that subject.”

rd
;
$
e
J
a
r
2
3
é
{
é
é
|
:
;
4
?
§
é
é
¢
?
|
From Professor J. C. Picard, Illinois College. ;

“{ have examined carefully Woodburys Method, and have no hesiiation in :
pronouncing ‘tt, decidedly superior to any other German grammar of which L have any ¢
$

$

‘

|

|

$

é

rd

:

2

;

?

2

r)

$

+>

knowledge. It'meets the wants which 1 have felt as student and as teacher.”
- S : Rn;
Fipmthe Worcester (Mass.) Palladium.
“The plan of this ait ig philosophical and practical, more so than any other
which has been provided

elements of the study, it pr
reading, speaking and composing German.”

a plain and practical way of acquiring the art of

] fn f the German language. Beginning with the
nis\

From the National Magrazine.
“ Mr. Woodbury’s Text-Books have Pa Zeneral sanciton; they are fast dis-
placing others in our academic institutions. We will guarantce for the preference of
any teacher who wiil test them.”

From A. B. Hyde, A.M., Prof. of Languages in Oneida Con. Sem.

“J have carefully examined Woodbury’s New Method with German, and am de-
lighted. It is far the best scheme of language-learning with which Lhave ever become
*

j ”
acquainted. pe a

€
From A. 8. Hutchens, A.M., Principal of Norwalk (Ohio) Institute.

“Tt is with feelings of real pleasure that we greet Mr. Woodbury’s New
Method w:.h the German, as a valuable addition to our means of acquiring tnis
noble language. He has struck out a new and independent coarse, and has hit
upon 9 happy method of treating the language.”

Qn ~ eset ESS OEE SES SEE ONL SOREL OD SPRATT S BES BST BOH OHSS TS OOU YEU SO 0 BS SEB SS SEE SOS SSS

SOS OS SSS SHS SS SSS Te
As ‘

62 *

-
®
. ’

a serra ciceace vecetltilly
$ PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK.
FRENCH.

3 | a oe

Hrsquelle’s French Series.

* I FASQUELLE’S NEW FRENCH COURSE.
$1 25.

;
Il. A KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN FAS-

quelle’s French Course. 75 cents.

TY. FASQUELLE’S COLLOQUIAL FRENCH

Course. %5 cents.
IV. FASQUELLE’'S TELEMAQUE. 62 1-2 cents.

V. NAPOLEON. BY ALEXANDER DUMAS.
With Notes, &e. by Louis Fasquelle, LL.D. 75 cents.

% “
VI. HOWARD'S AIDS FRENCH COMPOSI-

atte en a en nn en ee

tion. A Companion to Fasq ’s French Course. $1.
VII TALBOT’S FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 63
cents,

I FASQUELLE’S NEW FRENCH COURSE.
$1 25. ;

Fasquelle’s French Course is on the plan of “ Woodbury’s Method with German.”
It pursues the same gradual course, and comprehends the same wide scope of instruc-
tion. It is most eminently practical; works admirably in the class-room. It will de
found everywhere equal alike to the wants of the teacher and the pupil, indicating in
the author a clear and profound knowledge of his native tohgue, added to consummate
skill in the art of imparting it. :

TICES.

(Romczs,
From he aaa
“It is a very copious and elaborate work, supplying the pupil with the material
$
+

ness.”
From the New York Commercial Advertiser.

“This grammar is designed to teach reading, speaking, and writing the French
language, upon the same system which Mr. Woodbury has so successfully applied
to German. Combining the analytic and synthetic principles of instruction, it will
perhaps be more generally useful than any other on the same subject.”

From the Philadelphia Enquirer.

; %

“Fasquelle’s New French Course isSevidently a gyork of more than ordinary
ability, and is the result of much labor and research.” ms

STOTT

:
for all his necessary elementary study, and going over the ground with great thorough-

| ES

+

=

BWI.

PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY;

FASQUELLE’S NEW FREN

—___ ee ____

“ Messrs. Ivison AND PHINNEY? "

“ GENTLEMEN,—I have taught many classes in the French Language, and during my

stay of several years in Europe, I spent one year in Paris for the sake, among other
things, of acquiring the language, and [I do not hesitate to say, that ‘ Fasquelle’s French
Course,’ on ihe plan of Woodbury’s Method with the German, is superior to any other
French grammar [ have met with, for teaching French to those whose mother-tongue
is English. It combines, in an admirable manner, the excellences of the old, or classic,
and the new, or Ollendorfian methods, avoiding the faults of bottle

‘“* As I consider the rapid and thorough acquisition of this language of the ‘noble
French nation,’ whose history is emphatically the history of Europe, and of modern
civilization, as a most desirable accomplishment, I am gratified to forward every im-
provement in the means of acquiring it. I am glad, therefore, to promote, in every
proper way, the circulation of * Dr. Fasquelle’s Course.’

Respectfully, yours, REES <,
JOSEPH WILLIAM JENKS,
Raley at guage in the New Church University
.N

at Urbana, Ohio.

“4 YA

; . 4 ¥
us aug
“4 From Prof. Alp runger, of Cincinnati.

“Having been a teacher of my véfnacular. tongue, the French, for ten years, both
in France and in this country, I consider it my duty to state, that I have used Dr. Fas-
quelle’s New French Grammar ever since its publication, and that, in my opinion, it is
the best book yet prepared to facilitate the acquirement of the French language. It
combines the practical or oral system, with a thorough grammatical course—two things
indispensable in acquiring a living language. I recommend it, therefore, as superior
to the,o!d theoretical grammars, and to those works rejecting grammar altogether. .

“fhe Colloquial Reader, and the edition of Telemaque, prepared by the same

anthor, will be found equally valuable.”

-

Exiract from aletter from the same gentleman.

“Je suis Franeais, /enseigne ma langue a Cincinnati; quand votre grammaire
parut, je m’empressai de l’adopter, car il y avait longtemps que je désirais un ouvrage
qui tout en conservant un caractére pratique, me permit de donner a mes éléves ¢ette
connaissance grammaticaie, sans jiaquelle Ofjpe peut savoir une langue qu’impar-

faitement.”

From Prof. Auge y niladelphia.

“Je cherchais depuis longtemps aay fey plaire aux éléves en les instrui-
sant, et faciliter en méme temps la tack€ du‘ preg J’ai enfin trouve ces diverses
qualités portées 4 un trés haut degré de perféction dans le ‘French Course’ de M.
Fasquelle, et dés ce moment j’ai fait adopter ce livre dans toutes les Institutions ou
je vais, et aussi par tous mes éléves particuliers. Je confesse franchement que de tous
les livres qui me sont pass¢s par les mains, c’est celui que j’ai trouvé le plus par-

faitement caleulé ef arrange pour faire acquérir 4 ceux qui veulent étudier la langue |
francaise, la connaissance a la fois théorique et pratique de cette langue. Je trouve

chaque jour l’occasion de ’apprécier d’avantage.

“Te * French Reader’ du méme auteur est aussi un livre excellent en ce que les
morceaux dont il est composé sont trés bien choisis et sont de nature a intéresser
beaucoup les éléyes; et de plua, son systéme Wexercices de conversation est tres bon
pour exercer la mémoire des-éléves et les“furget™ 2 penser en frangais, Ce qui ¢st le
résultat le plus essentigl et le ge difficile 4 gOtenir. ge Vai aussi adopte pour tutes

r . S

mes classes.”

PSEC CSS STOPS SVS EH ET TWAS

i

e
¢
y
é
?
¢
e
i
é
¢
é
?.
é
é
é
¢
td
é
é
?
@
é

é
f
;
;
|
:
:
&

oie) . , '
PAA

Ch es t 7

ere Hee
EEE ae tthe dosti g
AeA 834 4 Gees bs vig)
SEE 6 8 rae dob fh tM
Fae aren ber ar ey aree a

ose ete Ay"
Pcie ees a
: ete Uh ae CAME: i
Ub Coens bit Ore Eee

a

es Whee

oe OR . ot

a3 Obs hate
at tlt Fee

Pf hay ft:
4s Wat 823

oy

a6 rier a |
ic cee eee! 4
4 (4 if

etry hh

ie

2s

Shae terse
ar hier :

ais
{

'
t
th

Ny) ‘ Ha) 3 Pape ‘ as ied { ;
oetelelitatane horurcce a : ae aa ae

i tite ican ‘ Sie Tapeh eh Aes ass t) An ! : we

i 4 : ; ‘

" ‘

ae
Mp Ay
“OP u)
Sas
hot
ts
Bay
4
* Vee ‘

pe eseiery ary hg 4 bs
Wee hee ate fi¢
EOSIN E: :
, i

ae

co
Ce

eon we aaa
“gk UTR Se ALR

geass
e

=e

pomeene

eM tt Sk Sa Pak i
Ce Cat H eile 4
us 4L Mh tee

ie ed

Stet

oN